Today’s News 12th May 2020

  • London's Trains Packed With Commuters As PM Johnson Lifts 'Stay Home' Order
    London’s Trains Packed With Commuters As PM Johnson Lifts ‘Stay Home’ Order

    Last night, UK PM Boris Johnson laid out the broad strokes of the first phase of Britain’s reopening even as the outbreak inside the country continues to rage. He accompanied the announcement, which focused on 5 simple principles with promises of more details to come on Monday, by unveiling a new slogan “stay alert.”

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Almost immediately, officials in Scotland and Wales criticized the slogan for potentially promoting bad behavior. On Monday, the British tabloid press published some reports suggesting they might have been correct.

    According to Metro UK, many trains on London’s underground train network known popularly as “the Tube” bustling with commuters Monday even as Johnson urged that every Briton who could continue to work from home to continue to do so.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    If commuters had no other choice, Johnson promised trains would be running, but during his speech, he beseeched Britons to travel to work by any other means – either in a private car, or – better yet – by biking or walking – if they absolutely needed to return to the office now that the ‘Stay at Home’ order has been lifted.

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    Unsurprisingly, roads heading into London from the suburbs were also jammed.

    One doctor who spoke with Metro said he worried commuters would ignore the government’s guidance, despite Johnson’s insistence that fines would be substantially increased for anybody caught violating the rules during the second phase.

    “Based on what we have been seeing in London over the past few weeks about some people not following the rules, I am not sure they will follow the two-metre distancing rule when travelling” he said. Traffic in London as some workers encouraged to return to jobs.

    “We have only just got past the peak (of the virus) and I think we need to see a longer period of things being sustained at this level. If we stop social distancing, we are going to see it back in three weeks.”

    Construction worker Peter Osu, 45, complained about the crowding on the tube during an interview with a Metro UK reporter at Waterloo station, where every other bench was taped off: “I am nervous about going back because I have a family and they have been isolating since the start. I feel like I am now putting them at risk. People were sitting close together on the Jubilee line (Tube) and others were having to stand. There was no two-metre spacing. This is the first day, can you imagine what it’s going to look like by the end of the week? ‘It is not right at all. I listened to the Prime Minister yesterday and I thought it does not make sense.”

    That certainly doesn’t bode well for the national figures, as infections have largely been centered in London.


    Tyler Durden

    Tue, 05/12/2020 – 02:45

  • Who Controls The British Government Response To COVID-19, Part 1
    Who Controls The British Government Response To COVID-19, Part 1

    Authored by Vanessa Beeley via Off-Guardian.org,

    “The welfare of humanity is always the alibi of tyrants”

    – Albert Camus

    As Britain hurtles headlong towards neo-feudalist governance with heightened surveillance, micro-management of society and an uptick in fascistic policing of the draconian measures imposed to combat the “threat” of Covid–19, it is perhaps time to analyse the real forces behind this “new normal”.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    There is now serious doubt over the correlation between lockdown and saving lives. Reality is creeping into the Covid–19 dialogue.

    It is becoming apparent that people are getting sick because they are being isolated and effectively living under house arrest, condemned as “murderers” if they so much as think about breaking curfew, being snitched on by neighbours for “gathering” more than two people together in their back gardens.

    The following graph was produced by UK Column and demonstrates the lack of correlation between lockdown and “saving lives”:

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    [click to enlarge]

    The numbers game is acting in many instances as a smokescreen. It is impossible to rely upon “official” statistics, that vary wildly from one website to another: statistics that rely upon unreliable and sporadic testing procedures. and based upon death certificates that misrepresent the actual cause of death as Covid–19, regardless of pre-existing medical conditions.

    Statistics, too, that were set in stone very early on in the development stages, when the perspective was limited and compressed, before a true picture could be seen. The newly emerging statistics are now increasingly undermining initial conclusions and pointing to the futility and negative consequences of lockdown.

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    It is now accepted that there is a high mortality rate among the elderly in care homes in the UK and globally — among the same elderly civilians who are being “asked” to sign DNRs (Do Not Resuscitate) forms.

    This amounts to signing their own death warrant, should they present any of the Covid–19 symptoms. They will be neglected, isolated from their families when at their most vulnerable and left alone to die, even though it is possible that they have not contracted the virus.

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    Instead of offering proactive and positive suggestions that will enable our immune systems to combat the disease, the British Government is ensuring conditions that will suppress immune systems to dangerous levels and create the perfect environment for Covid–19 to flourish.

    Britain has now received an estimated 1.4 million new benefit claims for welfare payments, “about seven times the normal level”. The government has pledged to bail out “80% of pay of workers who are temporarily laid off” but I have personally spoken to self-employed individuals who find themselves falling between the cracks that qualify them for financial support and now face an indefinite period of time without income.

    These measures are being imposed in a country that, since 2012, has seen an exponential growth in child poverty to potentially sub-Victorian levels.

    In March 2019, the number of children living in “absolute poverty” grew by a staggering 200,000 in a twelve-month period, to a total of 3.7 million. How will this number be further impacted by lockdown?

    How did we arrive at this point? Who steered the UK Government towards this questionable and alarmist lockdown policy?

    The unexamined assumption is that conclusions were formed on the basis of sound epidemiological analysis and research by doctors and scientists who care about our welfare.

    The reality is what we will examine in this article. Neil Ferguson, a professor at Imperial College, was responsible for the modelling of a response to Covid–19. His virtual model was recommended by the World Health Organisation (WHO) and it passed through into policy with virtually no scrutiny.

    Ferguson’s dramatic prediction of 500,000 deaths in the UK became the foundation of Boris Johnson’s U-turn from herd immunity to collective quarantine.

    While some understood that Ferguson later reduced his mortality calculations, he actually doubled down on his projections on Twitter, insisting that without drastic lockdown measures being taken, the numbers would be even higher.

    WHO IS NEIL FERGUSON?

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Ferguson is acting director of the Vaccine Impact Modelling Consortium (VIMC), which is based at Imperial College in London. According to Ferguson’s biography on the website, “much of [his] work is applied, informing disease control policy-making by public and global health institutions.”

    The professor who derailed Johnson’s semblance of “herd immunity” strategy is no stranger to controversy and is described as having a “patchy” record of modelling pandemics by one of his academic peers, Professor Michael Thrusfield of Edinburgh University, an expert in animal diseases.

    Ferguson was instrumental in the modelling of the British Government’s response to Foot and Mouth Disease (FMD) in 2001, which Thrusfield describes as “not fit for purpose” (2006) and “seriously flawed” (2012).

    Thrusfield has highlighted the limitations of Ferguson’s mathematical modelling methods, and applied the doubts he expressed over FMD to the current Covid–19 “crisis” response.

    An estimated twelve million animals were slaughtered as a result of Ferguson’s 2001 initiative. The farming community was devastated by suicides and bankruptcies that irretrievably altered the landscape of British agriculture — forcing healthy smallholdings into agri-corporate mergers and empowering the EU central governance in the agricultural sector.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Image copyright: Nick Green

    Insight: Slaughtered on Suspicion, a documentary made by UK Column in 2015, provides a shocking insight into the suffering precipitated by Ferguson’s model and the “new normal” imposed upon Britain’s farming community. The following is a statement made by one of the contributors to the programme:

    12,000,000 animals [Meat & Livestock Commission statistic] were slaughtered but that did not include lambs at foot, aborted lambs, calves or piglets. Further, tens of thousands of chickens were slaughtered in the early months — on welfare grounds, apparently. 88% of all animals slaughtered had not contracted FMD
    [source: Department for Environment, Food and Rural Affairs].

    Great Orton airfield was used to slaughter sheep under the “voluntary” cull: that was anything but voluntary, and farmers not participating were ruthlessly threatened. There was only one mild case of FMD recorded from the thousands of blood tests done at Great Orton
    [source: DEFRA].

    There was a travelator that ran from the slaughter tent at Great Orton to the graves. This ran 16 hours a day, transporting “dead” young lambs. Slaughtermen working there told me that many of the lambs were buried alive.

    The man that advised Blair during this fiasco was, as many will know, Prof. Ferguson of Imperial College. He was [reportedly] sacked by DEFRA late on during the epidemic, but the damage had been done! Prof Ferguson was awarded an OBE in 2002 for his work during FMD 2001.”
    [Emphasis added]

    In 2002, Ferguson predicted that up to 50,000 people would die from variant Creutzfeldt-Jakob disease, better known as “mad cow disease”, increasing to 150,000 if the epidemic expanded to include sheep.

    The reality is:

    Since 1990, 178 people in the United Kingdom have died from vCJD, according to the National CJD Research & Surveillance Unit at the University of Edinburgh.” [2017]

    In 2005, Ferguson claimed that up to 200 million people would be killed by bird-flu or H5N1.

    By early 2006, the WHO had only linked 78 deaths to the virus, out of 147 reported cases.

    In 2009, Ferguson and his team at Imperial College advised the government that swine flu or H1N1 would probably kill 65,000 people in the UK.

    In the end, swine flu claimed the lives of 457 people in the UK.

    Now, in 2020, Ferguson and Imperial College have released a report which claims that half a million Britons and 2.2 million Americans may be killed by Covid–19.

    The report has still not been peer-reviewed; despite this and Ferguson’s glaring record of mathematical sensationalism, the British Government has adopted the devastating socio-economic lockdown that Ferguson has proposed.

    WHY IS THE BRITISH GOVERNMENT SO QUICK TO FOLLOW FERGUSON’S PLAN?

    1. GAVI and Imperial College

    The VIMC is hosted by the Department of Infectious Disease Epidemiology at Imperial College. VIMC is funded by the Bill and Melinda Gates Foundation and by “GAVI, the vaccine alliance” (GAVI’s own title for itself).

    Bill and Melinda Gates began funding Imperial College in 2006, four years before the Gates Foundation launched the Global Health Leaders Launch Decade of Vaccines Collaboration (GHLLDVC) and one year after Ferguson had demonstrated his penchant for overblown projections on mortality numbers from H5N1.

    Up to the end of 2018, the Gates Foundation has sponsored Imperial College with a whopping $185 million.

    That makes Gates the second-largest sponsor, beaten to the top spot on the podium by the Wellcome Trust, a British research charity which began funding Imperial College prior to Ferguson’s FMD débâcle and which, by the end of 2018, had already provided Imperial with over $400 million in funding. I will examine the Wellcome Trust’s connections in part two of this series.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Wellcome trust also has a focus on global immunization programmes.

    The Gates Foundation established the GHLLDVC in collaboration with the WHO, UNICEF and the US National Institute of Allergy and Infectious Diseases (NIAID). The following is taken from the Gates Foundation website:

    The Global Vaccine Action Plan will enable greater coordination across all stakeholder groups – national governments, multilateral organizations, civil society, the private sector and philanthropic organizations — and will identify critical policy, resource, and other gaps that must be addressed to realize the life-saving potential of vaccines.

    The Collaboration’s leadership council at the time included the Director-General of the WHO, the Director of NIAID, the Director of UNICEF, the President of Gates Foundation Global Health, and the Chair of the African Malaria Alliance.

    The steering committee included the Director of Immunisation, the UK Department of Health, and many other representatives from the WHO, UNICEF and associated organisations. It is a cluster of immunisation-focused individuals controlling the policy of world health governing bodies, who claim to be neutral.

    The WHO was nominated as the “directing and coordinating authority on international health within the United Nations system” and was set up to be responsible for “shaping the health research agenda”, among other tasks linked to the policy of global immunisation.

    UNICEF, the “world’s largest provider of vaccines for developing countries” has on-the-ground access to children in over 150 territories and countries (2010).

    We are already seeing the potential for some serious conflict of interest behind the Ferguson model on Covid–19, and this will become even more apparent as the connections are now made to an entire pharmaceutical complex potentially protecting its own interests over any genuine concerns for the health and welfare of global populations.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    “Gavi is the Vaccine Alliance, which brings together public and private sectors with the shared goal of creating equal access to vaccines for children, wherever they live.” [click to enlarge]

    GAVI, the Vaccine Alliance

    GAVI is funded and partnered by the same network that forms the GHLLDVC, with some noticeable additions: the World Bank and donor/implementing country governments. The Gates Foundation is a primary sponsor, but is topped by the British Government, which was instrumental in creating GAVI and is its largest donor.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    While many sectors of British society have seen their living standards plummet, with the elderly severely neglected, a National Health Service in decline and homelessness on the increase, the British Government, via UKAID, has pledged £1.44 billion to GAVI for 2016–2020 and will be hosting the 2020 GAVI pledging conference, which is due to take place in June 2020 to [emphasis added]:

    mobilise at least US$ 7.4 billion in additional resources to protect the next generation with vaccines, reduce disease inequality and create a healthier, safer and more prosperous world.”

    The conference promises to bring together political leaders, civil society, public and private donors, vaccine manufacturers and governments to support GAVI, the vaccine alliance — which boasts that it has “helped vaccinate almost half the world’s children against deadly and debilitating infectious diseases”.

    This claim will be met with praise from the pro-vaccine lobby but concerns over the efficacy and safety of these mass vaccination programmes must be taken into account, particularly when being tested in poorer, developing countries.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Global vaccination market revenue worldwide is projected to reach $59.2 billion by 2020; this number may well increase with the arrival of Covid–19.

    The British Government’s investment in GAVI alongside vaccine promoter Bill Gates must, again, raise the issue of conflicts of interest. To what extent is the British Government protecting its own assets in forcing the lockdown upon its population? Vaccines are set to be a major source of income for the world’s largest pharmaceutical corporations, and the British Government is invested in that lucrative future.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    The GAVI replenishment conference is to be hosted by a British Government whose lockdown policy is effectively shattering the domestic economy and is collectively punishing the most vulnerable in British society.

    When Bill Gates partnered with GAVI twenty years ago, he had been considering where next to focus his philanthropy and was “increasingly focusing on the power and potential of vaccines”.

    It was Gates’ substantial sponsorship that launched GAVI, and ten years later Gates launched his own “vaccine decade” plan for the 2010s.

    The Global Vaccine Action Plan (GVAP) 2012–2020, endorsed by the 194 member states participating in the World Health Assembly (2012), is led by the same members of the Gates “vaccine decade” consortium, promoted by the WHO, and brings together governments, elected officials, health professionals, academia, manufacturers, global agencies, research and development, civil society, media and the private sector — to promote global immunisation.

    This is a profit-driven corporate complex harnessing the “humanitarian” sector to lend credence to the claims of philanthropy, or more realistically, philanthrocapitalism.

    2. GAVI and ID2020

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    A glance at the partner page of the GAVI website reveals that not only is GAVI heavily invested in immunisation campaigns, it is also closely connected to the Gates, Microsoft and Rockefeller Foundation seed-funded ID2020 project (Digital Identity Alliance), which incorporates Accenture, Microsoft (Gates), Ideo-Org and Rockefeller Foundation into the GAVI alliance, all with ties to the ID2020 initiative.

    ID2020 is promoting the concept that there is a need for universal biometric verification, because “to prove who you are is a fundamental and universal human right,” as asserted on the ID2020 website.

    An article by journalist Kurt Nimmo for Global Research dismantles the “humanitarian” alibi for tyranny.

    OffGrid Healthcare explains:

    What they really want is a fully standardized data collection and retrieval format, and cross-border sharing of identities of the entire population of the planet, in order for the stand-alone AI-powered command center to work without a hitch, and for purposes of calculating everyone’s potential contribution, and threat to the system.

    Nimmo describes the potential for Covid–19 to be used as cover for mandatory biometric ID. An April article carried by Reuters confirms the suspicion that biometric ID might soon be introduced, ostensibly to “help verify those who already had the infection and ensure the vulnerable get the vaccine when it is launched”. This may sound perfectly sensible to those who are buying the government strap-lines on Covid–19 but — as Nimmo warns us — “COVID–19 is the perfect Trojan horse for a control freak state itching to not only micromanage the lives of ordinary citizens but also ferret out critics and potential adversaries and punish them as enemies of the state.”

    Prashant Yadav, senior fellow at the US-based Center for Global Development, has said [Emphasis added]:

    Biometric IDs can be a gamechanger. They can help governments target population segments e.g healthcare professionals or the elderly population, verify people who have received vaccination, and have a clear record.

    Such statements can easily be interpreted as the harbingers of mandatory vaccination and the inclusion of biometric ID in the “humanitarian” package.

    Martin Armstrong of Armstrong Economics introduces an even more sinister projection into the mix.

    Armstrong talks about a digital certificate that verifies you have been vaccinated, developed by the Massachusetts Institute of Technology (MIT) and Microsoft, which will merge with ID2020. Covid–19 will be exploited to encourage us to accept digital implants and tracking devices that will enable authorities to keep an eye on us.

    Armstrong argues that just as 9/11 conditioned us to accept X-ray booths at airports, now we will be chipped alongside our dogs and cats.

    At this point, it is worth remembering that UKAID is heavily involved in GAVI, and one presumes they are on board with the digital ID2020 project.

    Rob Laurence, director at UK-based Innovate Identity, presented proposals for the future of digital identity back in June 2019. The UK Government Verify scheme was identified as a fledgling version of the future of digital ID.

    Laurence describes the digital ID “ecosystem” that is emerging: Oliver Dowden, Minister for Implementation at the Cabinet Office (the British Government’s co-ordinating department), will form a new Digital ID Unit to “pave the way for the government to consume digital identities from the private sector”.

    Laurence describes 2020 as the “now-or-never year for government and industry to collaborate” in the creation of an “interoperable digital identity market”.

    Covid19 provides the opportunity that might just fulfil these predictions.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    It is no coincidence that a British start-up — Microsoft-funded Onfido — has recently raised $100 million to “boost its ID technology” to enable the creation of “immunity passports” for governments “battling coronavirus”.

    In December 2019, researchers at MIT created a “microneedle platform using fluorescent microparticles called quantum dots (QD) which can deliver vaccines and at the same time, invisibly encode vaccination history in the skin”: the QDs can be detected by specially adapted smartphones.

    The “new normal” will mean we are tracked and monitored by our own communication systems to an even greater and more intrusive extent.

    THE FUTURE IS BEING MODELLED — BUT NOT FOR OUR BENEFIT

    In part one of this two-part series, my intention has been to raise questions over who is driving the British Government response to Covid–19. Those who have influenced the lockdown policy have very clear conflict of interest question marks over their agenda.

    The scientific clique influencing government decisions is one that is incorporated into a for-profit Big Pharma industrial network which will, undeniably, benefit from the measures being taken by the British Government — a government that is financially embedded in the same complex.

    Why are the views of epidemiologists, doctors, scientists, analysts and health advisors who challenge the lockdown being ignored or censored by the media and by government? Why is the government not widening the circle of advisors to take into account these opposing perspectives that might bring an end to the misery that is a consequence of enforced quarantine?

    Off-Guardian has recorded these views here, here and here. It is also worth following Swiss Propaganda Research for regular updates on emerging analysis and statistics that you will not always find in the mainstream media.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    World Economic Forum report on the psychological experiment that is the Covid19 lockdown.

    Instead, the British Government is effectively endorsing the breeding of distrust in society, the erosion of public assembly, the isolation and state-sanctioned euthanasia of the elderly, the emerging police state, snitch lines, loss of dignity and livelihoods, greater dependency upon the state for survival, depression, suicide and voluntary incarceration.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    An article in New York Times reports on the death toll in care homes which “reflect a global phenomenon” in a world under lockdown.

    The UN has issued a warning that the economic downturn could “kill hundreds of thousands of children in 2020”.

    Gates, the WHO, the British Government and UNICEF are focused on global immunisation for a “pandemic” that is not living up to the alarmist virtual projections sponsored by Gates and the Big Pharma complex, while children really will start to die from malnutrition, neglect and a myriad of consequence of extreme poverty generated by the “steepest downturn since the Great Depression of the 1930s” (IMF).

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    In part two, I will delve deeper into the interlocking interests of state and private corporate sectors that should not be interfering in policies which affect the welfare of British citizens.

    I will reveal how the same players are influencing the media response and ensuring that their interests are given the most powerful platforms to promote their agenda.

    The questions must be asked: Who is really in charge of the Covid–19 response? Who benefits most? Who will suffer most from the long term consequences?

    And who will provide respite from those consequences when the “pandemic” has disappeared from view?

    *  *  *

    This is part one of a two-part article. We’ll be running the second part tomorrow…


    Tyler Durden

    Tue, 05/12/2020 – 02:00

  • US Army To Develop Wearable COVID-19 Detectors
    US Army To Develop Wearable COVID-19 Detectors

    With more than 5,000 service members infected with COVID-19, the Army has issued a contract notice on The System for Award Management (SAM) website, seeking “to develop a wearable diagnostic capability for the pre‐/very early‐symptomatic detection of COVID‐19 infection.”

    The notice titled “MTEC-20-12-COVID-19_Diagnostics is a request for project proposals through the Medical Technology Enterprise Consortium (MTEC), which was posted Monday on SAM. It says ten contracts totaling $25 million could be awarded in weeks to companies that can help the Army rapidly field wearable coronavirus detectors, a move that would be an early warning sign to spreading. 

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    “There is a dire and urgent need for the development of rapid, accurate wearable diagnostics to identify and isolate pre-symptomatic COVID-19 cases and track/prevent the spread of the virus,” the notice read. 

    It said the bidder “must have an established manufacturing capability for the platform and assay kits on a large-scale.” Testing is expected to be “minimally invasive,” and the device should not affect a soldier’s general movement while in the field.

    “Physiologic surveillance for COVID-19 positive individuals that do not yet show clear medical symptoms is an ultimate goal. Physiological signatures, therefore, must produce predictive algorithms that can be tied into validated and relevant antibody/molecular measurements,” the notice went on to say.

    The Army is after a solution that addresses the need for early detection and can determine if someone is a carrier of the virus without showing symptoms. The new device should include several indicators, “but are not limited to, physiological markers of early COVID symptomology—elevated temperature/fever, respiratory difficulty/cough, etc.—antibodies against COVID-19, and molecular biomarkers indicative of COVID-19 exposure.”

    The device must already be proven technology that is “currently been in development or commercially available,” the notice read.

    The Army is in urgent need of these wearable virus detectors before the second coronavirus wave strikes, with some estimates pointing to a surge in cases and deaths later this year.

    President Trump, in late March, signed an executive order that gives him the ability to activate up to one million troops. Considering the Army is now searching for virus detectors that can be easily fielded, does that mean future lockdowns could involve the military testing civilians?


    Tyler Durden

    Tue, 05/12/2020 – 01:00

  • Declassified Doc Exposes FBI Spy Saying Israeli Mossad Spies Need To Be F**king Kicked Out Of USA, Executed
    Declassified Doc Exposes FBI Spy Saying Israeli Mossad Spies Need To Be F**king Kicked Out Of USA, Executed

    Via GreatGameIndia.com,

    According to a secret transcript that was just declassified, one of the spies the FBI deployed against George Papadopoulos said that Israelis and U.S. Jews are “all f—ing spies,” referred to them as “f—ing c—suckers,” and said they should all be executed. The declassified transcript published on Tuesday revealed a “confidential human source” (CHS) from the FBI quoted as saying that Israeli Mossad spies need to be fucking kicked out of USA.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    The 206-page transcript captured conversation between Papadopoulos and an unidentified CHS, seemingly across one continuous episode on November 26, 2016. George Demetrios Papadopoulos is a former member of the foreign policy advisory panel to Donald Trump’s 2016 presidential campaign.

    On October 5, 2017, Papadopoulos pleaded guilty to making false statements to FBI agents about the timing and the possible significance of his contacts in 2016 relating to U.S.–Russia relations and the Donald Trump presidential campaign. He served twelve days in federal prison, then was placed on a 12-month supervised release.

    During his supervised release from prison he participated in the filming of a still-unreleased docuseries. In March 2019, Papadopoulos released his book, Deep State Target: How I Got Caught in the Crosshairs of the Plot to Bring Down President Trump.

    Papadopoulos is code-named “Crossfire Typhoon” (CT) throughout the transcript and referred to as such by an unidentified FBI agent at the beginning of the transcribed recording.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Foreign-policy advisor to U.S. President Donald Trump’s election campaign George Papadopoulos and his wife, Simona Mangiante Papadopoulos, arrive at U.S. District Court for his sentencing in Washington on Sept. 7, 2018. (Mandel Ngan/AFP/Getty Images)

    The CHS is quoted as saying, “No fucking Russians here that aren’t fucking…same with the Israelis they’re all fucking spies. Those fucking cocksuckers. They should execute them all.”

    “I can smell an Israeli from a mile away, dude,” said the CHS in another moment. “I can tell you who is fucking Israeli.”

    The CHS joked about being extradited to Israel. “Yeah I’m-I’m saying you probably fucking…you’re probably working out a deal with them [Mossad] motherfuckers on me [to] be fucking extradited to Israel.”

    When Papadopoulos said he dated an Israeli girl, the CHS disparaged Russian Jews as “fake Jews.”

    PAPADOPOULOS: I-I was actually dating a girl, the numb-, the assistant to the number three Israeli Embassy.

    CHS: You were dating?

    PAPADOPOULOS: Yeah.

    CHS: Assistant.

    PAPADOPOULOS: She was the assistant.

    CHS: What the fuck you were dating her for?

    PAPADOPOULOS: She was probably was Mossad and that, that’s why she took a [UI].

    PAPADOPOULOS: Russian Jews.

    CHS: Russian Jew, those fake Jews.

    PAPADOPOULOS: No, but who was born and raised in Israel.

    CHS: Yeah, she’s a fake Jew.

    The FBI claimed to have begun surveillance of the Trump campaign on July 31, 2016. Papadopoulos told the Daily Caller that the CHS is named Jeffrey Wiseman.

    Last year, one of the most high-profile Israeli spy network in the US was brought down by American intelligence. This secret high-society elite group was recently exposed on the global stage with the arrest of the sex-trafficking kingpin Jeffrey Epstein.

    Although, Epstein is portrayed as just another billionaire pedophile, he was actually a high-class Israeli spy. He used perverted sexual desires as a cover to corrupt and infiltrate higher echelons of power in government and businesses (including in India). This is the source of political sex-scandals and video-tapes which surface now and then when someone refuses to obey orders.

    Read the full transcript below:


    Tyler Durden

    Tue, 05/12/2020 – 00:05

  • Fed Will Start Buying Bond ETFs Tuesday; Blackrock To Make Over $15 Million In Fees
    Fed Will Start Buying Bond ETFs Tuesday; Blackrock To Make Over $15 Million In Fees

    Last Monday, in response to a Gundlach tweet in which the bond king said “I am told the Fed has not actually bought any Corporate Bonds via the shell company set up to circumvent the restrictions of the Federal Reserve Act of 1913” the New York Fed announced on its website that it expects to begin purchasing eligible ETFs – most notably the LQD and JNK – as part of its emergency lending programs in “early May.”

    And yet, day passed, and then another, and another, and suddenly early May turned into mid May and… still nothing.

    Until today when the Fed announced late in the day that the facility designed to purchase eligible corporate debt from investors will launch on May 12, bringing the most controversial part of the US central bank’s emergency coronavirus lending program – one which not even Bernanke dared to activate at the depths of the financial crisis perhaps realizing that there would be no extrication from that particular moral hazard – online following weeks of anticipation.

    The Fed’s Secondary Market Corporate Credit Facility “will begin purchases of exchange-traded funds (ETFs) on May 12” the New York Fed website said, nearly two months after it was was first announced in late March, and served a key role in keeping financial markets relatively calm since then.

    The NY Fed then again lists the ETFs that will be eligible for purchase:

    As specified in the term sheet, the SMCCF may purchase U.S.-listed ETFs whose investment objective is to provide broad exposure to the market for U.S. corporate bonds. The preponderance of ETF holdings will be of ETFs whose primary investment objective is exposure to U.S. investment-grade corporate bonds, and the remainder will be in ETFs whose primary investment objective is exposure to U.S. high-yield corporate bonds. The SMCCF will consider several additional factors in determining which ETFs will be eligible for purchase. Those considerations include: the composition of investment-grade and non-investment-grade rated debt, the management style, the amount of debt held in depository institutions, the average tenor of underlying debt, the total assets under management, the average daily trading volume, and leverage, if any.

    As the Fed further adds:

    To expedite implementation, the SMCCF will begin by transacting with Primary Dealers that meet the Eligible Seller criteria and that have completed the Seller Certification Materials. Additional counterparties will be included as Eligible Sellers under the SMCCF, subject to adequate due diligence and compliance work.

    We previously listed all the ETFs that the Fed will likely acquire via Blackrock.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    And speaking of Blackrock, the Fed also posted to its website the 66-page investment management agreement with BlackRock, the world’s biggest manager, which is incidentally also the world’s biggest manager of ETFs, and which last month said explicitly that it would frontrun the Fed’s bond purchases, layering conflicts of interest upon conflict of interest, but who cares any more.

    The document offered more information on the strategy the Fed would pursue:

    Corporate-debt buying, including via ETFs, will occur in three stages, according to the agreement: a “stabilization” phase, an “ongoing monitoring” phase, and a “reduction in support” phase.

    “Purchases will be focused on reducing the broad-based deterioration of liquidity seen in March 2020 to levels that correspond more closely to prevailing economic conditions,” the document said. It listed an array of metrics that would guide investments, including transaction costs, bid-ask spreads, credit spreads, volatility and “qualitative market color.”

    Once market functioning measures return to levels that are more closely, but not fully, aligned with levels that correspond to prevailing economic conditions, broad-based purchases will continue at a reduced, steady pace to maintain these conditions.”

    The document also explained how much the Fed will pay Blackrock for engaging in perfectly risk-free purchases of ETFs at the Fed’s command. In other words, not only will Blackrock frontrun the Fed, but the Fed will pay Blackrock for the privilege.

    Blackrock’s compensation for doing something the NY Fed’s desk is perfectly capable of doing itself (furthermore, since it only has to buy and never has to sell, the Fed can just hire any millennial on tweetdeck – they have precisely the required skill set; now if selling is ever required the Fed may have trouble finding traders that actually are familiar with that particular skill, but we digress). Here the key fees are:

    Fixed SMCCF Program Management Fee, as follows:

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    An AUM-Based SMCCF Program Management Fee, as follows:

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    An SMCCF Asset Management Fee, as follows:

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    And an SMCCF Cash Management Fee:

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    So in addition to earning over $5MM just for just sitting there, looking pretty over for the next 12 months (and this program will last far, far longer than that), BlackRock will also make – assuming only payments under the AUM-Based SMCCF Program Management fee and the SMCFF Asset Management Fee and ignoring any cash AUM-linked payments – approximately $7.5 million on the former, as asset purchases cap $350BN, and another $3.5 million on the latter, with a $250BN cap. In short, Blackrock is set to make over $15 million for simply waving bond ETFs in on behalf of the Federal Reserve.

    Since such a role has neither custody risk nor transaction risk, we look forward to the Congressional hearings in which Larry Fink, that noble crusader for the common man, explains why US taxpayers had to pay him billions and billions for doing, well, pretty much nothing.

    Oh, and all of this of course excludes all the profits that Blackrock will pocket from simply purchasing ETFs on its own account ahead of the Fed, something which Blackrock’s head of global allocation team, Rick Reider last month admitted the world’s largest asset manager will do.

    Below we attach the full Schedule D (pdf link here) listing all the payments that will be due to Blackrock, so that readers can be shocked at their own pace.


    Tyler Durden

    Mon, 05/11/2020 – 23:31

  • "OBAMAGATE!" Trump Tweets Tucker Carlson's Crushing Breakdown Why The Former President Should Be Panicking
    “OBAMAGATE!” Trump Tweets Tucker Carlson’s Crushing Breakdown Why The Former President Should Be Panicking

    Why is former President Obama calling forth all his defensive resources now?  Why did former national security advisor Susan Rice write her CYA letter?  Why have republicans in congress not been willing to investigate the true origins of political surveillance?  What is the reason for so much anger, desperation and opposition from a variety of interests?

    In a single word in a single tweet tonight, President Trump explained it perfectly – with help from Fox News’ Tucker Carlson’s detailed breakdown” “OBAMAGATE!”

    As around 2:15 in the clip above, Carlson explains that then president of the United States Barack Obama turned to the head of the FBI – the most powerful law enforcement official in America, and said “Continue to secretly investigate my chief political rival so I can act against him.”

    Comey’s response? “Yes, sir.”

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Having watched that clip in detail, here is ‘sundance’ from TheConservativeTreehouse.com laying out the details surrounding political surveillance in the era of President Obama…

    With the release of recent transcripts and the declassification of material from within the IG report, the Carter Page FISA and Flynn documents showing FBI activity, there is a common misconception about why the intelligence apparatus began investigating the Trump campaign in the first place.  Why was Donald Trump considered a threat?

    In this outline we hope to provide some fully cited deep source material that will explain the origin; and specifically why those inside the Intelligence Community began targeting Trump and using Confidential Human Sources against campaign officials.

    During the time-frame of December 2015 through April 2016 the NSA database was being exploited by contractors within the intelligence community doing unauthorized searches.

    On March 9, 2016, oversight personnel doing a review of FBI system access were alerted to thousands of unauthorized search queries of specific U.S. persons within the NSA database.

    NSA Director Admiral Mike Rogers was made aware.

    Subsequently NSA Director Rogers initiated a full compliance review of the system to identify who was doing the searches; & what searches were being conducted.

    On April 18, 2016, following the preliminary audit results, Director Rogers shut down all FBI contractor access to the database after he learned FISA-702 “about”(17) and “to/from”(16) search queries were being done without authorization. Thus begins the first discovery of a much bigger background story.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    When you compile the timeline with the people involved; and the specific wording of the resulting review, which was then delivered to the FISA court; and overlay the activity that was taking place in the GOP primary; what we discover is a process where the metadata collected by the NSA was being searched for political opposition research and surveillance.

    Additionally, tens-of-thousands of searches were identified by the FISA court as likely extending much further than the compliance review period: “while the government reports it is unable to provide a reliable estimate of the non compliant queries since 2012, there is no apparent reason to believe the November 2015 [to] April 2016 period coincided with an unusually high error rate”.

    In short, during the Obama administration the NSA database was continually used to conduct surveillance. This is the critical point that leads to understanding the origin of “Spygate”, as it unfolded in the Spring and Summer of 2016.

    It was the discovery of the database exploitation and the removal of access as a surveillance tool that created their initial problem. Here’s how we can tell.

    Initially in December 2015 there were 17 GOP candidates and all needed to be researched.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    However, when Donald Trump won New Hampshire, Nevada and South Carolina the field was significantly whittled. Trump, Cruz, Rubio, Kasich and Carson remained.

    On Super Tuesday, March 2, 2016, Donald Trump won seven states (VT, AR, VA, GA, AL, TN, MA) it was then clear that Trump was the GOP frontrunner with momentum to become the presumptive nominee. On March 5th, Trump won Kentucky and Louisiana; and on March 8th Trump won Michigan, Mississippi and Hawaii.

    The next day, March 9th, NSA security alerts warned internal oversight personnel that something sketchy was going on.

    This timing is not coincidental. As FISA Judge Rosemary Collyer later wrote in her report, “many of these non-compliant queries involved the use of the same identifiers over different date ranges.” Put another way: attributes belonging to a specific individual(s) were being targeted and queried, unlawfully. Given what was later discovered, it seems obvious the primary search target, over multiple date ranges, was Donald Trump.

    There were tens-of-thousands of unauthorized search queries; and as Judge Collyer stated in her report, there is no reason to believe the 85% non compliant rate was any different from the abuse of the NSA database going back to 2012.

    As you will see below the NSA database was how political surveillance was being conducted during Obama’s second term in office. However, when the system was flagged, and when NSA Director Mike Rogers shut down “contractor” access to the system, the system users needed to develop another way to get access.

    Mike Rogers shuts down access on April 18, 2016. On April 19, 2016, Fusion-GPS founder Glenn Simpson’s wife, Mary Jacoby visits the White House. Immediately thereafter, the DNC and Clinton campaign contract Fusion GPS… who then hire Christopher Steele.

    Knowing it was federal “contractors”, outside government with access to the system, doing the unauthorized searches, the question becomes: who were the contractors?

    The possibilities are quite vast. Essentially anyone the FBI or intelligence apparatus was using could have participated. Crowdstrike was a known FBI contractor; they were also contracted by the DNC. Shawn Henry was the former head of the FBI office in DC and is now the head of Crowdstrike; a rather dubious contractor for the government and a politically connected data security and forensic company. James Comey’s special friend Daniel Richman was an unpaid FBI “special employee” with security access to the database. Nellie Ohr began working for Fusion-GPS on the Trump project in November 2015 and she was a CIA contractor; and it’s entirely likely Glenn Simpson or people within his Fusion-GPS network were also contractors for the intelligence community.

    Remember the Sharyl Attkisson computer intrusions? It’s all part of this same network; Attkisson even names Shawn Henry as a defendant in her ongoing lawsuit.

    All of the aforementioned names, and so many more, held a political agenda in 2016.

    It seems likely if the NSA flags were never triggered then the contracted system users would have continued exploiting the NSA database for political opposition research; which would then be funneled to the Clinton team. However, once the unauthorized flags were triggered, the system users (including those inside the official intelligence apparatus) needed to find another back-door to continue… Again, the timing becomes transparent.

    Immediately after NSA flags were raised March 9th; the same intelligence agencies began using confidential human sources (CHS’s) to run into the Trump campaign. By activating intelligence assets like Joseph Mifsud and Stefan Halper the IC (CIA, FBI) and system users had now created an authorized way to continue the same political surveillance operations.

    When Donald Trump hired Paul Manafort on March 28, 2016, it was a perfect scenario for those doing the surveillance. Manafort was a known entity to the FBI and was previously under investigation. Paul Manafort’s entry into the Trump orbit was perfect for Glenn Simpson to sell his prior research on Manafort as a Trump-Russia collusion script two weeks later.

    The shift from “unauthorized exploitation of the NSA database” to legally authorized exploitation of the NSA database was now in place. This was how they continued the political surveillance. This is the confluence of events that originated “spygate”, or what officially blossomed into the FBI investigation known as “Crossfire Hurricane” on July 31.

    If the NSA flags were never raised; and if Director Rogers had never initiated the compliance audit; and if the political contractors were never blocked from access to the database; they would never have needed to create a legal back-door, a justification to retain the surveillance. The political operatives/contractors would have just continued the targeted metadata exploitation.

    Once they created the surveillance door, Fusion-GPS was then needed to get the FBI known commodity of Chris Steele activated as a pipeline. Into that pipeline all system users pushed opposition research. However, one mistake from the NSA database extraction during an “about” query shows up as a New Yorker named Michael Cohen in Prague.

    That misinterpreted data from a FISA-702 “about query” is then piped to Steele and turns up inside the dossier; it was the wrong Michael Cohen. It wasn’t Trump’s lawyer, it was an art dealer from New York City with the same name; the same “identifier”.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    A DEEP DIVE – How Did It Work?

    Start by reviewing the established record from the 99-page FISC opinion rendered by Presiding Judge Rosemary Collyer on April 26, 2017. Review the details within the FISC opinion.

    I would strongly urge everyone to read the FISC report (full pdf below) because Judge Collyer outlines how the DOJ, which includes the FBI, had an “institutional lack of candor” in responses to the FISA court. In essence, the Obama administration was continually lying to the FISA court about their activity, and the rate of fourth amendment violations for illegal searches and seizures of U.S. persons’ private information for multiple years.

    Unfortunately, due to intelligence terminology Judge Collyer’s brief and ruling is not an easy read for anyone unfamiliar with the FISA processes. That complexity also helps the media avoid discussing it; and as a result most Americans have no idea the scale and scope of the Obama-era surveillance issues. So we’ll try to break down the language.

    Top Secret FISA Court Order… by The Conservative Treehouse on Scribd

    For the sake of brevity and common understanding CTH will highlight the most pertinent segments showing just how systemic and troublesome the unlawful electronic surveillance was.

    Early in 2016 NSA Director Admiral Mike Rogers was alerted of a significant uptick in FISA-702(17) “About” queries using the FBI/NSA database that holds all metadata records on every form of electronic communication.

    The NSA compliance officer alerted Admiral Mike Rogers who then initiated a full compliance audit on/around March 9th, 2016, for the period of November 1st, 2015, through May 1st, 2016.

    While the audit was ongoing, due to the severity of the results that were identified, Admiral Mike Rogers stopped anyone from using the 702(17) “about query” option, and went to the extraordinary step of blocking all FBI contractor access to the database on April 18, 2016 (keep these dates in mind).

    Here are some significant segments:

    The key takeaway from these first paragraphs is how the search query results were exported from the NSA database to users who were not authorized to see the material. The FBI contractors were conducting searches and then removing, or ‘exporting’, the results. Later on, the FBI said all of the exported material was deleted.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Searching the highly classified NSA database is essentially a function of filling out search boxes to identify the user-initiated search parameter and get a return on the search result.

    ♦ FISA-702(16) is a search of the system returning a U.S. person (“702”); and the “16” is a check box to initiate a search based on “To and From“. Example, if you put in a date and a phone number and check “16” as the search parameter the user will get the returns on everything “To and From” that identified phone number for the specific date. Calls, texts, contacts etc. Including results for the inbound and outbound contacts.

    ♦ FISA-702(17) is a search of the system returning a U.S. person (702); and the “17” is a check box to initiate a search based on everything “About” the search qualifier. Example, if you put a date and a phone number and check “17” as the search parameter the user will get the returns of everything about that phone. Calls, texts, contacts, geolocation (or gps results), account information, user, service provider etc. As a result, 702(17) can actually be used to locate where the phone (and user) was located on a specific date or sequentially over a specific period of time which is simply a matter of changing the date parameters.

    And that’s just from a phone number.

    Search an ip address “about” and read all data into that server; put in an email address and gain everything about that account. Or use the electronic address of a GPS enabled vehicle (about) and you can withdraw more electronic data and monitor in real time. Search a credit card number and get everything about the account including what was purchased, where, when, etc. Search a bank account number, get everything about transactions and electronic records etc. Just about anything and everything can be electronically searched; everything has an electronic ‘identifier’.

    The search parameter is only limited by the originating field filled out. Names, places, numbers, addresses, etc. By using the “About” parameter there may be thousands or millions of returns. Imagine if you put “@realdonaldtrump” into the search parameter? You could extract all following accounts who interacted on Twitter, or Facebook etc. You are only limited by your imagination and the scale of the electronic connectivity.

    As you can see below, on March 9th, 2016, internal auditors noted the FBI was sharing “raw FISA information, including but not limited to Section 702-acquired information”.

    In plain English the raw search returns were being shared with unknown entities without any attempt to “minimize” or redact the results. The person(s) attached to the results were named and obvious. There was no effort to hide their identity or protect their 4th amendment rights of privacy; and database access was from the FBI network:

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    But what’s the scale here? This is where the story really lies.

    Read this next excerpt carefully.

    The operators were searching “U.S Persons”. The review of November 1, 2015, to May 1, 2016, showed “eighty-five percent of those queries” were unlawful or “non compliant”.

    85% !! “representing [redacted number]”.

    We can tell from the space of the redaction the number of searches were between 10,000 and 99,999 [six digits]. If we take the middle number of 50,000 – a non compliant rate of 85 percent means 42,500 unlawful searches out of 50,000.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    The [six digit] amount (more than 10,000, less than 99,999), and 85% error rate, was captured in a six month period, November 2015 to April 2016.

    Also notice this very important quote: “many of these non-compliant queries involved the use of the same identifiers over different date ranges.” This tells us the system users were searching the same phone number, email address, electronic identifier, repeatedly over different dates.

    Specific person(s) were being tracked/monitored.

    Additionally, notice the last quote: “while the government reports it is unable to provide a reliable estimate of” these non lawful searches “since 2012, there is no apparent reason to believe the November 2015 [to] April 2016 coincided with an unusually high error rate”.

    That means the 85% unlawful FISA-702(16)(17) database abuse has likely been happening since 2012.

    2012 is an important date in this database abuse because a network of specific interests is assembled that also shows up in 2016/2017:

    • Who was 2012 FBI Director? Robert Mueller, who was selected by the FBI group to become special prosecutor in 2017.

    • Who was Mueller’ chief-of-staff? Aaron Zebley, who became one of the lead lawyers on the Mueller special counsel.

    • Who was 2012 CIA Director? John Brennan (remember the ouster of Gen Petraeus)

    • Who was ODNI? James Clapper.

    • Remember, the NSA is inside the Pentagon (Defense Dept) command structure. Who was Defense Secretary? Ash Carter

    Who wanted NSA Director Mike Rogers fired in 2016? Brennan, Clapper and Carter.

    And finally, who wrote and signed-off-on the January 2017 Intelligence Community Assessment and then lied about the use of the Steele Dossier? The same John Brennan, and James Clapper along with James Comey.

    Tens of thousands of searches over four years (since 2012), and 85% of them are illegal. The results were extracted for?…. (I believe this is all political opposition use; and I’ll explain why momentarily.)

    OK, that’s the stunning scale; but who was involved?

    Private contractors with access to “raw FISA information that went well beyond what was necessary to respond to FBI’s requests“:

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    And as noted, the contractor access was finally halted on April 18th, 2016.

    [Coincidentally (or likely not), the wife of Fusion-GPS founder Glenn Simpson, Mary Jacoby, goes to the White House the very next day on April 19th, 2016.]

    None of this is conspiracy theory.

    All of this is laid out inside this 99-page opinion from FISC Presiding Judge Rosemary Collyer who also noted that none of this FISA abuse was accidental in a footnote on page 87: “deliberate decisionmaking“:

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    This specific footnote, if declassified, could be a key. Note the phrase: “([redacted] access to FBI systems was the subject of an interagency memorandum of understanding entered into [redacted])”, this sentence has the potential to expose an internal decision; withheld from congress and the FISA court by the Obama administration; that outlines a process for access and distribution of surveillance data.

    Note: “no notice of this practice was given to the FISC until 2016“, that is important.

    Summary: 

    The FISA court identified and quantified tens-of-thousands of search queries of the NSA/FBI database using the FISA-702(16)(17) system. The database was repeatedly used by persons with contractor access who unlawfully searched and extracted the raw results without redacting the information and shared it with an unknown number of entities.

    The outlined process certainly points toward a political spying and surveillance operation; and we are not the only one to think that’s what this system is being used for.

    Back in 2017 when House Intelligence Committee Chairman Devin Nunes was working to reauthorize the FISA legislation, Nunes wrote a letter to ODNI Dan Coats about this specific issue:

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    SIDEBAR:

    To solve the issue, well, actually attempt to ensure it never happened again, NSA Director Admiral Mike Rogers eventually took away the “About” query option permanently in 2017. NSA Director Rogers said the abuse was so inherent there was no way to stop it except to remove the process completely. [SEE HERE] Additionally, the NSA database operates as a function of the Pentagon, so the Trump administration went one step further. On his last day as NSA Director Admiral Mike Rogers -together with ODNI Dan Coats- put U.S. cyber-command, the database steward, fully into the U.S. military as a full combatant command. [SEE HERE] Unfortunately it didn’t work as shown by the 2018 FISC opinion rendered by FISC Judge James Boasberg [SEE HERE]

    There is little doubt the FISA-702(16)(17) database system was used by Obama-era officials, from 2012 through April 2016, as a way to spy on their political opposition.

    Quite simply there is no other intellectually honest explanation for the scale and volume of database abuse that was taking place; and keep in mind these searches were all ruled to be unlawful. Searches for repeated persons over a period time that were not authorized.

    When we reconcile what was taking place and who was involved, then the actions of the exact same principle participants take on a jaw-dropping amount of clarity.

    All of the action taken by CIA Director Brennan, FBI Director Comey, ODNI Clapper and Defense Secretary Ashton Carter make sense. Including their effort to get NSA Director Mike Rogers fired.

    Everything after March 9th, 2016, had a dual purpose: (1) done to cover up the weaponization of the FISA database. [Explained Here] Spygate, Russia-Gate, the Steele Dossier, and even the 2017 Intelligence Community Assessment (drawn from the dossier and signed by the above) were needed to create a cover-story and protect themselves from discovery of this four year weaponization, political surveillance and unlawful spying. Even the appointment of Robert Mueller as special counsel makes sense; he was FBI Director when this began. And (2) they needed to keep the surveillance going.

    The beginning decision to use FISA(702) as a domestic surveillance and political spy mechanism appears to have started in/around 2012. Perhaps sometime shortly before the 2012 presidential election and before John Brennan left the White House and moved to CIA. However, there was an earlier version of data assembly that preceded this effort.

    Political spying 1.0 was actually the weaponization of the IRS. This is where the term “Secret Research Project” originated as a description from the Obama team. It involved the U.S. Department of Justice under Eric Holder and the FBI under Robert Mueller. It never made sense why Eric Holder requested over 1 million tax records via CD ROM, until overlaying the timeline of the FISA abuse:

    The IRS sent the FBI “21 disks constituting a 1.1 million page database of information from 501(c)(4) tax exempt organizations, to the Federal Bureau of Investigation.” The transaction occurred in October 2010 (link)

    Why disks? Why send a stack of DISKS to the DOJ and FBI when there’s a pre-existing financial crimes unit within the IRS. All of the evidence within this sketchy operation came directly to the surface in early spring 2012.

    The IRS scandal was never really about the IRS, it was always about the DOJ asking the IRS for the database of information. That is why it was transparently a conflict when the same DOJ was tasked with investigating the DOJ/IRS scandal. Additionally, Obama sent his chief-of-staff Jack Lew to become Treasury Secretary; effectively placing an ally to oversee/cover-up any issues. As Treasury Secretary Lew did just that.

    Lesson Learned – It would appear the Obama administration learned a lesson from attempting to gather a large opposition research database operation inside a functioning organization large enough to have some good people that might blow the whistle.

    The timeline reflects a few months after realizing the “Secret Research Project” was now worthless (June 2012), they focused more deliberately on a smaller network within the intelligence apparatus and began weaponizing the FBI/NSA database. If our hunch is correct, that is what will be visible in footnote #69:

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    How this all comes together in 2019/2020

    Fusion GPS was not hired in April 2016 just to research Donald Trump. As shown in the evidence provided by the FISC, the intelligence community was already doing surveillance and spy operations. The Obama administration already knew everything about the Trump campaign, and were monitoring everything by exploiting the FISA database.

    However, after the NSA alerts in/around March 9th, 2016, and particularly after the April 18th shutdown of contractor access, the Obama intelligence community needed Fusion GPS to create a legal albeit ex post facto justification for the pre-existing surveillance and spy operations. Fusion GPS gave them that justification in the Steele Dossier.

    That’s why the FBI small group, which later transitioned into the Mueller team, were so strongly committed to and defending the formation of the Steele Dossier and its dubious content.

    The Steele Dossier, an outcome of the Fusion contract, contains three insurance policy purposes: (1) the cover-story and justification for the pre-existing surveillance operation (protect Obama); and (2) facilitate the FBI counterintelligence operation against the Trump campaign (assist Clinton); and (3) continue the operation with a special counsel (protect both).

    An insurance policy would be needed. The Steele Dossier becomes the investigative virus the FBI wanted inside the system. To get the virus into official status, they used the FISA application as the delivery method and injected it into Carter Page. The FBI already knew Carter Page; essentially Carter Page was irrelevant, what they needed was the FISA warrant and the Dossier in the system {Go Deep}.

    The Obama intelligence community needed Fusion GPS to give them a plausible justification for already existing surveillance and spy operations. Fusion-GPS gave them that justification and evidence for a FISA warrant with the Steele Dossier.

    Ultimately that’s why the Steele Dossier was so important; without it, the FBI would not have a tool that Mueller needed to continue the investigation of President Trump. In essence by renewing the FISA application, despite them knowing the underlying dossier was junk, the FBI was keeping the surveillance gateway open for Team Mueller to exploit later on.

    Additionally, without the Steele Dossier the DOJ and FBI are naked with their FISA-702 abuse as outlined by John Ratcliffe.

    Thankfully we know U.S. Attorney John Durham has talked to NSA Director Mike Rogers. In this video Rogers explains how he was notified of what was happening and what he did after the notification.

    * * *

    After tonight’s tweets from President Trump, we should expect a full-court press from ‘the resistance’ to distract from the cracks appearing in the former President’s halo of invincibility…

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>


    Tyler Durden

    Mon, 05/11/2020 – 23:25

  • New Orleans Uses Prison Labor After Garbagemen Go On Strike
    New Orleans Uses Prison Labor After Garbagemen Go On Strike

    Dozens of striking New Orleans garbagemen who are demanding hazard pay and paid sick leave due to the coronavirus have been replaced by inmates from a nearby prison, according to Payday Report. The workers were employed by the temp service People Ready, which contracts with New Orleans Metro Disposal.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    “$10.25 to pick up trash – come on now. It’s contaminated now with coronavirus,” strike leader Gregory Woods told the outlet.

    Instead of meeting their demands, which include proper safety equipment, $15 an hour, and fixing broken trucks, the city is using workers from the prison in nearby Livingston Parish.

    “Metro Services Group has long been an advocate of helping persons who had been incarcerated return to society in a meaningful and productive way,” said the city’s sanitation services in a statement. “Metro makes no apologies for this policy as a core element of our commitment to being good corporate citizens.”

    Under state rules, prison inmates, employed by Metro Services, will be paid only 13% of what garbage workers, who only make $10.25-an-hour, are being paid.

    “I really don’t like it,” says Woods. “They are really trying to use those dudes to do our job, and they paying them way less than they were paying us.

    “They are trying to show the world that people will still do our job without giving us the proper protective equipment,” says Woods. “All of it is a hustle for them, a scam for them. They saving money that’s all they are doing – that’s all it is”. –Payday Report

    “We need them to provide us with the proper PPE — to all the workers immediately and consistently and on a daily basis,” said fired worker Jonathan Edward, who added “Provide us with our hazardous pay due to the pandemic of COVID-19.”

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Worker Harold Peters says he wants his job back if they can reach an agreement.

    “We’re out here. We’re doing our job. We take pride in our work,” he said, adding “Actually, we can’t wait to get back to work. We just want to be compensated.”


    Tyler Durden

    Mon, 05/11/2020 – 23:05

  • As COVID-19 Spreads In Meat Plants, 200 USDA Inspectors Test Positive
    As COVID-19 Spreads In Meat Plants, 200 USDA Inspectors Test Positive

    Authored by Lillianna Byington of FoodDive,

    Summary:

    • A U.S. Agriculture Department spokesperson told Food Dive that 197 field employees in the Food Safety and Inspection Service ​are absent from work after testing positive for coronavirus and 120 FSIS employees are under self-quarantine due to contact with or exposure to COVID-1​9 as of May 5.

    • The American Federation of Government Employees, a union representing 6,500 federal food inspectors, said three inspectors have died in Illinois, Mississippi and New York, Meat and Poultry reported

    • FSIS has taken the unprecedented step of protecting its employees by allowing those inspectors in high-risk health categories to self-certify with their supervisor and excusing them from inspection duties until the risk from COVID-19 decreases or is mitigated,” the spokesperson told Food Dive. “Additionally, FSIS now has enough masks and face coverings on hand to keep our inspection personnel supplied for the next few months. Despite these numbers our dedicated personnel are still meeting all of their inspection responsibilities so that consumers can continue to enjoy a safe supply of meat and poultry products.”

    As coronavirus has spread rapidly among meat plants across the country, it’s not just the workers that are getting infected. Many people have strongly criticized the industry’s response for waiting too long to implement safety precautions and close processing plants as thousands have tested positive for coronavirus and at least 20 workers have died. But the inspectors checking these facilities and their products are not immune to the virus either. 

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    FSIS inspectors are classified as essential workers, so they have continued to travel to monitor these facilities. But as the plants become coronavirus hot spots, reports have shown the inspectors haven’t been able to protect themselves adequately. 

    A FSIS inspector interviewed in Government Executive said moving inspectors exposed to an outbreak at one plant to another location isn’t safe because they could then be coronavirus carriers and further the spread.

    Last month, Politico reported many of the inspectors were expected to find their own protective gear since USDA wasn’t able to secure face masks for all of its workers. In April, USDA said it would give a $50 reimbursement for inspectors to find their own, according to Politico. But now the department says it has enough masks.

    Since more than 300 inspectors have either tested positive or self quarantined, that can make it challenging to inspect every plant. Recent closures, however, could make that easier. More than 20 meatpacking plants, including facilities run by Tyson Foods, JBS USA, Smithfield Foods and Cargill​, have closed temporarily or indefinitely following pressure from local authorities and their own workforce. But as plants start to reopen, the smaller FSIS workforce could weigh on meat processors. 

    Two weeks ago, President Donald Trump signed an executive order declaring meat plants as “critical infrastructure” using the Defense Production Act to keep these facilities open and help prevent shortages. But as plants reopen, inspectors will need to travel to them and there is still risk of the virus continuing to spread.

    The new executive order puts USDA Secretary Sonny Perdue in charge of coordinating with companies to reopen or continue operations during the pandemic. Perdue previously said he anticipated plants would reopen in “days not weeks.” Already, a major beef and pork plant for Tyson reopened with limited production last week after nearly 900 of its workers tested positive. A Smithfield plant in Sioux Falls, South Dakota, where hundreds contracted the virus, also reopened with limited staff last week. 

    Several labor groups have criticized the USDA, asking if it can’t protect its own employees from the virus, how can it protect workers? ​”The health and safety of federal inspectors and plant workers is in the hands of an industry that the administration is now pressuring to stay open, no matter the costs,” Paula Schelling, acting president of the American Federation of Government Employees Council 45, which represents 6,500 federal food inspectors, said in a release

    While the Centers for Disease Control and Prevention and Occupational Safety and Health Administration created guidelines calling for distancing and other safety measures, there are no requirements forcing companies to reconfigure facilities. And if inspectors continue to catch the virus traveling from plant to plant, they could risk spreading it themselves, or if even more get sick, then there may not be enough inspectors to properly check each facility. It’s just the latest hurdle to challenge the meat industry hit hard during the recent pandemic.


    Tyler Durden

    Mon, 05/11/2020 – 22:45

  • Disinfecting Drones Could Be MLB's Solution To Reopen Stadiums
    Disinfecting Drones Could Be MLB’s Solution To Reopen Stadiums

    A startup in New York must be closely watching the response efforts seen in Asia and Europe because any country decimated by the virus tends to deploy an army of robot drones with sprayer devices to disinfect public areas. These drones have been seen in China, South Korea, Italy, Spain, Germany, and will be shortly coming to the US. 

    Syracuse-based EagleHawk One, Inc. has joined the battle against coronavirus and mounted a sprayer device on one of its drones to disinfectant stadiums, a move the company believes could support efforts in reopening America. 

    “As a team, we just kind of took a step back and said, ‘How can we help be part of the solution going forward with COVID-19,'” CEO Patrick Walsh told local newspaper Syracuse, indicating that his company has been gearing up in the last several months to fight the virus with technology. 

    Walsh’s drones are a variant of the ones seen overseas. In China, many of the drones we observed had sprayer devices completely contained underneath the belly of the drone, with a 5-8 gallon container of disinfectant. EagleHawk One’s have the disinfectant stored on the ground and is pumped to the drone through a hose. A second drone flies near the disinfecting drone to hold the hose and prevent it from getting tangled on seats or other objects.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    EagleHawk drone disinfecting seats at Sahlen Field in Buffalo. h/t EagleHawk

    Walsh said the disinfecting drone could cover a large stadium, outdoor public area, and or other indoor facilities. He said his company is trying to market the system to colleges, sports teams, and minor leagues so they can safely reopen facilities. 

    “We’re getting strong interest now, but I think everybody’s in a waiting game, unfortunately,” he said.

    The company has tested the disinfecting system at several stadiums, including KeyBank Center in Buffalo, Sahlen Field in Buffalo, and Oncenter War Memorial Arena in Syracuse. 

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    EagleHawk drone carrying hose for disinfecting drone at Oncenter Arena in Syracuse. h/t EagleHawk 

    Walsh said using drones to disinfect thousands of seats is a much better solution than employing dozens of workers on the ground — this is cost-cutting and time-savings, he added. 

    “Say you have a hockey game at the War Memorial,” he said. “We would come out that evening or the next morning, do the cleaning and have it ready to go for the next day,” he said.

    He also said spraying with drones is much safer than having workers manually disinfect each seat.  

    “Now, people won’t be directly exposed,” said Walsh. “The drone will do the job.”

    Watch EagleHawk operate the drone at the Oncenter War Memorial Arena: 

    And with Major League Baseball owners proposing to start games in July – EagleHawk One’s drones could be the perfect solution to reopen stadiums. After all, life is boring as hell without sports. 


    Tyler Durden

    Mon, 05/11/2020 – 22:25

  • Yuan, Futures Slide After Trump Orders Retirement Fund Investment In Chinese Stocks Blocked
    Yuan, Futures Slide After Trump Orders Retirement Fund Investment In Chinese Stocks Blocked

    Having threatened last week that “COVID reparation” would be paid one way or another – and following Peter Navarro’s comments echoing the same rhetoric this morning – FOX Business reports that President Trump is moving ahead with his plans to block a government retirement fund from investing in Chinese equities considered a national security risk.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    As we detailed previously, Trump made his initial threats from the Rose Garden at the White House two weeks ago after he was pressed by a reporter over a German newspaper report suggesting that China should be issued a $160 billion invoice for the impact on Europe’s economy.

    Since then plans have been strawman’d, escalating up to last Wednesday’s threat that the Trump admin is planning an executive order to block a 2017 decision that The Thrift Savings Plan, the federal government’s retirement savings fund, would transfer a massive $50 billion to an international fund which would mirror the MSCI All-Country World Index.

    The issue being China’s addition to the index, and thus the fund being forced to allocate significant capital to the Chinese stock markets, at a time when the gloves between the two nations are clearly off.

    In one letter written Monday, obtained exclusively by FOX Business,  national security adviser Robert O’Brien and National Economic Council Chair Larry Kudlow write to U.S. Labor Secretary Eugene Scalia stating that the White House does not want the Thrift Savings Plan, which is a federal employee retirement fund, to have money invested in Chinese equities.

    Specifically, the letter directly links China’s handling of COVID-19 as one of several reasons why investment in Chinese companies should not occur.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    It says the Federal Retirement Thrift Investment Board is “Departing from the Board’s established index for the International Stock Investment Fund (I Fund) to track one that maintains Chinese equities is risky and unjustified.”

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    In a second letter, FOX Business reports that Scalia writes to Michael Kennedy, the chairman of the Federal Retirement Thrift Investment Board, sharing the Kudlow/O’Brien letter noting the two have “grave concerns with the planned investment on grounds of both investment risk and national security.”

    460987415 Sec Scalia to Cha… by Zerohedge on Scribd

    The letter concludes by saying that moving the assets out of a certain fund is “at the direction of President Trump.”

    Needless to say, the optics of the US halting capital from entering China would be staggering and could result in a reversion of China-bound capital flows across all Western countries until the current war of words between Trump and Xi rages.

    The main reaction so far is a drop in US equity futures…

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    And some weakness in yuan…

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    The only problem is that this particular war of words could last a long time, since there is no longer any impetus to kiss and make up, and if anything, Trump will only escalate the anti-China sentiment into the election (and after), to keep pounding that the collapse resulting from the COVID-19 pandemic is not his fault, but rather Beijing’s, even as China pursues a mirror image approach, blaming the US for launching the pandemic (and perhaps as we saw tonight, taking its retaliation against US allies like Australia).

    Additionally, Trump knows The Fed will defend his stock market (he does not need a ‘trade deal’ to levitate it) into the election, giving him leverage in any war of words (or deeds) against China.


    Tyler Durden

    Mon, 05/11/2020 – 22:07

  • PBOC To Cut Rates Next: China CPI Huge Miss, PPI Prints At 4 Year Low
    PBOC To Cut Rates Next: China CPI Huge Miss, PPI Prints At 4 Year Low

    Heading into today’s Chinese inflation print, the bond market was sending a mixed message: while consensus expected that China’s economy would be hit hard by the coronavirus pandemic, the yield on China’s government bonds climbed to the highest level in nearly two months, suggesting either the worst from the deflationary drag was now behind China, or was the result of expectations for a large supply increase later this month.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    In retrospect, it was the former, because moments ago China’s NBS reported that in April, CPI rose just 3.3%, sliding 1% from March and not only a huge miss to consensus of 3.7%, but missing the lowest estimate (the range was 3.4% to 4.3%). This was the lowest print since September 2019 when China was suffering from an acute surge in food prices driven by pork hyperinflation (the result of another virus).

    The bulk of the miss was due to a drop in food inflation, which dropped from 18.3%YoY to 14.8% vs March (a -3%MoM decline), with pork prices falling 7.6% as supply continues to come to market just as demand is fleeing said market. There was also weakness in transportation and recreation segments, reflecting subdued activity despite China’s bombastic reopening.

    Meanwhile, factory gate prices, or Producer Price Inflation a proxy for corporate profits, plunged deeper into the red, sliding to -3.1%, more than double the March decline of -1.5%, missing consensus estimate of a -2.5% drop, and the lowest print since April 2016.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    And since PPI is a close proxy for industrial profits which as discussed recently are in freefall, it is very likely that we will witness a record low PPI print as soon as next month.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    And while China’s accelerating disinflation is bad news not only for the country but also the entire world, as China was critical during the last financial crisis do unleash a global reflationary wave across the globe, the fact that China is also succumbing to lower prices has very adverse consequences for global growth.

    There is a silver lining: as we wrote earlier today when looking at China’s credit creation, the elevated CPI inflation in recent months had been an unfavorable factor for monetary policy (even though it has largely been due to virus shock impacts such as supply shock to food). However, as the PBOC noted over the weekend in its quarterly monetary policy report – in which it reaffirmed its expansionary stance by promising stronger monetary policy action ahead – CPI inflation has started to go downward, and inflation expectations are currently stable.

    As a result, with inflation now sliding fast the biggest hurdle before the PBOC for a wholesale rate cut is now gone, and instead of using a targeted approach to injecting liquidity in the system via new yuan loans, local bond issuance and the occasional RRR cut, the central bank will very soon enter the comfort zone where it too follows the rest of the world in cutting rates sharply lower in hopes of stimulating the economy.


    Tyler Durden

    Mon, 05/11/2020 – 22:07

  • Snyder: It's Much Worse Than You Are Being Told
    Snyder: It’s Much Worse Than You Are Being Told

    Authored by Michael Snyder via The Economic Collapse blog,

    For a long time I warned that our economic bubble would burst and that we would plunge into a nightmarish economic collapse.  Now it has happened, and it turns out that fear of COVID-19 was the “black swan event” that triggered the collapse.  The ironic thing is that COVID-19 is not even close to the worst thing that is going to happen to us.  But it was more than enough to topple our incredibly fragile economic system, and now tens of millions of Americans are deeply suffering.  On Friday, the April jobs report was released, and it was the worst jobs report in U.S. history by a very, very wide margin.  According to the official numbers, 20.5 million Americans lost their jobs during the month, and the unemployment rate shot up to 14.7 percent.  During the last recession, the unemployment rate peaked at about 10 percent, and we have already left that number in the dust. 

    The figures that we are seeing now are truly, truly horrifying, and what is even more frightening is that they aren’t even that accurate.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    But don’t take my word for it.

    On Friday, the U.S. Labor Department publicly admitted that the true unemployment rate in April was closer to 20 percent

    Millions of U.S. residents were counted as employed in April despite having no job, suggesting April’s true unemployment rate was closer to 20%, much higher than the official 14.7% reported, the Labor Department said Friday.

    The jobless rate should have included people on temporary unpaid leave, furloughed because of the coronavirus pandemic, the government said.

    I applaud the Labor Department for trying to be honest.  In the report, they openly admitted that an “additional 7.5 million workers” should have been classified as unemployed

    But responses to the survey by which the data was collected show 11.5 million people were categorized as employed but absent from work because of vacation, parental leave or other reasons, but including 8.1 million absent for “unspecified” reasons, a group that usually numbers about 620,000.

    “One assumption might be that these additional 7.5 million workers …should have been classified as unemployed on temporary layoff,” a note attached to the government’s jobs report Friday said.

    If those workers had been correctly classified, the official unemployment rate would have been about 19.5 percent, and that would have put us solidly in Great Depression territory.

    But others have looked at the numbers and calculated that the true rate of unemployment should be even higher than that.

    For example, Standard Chartered has calculated that the true rate of unemployment could be as high as 27.5 percent

    While it is true that what the BLS reported that the April unemployment rate (UR) was less than expected (14.7% versus consensus of 16.0%) and the drop in payroll employment of 20.5 million was also less than the 22.0 million expected, Standard Chartered bank has calculated that adjustments to the headline unemployment rate push the effective number of unemployed to 42 million and the effective UR rate to 25.5%, higher even than the U-6 underemployment rate of 22.8%. Worse, if one treats underemployed in line with the U-6 methodology, the true April unemployment number would rise to an mindblowing 27.5%.

    So how did Standard Chartered arrive at those numbers?  The following is how Zero Hedge explained it…

    How does one get these numbers? As the bank’s chief FX strategist Steve Englander explains, start with the 23.1 million unemployed as published by BLS. To this add 8.1mn people who have dropped out of the labor force since February (previously the labor force had been growing steadily, so these are likely unemployed).

    Add back 7.5MM workers classified as ‘employed but not at work for other reasons’ – BLS states that these workers are likely misclassified as employed, when they are in fact unemployed. Involuntary part-time work for economic reasons has gone up by 6.6MM and we treat these as half-unemployed (i.e., a contribution of 3.3MM).

    This totals almost 42 Million effectively unemployed.

    And Standard Chartered is not the only one that has come up with such a high figure.

    In fact, John Williams of shadowstats.com says that if honest numbers were being used that the U.S. unemployment rate would now be an eye-popping 35.4 percent.

    Wow.

    Of course everyone admits that things are really, really bad and that the numbers for next month are likely to be even worse.

    If you can believe it, even White House economic adviser Kevin Hassett is admitting that the official unemployment rate is likely to surge above 20 percent in “May or June”

    White House economic adviser Kevin Hassett believes the unemployment rate could rise above 20% and the worst job losses would come in “May or June” because of the ongoing coronavirus pandemic.

    When asked Sunday what the “bottom” of the country’s unemployment pain would be, Hassett, who advises the Trump administration on economic policy and is the former chair of the Council of Economic Advisers, told CBS’s “Face the Nation,” “to get unemployment rates like the ones that we’re about to see … which I think will climb up toward 20% by next month, you have to really go back to the Great Depression to see that.”

    And even once this pandemic fades, many of those jobs won’t be coming back.

    Initially, many employers had anticipated that they would be bringing all of their employees back following a short, severe crisis.  But at this point reality is beginning to set in for many of them.

    For example, a restaurant owner in Kentucky named Britney Ruby Miller has had to lower her expectations as this pandemic has dragged on…

    In late March, Britney Ruby Miller, co-owner of a small chain of steakhouse restaurants, confidently proclaimed that once the viral outbreak had subsided, her company planned to recall all its laid-off workers.

    Now? Miller would be thrilled to restore, by year’s end, three-quarters of the roughly 600 workers her company had to let go.

    Yes, the state of Kentucky is starting to “reopen for business”, but for now her restaurants will “be limited to 33% of capacity” and there will be all sorts of other new expenses that Miller will be forced to deal with…

    Yet business won’t be returning to what it was before. In Kentucky, the restaurants will be limited to 33% of capacity. They are putting six feet between tables in all their restaurants, thereby limiting seating. Miller estimates that the company’s revenue will plunge by half to three-quarters this year.

    And expenses are rising because the company must buy face masks and other equipment for the workers it does recall and restock its food, drink, and equipment supplies.

    There are very, very few restaurants that can be profitable under such circumstances.

    Unless the state of Kentucky lifts those ridiculous restrictions, Miller may soon lose all of her restaurants and all of her employees may soon be permanently out of jobs.

    Of course more layoff announcements just keep rolling in from all over America with each passing day.  The following examples come from the Wall Street Journal

    This past week, General Electric Co., Uber Technologies Inc. UBER 6.01% and Airbnb Inc. said they would lay off thousands of workers. MGM Resorts International MGM 4.42% warned that some of the 63,000 employees it has furloughed may be let go permanently starting in August. Aerospace supplier Raytheon Technologies Corp., RTX 2.91%  job-listings site Glassdoor and United Airlines Holdings Inc. UAL 11.74% also said in the past week that they had reduced jobs or planned to do so.

    This is what an economic depression looks like, and it is going to be so incredibly painful.

    And it is critical to understand that what we have experienced so far is just a warm-up act for the next chapters.

    If you remember how bitter the last recession was, that should motivate you to take action to prepare for what is ahead, because this economic downturn is already even worse.

    Yes, the months in front of us will be exceptionally challenging, but you can get through this.  Things may look really bleak, but for now you just need to keep hanging in there.

    There will be life on the other side, but your future may end up looking far different than you originally anticipated.


    Tyler Durden

    Mon, 05/11/2020 – 22:05

  • How To Get A Free Hotel Stay (And Free Drugs) In San Francisco
    How To Get A Free Hotel Stay (And Free Drugs) In San Francisco

    Even as San Francisco ushers its homeless population into ritzy hotels (at city expense), the city’s streets – particularly in districts like the Tenderloin – have seen a growing number of tents pitched by the homeless. And according to a lawsuit filed by law schools and the business community, the number of tents pitched by homeless in the district has climbed 300% since the coronavirus outbreak began.

    We first reported on San Francisco’s latest genius policy idea – simultaneously wasting city money and burnishing its reputation for extravagant handouts to the homeless – more than a month ago, when the city first announced plans to place up to 3,000 homeless in hotels.

    The lawsuit, which was filed by residents, businesses and the University of California Hastings College of Law, is pushing the city to clean up drug needles, human waste and liter in the streets.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    But the demands also call for more sensible policies to be enacted to ensure that assistance can be provided for individuals living in sidewalk tents, arguing they are at an increased risk of contracting COVID-19. About 400 tents currently occupy the neighborhood as San Francisco has had 1,943 confirmed cases of the coronavirus. The virus has killed at least 34 people in the city.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Before rose-emoji Democratic socialists rush to slam these residents of the Tenderloin for acting like a bunch of rich liberal “NIMBYS” it’s worth hearing them out.

    David Faigman, chancellor and dean at UC Hastings, which is heading the case in federal court, says the suit was filed because ‘our neighborhood has become a pandemic containment zone,’ reports Fox News.

    “The city has basically cordoned off our area. Tents are blocking the streets. Tents are blocking doorways. There are needles in the streets. There’s open-air drug dealing” Faigman said.

    The Tenderloin is home to more children, elderly persons and vulnerable populations per capita than any other neighborhood in the city.

    Faigman adds that those populations are not being protected due to a lack of public COVID-19 testing.

    He says residents fear the “virus is raging in the neighborhood.”

    “There’s no other neighborhood in San Francisco that would tolerate that, and they would stand up and be counted. Tenderloin needs to stand up and be counted,” Faigman said.

    Of course, if the city simply decides to settle this lawsuit by moving more homeless people from the neighborhood into ritzy hotels – where they are also sometimes supplied with drugs and alcohol  – it would fully cement the following theory.

    We present: How to get a free hotel room in San Francisco.

    Step 1. Pitch a tent (preferably on a busy stretch of sidewalk).

    Step 2. Harass the locals.

    Step 3. Wait for the nice people from the city to take you to your new hotel suite home.

     


    Tyler Durden

    Mon, 05/11/2020 – 21:45

  • CrowdStrike Had No Evidence Of Russians Stealing Emails From DNC, Declassified Transcript Shows
    CrowdStrike Had No Evidence Of Russians Stealing Emails From DNC, Declassified Transcript Shows

    Authored by Ivan Pentchoukov via The Epoch Times,

    The cybersecurity firm that investigated and remediated the alleged hack of the Democratic National Committee’s servers in 2016 found no direct evidence that hackers stole any data or emails, according to a newly declassified interview transcript.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Shawn Henry, the president of CrowdStrike Services, told the House Intelligence Committee in late 2017 that his firm had no evidence that the alleged Russian hackers stole any data from the Democratic National Committee (DNC) servers.

    “There’s not evidence that they were actually exfiltrated,” Henry said.

    “There’s circumstantial evidence, but no evidence that they were actually exfiltrated.”

    The publication by WikiLeaks of more than 44,000 emails from senior DNC officials became one of the biggest stories of the turbulent 2016 presidential race and served as the predicate for the FBI’s investigation of the Trump campaign. Special counsel Robert Mueller, who took over the probe in May 2017, eventually charged a group of Russians with hacking the DNC. The indictment alleges that the Russians hacked into the DNC and stole thousands of emails.

    Prior to Mueller’s indictment, the public knowledge of the alleged DNC hack consisted of CrowdStrike’s brief report on the matter released on June 14, 2016, days after the firm claims to have ousted the hackers from the committee’s systems. The report makes no mention of stolen data, although Henry told The Washington Post in an article published the same day that the Russians allegedly “stole two files.”

    Of the more than 44,000 emails published by WikiLeaks, more than 98 percent were sent and received by senior DNC officials between April 18 and May 25 of 2016. During more than half of that time frame, CrowdStrike had already installed its software on the DNC’s servers and was monitoring the network. The company did not respond to a request to explain how the emails were allegedly pilfered under its watch and why it failed to find evidence despite closely monitoring the servers with full awareness that hackers were present.

    Mueller’s indictment alleges that Russian hackers broke into a DNC server and stole emails on or about May 25 and June 1 of 2016, roughly three weeks after CrowdStrike installed its software on the DNC servers and assessed that Russian hackers had gained access.

    CrowdStrike’s involvement in the events surrounding the alleged DNC hack has long been the subject of controversy. Some facts about the firm’s involvement remain disputed by key players, including Henry, who told the House Intelligence Committee that he was not aware of the DNC or CrowdStrike denying any FBI requests related to the server hack. Henry’s testimony contradicted what then-FBI Director James Comey told the Senate Intelligence Committee in January 2017. Comey told senators that the FBI sought and was repeatedly denied access to the physical DNC servers.

    Henry was not the only one to contradict Comey. The DNC’s director of technology, Andrew Brown, told the House Intelligence Committee the DNC fully cooperated with every FBI request. The DNC’s IT director, Yared Tamene, told the committee the FBI never requested access to the physical servers. And Michael Sussman, the DNC’s outside counsel, told the committee that the FBI declined a DNC offer for full access to its servers.

    According to Tamene, the DNC handed over images of its servers to CrowdStrike, which then handed them over to the FBI in May and June of 2016. Mueller’s final report on the Russia investigation cites these images, alongside redacted grand jury material, as the source for the allegation that Russian hackers stole the DNC emails.

    According to a CrowdStrike report cited by Rep. Adam Schiff (D-Calif.) the hackers allegedly “staged” a trove of DNC files for exfiltration on April 22. According to the Netyshko indictment, the hackers allegedly “compressed gigabytes of data from DNC computers, including opposition research” and “later moved the compressed DNC data” to a computer leased in Illinois. The indictment does not allege that the hackers moved the files from the Illinois system.

    The charges in the Netyshko indictment remain alleged as the case is unlikely to be heard before a court since the defendants are in Russia. The government recently moved to drop the charges against an alleged Russian social media influence operation after the defendants mounted a defense in court.

    The special counsel concluded his 22-month investigation last year finding insufficient evidence that anyone on the Trump campaign colluded with Russia to influence the 2016 election.

    The DNC did not respond to a request for comment.


    Tyler Durden

    Mon, 05/11/2020 – 21:25

  • Futures Slide After China Punishes Australia Over Coronavirus Origin Probe, Bans 35% Of Beef Imports
    Futures Slide After China Punishes Australia Over Coronavirus Origin Probe, Bans 35% Of Beef Imports

    At the end of April, China sparked a diplomatic row after it threatened Australia with an economic hit if it doesn’t stop investigating the origins, and Beijing handling, of the coronavirus pandemic. As a reminder, Chinese Ambassador Cheng Jingye told Sky News that while China’s response may not have been “perfect,” Australia’s inquiry was “dangerous,” and could lead to Chinese consumers avoiding Chinese exports and travel.

    So what is being done by the Australia side?” asked Cheng. “The proposition is a kind of teaming up with those forces in Washington and to launch a kind of political campaign against China. The Chinese public is frustrated, dismayed and disappointed with what Australia is doing now,” Cheng warned Asutralia, adding that “in the long term… if the mood is going from bad to worse, people would think ‘Why should we go to such a country that is not so friendly to China?’ The tourists may have second thoughts.

    “The parents of the students would also think whether this place which they found is not so friendly, even hostile, whether this is the best place to send their kids here,” Cheng continued (via the Daily Wire). “It is up to the people to decide. Maybe the ordinary people will say ‘Why should we drink Australian wine? Eat Australian beef?’

    Australia’s Foreign Minister Marise Payne hit back saying “Australia has made a principled call for an independent review of the COVID-19 outbreak, an unprecedented global crisis with severe health, economic and social impacts.”

    “We reject any suggestion that economic coercion is an appropriate response to a call for such an assessment, when what we need is global co-operation.”

    And in confirmation, on the very same day, Australia’s Daily Telegraph reported that Western intelligence agencies are “looking closely at the work of a senior scientist at the Wuhan Institute of Virology, Peng Zhou,” as part of a joint international investigation into the origins of COVID-19. The Australian newspaper Australian newspaper reported that “the Five Eyes intelligence agencies of Australia, Canada, NZ, UK and US, are understood to be looking closely at the work of a senior scientist at the Wuhan Institute of Virology, Peng Zhou, as they examine whether COVID-19 originated from a wet market or whether the naturally-­occurring virus may have been released from the level four laboratory in Wuhan that was studying deadly coronavirus pathogens from bats.”

    None of this went unnoticed by Beijing which, not used to having its threats ignored, has just escalated the trade war when it imposed an import ban on four Australian slaughterhouses, the Australian Broadcasting Corporation reports, adding that, as noted above, China’s trade barriers are “in retaliation to Prime Minister Scott Morrison’s demand for an independent investigation into the COVID 19 outbreak.”

    The blacklisting of the beef plants – three in Queensland and one in NSW – came just days after China flagged plans to introduce an 80% tariff on Australian barley, bringing the trade to its knees.

    Three Queensland meatworks — Kilcoy Pastoral Company, the JBS owned Beef City, near Toowoomba, Dinmore, near Brisbane, and the New South Wales’ Northern Cooperative Meat Company at Casino — have been suspended by China; together the four “meatworks represent 35% of beef exports to China, a trade that had been on track to reach $3.5 billion this year”, the ABC reported.

    The news, which came around the time BOJ governor Kuroda said that the global economy was rapidly worsening, sent S&P futures down 0.5% to session lows…

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    … and slammed the Aussie which dropped 50 pips on the news.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    In fact, risk is off broadly with the New Zealand dollar down more than 0.5% while the Mexican peso, the euro, the British pound and the Canadian dollar are all suffering. S&P 500 futures are down about 0.5%, while WTI crude pared its earlier advance. Risk havens such as Treasury futures are up 5 ticks, the yen is climbing and gold trimmed losses.

    And now that China has acted on its threat to retaliate against countries seeking a probe into origin of the coronavirus, we wonder how long before officials realize that where there is smoke, there is likely a fire burning all the evidence. Speaking of which, the Wuhan Institute of Virology still hasn’t been burned down, but considering China’s adamant refusal to open up the facility to global inquiry and its openly punitive act against those who accuse Beijing of being behind the pandemic, it is clearly time for a full-blown inquiry just in case some WIV scientist has another accident, this time involving a flamethrower and a few hundred pounds of explosives.


    Tyler Durden

    Mon, 05/11/2020 – 21:11

  • Modern Alchemy: This Is How Wall Street Converts A Portfolio Of 96% Junk Loans Into 87% Investment Grade Bonds
    Modern Alchemy: This Is How Wall Street Converts A Portfolio Of 96% Junk Loans Into 87% Investment Grade Bonds

    There is a reason why so much attention has fallen on Collateralized Loan Obligations since the March market crash, and it has more to do than merely why an AAA-rated CLO recently breached its overcollateralization test, something which as we first reported last month was previously viewed as impossible, or why as many as 1-in-3 CLOa are expected to limit payouts to holders of the riskiest and juiciest, tranches and after that impair the less risky tranches as well, resulting in billions in losses to CLO investors .

    The reason is that, for lack of a better word, CLOs – like CDOs over a decade ago – are the financial equivalent of alchemy: these structured credit products take a portfolio of mostly junk loans – which are used to fund much of corporate America – and repackage them in such a way that the resulting product looks and feels much higher in credit quality, even though it consists of the exact same junky underlying securities, just presented in a different way.

    The problem with such financial alchemy, of course, is that it does not actually work and instead it relies on a set of underlying conditions that will prevent any participant in the CLO market from yelling “the emperor is naked.” The most important such conditions are that risk assets continue to rally, that cash flows remain more or less in line with expectations, and that there are no major shocks to the system preventing wild rating swings forcing a repricing of the collateral stack.

    Alas, March unleashed a “perfect storm” for CLOs where these three conditions hit at the exact same time, with risk assets plunging, cash flows for countless levered companies suddenly cut off, and rating agencies warning that hundreds of CLOs would face widespread downgrades. And suddenly this alchemy which facilitated the issuance of hundreds of billions in leveraged loans, resulted in billions in arrangement fees, and made dozens of hedge funds managers filthy rich, is nothing more than lipstick on a pig.

    But before we get too far ahead of ourselves, let’s answer the most important question: how does the CLO alchemy work in practice?

    Take the example of the 2017 Long Point Park CLO. As part of the CLO process, the asset manager bought 361 loans worth $610 million, of which over 96% were rated junk. Having thus compiled a pool of almost entirely junk-rated loans, the manager then divided the scheduled payments from the CLO into tranches offering declining safety and increasing rates of return – starting at the top with AAA, then dropping to AA and so on, all that way to BBB, BB and B, before concluding with the riskiest, equity tranche, at the bottom. In such a way, 361 current-pay junk-rated loans were used to create a synthetic cap table, with the least risky on top and most risky at the bottom.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    And here is the alchemy itself: since everything above the BB bond is by definition investment grade, this meant that a portfolio of mostly junk debt, thanks to the “magic” of CLO transformation which is also the process where investors collectively agree that the naked emperor is, in fact, dressed, ended up rated investment grade. In fact, as shown in the chart below, the original pool of a 96.4% junk-rated loans, was transformed into 86.6% investment grade synthetic bonds, and just 3.7% of the resulting “bonds” were rated speculative grade, or the same rating as the original assets!

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Just like that, the Wall Street structured credit machine has converted a portfolio of 96.4% junk-rated loans into bonds that are just 3.7% junk rated, with 87% rated investment grade through the magic of “diversification”, even though all those synthetic “investment grade” bonds have as collateral junk assets which are all effectively worthless during a systemic crisis.

    And here is where the perfect coronavirus storm came into play.

    Thanks to the law of large numbers and simple statistics, when aggregated across a large enough number of loans, defaults become a perfectly predictable and mundane event where one can easily extrapolate both cumulative losses and severity given a set of economic conditions. That’s precisely why investors then end up buying any given CLO tranche: given an investor’s risk tolerance and assumptions about marginal changes in the global economy, a risk-tolerant investor such as a hedge fund, who believes an economic slowdown is nowhere near, can buy the lowly-rated B note and earn a respectable yield. Other, more risk-averse investors – such as Japanese pensioners  or UK insurers – end up buying the AAA or AA rated tranches, as these effectively guarantee no impairments, absent some unprecedented shock.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    However, for all that to work, the core assumption is no outlier events, no unexpected turmoil, no sudden stop in the global economy, and certainly no economic depression where over 20 million people suddenly lose their jobs. The coronavirus crisis was precisely that, and suddenly virtually every loan that comprised the original portfolio of underlying CLO “assets” is in danger of default – after all these are nothing more than junk-rated loans issued by heavily levered companies whose cashflows are very risky and which are critically reliant on the lack of major outlier events. Which also means that all the bonds that were issued by the CLO, from the “safest” AAA tranche to the riskiest Bs and the equity tranche, can very well be worthless in a cataclysmic stress event such as a global economic shutdown.

    Now, since none of what happened in March was supposed to happen – or was even conceivable by the CLO arrangers or investors – let’s go back again to how a CLO is supposed to work in an ideal environment.

    Traditionally, most CLOs limit the worst-rated loans to a maximum of 7.5% of the portfolio, the so-called CCC bucket. The limit is designed to protect investors from managers who may otherwise be tempted to take outsized bets to juice returns by loading the portfolio with higher-yielding, lower-rated loans (think Paulson’s double-dealing with Goldman on various pre-financial crisis synthetic CDOs). Any CCC loans over the limit will be suddenly subject to mark-to-market rules, which means they’ll be counted at the current trading value rather than at par, reducing the value of the entire portfolio. That puts the CLO at risk of failing a critical test that measures asset-coverage, also known as the over-collateralization, or OC test. Failing that test cuts off cash-flow streams to certain investors – a mechanism designed to protect those who purchase less-risky segments of the CLO bonds.

    But while CLOs tripping B, BB and even BBB overcollateralization tests is a frequent event during economic recessions, what happened in late April was unprecedented: a CLO just failed its AAA overcollateralization test for the first time.  The CLO deal in question is JFINC152, where downgrades had sent the reported CCC percentage to 19%, up 9%, and the result is that every single test cushion is now showing impaired results, from BB (-4.7%) all the way to AA (-0.6%).

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Which brings us to that other key variable: ratings.

    As Bloomberg reported last month, Ratings companies were roundly criticized during the last financial crisis in 2008 for acting too slow in sounding the alarm over deteriorating credit. To avoid the same criticism, this time they are being far more proactive and have embarked on an unprecedented downgrade spree. Through the middle of last month, S&P and Moody’s had already cut ratings on some 20% of the loans that are housed in CLOs. Many more are coming. The loan downgrades have come so fast, one after another, that Stephen Ketchum of Sound Point Capital Management likened it to a spill “at the Daytona 500, where the cars are crashing into each other.”

    The barrage of loan downgrades will also prompt ratings agencies to downgrade the securities sold by the CLOs themselves, which are separate from the ratings on the underlying loans. On April 17, Moody’s surprised the market by putting $22 billion of US CLO bonds – nearly a fifth of all such bonds it grades – on a watchlist for a downgrade, saying that the expected losses on CLOs have increased materially. Some 40% of those securities had investment-grade ratings. Now keep in mind that among the buyers of CLOs are “rating-constrained” investors, such as pension funds, banks and insurance companies. If CLO bonds are downgraded – especially if they are cut from investment-grade to a junk tier – investors usually are forced to sell or risk higher capital charges.

    The more the downgrades, the greater the losses to CLO investors. As of a month ago, the vast majority of CLOs had already blown past the CCC cap, up from just 8% that were breaching buckets earlier this year. In addition, some 20% of CLOs that submitted their monthly reports indicated that they are failing tests and will be turning off some cash flow to equity investors. And, as we first reported last month, things are so bad that a few were even failing tests that measure asset coverage of the highest rated AAA/AA tranches, according to an April 20 report from the bank.

    Keep in mind that all that it taking place before the “biblical” wave of bankruptcies has even hit. Just wait a few months.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    So what are portfolio managers to do? Strictly speaking they have two options: dump lower-rated loans at fire-sale prices,  or cut cash payments to some of their investors. In the first case, selling loans can cause a CLO to crystallize losses – a likely event because lower-rated loan prices are lagging. The other path of turning the cash spigot off and shifting to payment-in-kind, or PIK, where interest is paid with more debt, can ravage equity returns, depress lower-rated CLO bonds and cut off a substantial portion of the CLO manager’s fees.

    A look at CLO prices tracked by Palmer Square shows that there certainly has been a lot of dumping: and while higher rated tranche prices have enjoyed a modest rebound in recent weeks, the BB and BBB remain stuck deep underwater, because one of the few assets the Fed has not (yet) bailed out are CLOs.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    And just like stocks, the underlying assumption for the rebound shown above is that the reopening from the coronavirus pandemic will be swift and V-shaped. We disagree, especially since the cascade of downgrades signaled that a wave of defaults is coming. As Bloomberg notes, analysts have hiked their expectations for how many of the underlying loans will sour, and lowered their forecasts for how much might be recovered from each bad loan, although as with equities, their forecasts remain anchored to a cognitive bias of normalcy, when the global economy is anything but. This means that US high-yield default rates could run to double-digits, perhaps surpassing heights of about 15% in the last financial crisis, while loan recovery rates could be slashed to far below the generic assumption of 60 cents on the dollar, and far lower than past norms. But, as Bloomberg correctly points out, history provides only a limited guide: The market for leveraged loans has exploded in recent years, with U.S. total issuance ballooning to $1.2 trillion as the market became the go-to place for private equity firms to finance debt-fueled buyouts.

    And it all worked splendidly as long as nobody questioned the “alchemy” behind the biggest magic trick Wall Street pulled in the past decade. Alas, alchemy does not exist, and just like all those buying “gold” from carnival charlatans eventually realized they were holding on to lead, so all those who naively believed they had purchased investment grade securities are about to learn the hard way that what they really owned was, aptly-named, junk.


    Tyler Durden

    Mon, 05/11/2020 – 21:05

  • Alameda County Folds, Allows "Minimum Operation" After Elon Musk Defies Coronavirus Order And Dares Authorities To Arrest Him
    Alameda County Folds, Allows “Minimum Operation” After Elon Musk Defies Coronavirus Order And Dares Authorities To Arrest Him

    Update 1920 EST: It appears that Alameda County has folded to Elon Musk’s temper tantrum, now stating that Tesla can “maintain minimum operation” at its Fremont facility, according to a press release issued moments ago. 

    “We have notified Tesla that they can only maintain Minimum Basic Operations until we have an approved plan that can be implemented in accordance with the local public health Order,” the release says. 

    The county ended its press release sounding neutered: “We do not have any further comment and will not be taking any requests for interviews.”

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    The county said it “hoped” Tesla would comply without enforcement, to which one social media user wryly stated:

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    Some other theories emerged about the re-opening, including one theory that Alameda’s move will spark a larger legal dispute:

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    Alameda County said earlier that it had reached a tentative agreement with Tesla to re-open on May 18, but that Tesla wanted its plant to open a week early to “prep parts” for production. According to KTVU, the county disagreed. 

    This is apparently what led to the confrontation between Elon Musk and California reaching a climax of sorts, when following earlier reports that Tesla had reopened the Fremont plant despite not having permission from Alameda County in California, and despite California Governor Newsom saying he “expects the Tesla factory can resume work next week”, Elon Spartacus pardon Musk tweeted that

    Tesla is restarting production today against Alameda County rules. I will be on the line with everyone else. If anyone is arrested, I ask that it only be me.

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    In other words, Elon Musk, whose Tesla Fremont plant is now burning tens of millions of dollars every day that it is shut down, has unilaterally decided to violate California regulations and directives, and has forced his employees to work so the company resumes production just so that Tesla’s cash burn is not catastrophic and leads to a crash in the stock price.

    It was also reported this afternoon by Business Insider that Tesla was telling employees that if they did not return to work, they would not receive benefits and would be unable to apply for unemployment. 

    “I love my job personally, just tired of feeling like a chess piece,” one employee told The Verge. 

    Meanwhile, Gov. Newsom – who earlier said he expects the Tesla plant to reopen later this week – said he didn’t know Tesla reopened its factory, in defiance of Alameda County’s Covid-19 health orders.

    So what happens next, and will Elon Musk indeed be arrested? According to CNBC’s Lora Kolodny, a spokesperson for Fremont district supervisor Scott Haggerty told CNBC, “If Tesla violates the order, it would be Fremont Police Department’s decision to enforce or not enforce.”

    Kolodny also notes that “it’s not clear to me why it would take an entire day for law enforcement to decide whether or not the Tesla factory is allowed to be open.” Furthermore, “now that Tesla is open can’t all other “non-essential businesses” open seeking equal treatment under the law? Gun shops & all?”

    Musk’s “noble” stance promptly generated amusement on social networks:

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    With some comparing the billionaire who on occasions tends to abuse mind-altering substances before unleashing on twitter, to Nelson Mandela:

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    Yet others cut to the chase, asking Musk to “imagine if you valued your workers’ right to organize a union as much as you value your workers’ right to die to raise your stock prices”

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    Of course, that was in jest: after all Tesla has already warned any employees that do not follow it in its head on collision with California regulations that they risk losing their benefits, forcing them to be on Musk’s side.

    Some asked if Musk is purposefully abandoning his newborn son with the unproounceable name to pursue a insurrection against California:

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    Some thought Elon was just trying to escape dad duty:

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    One person called Tesla the “most amazing freak show in the history of modern American business”:

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    Another person said that a fine from Alameda County would just be a “cost of doing business”: 

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    Someone else reminded the Tesla board that Elon is their D&O insurer now:

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    Even as most were in it purely for the humor…

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    … as #ArrestElonMusk is starting to trend.

    And the most amusing aspect of this whole comedy – because apparently Musk just can’t wait another week or so to reopen as Newsom said – is that as law professor Ben Edwards notes “there is a good chance Musk will also have to personally indemnify Tesla for any damage to stockholders for this.  Delaware doesn’t allow directors and officers to engage in knowing violations of law.”

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    And now we to see if the Fremont Police Department will confirm that when it comes to law, billionaires generally tend to be above it.

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    * * *

    Update 1530 EST: In in a violation of California orders, Tesla began making cars again at its Fremont, California plant over the weekend despite an ongoing battle with local officials about whether it should remain closed during the pandemic, The Verge reports, adding that the company called back some of its workers and has completed around 200 Model Y and Model 3 vehicles. 

    This happened as CEO Elon Musk threatened on Twitter to move Tesla’s operations out of state and sued Alameda County over its stay-home order.

    Adding to the confusion, moments after the Verge report, Bloomberg reported that Cali Gov Newsom expects that the factory can resume work “next week”:

    • NEWSOM SAID LOCAL `CONSTRUCTIVE TALKS’ ON REOPENING CA FACTORY
    • NEWSOM” `BELIEF AND HOPE AND EXPECTATION’ CAN OPEN NEXT WEEK
    • CA GOV SAYS HE EXPECTS TESLA FACTORY CAN RESUME WORK NEXT WEEK

    So did Musk violate another prohibition, or did he simply rush ahead of the permitted date, well aware that every day of delays leads to tens of millions in cash burn?

    But wait it gets even more interesting, because it appears that Newsom – having been put in a corner by both Musk and Trump – is now seeking to avoid the public glare, and is throwing Alameda county under the bus:

    • NEWSOM SAID HE SPOKE WITH ELON MUSK `A NUMBER OF DAYS AGO’
    • NEWSOM SAYS ANY ENFORCEMENT IS GOVERNED BY ALAMEDA COUNTY
    • NEWSOM: `I HAVE GREAT REVERENCE FOR THEIR TECHNOLOGY’
    • CA GOV SAYS HE’S BIG FAN OF TESLA COMPANY, TECHNOLOGY

    As a reminder, the Tesla’s Fremont factory has been closed since March 23rd, one week after Alameda County issued the initial stay-home order, and a few days after the governor of California issued a statewide version. The company had spent that intervening time trying to convince local officials that it should be allowed to keep making its electric cars because of Department of Homeland Security guidance that auto manufacturing is “national critical infrastructure.”

    While Alameda County officials said in a statement on Saturday that they were “communicating directly and working closely with the Tesla team on the ground in Fremont,” and that the company was engaged in “a collaborative, good faith effort to develop and implement a safety plan that allows for reopening while protecting the health and well-being of the thousands of employees who travel to and from work at Tesla’s factory”, the county officials said they had still not reached an agreement with the company on whether it could reopen its factory. At the same time that the officials released their statement, Tesla sued the county over the stay-home order. Musk also threatened to move Tesla out of California because the plant would not reopen, and urged Tesla supporters on Twitter to “please voice your disagreement as strongly as possible with Alameda County.

    As such it appears that Musk has rushed ahead of the Newsom statement, and decided to unilaterally resume production before being granted permission.

    Workers who spoke to The Verge described difficult decisions they made about whether or not they should report in this week as their employer and CEO wages a public battle with local officials. Since they are both hourly workers, they won’t be paid if they stay home. If they do go in, they will make less than they used to thanks to recent company-wide pay cuts. And while Tesla previously told its employees that they can use paid time off (PTO) days to stay home if they feel uncomfortable coming in, the company recently cashed out many of those workers’ remaining PTO days because of the extended furlough.

    “It’s either we feed our families or go hungry at this point,” said one, who decided to go into the factory.

    The other is staying home. “I love my job personally, just tired of feeling like a chess piece,” this person said. They also said they wouldn’t feel safe assembling cars right now because it requires such close-quarters work. “We get lured in by the ‘Tesla Dream’ of saving the planet only to get treated so poorly that even though I love my job, I’m not willing to risk my health for him.”

    * *  *

    Updated 1410 EST: Elon Musk continued his war of words with, well… the entire world, which reacted with shock to Musk’s decision to sue Alameda County over not allowing him to re-open his Fremont factory.  Former Secretary of Labor and Berkeley professor Robert Reich, who Musk had previously called a “boring idiot” in both English and Russian in a Twitter flame-war on Sunday took another jab at the embattled CEO, saying “Billionaires are not the answer”.

    Responding to one of Musk’s insults, Reich said, “if only you had put as much effort into delivering the ventilators you promised as you put into this tweet.”

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    Separately, perpetual Tesla cheerleader Adam Jonas at Morgan Stanley also offered up his take on Musk’s claims to want to move from California over the weekend. First and foremost, he predicted a gigantic $2 billion to $4 billion cash burn for Q2 and said GAAP loss estimates of $500  million could be too high:

    We believe that the sentiment consistently displayed by Musk is likely out of genuine concern for the severity of the decline of profits and cash flow for the company in Q2. While we believe the liquidity / balance sheet of the company is intact, we are prepared for Q2cash burn to be on the order of magnitude of $2BN to $4BN,given large payable outflows and revenues down as much as 30% Y/Y.

    In our view, while the situation is clearly out of Tesla’s control, Elon Musk’s urgency and willingness to take decisive action shows the impact the shutdown is having on the company globally. Taking a look at consensus numbers for 2Q20,expectations call for nearly $900MM in cash burn and GAAP net loss of ~$500MM; we believe these may still be too high.

    He also predicted that Tesla’s next U.S. Gigafactory would be announced in 1-3 months and could happen in Texas. The note does little to address the financial implications of such a move and estimates it could take “up to 3 years for a complete relocation from California”.

    Jonas still predicts a majority of the company’s global production volume will come from Fremont over the next 2 years and also believes there is “morale risk” to employees from Musk’s erratic behavior: 

    We believe that there is risk to the morale of employees and staff currently in Fremont, as the questions of not only returning to work by June 1st in California continue to loom, but now the new question of continuing to work in California at all.

    All OEMs and other contingencies in the supply chain are struggling with similar issues in the road to their targeted May 18th restart. As investors model a number of scenarios for cash consumption in Q2, we believe some attention should be paid to the potential problems for other counter-parties that could add to the volatility of near term financial outcomes.

    Yet despite the massive predicted cash burn and the slate of numerous new risks, Jonas kept his $680 price target on the name. Because when Morgan Stanley underwriting fees are at risk, one does what one must…

    California seems fed up with Musk. The Sacramento Bee published an article over the weekend mocking Musk, claiming that even though “COVID-19 has killed nearly 2,700 Californians so far, [Musk] is the one who’s truly suffering during the coronavirus pandemic.”

    It continued, calling Musk a “bratty billionaire”:

    California’s public health officials must ignore Musk’s ranting and stay the course. Twitter threats from bratty billionaires, anti-vaccine activists and middle-aged “militia members” should play no role in guiding public health policy in the middle of a deadly pandemic.

    “And what should California’s leaders say if Tesla decides to pick up its toys and move elsewhere?” the op-ed asks rhetorically.

    “Adiós,” it answers.

    In the interim, Tesla owners and once-fanboys have been spotted on social media all weekend echoing the thoughts of these owners:

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    Sending liberals and Tesla owners further into a rage alike will be the fact that Sen. Ted Cruz openly petitioned for Musk to move his operation to Texas over the weekend, as well: 

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    If that isn’t enough to trigger the left, perhaps this is: on Monday morning, Treasury Secretary Steve Mnuchin commented that California should “act to ensure Tesla can operate” and that he “agreed with Musk” on California’s re-opening. 

    Finally, mid-day on Monday, Hidalgo County Texas Judge Richard F. Cortez penned an official letter to Musk telling him that the county was “pro-business” and “ready to accommodate” him.

    “What we no longer have is a shelter at home mandate,” the letter says:

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    Recall, yesterday, we pointed out how the world was turning on Elon Musk after he decided he was going to pick up and leave California, after the state would not bow to his demands for re-opening. 

    For now, it still looks as though  it is Tesla’s intention to re-open Fremont when Elon Musk, not the government, says so. 


    Tyler Durden

    Mon, 05/11/2020 – 20:45

  • McGovern: Twin Pillars Of Russiagate Crumble
    McGovern: Twin Pillars Of Russiagate Crumble

    Authored by Ray McGovern via ConsortiumNews.com,

    House Intelligence Committee documents released Thursday reveal that the committee was told two and half years ago that the FBI had no concrete evidence that Russia hacked Democratic National Committee computers to filch the DNC emails published by WikiLeaks in July 2016.

    The until-now-buried, closed-door testimony came on Dec. 5, 2017 from Shawn Henry, a protégé of former FBI Director Robert Mueller (from 2001 to 2012), for whom Henry served as head of the Bureau’s cyber crime investigations unit.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Via Reuters

    Henry retired in 2012 and took a senior position at CrowdStrike, the cyber security firm hired by the DNC and the Clinton campaign to investigate the cyber intrusions that occurred before the 2016 presidential election.

    The following excerpts from Henry’s testimony speak for themselves. The dialogue is not a paragon of clarity; but if read carefully, even cyber neophytes can understand:

    * * *

    Ranking Member Mr. [Adam] Schiff: Do you know the date on which the Russians exfiltrated the data from the DNC? … when would that have been?

    Mr. Henry: Counsel just reminded me that, as it relates to the DNC, we have indicators that data was exfiltrated from the DNC, but we have no indicators that it was exfiltrated (sic).… There are times when we can see data exfiltrated, and we can say conclusively. But in this case, it appears it was set up to be exfiltrated, but we just don’t have the evidence that says it actually left.

    Mr. [Chris] Stewart of Utah: Okay. What about the emails that everyone is so, you know, knowledgeable of? Were there also indicators that they were prepared but not evidence that they actually were exfiltrated?

    Mr. Henry: There’s not evidence that they were actually exfiltrated. There’s circumstantial evidence … but no evidence that they were actually exfiltrated. …

    Mr. Stewart: But you have a much lower degree of confidence that this data actually left than you do, for example, that the Russians were the ones who breached the security?

    Mr. Henry: There is circumstantial evidence that that data was exfiltrated off the network.

    Mr. Stewart: And circumstantial is less sure than the other evidence you’ve indicated. …

    Mr. Henry: “We didn’t have a sensor in place that saw data leave. We said that the data left based on the circumstantial evidence. That was the conclusion that we made.

    In answer to a follow-up query on this line of questioning, Henry delivered this classic:

    “Sir, I was just trying to be factually accurate, that we didn’t see the data leave, but we believe it left, based on what we saw.

    Inadvertently highlighting the tenuous underpinning for CrowdStrike’s “belief” that Russia hacked the DNC emails, Henry added: “There are other nation-states that collect this type of intelligence for sure, but the – what we would call the tactics and techniques were consistent with what we’d seen associated with the Russian state.”

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    Not Transparent

    Try as one may, some of the testimony remains opaque. Part of the problem is ambiguity in the word “exfiltration.”

    The word can denote (1) transferring data from a computer via the Internet (hacking) or (2) copying data physically to an external storage device with intent to leak it.

    As the Veteran Intelligence Professionals for Sanity has been reporting for more than three years, metadata and other hard forensic evidence indicate that the DNC emails were not hacked – by Russia or anyone else.

    Rather, they were copied onto an external storage device (probably a thumb drive) by someone with access to DNC computers. Besides, any hack over the Internet would almost certainly have been discovered by the dragnet coverage of the National Security Agency and its cooperating foreign intelligence services.

    Henry testifies that “it appears it [the theft of DNC emails] was set up to be exfiltrated, but we just don’t have the evidence that says it actually left.”

    This, in VIPS view, suggests that someone with access to DNC computers “set up” selected emails for transfer to an external storage device – a thumb drive, for example. The Internet is not needed for such a transfer. Use of the Internet would have been detected, enabling Henry to pinpoint any “exfiltration” over that network.

    Bill Binney, a former NSA technical director and a VIPs member, filed a sworn affidavit in the Roger Stone case. Binney said: “WikiLeaks did not receive stolen data from the Russian government. Intrinsic metadata in the publicly available files on WikiLeaks demonstrates that the files acquired by WikiLeaks were delivered in a medium such as a thumb drive.”

    The So-Called Intelligence Community Assessment

    There is not much good to be said about the embarrassingly evidence-impoverished Intelligence Community Assessment (ICA) of Jan. 6, 2017 accusing Russia of hacking the DNC.

    But the ICA did include two passages that are highly relevant and demonstrably true:

    (1) In introductory remarks on “cyber incident attribution”, the authors of the ICA made a highly germane point: “The nature of cyberspace makes attribution of cyber operations difficult but not impossible. Every kind of cyber operation – malicious or not – leaves a trail.”

    (2) “When analysts use words such as ‘we assess’ or ‘we judge,’ [these] are not intended to imply that we have proof that shows something to be a fact.… Assessments are based on collected information, which is often incomplete or fragmentary… High confidence in a judgment does not imply that the assessment is a fact or a certainty; such judgments might be wrong.” [And one might add that they commonly ARE wrong when analysts succumb to political pressure, as was the case with the ICA.]

    The intelligence-friendly corporate media, nonetheless, immediately awarded the status of Holy Writ to the misnomered “Intelligence Community Assessment” (it was a rump effort prepared by “handpicked analysts” from only CIA, FBI, and NSA), and chose to overlook the banal, full-disclosure-type caveats embedded in the assessment itself.

    Then National Intelligence Director James Clapper and the directors of the CIA, FBI, and NSA briefed President Obama on the ICA on Jan. 5, 2017, the day before they gave it personally to President-elect Donald Trump.

    On Jan. 18, 2017, at his final press conference, Obama saw fit to use lawyerly language on the key issue of how the DNC emails got to WikiLeaks, in an apparent effort to cover his own derriere.

    Obama: “The conclusions of the intelligence community with respect to the Russian hacking were not conclusive as to whether WikiLeaks was witting or not in being the conduit through which we heard about the DNC e-mails that were leaked.”

    So we ended up with “inconclusive conclusions” on that admittedly crucial point. What Obama was saying is that U.S. intelligence did not know — or professed not to know —exactly how the alleged Russian transfer to WikiLeaks was supposedly made, whether through a third party, or cutout, and he muddied the waters by first saying it was a hack, and then a leak.

    From the very outset, in the absence of any hard evidence, from NSA or from its foreign partners, of an Internet hack of the DNC emails, the claim that “the Russians gave the DNC emails to WikiLeaks” rested on thin gruel.

    In November 2018 at a public forum, I asked Clapper to explain why President Obama still had serious doubts in late Jan. 2017, less than two weeks after Clapper and the other intelligence chiefs had thoroughly briefed the outgoing president about their “high-confidence” findings.

    Clapper replied: “I cannot explain what he [Obama] said or why. But I can tell you we’re, we’re pretty sure we know, or knew at the time, how WikiLeaks got those emails.” Pretty sure?

    Preferring CrowdStrike; ’Splaining to Congress

    CrowdStrike already had a tarnished reputation for credibility when the DNC and Clinton campaign chose it to do work the FBI should have been doing to investigate how the DNC emails got to WikiLeaks. It had asserted that Russians hacked into a Ukrainian artillery app, resulting in heavy losses of howitzers in Ukraine’s struggle with separatists supported by Russia. A Voice of America report explained why CrowdStrike was forced to retract that claim.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Comey briefs Obama, June 2016 (Flickr)

    Why did FBI Director James Comey not simply insist on access to the DNC computers? Surely he could have gotten the appropriate authorization. In early January 2017, reacting to media reports that the FBI never asked for access, Comey told the Senate Intelligence Committee there were “multiple requests at different levels” for access to the DNC servers.

    “Ultimately what was agreed to is the private company would share with us what they saw,” he said. Comey described CrowdStrike as a “highly respected” cybersecurity company.

    Asked by committee Chairman Richard Burr (R-NC) whether direct access to the servers and devices would have helped the FBI in their investigation, Comey said it would have. “Our forensics folks would always prefer to get access to the original device or server that’s involved, so it’s the best evidence,” he said.

    Five months later, after Comey had been fired, Burr gave him a Mulligan in the form of a few kid-gloves, clearly well-rehearsed, questions:

    BURR: And the FBI, in this case, unlike other cases that you might investigate – did you ever have access to the actual hardware that was hacked? Or did you have to rely on a third party to provide you the data that they had collected?

    COMEY: In the case of the DNC,… we did not have access to the devices themselves. We got relevant forensic information from a private party, a high-class entity, that had done the work. But we didn’t get direct access.

    BURR: But no content?

    COMEY: Correct.

    BURR: Isn’t content an important part of the forensics from a counterintelligence standpoint?

    COMEY: It is, although what was briefed to me by my folks – the people who were my folks at the time is that they had gotten the information from the private party that they needed to understand the intrusion by the spring of 2016.

    * * *

    In June last year it was revealed that CrowdStrike never produced an un-redacted or final forensic report for the government because the FBI never required it to, according to the Justice Department.

    By any normal standard, former FBI Director Comey would now be in serious legal trouble, as should Clapper, former CIA Director John Brennan, et al. Additional evidence of FBI misconduct under Comey seems to surface every week – whether the abuses of FISA, misconduct in the case against Gen. Michael Flynn, or misleading everyone about Russian hacking of the DNC. If I were attorney general, I would declare Comey a flight risk and take his passport. And I would do the same with Clapper and Brennan.

    Schiff: Every Confidence, But No Evidence

    Both pillars of Russiagate–collusion and a Russian hack– have now fairly crumbled.

    Thursday’s disclosure of testimony before the House Intelligence Committee shows Chairman Adam Schiff lied not only about Trump-Putin “collusion,” [which the Mueller report failed to prove and whose allegations were based on DNC and Clinton-financed opposition research] but also about the even more basic issue of “Russian hacking” of the DNC. [See: “The Democratic Money Behind Russia-gate.”]

    Five days after Trump took office, I had an opportunity to confront Schiff personally about evidence that Russia “hacked” the DNC emails. He had repeatedly given that canard the patina of flat fact during an address at the old Hillary Clinton/John Podesta “think tank,” The Center for American Progress Action Fund.

    Fortunately, the cameras were still on when I approached Schiff during the Q&A: “You have every confidence but no evidence, is that right?” I asked him. His answer was a harbinger of things to come. This video clip may be worth the four minutes needed to watch it.

    Schiff and his partners in crime will be in for much tougher treatment if Trump allows Attorney General Barr and US Attorney John Durham to bring their investigation into the origins of Russia-gate to a timely conclusion. Barr’s dismissal on Thursday of charges against Flynn, after released FBI documents revealed that a perjury trap was set for him to keep Russiagate going, may be a sign of things to come.

    Given the timid way Trump has typically bowed to intelligence and law enforcement officials, including those who supposedly report to him, however, one might rather expect that, after a lot of bluster, he will let the too-big-to-imprison ones off the hook. The issues are now drawn; the evidence is copious; will the Deep State, nevertheless, be able to prevail this time?


    Tyler Durden

    Mon, 05/11/2020 – 20:45

  • Luxury Real Estate Suffers Price Declines, Suffocated By Social Distancing And Lockdowns 
    Luxury Real Estate Suffers Price Declines, Suffocated By Social Distancing And Lockdowns 

    Deutsche Bank published a new note this week, suggesting its global forecast “has turned decidedly gloomier…[M]uch of the world has struggled mightily with the virus, and the economic fallout…we now see global GDP falling 10% in Q2 and remaining well below pre-virus levels through most of next year.” If correct, the bank’s latest forecast implies that a recovery in the global economy could take several years. With that being said, luxury real estate across the world will likely get marked down through this unprecedented economic collapse. A new report via Knight Frank LLP indicates that a decline in luxury real estate could already be underway.

    Bloomberg, citing Knight Frank’s latest global real estate report, says luxury homes in New York, London, Hong Kong, Vancouver, and Singapore recorded price declines in the first quarter on a YoY basis as the pandemic began to destroy complex supply chains and entire economies around the world. 

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Knight Frank said the virus pandemic “was in its nascent stages in the U.K. and the U.S., meaning it is likely to be the second quarter before we can accurately gauge the full impact.” Knight Frank has a point because when it comes to actual impacts of aggregate demand getting completely crushed across the world because of lockdowns, and entire supply chains crumbling to the ground, full effects won’t be realized until the second half of the year. 

    But in the meantime, Knight Frank provides a full list of luxury home markets where noticeable price declined have been seen in Nairobi, Bangkok, New York, St. Petersburg, Dublin, Vancouver, Kuala Lumpur, Beijing, and London. On the flip side, home prices in some cities, including Manila, Taipei, Stockholm, and Tokyo, saw advances during the quarter. 

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Knight Frank said luxury real estate markets would stagnate as social distancing measures and travel limitations will likely be in effect for many parts of the world for the foreseeable future. 

    “With travel restrictions firmly in place and with many solicitors and land registries largely closed, we expect the second quarter to see a marked drop in sales volumes,” it said. Prices, on the other hand, may display more resilience.

    As the pandemic unfolds, rich people aren’t hanging out in their million dollars flats, they’re weather the virus storm in doomsday bunkersDid coronavirus top tick the global luxury real estate market?


    Tyler Durden

    Mon, 05/11/2020 – 20:25

Digest powered by RSS Digest

Today’s News 11th May 2020

  • Montenegro Advertises Itself As "Corona-Free" Vacation Destination
    Montenegro Advertises Itself As “Corona-Free” Vacation Destination

    Popular European tourist vacations like Cinque Terre in Italy and the French Riviera in southeastern France are about to have some serious competition on their hands.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    While the global travel and leisure industry takes a massive hit, some small countries are hoping to cash in on the wave of coronavirus hysteria that’s expected to curtail travel plans for months, if not years, to come.

    Al Jazeera reports that Montenegro, a tiny Balkan state, has advertised itself as a holiday destination where the coronavirus pandemic will soon no longer pose a threat. The country’s premier has vowed to vanquish the virus, which hasn’t spread widely in the Balkans region, before the traditional summer holiday season begins on July 1.

    “Montenegro is on its way to becoming a CoronaFree destination!” tweeted Prime Minister Dusko Markovic on Sunday.

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    Premier Markovic bragged that the country has shown it can handle the virus.

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    The government in Podgorica recently indicated that it expects the holiday season to start on July 1.

    To be sure, some resorts haven’t yet decided on whether they will reopen for the summer season. One exclusive resort in Portonovi is currently planning to reopen Oct. 1.

    Still, that’s probably much earlier than other European destinations.


    Tyler Durden

    Mon, 05/11/2020 – 02:45

  • Italy: China's Trojan Horse Into Europe
    Italy: China’s Trojan Horse Into Europe

    Authored Giulio Meotti via The Gatestone InStitute,

    A few days after China had announced it was sending medical supplies to Italy, Chinese state media aired pictures of Italians on balconies and streets applauding the Chinese national anthem. “In Rome, with the Chinese anthem playing, some Italians chanted ‘Grazie, Cina!’ on their balconies, & their neighbors applauded along”, wrote Zhao Lijian, the spokesman for China’s foreign ministry who shamefully and wrongly suggested that the U.S. military had brought the Covid-19 to Wuhan.

    China presented itself in the role of the savior, willing to rush to the bedside of the sick patient Italy.

    Now a Financial Times investigation reveals that those videos were manipulated as part of Beijing’s coronavirus propaganda. Hashtags #ThanksChina and #GoChina&Italy were further generated by bots. A report by the Carnegie Endowment called Italy “a target destination for China’s propaganda”.

    An article called, “Why the Covid-19 epidemic is so politicized” and posted on the Chinese embassy website in Paris, said, “Some Westerners are beginning to lose confidence in liberal democracy” and “some [Western countries] have become psychologically weak”.

    Antoine Bondaz, a researcher at France’s Foundation for Strategic Research, told Politico:

    “China considers Europe the soft belly of the West. In their logic, there is the West, and in it the U.S. that will oppose China for structural and ideological reasons, and their European allies that need to be neutral in case of conflict between China and the U.S.”

    According to Lt. Gen. (ret.) H.R. McMaster, President Donald Trump’s former national security adviser, in his new book Battlegrounds: The Fight to Defend the Free World, Chinese leaders “believe they have a narrow window of strategic opportunity to strengthen their rule and revise the international order in their favor”.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    There is now a huge risk that Italy is becoming “China’s Trojan horse into Europe“.

    A leading French official, Pierre-Henri d’Argenson, wrote in Le Figaro that “Europe has now become the buffer zone for the confrontation between China and the United States”. Beijing chose Italy as its soft belly in Europe and is following its script.

    In April 2019, the Italian government of Prime Minister Giuseppe Conte was the first G7 country to sign a Memorandum of Understanding on China’s “Belt and Road Initiative” during a state visit by President Xi Jinping. According to an analysis by The Economist, the Chinese Belt and Road plan could surpass the Marshall Plan, by which the US revived Europe’s war ravaged economies.

    Italy has a government coalition led by the Five Star Movement, an extremely pro-Chinese party, whose founder Beppe Grillo has been spotted frequently at the Chinese embassy in Rome. As the European Council on Foreign Relations reported, “in Italy business and political lobbies for China have been on the rise”. The former PM Matteo Renzi has visited Beijing for conferences.

    Five years ago, China National Chemical Corp bought Pirelli, a 143-year-old Italian company, and the world’s fifth-largest tire maker. A study published by KPMG before the Pirelli deal revealed Chinese acquisitions in Italy have totaled 10 billion euros in five years (in a total of 13 billion euros investments). A third of foreign purchases in Italy are Chinese. The goal is to turn Italy into “Europe’s top destination for highly coveted investment from China”.

    Now, China is trying to dominate southern Europe’s infrastructure. China was already granted a license to run Greece’s largest seaport, Athens’ Piraeus harbor, which Beijing plans to turn into Europe’s biggest commercial harbor. Then China started to project its expansion in Italy’s ports, where four major ports are also in line for Chinese investments. Zeno D’Agostino, the president of Trieste’s northern port, says that “China is opening because it feels strong”.

    Italy’s political appeasement of China was on display during the fatal early days of the coronavirus crisis.

    On January 21, Italy’s culture and tourism minister hosted a Chinese delegation for a concert at the National Academy of Santa Cecilia to inaugurate the year of Italy-China Culture and Tourism. Michele Geraci, Italy’s former undersecretary for development, was not sure that was his place. “Are we sure we want to do this?”, Geraci said looking at his colleagues. “Should we be here today?”. A few days later, in many Italian cities, such as Florence and Prato, where there is a Chinese manufacturing stronghold, mayors and local communities promoted the initiative, “hug a Chinese” to fight xenophobia and racism.

    In Rome, Italy’s President, Sergio Mattarella, visited a school that has a high percentage of Chinese students to counter “discrimination” and Nicola Zingaretti, the leader of the Democratic Party, met the Chinese ambassador in Rome. Meanwhile, Italian televisions organized live tastings of Chinese products. That was Italy’s fatal initial mistake: fighting racism instead of the virus, which only a few days later would devastate the country.

    China has been able to brainwash Italian public opinion. In a poll published April 17, 50% of Italians consider China a “friend” (just 17% of Italians think as much of the United States). And in the race for the global power to which Italy should be allied China is ahead of the US, 36% to 30%.

    Italy’s foreign minister, Luigi Di Maio, welcomed a plane-load of Chinese medical supplies on March 12. “We will remember those who were close to us in this difficult period”, Di Maio said. It is not necessary, China will remind them.

    Walter Ricciardi, an advisor to the World Health Organization (WHO) and the Italian government, tweeted: “Thanks China!”.

    We know now that while the Chinese regime misled the world about the contagiousness of Covid-19, it stockpiled medical supplies. As the editor of the German BILD wrote in a letter to Chinese president Xi:

    “I suppose you consider it a great ‘friendship’ when you now generously send masks around the world. This isn’t friendship, I would call it imperialism hidden behind a smile – a Trojan Horse”.

    Not a single Italian minister or official blamed China for the cover up of the epidemic or causing witnesses to “disappear“.

    “For the first time in many years, Western countries united behind the request to China for clarifications on how Covid-19 was born and then spread”, Paolo Mieli wrote in a front-page editorial for Italy’s largest newspaper, Il Corriere della Sera. Mieli mentioned the United States, Australia, United Kingdom, France and Germany.

    “Who is missing? Italy, the only country in the Western world to have welcomed half a million masks sent to us (for a fee) from China with a truly excessive blaze”.

    The world-renowned Italian textile industry was one of the major victims of a globalization expansion led by Chinese dishonest economic dumping. China is now reducing Italy to a setting to help spread and implement its propaganda and will to power. As Italian analyst Francesco Galietti wrote, Italy is going to become “the target of a Chinese ‘charm offensive’, a combination of hard cash and ‘soft power’, money and influence”. He notes as an example the People’s Bank of China:

    “It has steadily amassed stakes above 2 percent (the disclosure threshold in Italy) in a slew of Italy’s largest shareholder-owned companies, including FCA (the Fiat Chrysler group), Telecom Italia, and Generali Group, Italy’s largest insurer”.

    China has also invested in strategic Italian energy entities such as Eni and Enel and Italian oil services group Saipem.

    This economic penetration will also have immense security consequences. During the first days of the Covid-19 epidemic, Italy, which is being lured by the promise of a $3 billion Huawei investment in its telecommunications system, announced that it has no plans to stop Chinese telecom firms playing a role in the country’s future 5G network. It is a project that US Attorney General William P. Barr defined a “monumental danger“.

    “The geopolitical effects of the pandemic could be significant,” said NATO Secretary-General Jens Stoltenberg.

    “Some allies (are) more vulnerable for situations where critical infrastructure can be sold out” in a Chinese “buying spree”.

    US Secretary of Defense Mark Esper has also warned that China will exploit the virus “to further their own interests and try to sow division in the Alliance and in Europe”.

    Italy is most vulnerable to this Chinese offensive. It is one of the most indebted countries in the world and has an economic growth close to zero. It is also one of Europe’s most unstable and fragile governments and had one of Europe’s highest coronavirus death tolls — an experience that an Italian nurse compared to a “world war“.

    Italy is now Europe’s sick man. Due to the Chinese coronavirus crisis, the country will see a collapse of its GDP (-9.5%) and the explosion of its public debt which is set to 160% of gross domestic product — the highest since World War II. Beijing knows this and claims that “Italy has many economic problems, Europe is in crisis and the Belt and Road Initiative is the only major global investment plan”.

    “The possibility that Europe will become a museum or a cultural amusement park for the nouveau riche of globalization is not completely out of the question”said the late historian Walter Laqueur.

    Rome’s dramatic fall could mean Beijing’s equally dramatic rise. It is a huge warning for the West.


    Tyler Durden

    Mon, 05/11/2020 – 02:00

  • Watch: 'Skynet'-Like Robot Dog Patrols Singapore's Parks To Ensure Humans Are Social Distancing
    Watch: ‘Skynet’-Like Robot Dog Patrols Singapore’s Parks To Ensure Humans Are Social Distancing

    If there’s one thing we try to keep a eye on, it’s the potential use of this global pandemic for governments to try and unleash new and “interesting” ways of surveillance. 

    Thus, our eyes and ears perked up when we learned that Singapore was now going to be using robot dogs to patrol public areas and make sure that citizens are keeping their distance from one another. Municipal authorities are using Spot, a four legged robot dog made by Boston Dynamics, to remind visitors to parks to keep a safe distance from one another. 

    The robo-doggo officially started patrol at Bishan-Ang Mo Kio Park on Friday as part of a two week trial, according to The Verge. Spot is fitted with cameras that are used to estimate the number of visitors in the park, but Singapore says it won’t collect personal data or use the video to identify individuals. Sure.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Spot also comes equipped with a remote control, built-in sensors and will be accompanied by a guide. If the trial is deemed a success, Spot (and likely others like him) could become mainstays in the country’s public parks. The robot “lowers the risk of exposure to the virus,” the National Parks Board said, using the virus to shoehorn its agenda forward. Signs like the one above warn park visitors not to disrupt robot at work. 

    China and the U.S. have similarly experimented with drones to remind people to social distance. “Please maintain a safe distance between you and other people,” one robot from Knightscope tells people. 

    Spot is also undergoing trials in hospitals to help with coronavirus treatments and delivery robots are helping shipping and logistics companies. As The Verge notes, patrolling the parks and reminding people to social distance “may only be the beginning” for these robots. The pandemic is being called a “new opportunity” for robotmakers to deploy their creations.

    While the dog is only in charge of pandemic-related rules enforcement for now, we can envision that it won’t be too long before they are enforcing other kinds of rules – for our own safety and good, undoubtedly – as well. 

    You can watch Spot on patrol in this video:


    Tyler Durden

    Mon, 05/11/2020 – 01:00

  • Putin's Call For A New System & The 1944 Battle Of Bretton Woods: Lessons For Victory Day
    Putin’s Call For A New System & The 1944 Battle Of Bretton Woods: Lessons For Victory Day

    Authored by Matthew Ehret via The Saker blog,

    As today’s world teeters on the brink of a financial collapse greater than anything the world experienced in either 1923 Weimar or the 1929 Great depression, a serious discussion has been initiated by leaders of Russia and China regarding the terms of the new system which must inevitably replace the currently dying neo-liberal order. Most recently, Vladimir Putin re-initiated his January 16, 2020 call for a new emergency economic conference to deal with the looming disaster based upon a live session with representatives of the five nuclear powers of the UN Security Council.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    While Putin’s commitment for this new system is premised upon multi-polar principles of cooperation and respect of national sovereignty, the financial oligarchy and broader deep state structures infesting the western nations who have initiated this crisis over the course of decades of globalization have called for their own version of a new system.

    This new system as we have seen promoted by the likes of the Bank of England and leading technocrats over the past year, is based upon an anti-Nation State, unipolar system which typically goes by the term “Green New Deal”. In other words, this is a system ruled by a technocratic elite managing the reduction of world population through the monetization of carbon reduction practices under a Global Government.

    No matter how you look at it, a new system will be created out of the ashes of the currently dying world order. The question is only: Will it benefit the oligarchy or the people?

    In order to inform the necessary decision making going into this emergency conference, it is useful to revisit the last such emergency conference that defined the terms of a world economic architecture in July 1944 so that similar mistakes that were then made by anti-imperialist forces are not made once more.

    What Was the Bretton Woods?

    As it was becoming apparent that the war would be soon drawing to a close, a major fight broke out during a two week conference in Bretton Woods New Hampshire where representative of 44 nations convened to establish the terms of the new post-war system. The question was: Would this new system be governed by those British Imperial principles similar to those that had dominated the world before the war began or would they be shaped by a community of sovereign nation states?

    On the one side, figures allied to American President Franklin Delano Roosevelt’s vision for an anti-Imperial world order lined up behind FDR’s champion Harry Dexter White while those powerful forces committed to maintaining the structures of a bankers’ dictatorship (Britain was always primarily a banker’s empire) lined up behind the figure of John Maynard Keynes.

    John Maynard Keynes was a leading Fabian Society controller and treasurer of the British Eugenics Association (which served as a model for Hitler’s Eugenics protocols before and during the war). During the Bretton Woods Conference, Keynes pushed hard for the new system to be premised upon a one world currency controlled entirely by the Bank of England known as the Bancor. He proposed a global bank called the Clearing Union to be controlled by the Bank of England which would use the Bancor (exchangeable with national currencies) and serve as unit of account to measure trade surpluses or deficits under the mathematical mandate of maintaining “equilibrium” of the system.

    Harry Dexter White on the other hand fought relentlessly to keep the City of London out of the drivers’ seat of global finance and instead defended the institution of national sovereignty and sovereign currencies based on long term scientific and technological growth. Although White and FDR demanded that U.S. dollars become the reserve currency in the new world system of fixed exchange rates, it was not done to create a “new American Empire” as most modern analysts have assumed, but rather was designed to use America’s status as the strongest productive global power to ensure an anti-speculative stability among international currencies which entirely lacked stability in the wake of WWII.

    Their fight for fixed exchange rates and principles of “parity pricing” were designed by FDR and White strictly around the need to abolish the forms of chaotic flux of the un-regulated markets which made speculation rampant under British Free Trade and destroyed the capacity to think and plan for the sort of long term development needed to modernize nation states. Theirs was not a drive for “mathematical equilibrium” but rather a drive to “end poverty” through REAL physical economic growth of colonies who would thereby win real economic independence.

    As figures like Henry Wallace (FDR’s loyal Vice President and 1948 3rd party candidate), Representative William Wilkie (FDR’s republican lieutenant and New Dealer), and Dexter White all advocated repeatedly, the mechanisms of the World Bank, IMF, and United Nations were meant to become drivers of an internationalization of the New Deal which transformed America from a backwater cesspool in 1932 to becoming a modern advanced manufacturing powerhouse 12 years later. All of these Interntional New Dealers were loud advocates of US-Russia –China leadership in the post war world which is a forgotten fact of paramount importance.

    In his 1944 book Our Job in the Pacific, Wallace said:

     “It is vital to the United States, it is vital to China and it is vital to Russia that there be peaceful and friendly relations between China and Russia, China and America and Russia and America. China and Russia Complement and supplement each other on the continent of Asia and the two together complement and supplement America’s position in the Pacific.”

    Contradicting the mythos that FDR was a Keynesian, FDR’s assistant Francis Perkins recorded the 1934 interaction between the two men when Roosevelt told her:

     “I saw your friend Keynes. He left a whole rigmarole of figures. He must be a mathematician rather than a political economist.” In response Keynes, who was then trying to coopt the intellectual narrative of the New Deal stated he had “supposed the President was more literate, economically speaking.”

    In his 1936 German edition of his General Theory of Employment, Interest and Money, Keynes wrote:

     “For I confess that much of the following book is illustrated and expounded mainly with reference to the conditions existing in the Anglo Saxon countries. Nevertheless, the theory of output as a whole, which is what the following book purports to provide, is much more easily adapted to the conditions of a totalitarian state.”

    While Keynes represented the “soft imperialism” for the “left” of Britain’s intelligentsia, Churchill represented the hard unapologetic imperialism of the Old, less sophisticated empire that preferred the heavy fisted use of brute force to subdue the savages. Both however were unapologetic racists and fascists (Churchill even wrote admiringly of Mussolini’s black shirts) and both represented the most vile practices of British Imperialism.

    FDR’s Forgotten Anti-Colonial Vision Revited

    FDR’s battle with Churchill on the matter of empire is better known than his differences with Keynes whom he only met on a few occasions. This well documented clash was best illustrated in his son/assistant Elliot Roosevelt’s book As He Saw It (1946) who quoted his father:

    “I’ve tried to make it clear … that while we’re [Britain’s] allies and in it to victory by their side, they must never get the idea that we’re in it just to help them hang on to their archaic, medieval empire ideas … I hope they realize they’re not senior partner; that we are not going to sit by and watch their system stultify the growth of every country in Asia and half the countries in Europe to boot.”

    FDR continued: 

    “The colonial system means war. Exploit the resources of an India, a Burma, a Java; take all the wealth out of these countries, but never put anything back into them, things like education, decent standards of living, minimum health requirements–all you’re doing is storing up the kind of trouble that leads to war. All you’re doing is negating the value of any kind of organizational structure for peace before it begins.”

    Writing from Washington in a hysteria to Churchill, Foreign Secretary Anthony Eden said that Roosevelt ”contemplates the dismantling of the British and Dutch empires.”

    Unfortunately for the world, FDR died on April 12, 1945. A coup within the Democratic establishment, then replete with Fabians and Rhodes Scholars, had already ensured that Henry Wallace would lose the 1944 Vice Presidency in favor of Anglophile Wall Street Stooge Harry Truman. Truman was quick to reverse all of FDR’s intentions, cleansing American intelligence of all remaining patriots with the shutdown of the OSS and creation of the CIA, the launching of un-necessary nuclear bombs on Japan and establishment of the Anglo-American special relationship. Truman’s embrace of Churchill’s New World Order destroyed the positive relationship with Russia and China which FDR, White and Wallace sought and soon America had become Britain’s dumb giant.

    The Post 1945 Takeover of the Modern Deep State

    FDR warned his son before his death of his understanding of the British takeover of American foreign policy, but still could not reverse this agenda. His son recounted his father’s ominous insight:

    “You know, any number of times the men in the State Department have tried to conceal messages to me, delay them, hold them up somehow, just because some of those career diplomats over there aren’t in accord with what they know I think. They should be working for Winston. As a matter of fact, a lot of the time, they are [working for Churchill]. Stop to think of ’em: any number of ’em are convinced that the way for America to conduct its foreign policy is to find out what the British are doing and then copy that!” I was told… six years ago, to clean out that State Department. It’s like the British Foreign Office….”

    Before being fired from Truman’s cabinet for his advocacy of US-Russia friendship during the Cold War, Wallace stated:

     “American fascism” which has come to be known in recent years as the Deep State. “Fascism in the postwar inevitably will push steadily for Anglo-Saxon imperialism and eventually for war with Russia. Already American fascists are talking and writing about this conflict and using it as an excuse for their internal hatreds and intolerances toward certain races, creeds and classes.”

    In his 1946 Soviet Asia Mission, Wallace said “Before the blood of our boys is scarcely dry on the field of battle, these enemies of peace try to lay the foundation for World War III. These people must not succeed in their foul enterprise. We must offset their poison by following the policies of Roosevelt in cultivating the friendship of Russia in peace as well as in war.”

    Indeed this is exactly what occurred. Dexter White’s three year run as head of the International Monetary Fund was clouded by his constant attacks as being a Soviet stooge which haunted him until the day he died in 1948 after a grueling inquisition session at the House of Un-American Activities. White had previously been supporting the election of his friend Wallace for the presidency alongside fellow patriots Paul Robeson and Albert Einstein.

    Today the world has captured a second chance to revive the FDR’s dream of an anti-colonial world. In the 21st century, this great dream has taken the form of the New Silk Road, led by Russia and China (and joined by a growing chorus of nations yearning to exit the invisible cage of colonialism).

    If western nations wish to survive the oncoming collapse, then they would do well to heed Putin’s call for a New International system, join the BRI, and reject the Keynesian technocrats advocating a false “New Bretton Woods” and “Green New Deal”.


    Tyler Durden

    Mon, 05/11/2020 – 00:00

  • Saudi Arabia Running Out Of Money: Riyadh To Slash Spending By $27 Billion, Suspend Cost Of Living Allowance
    Saudi Arabia Running Out Of Money: Riyadh To Slash Spending By $27 Billion, Suspend Cost Of Living Allowance

    Last weekend we quoted Finance Minister Mohammed Al-Jadaan, who warned that the world’s biggest oil exporter hasn’t witnessed “a crisis of this severity” in decades, adding that government spending will have to be cut “very deeply”, something we touched on previously.

    We didn’t have long to wait, because early on Monday, the Saudi government – which appears to be running out of money fast – ordered government spending cuts including suspending the cost of living allowance amid broad austerity measures for about $26.6 billion and a tripling of the value-added tax as part of measures aimed to shore up state finances, which have been battered by low oil prices and the coronavirus.

    “Cost of living allowance will be suspended as of June first, and the value added tax will be increased to 15% from 5% as of July first,”  said the Saudi finance minister according to the state news agency, suggesting Saudi Arabia is on the verge of a full-blown fiscal crisis.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Saudi Finance minister Mohammed Al-Jadaan

    Other measures includes canceling or delaying some operational and capital expenditures for a number of government agencies and reducing the credits planned for a number of state initiatives, including the Vision 2030 project, just as we predicted.

    “The covid-19 challenges have led to a decline in government revenues, and pressure on public finances to levels that are difficult to deal with later without harming the kingdom’s macroeconomics and public finances in the medium and long term,” Al-Jadaan said. “Therefore more spending cuts must be achieved, and measures to support the stability of non-oil revenues.”

    Already under a strict curfew to contain the spread of the coronavirus pandemic, the world’s largest oil exporter has been affected by the oil price rout and global crude production cuts to help balance the market. The price of Brent crude crashed by more than 50% in March, contributing to a record $27 billion monthly drop in the Saudi central bank’s net foreign assets.

    Adding insult to injury, last week we warned that the Kingdom may soon be dealing with a funding crisis as well: the collapse in crude prices and the government’s drop in foreign reserves, which plunged by a record $27BN in March…

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    … is putting more pressure on the Saudi riyal. For now, however, prices for 12-month dollar-riyal forward contracts are well short of their all-time high reached in 2016.

    Commenting on the drop in reserves, Al Jazeera said that when the kingdom last stared down the crash in crude in 2014, it wielded reserves that peaked at over $735 billion. The stockpile was down by over a third just three years later, channeled almost entirely toward deficit spending.

    And now, Saudi Arabia is blowing through its reserves at the fastest pace in at least two decades, even as the government is barely using the holdings to cover fiscal needs. Following its debut in international bond markets in 2016, borrowing covered most of the budget deficit in the first quarter.

    As a result, with its buffers already fragile and the economy hammered by the coronavirus, Saudi Arabia is looking to scale back spending and rely more on debt.

    There was some good news: recently Goldman Sachs has predicted that the central bank’s reserves, down more than 100 billion riyals ($27 billion) in March alone, will stabilize soon. “Despite a further anticipated decline in oil revenues in the second quarter, we expect the rate of reserve burn to slow,” Farouk Soussa, a Goldman Sachs economist, said in a report.

    Alas, judging by the Saudi action, Riyadh is clearly far more concerned that the pain will straight well beyond the second quarter


    Tyler Durden

    Sun, 05/10/2020 – 23:36

  • Pompeo Likens Iran To Nazis On 2nd Anniversary Of US Nuclear Deal Exit
    Pompeo Likens Iran To Nazis On 2nd Anniversary Of US Nuclear Deal Exit

    Perhaps attempting to ensure the anti-Iran ‘maximum pressure’ campaign remains front and center, even in the midst of a pandemic and historic unemployment, Secretary of State Mike Pompeo has resorted to the one of the most common — and we might note laziest labels for America’s ‘enemies’. 

    In official statements Saturday, and on the same day Russia and other former Soviet states mark WWII Victory Day, Pompeo made reference to the United States and our allies defeat of Hitler’s Germany, while immediately pivoting to Iran, likening the Islamic Republic to a Nazi regime

    The statement specifically marked the second anniversary of the Trump administration’s withdrawal from the Iran nuclear deal (JCPOA), reached by Tehran and six other state signatories in 2015.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    “Seventy-five years ago, the United States and our allies stood together to rid the world of the Nazis and their hateful ideology,” Pompeo said. “Today, we face a grave challenge to regional peace from another rogue regime…”

    He continued: “We call again on the international community to join us to stop the largest sponsor of Antisemitism.”

    Declaring a world a “far safer” place due to the US exit from the JCPOA, he further celebrated US-imposed sanctions on Iran as having “prevented Iran from funding and equipping terrorists with many billions of dollars.” He pledged that “we will never allow Iran to have a nuclear weapon.”

    Over a week ago Pompeo said the administration plans to extend its arms embargo on Iran: “We’re going to use every tool we can in our diplomatic capability to ensure that that prohibition on arms sales to Iran doesn’t expire [in] just a handful of months,” he told FOX. Iranian leaders responded by threatening a “crushing response” if the US goes through with the extension. 

    Unlike the Nazi German war machine in history, however, Iran doesn’t look ready to “march across Europe” or anywhere for that matter anytime soon, given its major industries, economy, and currency have been in free fall collapse, but also as for months coronavirus has ripped through the population, including impacting government leaders. 


    Tyler Durden

    Sun, 05/10/2020 – 23:30

  • Soviet-Style Government In The US: Some Will Always Bow In Enslavement
    Soviet-Style Government In The US: Some Will Always Bow In Enslavement

    Authored by Mac Slavo via SHTFplan.com,

    It doesn’t seem to matter how tyrannical the powers-that-shouldn’t-be get. Some people, in the face of freedom, will always choose slavery and the illusion of safety.  It’s sad to think human beings are willing to live their lives in such a perpetual state of fear that they end up giving up their birthright to masters.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    In an article titled “Coronavirus is Proven Some in the U.S Like Soviet-Style Governance,” by The Washington Times, much nicer terms are used than “slavery.” But “Soviet-Style governance” is the very definition of slavery. A lot of humans around the globe have opened their eyes to what government has always been (power, consolidated, and corrupted. After all, it only took 6 years for the U.S. government to violate the basic human rights listed in the  Constitution that they wrote to “keep us safe” from them), yet some think they need more chains and restrictions. If you give up power, in any amount, don’t expect to get it back. Ever. Which is why we could be seeing the beginning of the end of government.  It won’t take many more to wake up to eliminate the ruling class by disobeying.

    I have been doing my best to not give in to the fear. Freedom is far too important to give in to the ruling class’ insistence that I live my life afraid of others and some virus that they continually lie about. At the same time, information needs to get out, people need to be informed, and some things are going to come across as negative. The intention is to make sure we all know what’s going on so preparations can be made and we can stand up to this before it’s too late.  No matter what, someone will be offended or upset, but as I said before, the truth doesn’t care about your feelings.

    Others, however, are all too happy to take the side of tyranny. Maybe they think if they are good little slaves and obey the master, the virus can’t get them.  Maybe they actually believe they “authorities” care about them. It’s tough to say.  But they are falling quickly into the minority, and for that, we can all be grateful.

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    The truth is that we must take power back from anyone who has it and never give it away again.  Never be under any illusions again.  That means, once power is ours, we don’t allow another person to control us.  Ever.  And yes, that goes for cops, and the military, all the way up to the globalists who are pulling the strings.

    While it’s true that some people will always bow when commanded and always follow orders, most have actually gotten up off their knees and realized this world has a control structure in place designed to keep them complacent.  When we stand together against the order followers, it’s becoming apparent that we outnumber them by a good amount, and we can end this slavery for good.

    You cannot hold down something that was always meant to be free forever. The most you can do is create fear and use psych ops to enslave minds. Those who are free will always be because their mind belongs to themselves, and that’s what the establishment and the elite globalists fear the most.

    While The Washington Times is correct, that the “Coronavirus is Proven Some in the U.S Like Soviet-Style Governance,” the coronavirus scamdemic has also proven that a lot of people will not be enslaved and will live their lives freely and as the sovereign beings they were always meant to be.


    Tyler Durden

    Sun, 05/10/2020 – 23:00

  • Another Leg Lower Is Coming, But What Happens In 2021 Will Leave Traders Speechless
    Another Leg Lower Is Coming, But What Happens In 2021 Will Leave Traders Speechless

    In a recent report by Nordea’s Andreas Steno Larsen, the FX strategist looks at the recent surge in stocks and rhetorically asks “Happy days, right?”, to which his response is that he is not so sure, because “is it really feasible to CTRL+P profits?” (for those confused, since reality is now more absurd than the Onion, the answer is no).

    Larsen then looks at the by now infamous chart of collapsing earnings and warns that “EPS may need to be revised down at least 40-50% YoY in a quarter from now, but it seems like most equity analysts have been sipping directly from the magic central bank spring (Certainly less strong than what Elon Musk had the other day) as they look for a “mere” -20% EPS growth this year.” To Larsen this is “historically naïve, sorry, optimistic.”

    Why? Because If expected earnings are slashed in the way that Nordea finds expects, forward P/E’s will either have to find bizarre new all-time-highs (as 2020 is deemed an outlier) or else equities will have to give in again. (Larson laconically notes that he “leans towards the latter”)

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Of course, as we have observed in recent weeks – and as David Zervos made all too clear today – Wall Street no longer cares about earnings, or the economy, or frankly anything besides the Fed:

    Since there is a robust Fed liquidity backstop, and we do not know the depth or duration of the current economic downturn, spending any time looking at economic data releases or focusing on corporate earnings is a colossal waste of time. For economic data, the signal-to-noise ratio is essentially zero, and for corporate earnings, N-T results are meaningless with regard to L-T earnings potential. The item to focus on is the Fed and its direct support for the financial and non-financial IG corporate sectors. – David Zervos

    Fine, let’s assume only the Fed matters. What then?

    Well, as Paul Tudor Jones wrote in his latest market outlook which has quickly been denounced by basement-dwelling members of fintwit (who have never actually traded, but more than make up for this with a flood of vacuous opinions) due to its endorsement of gold and bitcoin as the antidote to the monetary insanity that has been unleashed, “the depth and magnitude of the economic drop-off [as a result of the coronavirus pandemic] took modern monetary theory—or the direct monetization of massive fiscal spending—from the theoretical to practice without any debate. It has happened globally with such speed that even a market veteran like myself was left speechless. Just since February, a global total of $3.9 trillion (6.6% of global GDP) has been magically created through quantitative easing.” As PTJ summarizes, “we are witnessing the Great Monetary Inflation (GMI)—an unprecedented expansion of every form of money unlike anything the developed world has ever seen.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    One place where the Fed’s unprecedented response has been very visible, is in the level of the M2 monetary aggregate.

    As PTJ writes, “in the last weekly release of the Fed’s Money Stock data, M2 rose 18.5% over a year ago, an unprecedented pace of growth in the history of the weekly time series starting from 1981. It is likely that the annual growth in M2 will continue to increase to somewhere between 20% and 40% by year-end. We got these estimates on M2 from a few of the dinosaurs who still work on Wall Street. Rarely have we ever seen so many economists dismissive of an economic metric than when we asked about their notion on this record M2 growth and its meaning. The last time M2 grew at such a high pace was during World War II, when annual M2 growth peaked at almost 27%.”

    Jones then quotes Milton Friedman who stated that “inflation is always and everywhere a monetary phenomenon that arises from a more rapid expansion in the quantity of money than in total output.” And while the relationship between inflation and M2 growth in excess of real output growth has not been stable over short horizons, PTJ notes that “it seems to hold over longer horizons. There are only a few times in history when M2 growth exceeded real output growth over a 5-year span by the same or a faster pace than is currently the case: the inflationary periods of the 1970s–80s and the late 1940s. But remember, it is reasonable to expect inflation to first fall in the coming months, given the large contraction in demand relative to supply.”

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Paul Tudor Jones then spends much of the rest of his paper ruminating on whether “a large monetary overhang in the recovery phase will eventually stoke consumer price inflation”, before concluding that it very well may, and is why the legendary hedge fund trader has now endorsed bitcoin as we described in a previous post.

    So going back to the Nordea report, Steno Larsen, like PTJ, also focuses on the of M2 only he looks at a slightly modified version of M2, specifically the ratio of M2 to the value of Treasurys and stocks. He then proceeds to observe the correlation between this adjusted M2 indicator and the annual change in the S&P500. What he finds is fascinating: if one applies a lag of roughly 8 months that it takes for M2 to affect risk prices, then the S&P is set to peak around May 20, then slump for the rest of the year before bottoming in early 2021 at which point the S&P will leave traders speechless (and the bears steamrolled), when the S&P explodes by more than 40% Y/Y as the Fed’s liquidity tsunami finally makes its way into the stock market, to wit:

    “Sell in May and go away” is maybe one of the most annoying investment clichés but it could prove to work again this year, if lead/lag patterns from the M2 development to risk asset performance persist.

    As M2 improves in the US, it is i) a result of much easier Fed policies and ii) a demand for credit that is suddenly revived due to the Corona lock-downs, but it usually also comes with important bearing for risk assets after a while. Judging from usual lead/lag patterns, lackluster M2 developments from 2019 should still act as a drag on risk assets from May and into the second half of the year, while 2021 looks to be the most “ketchupped” market ever, as the bonanza of policy measures will leave too much money chasing too few assets.

    And visually:

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    So while it is anyone’s guess if the Fed’s massive monetary injections will translate into inflation across the broader economy, and certainly into higher wages – something which at least one macro strategist believes will not be the case and as a result 2021 will be the year of the Great Stagflation – if Nordea is right, then there is no debate what happens to asset price inflation…

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    … and while those calling for new lows in the S&P will soon be proven correct, they will then experience the biggest surge in risk assets in 2021 in history as all those trillions in liquidity finally make their way to the stock market.


    Tyler Durden

    Sun, 05/10/2020 – 22:35

  • Two Collapse Experts With Cooler Heads Opine On COVID Catalysts And Human Nature
    Two Collapse Experts With Cooler Heads Opine On COVID Catalysts And Human Nature

    For those in search of unfiltered opinions, there are a few platforms worth checking out. Perhaps best known are the Joe Rogan Experience and members of the ‘intellectual dark web’ – a phrase coined by Thiel Capital managing director Eric Weinstein (who has his own podcast – The Portal).

    Another watering hole for free thinkers is the Hermitix podcast. Hosted by the ‘Meta-Nomad’ (James), topics of discussion include social engineering, collapse, occultism, primitivism and consumerism – and has featured guests such as Dmitry Orlov, John Michael Greer and ‘weirdness’ expert Erik Davis.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    About a month ago, Hermitix sat down with several collapse experts, including Dmitry Orlov – a Russian-American engineer who has written multiple books on societal decline, and John Michael Greer – who has written on collapse, ecology, religion, philosophy, oil depletion and the occult.

    In short, super interesting guys – both of whom accurately framed the coronavirus 4-6 weeks ago as overblown when the rest of the world was hoarding toilet paper and the largest job losses since the Great Depression was underway.

    Orlov posits that because China and Russia treated COVID-19 as a bioterror attack – locking down cities and restricting travel, that it “created so much angst in the West that we ‘self destructed,’ and that governments have taken advantage of global panic in order to enact authoritarian measures and cover up for the fact that ‘the West has collapsed.’

    The United States in particular has gone into financial collapse in the middle of last August, 2019, when it suddenly turned out that United States government debt is no longer valid as collateral for a loan – even an overnight loan. And interest rates on so–called repo contracts shot up to something like over 10% over the prime rate. And so then the federal reserve had to step in and start offering these repo contracts by itself, basically supported by the printing press. This was the first step towards monetizing the debt. This is a hyperinflationary measure. -Dmitry Orlov

    “The reason for the whole COVID-19 panic hysteria is that it’s very difficult for people to come out and say ‘ok we’ll just completely fail. ok, we have run the economy into a dead end‘,” he adds. 

    And what are the signs of collapse? Orlov says that since US economic statistics are “a complete forgery and have been for many years,” that we can look to countries like Germany – which has seen “double-digit declines in the last year or more” in manufacturing.

    Part of it is mal-investment in green energy in Germany which caused electricity rates to shoot up to a point where Germany is no longer competitive as far as manufacturing. Same thing pretty much is happening in Japan. China has seen the slowest growth in several generations. Same with India.

    When asked when things will ‘completely erode’ to the point where the average person can clearly see what’s going on, Orlov suggests that “The human psyche is a very fragile thing. If you’ve been taught one thing all your life, and suddenly it turns out you’ve been lied to all your life, this is rather harsh. Most people have trouble with it and some people can just never get through the denial. And get stuck, and develop a mental health crisis that can become chronic.”

    Listen to the entire interview here.

    John Michael Greer expanded on the human nature aspect of the COVID-19 (over)reaction after noting that “we have lucked out – as this has a relatively mild death rate.” What’s causing panic, however, is asymptomatic transmission.

    “Unlike some illnesses, this one transmits very well without you knowing it. People can be dripping viruses from every pore and look perfectly healthy, and so that’s producing the, sort of, terror reaction.”

    We are not really rational beings. Most of us under some circumstances, when we’re calm and not particularly threatened by anything, we can think rationally. But it doesn’t come naturally… you put any pressure on most people and the rational mind just shuts down and they do very strange things.

    On the upside of coronavirus – the pandemic is “making people aware that they actually do need to think about where their food comes from.

    “We’ve gotten lazy. We’ve gotten comfortable and cozy, and thinking everything’s fine and nothing can really change,” says Greer, who adds that “the herd will continue stampeding off the cliff, but individuals are waking up and deciding what they really want to do with their lives.

    Listen to the entire interview here.

    And for more information on Hermitix:

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js


    Tyler Durden

    Sun, 05/10/2020 – 22:30

  • Crude-Chaos & COVID-Contagion Mark The End Of Imperium Americanum
    Crude-Chaos & COVID-Contagion Mark The End Of Imperium Americanum

    Authored by Patrick Armstrong via The Strategic Culture Foundation,

    A black swan is slang for an unexpected event with large consequences. 2020 has brought us two so far: the COVID-19 pandemic and the collapse of oil prices.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Each will have potent consequences for the Imperium Americanum. And there is a nest of black cygnets maturing.

    COVID-19

    A new infectious disease was noticed in China at the end of last year, identified as a coronavirus in January and a pandemic was declared in March. Since then economic and social life has come to a stop in the West as governments have been convinced to declare shutdowns. Restrictions became widespread in March and April and are still in effect; while some jurisdictions lessen them, others talk about more months. It is not the purpose of this essay to wonder whether these measures were justified or effective, only to state that they happened and that the world economy will have been enfeebled for two to three months or even longer. A big black swan indeed.

    The fuller effects won’t be known for some time but one result is certainly that the West’s repudiation for efficiency has taken a huge – perhaps fatal – hit. Only six months earlier, a survey confidently stated that the West – led by the USA and Britain – would do best in dealing with a pandemic. Not so: “We Are Living in a Failed State: The coronavirus didn’t break America. It revealed what was already broken“; “The Death of American Competence“; “The coronavirus is the worst intelligence failure in U.S. history“; “U.S.’s global reputation hits rock-bottom over Trump’s coronavirus response“; ““The world has loved, hated and envied the U.S. Now, for the first time, we pity it”; “Coronavirus: EU could fail over outbreak, warns Italy’s Giuseppe Conte“; “The EU has bungled its response to coronavirus and it might never fully recover“. China can’t hold back its laughter “Chinese state media calls U.S. a ‘primitive society,’ says ‘democracy is dying’ amid coronavirus“. Many of the American pieces, reflecting the abyssal divide in U.S. politics, write as through it were all Trump’s fault. But it wasn’t Trump who didn’t replace PPE stocks used up eleven years ago. Whatever failures are his, the failure is not his alone. And neither are the West’s other deficiencies his doing. No one seems to have stocks of PPE – the easier and most obvious first step against the threat.

    Washington deflects its failure by blaming China. But here too it’s lost its competence: here’s U.S. Secretary of State Pompeo asserting at the same time that it’s manmade and that it isn’t:

    POMPEO: Look, the best experts so far seem to think it was manmade. I have no reason to disbelieve that at this point.

    RADDATZ: Your — your Office of the DNI says the consensus, the scientific consensus was not manmade or genetically modified.

    POMPEO: That’s right. I — I — I agree with that. Yes. I’ve — I’ve seen their analysis. I’ve seen the summary that you saw that was released publicly. I have no reason to doubt that that is accurate at this point.

    To say nothing of Fauci’s money in the Wuhan lab. China may not even be the point of origin: France has just discovered a case from December and there may be a U.S. case from November. The breathlessly reported Five-Eyes assessment blaming China is fast collapsing: “mostly based on news reports and contained no material from intelligence gathering” says one of the Eyes. Washington may lash its minions into a coffle, but the rest of the world will scorn it as a pitiful attempt to distract. There will be increased rejection of the West’s assumption of competence and veracity. And, in the West itself, more will doubt the words of “experts” (especially those from Imperial College and its professors), “authorities and “trusted media sources”.

    Most of the West is still shut down but China is opening. Observers know that China is becoming the world’s top economy – the World Bank had already given it that title in PPP terms in 2013 – and COVID-19 is sure to accelerate the process by giving it a head start out of the economic slowdown. With cheap energy too.

    Soft power” is a useful term that describes the appeal of a given culture to others. For many years this was a potent arrow in the America quiver – I often think of the character played by Gregory Peck in Roman Holiday as the exemplar: open, honest, honourable and modern, but content to be an example and never to take advantage of her. Propaganda, to be sure, but effective propaganda. COVID-19 shows something else: in the simplest terms China has given assistance to many countries and the “U.S. accused of ‘modern piracy’ after diversion of masks meant for Europe“. Piffle like “The United States and President Trump are leading the global effort to combat this pandemic” or “America remains the world’s leading light of humanitarian goodness” just make it more obvious. From the EU we get word salads: reaffirms/recognises/supports/recalls. And only three months ago the “West is winning“. It has be-clowned itself.

    Of the downstream effects of the COVID-19 black swan, we can see at least three:

    1. great and possibly fatal damage to the assumption of American and Western competence;
    2. a widening of the economic gap with China;
    3. a further change in the world soft power balance.

    The “blame China” diversion (not forgetting the rest of the current Enemy Package – Russia and Iran) is childish and will earn disgust.

    None of these changes is to the benefit of the Imperium Americanum.

    Oil

    In March Riyadh, on behalf of OPEC, proposed to Moscow that they reduce oil production in order to keep prices up. Moscow refused and Riyadh started pumping. COVID-19 shutdowns collapsed demand. A month later West Texas Intermediate futures went negative and the price of a barrel of oil passed below $20.

    Generally it is estimated that the U.S. shale oil industry (about 60% of U.S. production) needs prices of about $60 to be profitable, Saudi Arabia, despite very low pumping costs, squanders so much that it needs about $80; Russia on the other hand is profitable at $45 and has half a trillion dollars in its FOREX kitty. So, if Riyadh started a price war it is not in a strong position; Moscow, on the other hand, some say, can survive $25 a barrel for ten years. As China’s industry comes back on line, it is starting to buy oil but most of it from Russia.

    The end result of this price competition in a demand crash is unknown but it is unlikely that the U.S. shale industry will do well out of it. And, because so much of Washington’s behaviour is based on the confidence that it is oil-independent, the U.S. will not come out of this stronger.

    So two black swans are likely to leave the Imperium Americanum weaker and less influential. And, it should be said, more contemned. But there is more.

    And some black cygnets

    Some may remember the excitement of TV commentators about cruise missiles in the Gulf War of 1990. And a weapon that could be launched a thousand kilometres away and hit a particular floor of the building aimed at was pretty amazing. That was the first large-scale public combat use of very long-range precision weapons and for many years cruise missiles were a signature feature of U.S. attacks and practically a monopoly. Until 2015 when Russia struck targets in Syria from otherwise insignificant small craft in the Caspian Sea. So flabbergasted was Washington by this that its first reaction was to pooh-pooh the accuracy. But they were real; many Kalibres have been launched from different platforms including submerged submarines. So, there were now two demonstrated members of the club that could, in real conditions, precisely hit a target a long distance away.

    In its response to the killing of Soleimani, Iran showed that it too was a member of the club. While it seems some of its missiles did go astray, most hit exactly what they were aimed at. (The U.S. military’s opponents also took note – again – of the fact that it does not have effective air defences). And the usual reaction from Washington: downplaying at firstlater we heard of the hundred-plus brain injuries. Quite an achievement for a country that has been under sanctions for decades. And Iran just joined another small club: countries that can launch a satellite on their own (again the U.S. contemptuous dismissal: “tumbling webcam in space“).

    The Trump Administration is very hostile towards Iran but no more so than most U.S. Administrations since the departure of the Shah – himself put back into power by a U.S.-UK coup. Probably the hottest moment of this undeclared war was in 1988, but there have been many other crises and we just had another threat from Washington. Tehran knows its on Washington’s hit list and has been preparing for decades. Missiles will be one of its principal defences. Washington would do well to reflect on Iran’s – surprising to it – membership in these two elite clubs before it makes any more threats. Little cygnets become big swans.

    Another black cygnet is the Iraq parliament’s demand that U.S. forces leave the country. Washington is consolidating its troops but they will be besieged prisoners if the country rises against them. Which sooner or later it will when the new Prime Minister forms his government. Two consequences of the neocon-dominated “New American Century” in the Middle East have been the growth of Iran’s influence and the demonstration that the U.S. military is not the omnipotent force it thought it was. When the effort to get it out starts, Washington will have three choices: hunker down and hope it goes away, enormously reinforce its troops for a completely new war, withdraw à la Vietnam. This cygnet is growing.

    * * *

    A pandemic, oil price collapse, a target country showing it has more capability than assumed, threatened expulsion from Iraq. The surprises have exposed long-time weaknesses.

    It’s always the unexpected things that test things to destruction.


    Tyler Durden

    Sun, 05/10/2020 – 22:00

  • Vice President Pence To Self-Isolate After Coronavirus Exposure: Live Updates
    Vice President Pence To Self-Isolate After Coronavirus Exposure: Live Updates

    Summary:

    • Pence to self-quarantine after exposure to aide with coronavirus
    • Latest UK numbers released as BoJo lays out new ‘Stay Alert’ plan
    • Italy also reports lowest cases since March
    • China reports first new case in Wuhan since April 3
    • NY reports lowest number of daily deaths since March
    • Afghanistan ends lockdown as economy collapses
    • Global new cases drop for 2nda day
    • Germany reports rise in spread rate above 1
    • Philippines reports spike in new cases
    • Local officials in Spain push government to reopen more quickly
    • UK urges reopening will be handled with caution as BoJo prepares to lay out framework
    • Turkey eases lockdown restrictions for most vulnerable people
    • UK testing of ‘contact tracing app’ going ‘well’
    • Pope Francis urges EU to work together to battle virus

    *       *        *

    Update (1750ET): Though he hasn’t tested positive for COVID-19, VP Pence will follow FDA Director Dr. Stephen Hahn into self-imposed quarantine, his office announced Sunday evening.

    Hahn said yesterday he would self-quarantine for 14 days after exposure to White House spokesperson Katie Miller, who tested positive for Covid-19 on Friday, three administration officials said. Several aides to Trump, Pence and Ivanka Trump have tested positive for the coronavirus in recent days, something that reportedly sent Trump into a “hot lava” rage as he chewed out his staff for neglecting to put his safety first.

    The White House has said it will conduct contact tracing and decide who else should self-isolate based on exposure to Miller on a case-by-case basis. Hahn is asymptomatic and tested negative for the virus on Friday, two senior administration officials said. Pence and Trump are reportedly being tested for the virus every day.

    Pence, of course, is the head of the White House coronavirus task force. It’s unclear whether he will continue with those duties, or cede them to another member for the time being.

    *       *        *

    Update (1530ET): The UK has reported a slight rise in cases, though the number of deaths reported continued to fall, on Sunday, as PM Boris Johnson unveiled his plan to gradually reopen the British economy.

    During his address, Johnson praised the British people for “showing the good sense” to abide by the lockdown restrictions, and declaring that “it is a fact that by implementing those measures we avoided a tragedy” that could have resulted in millions of infections and hundreds of thousands of deaths. It would be “madness” to throw away that achievement now, Johnson said, before presenting his “roadmap for reopening society” and abandoned his old “stay home” slogan with a new one: “stay alert”.

    Johnson boasted that the UK’s “R” rate – the measure of the virus’s spread – had dropped below one to between .5 and .9. He warned that if the rate should pop back above 1, that the UK might consider reimposing lockdown measures. As part of the reopening plan, those who can work from home are encouraged to keep doing so, while those who can’t “should go to work”, and follow the workplace guidelines, which include avoiding public transport if possible.

    Britons will also be allowed to enjoy “unlimited outdoor exercise” though fines will be increased for the “small minority” who violate the public social distancing guidance that has been in place for the last 2 months. Step 2 – the phased reopening of shops and schools – likely won’t come – at the earliest – until June 1.

    Here are the broad strokes; Johnson said he’d be unveiling more details during PMQs on Monday. As part of the plan, Johnson introduced 5 “alert levels” to measure progress. As the new guidelines are imposed, Johnson said, he hopes the UK will move from “level 4” to “level 3” (with ‘level 1’ representing the complete eradication of the virus in Britain).

    In other news, California has reported its daily figures, which are down from record numbers reported Friday

    • CALIFORNIA REPORTS 67 NEW DEATHS, 2,119 NEW VIRUS CASES

    *       *        *

    Update (1300ET): Italy reported its lowest number of new cases since March on Sunday. Italy counted just 802 new cases and 165 new deaths during the prior day, the lowest numbers since early March. That brought its totals to 219,070 cases and 30,560 deaths.

    More from BBG:

    Civil protection authorities reported 802 cases for the 24-hour period — the fewest since March 6 — compared with 1,083 a day earlier
    Confirmed cases now total 219,070.

    Daily fatalities fell to 165 — the fewest since March 9 — from 194 on Saturday, with a total of 30,560 reported since the start of the pandemic in late February.

    The latest good news comes as Prime Minister Giuseppe Conte prepares to take the next steps toward easing the national lockdown.

    Conte, under pressure from coalition allies to speed up the reopening as the country’s curve dramatically flattens, told an Italian newspaper that bars, restaurants and barbers would be allowed to reopen before June 1, the date previously set by the government. Shops are due to reopen on May 18.

    Meanwhile, China just reported the first case of the virus in Wuhan since April 3.

    *       *        *

    Update (1240ET): For the second day in a row, New York has reported the fewest virus-linkeddeaths in a day since March. The number of deaths reported yesterday was 207.

    As the number of deaths in New York nursing homes explodes, Cuomo announced a new policy Sunday: All nursing home staff must be tested for COVID-19 twice a week, no exceptions. Any nursing homes who fail to comply will lose their license, Cuomo said. He also revealed that the state is now investigating 85 cases of a mysterious respiratory syndrome affecting children that has appeared both in the UK and in the New York City area.

    Hospitalizations also continued to fall.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Meanwhile, the NYT reports several cities in Afghanistan ended weeks of lockdown on Sunday, despite the continued spread of the virus, due to the dire economic reality.

    The major cities of Mazar e Sharif and Kunduz in the north and Jalalabad and Mehtar Lam in the east were among those that officially ended the lockdown. Other cities such as the capital, Kabul, and Herat technically remained under lockdown, but the police appeared to be no longer enforcing it.

    *       *        *

    Sunday comes as the number of new cases reported over the weekend has slowed as countries around the world manage to bend their respective curves.

    Around the world, the number of new cases reported dropped for the second day in a row, according to data from Johns Hopkins.

    However, the number of new cases in Germany accelerated again just days after the federal government loosened restrictions once again, acting in concert with state leaders.

    The Robert Koch Institute for disease control said in a daily bulletin released Sunday morning that the number of people each sick person now infects (known as the reproduction rate, or R) has risen to 1.1.

    Meanwhile, in the US, the reopening has been going more or less as well as can be expected in Georgia, Texas and the dozens of other states that have already started the process.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Any reading above 1 means the number of new cases is growing, not slowing. And the German government had previously promised to slow down, or even reverse, its reopening policies should ‘R’ linger above 1 for too long.

    The institute claimed the number of new coronavirus cases had increased by 667 yesterday, bringing Germany’s total to 169,218, while the daily death toll had risen by 26 to 7,395.

    Germany wasn’t the only country to report a slight acceleration in cases Sunday. Iran warned of a resurgence of its own as it reported 51 new deaths. Iran started relaxing virus-related a month ago (around the same time that Turkey surpassed it as the worst outbreak in the Muslim world) and has been reporting steady declines in new cases and deaths ever since.

    While Germany considers how to respond to these troubling new data, Spain’s federal government continues to clash with several of the country’s regions over PM Pedro Sanchez’s decision to restrict the scope of the relaxation of its Spain’s extremely harsh 2-month-old lockdown.

    On Sunday, as Sánchez held his weekly teleconference with the heads of the country’s regions, several local officials complained about the government’s decision to reject requests by certain, mostly urban, territories (including Madrid but also parts of Valencia and Andalusia).

    “It is obvious that Madrid needs to take a step forward,” said Isabel Díaz Ayuso, the head of the region worst hit by the pandemic, citing the capital’s role as the heart of Spain’s economy. As stage one of the reopening begins tomorrow, 51% of Spain will be allowed to gather in groups of up to ten, non-essential shops will be allowed to reopen without appointment, and restaurants and bars may serve people in outside seating.

    “It is important to keep everything we’ve gained up to now,” responded María Jesús Montero, government spokeswoman, who said the government’s decision was based on technical criteria.

    Meanwhile, Pope Francis on Sunday called on the leaders of the EU to work together to deal with the social and economic consequences of the coronavirus pandemic. The pope noted in his Sunday blessing that 75 years have passed since Europe began the challenging process of reconciliation after World War II. He said the process spurred both European integration and “the long period of stability and peace which we benefit from today.”

    In Asia, the Philippines’ health ministry reported 184 new coronavirus cases, taking the Southeast Asian nation’s total reported infections to 10,794, while 15 more deaths related to COVID-19 were recorded, bringing the toll to 719, while 82 patients have recovered to bring total recoveries to 1,924, it said in a bulletin.

    In the US, local media reported that at least 75 protestors tested positive for COVID-19 after attending a large rally against the stay-at-home order in Wisconsin.

    In the UK, as BoJo prepares to lay out his plan for reopening the British economy, Housing Minister Robert Jenrick said said the economy would restart slowly and cautiously.

    “The message … of staying at home now does need to be updated, we need to have a broader message because we want to slowly and cautiously restart the economy and the country,” Jenrick told Sky News.

    Jenrick added that easing the lockdown would be conditional on keeping the spread of the virus under control, and if the rate of infection begins to increase in some areas, more stringent measures could be re-introduced. Elsewhere in the UK, a trial of a controversial government test-and-trace app carried out on the Isle of Wight has yielded positive results, much to the chagrin of privacy advocates.

    “The trial in the Isle of Wight of that tracking app, the NHSX app designed to help assist people, is going well. People have been downloading it enthusiastically and I know that the plan is later in the month to make it more widely available as well,” a local official told the FT.

    In Turkey, which is – as we mentioned above – the worst-hit country in the Muslim world by number of infections, senior citizens have been allowed to leave their homes for the first time in seven weeks Sunday under relaxed coronavirus restrictions. Those aged 65 and over, deemed most at risk from the virus, had been subjected to a curfew since March 21, but they were permitted outside Sunday for four hours as part of a rolling program of reduced controls being pushed by Ankara.


    Tyler Durden

    Sun, 05/10/2020 – 21:58

  • “F*ck Elon Musk”: The World Turns On Tesla CEO After He Sues Alameda County
    “F*ck Elon Musk”: The World Turns On Tesla CEO After He Sues Alameda County

    Update 5/10/2020 8AM EST: As he stated he was going to do yesterday, Tesla CEO Elon Musk filed an 18-page lawsuit that asked a federal judge to allow him to re-open his factory in Fremont.

    “Alameda County’s power grab not only defies the governor’s orders, but offends the federal and California constitutions,” the lawsuit said. The suit argues that Alameda County “had violated the due process and equal protection clauses of the Fourteenth Amendment and sought an injunction that would allow the company to operate.”

    Later in the day on Saturday, Tesla, likely covering for Musk’s fiasco and trying to do damage control, put out a blog post called “Getting Back to Work”. 

    The response to Musk’s actions this weekend from many on social media, including Democrats and left-leaning California politicians, was robust. CA Assemblywoman Lorena S. Gonzalez simply Tweeted “F*ck Elon Musk.”

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    And she doesn’t appear to be the only one that’s “over” Musk and his antics. Comedian Michael Rapaport referred to Musk as “Ant Dick Man”, saying “Guy thinks he’s Tony Stark but he ain’t”.

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    “Fuck that bozo,” replied celebrity jeweler Ben Baller.

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    Former Secretary of Labor and Berkeley professor Robert Reich called Musk “the worst of capitalism”. Musk then responded, in Russian, calling Reich an idiot. 

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    “Hard times are a test of character; and by that measure Elon Musk is proving a total zero,” said Columbia professor and Author Tim Wu:

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    “This is a perfect time to remember all the people who thought this guy was going to save the world,” one journalist wrote. 

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    Finally, well known Tesla short seller, Yale law school graduate and former 30 year trial attorney Montana Skeptic broke down the (lack of) merits of Musk’s lawsuit, before offering up his services pro bono to help out Alameda County in this thread:

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    Of course, if the SEC had just done its job the first time Musk committed securities fraud, we wouldn’t be having to deal with any of this mess. But far be it for us to expect that.

    Recall just days ago we reported that Tesla was sending people back to work at its Fremont factory in Alameda County before the area’s lockdown expired.

    Then, late last week, Alameda County responded by telling Musk that he could not re-open his factory. “We have not given the green light. We have been working with them looking at some of their safety plans. But no, we have not said that it is appropriate to move forward,” Erica Pan, interim health officer for the Alameda County Public Health Department, said on an online town hall meeting on Friday. 

    That was enough to trigger a total Elon Musk meltdown. The CEO, who has been going off on diatribes about civil liberties on conference calls and podcasts alike, Tweeted out on Saturday that he is going to be suing Alameda County for not allowing him to re-open.

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    Calling it the “final straw” Musk also said he was going to move Tesla’s headquarters out of California and to either Texas or Nevada.

    Musk also called the county’s interim health officer “ignorant”, claiming she was acting “contrary to the Governor, the President, our Constitutional freedoms & just plain common sense!”

    Most importantly, however, she is acting against the interest of Elon Musk and Tesla. 

    People on social media weighed in about Musk’s meltdown:

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    Recall, on Tesla’s recent earnings call, toward the end and increasingly angry, Musk unleashed a 5-minute rant complete with an f-bomb in which the CEO doubled down on his stance against the shelter-in-place orders that have gripped the United States economy in recent weeks, warning that the factory shutdowns are a “serious risk” to the electric automaker’s business. 

    Hey, thanks for all the tax breaks and subsidies, California, see you later!

     

     


    Tyler Durden

    Sun, 05/10/2020 – 21:44

  • China Unveils Pandemic-Fighting T1-Smart-Glasses That "See" People's Temperatures In Real-Time
    China Unveils Pandemic-Fighting T1-Smart-Glasses That “See” People’s Temperatures In Real-Time

    A Chinese startup that develops augmented-reality glasses for everyday use, or for other applications such as in manufacturing and gaming, has tweaked one of its products with a thermal sensor to create pandemic glasses. Such glasses can detect possible COVID-19 carriers by scanning body temperatures. 

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    The pandemic glasses are called T1 glasses and are developed by Hangzhou-based startup Rokid. The glasses help the wearer screen for symptoms that are common among late-stage COVID-19 carriers such as high body temperatures, reported Reuters

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Rokid Vice President Xiang Wenjie said demand has surged for the augmented-reality glasses with 1,000 pairs purchased by governments, industrial parks, and schools.

    “Apart from fixed temperature measurement, T1 can provide portable, distant, and prompt temperature checking, which would be a great help,” Xiang said.

    The glasses have an infrared sensor and a camera that allow the wearer to “see” peoples’ temperatures. Upgraded versions are coming, will enable the wearer to take multiple readings at once in public areas. 

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    The evolution of scanning people with handheld or fixed thermal cameras will eventually transition to pandemic glasses, this is already happening at one corporate center in Hangzhou. 

    “With more new products coming out, especially these glasses, we think we can use them to conduct contactless temperature measurement, they are very efficient when faced with a big crowd of people,” said Jin Keli, president of Greentown Property Management.

    Pandemic glasses could be something Amazon might want to look into, considering it is outfitting its warehouses with fixed thermal cameras to monitor employees’ temperatures. 

    We can now envision the future: Pandemic drones circling above with thermal sensors, searching for COVID-19 carriers while law enforcement officers on the ground wearing pandemic glasses do the same.

    Please return us to a pre-corona world! The Post-corona world is dystopic as the surveillance state is being ushered in. It’s only a matter of time before people start wearing clothing that blocks their heat signatures from thermal sensors. 


    Tyler Durden

    Sun, 05/10/2020 – 21:30

  • US Deploys B-1Bs, Warships In South China Sea As China Nationalists Call For Invasion Of Taiwan
    US Deploys B-1Bs, Warships In South China Sea As China Nationalists Call For Invasion Of Taiwan

    While the global economy remains in a state of near ubiquitous lockdown due to the coronavirus pandemic, the US military has been busy. According to an update posted on the Pacific Air Forces website, a B-1B Lancer strategic bomber part of the 9th Expeditionary Bomb Squadron was one of two B-1s conducting a training mission in the South China Sea in support of Pacific Air Forces’ training efforts and “strategic deterrence missions to reinforce the rules-based international order in the Indo-Pacific region.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    The training missions follows what Stars and Stripes described on April 30 as a “show of force” by the U.S. military in the South China Sea “with a sortie over the contested waters on Thursday by two Air Force bombers.”

    The B-1B Lancers from the 28th Bomb Wing at Ellsworth Air Force Base, S.D., flew a 32-hour round trip to conduct operations over the sea as part of a joint bomber task force by the U.S. Indo-Pacific Command and U.S. Strategic Command, the Air Force said in news release Thursday.

    The mission further demonstrated the service’s new “dynamic force employment model,” which is intended to make its global bomber presence less predictable, the Air Force said.

    Meanwhile, according to a Friday report from the USNI, the US Navy “sent a pair of ships to patrol in the vicinity of a mineral rights dispute between Malaysia and China in the South China Sea for the second time in a month.”

    According to the report, the Littoral Combat Ship USS Montgomery (LCS-8) and replenishment ship USNS Cesar Chavez (T-AKE-14) conducted a presence operation in the South China Sea on Thursday near Panamanian-flagged drill ship West Capella, in what appears to have been a show of force/deterrence. The drill ship is under contract to conduct surveying operations in Malaysia’s exclusive economic zone for Malaysian state oil company Petronas. Chinese People Liberation Army Navy (PLAN) warships and China Coast Guard vessels have also operated near the Malaysian-contracted drilling ship, according to USNI.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    USS Montgomery (LCS-8) conducts routine operations near Panamanian flagged drillship, West Capella, on May 7, 2020 in the South China Sea. US Navy Photo

    Separately, in late April, guided-missile cruiser USS Bunker Hill (CG-52) sailed with the Royal Australian Navy frigate HMAS Parramatta (FFG-154) before joining the amphibious assault ship USS America (LHA-6) and guided-missile destroyer USS Barry (DDG-52) to conduct combined exercises in the area where a Chinese government survey ship, Haiyang Dizhi 8, was said to be operating with an escort of several China Coast Guard ships.

    On Friday, U.S. Pacific Fleet commander Adm. John Aquilino issued a pointed statement addressing Chinese operations in the region: “We are committed to a rules-based order in the South China Sea, and we will continue to champion freedom of the seas and the rule of law,” Aquilino said in the release.

    “The Chinese Communist Party must end its pattern of bullying Southeast Asians out of offshore oil, gas, and fisheries.”

    Bunker Hill conducted a freedom of navigation operation through the Spratly Island chain near Gaven Reef in the South China Sea on April 29. “Unlawful and sweeping maritime claims in the South China Sea pose a serious threat to the freedom of the seas, including the freedoms of navigation and overflight and the right of innocent passage of all ships,” reads the statement from 7th Fleet.

    * * *

    In response to what may be prompting these increased “shows of force” by the US military in China contested waters, today the SCMP reported that “Beijing is trying to calm rising nationalist sentiment after a growing chorus of voices called for China to take advantage of the Covid-19 pandemic by invading Taiwan.”

    A number of commentators on social media have called for the island to be reunified by force – something Beijing has never ruled out – but some analysts believe the authorities want to play a longer game and are now trying to cool the “nationalist fever”.

    According to the SCMP report, an article published earlier in the month in the magazine of the Central Party School, which trains senior officials, drew historical parallels with the Qing dynasty’s conquest of Taiwan in the 17th century to highlight the importance of patience and careful planning.

    The 5,000-word article in Study Times, written by historian Deng Tao, said the Qing had spent the next 20 years preparing for the invasion and conquest of the island and argued that they had also used political, diplomatic and economic measures to achieve their goal rather than just relying on force.

    The historian then went on to say that the Qing had managed to isolate the island’s rulers diplomatically and sent representatives to the island to court support among its Han Chinese residents by offering them incentives to return to the mainland and escape the heavy taxes imposed by their rulers. But in the meantime, the Kangxi emperor had been building up and training an invasion fleet that successfully took the island in 1683 and incorporated it into the Qing empire.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Calls from online nationalists for an invasion of Taiwan have been growing in recent weeks. Photo: Reuters

    Fast forward to today, when a number of commentators and retired military commanders have called for Beijing to retake control of the island, where the defeated Nationalist forces fled in 1949 following their defeat in the civil war.

    Additionally, some former military leaders have argued that the United States – which is bound by law to help the Taiwanese government defend itself – is presently unable to do so because all four of its aircraft carriers in the Pacific have been affected by the Covid-19 outbreak.

    Some legal commentators, including Tian Feilong, an associate professor at Beihang University, in Beijing, have gone so far to call on the government to consider the use of force and argued that an “anti-secession” law ratified in 2005 gives it the legal authority to do so.

    Tian argued in an article published on the news website guancha.cn that political and social developments on the island meant it was impossible to resolve the situation peacefully and said anti-government protests in Hong Kong showed that the “one country, two systems model” – which Beijing hoped to use as the basis for reunification with Taiwan – had failed.

    Qiao Liang, a retired air force major general who is seen as a hawkish voice on the mainland, argued in a separate article published on the social media platform WeChat that now was not the right time to take Taiwan by force. Liang warned it would be “too costly and risky” and said China should wait until it had the economic and military strength to challenge the US.

    A Beijing-based military source said the mainland authorities still hope the situation can be resolved peacefully and the majority of Taiwanese still want to maintain the status quo.

    “Maintaining the stability and prosperity of Taiwan before and after its unification is still the top priority for the mainland,” the source continued.

    Lee Chih-horng, who lectures in cross-strait relations at Nanyang Technological University in Singapore, said the articles by Deng and Qian indicated that the government wanted to stick to its own timetable for Taiwan unification.

    The Beijing leadership has now realised that they need to cool down the nationalist fever as calls to take Taiwan by force have become too emotional, with many on mainland social media stirring up the topic for attention,” Lee said.

    “As Qiao said, Beijing realises now is not a good time to take Taiwan back by force, but [President] Xi [Jinping] will come out up with the ultimate solution to solve the Taiwan issue.”

    Whether China’s heightened nationalistic tendencies are behind the stepped up US “training missions” and “patrols” in the South China Sea remains unclear, but amid the heightened diplomatic tensions between the US and China over the source of the coronavirus pandemic, the rising military tensions will hardly facilitate the return of normal relations between the two superpowers.


    Tyler Durden

    Sun, 05/10/2020 – 21:18

  • Venezuela Displays Military Boats & Weapons It Says Were Part Of US Mercenary Invasion
    Venezuela Displays Military Boats & Weapons It Says Were Part Of US Mercenary Invasion

    Via Southfront.org

    The failed attempt of US mercenaries operating from Colombia to stage a coup in Venezuela continues developing with more and more details appearing.

    On May 9, Venezuela’s military said it seized three abandoned Colombian light combat boats that soldiers found in the Orinoco river area.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Colombian military boats displayed via Venezuelan state media.

    This happened several days after the government accused its neighbor of aiding a failed invasion staged by US mercenaries.

    The Defense Ministry said the boats were equipped with machine guns and ammunition, but had no crew, adding they were discovered as part of a nationwide operation to guarantee Venezuela’s “freedom and sovereignty.”

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Colombia’s Navy said that boats were just dragged away by strong river currents.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Probably, US mercenaries also appeared in Venezuela thanks to ‘strong currents’ in the area.

    Machine guns and ammunition said to be recovered as part of the investigation into last week’s mercenary invasion of Venezuela:

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    The Guardian described previouslys:

    An American mercenary captured after a bungled attempt to topple Nicolás Maduro has claimed he was on a mission to seize control of Venezuela’s main airport in order to abduct its authoritarian leader – and he alleged that was acting under the command of Donald Trump.

    …In a heavily edited video confession, broadcast on Wednesday by the state broadcaster, VTV, Denman said he had flown to Colombia in mid-January, where he was tasked with training Venezuelan combatants near Riohacha, a city 55 miles west from the Venezuelan border.

    From there Denman – who said he had never previously set foot in either South American country – claimed the group planned to journey to Caracas to “secure” the city and the nearby Simón Bolívar international airport, before bringing down Maduro.

    The group of a least a dozen men, who were trained by Florida-based private security firm Silvercorp, reportedly tried to sneak into Venezuela via fishing boats a week ago, but were caught soon after stepping foot on land.


    Tyler Durden

    Sun, 05/10/2020 – 21:00

  • It's Retail Vs Institutions: A Look At Who's Buying Stocks Here… And Who Isn't
    It’s Retail Vs Institutions: A Look At Who’s Buying Stocks Here… And Who Isn’t

    Cutting to the chase, the market is now up 30% from its March 24 lows with the Nasdaq back in the green for 2020, and yet as Goldman pointed out earlier, there is now more confusion over what the market does next than in mid-March. And since money talks and bullshit writes long-winded research reports “explaining” what may or may not happen, here is a brief rundown of what every major investor class has been doing for the past few weeks so it hopefully becomes a little more clear why stocks continue to surge.

    AS DB’s Parag Thatte shows in his latest Investor positioning and flows chartpack, after an unprecedented puke in March, systematic (i.e., quant, algos, vol-targeting, and generally “machines”) strategies has been behind the modest tick higher in positioning – which is still near record lows – even as discretionary (i.e., human, hedge fund traders) positioning has turned again and is back near recent lows.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Within systematics, vol control investors have continued to rise mostly thanks to the fast drop in the VIX, which closed below 28 on Friday:

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    CTA positioning, while off the lows, are still short and as Nomura’s Charlie McElligott wrote on Friday, a ways away from either buy or sell thresholds.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Risk-parity funds, after the record plunge in March, have done basically nothing for the past 2 months and their equity-beta remains near all time lows.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Meanwhile, not only are institutional investors not buying, their positioning had turned even more bearish into the April/May rally, causing much pain and even more relative losses.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Predictably, and similar to Warren Buffett, hedge funds remain out of the picture, their beta to markets barely budging in recent weeks and just shy off all time lows.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    In short, nobody at the institutional level is buying, yet stocks continue to soar. Why?

    Well, for one, volumes have plunged making it much easier to push stocks around with odd lots..

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    … and as liquidity remains near all time lows, facilitating outsized market flows amid the collapse in volumes on even modest buying interest…

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    … it is quite easy for price-indiscriminate buybacks – like Apple’s latest $50BN stock repurchase – to ignite overall market direction: as shown below, the amount of buybacks announced in recent weeks was the biggest since last summer, led by the most important stock in the market: AAPL.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    At the same time, all those funds who jumped on the short side, confident that this was finally it, have gotten crushed amid the biggest short squeeze in history (thanks, Fed)…

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    … with short interest plummeting back to all time lows after a modest increase in late March as shorts got steamrolled yet again.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    To summarize: institutions selling, machines flat, hedge funds more bearish… but volumes and liquidity down, buybacks surging (something we touched upon more last week), shorts crushed and forced to cover and – drumroll – retail investors flooding the market and “making a killing” at least according to Robin Hood data which as Michael Krause notes, is a good proxy for what all retail US stock traders are doing.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Source: Robintrack

    So ironically, while the “smartest guys in the room” have failed to benefit from the recent rally, it is Joe Sixpack that has made some impressive profits amid repeated “dip buying”….

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    … unless this is just more of the same distribution from institutions to retail we saw in late 2018 and again in late 2019, when retail investors were delirious with visions of fortunes and early retirement, only to see the market “trapdoor” from beneath them. This would mean that the next trapdoor will open just as soon as institutions have “distributed” enough to to retail investors and the next stop, according to Goldman, would be 2,400.

    Finally, a familiar chart from 2019 and years prior: the S&P levitates higher even as investors pull money from stock funds, i.e., sell.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Impossible? Yes: the disconnect always eventually ends, with stocks catching down to flows. The only unknown is when.


    Tyler Durden

    Sun, 05/10/2020 – 20:30

  • "The Worst Case For Markets": Massive Stagflation In 2021 As Prices Rise Without Rising Wages
    “The Worst Case For Markets”: Massive Stagflation In 2021 As Prices Rise Without Rising Wages

    Authored by Vincent Cignarella, Bloomberg macro commentator

    “We are witnessing the Great Monetary Inflation (GMI)—an unprecedented expansion of every form of money unlike anything the developed world has ever seen.”Paul Tudor Jones

    The current worry in global markets is a recession, or worse, as the shutdowns to contain the pandemic rob workers of paychecks and consumer spending collapses. But those are relatively short-term concerns, most likely for the second and possibly third quarter of this year. The real concern should be the fallout from the inflation that’s going to accompany any recovery we have and the possibility of a return to 1970s-style stagflation.

    Governments and central banks are throwing everything they can at this downturn, and will continue to do so until it improves. Even a U-shaped recovery that happens as late as the beginning of 2021 will have an enormous impact on the prices of everyday items. The biggest threat comes from companies shifting supply chains permanently away from cheaper China imports to more reliable, but expensive, suppliers. But there are other concerns as well.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Source: Paul Tudor Jones

    For example, companies like Disney, airlines and restaurants will likely have to raise prices to meet costs as social distancing rules will still apply. Fees for cable services will jump due to rising costs to carry sports broadcasts to compensate for a lack of fan revenue. Crude futures will likely rise as demand kicks in but suppliers stay firm in order to replenish revenues lost to the virus. Vehicles could see price increases too as automakers attempt to recoup 1st half of 2020 revenue.

    The U.S. Treasury will be servicing a massive public debt in 2021 and will be at the front of the line competing with the private sector borrowing. Meanwhile, the biggest buyer of Treasuries, the Fed, will likely be halting purchases as will other central banks, adding to pressure to debt instruments. As rates rise, rents and home prices will jump, with rents a direct component of inflation figures.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Source: Paul Tudor Jones

    There’s an unfortunate downside to this inflationary pressure. While prices will be rising, job growth will be slower to return to normal as social distancing will prevent us from reaching full employment. The combination of rising prices without rising wages will place enormous pressure on the economy, no doubt causing a real economic recession in 2021 and not one that’s the result of a pandemic. This stagflation scenario, not seen since the 1970s, is the worst case for markets, particularly risk assets like stocks and bonds.


    Tyler Durden

    Sun, 05/10/2020 – 20:18

  • What If The Crisis Is One Without End… Like George Orwell's Perpetual War
    What If The Crisis Is One Without End… Like George Orwell’s Perpetual War

    Submitted by Luke Eastwood

    Notions of Freedom

    We are living in strange times indeed, this crisis raises many questions about the nature of freedom and what our expectations are, or should be.  Everyone has their own notions about what freedom means and how far that should extend to oneself and indeed, to everyone else.

    I want to start with a look at where we’ve come from before I look at where we are now, as I feel it gives a better understanding of our definitions of freedom and a better context for viewing where we are, at this moment in time.

    Society probably started with the tribe – maybe not even having a leader if the numbers where small enough, say 10 people. Tribes of scores or more obviously became hard to manage and so, undoubtedly, this led to the idea of a leader or a group of leaders – a chief, or a council of chiefs. Such a system seems to have worked well, so long as the chiefs acted in the best interest of the tribe, and not in their own best interest. Tribes and early kingdoms often had a mechanism for dealing with a poor leader – the  symbolic marriage of the leader to the land and the right to depose, or even excute, a leader that failed to live up to expectations.

    Such concepts of leadership are ancient but have survived in various places into the  modern era,  including Ireland where I live. Although the practice associated with this custom is long gone, knowledge of it remains vaguely in the public consciousness and more definitively in the realms of scholarship and Celtic Neo-Paganism.  However, societies across the globe began to move beyond this cherished accountability millenia ago – with the rise of depsotic monarchy, something that still exists as an unfortunate anachronism even now.

     As tribes grew into countries and countries grew into empires, monarchs became decreasingly accountable to their citizens, or rather subjects – those who are subjugated. While many monarchs felt an obligation, both ‘divine’ and moral to behave with care and responsibility, others acted in pure self interest, free of any accountability for their actions. With the backing a large army or, sizeable personal guard, it became increasing difficult to hold monarchs accountable and one had to rely on goodwill in most cases, rather than enforcement.

    Of course, there have been countless deposings of monarchs, by the people or by rival claimants, although the latter didn’t always turn out to be beneficial. Probably the most famous of these is that of Galus Julius Caesar, the Dictator for life of the final years of the Roman Republic, who gave his name to the title Caesar, Czar and Keiser. He was brutally murdered by Brutus (hence the word brutal) and we all know how that turned out the for Roman Republic.

    The republic itself was a form of democracy, based on an earlier model from Greece, a civilization that had immense influence on Rome. Of course, Athenian democracy was nothing like what we now regard as democracy. The right to decide how government was organised and what it did fell to the hands of an elite group – demokratia, or “rule by the people” was only for citizens and of these, only the men could vote. At the time (507 BC) this meant 40,000 men, out of a much larger population, but in reality no more than about 5000 men could attend assemblies, due to other commitments. Still, it was a ground-breaking step, so long as you weren’t a foreigner, criminal, woman, child or a slave.

    It is from these Greek origins that we get the word democracy and the notion of rights and freedom for all. Over time there have been variations on this model that have been tried out – constitutional monarchies, republics, socialist states, fascist states and communist states, which have varying levels of input for the masses. The masses might also be referred to as ‘plebeians’ as the Romans liked to call ordinary folk, a corrupted form of which still exists as a minor insult – pleb.

    However, through most of recorded history, the most common system has been monarchy, although one could hardly describe it as the most popular. Simpler than a democracy and easy to enforce – notions such as corruption, fairness and accountability do not come into play, as divine rule (e.g. the divine right of kings) gives the ruler carte blanche to do whatever they god-damn like, unless their despotism provokes a revolt.  Of course, revolt has happened, from time to time, throughout history and one of the most famous ones is that of the barons in England against king John.

    The Magna Carta (Great Charter, of 1215) is considered by many as the bedrock of Western civilization and democracy, despite the fact that it only gave limited concessions to a very small number of nobles. It was a start at least, and perhaps enabled further inroads into the monarchic monopoly on power. The Peasants’ Revolt of 1381, against Richard II of England was a major shift. Led by a commoner (Wat Tyler) it was a great embarrassment for Richard, who did not have a standing army on hand. He was forced to pretend to negotiate with the rebels, who camped at Blackheath, while he secretly ordered the Mayor of London to raise an army to disperse and execute the protestors.

    There are countless other examples of rebellion against monarchs across the world, but most of them are forgotten. Perhaps the best remembered rebellion is that of the French paupers, against the Bourbon monarchy and the entire aristocracy of France. This violent and bloodthirsty revolution sent shudders of terror across the monarchies of the world and precipitated a programme of reform, based on fear of similar events occurring.

    Of course, some countries carried on regardless – Russia and America being particularly sad examples, as Russia only abolished surfdom in 1861, while USA only abolished slavery in 1865. One could justifiably say that the lives of these ordinary people, who were now ‘citizens’ hardly improved as their freedom was pretty much nominal. This, in Russia, led to the revolution of 1917, due to the intransigence of the Czar/Tsar (Caesar) Nicholai II Alexandrovich Romanov II. The overthrow of the Russian system, inspired by the ideas of Marx and Engels, led to a Bolshevik government headed by Vladimir Lenin. Whatever notions the Soviets had, Lenin was a de facto Tzar in waiting and Stalin was certainly that, if not an uncrowned heir to Ivan The Terrible.

    Post World War II, we supposedly have a new age of democracy and freedom, but that only applies to some. In truth, almost the whole world collection of governments has learned the art of propaganda – thanks to the astounding upskilling efforts of the National Socialists (Nazis) of Germany, who took this to new heights (or lows rather), turning it almost into an artform. While we have been led to believe that we are free and democratic, we have never been more exposed to lies and propaganda than we are now. The biggest lie of all is that we live in a democracy, when in fact we actually only get to choose a new set of corrupt and self-serving narcissists, every 4 or 5 years.

    Democracies, the world over, have been bought – lobbyists have far more power than the electorate could ever hope to achieve. What we in fact have is the illusion of democracy – state agencies act without oversight, individuals have no say over the manifesto and policies of parties in power and have no mechanism to undo or prevent undesirable actions by governments. The only mechanisms available are the occasional referenda (instigated under pressure), protest (peaceful or otherwise) and violent overthrow.

    In most cases, the effort and risk of violent overthrow is considered too much for the majority of people – it takes dire poverty, starvation and horrific coercion before the ‘plebs’ are pushed to the brink. Governments are aware of this and generally apply the ‘boiling frog’ method of restricting people’s freedoms and the removal of privacy and general rights. However, they do on occasion overstep the mark or fail to adequately conceal their stealthy nefarious actions – which inevitably leads to protest or insurrection. 

    History has proven that violent insurrection usually fails, but it is rather foolish of authoritarian governments to take a gamble on this not happening. What is far more effective for us ‘plebs’ is non-violent insurrection, in the form of non-compliance – this worked wonders for both Gandhi and for Martin Luther-King, two of the most inspirational leaders of the 20th century. Nelson Mandella is another fine example of someone who led a monumental change, in South Africa, while also avoiding a catastrophic bloodbath, again through advocating of non-violence and showing exceptional leadership skills.

    At this moment in time, we are held hostage by a virus and the fear of what it might do to humanity. While public safety has to be a priority, one has to ask the question – what is this really about? Is this a manufactured crisis or is it is just opportunistic governments capitalizing on their best chance to roll out new draconian measures? Temporary emergency powers is one thing, but if there is no rollback after the crisis is over, what then? What if the crisis is one without end – like George Orwell’s perpetual war in his novel 1984?

    We have come to expect freedom, we are told that we live in the ‘free world’ yet we see our rights and freedoms and privacy being eroded by government legislation, corporate invasive technology and data collection. Where do we draw the line? When do we say enough is enough? Strangely, the same technology that enables our surveillance monitoring is also the most powerful tool at our disposal. Internet and telecommunications enables us to share information, just as the ‘system’ collects information about all of us. For many, it has opened our eyes about government agendas, methods and operations as we now have unprecedented access to worldwide information, often in real-time, or within minutes and hours of events happening.

    Many believe that a new era of oppression is being rolled out, right now as we sit in our homes, enabled by the high-power, high-speed and low latency 5G network, worldwide by a hidden agency. Conspiracies aside, there are many questions to be asked about our rights, what our freedoms should consist of and what the limits of government and corporate actions should be. We need to ask those questions, we need to demand answers and show the ‘powers that be’ that the thirst for true democracy is still alive and kicking. If we volunteer to be imprisoned or to become our own jailors then there is no hope for humanity. As in the past, humanity needs to assert itself, in order to remain free of despotism and it has never been more urgent than now. Corny as it may be, the simplest way to express this is for me to repeat the words of the late Bob Marley – “Get up, stand up, stand up for your rights!”

    Read more work by Luke at lukeeastwood.com


    Tyler Durden

    Sun, 05/10/2020 – 20:05

  • A COVID State Of Mind – America's Mental Health Suffers As Anti-Anxiety Drug Prescriptions Soar
    A COVID State Of Mind – America’s Mental Health Suffers As Anti-Anxiety Drug Prescriptions Soar

    The COVID-19 pandemic has resulted in forced lockdowns across the country and an economic depression with high unemployment. Tens of millions of jobs have been lost in the last six or so weeks, as “the greatest economy ever” implodes. A new report suggests many Americans cannot handle the unprecedented public health crisis and financial stress, as they quickly seek medication to numb the pain. 

    Express Scripts says prescriptions for anti-anxiety medications jumped 34% between February 16 and March 15, including a significant 18% spike on a week-over-week basis in the week ending March 15. 

    Prescriptions for antidepressants and sleep disorders also surged 18.6% and 14.8%, respectively, between mid-February and March 15. 

    “Americans are turning to medications for relief, demonstrates the serious impact COVID-19 may be having on our nation’s mental health,” Express Scripts said in its “America’s State of Mind Report.”

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    The report outlines several other significant findings of a heavily medicated society, as these folks seek more prescriptions as their mental health deteriorates:

    • More than three quarters (78%) of all antidepressant, anti-anxiety and anti-insomnia prescriptions filled during the week ending March 15 (the peak week) were for new prescriptions. 
    • The percent increase in the number of new prescriptions between the week of February 16 and week ending March 15 for the all three categories was 25.4% 
    • The percent increase in the number of new prescriptions between the week of February 16 and week ending March 15 for anti-anxiety medications was 37.7%

    The intense anxiety and fear that many people are feeling today could lead to social instabilities as the virus crisis and economic collapse continues to worsen.

    Some of those instabilities could be a “suicide wave,” protests, violent crime, and a rise in drug overdoses.

     


    Tyler Durden

    Sun, 05/10/2020 – 19:40

Digest powered by RSS Digest

Today’s News 10th May 2020

  • Ehret: For Victory Day, It's Time To Think About Finally Winning WWII
    Ehret: For Victory Day, It’s Time To Think About Finally Winning WWII

    Authored by Matthew Ehret via The Strategic Culture Foundation,

    75 years ago Germany surrendered to allied forces finally ending the ravages of the Second World War.

    Today, as the world celebrates the 75th anniversary of this victory, why not think very seriously about finally winning that war once and for all?

    If you’re confused by this statement, then you might want to sit down and take a deep breath before reading on. Within the next 12 minutes, you will likely discover a disturbing fact which may frighten you a little bit: The allies never actually won World War II…

    Now please don’t get me wrong. I am eternally thankful for the immortal souls who gave their lives to put down the fascist machine during those bleak years… but the fact is that a certain something wasn’t resolved on the 9th of May, 1945 which has a lot to do with the slow re-emergence of a new form of fascism during the second half of the 20th century and the renewed danger of a global bankers’ dictatorship which the world faces again today.

    It is my contention that it is only when we find the courage to really look at this problem with sober eyes, that we will be able to truly honor our courageous forebears who devoted their lives to winning a peace for their children, grandchildren and humanity more broadly.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    The Ugly Truth of WWII

    I’ll stop beating around the Bush now and just say it: Adolph Hitler or Benito Mussolini were never “their own men”.

    The machines they led were never fully under their sovereign control and the financing they used as fuel in their effort to dominate the world did not come from the Banks of Italy or Germany. The technologies they used in petrochemicals, rubber, and computing didn’t come from Germany or Italy, and the governing scientific ideology of eugenics that drove so many of the horrors of Germany’s racial purification practices never originated in the minds of German thinkers or from German institutions.

    Were it not for a powerful network of financiers and industrialists of the 1920s-1940s with names such as Rockefeller, Warburg, Montague Norman, Osborn, Morgan, Harriman or Dulles, then it can safely be said that fascism would never have been possible as a “solution” to the economic woes of the post-WWI order. To prove this point, let us take the strange case of Prescott Bush as a useful entry point.

    The patriarch of the same Bush dynasty that gave the world two disastrous American presidents (and nearly a third had Donald Trump not annihilated Jeb at the last minute in 2016) made a name for himself funding Nazism alongside his business partners Averell Harrimen and Averell’s younger brother E. Roland Harriman (the latter who was to recruit Prescott to Skull and Bones while both studying at Yale). Not only did Prescott, acting as director of Brown Brothers Harriman, provide valuable loans to keep the bankrupt Nazi party afloat during Hitler’s loss of support in 1932 when the German population voted into office the anti-Fascist General Kurt von Schleicher as Chancellor, but was even found guilty for “Trading with the enemy” as director of Union Banking Corporation in 1942!

    That’s right! As demonstrated in the 1992 Unauthorized Biography of George Bush, eleven months after America entered WWII, the Federal Government naturally conducted an investigation of all Nazi banking operations in the USA and wondered why Prescott continued to direct a bank which was so deeply enmeshed with Fritz Thyssen’s Bank voor Handel en Scheepvart of the Netherlands. Thyssen for those who are un-aware is the German industrial magnate famous for writing the book “I Paid Hitler”. The bank itself was tied to a German combine called Steel Works of the German Steel Trust which controlled 50.8% of Nazi Germany’s pig iron, 41.4% of its universal plate, 38.5% of its galvanized steel, 45.5% of its pipes and 35% of its explosives. Under Vesting Order 248, the U.S. federal government seized all of Prescott’s properties on October 22, 1942.

    The U.S.-German Steel combine was only one small part of a broader operation as Rockefeller’s Standard Oil had created a new international cartel alongside IG Farben (the fourth largest company in the world) in 1929 under the Young Plan. Owen Young was a JP Morgan asset who headed General Electric and instituted a German debt repayment plan in 1928 that gave rise to the Bank of International Settlements (BIS) and consolidated an international cartel of industrialists and financiers on behalf of the City of London and Wall Street. The largest of these cartels saw Henry Ford’s German operations merging with IG Farben, Dupont industries, Britain’s Shell and Rockefeller’s Standard Oil. The 1928 cartel agreement also made it possible for Standard Oil to pass off all patents and technologies for the creation of synthetic gasoline from coal to IG Farben thus allowing Germany to rise from producing merely 300 000 tons of natural petroleum in 1934 to an incredible 6.5 million tons (85% of its total) during WWII! Had this patent/technology transfer not taken place, it is a fact that the modern mechanized warfare that characterized WWII could never have occurred.

    Two years before the Young Plan began, JP Morgan had already given a $100 million loan to Mussolini’s newly established fascist regime in Italy- with Democratic Party kingmaker Thomas Lamont playing the role of Prescott Bush in Wall Street’s Italian operation. It wasn’t only JP Morgan who loved Mussolini’s brand of corporate fascism, but Time Magazine’s Henry Luce unapologetically gushed over Il Duce putting Mussolini on the cover of Time eight times between 1923 and 1943 while relentlessly promoting fascism as the “economic miracle solution for America” (which he also did in his other two magazines Fortune and Life). Many desperate Americans, still traumatized from the long and painful depression begun in 1929, had increasingly embraced the poisonous idea that an American fascism would put food on the table and finally find help them find work.

    A few words should be said of Brown Brothers Harriman.

    Bush’s Nazi bank itself was the spawn of an earlier 1931 merger which took place between Montagu Norman’s family bank (Brown Brothers) and Harriman, Bush and Co. Montague Norman was the Governor of the Bank of England from 1920 to 1944, leader of the Anglo-German Fellowship Trust and controller of Germany’s Hjalmar Schacht (Reichsbank president from 1923-1930 and Minister of Economy from 1934-1937). Norman was also the primary controller of the Bank of International Settlements (BIS) from its creation in 1930 throughout the entirety of WWII.

    The Central Bank of Central Banks

    Although the BIS was established under the Young Plan and nominally steered by Schacht as a mechanism for debt repayments from WWI, the Swiss-based “Central Bank of Central Banks” was the key mechanism for international financiers to fund the Nazi machine. The fact that the BIS was under the total control of Montagu Norman was revealed by Dutch Central Banker Johan Beyen who said “Norman’s prestige was overwhelming. As the apostle of central bank cooperation, he made the central banker into a kind of arch-priest of monetary religion. The BIS was, in fact, his creation.”

    The founding members of the Board included the private central banks of Britain, France, Germany, Italy and Belgium as well as a coterie of 3 private American banks (JP Morgan, First National of Chicago, and First National of New York). The three American banks merged after the war and are today known as Citigroup and JP Morgan Chase.

    In its founding constitution, the BIS, its directors and staff were given immunity from all sovereign national laws and not even authorities in Switzerland were permitted to enter its premises.

    This story was conveyed powerfully in a 1998 History Channel documentary entitled Banking with Hitler.

    A Word on Eugenics

    Nazi support in the build up to, and during WWII didn’t end with finance and industrial might, but extended to the governing scientific ideology of the third Reich: Eugenics (aka: the science of Social Darwinism as developed by Thomas Huxley’s X Club associate Herbert Spencer and Darwin’s cousin sir Francis Galton decades earlier). In 1932, New York hosted the Third Eugenics Conference co-sponsored by William Draper Jr (JP Morgan banker, head of General Motors and leading figure of Dillon Read and co) and the Harriman family. This conference brought together leading eugenicists from around the world who came to study America’s successful application of eugenics laws which had begun in 1907 under the enthusiastic patronage of Theodore Roosevelt. Hiding behind the respectable veneer of “science” these high priests of science discussed the new age of “directed evolution of man” which would soon be made possible under a global scientific dictatorship.

    Speaking at the conference, leading British Fascist Fairfield Osborn said that eugenics:

    “aids and encourages the survival and multiplication of the fittest; indirectly, it would check and discourage the multiplication of the unfitted. As to the latter, in the United States alone, it is widely recognized that there are millions of people who are acting as dragnets or sheet anchors on the progress of the ship of state…While some highly competent people are unemployed, the mass of unemployment is among the less competent, who are first selected for suspension, while the few highly competent people are retained because they are still indispensable. In nature, these less-fitted individuals would gradually disappear, but in civilization, we are keeping them in the community in the hopes that in brighter days, they may all find employment. This is only another instance of humane civilization going directly against the order of nature and encouraging the survival of the un-fittest”.

    The dark days of the great depression were good years for bigotry and ignorance as eugenics laws were applied to two Canadian provinces, and widely spread across Europe and America with 30 U.S. states applying eugenics laws to sterilize the unfit. Eugenics’ successful growth was due in large measure to the fierce financial support of the Rockefeller Foundation and the science magazine Nature which had been created in 1865 by T.H. Huxley’s X Club. The Rockefeller Foundation went onto fund German eugenics and most specifically the rising star of human improvement Joseph Mengele.

    The Nazi Frankenstein Monster is Aborted

    Describing his January 29, 1935 meeting with Hitler, Round Table controller Lord Lothian quoted the Fuhrer’s vision for Aryan co-direction of the New World Order saying:

    “Germany, England, France, Italy, America and Scandinavia … should arrive at some agreement whereby they would prevent their nationals from assisting in the industrializing of countries such as China, and India. It is suicidal to promote the establishment in the agricultural countries of Asia of manufacturing industries”

    While it is obvious that much more can be said on the topic, the Fascist machine didn’t fully behave the way the Dr. Frankensteins in London wished, as Hitler began to realize that his powerful military machine gave Germany the power to lead the New World Order rather than play second fiddle as mere enforcers on behalf of their Anglo masters in Britain. While many London and Wall Street oligarchs were willing to adapt to this new reality, a decision was made to abort the plan, and try to fight another day.

    To do this a scandal was concocted to justify the abdication of pro-Nazi King Edward VIII in 1936 and an appeasing Prime Minister Neville Chamberlain was replaced with Winston Churchill in 1940. While Sir Winston was a life long racist, eugenicist and even Mussolini-admirer, he was first and foremost a devout British Imperialist and as such would fight tooth and nail to save the prestige of the Empire if it were threatened. Which he did.

    The Fascists vs Franklin Roosevelt

    Within America itself, the pro-fascist Wall Street establishment had been loosing a war that began the day anti-fascist President Franklin Roosevelt was elected in 1932. Not only had their attempted February 1933 assassination failed, their 1934 coup d’etat plans were also thwarted by a patriotic General named Smedley Darlington Butler. To make matters worse, their efforts to keep America out of the war in the hopes of co-leading the New World Order alongside Germany, France and Italy was also falling apart. A As I outlined in my recent article How to Crush a Bankers’ Dictatorship, between 1933-1939, FDR had imposed sweeping reforms on the banking sector, thwarted a major attempt to create a global Bankers’ dictatorship under the Bank of International Settlements, and mobilized a broad recovery under the New Deal.

    By 1941, Japan’s attack on Pearl Harbor polarized the American psyche so deeply that resisting America’s entry into WWII as Wall Street’s American Liberty League had been doing up until then, became political suicide. Wall Street’s corporatist organizations were called out by FDR during a powerful 1938 speech as the president reminded the Congress of the true nature of fascism:

    “The first truth is that the liberty of a democracy is not safe if the people tolerate the growth of private power to a point where it becomes stronger than their democratic state itself. That, in its essence, is fascism – ownership of government by an individual, by a group, or by any other controlling private power… Among us today a concentration of private power without equal in history is growing. This concentration is seriously impairing the economic effectiveness of private enterprise as a way of providing employment for labor and capital and as a way of assuring a more equitable distribution of income and earnings among the people of the nation as a whole.”

    While America’s entry into WWII proved a decisive factor in the destruction of the fascist machine, the dream shared by Franklin Roosevelt, Henry Wallace and many of FDR’s closest allies across America, Canada, Europe, China and Russia for a world governed by large-scale development, and win-win cooperation did not come to pass.

    Even though FDR’s ally Harry Dexter White led in the fight to shut down the Bank of International Settlements during the July 1944 Bretton Woods conference, the passage of White’s resolutions to dissolve BIS and audit its books were never put into action. While White, who was to become the first head of the IMF, defended FDR’s program to create a new anti-imperial system of finance, Fabian Society leader, and devout eugenicist John Maynard Keynes defended the Bank and pushed instead to redefine the post-war system around a one world currency called the Bancor, controlled by the Bank of England and BIS.

    The Fascist Resurgence in the Post-War World

    By the end of 1945, the Truman Doctrine and Anglo-American “special relationship” replaced FDR’s anti-colonial vision, while an anti-communist witch hunt turned America into a fascist police state under FBI surveillance. Everyone friendly to Russia was targeted for destruction and the first to feel that targeting were FDR’s close allies Henry Wallace and Harry Dexter White whose 1948 death while campaigning for Wallace’s presidential bid put an end to anti-colonialists running the IMF.

    In the decades after WWII, those same financiers who brought the world fascism went straight back to work infiltrating FDR’s Bretton Woods Institutions such as the IMF and World Bank, turning them from tools of development, into tools of enslavement. This process was fully exposed in the 2004 book Confessions of an Economic Hit man by John Perkins.

    The European banking houses representing the old nobility of the empire continued through this reconquering of the west without punishment. By 1971, the man whom Perkins exposed as the chief economic hit man George Schultz, orchestrated the removal of the U.S. dollar from the Gold-reserve, fixed exchange rate system director of the Office of Management of Budget and in the same year, the Rothschild Inter-Alpha Group of banks was created to usher in a new age of globalization. This 1971 floating of the dollar ushered in a new paradigm of consumerism, post-industrialism, and de-regulation which transformed the once productive western nations into speculative “post-truth” basket cases convinced that casino principles, bubbles and windmills were substitutes for agro-industrial economic practices.

    So here we are in 2020 celebrating victory over fascism.

    The children and grandchildren of those heroes of 1945 now find themselves attached to the biggest financial collapse in history with $1.5 quadrillion of fictitious capital ripe to explode under a new global hyperinflation akin to that which destroyed Weimar in 1923, but this time global. The Bank of International Settlements that should have been dissolved in 1945 today controls the Financial Stability Board and thus regulates the world derivatives trade which has become the weapon of mass destruction that has been triggered to unleash more chaos upon the world than Hitler could have ever dreamed.

    The saving grace today is that the anti-fascist spirit of Franklin Roosevelt is alive in the form of modern anti-imperialists Vladimir Putin, Xi Jinping and a growing array of nations united under the umbrella of the New Deal of the 21st Century which has come to be called the “Belt and Road Initiative”.

    Had Prescott’s grandson Jeb (or Prescott’s spiritual grand daughter Hillary) found themselves in the position of President of the USA at this moment, it is unlikely that I would be writing this now, as I’m fairly certain WWIII would have already been launched. However, with President Trump having successfully survived nearly four years of Deep State subversion, and having called repeatedly for a positive alliance with Russia and China, a chance still exists to take the types of emergency actions needed at this moment of existential crisis to do what FDR had always intended, and win World War II.


    Tyler Durden

    Sun, 05/10/2020 – 00:00

  • "Your Every Move Will Be Watched": Post-COVID Offices To Resemble China's Social Credit System
    “Your Every Move Will Be Watched”: Post-COVID Offices To Resemble China’s Social Credit System

    We recently detailed how when America’s white collar work force returns to their offices, business complexes, and sky scrapers, their experience in the post-COVID ‘reopened’ work space is likely to resemble something more like an airport security check zone, complete with invasive protocols like frequent temperature checks and ‘social distancing’ and health surviellance, as well as Plexiglass eclosed cubicles and HR-style enforcement monitors. 

    If all that sounds like a hassle, the WSJ has since taken up the question of America’s near-future office spaces, and the end result looks to be worse than expected. “Your every move will be watched,” the report emphasizes:

    In Midtown Manhattan, thermal cameras will measure body temperatures as employees file into a 32-story office tower at Rockefeller Center. The building’s owner, RXR Realty, said it is also developing a mobile app for tenants to monitor — and score — how closely their workers are complying with social distancing.

    PricewaterhouseCoopers LLP said it is preparing to launch this month a phone app for employers that traces contacts by analyzing workers’ interactions in the office. More than 50 clients have expressed interest, including some of the nation’s biggest banks, manufacturers and energy companies.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    From “Black Mirror”

    It sounds like something very close to China’s ‘big brother’ social credit scoring system which made world headlines last year, as it relies on cutting edge facial recognition software designed to permanently store a citizen profile while actively tracking individuals’ public movements. 

    There’s already been reported instances of Chinese citizens being prevented from taking trains due to the system forecasting they might not be able to pay, or some other ‘pre-crime’ risks

    And now this is getting closer to home, possibly coming to an office near you:

    Advertising giant Interpublic Group of Cos . is exploring dividing its 22,000 U.S. employees into three separate groups, according to perceived health risks, which could include age. Workers could be asked to disclose medical and other personal information about themselves and, in some cases, family members…

    “It is a reasonable approach, if you can get through the operational and some of the privacy and regulatory issues,” Dr. Ossmann said.

    It’s certainly alarming anytime it has to be admitted that “privacy issues” are merely a pesky little something to “get through”. 

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    There’s already talk of health tracking apps set up on a reward/punishment system of incentives sounding like something straight out of the dysoptian futuristic series Black Mirror.

    This would further be integrated with controversial thermal imaging technology – some already set up at Amazon warehouses – capable of storing face recognition data (thought the company promises not to activate the storing software).

    And it’s complete with live “guinea pigs” — rather, currently returning office employees, as the WSJ writes of one real estate company

    RXR, the real-estate company, is testing new systems on its own employees. “We are using ourselves as the guinea pigs,” RXR’s Chief Executive Scott Rechler said.

    The company aims to have its social-distancing app ready at the end of May. Workers’ movements are tracked through their smartphones — you get a higher score the more time in the office you are farther than 6 feet from another person. An individual would see his or her own score, and the employer would see aggregate data on how employees are complying with social distancing as a whole.

    Comply or else what?… Yet another reason why employees would have to worry about keeping their jobs. 

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Facial recognition system demonstration in China, Getty Images.

    And more on labeling broad groups of employees according to perceived COVID-19 risk factors

    A worker that tested positive for coronavirus antibodies, indicating they had the infection in the past, would be considered a “Level 1” employee — the lowest risk— and could return to work when states and cities lift work-from-home orders.

    Those without antibodies but who are considered a low to moderate risk would count as “Level 2.” This group would include employees who are under 65 years old, don’t live with high-risk people and don’t have chronic diseases including diabetes or hypertension. This group could potentially return to work in a second wave.

    Employees over 65, or those who are pregnant, smoke, have chronic diseases or health issues would be considered “Level 3.” These at-risk employees would have to wait the longest to return, Dr. Ossmann said.

    We wonder when the initial discrimination lawsuits based on how identifying characteristics are interpreted and assigned would start rolling down hill. 

    But again, to see how all of this would actually play out, one need only watch episodes of the Black Mirror. What could go wrong?


    Tyler Durden

    Sat, 05/09/2020 – 23:35

  • Here's How To Become A Prepper
    Here’s How To Become A Prepper

    Authored by Daisy Luther via The Organic Prepper blog,

    If the coronavirus has inspired you to become a prepper, you’re not alone. At long last, prepping has become mainstream due to runs on supplies, shortages, and stay-at-home orders throughout the country. More folks than ever before are seeing the wisdom of having extra food and household goods on hand. It can help you through not only disasters and pandemics, but also through personal financial problems.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    But delve into most preparedness websites (including this one) and it can start to get overwhelming when you read articles about civil unrest, EMPs, and existential catastrophes. You’ll see articles about guns and outdoor survival and all sorts of things in which you have absolutely no interest.

    And more than that, it’s kind of overwhelming. It can make you feel like, “Wow, I will never be able to have a bunker in Montana with 150,000 rounds of ammo. I don’t even know how to build a fire. Why even bother?”

    Before we get started with the “how to’s” here are a few things you should know.

    All of us started at the beginning.

    It’s important to know that all of us started somewhere. We all had some event that awakened us to the need to be better prepared. (To learn how some readers were inspired to get started, go here.) We all had to learn the ins and outs, read the books, and acquire the stuff.

    Most of us don’t have thousands of dollars to drop on buckets of food and secondary locations. We began by just getting a few extra things when we could.

    It takes some time.

    Getting well-prepared doesn’t happen overnight. Even if you have a budget that is relatively unlimited, you will find that it still takes time to figure out what you need, where to get it, and where to store it.

    So if you can only afford a few extra things each week, that’s a fantastic place to start. Within a month, you may have an extra week’s food supply doing things that way. Within a year, you’ve got a 3-month supply.

    Rome wasn’t built in a day and neither was a prepper’s stockpile.

    You don’t have to be of a particular political or religious belief to be a prepper.

    A lot of folks think that most preppers are well-to-do white, right-wing Christians. While a lot of preppers do have that in common, there are a lot who do not. We don’t all live on an acreage in the boondocks and raise everything we eat.

    If you feel like you don’t fit into the mold, don’t worry because let me tell you a secret: there really is no mold. We have readers of this website from all different kinds of political and religious backgrounds. We have city dwellers and suburbanites. We have folks who live off the land and folks who buy most of their food from the grocery store. We have rich readers and poor readers. We have people coming here from many different countries with many different belief systems. The thing that unites us is that we want to be prepared.

    We have people who are involved in prepping for a huge variety of reasons and we, the writers and editors of this site, sincerely welcome anyone who wants to become better prepared for emergencies.

    You don’t have to be a tinfoil hat conspiracy theorist to be a prepper.

    A lot of folks have this mental image of some wild-eyed guy peering out of the bunker wearing a tinfoil helmet. I’ll grant you that a lot of preppers are mistrustful of the things we hear in the mainstream media. We don’t take things at face value.

    But for every prepper who is certain that the New World Order is trying to take over and every event is a false flag, there are preppers who are extremely logical and scientific. There are preppers who are pro-vaccination and anti-vaccination and everything in between.

    I guess what I’m trying to say here is that we run the gamut. Don’t let the stereotypes scare you away.

    Don’t stay someplace you’re treated badly.

    In most of the preparedness world, you’ll be welcomed with open arms. But there are a few websites and forums where you find long-time preppers who are incredibly discouraging. If you run into this issue repeatedly, don’t continue hanging out there. Getting started on a big endeavor is overwhelming enough without people like that making you feel like crap.

    Around here we like to help each other with advice and suggestions. Feel free to ask any questions you might have in the comments section and you’ll probably get more than one answer from those who wish to share their knowledge.

    We welcome you and we’re glad you’re here. Go here to sign up for our newsletter so you don’t miss a thing.

    Now, how do you get started prepping?

    Pretty much all of us have recently had a crash course in preparedness with the COVID-19 pandemic. Many people have been sheltering in place in their homes for over a month now and have seen holes in their purchases. Some folks had the unfortunate experience of going out to stock up a little too late, only to find that the shelves were bare of essentials.

    An enormous factor that makes just about every disaster worse is panic. When you wait until the last minute, you’re out there with all the other folks who waited until the last minute. Tensions are high and supplies are low. This can create an unsafe situation and can leave people without the things they need to face the event that has them rushing to the store in the first place.

    The goal of prepping is to avoid all that.

    When you’re prepped, sure, you really want to make one last run to the grocery store or Target, but if it came right down to it and you couldn’t, you’d still be okay. You still have the things on hand that your family needs to survive an event that lasts for a few hours all the way to a few months or even a few years. (And remember what I said above? It takes a while to get to that point.) The information below contains lots of links to articles, PDF guides, and books for topics you may wish to learn more about.

    What are you prepping for?

    There are all sorts of events people prep for, one of which, obviously, is a massive pandemic and quarantine. Outside of your general supplies, consider prepping for power outages next. Here’s a PDF guide that will help you get ready for blackouts. and here’s an article with some guidelines.

    But there are many more things and some will be unique to your area. The Prepper’s Workbook may be helpful in figuring out exactly what’s the most likely for you. Here are some more regional things to prepare for these events are common in your area:

    Focus on the things most pertinent to your area. Think about those most likely events and what generally occurs with them: power outages, property damage, a requirement for special shelter, a secondary disaster (like a flood that follows a hurricane, for example).

    Who are you prepping for?

    Think about all of the members of your family or any loved ones you might be providing shelter for during an emergency. Everyone will have unique needs and wishes. This is why checklists are a great guideline but they don’t encompass everything.

    Think about these needs and stock up accordingly:

    • Medications (try to get a month ahead on necessary meds if you can, even if it means paying out of pocket)

    • Special diets

    • Entertainment (what your 2-year-old finds fun and what your 14-year-old finds fun are very different)

    • Picky eaters (I recommend indulging picky eaters if you can – the middle of an emergency is not the time for stress-inducing arguments and familiar foods can help picky folks feel more in control)

    • Baby and toddler needs like diapers and wipes, as well as formula, and baby food if you use it

    • Pet supplies like food, kitty litter, carriers and leashes in case of evacuation, and any medication your pet takes

    These are just a few examples of special needs. Spend a couple of days with a notebook and pen close at hand and write down every single thing anyone in your household uses, pets included.

    Stock up on water.

    Water is near and dear to my heart, so much so that I wrote a book on the topic. (You can find The Prepper’s Water Survival Guide HERE.) I always put water at the top of the list, because without it, you’ll be dead in 3 short days. The need for an emergency water supply isn’t always the result of a down grid disaster. Recently, we tapped into our emergency water when the well pump broke. Some places have had water emergencies when the municipal supply was contaminated by stuff like industrial spills or agricultural run-off. Floods and bad storms can also sometimes cause the water supply to be tainted.

    • Use containers you have RIGHT NOW and fill them with water from the tap. Put the lid on and stash them away. Don’t use milk jugs or juice jugs for drinking water, but you can use them for sanitation water in a pinch. If you can get your hands on some empty, clean 2-liter soda bottles, that will be perfect. We don’t drink soda, so we have some of the 1-gallon water bottles from the store.

    • Buy some filled 5-gallon jugs of purified water.  How much you need should be based on the number of family members. The rule of thumb is 1 gallon per person, per day, but you may find you need a lot more than that when you add in pets and sanitation needs. You may be able to find these less expensively, already filled at the store. When I lived in Canada you could pick up a filled jug for less than $10, but California has all sorts of environmental rules that make these containers more expensive here. Another option is the 7-gallon Aquatainer that is designed for easy stacking. (Be sure to put this in a place where the floor can support the weight of a bunch of heavy water containers.)

    • Have a way to dispense the water from the jugs.  We have a top-loading water dispenser for use in emergencies. These MUST be top loading because the bottom-loading ones require electricity to run the pump.)

    • Get a gravity-fed water filter.  I use a Big Berkey, but it’s a hefty investment when you’re trying to get everything at once. If you can’t swing that, buy Jim Cobb’s Prepper’s Survival Hacks book. It has numerous DIY water filters that you can make without spending a fortune.

    Food

    Emergency food comes in many different forms. The first thing you have to look at is cooking methods, which we discussed above. The food you choose needs to be able to be prepared using the method you have available now, not the one you plan to get in the future.

    Another important note is that your emergency food supply should be nutritious. You won’t want to fill up on empty calories when you may be making greater demands of your body. Keep in mind food restrictions, too, because an emergency situation is bad enough without an allergic reaction or intolerance illness.

    There are several different ways to create a food supply.

    • See what you have.  Go through your kitchen cupboards and see what you already have that could be used in an emergency. Things like nut butters, crackers, and other no-cook snacks are great options. Canned foods that only require heating are good as well. Instant rice or noodles can be added to your emergency supply. Group these items together on a special shelf or in a Rubbermaid container so that they are available when you need them. Figure out how long your supply would last your family before you go and purchase more. Figure out what shelf-stable items you need to add to balance out your supply. (Perhaps dried or canned fruit and vegetables, canned meat, jerky, etc., would provide more nutrients and variety.)

    • Build a pantryThis is the best and least expensive way to build a pantry of familiar foods your family already enjoys. Make a list of what you need to feed your family for a month without a trip to the store, and without reliance on long cooking times. (This rules out beans and rice for most people.) Learn more about building a pantry that will see you through a variety of emergencies (including personal financial crises) in my book, Prepper’s Pantry. Also, check out The Prepper’s Book of Lists, a PDF guide you can print off and write on.

    • Emergency buckets. The very fastest way to create an instant food supply is emergency buckets of freeze-dried food, which require only the ability to boil water to prepare. One caveat: do not go with the cheapest thing you can find. Some of those taste absolutely terrible. As well, they’re loaded with unhealthy chemicals and sodium. If you normally eat very healthfully, then move to MSG-laden freeze-dried meals, you’re not going to feel well at all in an emergency. My very favorite brand of emergency food is Legacy Foods. Legacy has standard buckets of survival food, fruits and vegetables, dairy products, and protein. The quality is very good and the meals are tasty when prepared. Keep in mind that these have to be purchased well before the emergency occurs because currently, almost every company is sold out and back-ordered for weeks.

    A way to cook your food during a power outage

    If the power goes out, how will you cook? You need the ability to boil water, at the very least. If you can boil water, then you can heat up canned food or prepare freeze-dried food in an emergency. Here are some secondary cooking methods, some of which you may already have.

    • Woodstove or fireplace.  If you heat with wood, you’re a step ahead already, at least in the midst of a winter power outage. However, you won’t want to fire up the woodstove to cook in the summer, particularly since you may already be battling the heat without a fan or air conditioner.

    • Gas kitchen stove.  Some kitchen stoves that use gas or propane can be used without electricity while others can’t. (If you’re replacing your stove, this is definitely a quality you’ll want to look for.)

    • Outdoor barbecue. If the weather allows, you can fire up your propane or charcoal barbecue during a power outage and cook your feast outdoors.

    • Rocket stove. There are all sorts of little emergency stoves out there which are designed to boil water quickly and without the use of a great deal of fuel. My favorites are the Volcano 3-way stove and the Kelly Kettle. You can also make an efficient stove. We made one that brought water to boil in less than 4 minutes.

    Do not risk using emergency stoves designed for camping, indoors, unless the manufacturer specifically says that it can be used indoors. To do so is to risk fire, smoke damage, or carbon monoxide poisoning.

    Sanitation

    Another thing that can quickly become dire is personal sanitation. Depending on your situation, you may not have running water or flushing toilets. You need to stock up on supplies to make the best of these situations and keep family members healthy.

    • Baby wipes. You can never have enough baby wipes. Stock up on these for hand-washing after using the bathroom, before and after food prep, and before eating. They can also be used to wipe down surfaces. You can learn more about hand and surface hygiene when there is no running water HERE.

    • Cleaning supplies. You still have to keep your home reasonably clean when there is no running water to help prevent illness and disease. You can find some cleaning hacks HERE.

    • Personal waste plan. You have to have a plan to deal with personal waste when the toilet won’t flush. This article tells you how to make a human kitty litter toilet, a very inexpensive solution to the personal waste issue. Waste must be handled very carefully to avoid the spread of disease and illness.

    Here are the items I recommend that you keep on hand for water emergencies:

    • Disposable disinfecting wipes

    • Super absorbent paper towels

    • Basins

    • Baby wipes (These can be used for handwashing and personal hygiene.

    • Your regular spray cleaner (Ours is vinegar and orange essential oil)

    • Kitty litter. This soaks up messes and helps to absorb odor. (If your toilet won’t flush because you’re on a city sewer system, it can also be used as a makeshift toilet. This serious concern  and how to make this toilet is discussed here.)

    Heat

    If a power outage takes place in the winter, you may need a secondary source of heat.

    • Woodstove or fireplace

    • Propane heater (I recommend the Mr. Buddy brand – it’s safe to use indoors)

    • Kerosene heater

    • Natural gas fireplaces – the fan won’t work but you may be able to thoroughly heat one room with these as long as the gas works.

    There are many more options. For a detailed discussion on staying warm during a power outage, check out this article.

    Light

    Lighting is absolutely vital, especially if there are children in the house. Nothing is more frightening than being completely in the dark during a stressful situation. Fortunately, it’s one of the easiest things to plan for, as well as one of the least expensive.

    Some lighting solutions are:

    • Garden stake solar lights

    • Long-burning candles

    • Kerosene lamp and fuel

    • Flashlights (don’t forget batteries)

    • Hand crank or solar lantern

    • Don’t forget matches or lighters

    For more information on lighting, check out this article.

    Tools and supplies

    Some basic items will make your life much easier during an emergency. Here are some things that are essential in the event of a power outage:

    • Lighter/waterproof matches

    • Batteries in various sizes

    • Manual can opener

    • Basic tools: Pliers, screwdriver, wrench, hammer

    • Duct tape

    • Superglue

    • Sewing kit

    • Bungee cords

    • Zip ties

    If you’d like to expand on the basic supplies, a more detailed list of tools and hardware can be found HERE.

    First Aid kit

    It’s important to have a basic first aid kit on hand at all times, but particularly in the event of an emergency. Your kit should include basic wound care items like bandages, antibiotic ointments, and sprays. As well, if you use them, keep on hand a supply of basic over-the-counter medications, like pain relief capsules, cold medicine, cough syrup, anti-nausea pills, heartburn pills, and allergy medication.

    Be sure to have a couple of good medical guides on hand. I like this first aid bookthis medical book, and this book of natural remedies.

    If you want to put together a more advanced medical kit, you can find a list HERE.

    Other Stuff

    As you continue along your preparedness journey, you’ll find that there are other items that are very important to you. For example, you’ll want to build a bug-out bag for possible evacuations.

    Another book you might like is Be Ready for Anything. It’s a comprehensive guide that covers 12 different disasters and prepping basics in a thorough manner.

    And don’t be surprised when this mindset creates within you the itch to be more self-reliant, which means you’ll be adding gardening tools, sewing supplies, woodworking tools,  and other supplies to your stockpile.

    You’ve got this!

    I know this sounds like a LOT. But remember, you don’t have to do everything today. Break it down into manageable pieces. This gives you a broad overview.

    You’re going to do some list-writing, so grab a notebook and pen.

    • Write a master list. Now, based on this article, go through and write a list of the things that you feel are important for your family’s preparedness plan. Include the things that you already have. Organize your list by checking off the things you have.

    • Organize the supplies that you have into “kits”. I have Rubbermaid tubs labeled with the contents for emergency purposes, sorted into kits for things like pandemic supplies, off-grid lighting, batteries and power supplies, etc.

    • Now write a minimalist list of the first things that you must have for survival. Don’t worry if you can’t get everything at once. Start off by covering all of the bases with a skeleton kit that will get you by. This list might include some food that doesn’t require cooking (thus eliminating the immediate need for a secondary cooking method), a way to keep warm, water, a kitty litter toilet, and some baby wipes.

    • Finally, write the big list. This is a list of the things mentioned in the article that you want to own. Make a copy of the list and keep it in your wallet so that if you happen by a thrift store or yard sale, you know what you need. As your budget allows, pick up one or two of these items per week. These may be higher ticket items so don’t worry if it takes you a while to get them. You’ve gotten the bare necessities, so these items will just add to your already sturdy foundation of preparedness.

    Don’t panic. Start with your basics in each category and add to it as your time and budget allow.

    I mentioned this earlier, but if you want more guidance to get started, here’s a PDF book to help you get prepped no matter where you live: The Prepper’s Workbook. It’s based on a course I used to offer but I think the workbook is a great way to do the exercises with a smaller time commitment and a lower price tag.

    If you’d like a place to ask questions and talk with new preppers, you can join our new Facebook group here or visit our forum.

    Most of all, welcome. We’re glad that you’ve joined us. You’re going to be ready the next time something like this rolls around without fighting the crowds for those last few rolls of toilet paper.


    Tyler Durden

    Sat, 05/09/2020 – 23:10

  • One Bank Explains Why QE No Longer Stimulates The Economy And Only Leads To Higher Stock Prices
    One Bank Explains Why QE No Longer Stimulates The Economy And Only Leads To Higher Stock Prices

    Even some of the most ardent supporters of the fraud that is Keynesian economics now admit the entire modern economic system is on the verge of collapse for one main reason: the marginal utility of debt is collapsing, with ever more debt required to generate an increase in underlying GDP.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    And tied to that, is another reason why any day now the current system may be the last: the marginal utility of every new QE is now declining to the point where soon virtually none of the money created by the Fed out of thin air will enter the economy and instead will be stuck in capital markets, resulting in hyperinflation for asset prices even as the broader economy collapses. Or, as BMO’s Daniel Krieter writes, “QE has fed through to the real economy in a slower manner than previous QE campaigns” and for each dollar the Fed’s balance sheet has grown, M1 money supply has increased about $0.32, compared to $0.96 and $0.74 in QE1 and QE2. “The expansionary policy thus far has mostly resulted in increased asset prices”, BMO writes concluding what had been obvious to us and our readers since 2009. Only now we are ten years closer to what is the inevitable endgame, one where the Fed has no impact on M1, which will also be known as the “game over” phase.

    But let’s back up.

    Traditionally, as BMO explains, we analyze the business cycle from a classical economic perspective where monetary authorities are more passive and “the invisible hand” guides economies (this used to be the case before the Fed went all Politburo on the USSA and decided to nationalize capital markets, crushing any “signal” the bond market may have; the final step will be the launch of Yield Curve Control which will be game over for the market). In this context, we look at interest rates, which can theoretically be defined as the rate that makes the consumer indifferent between consumption today and consumption tomorrow. R* is the (unknowable) natural rate of interest that supports full employment and stable interest rates. In theory, if rr*, consumption saving is preferable and the economy is contracting.

    In an expansionary phase, prices and consumption are increasing. Because prices and investment opportunities are high, demand for money among consumers/businesses is high, and interest rates (r) increase alongside borrowing. When r rises to the rate of r*, consumption slows, earnings fall, and a recession ensues. R* falls as uncertainty and risk aversion grow. This is a “business cycle” recession (and as long as the Fed is around, we will never have one of those again as the Fed has now also killed the business cycle… just as the USSR tried to do).

    However, a recession can also be caused by some external shock to the economy that produced further declines in r*. This is because r* is reactive to uncertainty with a strong negative correlation. The greater the uncertainty, the lower r* falls.

    In recession, r falls as consumption remains low as long as it is greater than r*. Defaults accelerate the drop in r. With the passage of time, r* rises slowly as the uncertainty/risk aversion surrounding the shock and/or end of business cycle fades. However the longer firms go without earnings due to low consumption, the more defaults are realized and the more r drops. At some point, the combination of falling r and rising r* results in r <= r*. Once this happens,  consumption/ investment picks up and the economy enters recovery.

    In addition to accelerating declines in r, defaults experienced during recession also lower the cost of labor and capital goods as the resources of failed companies are returned to the economy. In addition, barriers to entry in certain industries fall as “old guard” firms go out of business. Thus, as the economy enters recovery, this combination of cheaper labor/capital goods and lower barriers to entry leads to strong business investment and increases growth potential during the ensuing expansion.

    This is how the world works in theory. Unfortunately, since 1913, theory has not worked due to the intervention of the Fed.  So now let’s look at how all this works in reality, and introduce an active central bank with a wider range of monetary policy tools at its disposal.

    As the economy cools, the central bank lowers r in an attempt to spur consumption by forcing r<r*. Consumption increases in response, and recession/defaults are avoided. But business resources aren’t returned to the economy. Recovery will be less robust due to fewer relative attractive investment opportunities. As Krieter argues, this was the experience of 2001.

    Now in 2008, a shock in the form of subprime mortgages hits the economy and uncertainty skyrockets. R* moves into negative territory as shown in a recent San Francisco Fed study. The Fed moves rates lower, but is constrained by the zero bound. In order to further “lower r”, the Fed embarks on asset purchases during QE and is successful in spurring consumption, as evidenced by the strong correlation between increases in excess reserves and increases in M1. M1 is the most basic measure of money supply and includes essentially only cash and checking/demand bank accounts.
    The theory is that for a good or service to be consumed, it must be paid for out of M1. Therefore, the increase in M1
    following QE is a measure of the degree to which QE results in actual consumption.

    Note “lower r” in quotation marks in the previous bullet because r is at the zero bound and cannot (at least in the United States) be lowered further. Therefore QE increases money supply which is meant to spur consumption, which is the same desired effect of lower interest rates. In a sense, money supply increases are synthetic interest rate decreases (and synthetic capital market increases).

    The combination of QE-driven consumption (r falling) and fading uncertainty after a trillion dollar fiscal stimulus package (r* rising) ultimately pulls the economy out of recession. However, the pace of response in 08/09 was slower. QE was not announced until late November 2008, after large defaults were already experienced. Fiscal stimulus in the form of the ARRA package didn’t arrive until February 2009 with an additional lag in implementation that featured incremental defaults. In the end, almost a trillion dollars’ worth of debt was affected by default in 2008/09, but QE certainly prevented actual defaults from being likely exponentially greater. BMO notes however that defaults avoided were once again economic resources that were not returned to the economy and barriers to entry that are not lowered. This argues that attractive investment opportunities following the financial crisis were not as abundant as the depth of recession would suggest.

    As a result, the recovery was slow, ultimately prompting the Fed to embark on additional rounds of quantitative easing in an attempt to spur increased consumption.

    Which brings us to the seeds of the Fed’s own demise: the problem is that QE appears to be experiencing diminishing returns, as evidenced by a falling correlation between excess reserves and M1 in successive episodes of QE following the financial crisis. As QE leads to a direct increase in bank reserves, only a fraction is translated into money supply growth, and thus potentially consumption and investment. QE1 was highly effective and an important factor behind pulling the economy out of recession. QE2 had a marginally lower, but still high, follow through of .735 indicating that on average, $0.74 of each dollar of QE translated to increased money supply. We observe elevated inflation and personal  consumption rates during the period of QE2 as evidence of its effectiveness. However, during Q3, the correlation fell to just $0.28 and resulted in very little inflation of GDP growth. Through this lens, the impact of QE on the real economy has diminished over time.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    How does BMO explain the diminishing impact of QE?

    • Diminishing marginal utility of consumption: QE (and monetary policy) is often referred to as “borrowing from the future”. However, there is only a limited amount of future consumption that can be pulled into the current period via monetary policy. This could apply to consumption of durable goods: as rates have been relatively low for a long period of time, demand for credit no longer increases at the same rate with incrementally lower interest rates. At some point, consumption does not bring sufficient to utility no matter how long prices or interest rates are.
    • Wealth disparity: Wealth disparity exacerbates the impact of diminishing marginal utility of consumption. For reasons discussed in further detail below, QE tends to inflate the price of financial assets, making those who own the assets more wealthy. A large percentage of QE money ends up in the hands of the wealthy, whose consumption patterns are unlikely to change in response to a near term increase in wealth.
    • Inflation expectations: Finally, the crux of monetary policy plays on expectations. Inflation is self reinforcing as demonstrated by a very high correlation between inflation and inflation expectations. Around the introduction of QE, there was an expectation that it could spawn runaway inflation. Having been through multiple rounds of QE without a large increase in inflation, people have likely generally come to understand that QE is not likely to result inflation, therefore there is marginally less impetus to consume now.

    Following five years of no QE in the United States, it appears the utility of current QE has increased modestly in comparison to QE3. However, the follow through to consumption still remains well below levels experienced between Q1 and Q2. It is likely then that current QE is unlikely spurring much consumption as r isn’t influenced lower (via money supply increase) as much as in the past and likely remains well above r*.

    Worse, as we discussed last week, one can argue that r* is likely lower now than potentially any point in history, and according to Deutsche Bank it is at an all time low of -1%.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Not only is uncertainty extremely high, but the impact of COVID-19 arguably directly lowers r*. Recall r can be defined as the rate of interest that makes consumption today indifferent to consumption in the future. In all economic models, r is assumed to be positive. But when people are afraid to their leave their house for fear of infection, future consumption actually is more attractive than current consumption. So r* is arguably negative for fundamental reasons for the first time. Greatly heightened uncertainty only pushes it even further negative.

    When money supply goes up, but consumption fails to be generated (because r remains well above r*), then savings rates mathematically increase. Therefore, the prices of financial assets increase generally.

    During times of risk aversion, bond prices increase first, but supply of safe assets is limited, especially as the Fed buys a substantial portion of the Treasury market. Investors are therefore pushed into riskier assets. But as long as r remains below r*, the more savings go up, the greater the mechanical move in financial asset prices relative to real economic activity.

    This, according to BMO, is what’s driving the paradoxical relationship between bond and equity prices in recent weeks, and explains why stocks are performing so well despite the outlook for the greater economy. Money supply that doesn’t translate into consumption must result in higher financial asset prices until defaults result in wealth destruction.  What does this mean for the recovery? The central bank is displaying reduced capacity to further generate real economic activity as a result of accommodative policy over the past twenty years. This means that recovery is unlikely until r* increases significantly, which only happens alongside fading virus uncertainty. This will take a long time.

    During that time, one of two things will happen. Either the government will continue to assist companies in avoiding
    bankruptcy, or it will not.
    If it does, confidence (and r*) will likely return relatively more quickly at a huge cost to the government. However, there will not be a large return of economic resources at the end of this recession and the ensuing recovery will be disappointing given the degree of economic pain currently being felt.

    If it does not, defaults could potentially reach historic proportions, and the recession will be long and painful. However, using the “ripping the bandaid” analogy, this scenario would result in likely the largest return of economic resources in the history of the country and lead to a very powerful economic expansion in the wake of the current recession.

    Ultimately, the truth likely lies in the middle. The government will continue to provide relief, though not likely in scale large enough to save all businesses. Defaults and downgrades will be staggering, but this will increase the capacity of growth in the ensuing economic recovery.

    What does this mean for risk assets? It means that risk assets are being technically supported by stimulus measures so far, particularly QE that is no longer as effective as it was. However, a large wave of defaults is unavoidable without an unlikely near-term (and complete) solution to COVID-19. Heavy defaults, the kinds described in “Biblical” Wave Of Bankruptcies Is About To Flood The US, will likely bring about another wave of risk asset price weakness as wealth is destroyed and technical upward pressure on financial asset prices and a higher percentage of savings demand is met with safe haven assets (Figure 3).

    This also explains why the Fed was compelled to enter the bond market, as absent a direct intervention in the secondary market, bond prices would crater and trigger a self-fulfilling doom-loop, where lower bond prices lead to higher defaults, lead to even lower prices and so on. For now, the Fed has managed to delay this process but there is only so much Powell can do to offset the collapse in fundamentals which will lead to continued ratings erosion, and the eventual defaults of countless companies, many of which the Fed will be directly invested in. At that point, the Fed’s action in the “market” will become the topic of non-stop Congressional hearings, and will culminate with doubts emerging about the viability of the dollar as a reserve currency.

    Until this trigger level is reached, however, QE will continues to pose a technical tailwind, influencing financial asset prices higher. This can be sustained until default rates increase, which is likely not until June or later as government stimulus money starts to run dry, and which point assets will likely take another nosedive lower, just as reports of a second coronavirus pandemic result in (most Democratic) states shuttering again ahead of the presidential election.

    What happens then? Risk assets will continue to slide into the election and into 2021, at which point as Nordea showed last week, we will hit a point where the lagged effect of the flood central bank liquidity will finally hit into the S&P500, and result in one final explosion in risk assets, sending stocks over 40% higher…

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    … although not of a benign nature but more of what one would expect to see in the Caracas or Weimar stock market.


    Tyler Durden

    Sat, 05/09/2020 – 22:45

  • Bubble-Wrapped Americans: How The US Became Obsessed With Physical & Emotional Safety
    Bubble-Wrapped Americans: How The US Became Obsessed With Physical & Emotional Safety

    Via Ammo.com,

    “In America we say if anyone gets hurt, we will ban it for everyone everywhere for all time. And before we know it, everything is banned.”

    Professor Jonathan Haidt

    It’s a common refrain: We have bubble-wrapped the world. Americans in particular are obsessed with “safety.” The simplest way to get any law passed in America, be it a zoning law or a sweeping reform of the intelligence community, is to invoke a simple sentence: “A kid might get hurt.”

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Almost no one is opposed to reasonable efforts at making the world a safer place. But the operating word here is “reasonable.” Banning lawn darts, for example, rather than just telling people that they can be dangerous when used by unsupervised children, is a perfect example of a craving for safety gone too far.

    Beyond the realm of legislation, this has begun to infect our very culture. Think of things like “trigger warnings” and “safe spaces.” These are part of broader cultural trends in search of a kind of “emotional safety” – a purported right to never be disturbed or offended by anything. This is by no means confined to the sphere of academia, but is also in our popular culture, both in “extremely online” and more mainstream variants.

    Why are Americans so obsessed with safety? What is the endgame of those who would bubble wrap the world, both physically and emotionally? Perhaps most importantly, what can we do to turn back the tide and reclaim our culture of self-reliancemental toughness, and giving one another the benefit of the doubt so that we don’t “bankrupt ourselves in the vain search for absolute security,” as President Dwight D. Eisenhower warned us about?

    Coddling and Splintering: The Transformation of the American Mind

    Two books published in 2018 provide parallel insights into the problems presented by the safety obsession of American culture: The Splintering of the American Mind by William Egginton, focused on the tendency of Americans to tunnel themselves off into self-selected bubbles, and The Coddling of the American Mind by Greg Lukianoff and Jonathan Haidt, which deals more with the tendency to avoid any uncomfortable or unpleasant information.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    There is an interesting phenomenon involved in coddling: Australian psychologist Nick Haskam first coined the term “concept creep.” Basically, this means that terms are often elastic and expand past the point of meaning. Take, for example, the concept of “trauma.” This used to have a very limited meaning. However, “trauma” quickly became expanded to mean even slight physical or emotional harm or discomfort. Thus the increasing belief among the far left that words can be “violence” – not “violent,” mind you, but actual, literal violence.

    In the other direction, the definition of “hero” has been expanded to mean just about anything. Every teacher, firefighter and police officer is now considered a “hero.” This isn’t to downplay or minimize the importance of these roles in our society. It’s simply to point out that “hero” just doesn’t mean what it used to 100 or even 30 years ago.

    Once this expansion of a term occurs, there is never any kind of retraction. Trauma now means just about anything, and violence will soon be expanded to include lawful, peaceful speech that one disapproves of. Once this happens, there will be no going back. In the words of Sam Harris:

    “We (as a society) have to be committed to defending free speech however impolitic, or unpopular, or even wrong because defending that is the only barrier to violence. That’s because the only way we can influence one another short of physical violence is through speech, through communicating ideas. The moment you say certain ideas can’t be communicated you create a circumstance where people have no alternative but to go hands on you.”

    It is extremely dangerous to begin labelling everything as violence for reasons of free speech, but perhaps even more dangerous is the notion that when anything is violence, nothing is violence. Redefining words as “violence” means that we have little recourse for when actual violence occurs.

    The Coddling of the American Mind notes some other concepts that are important as we speak of America’s obsession with “safety” above all else. First, that coddling combined with splintering means that people’s political views are much more like fanatical religious views than anything. They don’t see themselves as having to debate ideas or seek common ground. Rather, the opposing side and its proponents are seen as “dangerous” and must be discredited at all costs. It is worth noting that this is much more common among the left than the right or the center, which has now become more the place where “live and let live” types congregate.

    The problem with this goes beyond simply being irritated by irrational people barking at you or at someone else: There is an entire generation of people who are seriously lacking in critical thinking skills. They think that labelling people and name-calling are excuses for a reasoned argument. In the words of Voltaire, “Those who can make you believe absurdities can make you commit atrocities.”

    These problems are hardly confined to political radicalism or academia. Indeed, the corporate sector is no stranger to this kind of safety obsession. There is the phenomenon of “woke capital,” where the corporations find the latest celebrity cause-du-jour and use it as a marketing strategy.

    There is currently an extreme risk aversion in management science. Companies will now do basically anything to avoid “a kid getting hurt” or someone’s delicate sensibilities being offended.

    Education from kindergarten up to the universities is increasingly about teaching doctrines and ideology, rather than critical thinking and problem solving skills. All of this is a dangerous admixture that combines the full weight of the academic, cultural and business elites in this country. And its consequences are far reaching.

    Trigger Warnings and Safe Spaces

    For those unaware, a “trigger warning” is a person’s advisory that disturbing content is going to be posted. However, in an example of concept creep, the meaning of “disturbing” has become expanded to mean, well, just about anything that might offend a leftist. It is also sometimes known as a “content warning,” “TW” or “CW.”

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    A similar concept is that of a “safe space.” What used to be a term used for a place where people in actual danger of physical harm could express themselves, a “safe space” now means a place where there is no room for disagreement or questions because language is literally violence.

    This might all sound very silly and we definitely agree that it is. However, it is quickly becoming de rigeur not just in academia, which is increasingly functioning as a bizarre combination of a daycare center for 21 year olds and an indoctrination program, but also in the corporate world and in the media.

    It’s not surprising that such foolishness has reached our corporate elites, because so many figures within that world come from the Ivy League. Harvard Law, for example, was the center of a controversy where they were urged not to teach rape law or even use the word “violate” (which makes it pretty hard to talk about violations of the law). A Harvard professor argued that greater anxiety among students to discuss complicated and nuanced séxual assault cases was impeding the ability of professors to adequately teach their students. This in turn would lead to poorly prepared attorneys for rape victims in the future.

    Beyond a simple discussion in the academic sphere, there are student groups on campus who urge students not to attend or participate in class discussions focused on séxual violence. The same student groups advocate for warning students in advance so they can skip out on class and even to exclude “triggering” material from tests. Once again, the real victims here are the victims of séxual assault whose attorneys will be ill-prepared to advise them, to say nothing of the cumulative effect on the prosecutorial environment.

    Northwestern University professor Laura Kipnis was subject to a lengthy investigation by a kangaroo court and frivolous Title IX complaints over an article she wrote for The Chronicle of Higher Education about campus séx panics. Top comedians like Chris Rock now refuse to perform on college campuses, a place that has typically been their bread and butter.

    Another key term to understand here is “microaggressions” which means just about anything. Offensive statements under this umbrella include things like “I don’t see race,” “America is the land of opportunity” and “I believe the most qualified person should get the job.”

    To readers of Generation X or older, this all might sound like a resurgence of political correctness and, indeed, to some extent it is. However, there is something different about the current anti-speech craze sweeping not just campuses, but also boardrooms: Political correctness was, at least in theory, about the elimination of so-called “hate speech” (for example, using “mentally disabled” instead of “retarded” or “little person” instead of “midget”) and also about broadening the canon of literature to include more women and minorities.

    One doesn’t need to agree with either objective or be as generous as we are to see that the West has entered a new, accelerated and intensified version of the old political correctness that is qualitatively more dangerous. The “safe spaces” phase of this is about eliminating anything and everything that might be emotionally troubling to students on campus.

    This assumes a high degree of fragility among American college students. But perhaps this assumption isn’t totally off base.

    The Road to Safety Obsession

    If you were born before 1985 or so, your childhood was vastly different than of those born after you. As a child, you probably came and went as you pleased, letting your parents know where you were going, who you would be with and when you might be home. You rode your bike without a helmet and if you were bullied at school there’s a good chance that you view this as a character-building experience, not one of deep emotional trauma.

    So what happened?

    A few things. First, in 1984, the “missing child” milk carton was introduced. America became obsessed with child abduction in response to several high-profile child kidnappings over the period of a few years. Etan PlatzAdam Walsh and Johnny Gosch are just three of the names known to Americans during this time period. In September 1984, the Des Moines, Iowa-based Anderson Erickson Dairy began printing the pictures of Johnny Gosch and Eugene Martin on milk cartons. Chicago followed suit, then the entire state of California. In December 1984, a nationwide program was launched to keep the faces of abducted children front and center in the American mind.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    The milk cartons didn’t find many kids, but they did create the panic of “stranger danger,” where children were taught to fear strangers even though the lion’s share of child abduction, molestation and abuse comes from friends, family and other trusted figures such as public school teachers or camp counselors. Most missing children in America are runaways and in 99 percent of all child abductions, the perpetrator is a non-custodial father. There is at least one case of “stranger danger” being harmful – a lost 11-year-old Boy Scout who thought his rescuers were looking to kidnap him.

    Some of the protocols established out of this were useful, such as AMBER Alerts and Code Adam. Awareness of child abduction in general was raised and as a result there’s significantly fewer child abductions today than there were in 1980. Indeed, stranger abduction is incredibly rare in the United States. But this has come with a dark side.

    You might be familiar with the myriad of cases in suburban America where children playing alone are arrested by the police because they don’t have adult supervision. The parents are then questioned by the police or, in some cases, the state’s Child Protective Services.

    There was also the panic after the mass shooting at Columbine High School, which led to the bubble wrapping of schools alongside the home. “Zero tolerance” policies were implemented alongside school-wide peanut butter bans.

    And so the result is that there are at least two generations of American children raised in a protective net so tight that they not only have trouble expressing themselves, but also being exposed to failure and discomfort. What began as a good-faith effort to prevent child abduction and increase overall child welfare has ended up, as a side effect, creating a world where children were raised in such safety that they can’t even handle being upset.

    This has not only insulated children from the consequences of their own actions and the normal pains of growing up, but also gives the impression that no matter what their problems, “adults” are ready to step in and save the day at any moment.

    It’s worth noting that, in recent years, there has been a sharp rise in mental illness among young people, both on campus and off, including those with severe mental health problems.

    Cops and the 24-Hour News Cycle

    There are two other cultural phenomena worth exploring: The television series Cops and the 24-hour cable news cycle. As of April 2020, Cops is still on the air, having moved from Fox to Spike TV in 2013.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Cops was more than just a TV series, it was a cultural phenomenon that changed television. The cinéma vérité style used by the show was to be copied in the 90s by virtually every reality show you can name. Curiously, it came out around the same time that crime rates had plummeted comparatively to the 70s and 80s. And just at that time, people started having the worst in human behavior beamed into their homes for entertainment every Saturday night.

    At the same time, CNN was bringing news into your home 24 hours a day without end. This meant they had to fill programming around the clock – and most news is bad news. So in addition to a hugely popular program centered around chasing criminals in the act, Americans also had a constant stream of bad news and dangerous events pumped into their homes. The result was the end of the “free range child,” the kind who learned through play and discovered risk management through trial and error. This was replaced with children whose entire existence was micromanaged by adults, with little to no unsupervised play time.

    The ability to learn through failure is a well-established principle going back to the Greeks, who called it pathemata mathemata (“guide your learning through pain”). The knowledge and wisdom gained through failure and pain are arguably more lasting and valuable than those learned in school.

    The Generation Gap: Millennials and Gen Z

    Older generations (Generation X and Baby Boomers) have a tendency to conflate Millennials and Gen Z (also known as “Zoomers”). However, there are two key differences, one cultural and one clinical: First, Zoomers are much more digital natives than their Millennial counterparts. They didn’t get constant internet access or mobile access at college. They’ve had it since they were in middle school in many cases.

    While this is bound to create secondary cultural differences, we know of one clinical difference between Millennials and Zoomers: Zoomers are much more prone to mental illness, specifically depression, anxiety, alcoholism and self-harm.

    Depression and anxiety in particular are through the roof for girls, with moderate increases for boys. While self-reported cases are up, we also have harder clinical data: There has been a 62 percent increase in hospital admissions.

    The Baby Boomers and Gen Xers created an environment where it is safer than ever to be a child, but at what cost? There has been widespread and verifiable psychological damage done to the younger generation, which is likely being compounded by the coddling taking place in our nation’s universities.

    Screen Time and Social Media

    “Screen time” is the new obsession for parents, especially among, ironically, those who work in high-tech Silicon Valley jobs such as Steve Jobs, father of the iPhone. But there seems to be an emerging consensus among those who have actually studied the topic that the problem isn’t “screen time” per se, but rather the more specific use of it in the form of social media. This has been identified as the cause of depression and anxiety, particularly among girls.

    Why is social media usage particularly impactful among girls? Dr. Haidt and others postulate that it’s because they are more sensitive to the “perfect” lives being lived by beautiful social media influencers – at least the lives that they lead online. What’s more, there is a lot of exclusion and bullying taking place on social media. In days past, you only heard about the party you didn’t get invited to, but now you get to watch it unfold in real time on Snapchat or other platforms. And cyberbullying is much harder to track and police than its real world equivalent.

    There’s a related bubble wrapping going on with regard to a different sort of screen time: Kids today are often forbidden from playing with plastic guns or even finger guns. There is the notorious case of the 7-year-old child who was suspended for biting a Pop Tart toaster pastry into the shape of a gun. But millions of children come home (from the same schools where finger guns can warrant a suspension) to play Grand Theft Auto for hours on end.

    Indeed, there is some evidence that suggests that violent movies and video games can trigger violent thoughts in some, but not all, people who view them. The National Institute of Mental Health has done an extensive study detailing the impact that violent media has on those who view it.

    A Nation Divided

    There’s not much hyperbole in saying that America is barely a single nation anymore. We talk about “red states” and “blue states,” but the divide is much deeper than that. Even the coastal states largely have an urban college-educated Democratic population and a rural non-college-educated Republican population.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    While some animosity between different areas of the political spectrum, or even resentment of cities by the countryside and vice versa, is nothing new, the rancor took off sharply in the early 2000s following the controversial election of George W. Bush and his expanded imperial presidency after 9/11.

    Social media makes it easier for extremes to amplify their anger. What’s more, it’s much easier for people to become part of an online crusade – or witch hunt – than it is for them to do so without it.

    This is a big part of what is behind the string of disinvitations and protests on American college campuses. No one, especially young people (where “young” means “under 30”), can bear to listen to the opinions of someone they don’t agree with. Disinvitations aren’t limited to highly controversial figures like MILO and Richard Spencer, or even the decidedly much more vanilla Ann Coulter. Condoleeza Rice, the first black female Secretary of State, was disinvited in 2014, as was the first female head of the IMF and the first female finance minister of a G8 nation, Christine Lagarde.

    Because Americans increasingly refuse even to listen to arguments from the other side, inserting instead a strawman in favor of reasoned debate, there is no reason to believe that the American political and ideological divide will not increase.

    The Evolution of Victimhood Culture

    America and the West have largely adopted a victimhood culture. It is worth taking a minute to trace this radical transformation of values in the West from its origins.

    The earliest societies in the West were honor cultures. While it sounds like a no-brainer that we should return to an honor culture, we should unpack precisely what this means. An honor culture usually means a lot of interpersonal violence. Small slights must be dealt with through dead violence – because a gentleman cannot take any kind of stain on his honor. Dueling and blood feuds are common in these kinds of cultures.

    This is superseded by dignity culture. Dignity culture is different, because people are presumed to have dignity regardless of what others think of them. In a dignity culture, people are admired because they have a “thick skin” and are able to brush off slights even if they are seriously insulting. While we might find ourselves offended, even rightfully so, it is considered important to rise above the offense and conduct ourselves with dignity. Everyone heard some variant of “sticks and stones may break my bones but words will never hurt me” growing up as a child. This is perhaps the key phrase of a dignity culture.

    Victimhood culture is concerned with status in a similar manner to honor culture. Indeed, people become incredibly intolerant of any kind of perceived slight, much in the manner of an honor culture. However, in a victimhood culture, it is being offended, taking offense, and being a victim that provides one with status.

    Victimhood culture means that people are divided into classes, where victims are good and oppressors are bad. There is an eternal conflict with eternal grievances that can never fully be corrected or atoned for. People feel the need to constantly walk on eggshells and censor themselves. This leads to an overall emphasis on safety, as even words become “violence” – we need trigger warnings and safe spaces to protect us.

    Victimhood culture is closely associated with safety culture. Safety culture is, above all else, debilitating. Those who choose a marginalized identity – and in the contemporary West, a marginalized identity is almost always a choice – become more fragile and more dependent on the broader society. At the same time, the powerful elements in society gain a stake in reinforcing this marginalized identity. The Great Society provides a case study in this dynamic.

    Those who do not receive the so-called “benefits” of safety culture are frequently more prepared for the real world. Who would you rather hire? Someone who studied hard in a rigorous discipline for four years or someone who spent four years being coddled in what is basically a day care center for twentysomethings? With this in mind, it’s not too big of a leap to see that straight white men might actually have become “privileged” through the process of not having access to the collective hugbox in higher education.

    The Role of Lawyers and Litigation

    There is a relationship with the litigious society in which we live with warning labels everywhere, often for hazards that would seem incredibly obvious to most observant people. In previous generations, even power tools didn’t come with warnings to roll your sleeves up or take off your watch. This information was either common sense or passed along in high school shop classes or on the job.

    However, the American legal system has no penalty for frivolous lawsuits, which has led to an explosion in the number of lawsuits. There is a massive army of lawyers in the United States (which has a surplus of some 40 percent) whose profession revolves around finding aggrieved parties who weren’t properly “warned” – or indeed to be able to help write the warning labels themselves. These labels do not even exist for actual safety. The same type of person who is going to do the thing being warned against is likely the same type of person who doesn’t read warnings. The labels are simply there as a form of “CYA” for the firms who make them.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    That said, to a certain degree, the “litigious society” is a myth. The oft-cited McDonald’s coffee burn is actually more reasonable than people are aware: The elderly woman in question who was burned simply wanted McDonald’s – who kept their coffee extra hot to prevent people from taking part of their “free refills” policy – to pay for her skin graft resulting from the burn. When McDonald’s refused to settle this out of court and the case went to trial, they were rewarded for their efforts at stonewalling with punitive damages.

    So the main example of frivolous lawsuits is a big strawman. But to be clear – frivolous lawsuits are real. One great example of an actually frivolous lawsuit was the man who sued his dry cleaner for $67 million because they delivered his pants to the wrong person. There was no actual damage here and it’s difficult to express just how ridiculous the dollar figure claimed was. This case was thrown out of court, as most of these types of cases are. Still, litigants pursue them either to get media attention or to harass the defendant or both, a phenomenon known as “lawfare.” And these cases clog up genuine claims in the courts.

    Civil trials are long and drawn-out things. And with 40 million of them in the United States every year and over a million lawyers, it’s unsurprising that the system has become clogged with lawsuits, many of which are either totally frivolous (remember – there’s no penalty for filing a frivolous lawsuit in America) or just the type of thing that should be either settled or handled through binding arbitration.

    While the litigious society exists in parallel to the “safe spaces” of college campuses, it is worth noting because it is part of the larger bubble wrapping of the American landscape. The same kids who were raised with helicopter parents and a general sense that they had a “right” to never be offended were likewise raised in an environment where people could be sued for anything or, at the very least, this was the public perception. It is just another factor of risk aversion in American life.

    There are other consequences of having too many lawyers around and having them congregate within our political class: Words are chosen to obfuscate and laws proliferate, as legislation becomes a sort of “jobs program” for lawyers. The more laws we have, the less free we are and the less social trust we have. As laws, regulations, and agencies take the place of civil society, the state grows at the expense of everything else and the less trust we have in our society.

    Overreacting to the Wuhan Coronavirus

    In 2020, the Wuhan Coronavirus broke out of China and spread all around the world. The world had not seen a deadly, contagious virus with such scope since the Spanish flu pandemic of 1918 to 1920. At first, the response was denial and apathy. However, this quickly gave way to what could be considered a massive overreaction: Shutting everything down.

    There was a certain logic to this: If people gathering together were what was spreading the virus, then simply keep people apart until the whole thing blows over. However, this is also potentially a huge overreaction. It is a medical solution in the driver’s seat without any nod to the economic, social or military consequences that flow from it. Even if one agrees that medical solutions are to be the primary driver, it does not follow that they are the only driver.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Because of the lopsided and often hysterical reaction, many of the proposed solutions don’t even make sense: For example, telling everyone they can go to the supermarket while prohibiting them from going to small offices, or shutting down the border between the United States and Canada – two countries with highly infected populations and a sprawling border that is largely unpatrolled.

    A brief disclaimer: None of us are epidemiologists or virologists. And we defer to their superior knowledge on this subject.

    However, during the Spanish flu pandemic, life did not shut down quite so completely as it has during the Coronavirus pandemic. The methods used during the Spanish flu were isolation of the sick, mask wearing in public, and cancellation of large events. In places where these were practiced rigorously, there was a significant decline in the number of infections and death. St. Louis in particular is known as an exemplar of what to do during an easily transmissible epidemic.

    “The economy” has been cited as a reason the total shutdown of life during the Coronavirus pandemic was a poor idea. This might sound frivolous, but the mass unemployment not only leads to destitution for those when the economy is so paralyzed that there are no other jobs forthcoming. It also leads to a spike in the suicide rate. There is a certain calculus that must be done – how much unemployment is worth how much death from Wuhan Coronavirus?

    The reaction to this virus is noteworthy, because it is the first major pandemic of this new, insulated and coddled age. Rather than reasonable measures to mitigate death, the choice made was to do anything and everything possible to prevent death entirely. Not only might this be an unwise decision, it might be a fool’s errand: The virus seems to be much more contagious than was previously thought, as well as much less lethal.

    More than one reasonable person has asked what would happen if we all just went about our lives making reasonable precautions, such as hand washing, mask wearing, social distancing, and the cancellation of large events like sports and concerts. This is effectively what Sweden has done and it appears to work, especially when contrasted with their neighbors in Finland who have done basically the same as America. How much sense does it make to have the entire community converge upon its grocery stores while not allowing anyone to go into an office, ever? Compare this with what has passed for reasonable reaction: Closing down every school, every dine-in restaurant, and the government dictating which businesses are essential and which aren’t.

    A big motivator of this is a compulsion to not lose a single life to the Wuhan Coronavirus, which is a totally unreasonable goal. People are going to die. The question isn’t “how tightly do we have to lock the country down to ensure no one dies,” but rather “what are reasonable measures we can take to balance public safety against personal choice and social cohesion?”

    The splintering and division of America in practice has meant that the establishment conservative media was largely in denial over the virus for weeks. It is not a liberal smear to say that the amount of denialism from establishment conservative media, pundits, think tanks, bureaucrats and elected officials has in practice meant that America responded much more slowly and conservatively than it might have with a more unified America body politic.

    At the beginning of spring 2020, the virus seemed poised to devastate the American South, which largely stuck with the early conservative media denialism, eschewing social distancing, shuttering of certain public places and mask wearing. Again, a more united body politic and the media and trust in the media that goes along with that might have prevented a lot of illness and death.

    Imagine the impact of Walter Cronkite or Edward Murrow going on television and telling the American public to mask up and maintain distance versus the impact of Rachel Maddow and Tucker Carlson doing it.

    What Is Vindictive Protectiveness?

    “Vindictive protectiveness” was a term coined by Haidt and Lukianoff to describe the environment on America’s college campuses with regard to speech codes and similar. However, it can refer more broadly to the cultural atmosphere in the United States and the West today. From the college campus to the corporate boardroom to the office, Americans have to watch what they say and maybe even what they think lest they fall afoul of extra-legal speech and thought codes.

    Perhaps worst of all, an entire generation is being raised to see this not only as normal, but as beneficial. This means that as this generation comes of age and grows into leadership positions, that there is a significant chance that these codes will be enforced more rigorously, not less. And while there may be ebbs and flows (political correctness went into hibernation for pretty much the entire administration of George W. Bush – though to be fair, there was an imperfect replacement in the form of post-9/11 jingoism), the current outrage factory is much more concerning than the one that sort of just hung around in the background in the 1990s.

    Put plainly: the next wave will be worse. We may not have Maoist-style Red Guards in America quite yet, but we’re not far off and the emphasis should be on “yet.”


    Tyler Durden

    Sat, 05/09/2020 – 22:20

  • Some 5,000 People Waiting Out COVID-19 In Frozen, Virus-Free Antarctica
    Some 5,000 People Waiting Out COVID-19 In Frozen, Virus-Free Antarctica

    Antarctica is currently deemed the “safest place in the world” due to it being the only continent with no confirmed COVID-19 cases. 

    Its dark, frozen, and harsh environs keep it cut off from the outside world, apart from researchers, scientists, and the occasional explorer or National Geographic team.

    A new CNN report counts some 5,000 total people at over 80 international bases scattered across Antarctica, who are currently waiting out the pandemic in the remote location and intentionally not returning home until the crisis abates

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Stijn Thoolen, a researcher with the European Space Agency has been in Antarctica since November watching the pandemic unfold in the rest of the world, via EPA/ABC News.

    One American researcher, Keri Nelson, at the US base Anvers Island’s Palmer Station in a northern part of Antarctica told CNN via email: “I really don’t think there’s a person here right now who isn’t grateful to be here, and to be safe.”

    “Some people are ready to head back home. To help people they love, and to be of use in other ways during this time in history,” Nelson added. “But all of us are very appreciative to be living in a place where this disease (and all of the health and lifestyle implications thereof) are absent.”

    And further, a 29-year old researcher from Scotland, Robert Taylor, described: “It’s like being on the moon and looking down,” CNN reports. “We can see what’s going on, but it’s a long way away.”

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Image via Swoop Antarctica 

    He arrived at a British station on the icy continent months before the crisis first emerged in Wuhan, China:

    “I remember the reports coming out of China in early January,” says Taylor, who arrived in Antarctica around six months ago.

    “Then the first few UK cases, and thinking that this was something minor and far away, that wouldn’t affect me.”

    “It dawned on me gradually, as it spread and grew in prominence in the media.”

    Antarctica actually in normal times sees a regular annual influx of tourists, mostly via cruise ships and adventure excursion tours.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Long-term ecological research center, Palmer Station in Antarctica, via IPF.

    For example 56,168 tourists visited during the 2018 to 2019 season, however, at this point the only people that remain are the thousands of professional researchers and surveyors who will for the time being remain physically cut off from the world. 

    This also considering that to get back they would have to risk traveling back to their homes via multiple international airports and other travel hubs.


    Tyler Durden

    Sat, 05/09/2020 – 21:55

  • Former JPMorgan Economist: We Are Heading Towards A Weimar Republic Inflation Setup
    Former JPMorgan Economist: We Are Heading Towards A Weimar Republic Inflation Setup

    Submitted by a former JPMorgan economist who wishes to remain anonymous

    The everything bubble

    Readers will have anticipated the bursting of the bubble that has been re-inflating ever since 2009. Ultra-loose monetary policy, coupled with deflationary pressures from increased aggregate supply and investors chasing yield at ever higher risk, meant that almost all asset classes had reached all time highs just before entering the current bear market.

    That there is a bubble, a massive one, is unquestionable. Readers will further have anticipated that it didn’t have to be a global pandemic to burst this bubble. This bubble was practically looking for a prick – any prick – to burst it. Whether it was a credit event, liquidity shortages that led to bankruptcies, a terrorist attack, a natural disaster or a bat: markets had reached a level of fragility where they could not cope with the materialising of such a tail risk event.

    Too much had fueled this fragility: out-of-touch credit ratings, leveraged balance sheets, stock buybacks, expansionary monetary policy and as a result: out-of-control credit and debt.

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    Market outlook

    Expect companies in energy to go bust first. Then retail and hospitality. At some stage their bankruptcies will push creditors into a corner where such lenders will either have to be bailed out or they will drop like flies (Lehman style). Already banks have slowed their credit lines to corporates, like in 2008/2009, anticipating that some of their debtors will fail to repay.

    Sure, with more QE flooding the markets a complete wipe-out may be averted, as there is no political appetite for mass insolvencies (especially in an election year in the US).

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    The bubble has reached a level where systemically relevant banks will be facing their Lehman moment sooner rather than later. Lawmakers will not allow such systemically relevant lenders to go under, as this would practically imply all lights to go out. So the real question at hand is: at what cost?

    • At what cost to prevent the Deutsche Banks of this world from going bankrupt?
    • At what cost to keep the unemployed at bay, because for sure: no job, no income and no prospects are a recipe for turmoil and civil unrest.
    • At what cost to counter big institutional sellers exiting the markets who want cash?
    • At what cost running the biggest budget deficit and current account deficit (in the US)?
    • At what cost managing the havoc from Covid-19?
    • At what cost QE forever?  
    • At what cost etc.

    Crossing the Rubicon

    On April 27, 2020 CNBC ran a story on “Why the coronavirus crisis may prompt central bankers to scrap inflation targeting”.

    If central banks indeed abandon or modify inflation targeting we will certainly be crossing the Rubicon. Admittedly, there is no other way in answering the above questions.

    Policymakers continue to be behind the curve and obviously failed to learn from 2008/2009. Their last resort is printing money and creating more debt. If central banks have no or a soft-washed inflation mandate we are heading towards a Weimar Republic style inflation setup.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    With global output staying the same or declining, aggregate demand declining significantly and the quantity of money in circulation multiplying (by means of handouts or universal basic incomes), asset prices across asset classes being propped up by central banks, it becomes just a matter of time until inflation goes from ‘subdued’ to ‘out of hand’.

    Asset allocation in this new set up

    With central banks either purchasing corporate bonds or accepting them as collateral, it may be soon until their mandate is being changed to facilitate the buying of equities, too. As other commentators already noted: we may have abandoned free markets and now head to a centrally planned set up.

    The recent pick-up from the March 2020 lows in stock markets will be short lived. Nothing has fundamentally improved, other than emergency liquidity provisions by central banks. Expect a new selloff by year end – re-testing the lows of March – because perfidiously the Fed does not yet own enough corporate debt/equity to control asset prices!

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Central banks will be printing fiat money on a unprecedented scale. With potentially negative interest rates even in the US, a slowing of global trade and thus reduced supply, the risk of a surprise inflation increases markedly. If and when this feeds through, asset allocation becomes key.

    Look for uncorrelated asset classes or inflation resistant assets. There is a chance central banks will own a good part of cross-sector corporate debt/equity when the dust settles and inflation starts to go through the roof.

    For questions or comments, please get in touch.


    Tyler Durden

    Sat, 05/09/2020 – 21:30

  • Wuhan Biolab Where Coronavirus Was Studied Mysteriously Shut Down In October, Report Claims
    Wuhan Biolab Where Coronavirus Was Studied Mysteriously Shut Down In October, Report Claims

    Another leaked intelligence document has been leaked to the press to help support suspicions that the coronavirus currently ravaging the US and much of the global community may have leaked from a biolab in Wuhan.

    NBC News reports that a document that has been shared among several Republican lawmakers points to evidence that the virus may have emerged even earlier than the global community believes. In recent days, the French government confirmed suspicions that the country’s first case might have arrived as early as December, while in the US, the earliest suspected COVID-19-linked death occurred on Feb. 6, weeks earlier than previously believed.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    The earliest suspected case in China may have been observed as early as November, some scientists believe, though others doubt the theory. But the report obtained by NBC News cites cellphone activity data showing a complete shutdown of a high-security section of the lab for 2.5 weeks between Oct. 7 and Oct. 24.

    Though it offers no insight into what might have caused the shutdown, and there could be other explanations for the data, it’s certainly some food for thought.

    The report — obtained by the London-based NBC News Verification Unit — says there was no cellphone activity in a high-security portion of the Wuhan Institute of Virology from Oct. 7 through Oct. 24, 2019, and that there may have been a “hazardous event” sometime between Oct. 6 and Oct. 11.

    It offers no direct evidence of a shutdown, or any proof for the theory that the virus emerged accidentally from the lab.

    If there was such a shutdown, which has not been confirmed, it could be seen as evidence of a possibility being examined by US intelligence agencies and alluded to by Trump administration officials, including the president – that the novel coronavirus emerged accidentally from the lab.

    But that is one of several scenarios under consideration by U.S. intelligence agencies. Many scientists are skeptical, arguing that the more likely explanation is that the virus was transmitted to humans through animals in a Wuhan live produce market. The World Health Organization said Friday it believed the “wet” market played a role in the spread of the disease.

    The document asserts that if the virus truly did spread in November and December, then there is reason to suspect that it might have leaked from a lab, or been intentionally released.

    The document doesn’t cite direct evidence to support that assertion. The analysis seems to account for only a tiny fraction of the cellphones that would be expected in a facility that employs hundreds of people. Dr. Just Vlak, a Dutch virologist who visited a nearby satellite facility of the Wuhan Institute of Virology in late November and met with WIV’s head of bio-security, told NBC News that the facility he visited had between 200 and 300 staff.

    The document obtained by NBC News also says that an annual international conference planned for early November in the same lower-security portion of the WIV that Vlak visited appears to have been “cancelled and never took place.” The conference actually went forward as planned. A second version of the document viewed by NBC News is annotated to say that the conference did proceed. No other differences between the two versions of the document were observed.

    For that and other reasons, some officials are skeptical of the analysis, which is based on commercially available cellphone location data. One U.S. official who has seen the document said the data “looks really weak to me and some of the conclusions don’t make sense.”

    Though the document advises that the data it cites are “vague”, NBC notes another earlier piece of evidence purporting to show a shutdown at the lab had been obtained earlier.

    Earlier, U.S. intelligence agencies received reports based on publicly available cellphone and satellite data suggesting there was a shutdown at the lab, two U.S. officials familiar with the matter say. But after examining overhead imagery and their own data, the spy agencies were unable to confirm any shutdown, and deemed the reports “inconclusive.”

    But one Congressional staffer said these reports are getting “another look” by lawmakers.

    Another U.S. official said intelligence agencies may give the data another look in the wake of this new report. And still another intelligence official said there may be more private cellphone location data that could shed further light on the matter.

    Congressional intelligence committees have also been given the document, and Sen. Marco Rubio, R.-Fla., appeared to be alluding to it or a similar report in a tweet on Wednesday.

    “Would be interesting if someone analyzed commercial telemetry data at & near Wuhan lab from Oct-Dec 2019,” Rubio tweeted. “If it shows dramatic drop off in activity compared to previous 18 months it would be a strong indication of an incident at lab & of when it happened.

    At the end of the story, NBC News included a timeline of all the circumstantial evidence being used to support suspicions that the virus may have leaked from a lab. It includes:

    • A Jan. 24 study published in the medical journal The Lancet found that three of the first four cases – including the first known case – didn’t provide a documented link to the Wuhan wet market.
    • The bats that carry the family of coronaviruses linked to the new strain aren’t found within 100 miles of Wuhan — but they were studied in both labs.
    • Photos and videos have emerged of researchers at both labs collecting samples from bats without wearing protective gear, which experts say poses a risk of human infection.
    • A U.S. State Department expert who visited the WIV in 2018 wrote in a cable reported by The Washington Post: “During interactions with scientists at the WIV laboratory, [U.S. diplomats] noted the new lab has a serious shortage of appropriately trained technicians and investigators needed to safely operate this high-containment laboratory.”
    • According to Senate Intelligence Committee member Tom Cotton, R-Ark., the Chinese military posted its top epidemiologist to the WIV in January.
    • The Shanghai laboratory where researchers published the world’s first genome sequence of the coronavirus was shut down Jan. 12, according to The South China Morning Post.
    • According to U.S. intelligence assessments, including one published by the Department of Homeland Security and reviewed by NBC News, the Chinese government initially covered up the severity of the outbreak. Government officials threatened doctors who warned their colleagues about the virus, weren’t candid about human-to-human transmission and still haven’t provided virus samples to researchers.
    • Despite all that, most scientists and researchers believe natural animal-to-human transmission is the most likely scenario.
    •  

    If nothing else, it’s definitely some food for thought.


    Tyler Durden

    Sat, 05/09/2020 – 21:05

  • China, Iran Are On The March
    China, Iran Are On The March

    Authored by James Rickards via The Daily Reckoning,

    There is so much focus on the COVID-19 pandemic right now that Americans can’t be blamed if they’re not spending much time studying other developments.

    That’s understandable, but inattention may be as dangerous as the virus itself. That’s because America’s adversaries are taking advantage of the situation by challenging U.S. interests in a set of geopolitical hot spots.

    They believe we’re too distracted by the virus containment effort to mount a firm response.

    At the same time, geopolitical confrontation is a classic way to rally a population against an outside threat, especially when they’re still hurting from the pandemic and the economic consequences. It’s one of the oldest tricks in the books to get the people behind the government.

    This appears to be the case with China and Iran right now.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    China in particular is trying to divert attention away from its own cover-up of the pandemic, which allowed it to spin out of control. So it’s engaging in a global propaganda campaign to try to blame the U.S. for the spread of the virus.

    Both China and Iran have lied about the damage caused by the virus in their own countries. China officially reported about 4,600 fatalities and Iran officially reported about 6,200. But reliable sources suggest that the actual count of fatalities may be at least 10 times greater in both countries.

    This could put actual fatalities in China and Iran about equal to the U.S. (over 70,000 dead).

    Meanwhile, the U.S. has been reeling economically, and there’s no reason to believe that China and Iran are feeling any less pain. Let’s first consider China…

    Not surprisingly, China has tried to take advantage of the situation by acting aggressively in the South China Sea and threatening Taiwan.

    The South China Sea is a large arm of the Pacific Ocean surrounded by China, Vietnam, the Philippines, Malaysia, Brunei and Indonesia.

    All six countries have claims to exclusive economic zones that extend several hundred miles from their coastlines.

    Parts of the sea are international waters governed by the Law of the Sea Convention and other treaties. All of the other nations around the South China Sea have rejected China’s claims. But they’ve been pushed back to fairly narrow boundaries close to their coastlines.

    China has ignored all of those claims and treaties and insists that it is in control of the entire body of water including islands, reefs and underwater natural resources such as oil, natural gas, undersea minerals and fisheries.

    China has also become even more aggressive by designating the South China Sea reefs as city-level administrative units to be administered by mainland China.

    And China has pumped sand onto reefs to build artificial islands that have then been fortified with airstrips, harbors, troops and missiles.

    China has said it will never seek hegemony, but that’s clearly not true. It most certainly seeks hegemony in the region.

    And it’s willing to enforce it. Several encounters have happened lately where Chinese coast guard vessels have rammed and sunk fishing boats from Vietnam and the Philippines.

    But China’s aggression in the South China Sea can also jeopardize U.S. naval vessels.

    The U.S. operates “freedom of navigation” cruises with U.S. Navy ships to demonstrate that the U.S. also rejects China’s claims. It’s not difficult to envision an incident that could rapidly escalate into something serious.

    It’s also fair to assume that a weakened U.S. Navy has emboldened Chinese actions recently.

    The two aircraft carriers the Navy has in the western Pacific, the Theodore Roosevelt and Ronald Reagan, were both taken out of action due to outbreaks of the coronavirus among their crews. That’s been a dramatic reduction in power projection in the region.

    But neither side will back down, as neither wants to appear weak. This makes warfare a highly realistic scenario. It’s probably just a matter of time.

    Meanwhile, Iran has harassed U.S. naval vessels in the Persian Gulf, launched new missiles and continued its support of terrorism in Iraq, Yemen and Lebanon.

    These actions are more signs of weakness than strength, but they are dangerous nonetheless.

    In the past 10 years, we’ve been through currency wars, trade wars and now pandemic.

    Are shooting wars next?

    Pay attention to China, Iran and, yes, North Korea. They haven’t gone away either.

    The world is a dangerous place — and the virus has only made it more dangerous.


    Tyler Durden

    Sat, 05/09/2020 – 20:40

  • Distraction? Obama Smack-Talks Trump's "Chaotic Disaster" Virus Response As Russia Hoax Exposed
    Distraction? Obama Smack-Talks Trump’s “Chaotic Disaster” Virus Response As Russia Hoax Exposed

    Having refused to publicly criticize President Trump by name over his handling of the coronavirus outbreak, President Obama reportedly slammed Trump during a private call, the details of which were “leaked” to the press (though we suspect the Obama camp had a hand in their dissemination), just days after his administration was exposed for colluding to entrap Flynn with a Russia collusion hoax to ouster President Trump.

    Distraction, much?

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Here’s more from Bloomberg:

    Former President Barack Obama delivered a blistering attack on Donald Trump’s handling of the coronavirus pandemic, calling it “an absolute chaotic disaster” as well as “anemic.”

    Obama’s remarks, first reported by Yahoo News, came in a leaked call as the former president exhorted members of his administration to rally behind presumptive 2020 Democratic nominee Joe Biden. The comments were perhaps the most scathing criticism Obama has yet delivered of his successor in the White House.

    Critics have said the U.S. government wasted precious time in February by failing to ramp up testing and stockpile supplies as the coronavirus spread in Europe. The U.S. now leads the world in confirmed Covid-19 infections, with nearly 1.3 million as of Saturday. More than 78,000 have died in the U.S. from the virus.

    However, Trump has defended his handling of the pandemic, repeatedly highlighting his Jan. 31 decision to impose travel restrictions barring most non-U.S. citizens from entering the U.S. after recent visits to China.

    “President Trump’s coronavirus response has been unprecedented and saved American lives,” White House press secretary Kayleigh McEnany said in a statement on Saturday.

    “While Democrats were pursuing a sham witch hunt against President Trump, President Trump was shutting down travel from China. While Democrats encouraged mass gatherings, President Trump was deploying PPE, ventilators, and testing across the country.”

    Obama, in Friday’s remarks, cast the U.S. response to the virus as an outgrowth of tribalism as he sought to emphasize the urgency of the November election.

    Those are some big words from a president whose strategy of appeasement toward China helped pave the way for President Trump’s historic electoral upset.

    The Obama leak makes us wonder: Is this how Joe Biden’s campaign strategists are planning to proceed? just let everybody else speak for Biden, since when he tries to speak for himself…

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    …often, it doesn’t work out so well.

    His campaign has been mocked for holding a $50,000 “virtual dinner” with Hillary Clinton to try and raise money, as Biden scrambles to catch up with the Trump war chest. Unlike last cycle, President Trump is expected to far outspend his Democratic competitor, who has said he will only serve one term if elected, meaning that no matter what, 2024 is going to be a wide-open contest.

    Polls should always be taken with a grain of salt, but a growing body of data is showing Trump with a slight edge over Biden in the swing states that will probably decide the election (the Wisconsins and the Michigans, where Trump’s margin of victory over Clinton was razor-thin).

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    Which means Biden, despite being a relatively “likeable” white male grandfather figure, might actually do worse than Hillary Clinton, especially as yesterday’s jobs report showed these same swing states have been most badly battered by the lockdowns, and will almost certainly blame Democrats for any economic woes caused by the coming economic downturn.

    And who can forget Biden’s glitch-plagued Zoom “virtual rally”. When the tech problems weren’t flaring up, a loud bird managed to drown Biden out, winning his campaign staff comparisons to ‘senior citizens trying to figure out how to use Zoom for the first time’. Though at least that’s a relatable feeling for many voters, it doesn’t exactly inspire confidence in Biden’s ability to run the country.


    Tyler Durden

    Sat, 05/09/2020 – 20:15

  • 'Murica: From Overstretch To Collapse
    ‘Murica: From Overstretch To Collapse

    Authored by Daniel Lazare via Off-Guardian.org,

    In less than three decades, a mere blink of the eye in historical terms, the United States has gone from the world’s sole superpower to a massive foundering wreck that is helpless before the coronavirus and intent on blaming the rest of the world for its own shortcomings. As the journalist Fintan O’Toole noted recently in the Irish Times:

    “Over more than two centuries, the United States has stirred a very wide range of feelings in the rest of the world: love and hatred, fear and hope, envy and contempt, awe and anger. But there is one emotion that has never been directed towards the U.S. until now: pity.”

    Quite right. But how and why did this pitiable condition come about? Is it all Donald Trump’s fault as so many now assume? Or did the process begin earlier?

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    The answer for any serious student of imperial politics is the latter. Indeed, a fascinating email suggests that the tipping point occurred in early to mid-2014, long before Trump set foot in the Oval Office.

    Sent from U.S. General Wesley Clark to Philip Breedlove, Clark’s successor as NATO commander in Europe, the email is dated Apr. 12, 2014, and concerns events in the Ukraine that had recently begun spinning out of control. A few weeks earlier, the Obama administration had been on top of the world thanks to a nationalist insurrection in Kiev that had chased out a mildly pro-Russian president named Viktor Yanukovych. Champagne glasses were no doubt clinking in Washington now that the Ukraine was solidly in the western camp. But then everything went awry. First, Vladimir Putin seized control of the Crimean Peninsula, site of an all-important Russian naval base at Sevastopol. Then a pro-Russian insurgency took off in Donetsk and Luhansk, two Russian-speaking provinces in the Ukraine’s far east. Suddenly, the country was coming apart at the seams, and the U.S. didn’t know what to do.

    It was at that moment that Clark dashed off his note. Already, he informed Breedlove, “Putin has read U.S. inaction in Georgia and Syria as U.S. ‘weakness.’” But now, thanks to the alarming turn of events in the Ukraine, others were doing the same. As he put it:

    “China is watching closely. China will have four aircraft carriers and airspace dominance in the Western Pacific, within 5 years, if current trends continue. And if we let Ukraine slide away, it definitely raises the risks of conflict in the Pacific. For, China will ask would the U.S. then assert itself for Japan, Korea, Taiwan the Philippines the South China Sea?

    …[I]f Russia takes Ukraine, Belarus will join the Eurasian Union, and, presto, the Soviet Union (in another name) will be back…

    …Neither the Baltics nor the Balkans will easily resist the political disruptions empowered by a resurgent Russia and what good is a NATO ‘security guarantee’ against internal subversion?

    …And then the U.S. will find a much stronger Russia, a crumbling NATO and [a] major challenge in the Western Pacific. Far easier to [hold] the line now in Ukraine than elsewhere later” [emphasis in the original].

    The email speaks volumes about the mentality of those in charge. Conceivably, the Obama administration still had time to turn things around – if, that is, it had shown a bit of flexibility, a willingness to compromise, and a willingness as well to stand up to the ultra-nationalists who had led the anti-Yanukovych upsurge and opposed anything smacking of an even-handed settlement.

    But instead it did the opposite. Back in the 1960s, cold warriors had argued that if Vietnam “fell” to the Communists, then Thailand, Burma, and even India would follow suit. But the proposition that Clark now advanced was even more extreme, a super-Domino Theory holding that a minor ethnic uprising in a part of the world that few people in Washington could find on the map was intolerable because it could cause the entire international structure to unravel. NATO, U.S. control of the western Pacific, victory over the Soviets – all would be lost because a few thousand people insisted on speaking their native Russian.

    Why such rigidity? The real problem was not so much a confrontation mindset as a phenomenon that the historian Paul Kennedy had identified in the late 1980s: “imperial overstretch.” Like other empires before it, the U.S. had allowed itself to become so over-extended after twenty-five years of “unipolarity” that strategists had their hands full keeping an increasingly rickety structure together. Nerves were on edge, which is why an ethnic uprising that might have been accommodated at an earlier stage of U.S. imperial development was no longer tolerable. Because the rebels had run afoul of U.S. imperial priorities, they constituted a fundamental threat and therefore had to be bulldozed out of the way.

    Except for one thing: the structure was so weak that each new bulldoze operation only made matters worse. Insurgents continued to hold their ground in Donetsk and Luhansk thanks to Russian backing while the government grew more and more corrupt and unstable back in Kiev. In the Middle East, the situation was so confused that U.S. allies like Saudi Arabia and Qatar were channeling money and arms to ISIS as it rampaged through eastern Syria and northern Iraq and advanced on Baghdad. Thanks to the turmoil that U.S. policies were unleashing, millions of desperate refugees would soon make their way to Europe where they would spark a powerful nativist reaction that continues to this day. U.S. hegemony was turning into a nightmare.

    It was no different in an America shaken by Wahhabist terrorism and dismayed by wars in the Middle East that went nowhere yet never seemed to end. Donald Trump rode a wave of discontent into the White House by promising to “drain the swamp” and bring the troops home. Conceivably, he could have done just that once he was in office – if, that is, he had been serious about downsizing U.S. imperialism and was capable of standing up to the CIA. But the “intelligence community” struck back by launching a classic destabilization campaign based on the theme of Russian collusion while Trump’s foreign-policy ideas turned out be even more of a mess than Obama’s.

    So the collapse intensified, which is why America is now such a helpless giant. A crazy man is at the helm, yet the best Democrats can do is put up a candidate suffering from the early stages of senile dementia, who may be a rapist to boot. No one knows how things will play out from this point on.

    But two things are clear. One is that the process did not start under Trump, and the other is that it will undoubtedly continue regardless of who wins in November. Once collapse sets in, it’s impossible to stop.


    Tyler Durden

    Sat, 05/09/2020 – 19:50

  • Weekend Humor: What It's Like To Believe Everything 'The Media' Tells You
    Weekend Humor: What It’s Like To Believe Everything ‘The Media’ Tells You

    Presented without comment for your viewing pleasure….

    Source: AwakenWithJP

     

     

     

     

     

     

     

     

     

     

     

     

     

     


    Tyler Durden

    Sat, 05/09/2020 – 19:25

  • We Now Know Far More About COVID-19 – The Lockdown Should End
    We Now Know Far More About COVID-19 – The Lockdown Should End

    Authored by Gavin Phillips via Off-Guardian.org,

    “This is the largest interference with personal liberty in our history”

    – Lord Sumption

    Virtually overnight our world has turned into a wasteland of closed towns, deserted streets and a few people scuttling along with masks and stricken faces. It’s a place bereft of imagination, the light sucked out; a padded cell in Psych Ward B.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    The so-called new normal is anything but normal. On March 23rd, when Boris Johnson declared a lockdown in the UK, it was a beyond surreal moment for me. With no debate, our freedoms, social life and jobs were gone.

    The reasons given for the lockdown were to try and save lives, slow the spread of this virus and limit the impact on the NHS. It sounds good until you start to pose searching questions. Confining people to their homes and a complete loss of social life comes with its own set of serious problems. Focusing on Covid-19 means other people needing operations are postponed for months.

    We had heard about other so-called Pandemics that had turned out to be nothing of the sort, Swine flu being one example. What was different about Covid-19? Johnson had seemed to be going the way of putting in some mitigation recommendations, like social distancing, hand washing and isolating of the elderly. Then he changed his mind.

    The reason were the numbers of possible deaths that could occur if a full lockdown was not implemented. The numbers came from a Prof Neil Ferguson of Imperial College, London.

    Ferguson had told the government that according to his computer model, over 500,000 people would die in the UK if they did nothing, 250,000 people would die if he continued with lesser mitigation in place, but allowing businesses to stay open as usual. With a full lockdown, deaths would be 20,000 or less, and the impact to the NHS would be kept to a minimum.

    What immediately struck me was that Ferguson’s computer model is just that, it’s an estimate based on certain data. His projections could be totally wrong, we’ve all heard the expression, garbage in, garbage out. Why on earth would Johnson decide to implement such drastic measures based on a theoretical computer model?

    It was also disturbing to find out that Ferguson has a lot of form for making highly exaggerated claims with his computer models.

    In the 2001 foot and mouth epidemic millions of cows and other livestock were killed and burned based on his models. But Professor Michael Thrusfield, an expert in animal diseases, said Ferguson’s models were ‘not fit for purpose’ (2006) and ‘seriously flawed’ (2012).

    The 2009 Swine Flu outbreak turned out to be one of the most overhyped non pandemics in the history of medicine. Ferguson got that one wrong as well, saying it would probably kill 65,000 people in the UK, but in fact 457 people died.

    I looked for other expert opinions. One of the world’s top Epidemiologists is Sweden’s Dr. [Professor] Johan Giesecke. Sweden is one of a few countries who went with a different approach to the virus.

    Giesecke and his medical team recommended that the elderly and sick should isolate themselves. They recommended social distancing. But restaurants, coffee shops and most businesses would be open as usual.

    In an interview on April 16th with Freddie Sayers of Unherd TV, Giesecke explained the reasoning behind Sweden’s approach:

    Q. Is it correct to call it herd immunity and is that the Swedish strategy?

    Giesecke: It’s not the strategy, but it’s a by-product of the strategy. The strategy is to protect the old and the frail, try to minimize their risk of becoming infected and taking care of them if they get infected. If you do that the way we’re doing it, you would probably get herd immunity in the end, but that’s a by-product, its not the main reason to do it.

    Q. What was your impression of that (Ferguson’s) paper?

    Giesecke: I think it’s not very good… it rests on the assumptions, and the assumptions in that article have been heavily criticised… The paper was never published scientifically, it’s not peer reviewed, which a scientific paper should be. It’s just an internal departmental report from Imperial.

    Q. It’s your impression that it was overly pessimistic?

    Giesecke:Yes, oh yes, very much so.

    Sweden has also helped us in another unforeseen way, by putting Ferguson’s computer model to a real-world test. Ferguson had predicted that with lighter mitigation measures in place, the same as Sweden, the UK would see 250,000 dead. Sweden has a population of just over 10 million, 1/6th that of the UK.

    So according to Ferguson, Sweden’s death rate should be going through the roof right now, at around 35,000+, but its 3,175 as of May 8th. The one thing you can say about Ferguson is this, he stays true to his form.

    [A Swedish research group from the University of Upsalla actually applied the Imperial Model to Sweden, and found it predicted 40,000 deaths “shortly after May 1st, you can read about that here. – Ed.]

    DO WE ACTUALLY KNOW HOW MANY PEOPLE ARE DYING OF COVID-19?

    Every day the media blasts us with the numbers of people who have died from Covid-19, but it’s very misleading. Journalist Peter Hitchens was one of the first professionals to pose serious questions about whether the lockdown was the right path, and also to question how COVID-19 deaths were being recorded.

    Both in the UK and the USA, it has been openly admitted by health officials that anyone dying *with* COVID-19, is being categorized as having died *of* it. Its crucially important that we understand the difference. The fact is that at least 90% of the deaths from COVID-19 are for patients who were already suffering with other serious illnesses. So, if someone dies of a heart attack and they test positive for Covid-19, that is counted as a Covid-19 death.

    Let’s look at this in another way. Every year in the UK people die from Flu. The 2014/15 was one of the worst flu years, killing 44,000 people in the UK. Once again though, the vast majority of them had other serious health issues. We had another bad flu year in 2018 with a different strain, named ‘Aussie’ Flu.

    This raises other important questions about the accuracy of the reported COVID-19 deaths. Did anyone die of regular Flu during March/April 2020? Or is everyone who had flu like symptoms and died, being counted as dying with COVID-19? Pneumonia is more serious than flu; once again, are all pneumonia related deaths being lumped in with COVID-19 deaths?

    This puts the Covid-19 deaths, and how dangerous it is, into a much clearer perspective. It looks like Covid-19 is no deadlier than a bad flu year. This is an opinion shared by several top epidemiologists and other experts, like Dr Sucharit Bhakdi, a specialist in microbiology, who used to work at the Johannes Gutenberg University in Mainz, Germany, Dr John Ioannidis Professor of Medicine, of Health Research and Policy and of Biomedical Data Science, at Stanford University School. (see OffGuardian here and here)

    Doctors in the US are also seeing this skewing of Covid related deaths.

    Dr. Dan Erickson said in a recent interview:

    What’s interesting to me to is, when someone dies in this country right now they’re not talking about the high blood pressure, the diabetes, the stroke. They say did they die from COVID. We’ve been to hundreds of autopsies. You don’t talk about one thing, you talk about co-morbidities… COVID was part of it, it’s not the reason they died folks.

    Also, Dr. John A Lee, a retired professor of pathology and NHS consultant pathologist, has written some excellent articles for The Spectator. Dr. Lee has raised similar concerns about how we are defining the amount of people actually dying
    of Covid-19.

    He also questions the lack of science behind the Lockdown, saying in an interview for Spiked on April 17,

    It is only an assumption that the lockdown is having a big effect on the virus spread, but this is not a known scientific fact. As far as I can see, Sweden, despite not having anywhere near as severe a lockdown as we have had, actually has a very similar curve to ours. And Sweden’s death rate per hundred thousand people is roughly half of ours at the moment.”

    We cannot even trust that the number of Covid19 deaths that are reported daily as actually having died in the previous 24-hrs. There could be a lag of several weeks in the reporting.

    A recent OffGuardian article covers this. In one example for April 10th, it was reported that 980 people had died from Covid19.

    But in reality, there had been just 117 “Covid19 related deaths”, with about 90 additional deaths in Wales, Scotland and Northern Ireland, for a total of 204. The other 776 had died sometime between March 5th and April 8th.

    DEATHS AND SERIOUS SOCIAL ISSUES BECAUSE OF THE LOCKDOWN

    An article in the Telegraph on April 9th by Fraser Nelson said that ministers were becoming concerned about the number of people who would die because of the Lockdown, early estimates put it around 150,000. Another article referred to the massive drop in A&E patients, quote, a 29 per cent year-on-year drop in A&E use, including a 50 per cent drop in heart attack attendances.

    People who are having heart attacks are either too afraid to go to A&E because they think they might catch Covid-19, or think it’s overloaded with Covid-19 patients. The list is long for seriously ill people who have been side-lined by the total focus of the NHS on Covid-19.

    All surgeries, except life-threatening, have been postponed. Most cancer treatments have been postponed, dialysis disrupted or put off. Domestic abuse is up 30% to 50%, suicides, divorces, bankruptcies, the list is very long.

    There are 100’s of NHS medical centres around the UK. Most of them are not seeing patients. Where do the sick people go to see a doctor?

    I think the psychological damage to millions of people, forced into isolation for weeks and months, will only be fully understood in the next 12 to 18 months.

    FREEDOMS STRIPPED AND UNPRECEDENTED POLICE POWERS: WE NOW HAVE A POLICE STATE LIGHT

    Literally overnight our freedoms have been removed. You are only allowed to go out for one form of exercise a day or to buy food or prescriptions. You are encouraged not to go to work, supposedly only key workers (identified by the government) are supposed to work.

    For the first time in our history, every person can be randomly stopped by Police to see if their journey is considered necessary.

    Sunbathing, sitting on a park bench, groups of 3 or more can be questioned and possibly fined. Car trips longer than a few miles to go for exercise can be considered unnecessary, after all, you can simply get exercise walking around your block of flats, right?

    On Twitter there are many videos showing Police overreach. In one video, a family with some children were sitting in a communal grass area by their block of flats. The Police came to fine them for sitting in that area.

    The damage the Police have done to their own reputation within their communities will be felt in the coming months and years.

    ABSURD RULES THAT MAKE NO SENSE

    We are all supposed to be social distancing, staying 2 metres apart, but people can cram onto packed subway trains. Plumbers, electricians and other contractors can come to your home and make repairs, but we cannot visit family or friends who are not in our household. It’s not only blatant stupidity, it also affects us emotionally, being distant from loved ones for months.

    Now we are forced to stand in queues to pick up the most menial of items at supermarkets. Walking around a supermarket is like trying to work an obstacle course, as you dodge people to try to keep the social distancing rule. People treat you as if you may have the Bubonic Plague and often cross the street to avoid you.

    Park benches have red tape around them to stop people from sitting on them. It’s virtually impossible for a virus to be spread from a park bench with sunlight and rain on it daily. Viruses do not survive outside in warmer weather, but still the madness continues.

    YELLOW JOURNALISM

    Yellow Journalism is a label for newspapers that print cheap sensationalized headlines to get more sales, instead of well researched investigative pieces, that is the hallmark of real journalism.

    Leading up to the occurrence of Covid-19 and onwards, the press in the UK have strived to make Yellow Journalism their raison d’etre. They have stoked up the public’s hysteria to manic levels with the worst gutter non-journalism I have ever seen.

    It was a race to the bottom of tabloid trash, each paper trying to outdo the other with hyped up headlines, while whipping the public into a frenzy. All of them predicting a virtual armageddon, a new Black Death that will kill untold millions.

    With a few exceptions, there has been no serious questioning of the governments continued path with the lockdown. The BBC has been the absolute worst, a servile and obedient government servant that simply re-writes press releases.

    If there is one small positive to come out of this appalling lockdown, at least the public now recognizes just how pitiful the mainstream media have become.

    FINAL THOUGHTS

    We are being manipulated with emotional blackmail. Stay home, save lives and protect the NHS. It’s an insidious mind game repeated ad nauseum to keep people quiet, compliant and unquestioning.

    We started lockdown because it was an unknown virus, now we know it’s nothing more serious than other viruses we have endured over 100’s of years; it’s time to end it.

    Sweden’s epidemiologist Prof Giesecke made an interesting statement during his interview. When discussing the number of deaths each country will have from Covid-19, he said, paraphrasing, let’s talk in a year from now and see where we are.

    I’m pretty certain he is referring to not only the deaths from Covid-19, but deaths from the Lockdown. Sweden will not suffer at all in this respect.

    It’s a tragedy when anyone dies, whether it be from (most often with) Covid-19, the flu, a heart attack and many other reasons. We need to get back to seeing our loved ones, get back to work so we can feed our family and many aspects of our lives.

    The NHS needs to start performing much-needed surgeries and helping others who have been side-lined in the last 2 months. Remember, the lockdown is costing lives, how many, we don’t know yet. The lockdown needs to be lifted in stages, as experts have stated, but it should be started immediately and should never return.


    Tyler Durden

    Sat, 05/09/2020 – 19:00

  • China Asked WHO To Delay Pandemic Announcement, Deny Human-To-Human Transmission: German Intelligence
    China Asked WHO To Delay Pandemic Announcement, Deny Human-To-Human Transmission: German Intelligence

    German intelligence has revealed that Chinese President Xi Jinping asked World Health Organization (WHO) Director-General Tedros Adhanom Thebreyesus to cover up the severity of the coronavirus pandemic in January, according to Der Spiegel.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    During a January 21 conversation – one week after the WHO assured the world there was ‘no clear evidence  of human-to-human transmission’ – Xi reportedly asked Tedros not to reveal that the virus was in fact transmissible between humans, and to delay declaring that the coronavirus had become a pandemic – despite the virus qualifying as one by the WHO’s own former guidelines.

    And while the WHO announced on the 22nd that data collected through their own investigation “suggests that human-to-human transmission is taking place in Wuhan,” which they said more analysis was required “to understand the full extent,” they waited all the way until March 11 to declare the virus a pandemic.

    As Brahma Chellaney of Project Syndicate wrote last month:

    It is now widely recognized that China’s political culture of secrecy helped to turn a local viral outbreak into the greatest global disaster of our time. Far from sounding the alarm when the new coronavirus was detected in Wuhan, the Communist Party of China (CPC) concealed the outbreak, allowing it to spread far and wide. Months later, China continues to sow doubt about the pandemic’s origins and withhold potentially life-saving data.

    In mid-January, the body tweeted that investigations by Chinese authorities had found no clear evidence of human-to-human transmission of the virus. Taiwan’s December 31 warning that such transmission was likely happening in Wuhan was ignored by the WHO, even though the information had been enough to convince the Taiwanese authorities – which may have better intelligence on China than anyone else – to institute preventive measures at home before any other country, including China.

    The WHO’s persistent publicizing of China’s narrative lulled other countries into a dangerous complacency, delaying their responses by weeks. In fact, the WHO actively discouraged action. On January 10, with Wuhan gripped by the outbreak, the WHO said that it did “not recommend any specific health measures for travelers to and from Wuhan,” adding that “entry screening offers little benefit.” It also advised “against the application of any travel or trade restrictions on China.”

    Even after China’s most famous pulmonologist, Zhong Nanshan, confirmed human-to-human transmission on January 20, the WHO continued to undermine effective responses by downplaying the risks of asymptomatic transmission and discouraging widespread testing. Meanwhile, China was hoarding personal protective equipment – scaling back exports of Chinese-made PPE and other medical gear and importing the rest of the world’s supply. In the final week of January, the country imported 56 million respirators and masks, according to official data.

    *  *  *

    It’s no secret that China engaged in a massive cover-up as the Wuhan coronavirus spiraled out of control. At the same time, the CCP allowed tens of thousands of people to travel for the Chinese Lunar New Year.

    As the situation continues to evolve and narratives are shaped, take a close look and remember who’s defending who.


    Tyler Durden

    Sat, 05/09/2020 – 18:35

  • Obama May Want To Call Eric Holder After Virtue-Signaling "No Precedent" For Flynn Motion
    Obama May Want To Call Eric Holder After Virtue-Signaling “No Precedent” For Flynn Motion

    Authored by Jonathan Turley,

    Former President Barack Obama is being quoted from a private call that the “rule of law is at risk” after the Justice Department moved to dismiss the case against former national security adviser Michael Flynn. Obama reportedly told members of the Obama Alumni Association that “There is no precedent that anybody can find for someone who has been charged with perjury just getting off scot-free.” 

    Without doubting the exhaustive search referenced by President Obama, he might have tried calling one “alum”: former Attorney General Eric Holder.  Holder moved to dismiss such a case based on prosecutorial errors in front of the very same judge, Judge Emmet Sullivan. [Notably, CNN covered the statements this morning without noting the clearly false claim over the lack of any precedent for the Flynn motion]

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    The Obama statement is curious on various levels.

    First, the exhaustive search may have been hampered by the fact that Flynn was never charged with perjury. He was charged with a single count of false statements to a federal investigator under 18 U.S.C. 1001. I have previously wrote that the Justice Department should move to dismiss the case due to recently disclosed evidence and thus I was supportive of the decision of Attorney General Bill Barr.

    Second, there is ample precedent for this motion even though, as I noted in the column calling for this action, such dismissals are rare.  There is a specific rule created for this purpose.  Federal Rule of Criminal Procedure 48(a) states the government may dismiss an indictment, information or complaint “with leave of the court.” Moreover, such dismissals are tied to other rules mandating such action when there is evidence of prosecutorial misconduct or fundamental questions about the underlying case from the view of the prosecutors.  I wrote recently about the serious concerns over the violation of Brady and standing court orders in the production and statements of the prosecutors in the case.

    Third, there is also case law.  In Rinaldi v. United States, 434 U.S. 22 (1977) which addressed precedent under Petite v. United States, 361 U.S. 529 (1960) dealing with the dangers of multiple prosecutions.   There are also related cases in Bartkus v. Illinois, 359 U. S. 121 (1959), and Abbate v. United States, 359 U. S. 187 (1959).  The Rinaldi decision involved a petitioner convicted of state offenses arising out of a robbery, who believed that the government should have moved to dismiss a federal offense arising out of the same robbery under the Department’s Petite policy. The Court laid out the standard for such motions.  The thrust of that controversy concerned double jeopardy and dual jurisdictions. However, the point was that the rule is key in protecting such constitutional principles and that courts should be deferential in such moves by the Department: “In light of the parallel purposes of the Government’s Petite policy and the fundamental constitutional guarantee against double jeopardy, the federal courts should be receptive, not circumspect, when the Government seeks leave to implement that policy.”

    There are also lower court decisions on this inherent authority.  For example, in the D.C. Circuit (where the Flynn case was brought), the ruling in United States v. Fokker Servs. B.V., No. 15-3016 (D.C. Cir. 2016) reaffirms the deference to prosecutors on such questions. The Court noted that this deference extends to core constitutional principles:

    “The Executive’s primacy in criminal charging decisions is long settled. That authority stems from the Constitution’s delegation of “take Care” duties, U.S. Const. art. II, § 3, and the pardon power, id. § 2, to the Executive Branch. See United States v. Armstrong, 517 U.S. 456, 464 (1996); In re Aiken Cnty., 725 F.3d 255, 262-63 (D.C. Cir. 2013). Decisions to initiate charges, or to dismiss charges once brought, “lie[] at the core of the Executive’s duty to see to the faithful execution of the laws.” Cmty. for Creative Non-Violence v. Pierce, 786 F.2d 1199, 1201 (D.C. Cir. 1986). The Supreme Court thus has repeatedly emphasized that“[w]hether to prosecute and what charge to file or bring before a grand jury are decisions that generally rest in the prosecutor’s discretion.” United States v. Batchelder, 442 U.S. 114, 124 (1979); see Bordenkircher v. Hayes, 434 U.S. 357, 364 (1978).

    Correspondingly, “judicial authority is . . . at its most limited” when reviewing the Executive’s exercise of discretion over charging determinations.  . . . The Executive routinely undertakes those assessments and is well equipped to do so.”

    Fourth, there are cases where the Department has moved to dismiss cases on grounds of prosecutorial misconduct or other grounds touching on due process, ethical requirements or other concerns.  One that comes to mind is United States v. Stevens where President Obama’s own Attorney General, Eric Holder, asked the same judge in the Flynn case to dismiss that case.  That was just roughly ten years ago.  As with Flynn, there was an allegation of withheld evidence by prosecutors.

    At the time of the motion Holder declared “The Department of Justice must always ensure that any case in which it is involved is handled fairly and consistent with its commitment to justice. Under oftentimes trying conditions, the attorneys who serve in this Department live up to those principles on a daily basis.”  What is obvious is the new guidelines issued at the time were honored in the breach during the Flynn prosecution.

    While people of good faith can certainly disagree on the wisdom or basis for the Flynn motion, it is simply untrue if President Obama is claiming that there is no precedent or legal authority for the motion.

    The rare statement by President Obama is also interesting in light of the new evidence. As I discussed in a column this morning in the Hill newspaper, the new material shows that Obama was following the investigation of Flynn who he previously dismissed from a high-level position and personally intervened with President Donald Trump to seek to block his appointment as National Security Adviser. Obama reportedly discussed the use of the Logan Act against Flynn. For a person concerned with precedent, that was also a curious focus.  The Logan Act is widely viewed as unconstitutional and has never been used to successfully convicted a single person since the early days of the Republic.  Now that is dubious precedent.


    Tyler Durden

    Sat, 05/09/2020 – 18:10

  • Civilian Airliner & Fuel Depot Burst Into Flames As Libyan Airport Comes Under Attack
    Civilian Airliner & Fuel Depot Burst Into Flames As Libyan Airport Comes Under Attack

    We reported earlier how the long-running Libyan proxy war 2.0 just got hotter given now the United States is directly blaming Russia for inflaming the conflict which has seen pro-Haftar forces lay siege to the capital of Tripoli for over the past year. Both Turkey and Russia have recently come under fire for transferring thousands of mercenaries to opposing sides of the war.

    On Saturday massive explosions rocked Tripoli’s only functioning international airport after Haftar’s Libyan National Army (LNA) fired “dozens of rockets” on the sprawling complex, reports Al Jazeera

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Fuel tanks on fire following Saturday’s rocket volley on Mitiga International Airport. 

    Images of the attack showed huge fireballs at Mitiga International Airport reaching into the sky, also as jet fuel tanks at the airport were also directly hit, according to a statement from Libya’s National Oil Corp (NOC).

    At least one civilian airliner belonging to Libya Airlines was also reportedly destroyed, though surprisingly and thankfully no civilians were reported killed or injured. 

    Over the past years of internecine war fighting has on multiple occasions approached the airport, in some recent cases sending panicked civilians fleeing and abandoning their bags, and having to disembark aircraft. 

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    Some sources reported that during Saturday’s attack up to 80 rockets were fired by the LNA.

    “Haftar’s forces say that there is a drone launcher in that airport… Turkish drones to target Haftar forces’ locations in the south and many other locations,” an Al Jazeera correspondent said. 

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    Haftar’s LNA has alleged that the Turkish Armed Forces inside Libya are using the civilian airport has a major headquarters, also from which to launch drone attacks.

    Turkey has been the biggest military backer of Tripoli’s UN-recognized Government of National Accord (GNA), while the UAE has been Haftar’s single largest supplier of weaponry. 


    Tyler Durden

    Sat, 05/09/2020 – 17:45

  • Morgan Stanley: The Feedback Loop Mechanism That Levitated Markets In Recent Years Is Broken
    Morgan Stanley: The Feedback Loop Mechanism That Levitated Markets In Recent Years Is Broken

    By Chris Metli of Morgan Stanley Quantitative Derivative Solutions

    The March 2020 equity selloff ushered a huge volatility shock that caused unprecedented losses for short volatility strategies.  The impact is likely bigger than just a one-time hit to P/Ls though – after these losses, volatility sellers have pulled back, and it will take a long time for new strategies to form and for assets to grow

    Lower volatility supply has broad implications because it threatens to break the positive feedback loop that boosted markets over the last few years: volatility selling put dealers into long gamma positions, which dampened realized volatility, which drove buying from vol target investors (and allowed greater leverage for investors of all stripes).

    This was the third material event for vol sellers in two years (Feb 18, Dec 18, and Mar 20) – after each event one type of strategy was knocked out, and volatility supply migrated to another area:

    • Feb 2018 – In the 6 months prior to the VIX blowup retail was selling ~$12mm vega a month via VIX ETPs, but the near-death experience for VIX ETPs on Feb 5th 2018 killed that trade.
    • Dec 2018 – In 2018 iron condor selling strategies likely sold $20bn notional of condors a month and average net gamma supply in S&P 500 options was ~$13bn per month from April through September, but the December 2018 selloff forced most of the condor funds to lock in losses on the lows and AUM fled.
    • March 2020 In 2019 the dominant vol supply came from more active strategies that tended to more dynamically manage exposures, but some were forced to lock in losses on the lows as strategies were risk managed.

    The risk is that after this latest (and largest) event, asset owners still looking for short volatility exposure may have few places to turn to in the near-term.  Vol fell quickly from its March peak, but that pace of decline can’t be extrapolated into the future.  Forced unwinds of short vol positions caused a supply/demand imbalance and vol spike that was unsustainable – then opportunistic sellers came in, the unwinds stopped, and vol fell sharply.  But those opportunistic traders are not dedicated vol sellers and won’t stay for the long haul – further declines in vol will require dedicated, systematic sellers who regularly supply vol to the market to come in.  They will be back (in fact this is a great time for the strategy given less supply now, a theme the MS Cross Asset Strategy team has highlighted in Overwrite Across Asset Classes from Apr 22nd 2020) – but that base of dedicated vol sellers will be slow to build, which means that volatility declines more slowly from here, which means that systematic strategy re-leveraging will come more slowly as well.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    History shows that supply/demand dynamics usually shift after volatility spikes – after major turning points in volatility the implied-realized spread usually remains elevated for a few years before falling back to pre-shock levels (i.e. implied volatility does not fall as fast as realized vol does).  On the demand side some investors hedge more on fears of a repeat of the recent past, while on the supply side there are usually fewer volatility sellers as capital generally follows positive returns, not losses.  While it is still early in this episode, over the last month the magnitude of the gamma supplied to the market has been modest, suggesting a similar pattern is developing.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    And it’s not just outright vol sellers that suffered in March – relative value vol strategies that use SPX as the funding leg (i.e. selling SPX volatility) to either buy single-name vol (i.e. dispersion trades) or buy volatility on non-US indices suffered as well.  This forced covering of the short SPX vol leg, but the bigger issue is that many strategies have been forced out of the market, so there is now less capital able to take advantage of the fact that the correlation between single-names implied by the S&P 500 options market is in the 95th %ile or S&P 500 volatility that trades 5 vols over rest-of-world averages.  With it harder to recycle the volatility selling that occurs outside the US via autocallable products back into the larger US market, the relative cheapness of ex-US vol (driven by greater local vol supply) relative to S&P 500 vol could be sustained for some time (ask for more details on autocallables).

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    A natural question is how did VIX fall by over 50% if there are no vol sellers after March?  It’s not that there are no sellers – there has been plenty of opportunistic vol selling.  But those traders have now made the easy money and many won’t stick around for long.  To drive volatility back to ‘normal’ levels i.e. sub-20 on the VIX, the market needs steady, regular supply from dedicated players.  Many ‘simpler’ strategies like vanilla overwriting or underwriting actually fared better in March than they did in 2008, in contrast to the industry performance shown in the first chart above – and those strategies will attract assets – but that flow takes time to build, and as a result volatility will be slow to fall.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    There are of course other market dynamics besides vol supply at play, some that support higher realized vol and some that suggest vol should be lower.  Reduced near-term buybacks and lower liquidity are similar to having less vol supply in that they should contribute to higher realized vol.  On the other side is the large and growing Fed put (even if that strike is farther OTM after this rally) and the fact that the demand for volatility is down as well.  One large regular VIX call  buyer has publically said they would step aside until volatility declines meaningfully, while other large buyers of S&P 500 downside have generally been monetizing hedges since March, not adding to them.

    Volumes in index options (including VIX) are down sharply as a result of the simultaneous decline in supply and demand.  To be clear QDS is not arguing for higher volatility here given some of those offsets – but rather making the case that it should take a while for volatility to fully normalize from current levels.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    A slower decline in volatility means that leverage from systematic strategies (Vol Target Funds, CTAs, Risk Parity Funds) should be slow to build. Those investors sold over $500bn in global equity from late Feb through early April, and while that will need to be bought back at some point, but lower volatility is required to drive reinvestment.  It took almost two years after August 2015 for these investors to build back to peak leverage, and one year after December 2018. 

    This rebuild could be slower because the feedback mechanism is broken: over the last 10 years the pattern has been:

    • investors sell options ->
    • dealers are put into a long gamma position ->
    • which suppresses realized volatility as dealers sell rallies and buy dips ->
    • which allows systematic strategies to lever up since most models are driven by realized vol.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    QDS forecasts that demand over the next three months from systematic strategies would average $1bn / day at 30% realized volatility (in-line with VIX), $1.5bn / day at 20% realized volatility, and $2bn / day at 10% realized volatility.  The 20% to 30% range is much more likely in QDS’s view than the 10% case, and investors should not expect too much demand from systematic strategies in the near-term (although positioning is light more broadly as well, and discretionary investors could be buyers).  Lower volatility supply also means dealer gamma positions will be on the smaller side (a few $bn / 1%) which likely means the market on net should remain slightly short gamma due to the levered ETF balances (short about $1bn / 1% on net).

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>


    Tyler Durden

    Sat, 05/09/2020 – 17:20

  • Questions Swirl As To Why Small-Business Emergency Lending Drops 
    Questions Swirl As To Why Small-Business Emergency Lending Drops 

    It’s becoming increasingly clear that a quick economic recovery is not in the cards this year. That’s a very big problem for struggling small businesses, who need emergency loans from the coronavirus relief program to stay afloat. 

    As Bloomberg reports, the pace of processing loans from the Paycheck Protection Program (PPP) has “slowed abruptly,” suggesting the second round of relief could soon be exhausted. 

    The first round of PPP was quickly depleted in April in under two weeks. The total size of the program was about $349 billion, which fed $30 billion in emergency loans to companies affected by virus-related shutdowns each day for the duration of the 13 days of operation. The program was relaunched on April 27, with about $320 billion for companies, exhausting about 55% of the funds in the first five days. The daily pace of loan processing has dramatically slowed from $35 billion to $11 billion to now a daily pace of about $2.3 billion. 

    Many questions remain as to why the rapid decline in loan processing has been seen: 

    “The slowdown has raised a fresh question: Why? Groups representing small businesses and lenders pointed to several possible factors, including the processing of a backlog of applications from the first round; the removal of duplicates from borrowers who applied at more than one bank; and the wariness of some firms applying after the Trump administration warned that companies that take loans and don’t need them could face criminal prosecution,” Bloomberg 

    Here’s a visual take on the plunge in PPP loan processing from May 2-8: 

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Marco Rubio, chairman of the Senate Committee on Small Business and Entrepreneurship and one of the creators of the loan program, said the decline in loan processing could be a combination of things, including the lack of how the funds can be spent and public backlash from the first program of how larger companies were receiving the funds rather than mom and pop shops. 

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    Rubio touched on the importance of the PPP program: 

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    As of Friday evening, he noted that round 2 of PPP “as made 2,545,571 #ppploans for $187.1 billion of the $310 billion available. The average loan amount continues to drop. Now down to  $73,512.” 

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    Another reason behind the slowdown could be due to the US Treasury and Small Business Administration (SBA) missed a deadline to provide guidance on how to determine what part of the emergency loan is forgivable. 

    SBA spokesperson, said, “the main reason is that the agency has processed batches of applications submitted by banks when the program restarted — batches initially of at least 15,000, then reduced to 5,000 — and is now handling them individually on a rolling basis.” 

    While it remains open to discussion of why PPP loan processing has dramatically slowed, one particular thing that cannot be debated is that if loans are not directed to small businesses in a timely fashion — there is a risk that many will not survive in an economy that remains depressed. 


    Tyler Durden

    Sat, 05/09/2020 – 16:55

  • New York Launches Investigation Into Mysterious New COVID-19-Linked Illness As 3 Children Die: Live Updates
    New York Launches Investigation Into Mysterious New COVID-19-Linked Illness As 3 Children Die: Live Updates

    Summary:

    • New York reports fewest new cases since March, Cuomo extends reopening timeline, more cases of mysterious child syndrome arise
    • Nurse arrested for stealing dying patient’s credit card
    • Russia nears 200k cases as country celebrates 75th anniversary of Nazi defeat
    • Belarus holds parade commemorating victory, with thousands bunched close together
    • Spain prepares to lift lockdown on Monday for vast majority of country
    • South Korea moves to contain latest cluster
    • New study finds combo of 3 powerful antivirals effective at treating COVID-19 patients
    • Aide to Ivanka Trump tests positive

    *       *       *

    Update (1645ET): And the UK Department of Health and Social Care reports the latest numbers….

    Here’s a breakdown of the data:

    …And the rest of the data from New York’s Saturday update…

    …and Italy’s update.

    We’ve heard from pretty much all the major countries already on Saturday.

    *       *       *

    Update (1305ET): South Korea reported 18 new cases on Saturday, the biggest “spike” in weeks. Only one case was imported, the rest were part of the new so-called “Itaewon cluster” (named after a popular entertainment district in Seoul).

    New York Gov Cuomo had some interesting news to share with the public on Saturday: The governor said the state had tested 1,300 transit workers in the NYC area for antibodies and found a 14.2% positive rate, the latest indication of just how badly some essential workers have been hit.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Cuomo said during the presser that it was “heartbreaking” to lose another 226 New Yorkers, even as the state reported fewer than 600 new cases, the lowest daily toll since March.

    However, the state also reported 3 deaths involving children. The deaths appeared to be caused by the mysterious potentially COVID-19-linked syndrome affecting children in New York and the UK.

    Cuomo said 73 children have been diagnosed with the syndrome in the NYC area.

    He also announced that he would extend his “PAUSE” order until June 7, meaning any reopening that happens before then will likely be extremely limited in scope.

    Earlier, the FDA announced its had approved a coronavirus antigen device made by Quidel Corporation. The California-based company said the test will deliver results in 15 minutes and is currently on sale in the US. The move follows the FDA’s emergency approval of an at-home test which is currently only being distributed to health care worker. Many officials, including most notably Gov Cuomo, say testing will be critical for the public health going forward, as states try to prevent a resurgence. A thorough picture of who is infected, who has been infected, and who has not, will help to stymie any new outbreaks and avoid further peaks, scientists believe.

    Antigen tests look for the presence of a protein from the novel coronavirus, indicating current infection. PCR tests, the ones currently most widely available, look for the actual virus and are also used to detect current infection.However, antibody tests, which authorities are putting their hopes on as they move to ease lockdowns across the globe, look for signs of both recent and past infection. Just last week, Roche of Switzerland secured a similar approval for its antibody test.

    *         *          *

    After rejecting Madrid’s bid to move into the next phase of the lockdown, Spain’s socialist-led government is preparing to lift the most-stringent restrictions from its 2-month lockdown for most of its citizens starting Monday.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    *         *          *

    After rejecting Madrid’s bid to move into the next phase of the lockdown, Spain’s socialist-led government is preparing to lift the most-stringent restrictions from its 2-month lockdown for most of its citizens starting Monday.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    PM Pedro Sánchez pleaded with the Spanish people to take as many precautions as possible when business reopen and people pour out of their homes for the first time in months as one of the most strict lockdowns in Europe is officially wound back. Though suspicions about under-counting of cases and deaths linger, the viral tide as clearly started to wane (most of the outliers depicted in the chart below coincide with revisions).

    During a speech, Sanchez said people should “take precautions as if they were infected” and called for “total caution and prudence” from those living in regions where the lockdown will be loosened. More than 50% of Spain’s ~50 million population will transition out of lockdown on Monday, when restaurants and bars will be allowed to serve clients outdoors, shops selling non-essential merchandise iwll be allowed to reopen without appointment and small private gatherings of up to 10 people can be held.

    However, as we mentioned above, the country’s worst-hit areas (cities including Madrid and Barcelona) will have to wait at least another wee.  Spain hopes to completely lift the lockdown for the whole country in a series of stages by mid-July.

    Spain’s ministry of health said 179 people had died in the past 24 hours after contracting coronavirus, in figures released on Saturday, one of the lowest totals since the lockdown was imposed in mid-March. On Saturday, the health ministry reported a jump of just 0.27% to 223,578.

    As we reported last night, the global coronavirus case total topped 4 million, while deaths topped 275k…

    …Even as the single-day total yesterday came in below 90k (according to data from Johns Hopkins), marking a slowdown from earlier in the week.

    Russia cancelled a military parade that had been planned to commemorate the 75th anniversary of the end of WWII as its outbreak spirals out of control, with the number of confirmed cases has pushed Russia into No. 5 biggest outbreak worldwide, just behind the UK.

    In a subdued celebration, President Vladimir Putin laid roses at the Eternal Flame war memorial as millions of Russians, unable to attend public processions, instead uploaded pictures of war-era family members and shared old war stories online. Moments after Putin’s speech commemorating one of the most important non-religious holidays on the Russian calendar, public health officials confirmed another 10,817 cases, bringing Russia’s total to just below 200k, with nearly 2k deaths reported.

    Acting virtually alone among the members of the CIS, Belarus went ahead with a massive military parade, drawing a crowd of thousands of people despite mounting concerns about the spread of the virus in the former Soviet State. Belarus’s longtime leader Alexander Lukashenko is one of a handful of leaders who, like Brazil’s Bolsonaro, have denied the seriousness of the virus.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Putin said Russia will “certainly celebrate this anniversary extensively and solemnly, as usual”, pledging the processions will be held at a later date.

    We’ve been following an outbreak in Seoul involving a 29-year-old who partied in one of the city’s most exclusive nightclub districts, eventually infecting 14 others. To try and suppress this latest cluster, the Seoul city government on Saturday ordered clubs and bars to shut after a spate of infections in the city’s popular Itaewon entertainment district, official media reported. New case confirmations in South Korea remain negligible; most of them involve travelers just arriving in the country, who must complete a 14-day quarantine.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Here’s more on the situation as some experts fear the beginning of a ‘second wave’ of the virus, courtesy of LiveMint:

    A potential second wave of coronavirus infections could be possible in South Korea after confirmed cases suddenly increased after a lull, with a surge tied to nightclubs in Seoul.

    The total number of cases linked to nightclubs in Itaewon in Seoul, visited by a 29-year-old patient earlier this month, increased to 40 as of noon Saturday in Seoul, the city’s Mayor Park Won-soon said in a briefing Saturday. Park ordered the closing of all nightclubs, discos, hostess bars and other similar nightlife establishments in the capital.

    The sudden spike in cases has sparked memories of an outbreak at a religious sect in late February, which sent daily infections in the nation to almost 1,000.

    South Korea, which in early March had the second highest number of cases globally after China, has been able to control the virus spread without having to take severe measures such as imposing a lockdown or banning overseas travel. Instead authorities have relied instead on a massive testing and tracing regime.

    South Korean Prime Minister Chung Sye-kyun pledged to mobilize all available resources to contain a further spread of the virus. The country began easing its social distancing campaign and earlier this week announced that schools will start reopening May 13.

    Before we go, a small study – the results of which have been published in the Lancet – carried out with just 127 patients in Hong Kong has found that a combination of 3 powerful antivirals showed promising results.

    Here are two sections from the paper’s summary:

    Findings

    Between Feb 10 and March 20, 2020, 127 patients were recruited; 86 were randomly assigned to the combination group and 41 were assigned to the control group. The median number of days from symptom onset to start of study treatment was 5 days (IQR 3–7). The combination group had a significantly shorter median time from start of study treatment to negative nasopharyngeal swab (7 days [IQR 5–11]) than the control group (12 days [8–15]; hazard ratio 4·37 [95% CI 1·86–10·24], p=0·0010). Adverse events included self-limited nausea and diarrhoea with no difference between the two groups. One patient in the control group discontinued lopinavir–ritonavir because of biochemical hepatitis. No patients died during the study.

    Interpretation

    Early triple antiviral therapy was safe and superior to lopinavir–ritonavir alone in alleviating symptoms and shortening the duration of viral shedding and hospital stay in patients with mild to moderate COVID-19. Future clinical study of a double antiviral therapy with interferon beta-1b as a backbone is warranted.

    Just the latest study finding that “kitchen-sinking” patients with powerful antivirals appears to be one of the most effective strategies at treating patients in serious condition.

    Finally, in the US, an aide to Ivanka Trump tested positive for COVID-19, according to a Friday evening announcement. Staffers for President Trump and VP Pence have also tested positive.


    Tyler Durden

    Sat, 05/09/2020 – 16:54

Digest powered by RSS Digest

Today’s News 9th May 2020

  • Authoritarianism In The Age Of Pseudoscience
    Authoritarianism In The Age Of Pseudoscience

    Authored by Colin Todhunter via Off-Guardian.org,

    Following the court decision in the US to award in favour of Dewayne Johnson (exposure to Monsanto’s Roundup weed killer and its active ingredient, glyphosate, caused Johnson to develop non-Hodgkin lymphoma), attorney Robert Kennedy Jr said at the post-trial press conference:

    The corruption of science, the falsification of science, and we saw all those things happen here. This is a company (Monsanto) that used all of the plays in the playbook developed over 60 years by the tobacco industry to escape the consequences of killing one of every five of its customers… Monsanto… has used those strategies…”

    Johnson’s lawyers argued over the course of the month-long trial in 2018 that Monsanto had “fought science” for years and targeted academics who spoke up about possible health risks of the herbicide product.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Long before the Johnson case, critics of Monsanto were already aware of the practices the company had engaged in for decades to undermine science. At the same time, Monsanto and its lobbyists had called anyone who questioned the company’s ‘science’ as engaging in pseudoscience and labelled them ‘anti-science’.

    We need look no further than the current coronavirus issue to understand how vested interests are set to profit by spinning the crisis a certain way and how questionable science is again being used to pursue policies that are essentially ‘unscientific’ – governments, the police and the corporate media have become the arbiters of ‘truth’.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    We also see anyone challenging the policies and the ‘science’ being censored on social media or not being given a platform on TV and accused of engaging in ‘misinformation’.

    It’s the same old playbook.

    The case-fatality ratio for COVID-19 is so low as to make the lockdown response wholly disproportionate. Yet we are asked to blindly accept government narratives and the policies based on them.

    Making an entire country go home and stay home has immense, incalculable costs in terms of well-being and livelihoods. This itself has created a pervasive sense of panic and crisis and is largely a result of the measures taken against the ‘pandemic’ and not of the virus itself.

    Certain epidemiologists have said there is very little sturdy evidence to base lockdown policies on, but this has not prevented politicians from acting as if everything they say or do is based on solid science.

    The lockdown would not be merited if we were to genuinely adopt a knowledge-based approach. If we look at early projections by Neil Ferguson of Imperial College in the UK, he had grossly overstated the number of possible deaths resulting from the coronavirus and has now backtracked substantially.

    Ferguson has a chequered track record, which led UK newspaper The Telegraph to run a piece entitled ‘How accurate was the science that led to lockdown?’ The article outlines Ferguson’s previous flawed predictions about infectious diseases and a number of experts raise serious questions about the modelling that led to lockdown in the UK.

    Ferguson’s previous modelling for the spread of epidemics was so off the mark that it may beggar believe that anyone could have faith in anything he says, yet he remains part of the UK government’s scientific advisory group. Officials are now talking of ‘easing’ lockdowns, but Ferguson warns that lockdown in the UK will only be lifted once a vaccine for COVID-19 has been found.

    It raises the question: when will Ferguson be held to account for his current and previously flawed work and his exaggerated predictions? Because, on the basis of his modelling, the UK has been in lockdown for many weeks, the results of which are taking a toll on the livelihoods and well-being of the population which are and will continue to far outweigh the effects of COVID-19.

    According to a 1982 academic study, a 1% increase in the unemployment rate will be associated with 37,000 deaths [including 20,000 heart attacks, 920 suicides, 650 homicides], 4,000 state mental hospital admissions and 3,300 state prison admissions.

    Consider that by 30 April, in the US alone, 30 million had filed for unemployment benefit since the lockdown began. Between 23 and 30 April, some 3.8 million filed for unemployment benefit. Prior to the current crisis, the unemployment rate was 3.5%. Some predict it could eventually reach 30%.

    Ferguson – whose model was the basis for policies elsewhere in addition to the UK – is as much to blame as anyone for the current situation. And it is a situation that has been fuelled by a government and media promoted fear narrative that has had members of the public so afraid of the virus that many have been demanding further restrictions of their liberty by the state in order to ‘save’ them.

    Even with the promise of easing the lockdown, people seem to be fearful of venturing out in the near future thanks to the fear campaign they have been subjected to.

    Instead of encouraging more diverse, informed and objective opinions in the mainstream, we too often see money and power forcing the issue, not least in the form of Bill Gates who tells the world ‘normality’ may not return for another 18 months – until he and his close associates in the pharmaceuticals industry find a vaccine and we are all vaccinated.

    In the UK, the population is constantly subjected via their TV screens to clap for NHS workers, support the NHS and to stay home and save lives on the basis of questionable data and policies. Emotive stuff taking place under a ruling Conservative Party that has cut thousands of hospital beds, frozen staff pay, placed workers on zero-hour contracts and demonised junior doctors.

    It is also using the current crisis to accelerate the privatisation of state health care.

    In recent weeks, ministers have used special powers to bypass normal tendering and award a string of contracts to private companies and management consultants without open competition.

    But if cheap propaganda stunts do not secure the compliance, open threats will suffice. For instance, in the US, city mayors and local politicians have threatened to ‘hunt down’, monitor social media and jail those who break lockdown rules.

    Prominent conservative commentator Tucker Carlson asks who gave these people the authority to tear up the US constitution; what gives them the right to threaten voters while they themselves or their families have been exposed as having little regard for lockdown norms. As overhead drones bark out orders to residents, Carlson wonders how the US – almost overnight – transformed into a totalitarian state.

    With a compliant media failing to hold tyrannical officials to account, Carlson’s concerns mirror those of Lionel Shriver in the UK, writing in The Spectator, who declares that the supine capitulation of Britain to a de facto police state has been one of the most depressing spectacles he has ever witnessed.

    Under the pretext of tracking and tracing the spread of the virus, the UK government is rolling out an app which will let the likes of Apple and Google monitor a person’s every location visited and every physical contact. There seems to be little oversight in terms of privacy.

    The contact-tracing app has opted for a centralised model of data collection: all the contact-tracing data is not to be deleted but anonymized and kept under one roof in one central government database for ‘research purposes’.

    We may think back to Cambridge Analytica’s harvesting of Facebook data to appreciate the potential for data misuse. But privacy is the least concern for governments and the global tech giants in an age where ‘data’ has become monetized as a saleable commodity, with the UK data market the second biggest in the world and valued at over a billion pounds in 2018.

    Paranoia is usually the ever-present bedfellow of fear and many people have been very keen to inform the authorities that their neighbours may have been breaking social distancing rules.

    Moreover, although any such opinion poll cannot be taken at face value and could be regarded as part of the mainstream fear narrative itself, a recent survey suggests that only 20% of Britons are in favour of reopening restaurants, schools, pubs and stadiums.

    Is this to be the new ‘normal’, whereby fear, mistrust, division and suspicion are internalized throughout society? In an age of fear and paranoia, are we all to be ‘contact traced’ and regarded by others as a ‘risk’ until we prove ourselves by wearing face masks and by voluntarily subjecting ourselves to virus tests at the entrances to stores or in airports?

    And if we refuse or test positive, are we to be shamed, isolated and forced to comply by being ‘medicated’ (vaccinated and chipped)?

    Is this the type of world that’s soon to be regarded as ‘normal’?

    A world in which liberty and fundamental rights mean nothing. A world dominated by shaming and spurious notions of personal responsibility that are little more than ideological constructs of a hegemonic narrative which labels rational thinking people as ‘anti-science’ – a world in which the scourge of authoritarianism reigns supreme.

    *  *  *

    As this article was going to press, it was announced that Neil Ferguson is resigning from his role as science advisor to Boris Johnson’s government, in the wake of the allegations he has broken the lockdown rules he himself recommended in order to meet his girlfriend .


    Tyler Durden

    Sat, 05/09/2020 – 00:05

  • Hawaii Arrests 'Rogue Tourists' In COVID Contagion Crackdown
    Hawaii Arrests ‘Rogue Tourists’ In COVID Contagion Crackdown

    As the travel and tourism industry implodes, savvy consumers, with zero f*cks given about contracting the virus, have been buying cheap airfare to Hawaii, along with heavily discounted rooms at top resorts. Around mid/late March, when strict stay-at-home orders went into effect, locals, who were confined to their homes, noticed many of these tourists were disregarding public health orders. This infuriated some who allege that if an outbreak on the island(s) was seen, it could easily overwhelm the local hospital system. 

    By late March, tensions between locals and tourists were quickly building. A group of locals held a protest at Kahului Airport in Maui County, holding up signs that read: “TOURIST GO HOME,” “LEAVE OUR AINA!,” “TIME TO GO,” and “GO HOME.” 

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    By mid-April, the Hawaii Tourism Authority issued a $25,000 grant to nonprofit Visitor Aloha Society of Hawaii (VASH) to fund a program that would issue one-way plane tickets to tourists who broke 14-day quarantine orders or other social distancing rules. As of April 26, we noted about 26 tourists were provided one-way tickets back to their home airports for breaking the rules. 

    Now it appears things are getting serious in the state. Authorities are arresting “rogue tourist” who break quarantine orders: 

    “A newlywed California couple left their Waikiki hotel room repeatedly, despite being warned by hotel staff, and were arrested. Others have been arrested at a hotel pool, loading groceries into a vehicle outside a Costco and bringing take-out food back to a hotel room,” AP News said. 

    The strict measures, some of the most stringent in the country, have been working to suppress the outbreak. As of Friday, about 629 cases and 17 deaths have been reported in the state, a relatively low number when compared with Northeast states.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Hawaii sacrificed its largest industry: tourism – to fend off the virus. With many resorts, restaurants, and other businesses closed, unemployment has skyrocketed to 25% to 35%. At least 100 hotels have suspended operations as locals stay home to weather the public health crisis. 

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Honolulu City Councilmember Kym Pine said the sacrifices Hawaiians are making today to protect their communities, in the long run, is hugely disrespectful when a tourist comes to the state and blatantly ignores the rules.  

    “The people that are coming don’t care about us. They’re coming to Hawaii on the cheap and they obviously could care less whether they get the virus or not,” she said. “So they obviously could care less about that mom and dad who have no job and no food.”

    AP says the honeymooning couple, Borice Lepovskiy, 20, and Yuliia Andreichenko, 26, of California, refused to sign a “quarantine agreement” after they came back late one night after picking up pizza. The next morning, they left their room and were arrested. 

    At least 20 people have been arrested statewide on charges of breaking quarantine orders. Many others have been given warnings or citations. Anyone who is convicted of the violation is subjected to a $5,000 fine and a year in jail. 

    “Officials have even considered having travelers wear an ankle bracelet during their quarantine period, or setting up a designated site where tourists would be required to stay at for the 14 days,” AP notes. 

    Mufi Hannemann, president and CEO of Hawaii Lodging and Tourism Association, said hotel key cards are being programmed to only allow people to check-in – so when they leave their rooms – they will need to get a new card, which would be a red flag for front-desk workers that the tourist potentially violated quarantine rules. 

    AP provides several other accounts of tourists being arrested: 

    Last month, a pair arrived on Kauai and were told to go directly to their hotel. Kauai police stopped them after they were seen going in the opposite direction of their hotel.

    Adam Schwarze, 36, who police said lives on Oahu and his travel companion, Desiree Marvin, 31, of Alexandria, Virginia, were ultimately arrested in the parking lot of a grocery store.

    Leif Anthony Johansen, 60, of Truckee, California, was supposed to be in quarantine but was spotted on a personal watercraft off Oahu’s famed North Shore. He was later followed to a Costco, where agents from the state attorney general’s office arrested him as he was loading groceries into his vehicle.

    Hannemann said he’s surprised that people still are coming to Hawaii considering much of the attractions are shutdown: 

    “I am, quite frankly, quite surprised that people would still want to come because this is not the Hawaii that you’ve dreamed about, that you want to experience,” said Hannemann of the tourism and lodging association. “There’s a lot of attractions that are closed. Everyone is walking around with masks. You know, we’re just not going to demonstrate that spirit of aloha that you’ve heard so much about. … So to me, it’s just crazy for someone to still want to come here.”

    And a word to the wise – it’s probably a good idea to stay away from Hawaii at the moment. The next thing you know, law enforcement might start tracking tourists with GPS bracelets.


    Tyler Durden

    Fri, 05/08/2020 – 23:45

  • Bezos Uber Alles? Homeland Security's Biometrics Database Moves To Amazon's Cloud
    Bezos Uber Alles? Homeland Security’s Biometrics Database Moves To Amazon’s Cloud

    Authored by Aaron Boyd via NextGiov.com,

    The Office of Biometric Identity Management released a privacy impact assessment as the program begins moving the nation’s biometric database to Amazon’s GovCloud

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    The Homeland Security Department is in the midst of migrating its central biometric database – used to store, manage and disseminate biometric data on U.S. citizens and foreign nationals – to the Amazon Web Services GovCloud, the first step in a major overhaul of the decades-old legacy system.

    With significant advancements in biometric technologies – like iris and facial scans – and computing technology, DHS decided it was time to upgrade its decades-old Automated Biometric Identification System, known as IDENT, originally developed in 1994. In 2015, the Office of Biometric Identity Management began work on the Homeland Advanced Recognition Technology, or HART, system, which will introduce new capabilities and shift the entire system to the cloud.

    OBIM officially began the shift from IDENT to HART this year, including finalizing a privacy impact assessment for the first phase: migrating existing data and functionality to the cloud. The impact statement was finalized and signed in February and subsequently published in May “to align with the completion of other system requirements,” a DHS spokesperson told Nextgov.

    The HART system is being rolled out in four phases, or “increments,” each with its own timetable and privacy impact assessment to be published. Increment 1 focuses on the underlying infrastructure development and ensuring the data and applications used in IDENT make a smooth transition to the cloud.

    “HART Increment 1 implements a new data architecture, which includes conceptual, logical, and physical data models, a data management plan, and physical storage of records where each associated record may have multiple associated biometric modality images,” the document states. That work is being done through a $95 million contract with Northrop Grumman.

    The privacy impact assessment walks through how the system will be used and by which federal agencies and partners, as well as some of the basic underlying biometric technologies, such as the various forms of facial recognition.

    Once the cloud migration is complete, HART will officially become the system of record for national security biometric data. The privacy impact assessment—originally finalized in February—stated the program was on track to take over by the end of fiscal 2020. With the COVID-19 pandemic affecting productivity on every level, an OBIM spokesperson told Nextgov that the deadline might be pushed to the end of calendar 2020, if not further. However, the spokesperson said those conversations are ongoing and the revised schedule—if needed—has not been established yet.

    By the completion of Increment 1, the new HART system is expected to function the same as the current IDENT system, with the same capabilities, including the ability to match biometric indicators like face, iris and fingerprints to other forms of identity, like Social Security numbers and Alien Numbers. However, with the new cloud-based architecture, the system will be “designed for scalability to address projected growth in identity and image data volumes and to accommodate any needs associated with larger files,” the impact assessment states.

    The program office plans to include new capabilities in Increment 2, including “increased interoperability with agency partners and improved reporting features.”

    “Increments 3 and 4 will include a web portal and user interface capability, support for additional modalities, and improved reporting tools,” as well as their own privacy impact assessments, the document states.

    OBIM has also issued a request for information for services in Increments 3 and 4, though the timeline and full procurement strategy are still being fleshed out.

    *  *  *
    Bezos Uber Alles by end 2020?


    Tyler Durden

    Fri, 05/08/2020 – 23:25

  • Military Experts Urge China To Expand Nuclear Arsenal As "Deterrence" Against US
    Military Experts Urge China To Expand Nuclear Arsenal As “Deterrence” Against US

    Rising geopolitical uncertainties between the US and China have been made worse by the pandemic as new rounds of tensions are unfolding on the heels of a possible flare-up of the trade war. The new reality is that Cold War 2.0 could be materializing as both countries fall into the Thucydides Trap, where a rising power (China) challenges the status quo power (the US). This often leads to a hot military conflict and both Washington and Beijing understand that could be a future reality. 

    Just one day after we reported an uptick in American long-range bomber activity over the East China Sea, the Global Times states on Friday (May 8) that Chinese military experts have urged Beijing to expand its nuclear arsenal as new measures to deter the US from the region. 

    Global Times Editor-in-Chief Hu Xijin said China needs to immediately increase nuclear warhead stockpiles to 1,000 and focus on having 100 DF-41 ballistic missiles ready for use. Each DF-41 can carry a nuclear payload and strike London or the US. 

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Song Zhongping, a leading military expert in China, told the Times on Friday that Washington’s ambitions in the Pacific region are “threatening China in all fields.” He said the US no longer sees nuclear weapons as just a deterrence as they are being deployed on the battlefield, adding that China must increase its nuclear arsenal to combat this evolving threat. 

    Chinese Foreign Ministry spokesperson Hua Chunying was asked on Friday if China would produce more nuclear warheads and DF-41s. He responded by saying countries should have prioritized responsibility and an obligation to reduce strategic nuclear weapons.”

    Chunying said China operates under the “no first use” rule when it comes to nuclear weapons. 

    “China views nuclear weapons only as strategic deterrence, but any deterrence needs to be strong enough to halt military aggression toward China,” analysts told the Times. 

    Beijing-based military expert Wei Dongxu told the Times on Friday that increased nuclear weapons would be used as deterrence against “major powers from taking reckless action.” He asserted that China must exercise its right as a major power to use “nuclear deterrence capabilities appropriate to its position and strategic interests.” 

    This comes at a time when the Pentagon has not just ramped up the freedom of navigation sails around the South China Sea and increased reconnaissance flights across the area, but also as the Trump administration is attempting to pin the outbreak of the pandemic on a biosafety laboratory in China

    President Trump’s rhetoric directed at China also comes ahead of a presidential election where his administration is attempting to shift anger of a crashed economy and virus-related deaths of more than 75,000 Americans on Beijing and the lab. This will undoubtedly create more tensions between both countries heading into the summer months. 


    Tyler Durden

    Fri, 05/08/2020 – 23:05

  • Beware Of Plans To "Build Back Better"
    Beware Of Plans To “Build Back Better”

    Authored by MN Gordon via EconomicPrism.com,

    Central planners the world over disdain the free exchange of goods and services.  They believe they can better shape the world around them according to their wishes.  This fatal conceit compels them to intervene in destructive ways.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Some central planners, like Fed Chair Jay Powell, think they’re saving the world economy by cranking up the printing press.  Others, like AOC, could care less about the economy…so long as they can mediate the redistribution of wealth more to their liking.

    The mess wrought by extreme government intervention has been magnified by coronavirus.  The central planners took a bad situation and made it dramatically worse.  They destroyed the economy so they could ‘build back batter.’

    First the shutdown was ordered to flatten the curve, resulting in over 33.5 million new claims for unemployment in just seven weeks.  Then the big bailouts of big business were rolled out to counteract the breakdown of financial markets.  Token checks were also sent out to the broad populace.  And that’s just the beginning.

    Central planners, no doubt, love this kind of stuff.  They find meaning and purpose in it.  What’s more, it makes them feel smart…especially when they can use fake models and fake science to support their decrees…

    Guided by Garbage

    On March 18, British epidemiologist Neil Ferguson and his cohorts at Imperial College in the United Kingdom used scientific models to project 2.2 million deaths in the United States from coronavirus.  The central planners took these scientific models as the cornerstone truth and commanded shelter in place and social distancing orders.  Yet it was all based on a crock!

    For example, in 2009, one of Ferguson’s models predicted 65,000 people could die from the Swine Flu outbreak in the UK.  The final figure was below 500.  And during the 2001 Foot and Mouth outbreak, Ferguson warned the government that 150,000 people could die.  In the end, 200 people died.

    Similarly, Ferguson estimated a potential death toll of 200 million people during the 2005 Bird Flu outbreak.  The real number was in the low hundreds.  What’s going on?

    Here, we’ll turn to Charles Babbage, the English polymath credited with inventing the first mechanical computer, to better understand Ferguson’s deal.  From his 1864 work, Passages from the Life of a Philosopher:

    “On two occasions I have been asked [by members of Parliament], ‘Pray, Mr. Babbage, if you put into the machine the wrong figures, will the right answers come out?’  I am not able rightly to apprehend the kind of confusion of ideas that could provoke such a question.”

    In other words, garbage in garbage out (GIGO).  By this, computer outputs are only as good as the data that are input.  If garbage data is input the resulting outputs are garbage.

    “Some of the major assumptions and estimates that are built in the calculations [of Ferguson’s models] seem to be substantially inflated.”

    That was the assessment of John Ioannidis, a professor of disease prevention from Stanford University.  The point is, the response by central planners to the coronavirus outbreak was guided by garbage.  The economy has been wrecked.  Moreover, the programs to save the economy will further destabilize it.  But why stop now?

    For central planners this is their golden opportunity to ‘build back better’…

    Beware of Plans to Build Back Better

    This week, for example, Nobel laureate Joseph Stiglitz and several other economic interventionists published a paper in the Oxford Review of Economic Policy calling for green stimulus.  The paper’s title asks the question, “Will COVID-19 fiscal recovery packages accelerate or retard progress on climate change?

    Without government intervention, say the authors, “There are reasons to fear that we will leap from the COVID frying pan into the climate fire.”

    The paper includes a survey of 231 central bankers, G20 finance ministers, and top academics from across 53 countries to subjectively assess the economic and climate impact potential of 25 stimulus policy archetypes.  One important – unequivocal – conclusion is that the world’s leading central planners are onboard with stimulus that reduces carbon emissions.

    The policy archetype of no stimulus and no intervention was not considered, as far as we can tell.  But the paper is chock full of colorful exhibits that appear to be a cross between scatter plot charts and dove entrails.

    The purpose of the exhibits is to graphically display the various experts’ perceptions of the desirability of various stimulus policies.  Is a policy of high positive potential climate impact or high negative potential climate impact?  And what is its long-run multiplier?

    Like Ferguson’s death models, the study is contrived nonsense.  But it’s just the sort of thing the central planners can point to as they flatter their egos and double down with the next wave of fiscal stimulus intervention.  Per Cameron Hepburn, lead author:

    “The COVID-19-initiated emissions reduction could be short-lived.  But this report shows we can choose to build back better, keeping many of the recent improvements we’ve seen in cleaner air, returning nature and reduced greenhouse gas emissions.”

    For the central planners, building back better means pumping stimulus into clean energy research and infrastructure, disaster preparedness, and zero-carbon transportation.  Alas, for the 33.5 million recently unemployed, there’s no booty in it.

    But who cares when Class 8 heavy duty truck orders crashed to a 25 year low in April?  Better to keep those diesel burning smoke belchers off the road.


    Tyler Durden

    Fri, 05/08/2020 – 22:45

  • San Diego Unemployment Rate Nearly 27%, Breaking County Record Set During Great Depression
    San Diego Unemployment Rate Nearly 27%, Breaking County Record Set During Great Depression

    With the worst jobs report in history under our belt, which saw a record 20.5 million jobs lost in April, and the stated unemployment rate at 14.7%, some cities have been hit worse than others by the economic fallout from the pandemic.

    To wit, after steadily increasing 2-3% every week for the past two months, the unemployment rate in San Diego county is at an all-time high of just under 27% – exceeding the previous record from 1933 set during the Great Depression, according to a report by the San Diego Association of Governments (SANDAG).

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    According to the data, 35,000 people filed for unemployment insurance during the week of April 18, bringing to total number to just under 400,000 in the county, reports San Diego’s Fox5. And let’s not forget San Diego’s hourly workers who have seen their shifts cut as businesses struggle to stay afloat.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    San Diego residents line up for emergency food distribution at SDCCU Stadium, April 5, 2020 (Photo: Brian Doll / Swinerton Renewable Energy)

    It’s absolutely astounding, and this has never happened in the history of before to have this type of unemployment this quickly,” said SANDAG Chief Economist Ray Major, who added: “We will end up going into a recession because of this and so the housing sector may be hurt. You may be able to buy an automobile more cheaply but that’s because there aren’t as many people out there trying to buy automobiles.

    Major says certain industries like retail and biotech companies will come back quickly. He says it’s those working in the restaurant and hospitality industries that will take a longer time to get back to normal. Major says it could be anywhere from 18 months to two years. –Fox5

    On Friday, White House economic adviser Larry Kudlow said that 75% of those who have filed for unemployment are ‘temporary layoffs.’

    On what scale?


    Tyler Durden

    Fri, 05/08/2020 – 22:25

  • Staying Ahead Of The Shortages: What To Stock Up On For The Coming Year
    Staying Ahead Of The Shortages: What To Stock Up On For The Coming Year

    Authored by Samantha Biggers via BackdoorSurvival.com,

    While a lot of people are concerned about food shortages, one should not forget that there are a lot of items that make life easier or at least more enjoyable that come from abroad. A lot of these items specifically come from China and India. I am going to mention a few other things that are mostly made in the USA but that may potentially be in short supply as a result of the pandemic.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Food and water are primary concerns as they should be but what about these other things. I have compiled this list of things that you may want to consider acquiring if you don’t think you have enough to get through the next 6 months to a year.

    Do what you can with what financial resources and ingenuity you have. You don’t have to jump on buying everything I talk about all at once. Sometimes people get caught up thinking that they have to do it all at once and that is not true. I presented this information so you can use it over the coming months to determine your preparedness needs and plan accordingly. I think this winter is going to be a difficult one and that the sooner you start planning the better.

    That being said, I cannot predict what is going to happen but I can tell you that if you put back things you know you are going to need sooner rather than later than in the worst case you are prepared and in the best case you are ahead of the game and won’t have to buy those things later and may have some extra funds to put towards things later.

    I am not trying to encourage you to buy things that there is no way that you are going to need. The intent of this post is really to make you think about what you do need considering the situation we are all in due to the pandemic and what things you have that are close to the end of their useful life and might need replaced soon.

    Just because something is available later on doesn’t mean it will be affordable.

    While as a country we may not run out of coffee grinders or coffee pots, they may get a lot more expensive. Buying now is one way to avoid potentially higher prices later on.

    It is easy to take some of the basics for granted. The old saying “you don’t know what you got until it is gone” is accurate.

    I remember going from years of having easy hot water and reliable heating and cooling in our living space to not having any of those things while we were living in a camper and building our house. To put this on a perspective for the average person in America, what if you couldn’t buy socks at an affordable price? What if you couldn’t get a broom or vacuum to clean your home? These are just a few examples.

    When manufacturing starts coming back to the USA or we start contracting with other countries for some manufacturing, the price is going to go up and it may go up a lot.

    People cannot live in the USA on a wage equal to that of a Chinese or Indian laborer. Also given that there are minimum wage laws, we technically wouldn’t be allowed to work for that low of a wage if we wanted to. Americans will work but they are not going to work for wages that require them to live under the conditions that a lot of people in China and India live in.

    The Items

    Sheets and Bedding

    Have you ever priced a hand-sewn quilt? They are really expensive because they take a lot of time and they are usually made of fabric that is at least of moderate quality. I have made them and they last for years. I no longer have the time to make blankets that are that fancy and artistic so I buy them like everyone else. Regardless of how fancy or cheap you like to buy your sheets, those are made overseas. India produces a lot of the quality cotton blankets and sheets that are sold in the United States.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    You may be thinking that we grow a lot of cotton in the United States. We sure do and it often that same cotton that goes into making the blankets and sheets that we get from India and China. The manufacturing facilities and inexpensive labor are not available here at the moment.

    The other day I was thankful that I had bought a set of sheets ahead for everyone because all of a sudden I started noticing holes appearing in the ones I bought years ago. It is easy to not buy until you realize that things are getting threadbare. Here is a link to the sheets I bought. Sometimes they are a little less but they are still a very good deal for the quality you get.

    Right now you can still get some inexpensive blankets but I am not sure how long that is going to last. I just know that there is only so much stuff in the country at the moment and it is pretty hard to say how much consumer goods are actually coming in. Just going by total container volume, it is not much.

    Small and Large Appliances

    This is the best deal I could find on a small chest freezer currently. If you are looking for one and want something compact, this freezer can be had for $179 and Wal-Mart offers 2-day shipping for free. I bought the 5 cubic feet version that opens from the top and paid less for it than this upright but those deals are gone.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    How many of you have went to buy a small to medium chest freezer only to find that you might be able to get one in June if you are lucky? We were in the position of having two sheep that we had to butcher but not enough freezer space. We were concerned about not being able to get a smaller freezer so we went ahead and got a small one from Wal-Mart.

    For some reason I thought that more freezers and other large appliances were made in the USA but I was sure wrong about that one. Freezers sold out much faster than I thought they would. I have seen a few really big freezers for sale but they are so big that most people are just not going to have the space and they cost twice as much as what most of us are used to paying when we want to go get a freezer.

    Freezers are just the beginning. If you are noticing that your microwave, toaster, coffee pot, etc are starting to act up or not run so well, you may want to get your replacement now and throw it in the garage or closet. I can imagine that if demand is much greater than supply, a seller that does an auction on eBay may be shocked to see what some are willing to pay for items that they don’t want to do without. People like you or me that cannot outbid someone with a lot of money will be out of luck.

    Clothing

    There is a lot of clothing in the country but a lot of it is used clothing. Items like blue jeans that you wear out more often are made in Asia with the majority being made in China. I am going to make an effort to buy American made after we wear out what I bought up. My husband works outside a lot and goes through some pants and t-shirts. Some of you may wear an odd size or a size that you find is not as available at stores.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    If this is you then you need to be especially aware of what you have on hand. As I have stated many times in the past, buying out of season can save a lot of money. I routinely pick items at 50%-70% off by purchasing winter items in the spring or summer or summer items at the beginning of winter. This also means I can get better quality which in turn saves money because I don’t have to buy the same thing as often.

    Shoes

    People love shoes. In fact a lot of people have way more pairs than they really need but those that do often don’t choose to buy the most practical footwear. During the year ahead you may find that you need different footwear even if you have a lot of shoes overall. The majority of footwear is made in China or other Asian countries. Some companies do have a USA made line that costs more but that is the exception, not the norm. Shoes made in the USA and Italy, both known for quality footwear, cost a lot more to buy and the selection is rather limited.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Right now you can still find some exceptional deals on footwear. My husband and I live on a mountain and farm. We deal with a lot of rough terrain and do a good deal of manual labor so we have to have good work boots. Other footwear will just get destroyed. Consider what your footwear needs are going to be over the next year and start buying what you need as you can afford it. Keep an eye out for good deals.

    I love to shop at Amazon Warehouse for shoes because since I can wear a men’s size and I am not picky about the color, I can find exceptional deals. You have to shop around a bit but I picked up 4 pairs of boots for us for maybe $160? A single pair had a retail value that high. These types of deals will not be around forever because a lot of those companies have severely cut back on production or are not operating at all.

    Another good place to find boots is through a military surplus store. Check out this post on military surplus for more info.

    Some Fertilizers

    A lot of people are gardening and that has led to a big run on fertilizers. While a lot is still available, that might not always be the case. It takes quite a bit of energy and people to make a lot of the commercial fertilizers on the market. A lot of folks are also stocking up on the organic varieties.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    The smaller organic fertilizer companies are not used to this type of demand and they could struggle to meet it in the near future. I know that some products like Garden Tone in larger bags have become a little more scarce here lately.

    Tires

    I have been trying to make an effort to be more on top of it when it comes to vehicle and machinery maintenance. For example, when this pandemic situation started, we ordered some tire patch kits and a gallon of tire slime in case we have to make some repairs at home.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Months ago, Matt and I were talking about when the tires would need to be replaced on the Kawasaki Mule. We agreed that we could get through the summer but before winter hit we absolutely had to get a new set. Then the pandemic happened. We set aside a little here and there and I went ahead and bought a set.

    We use the Mule for everything around the farm and to go down to see my Dad at the other property and take him things. The truck is more vehicle than we need around the farm most of the time and it costs more to maintain and operate. A lot of our roads are not for trucks either. It would cause us an enormous amount of extra work that we honestly don’t have time for with just the two of us working the farm if we could not use our Mule.

    A lot of tires are made in China and Korea. Yes there are US manufacturers but not as many as you might think. Only certain sizes will work with certain vehicles and some people need heavy duty 4×4 tires for things not street tires. My point is that even if your tires are looking worn, you might consider buying a set now and setting them aside for when you need them. Take a look at your tractors and other small machinery. I know that tires are not cheap but they could get a lot more expensive, especially if you need something that is specialized.

    Electronics

    I am not one to have a fancy cell phone. I buy $50 and under smartphones and then barely ever keep it on. In fact some months I don’t even bother with it. At the same time, I realize that others depend on their phones for a lot of things. If you can pick up a cheap throwaway phone as a back up then it is something to consider. It may be difficult to find one that is not overpriced.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    A lot of people are also choosing to keep the computer or Chromebook they have going rather than upgrading it for a different model. That being said, if you depend on your computer for work and entertainment and don’t already have a backup, now might be the time to pick up a cheap backup. Remember that nowadays cheap doesn’t mean it is not highly functional. I bought an open box Samsung Chromebook a few years back for $110 and used it for all my writing and for watching shows for over a year. It is still what we use for our TV but we hook it up to a big monitor.

    Computer parts and internet equipment are mostly made overseas too. Network and technology needs vary by the person but there is nothing wrong with having an extra wireless router or network card. I bought a USB wireless adapter when all this started because my computer stopped going online. It seemed like some of the better adapters were already more expensive or harder to find. Not sure what it looks like out there now.

    Cat and Dog Food

    A lot of meat processors are shut down due to the pandemic. Some have stated that they are shut down indefinitely. When meat processors shut down that means that there are not byproducts and leftovers to be used in dog and cat foods. Maybe if some animals are put down they will go for pet foods but that is not a guaranteed thing.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    It may also come to pass that the more affordable pet foods sell out while the more expensive ones are still somewhat available but out of reach for a lot of people due to cost. If your dog or cat requires a special diet then you need to be even more concerned. Here are a few links to posts on pet food storage and calorie needs that may be helpful with your planning.

    Small Hand and Power Tools

    Almost all the hand tools and power tools that we use often are made in China. There are a few companies that manufacture in the USA. Bully Tools and Eastwing both come to mind for hand tools. Milwaukee and Dewalt make some items in the USA. Remember that a lot of tool companies have products made in many different countries. You cannot assume that because they have a few USA made products that everything you get with their logo on it is made in the USA.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Tools make it possible to be more self-sufficient. I would never want to give up our tools. If you don’t have a basic household toolkit or the garden tools you need then try to buy them as you can. You will not regret having a few basic tools around.

    Nail, screws, and other fasteners

    I just put in an order to Lowes and it was amazing what they were out of. Most of the screws, nails, and fasteners are made in China or similar. If I wanted a screw under 2 inches, my only choice as the star bit variety. A standard Phillips head was not available in that size.

    Just for the record, I have never seen Lowes out of such a basic size and variety in over a decade of helping build houses, barns, etc.

    Even more of the over the counter and basic medical supplies we are used to having.

    Some medical and personal protective gear have been in short supply for quite some time. Since a lot of the ingredients that are necessary to produce many medications are made in foreign lands, it seems like we would be bound to see more medications in short supply the longer the pandemic continues and especially if there is a devastating second wave.

    Besides medications, there are a lot of other medical supplies made overseas as well. Those without a good medical kit should start putting one together so that they can deal with basic needs at home.

    Other Items

    • Soap

    • Batteries

    • Laundry products

    • Coffee

    • Herbs and spices that are usually foreign grown. Black peppercorns are an example. A lot of black pepper is grown in India.

    • Sewing supplies

    • Anything imported that you would really miss.

    Are you experiencing shortages in your area? What are you having the most trouble finding? For a more comprehensive list of items to put back for hard times, check out my article “The Supplies You Need To Stockpile For TEOTWAWKI”.


    Tyler Durden

    Fri, 05/08/2020 – 22:05

  • Chicago Murder Rate Soars Despite Stay-At-Home Orders, Activists Blame "Lockdown Segregation" 
    Chicago Murder Rate Soars Despite Stay-At-Home Orders, Activists Blame “Lockdown Segregation” 

    Despite the pandemic and strict stay-at-home orders, one would naturally assume violent crime in Chicago’s inner cities would subside. But that was not the case in April, according to a new report via AP News, which said, “the city’s most deprived neighborhoods are still echoing to the sound of deadly gunfire and raucous partying.” 

    Homicides in America’s inner cities are cyclical. As the weather improves and daily temperature highs increase, everyone comes outside and hangs out in the streets. Many low-income folks have limited respect for government and law enforcement, so implementing social distancing measures have been challenging for Chicago officials. Drug dealers are still going to hustle on the corner, though some now wear masks and gloves. 

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Life continues in these areas, as the Chicago Police Department (CPD) reports a total of 56 murders in April despite lockdown orders. When compared to last year, that is only an 8% reduction from the same month. Now, this is contrary to what has been seen in New York and Los Angeles, where violent crime has dramatically declined during lockdowns. 

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Mayor Lori Lightfoot recently warned residents, mostly taking aiming at low-income neighborhoods, said that all partying during lockdowns must be stopped. She said residents must follow social distancing rules or could go to jail. “We are not playing games,” the mayor said last weekend. 

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    “We will shut you down, and if we need to, we will arrest you and take you to jail, period.”

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    AP said the mayor’s warning did very little to thwart social gatherings on the streets as dance parties and loud music were seen. 

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    Father Michael Pfleger, an activist priest who has served in the Chicago area for three decades, said respect for authorities lacks in low-income areas, which have large concentrations of African-Americans and soaring income inequality. 

    “I think one of the reasons is that Chicago is more segregated than New York and LA,” Pfleger said while referring to why violent crime has been much higher in the city compared to other regions. 

    “Segregation here is horrible. You have segregated communities on the South and the West sides that you don’t have in other cities. I also think that decades of ignoring these segregated communities haven’t helped,” he said. 

    Pfleger said people who are looking to commit murder are unlikely to abide by social distancing rules.

    Max Kapustin, senior research director at the University of Chicago Crime Lab, said most of the murders had occurred outside, and victims overlooked the public health orders. 

    “We don’t know if there’s anything else related to COVID-19 that may be exacerbating the issue,” he said.

    Pfleger believes the pandemic has exposed the fragility of society. He said a major issue that clouds these areas is wealth inequality. 

    When it comes to a post-corona world and normalizing life after lockdowns for inner cities – he said, “I get so mad when I hear people say ‘I just want to get back to normal.’ No, normal was bad. Normal was evil and unjust. We want to create something new coming out of this.”

    He said he wants to see the government make critical investments in neighborhoods and schools in underprivileged areas – but as we all know – the bailout money has gone to Wall Street for a second time in a little over a decade. 

    And what’s going to drive more instability in inner cities? You guessed it… massive unemployment

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>


    Tyler Durden

    Fri, 05/08/2020 – 21:45

  • CV-1984: The Accelerated Rise Of Automated Robots
    CV-1984: The Accelerated Rise Of Automated Robots

    Authored by Aaron Kesel via ActivistPost.com,

    CV-1984 is accelerating the spread of Orwellian surveillance devices like talking drones, facial recognition cameras, and more; but that’s not the only technology that is advancing – robots or automated machines are also speeding up their deployment to combat the spread of the coronavirus.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    This reporter and Activist Post has consistently stated that robots were coming for our jobs; and now as record unemployment numbers strike in the U.S., automated machines are being rolled out as well to replace even more workers.

    ZeroHedge reports:

    Bloomberg Law reports JBS SA, the world’s largest meat producer, is preparing to install robots in slaughterhouses to mitigate the spread of COVID-19 among human employees working on the production line.

    JBS SA CFO Guilherme Cavalcanti recently said the Brazilian processing company expects to expand automation at its facilities across the world.

    Cavalcanti said the adoption of automation started before the pandemic as labor tightened at US plants due to a decline in immigration sparked by the Trump administration. He said labor shortages have developed in the US as the virus infects workers and shutters plants.”

    Here’s a video of those meat packaging machines in action.

    It’s not just meat packaging that could be threatened by robots; grocers themselves are also in danger of being replaced by machines. CNN reports that grocers – big and small chains alike – are turning to robots for performing various tasks like cleaning floors, stocking shelves and delivering groceries to shoppers. The covid crisis could even prompt online retail warehouses like Amazon to invest more into automation technology as well.

    The New York Times reported that the outbreak is boosting demand for Zhen Robotics and its RoboPony, a self-driving cart that is sold to retailers, hospitals, malls and apartment complexes.

    A group of scientists on the editorial board of Science Robotics are further calling for robots to do the “dull, dirty, and dangerous jobs” of infectious disease management by replacing certain hospital jobs like disinfecting robots combing rooms/floors and working in labs.

    A recent report by A3, Association For Advancing Automation, further details all the ways that artificial intelligence and automation is being used in different industries to combat the coronavirus.

    This all continues to highlight what Activist Post and this writer has detailed consistently for months — that advancement in robotics and A.I. is taking jobs daily more and more, warning that robots would soon take human jobs such as construction and farming robots, Angus and HRP-5P, being created to replace workers in the aforementioned industries. Activist Post has been sounding the alarm of the coming robot apocalypse.

    Also see the article entitled: “Robots Already Replacing Bank Tellers, Drivers, News Anchors, Restaurant and Warehouse Employees. Will Your Job Be Next?” written by B.N. Frank.

    As this writer has written previously on Steemit, we are shifting towards a working world with little or no humans, as automation and artificial intelligence begins to take over our jobs. It’s cheaper to hire a few robots which don’t need rest and benefits than to hire a few humans who need healthcare and retirement funds.

    Last year, robots took a record number of jobs in the U.S. according to Robotic Industries Association (RIA) as Activist Post reported. Now, with the impetus of the coronavirus the number of jobs occupied by robots could multiply quite rapidly. Oxford Economics also published its own report warning that accelerating technological advances in automation, engineering, energy storage, artificial intelligence, and machine learning have the potential to reshape the world in 2020 through 2030s, displacing at least 20 million workers.

     

    Brave – The Browser Built for Privacy

    With the coronavirus as a catalyst to speed up the deployment of automated machines, we can probably safely say that number will be much more severe. It seems I am not the only one to share that opinion; a recent MarketWatch article written by Johannes Moenius, a professor of global business and the director of the Institute for Spatial Economic Analysis at the University of Redlands, agrees with this author’s conclusion stating “at least 50 million jobs could be automated in just essential industries.”

    In fact, the Brookings Institution said in a report last month that “any coronavirus-related recession is likely to bring about a spike in labor-replacing automation … Automation happens in bursts, concentrated especially in bad times such as in the wake of economic shocks, when humans become relatively more expensive as firms’ revenues rapidly decline.”


    Tyler Durden

    Fri, 05/08/2020 – 21:25

  • 'Not If You're Too Hot' – Nevada Brothels Unveil Temp-Taking, Mask-Wearing Plans To Re-Open
    ‘Not If You’re Too Hot’ – Nevada Brothels Unveil Temp-Taking, Mask-Wearing Plans To Re-Open

    Last month a brothel owner told KRNV Reno  that she had adopted safety procedures for when Nevada Gov. Steve Sisolak gives the green light to reopen the state’s legal brothels.

    Madam Bella, the owner of Bella’s Hacienda, said reopening the state’s legal brothels will be challenging amid the pandemic, and she expects to enforce social distancing and new disinfectant protocols to ensure the safety of her sex-workers, staff, and guests. 

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    “Since the governor’s reopening plan closely mirrors the White House guidelines to Open Up America Again, I expect legal brothels to be allowed to open our doors by at least stage two of the Governor’s phased reopening, along with bars,” Bella said

    “But until there’s an effective and readily available vaccine for COVID-19, it certainly can’t be ‘business as usual’ at the brothels. I’m announcing my procedures for reopening my brothel in order to be proactive and transparent, so that my customers know that the courtesans and I have every intention to reopen safely, and stay open.”

    Bella said several key procedural changes would include testing sex-workers for COVID-19 on a weekly basis, integration of personal protective equipment (such as mask-wearing for anyone in the facility), and temperature checks.

    “A brothel, like a nursing home, involves a group of people living in a communal environment and sharing common areas like a kitchen and gym. Regularly testing each courtesan residing at the brothel for COVID-19 will be crucial in order to reasonably ensure the health of the sex workers living alongside each other,” she said

    “It will also give potential clients peace of mind in knowing that the ladies are free of coronavirus, as several of our customers are of advancing age and may be considered at-risk persons with regard to the virus.”

    Chuck Muth, a spokesperson for the Nevada Brothel Association (NBA), said there is no concrete industry-wide guideline of how a brothel will operate in a post-corona world. “Things are still very up-in-the-air,” he said. 

    The Daily Beast said it was a mixed bag of responses among brothel owners, sex workers, and other industry players about reopening.

    “It’s not ethical to open these establishments now,” said Roxanne Price, a sex worker in the Nevada brothel industry, adding that she will live off savings until an effective treatment or vaccine emerges. “Any close-contact work is probably not a good idea.”

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Roxanne Price

    Price said the push to reopen brothels was not based on greed or disregard for danger but due to the fragility of the industry. 

    Brothels in the state have no way in reopening unless Gov. Sisolak clears the industry. It appears, at this moment, there is no timeline on when a reopening will occur. 

    Nathan Robertson, the mayor of Ely, a town with several brothels, told The Daily Beast that he likens brothels to “health, beauty, and wellness services,” suggesting they could reopen the same time as hair and nail salons

    Epidemiologists and infectious disease experts told The Daily Beast that brothels involve closer forms of contact, including sexual acts, which pose more risk than say sitting in a barber’s chair. 

    Brian Labus, a communicable disease surveillance expert at the University of Nevada, said he was encouraged to see brothels “taking steps to think about how they can mitigate risks to customers.”

    Anna Yeung-Cheung, an infectious disease expert at Manhattanville College, asked are sex-workers going to wear masks when they service clients? 

    Jeffrey Klausner, an epidemiologist at the University of California, Los Angeles, said restricting mouth-to-mouth contact, regular screenings of sex-workers and clients, constant hygiene care, and disclaimers about the risks of having sex with strangers, could be adequate in mitigating risks. 

    Opening any business too early potentially puts people at risk,” though, Labus added. 

    Irwin Redlener, an infectious disease expert at Columbia University, said rapid virus tests of sex-workers and clients could become standard before every sexual encounter. 

    In the meantime, sex-workers like Price, are living off savings during the pandemic. 

    “Financially, I am feeling pressure,” said Jasmine of the Desert Rose brothel in Elko, “and I will definitely be at work as soon as we can open.” Imogen Steele, a sex worker, affiliated with the Sagebrush Ranch brothel outside of Carson City, said she feels like her only alternative if she can’t go back to her brothel soon, will be “shooting deer and making deer meat jerky to sell on the street.”

    Barbara Brents, an expert on Nevada’s brothels at the University of Nevada, Las Vegas, said anti-brothel organizations would try to seize this moment to enforce stricter government rules on the industry, which could force brothels to stay closed for a much longer period.

    Like the brothel industry, casinos are also struggling to survive as they prepare to adapt to a post-corona world. 

    So when things do reopen, who in their right mind will have sex with a stranger at a brothel then go gamble at a Vegas casino


    Tyler Durden

    Fri, 05/08/2020 – 21:05

  • Is This The End Of The LNG Boom?
    Is This The End Of The LNG Boom?

    Authored by Nick Cunningham via OilPrice.com,

    The glut of natural gas could lead to more cancelled LNG exports in the next few months.

    “It is clear that yes we face today people talk lot about the oil market, but the gas markets are suffering a lot,” the CEO of Total SA, Patrick Pouyanne, told investors and analysts on an earnings call on Tuesday.

    “We are on the way to, I would say, cancel some of the of the LNG tankers during summer time in order to limit some losses.”

    Global LNG supply is expected to rise to 380 million tonnes in 2020, up 17 Mt from a year earlier, according to data from Rystad Energy. However, demand will rise by a relatively modest 6 Mt, putting total demand at 359 Mt for the year.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Two obvious things stand out from those numbers.

    • There was an oversupply problem heading into 2020, even before taking the global pandemic and economic downturn into account.

    • Second, the supply overhang will be made worse this year as new additions exceed demand growth.

    The market can often digest excess gas, either by burning more for electricity or putting more in storage.

    “But in 2020, when ample LNG supply is coupled with demand destruction, prices have already hit record lows and storages have already filled faster than usual. Production shut-ins are becoming a realistic possibility,” Rystad Energy said.

    Europe has often soaked up excess cargoes, but storage is much higher than usual, leaving little room for extra shipments. That has LNG prices in the Netherlands (a key price marker for Europe) trading below $2/MMBtu. A recent report found that the economics of the LNG market are “imploding.”

    “European storage could reach its limit and LNG cargoes with deliveries in the summer months are at risk of being canceled,” Rystad said.

    The problem is similar in the U.S. – tepid demand and high inventories. Natural gas prices in the U.S. have also traded below $2/MMBtu for much of 2020, although prices have edged up recently. A depressed economy and weak prices have walloped coal, which is now generating less electricity in the U.S. than renewable energy.

    At least 20 LNG cargoes have already been cancelled, according to an April 22 report from Reuters.

    “[T]hese cargos are unlikely to get placed by other entities since export economics are so far out of the money,” Bank of America said.

    “Although earlier than we expected, we are not surprised that US LNG exports are getting cancelled, and expect more cargos get cancelled in subsequent months.”

    At the same time, the depressed market will surely delay or cancel final investment decisions in new LNG export projects.

    “Due to the low LNG prices in 2019, and into 2020 amid a global LNG supply surplus and uncertainties in the trade environment, some of the proposed projects are seeing slower progress towards FID,” a recent report from the International Gas Union warned.

    But gas bulls have some factors working in their favor.

    U.S. gas production actually began declining late last year after peaking in November. At first, Appalachian gas drillers were hurting from low prices, made worse by the associated gas boom in the Permian. But the pandemic and meltdown in the oil market has killed off the gusher of gas from the Permian, which could accelerate the tightening of the gas market. “Oil might unintentionally bail out the global gas market this summer,” Bank of America Merrill Lynch said in a report.

    Associated gas production could by 0.6 bcf/d by July simply from the recent oil drilling cutbacks. But the actual decline will likely be larger as more curtailments are announced, Bank of America said. “Sluggish oil activity might make natural gas great again!” the bank said, before cautioning that future natural gas prices are “at the mercy of oil prices.” Bank of America forecasts prices for gas in 2021 at $2.75/MMBtu.

    Goldman Sachs is more bullish, forecasting gas prices to rise sharply to $3.50/MMBtu by next winter.

    That isn’t great news for LNG exporters in the U.S., however. Higher priced U.S. gas means there is little room to ship it overseas, where prices remain depressed.


    Tyler Durden

    Fri, 05/08/2020 – 20:45

  • Elon Musk Says He's "Not The Biggest Fan" Of Warren Buffett
    Elon Musk Says He’s “Not The Biggest Fan” Of Warren Buffett

    Elon Musk took to the Joe Rogan Podcast for a second time in a recording that was released this week, shortly after the birth of his child. The array of topics covered included Elon’s new child, artificial intelligence, why Elon decided to sell all of his belongings (“possessions kind of weigh you down”), Neuralink, SpaceX, the Tesla Roadster, Covid-19 and dieting, among other things.

    But when the topic turned to business, reopening the economy and billionaires, it then that Musk voiced his disapproval for Warren Buffett. And why wouldn’t Musk disapprove of Buffett? Aside from Buffett being a well-known name synonymous with value investing that refuses to own Tesla stock or seemingly make any profoundly positive comments any of Elon’s ventures, the two also have totally different management styles.

    Buffett has a reputation of being thoughtful, patient and seeking to invest in entities that can generate cash and earnings consistently. Musk is brash, acts quickly out of emotion and has a history of burning billions of dollars in other people’s capital.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Perhaps that’s why Musk, while talking about capital allocation on the podcast, said of Buffett: 

    “So when you take Warren Buffett for example, and to be totally frank I’m not his biggest fan, he does a lot of capital allocation. He reads a lot of annual reports of companies, all the accounts, and it’s pretty boring honestly. What he’s trying to figure out is ‘does Coke or Pepsi deserve more capital.”

    Recall, Buffett was asked about Musk in late April and said: “Well, I think you’re trying to bait me a little bit. He’s done some remarkable things.” When asked if he would invest in Tesla, Buffett simply replied: “No.”

    But now, who knows? Maybe the comment will inadvertently inspire Buffett to pick up and read a “boring” annual report of Tesla’s. We think he’d be simply amazed by what he finds. 

    Musk’s comments, along with the rest of his underwhelming podcast with Joe Rogan, can be seen here:


    Tyler Durden

    Fri, 05/08/2020 – 20:25

  • NY Times Accused Of Ripping Off Pulitzer Prize-Winning Stories From Russian Journalists For 2nd Time
    NY Times Accused Of Ripping Off Pulitzer Prize-Winning Stories From Russian Journalists For 2nd Time

    Authored by Ben Norton via TheGrayZone.com,

    The New York Times has been accused for a second time of stealing major scoops from Russian journalists. One of those stories won the Times a Pulitzer Prize this May.

    The journalists who have accused the Times of taking their work without credit also happen to be the same liberal media crusaders against Vladimir Putin that Western correspondents at the Times and other mainstream outlets have cast as persecuted heroes.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    The Pulitzer Prize Board is comprised of a who’s who of media aristocrats and Ivy League bigwigs. Given the elite backgrounds of the judges, it is hardly a surprise that they rewarded reporting reinforcing the narrative of the new US Cold War against official enemies like Russia and China.

    Stephen Kinzer, a former New York Times correspondent who has since become a critic of US foreign policy, noted that the three finalists in the Pulitzer Prize in international reporting “were one story about how evil Russia is and two about how evil China is. These choices encourage reporters to write stories that reinforce rather than question Washington’s foreign-policy narrative.”

    The finalists nominated in this category were Reuters and the New York Times for two separate sets of stories.

    The US newspaper of record ended up winning the 2020 award in international reporting, for what the Pulitzer jury described as “a set of enthralling stories, reported at great risk, exposing the predations of Vladimir Putin’s regime.”

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    The Times was nominated again as a finalist for what the jury called its “gripping accounts that disclosed China’s top-secret efforts to repress millions of Muslims through a system of labor camps, brutality and surveillance.”

    The staff of Reuters was selected as the third finalist for its reporting in support of anti-China protesters in Hong Kong. (The photography staff of Reuters ended up winning the Pulitzer Prize in breaking news photography for the same coverage.)

    Among the five members of the Pulitzer jury who selected these finalists was Jeffrey Goldberg, the editor-in-chief of the neoliberal magazine The Atlantic and a former volunteer in the Israeli army who worked as a guard at a prison camp where Palestinians who rose up in the First Intifada were interned.

    Joining Goldberg on the jury was Susan Chira, a former New York Times editor.

    While this elite Pulitzer jury praised the New York Times for “at great risk, exposing the predations of Vladimir Putin’s regime,” it is not exactly clear what that “risk” is supposed to entail – because the major US newspaper appears to have stolen at least part of its reporting from Russian journalists.

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    On May 4, journalist Roman Badanin published a Facebook post accusing the Times of ripping off a story he had released months before without credit. Badanin is the founder and editor-in-chief of the liberal anti-Putin news website Proekt, known as The Project in English.

    “I have no illusions about the real role of Russian journalism in the world, but I have to note: the two The New York Times’s investigations, for which this honored newspaper won the Pulitzer prize yesterday, repeat the findings of The Project’s articles published a few months before,” Badanin wrote on Facebook.

    “I would also like to note that the winners did not put a single link to the English version of our article, even when, for example, 8 months after The Project, they told about the activities of Eugene Prigozhin’s emissaries in Madagascar,” he added.

    Badanin linked to an article he published, both in Russian and English, back in March 2019 titled “Master and Chef: How Evgeny Prigozhin led the Russian offensive in Africa.” The story details how the businessman Evgenу Prigozhin, who is sanctioned by the US government, has been promoting business opportunities in Africa. The piece focuses specifically on Madagascar, where Russia also has a military agreement.

    This report is eerily similar to a report published by the New York Times eight months later, in November, titled “How Russia Meddles Abroad for Profit: Cash, Trolls and a Cult Leader.” This story, which was filed in Madagascar, does not once link to or credit Proekt’s original reporting.

    Another anti-Putin Russian news website, Meduza, published an article on May 7 drawing attention to these allegations, titled “‘Fuck the Pulitzer — I just want a hyperlink’: Russian journalists say ‘The New York Times’ should have acknowledged their investigative work in the newspaper’s award-winning reports about the Putin regime’s ‘predations.’”

    Meduza interviewed Badanin, who said the New York Times “report about Madagascar from November 2019 repeats all the main and even secondary conclusions from our reporting about Madagascar and Africa generally between March and April last year.”

    While Badanin did not outright accuse the Times of plagiarism, he was frustrated that “nowhere in the story did they acknowledge that we’d already reported on this topic,” and said it was either a “professional issue” or an “ethical problem.”

    A New York Times spokesperson denied that Proekt’s reporting was used in any way. And the Times reporter who authored this report from Madagascar, Michael Schwirtz, responded dismissively to the accusations in a Twitter thread full of sarcastic quips.

    Another anti-Putin Russian activist accuses the New York Times of lifting his reporting

    Michael Schwirtz authored another New York Times article in December that was cited by the Pulitzer jury for the 2020 prize. This piece, “How a Poisoning in Bulgaria Exposed Russian Assassins in Europe,” is also suspiciously similar to reporting published before by yet another anti-Putin website, called The Insider.

    The Insider is edited by the Western-backed, diehard anti-Putin activist Roman Dobrokhotov. In response to Schwirtz’s Twitter thread, Dobrohotov angrily asked why The Insider’s reports were not credited as well. Schwirtz denied having used information from the previous stories.

    Schwirtz’s Twitter thread tagged four Russian accounts: Proekt, The Insider, Dobrokhotov, and Yasha Levine, the last of whom is an occasional contributor to The Grayzone and the author of “Surveillance Valley.”

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    Levine reflected on the scandal writing,

    “Time to learn the hard truth: The New York Times — like the Empire it represents — doesn’t give a fuck about you. It’ll take whatever it wants, give nothing in return, and suffer no consequences. And who’ll believe you Russians anyway?”

    “The reverence with which liberal Russian journalists have treated the New York Times has always been baffling to me,” Levine continued. “But that’s what you get when you’re a colonial subject like Russia. You fetishize the master. That reverence is starting to wear off, but it’s still there.”

    New York Times was also accused of stealing Russian journalists’ reporting back in 2017

    This is not even the first time that the US newspaper of record has been accused of stealing reporting from Russian journalists.

    Back in 2017, the New York Times won the Pulitzer Prize in international reporting for its reports on “Vladimir Putin’s efforts to project Russia’s power abroad.”

    At the time, journalists from the anti-Putin website Meduza accused the Times of ripping off their reporting. The website Global Voices highlighted the controversy, in an article titled “Russian Journalists Say One of NYT’s Pulitzer-Winning Stories Was Stolen.”

    Meduza reported Daniil Turovsky accused New York Times Moscow correspondent Andrew E. Kramer of lifting his reporting. Kramer actually took the time to respond in a Facebook comment, acknowledging that his report was based on the Russian journalist’s.

    “Daniil, I spoke with you while preparing this article and explained that I intended to follow in the footsteps of your fine work, that I would credit Meduza, as I did, and thanked you for your help,” Kramer said.

    This did not satisfy Meduza, which also reminded readers in its latest 2020 article that the Times had ripped off its 2017 reporting.

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    The Grayzone has also experienced this kind of shameless journalistic theft. In March 2019, the New York Times released a report acknowledging that the so-called “humanitarian aid” convoy that the US government tried to ram across the Venezuelan border in a February coup attempt had been set on fire not by government forces, but rather Washington-backed right-wing opposition hooligans.

    At the time of this February 23 putsch attempt, the Times had initially joined US politicians like Senator Marco Rubio and the majority of the corporate media in blaming Venezuelan President Nicolás Maduro. But The Grayzone editor Max Blumenthal, who was reporting in Venezuela, published a report showing that all of the available evidence pointed to the opposition being responsible.

    When the Times finally admitted this fact weeks later, it made no mention whatsoever of Blumenthal’s reporting. Glenn Greenwald was the only high-profile journalist to credit Blumenthal and The Grayzone.

    New York Times had ironically heroized these Russian journalists before stealing their reporting

    Further compounding this staggering hypocrisy is the fact that the New York Times has in fact published numerous articles lionizing these anti-Putin Russian journalists, while simultaneously ripping off their work.

    Proekt founder and editor Roman Badanin is not some kind of crypto pro-Kremlin activist – far from it. He has spent years working within mainstream outlets, and was previously the editor-in-chief of the decidedly anti-Putin Russian edition of Forbes magazine.

    Badanin does friendly interviews with US-based neoconservative think tanks like the Free Russia Foundation, a right-wing anti-Putin lobbying group that appointed regime-changer Michael Weiss as its director for special investigations.

    In an interview conducted by Valeria Jegisman, a neoconservative anti-Russian activist who worked as a spokesperson for the government of Estonia and now works at the US government’s propaganda arm Voice of America, group accused the Kremlin of spreading false information, claiming “Russia will continue its disinformation tactics.”

    Badanin also called for “the West” to “support independent media projects with non-profit funding,” stating clearly: “I think that what the West can do is to continue to support independent media in the most transparent and clear way, and to stop being afraid of the million tricks that the Russian authorities come up with to force the West to abandon these investments.”

    The Russian journalist’s pro-Western perspective has been rewarded. Badanin was honored by the European Press Prize, a program backed by Western governments and the top corporate media outlets in Europe, particularly The Guardian and Reuters.

    Badanin was also given a Stanford John S. Knight international fellowship in journalism. Stanford University has established itself as an outpost for Russian pro-Western liberals, and its journalist fellowship program provides institutional support for dissidents in countries targeted by Washington for regime change.

    Badanin’s extensive links to Western regime-change institutions should not come as a surprise to the New York Times; it has in fact honored him in numerous articles.

    In 2017, the Times published an entire article framed around Badanin. Reporter Jim Rutenberg explained, “I wanted to better understand President Trump’s America… So I went to Russia.”

    In Moscow, Rutenberg met with Badanin at the headquarters of the anti-Putin station TV Rain, which he described as a “warehouse complex here, populated by young people with beards, tattoos, piercings and colored hair. (Brooklyn hipster imperialism knows no bounds.)”

    While praising Badanin and TV Rain, the Times also noted that the channel published a poll suggesting that the Soviet Union “should have abandoned Leningrad to the Nazis to save lives.”

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    The Times even featured Badanin prominently in the header image of the story — just two years before the same newspaper would go on to rip off his reporting.

    The New York Times also reported on Roman Badanin in 2016 and 2011. It is abundantly clear the newspaper knew who he was.

    The Gray Lady’s willingness to snatch Badanin’s reporting shows how little respect newspapers like the New York Times actually have for the anti-Putin journalists they claim to lionize. For the jet-setting correspondents of Western corporate media outlets, liberal Russian reporters are just tools to advance their own ambitions.


    Tyler Durden

    Fri, 05/08/2020 – 20:05

  • Daily Briefing – May 8, 2020
    Daily Briefing – May 8, 2020

     

    Ash Bennington hosts Real Vision’s Roger Hirst. Today, Bennington and Hirst explore the relationship between fundamental and technical analysis in the context of the Coronavirus crisis. The pair also discuss the role of the European Central Bank in light of the recent landmark decision by the German constitutional court.


    Tyler Durden

    Fri, 05/08/2020 – 19:52

  • "I'd Send In The Army For An Invasion": Trump Addresses Botched "Little" Venezuela Raid On FOX
    “I’d Send In The Army For An Invasion”: Trump Addresses Botched “Little” Venezuela Raid On FOX

    President Trump on Friday addressed in greater detail the bizarre events of Sunday and Monday which witnessed two American ex-special forces soldiers attempt to lead a small ‘invasion’ force of Venezuelan defectors and mercenaries into the country. The plot was foiled the minute they came ashore on fishing boats, leading to a propaganda victory for Nicolas Maduro, as he later paraded the American contractors in front of state TV cameras throughout the week.

    Trump called into Fox & Friends and had some candid remarks, saying “If I wanted to go into Venezuela I wouldn’t make a secret about it.” He again denied that he or the US government had anything to do with it, calling it “rogue”, and insisting that if it were an officially sanctioned op, it would have certainly been a proper “invasion” with an “army”.

    “If I wanted to go into Venezuela, I wouldn’t make a secret about it. I wouldn’t send a small little group, it’d be called an Army,” Trump said.

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    “If we ever did anything with Venezuela, it wouldn’t be that way. It’d be slightly different. It’d be called an invasion,” the president asserted.

    “It was’t led by General George Washington obviously. This wasn’t a good attack. I think they were caught before they ever hit land. I know nothing about it,” he added.

    This after Maduro along with top Caracas officials have claimed to be in possession of “evidence” Trump as well as Colombian leaders ordered the failed raid, intended to spark a mass uprising eventually leading to the overthrow and US capture of the socialist leader.

    Two days ago 34-year old captured American Luke Denman was made to issue a “confession” broadcast on Venezuelan television wherein he claimed the coup plot was ordered by President Trump. Likely this is the “evidence” to which Maduro has been referring. 

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Image source: Miraflores Palace presidential press office/AP.

    Maduro has also presented the personal documents and passports of Americans Airan Berry and Luke Denman in an online news conference in Caracas Wednesday. 

    The group of a least a dozen men, who were trained by Florida-based private security firm Silvercorp, are still in Venezuelan custody, and Secretary of State Mike Pompeo earlier said the US is working to get the Americans back.

    Video “confession” of Luke Denman wherin he says Trump ordered the covert operation to “secure” Caracas and oust Maduro:

    The Pentagon and State Department have formally denied involvement

    “As President Trump and [Defense Secretary Mark] Esper said, the United States government was not involved in recent events in Venezuela. There is a major disinformation campaign underway by the Maduro regime, making it difficult to separate facts from propaganda,” a State Department spokesperson told Fox News late Tuesday.

    “We are making efforts to learn more, including about the activities of two U.S. Citizens who are reportedly in the custody of the former regime, as well as Mr. Goudreau.”

    US authorities are said to be investigating Silvercorp, the apparently ‘rogue’ operation, and its founder and head, ex-Green Beret Jordan Goudreau – who has been speaking to reporters from Florida and confirmed being behind the failed and somewhat embarrassing operation.


    Tyler Durden

    Fri, 05/08/2020 – 19:45

  • Surviving 2020, Part 3: Plans A, B, And C
    Surviving 2020, Part 3: Plans A, B, And C

    Authored by Charles Hugh Smith via OfTwoMinds blog,

    Read Part 1 here…

    Read Part 2 here…

    Readers ask for specific recommendations for successfully navigating the post-credit/speculative-bubble era and I try to do so while explaining the impossibility of the task.

    As the bogus prosperity economy built on exponential growth of debt implodes, we all seek ways to protect ourselves, our families and our worldly assets. There are any number of websites, subscription services and books which offer two basic “practical recommendations:”

    1. Buy gold (and/or silver) and don’t worry about timing the market as everything else will become worthless.

    2. Establish a heavily armed and well-supplied hideaway before everything implodes.

    My problem with these suggestions is that they are predicated on a decisive “end of the world as we know it” collapse of civilization.

    While I am alive to the possibility of this cataclysm, an analysis of the many feedback loops which will slow or counteract such a decisive collapse suggests other alternatives are even more likely: my term for the slow, uneven decline of the credit/speculative-bubble era is devolution.

    I cover feedback loops, historical cycles and why a lengthy devolution is as least as likely a scenario as abrupt collapse in my book Survival+ (free downloadable version is linked below).

    In other words, I do not see planning for eventualities as “either/or.” I look at it in terms of three levels:

    Plan A: dealing with devolution: government services are cut back, prices for essentials rise over time, fulltime paid jobs become scarce, the State (all levels of government) becomes increasingly repressive as it pursues “theft by other means,” i.e. the stripmining of private assets to feed its own fiefdoms and Elites; most assets fall in purchasing power (value) as the system’s financial props erode.

    Plan B: When things become rationed/unavailable, services become sporadic, pensions stop being paid in full, spontaneous homeless encampments arise in heretofore “nice” areas, cities go bankrupt, small businesses go underground to survive the ever-higher taxes being levied on the few remaining productive enterprises, etc.

    Plan C: if things fall apart: either move to communities where you or your family have roots (tough luck for all the millions of rootless Americans shifted around by corporate “relocations” the past 50 years) or turn to your neighborhood, town, friends, family, church and other social networks for cooperative strength.

    The problem with putting all your resources into a “bug-out” strategy (Plan C) is that it might not come to pass, in which case you’ve misallocated your assets.

    This is why I focus Survival+ on structuring a prosperity which will work on all levels. This prosperity has five basic parts:

    1. Prepare for hybrid work by developing multiple skillsets, interests and contacts and understand that being productive and reciprocal is more important than getting paid (as I put it: “to take care of Number One, first take care of numbers 2 through 9.”)

    2. Develop sustainable, overlapping social networks (self-organizing networks) in which you have more than one place to interact with the same person, i.e. at church or in the neighborhood. I call these non-State, voluntary networks transparent non-privileged parallel structures because they are independent of the State and Monopoly/Predatory Capital Elites.

    3. Cut expenses to the bone so you no longer need a large income to “survive.” Consider lowering your taxable income by working less so you’re no longer working so hard just to pay taxes generated by high incomes. (Thanks to correspondent Stephen A. for noting that barter that results in gains is generally taxable. As always, check with the I.R.S. or a licensed tax advisor to confirm what income is taxable/nontaxable.)

    4. Reach a new understanding of “prosperity”: health and social wealth are the “treasures” which money cannot buy. Yes, we all need some money, and preserving/growing whatever capital you do have will be difficult and time-consuming. There is no easy “one size fits all” solution.

    5. Understand the importance and strength in building and maintaining personal integrity, the one asset we each control in totality and that no one can take from us. All reciprocal networks (financial, political, religious or social) depend entirely on trust, and the bedrock of trust is complete personal integrity.

    Much of the devolution we now face is a direct result of the degradation of integrity. This moral/ethical component of financial implosion is glossed over by the corporate media because the Power Elites have implicitly undermined integrity and morality as a means of soldifying their control of the media and of the national income.

    Yes, I know this all sounds wonderful, but how do you do it in real life? Well, life is and always has been a do-it-yourself affair. With 200 million+ employable people in the nation, what advice or recommendations can I possibly give to any one individual, when only that person knows their own interests, strengths and potential customers, clients, allies, competitors and mentors?

    Let’s start with one simple truth: nobody knows the future. Thus everything we discuss now is contingent on a number of unpredictable interactions. To base our planning on one scenario is to risk misallocating our scarce assets and resources.

    Now let’s hear from two readers and then I’ll pick up the narrative.

    Correspondent Mac posed this question–one which millions of other citizens should also be interested in:

    As a 56-year old watching his company lay off more and more… are there more books/blogs that give advice/information on post-credit/speculative-bubble economy livelihood?

    Reader Marc M.W. offered this insightful critique of general advice:

    If I may be permitted to make a subjective (and friendly constructive) comment about your essays in general: I am having somewhat the same problem that I have with all such writings by assorted authors: superb analysis of what’s wrong with the current American situation, but not much detail on what individuals can DO about it–money, job, choice of place to live–in arranging one’s life for a future likely to be very different from both the present and the past half-century.

    So I get to the end of my David Korten (“The Great Turning”) or my Jim Kunstler (“The Long Emergency”) and I find a lot of GENERALITIES about “building a fine-grained, earth-centered, decentralized and localized community,” and I have difficulty translating that into CONCRETE actions in our personal lives. (That situation is aggravated by the fact that my wife and I are in a sprawly, car-centered Sunbelt place where she loves her job but where we might not otherwise have chosen to live–but the need to translate glittering generalities about the future into concrete actions would exist no matter where we lived.) . . .

    It is particularly difficult to decide what to DO to prepare for the future we see, when so few other people around us see it. We feel quite alone. Most of the people we know have a definite interest in living an ethical and environmentally less damaging life, but they are still focused on recycling, fair trade coffee, and finding a way to run cars and the suburban lifestyle on something other than gasoline.

    Talk to them about “a fine-grained, earth-centered, decentralized and localized community,” or talk to them about co-housing or some sort of mutually cooperative/supportive living arrangement intentionally chosen by a group of people, and they look at you as if you have just spoken in some obscure foreign language. . . .

    We also have trouble figuring out what to do with our MONEY for this world ahead, as the day will come when we stop working (at least for regular wages), so exactly what kind of “retirement” future are we supposed to be preparing for, and what are we to do with our savings in the PRESENT if saving money is still a good idea at all but the “consensus trance” assumptions about the FUTURE are about to become “inoperative”? . . .

    We think of moving to other places–but don’t know how to evaluate them in terms of a future which is just now beginning to form. Our current fallback definition of such a place is: “university town with Amtrak service, good local public transit and/or walkability/bike-ability, relatively benign climate not dependent on oil for household heating, and good agricultural land with locally selling growers of food (for humans, not herd animals) nearby.

    Would certainly appreciate more online commentary from persons as perceptive as yourself about what people should DO to position themselves for the economy and living patterns appearing on the horizon. In other words, somewhat less analysis of “what is” and somewhat more “how to” guidance on positioning one’s own life for it.

    Reasonable questions/suggestions: thank you, Mac and Marc.

    Here are some concrete suggestions which flow directly from the Survival+ framework.

    1. Join existing networks based on your interests and locale. A church can be an amazing organization, and if you find the right church, the one where you feel comfortable with the congregation, the pastor/minister/priest, it is a rewarding experience.

    Yes, people are still petty and annoying, but there are strengths which cannot be duplicated on one’s own.

    It is possible to start your own networks of like-minded people, but it’s a lot easier to join an existing one. Most community groups (recycling, conservation, hunters, religious, political action, education, etc.) are desperate for people willing to contribute some time/energy.

    My own view is that history suggests that any environment, be it violent inner-city ghetto or near-wilderness, is more survivable if you have multiple layers of social reciprocity working for you.

    2. Your neighbors/neighborhood are already a community. You don’t have to agree with their politics or lifestyle, but you already share an interest in keeping the street safe and attractive.

    Now here’s the thing that’s completely, utterly lost on the Internet. Any fool can diss someone else and insult them on the Web because it’s anonymous. Real life is not anonymous.

    In a real community (something many suburban Americans may never have experienced, sadly), you can’t make “enemies” because you’re going to see that person on your street, in your church/synagogue/temple, and in the grocery store–or you’ll see their brother, sister, husband, kids, etc. These multiple layers of interaction make it too risky to alienate someone over some petty difference.

    (Plus in real life, someone who gets insulted might just beat the living heck out of the smartass. Word associations: “having manners,” and “live and let live because it’s not worth alienating someone.”)

    3. If there really is no group or people who you can relate to, then by all means find a locale with people who have similar interests and are rooted. Rootless zombies who move every two years and who spend their time being “entertained” in the Cone of Silence in their McMansion will have little to offer in the way of reciprocity until they find they are in need themselves.

    But as the Chinese saying goes, “If you wait until you’re thirsty, it’s too late to dig a well.”

    4. I am a believer in the Peach Pie strategy. When we have a bounty of peaches, we make dozens of pies and share them with neighbors, friends, and customers/clients. We don’t expect anything back, but the gesture is appreciated. Networks get built by someone offering something freely. Our corrosive environment of Predatory Capitalism has created a culture of “first I get mine” rather than “what can I do for you?”

    It’s not being “generous”–it’s building a base for reciprocity, which is the foundation of sustainable networks/communities.

    In the book, I use the Hawaii-based organization called a Kumiai as an example.

    5. OK, work/jobs. I anticipate the continuing erosion of fulltime paid work. The “factory model” of employment (the monolithic State or Corporation as employer) will be replaced by hybrid work which is an adaptable, flexible mix of paid and unpaid work, private enterprise, community work, creative endeavors, etc.

    In hybrid work, what’s important is being productive and building experiential capital. The other goal is to develop multiple sources of income so you’re no longer dependent on one skillset (or one network/business).

    I’m going to do a brief brain-dump here on hybrid work. Yes, I speak from experience because I’ve been pursuing the hybrid work model for several decades, even before I understood the concept. Many of you have done so, too.

    The point of hybrid work is to reduce the vulnerability created by relying on one source of income or skillset. (Nowadays this is called “antifragile.”) The goal is adaptable, dynamic stability, and relying on one job/skillset is like sitting on an inverted pyramid: it’s inherently unstable. So the goal is to flip the pyramid over and have a base of multiple income streams/interests/skills.

    No one can parse out another’s interests or talents. That’s up to you to figure out.

    We do have one clue: we are what we do every day.

    If you think you like doing some sort of work, but you never seem to have the time to pursue it, maybe you like the idea of the work more than the actual work.

    I would caution anyone who is confident that the “gummit” (State) will never fold up/stop paying its employees/beneficiaries. As I say in the book, the State has various means to evade its obligations.

    For instance, you might receive your $4,000/month pension as “promised,” but then a loaf of bread will cost $2,000. That’s probably not what you thought was “promised,” but strictly speaking, the State will have met its obligation to you.

    Important point: skillsets and networks cannot be depreciated like money. They cannot be stolen.

    As I also explain in Survival+, I am a fan of gold/silver for the simple reason they cannot go to zero value like stocks, bonds, derivatives, and paper money.

    But I also point out that gold is a capital trap. It is not a productive investment like digging a well or installing a solar panel. I submit that controlling as much of the FEW (food, energy, water) assets as possible has some intrinsic value which gold does not have. Yes, gold might buy those resources in the future, but that’s a different proposition than saying gold will not go to zero. The relative price of various assets comes into play, and since we can’t know future relative prices, then it behooves us to spread our bets and to trade in and out of assets as they rise to absurd valuations and then fall to the mean.

    In other words, since the future is unknown, owning a mix of non-correlated productive assets offers better probabilities for dynamic stability.

    It would be easier for all of us if the “checklist” was as easy as, say, this:

    1. buy and secure gold

    2. learn to make decent beer

    Now these are perfectly good ideas for the right person, and they are certainly a good backstop, combining a mix of skillset capital, means of exchange (gold and beer), store of value (gold) and an instant network (“anyone want a taste of my homebrew beer?” Hint: it must be good beer to be effective.)

    But it isn’t that easy, because we’re each a unique mix of interests, talents, tropisms, etc.

    Last important point. Some things cannot be outsourced to distant lands. These include most medical care, fitness, cooking, gardening/yardwork, childcare, caring for the elderly, fixing actual physical objects and software /networks for local enterprises, repairing appliances, installing solar panels on your house, selling at the farmers market, making sales contacts in your town/city, and having a good time.

    As a result, finding some overlap of your own interests and the above enduring needs of human communities might suggest some opportunities for hybrid work and new skillsets/experiential capital to acquire.

    The best way to learn is by doing with others–a mentor, a group, a friend. The best way to get paid for work is to start out offering to do it free, to show you can do it and that you’re trustworthy.

    This is not a tidy checklist but then life is not tidy, and the future will likely be even more untidy than the present.

    These concepts are from my book Survival+.

    A completely free abridged version of the book is available (85,300 words) in PDF: free version of Survival+ If you decide afterward to buy the book to put a few bucks in my pocket–thank you.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    *  *  *

    My recent books:

    Will You Be Richer or Poorer?: Profit, Power, and AI in a Traumatized World ($13)
    (Kindle $6.95, print $11.95) Read the first section for free (PDF).

    Pathfinding our Destiny: Preventing the Final Fall of Our Democratic Republic ($6.95 (Kindle), $12 (print), $13.08 ( audiobook): Read the first section for free (PDF).

    The Adventures of the Consulting Philosopher: The Disappearance of Drake $1.29 (Kindle), $8.95 (print); read the first chapters for free (PDF)

    Money and Work Unchained $6.95 (Kindle), $15 (print) Read the first section for free (PDF).

    *  *  *

    If you found value in this content, please join me in seeking solutions by becoming a $1/month patron of my work via patreon.com.


    Tyler Durden

    Fri, 05/08/2020 – 19:25

  • Twitter Defends China After State Department Identifies Coronavirus Propaganda Network
    Twitter Defends China After State Department Identifies Coronavirus Propaganda Network

    Twitter is refuting claims from the US State Department’s Global Engagement Center (GEC), which found that it was “highly probable” that the Chinese government is behind networks of Twitter accounts spewing disinformation related to COVID-19.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Illustration: Soohee Cho/The Intercept, Getty Images

    GEC head Lea Gabrielle said that the US “has uncovered a new network of inauthentic Twitter accounts, which we assess were created with the intent to amplify Chinese propaganda and disinformation,” according to CNN.

    After reviewing 5,000 of 250,000 accounts flagged by the State Department, however, Twitter said the accounts belong to government entities, nongovernmental organizations, and journalists – which, we would point out, are frequent mouthpieces for the Chinese Communist Party.

    Twitter – which went on a Russian account-killing spree following pressure from congressional Democrats during the Mueller investigation – doesn’t see it that way.

    Yet in March, an extensive investigation by ProPublica  found that China has built a massive Twitter propaganda network and is using it to influence the coronavirus narrative.

    Since August 2019, ProPublica has tracked more than 10,000 suspected fake Twitter accounts involved in a coordinated influence campaign with ties to the Chinese government. Among those are the hacked accounts of users from around the world that now post propaganda and disinformation about the coronavirus outbreak, the Hong Kong protests and other topics of state interest.

    Our examination of an interlocking group of accounts within our data linked the effort to OneSight (Beijing) Technology Ltd., a Beijing-based internet marketing company. OneSight, records show, held a contract to boost the Twitter following of China News Service, the country’s second-largest state-owned news agency.

    Others accounts we found have taken a darker turn in response to the pandemic, using it as a vehicle for disinformation and attacks on Beijing’s usual political opponents.

    We will completely wipe out the belligerent rioters, just like the coronavirus!” declared a user who called herself Melinda Butler. Her post slammed Joshua Wong, a leader of the Hong Kong protests who spoke out in support of a medical workers’ strike in early February. Another post by Butler called on the Hong Kong Hospital Authority to “clean out” the striking “black medical workers,” alongside a graphic accusing protestors of wanting a “color revolution” in Hong Kong. –ProPublica

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    CCP-linked Twitter propaganda uncovered by ProPublica

    According to the report, “the GEC provided Twitter with a small sample of the overall dataset that included nearly 250,000 accounts,” adding that it “was not surprising that there are authentic accounts in any sample.”

    “Our overall analysis is based on a confluence of factors that drive our assessment, which we stand by.”

    The GEC’s latest assertions come as China has faced serious criticism over its handling of the outbreak which originated in country. The State Department has led an aggressive campaign aimed at calling out Beijing for a lack of transparency and pushing disinformation.

    Secretary of State Mike Pompeo has repeatedly accused China of withholding key information about the virus, particularly in its early stages, and has claimed without public evidence that it may have escaped from a lab in Wuhan.

    It is critical that like-minded countries and free societies call out Beijing’s use of disinformation and propaganda during this crisis to prevent these behaviors becoming the norm for Beijing,” Gabrielle told CNN. –CNN

    Of course, Twitter also ignored the GEC when they claimed in February that Russian accounts were spreading coronavirus disinformation.

    “We welcome the opportunity to collaborate with the government agencies and build on our joint efforts to address a shared threat. Twitter will continue its zero-tolerance approach to platform manipulation and any other attempts to undermine the integrity of our service,” said Twitter on Friday. “When we identify information operation campaigns that we can reliably attribute to state-backed activity — either domestic or foreign-led — we disclose them to the public.”

    According to the report, the GEC determined the accounts were linked to Chinese state-run propaganda due to their “characteristics, content and behavior,” noting that they examine whether the “accounts are being created during and doing most of their activity during Beijing business hours.”

    “We also assess that this is a coordinated and interconnected effort. Nearly every diplomatic account shares at least one follower with every other account, with some instances of diplomatic accounts sharing more than 1,000 followers,” added Gabrielle – who also said that “a significant portion of these ‘follower accounts’ are newly created – and align with China’s push to convince various global audiences of their global leadership.”

    “Additionally, these accounts are pushing pro-CCP (Chinese Communist Party) narratives – praising China’s fight against the virus, claims that China promptly reported the outbreak to WHO, and accusations the Western media of providing bad coverage of China.”

    Twitter fired back, saying that some of the accounts provided by the State Department actually criticized the CCP.

    Perhaps their accounts will be banned?


    Tyler Durden

    Fri, 05/08/2020 – 19:05

  • Suspicion And Skepticism Are Vaccines For Deception
    Suspicion And Skepticism Are Vaccines For Deception

    Authored by Doug “Uncola” Lynn via TheBurningPlatform.com,

    “Those who can make you believe absurdities, can make you commit atrocities.

    – Voltaire

    I once read a definition of psychological depression as a result of anger and fatigue. That seems about right. Personally, I’m sick of COVID-19 dominating the headlines and I definitely have inner rage at the magic spell that’s been cast over society.  And it is a magic spell.  Or an ill wind, if you prefer.  Except tracking the source of a voodoo curse, or determining where a breeze began, might be easier than identifying the many variables of this planned-demic . Truly, the overwhelming information is difficult to process on any given day.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Last week, I read an article describing how COVID-19 is a hoax propagandized by the media and, a few minutes later, I watched a video of a survival expert (whom I very much respect) chastise those who are not taking COVID-19 seriously as a genuine health threat.

    Then, I was informed of an acquaintance dying from coronavirus. I knew the man personally and the last time we spoke he was telling me about his new girlfriend. His death was deemed notable enough to have a write-up included into the COVID-19 series of a national newspaper; and that’s how I learned he died – when someone sent me the link. I’ll also say he was in his seventies and his blood pressure was so high his eyes were constantly bloodshot.

    So did he die with COVID-19 or from COVID-19?  Yes, he did.

    Indeed, lots of variables to consider.  And it’s tricky because health policies are a matter of public concern AND private responsibility.  It’s why considering the variables requires balance and common sense.  Yet, unsurprisingly, it’s become obvious COVID-19 has been politicized by some and even commandeered by others for purposes of power consolidation and achieving authoritarian goals.

    Certainly, the virus doesn’t need to be devastatingly lethal in order to accomplish the objectives of the globalists. At any given time, the ship of state progresses via (what I have designated as) the “Bulbous Bow of Confusion”, or, rather, competing narratives.

    Two physicians who own five urgent care locations in Kern County California recently posted a viral YouTube video citing their own COVID-19 data and calling for an end to the draconian lockdowns.  Their names are Dr. Dan Erickson and Dr. Artin Massihi and the data they compiled acted as a “resistance wave” to countermand the official narrative put forth by (as I’ve identified in past articles) the likes of the Centers for Disease Control (CDC), World Health Organization (WHO), The Gates Foundation, John Hopkins University, and UK’s The Guardian.

    Yet, today, if you click on any previous articles where the doctors’ viral videos were once posted you will see they’ve been taken down; and even their other videos queued in the threads of the articles have been transitioned into dead links by our benefactors at YouTube.

    Truly, censorship is the validation of ideas as the most powerful force on earth; because if you now search for the two doctors by name on YouTube, you will find a video stamped with the Washington Post logo describing “What Dan Erickson and Artin Massihi get wrong about coronavirus”.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Meanwhile, The Guardian, whose entire Global Development section is underwritten by the Gates Foundation, describes how scientists have found more evidence that Coronavirus can travel on air pollution particles.

    Scary, huh?

    Especially, when considering how another Gates Foundation subsidiary, the World Health Organization (WHO), has warned the worst of the virus is still ahead and that “people will need to get used to a new way of living”.

    To be sure, the billionaires are committed. They can’t go back now and this is why they are on full offense in the narrative war. It means no expense will be spared in the media onslaught until every person in the world fears COVID-19 being spread from cats and farts. It’s also why various treatments are claimed to be ineffectiveand only the five innovations proposed by the New American King should be considered:

     [Bill Gates] said the innovations needed to come in five areas: treatments, vaccines, testing, contact tracing, and policies for reopening the economy.

     But what about Trump?  He is still the U.S. President, right?

    In past postings, I’ve exhaustively considered Trump as a possible “movie” or “reality TV show”.  My article entitled “Personal Politics, Public Impeachment, Persuasion and Post-Apocalyptic Planning” also discussed how the Military Industrial Complex has NOT grown weaker in the decades since Eisenhower and Kennedy – and, in fact, cited the trend of its growing strength from Abe Lincoln through the creation of the Federal Reserve, and Woodrow Wilson, onward.

    I’ve additionally speculated in previous writings President Trump as one of the following:

    1.) The Real Deal – fighting the Dark Lords out of love of country

    2.) Being used by the Dark Powers unwittingly

    3.) A Judas Goat

    At this point in time, it appears the possibility of # 1 is fading, if not having been completely debunked as of this writing.

    So, given #’s 2 & 3 above, I’ve previously questioned if Trump was elected as a “bleeding of the brake lines” prior to the “big stop” (i.e. end of America).

    Therefore, what if the Trump Reality TV Show® was meant to demonstrate the sheer power of “The Controllers” and their ability to convert the globe into One World under Communism?  And, furthermore, what if the 2016 Presidential Election was staged to illustrate to all nations the futility of resistance?

    Consider the waves that have crashed upon Trump’s shores over the past four years: Russiagate/Mueller, Ukrainian Impeachment, and, now, COVID-19. Each of these consecutive waves were increasingly consequential from a historical perspective.

    Is the war to “drain-the-swamp” real? Because, if not, the battle lines have been made clear and the tech gods have cataloged our IP addresses.

    Which brings us back to Bill Gates:  His digital fingerprints are all over the COVID-19 virus because, in the years prior, Gates worked to strategically monopolize global health including researchgovernance, and reporting.   In addition, his dirty hands have reached into online data, U.S. intelligence, mainstream media, the GAVI Vaccine Alliance, and Microsoft’s ID2020 digital ID initiative.  Plus, the Gates Foundation has donated the most private money to the World Health Organization (WHO), subsidized the October 2019 “Event 201” pandemic exercise, and even sponsored an event that was labeled communist propaganda – the globally televised “Together at Home” elitist infomercial;

    Since the United States recently suspended its payments to the WHO, the organization’s biggest contributor is now the Bill and Melinda Gates Foundation. Another major contributor to the WHO is the GAVI Alliance (formerly the Global Alliance for Vaccines and Immunisation). Both of these organizations are also part of ID2020, an organization that is advocating for the use of vaccines to implement a global digital ID system using tattoos or microchips.

    And just as the company Gates founded (Microsoft) recently released, and then recalled, a “luciferian” advertisement  starring “spirit-cooking” priestess Marina Abramović…, the Gates’ World Health Organization (WHO) mandates have allowed “heroes” to arrest mothers on playgrounds in front of their children.

    Honestly, it really does add an entirely fresh perspective on the words of Isaiah 5:20:

    “Woe to those who call evil good, and good evil; Who put darkness for light, and light for darkness; Who put bitter for sweet, and sweet for bitter!”

    Now, paradoxically, a new bioluminescent vaccine is making headlines.  If you can believe this… it’s called… “Luciferase” and it can store vaccination history through a new dye made available with MIT research funded by the Bill and Melinda Gates Foundation.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Wow, that was fast, huh?

    Or was it planned? And for those who would say it was planned, would you call them “conspiracy theorists”?  But, seriously, is it really conspiracy if it’s all been published?

    Because, over the decades, it has become quite evident that wealthy individuals, influential families, and powerful organizations and corporations have coopted nation-states in order to unite the globe.  World War I delivered the League of Nations and World War II brought about the United Nations.  Since then, the billionaire round-table groups have only grown more interconnected as Davos Men planned and the Bilderberg’s conspired.

    The modern era has progressed by committee; and to the giant sucking sounds as predicted by former presidential candidate Ross Perot.

    In 2010, the Rockefeller Foundation and the Global Business Network drafted a document entitled “Scenarios for the Future of Technology and International Development which outlined the following potential plans schemes through 2030:  “Lock Step”, “Clever Together”, “Hack Attack”, and “Smart Scramble”.

    The first link below is a 54-page (2.29 MB sized) PDF file. Even if the Bill Gates’ inspired MS Windows gives you a virus warning, just know the file can be viewed (or downloaded) with no issues.  Or, if you would rather watch a one-hour, forty-two-minute video presentation, just click on link # 2 below:

    1.)   PDF FILE:  Scenarios for the Future of Technology and International Development

    2.) VIDEO (1:42:34):  COVID – LOCKDOWN – GLOBAL BANKRUPTCY – the PLAN

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Note that on page 18 of the PDF (#1 above), the “Lock Step” scenario describes a 2012 pandemic leading to a global economic collapse followed by oppressive authoritarian controls:

    In 2012, the pandemic that the world had been anticipating for years finally hit. Unlike 2009’s H1N1, this new influenza strain — originating from wild geese — was extremely virulent and deadly. Even the most pandemic-prepared nations were quickly overwhelmed when the virus streaked around the world… The pandemic also had a deadly effect on economies: international mobility of both people and goods screeched to a halt, debilitating industries like tourism and breaking global supply chains. Even locally, normally bustling shops and office buildings sat empty for months, devoid of both employees and customers.

    …. The United States’ initial policy of “strongly discouraging” citizens from flying proved deadly in its leniency, accelerating the spread of the virus not just within the U.S. but across borders. However, a few countries did fare better — China in particular. The Chinese government’s quick imposition and enforcement of mandatory quarantine for all citizens, as well as its instant and near-hermetic sealing off of all borders, saved millions of lives, stopping the spread of the virus far earlier than in other countries and enabling a swifter post-pandemic recovery.

    China’s government was not the only one that took extreme measures to protect its citizens from risk and exposure. During the pandemic, national leaders around the world flexed their authority and imposed airtight rules and restrictions, from the mandatory wearing of face masks to body-temperature checks at the entries to communal spaces like train stations and supermarkets. Even after the pandemic faded, this more authoritarian control and oversight of citizens and their activities stuck and even intensified. In order to protect themselves from the spread of increasingly global problems — from pandemics and transnational terrorism to environmental crises and rising poverty — leaders around the world took a firmer grip on power.

    At first, the notion of a more controlled world gained wide acceptance and approval. Citizens willingly gave up some of their sovereignty — and their privacy — to more paternalistic states in exchange for greater safety and stability. Citizens were more tolerant, and even eager, for top-down direction and oversight, and national leaders had more latitude to impose order in the ways they saw fit. In developed countries, this heightened oversight took many forms: biometric IDs for all citizens, for example, and tighter regulation of key industries whose stability was deemed vital to national interests.

    Sound familiar?  Because this was the dialectic with which we were presented:  “Herd Immunity®” (an Orwellian term befitting cattle) or “Continuous” COVID-19®.  And what did American’s chose?  They picked “continuous“, Alex, for $1,200 per U.S. citizen.  And as we Flattened the Curve®, the CDC broadcasted concerns regarding second waves of coronaviruses as telescreens the world over warned of mutant strains of coronaviruses more contagious than the original.

    Yes. Both Coronavirus®, and Big Brother, Incorporated have marched forward unencumbered.

    But as people sheltered in their homes they saw “conservative” Never-Trumpers weaponize the ghost of Ronald Reagan against the Bad Orange Man® with a video entitled “Mourning in America” .  It was too cute by half.   Then, fortunately, as the world remained mystified by “covid toes”, the president tweeted back at the Never-Trump “losers” in the most ingenious and gratifying ways.

    And Trump is just getting warmed up.  No doubt his Zoom® debates with Biden are bound to be hilarious.  Unless Whistleblowergate Part Deux is the silver-bullet that will stop the Bad Orange Man® once and for all?

    (CNN) Dr. Rick Bright, the ousted director of the office involved in developing a coronavirus vaccine, formally filed an extensive whistleblower complaint Tuesday alleging his early warnings about the coronavirus were ignored and that his caution at a treatment favored by President Donald Trump led to his removal.

    For the Democrats, the future looks “Bright”, no?

    In my previous article entitled “On Used Cars, Haircuts, and Buyers Beware”, I referenced “Hegelian Polemics” and therein linked an article entitled “Hegelian Dialectic: A Tool To Enslave Humanity”.

    What I found interesting in that article is how it identified “opposing sides” (i.e. opposites) as “capstones” on the bottom of the “pyramid” – with the top capstone (eye) as representative of the final action:

    The chess board is a well-known Masonic or Hegelian symbol, the black and white squares symbolize control through duality in the grand game of life in all aspects. Left or right, white or black people, conservative or liberal, democrat or republican, Christian or Muslim and so on. Through two opposing parties control is gained as both parties reach the same destination, which is order through guided conflict or chaos.

    Left (thesis) versus right (antithesis) equals middle ground or control (synthesis). The triangle and all seeing eye we see so often symbolizes the completion of the great work…

    The pyramid is supported by the bottom opposing sides. The capstone at the top is established through controlled solution or middle ground.

    In my piece entitled “On Channel Surfing, Circus Acts, and Time Passages”, I discussed the 1927 movie “Metropolis” as a favorite of the occult. The words that appear on the screen at the end of that film are these:

    THE MEDIATOR BETWEEN THE HEAD AND HANDS MUST BE THE HEART!

    2010 article posted on TheVigilantCitizen.com speculated on the “mediator” as the electronic media which manipulates the plebes (workers) on behalf of the head (controllers).

    To be sure, the Modern Centralizers craft their new realities by means of the Orwellian Media. It’s why they call it programming. And what better way to manipulate the emotions (hearts) of people than by fiction and fear?

    With that in mind, I now call your attention to the below video link of the opening ceremonies for the 2012 Olympics:

    The Complete London 2012 Opening Ceremony | London 2012 Olympic Games

    If one cares to click that link and view the segment shown between the 45 and 55 minute marks, they will see what appears to be a staged viral pandemic.  The drama takes place beneath black pyramids malevolently towering over the stadium (and the crowd) and ends with the appearance of a giant, creepy-looking baby; or maybe a still-birth – it’s hard to tell.

    At the 45 to 47 minute mark, we see kids in hospital beds surrounded by dancing nurses and doctors.  At around the 47:30 mark, the medical staff/dancers put the kids to bed and with fingers over their months, urging silence.  What appears to be a giant virus then appears center-stage at the around the 48 minute mark.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Then, around the 49 minute mark, Harry Potter author J.K. Rowling reads from Peter Pan and says:  “But in the two minutes before you go to sleep, it is real”.  Next, shadowy virus-looking demons take the stage to chase the children, and dark horses towing a magician and a steel cage glide behind an oriental woman who is looking elsewhere as the pandemic commences.

    The 49:50 mark shows what appears to be a giant (British Prime Minister) Boris Johnson sick in bed.

    Finally, as the dark magicians cast their spells and the viruses dance, the nurses and doctors appear paralyzed and robotic – like puppets (50:45 to 51:45 mark) before Mary Poppins figures descend from the sky.

    In my research, I found another article by the Vigilant Citizen dated August 17, 2012, and it had this to say back then regarding the opening ceremonies of the 2012 Olympics:

    The next important sequence of the ceremony paid tribute to the National Health Service (NHS) and Great Ormond Street Hospital (GOSH). The set combined sick kids on hospital beds with characters from English children’s literature and had a very strange and dark undertone from the start, when it began with the theme from The Exorcist, which is, in case you don’t know, a movie about a child possessed by the Devil. Odd choice.

    The sequence begins with children on hospital beds who get put to sleep by nurses. Then J.K. Rowling appears and reads a quote from Peter Pan alluding to Neverland, which becomes real in the “two minutes before you go to sleep”. I couldn’t say if that was done on purpose, but many elements of this set, mostly the mix of vulnerable children in a hospital with fairy tales and the concept of blurring the lines between reality and fiction, are all associated with mind control programming. Like the Wizard of Oz and Alice of Wonderland, the story of Peter Pan is heavily used in mind control programming as victims are told to escape to “Neverland” while inducing dissociation from reality.

    The same article also addressed the 2012 Olympic closing ceremonie(video at this link) and showing a new world order rising like a phoenix; while referencing The Who, no less.

    At midnight, the Olympic cauldron and the petals representing each country are slowly extinguished, but the phoenix, representing the occult elite and the New World Order, stays lit above it. In other words, as the nations of the world slowly disappear, a New World Order will emerge. On that note, let’s listen to The Who!

    Of course, listen to The Who rock band? Or the World Health Organization (WHO)? Coincidence or conspiracy? You’re probably right.

    So, to summarize:  2012 was the same year the Rockefeller Foundation predicted the “Lock Step” pandemic  scenario as the Olympic ceremonies that year showed opposing sides battling over children during the opening ceremonies and followed by the resolution in the closing ceremonies: A new phoenix rising from the ashes – like a new world order.

    Order out of chaos.

    Therefore, if COVID-19 was, indeed, a PLANdemic perpetrated by dark forces, was my aforementioned friend murdered by those who now want us to self-quarantine and wear masks for the safety of those being murdered?  Most likely; because observing luciferian pedophiles through their symbols is like identifying hidden planets via the observed effects of gravitation, or studying game theory when the game is rigged.

    It’s how we can identify who “they” are, but only for people willing to first acknowledge that “they” exist.  Unfortunately, it’s a wasted effort on most. One might as well don a tinfoil hat and chase shadows on a magic pony.

    Therefore, perhaps it’s easier to digest the words of physician and former Presidential Candidate Ron Paul when it comes to explaining Coronavirus tyranny, forced vaccinations and ‘Digital Certificates’:

    Proponents of mandatory vaccines and enhanced surveillance are trying to blackmail the American people by arguing that the lockdown cannot end unless we create a healthcare surveillance state and make vaccination mandatory. The growing number of Americans who are tired of not being able to go to work, school, or church, or even to take their children to a park because of government mandates should reject this “deal.” Instead, they should demand an immediate end to the lockdowns and the restoration of individual responsibility for deciding how best to protect their health.

    Regrettably, it was supposed to be a season of graduation parties, weddings, and Fourth of July celebrations. But these have been displaced by lockdowns, social distancing, bodies in refrigerated trucks, fear, magic spells, and propaganda.

    Fox News Host Tucker Carlson has even recently bemoaned the New America’s resemblance to communist China:

    Big companies partnering with the government to spy on you without your knowledge. Americans locked in their homes, banned from going to church, placated with sedatives like beer and weed. Anyone who speaks up is silenced. Political demonstrations are illegal. Organizers are arrested. Only opinions approved by unelected leaders are allowed on information platforms. Sound familiar? It sounds a lot like China. Of all the many ironies of this moment, so many of them bitter, the hardest to swallow is this: as we fight this virus, we are becoming far more like the country that spawned it. We’re becoming more like China. It’s horrifying.

    …Those in power are the ones the our professional class seeks to protect, not the country. Freedom of conscience never endangers the public. It only threatens the powerful. It endangers their control. It hinders their ability to dictate election results, to loot the economy, to make policies based on whim for their own gain. No wonder our leaders have done such a poor job protecting us from China. They’re on the same team.

    – Tucker Carlson Tonight:  Tuesday,  April 28, 2020

    Sadly, it appears Trump may be a crisis actor, like Anthony Fauci, and part of the plan from the start. The final details were solidified years ago – including the bioengineered PLANdemic.

    China is quite likely part of the plan, too, since One World Under Communism has become the desired destination of the billionaires; with millions dying along the way.  For those who do survive, they’ll be allowed to workconsume, and obey.  Of course, many Americans will not cooperate with their planned demise and this is why The Central Planners will need a great big war.

    Both President Trump and his Secretary of State, Mike Pompeo, are tying Coronavirus to the “government laboratory in Wuhan”  and now the Chinese are warning of possible armed conflict with the U.S. over the COVID-19 backlash­.

    Most recently, in an Oval Office Press conference on May 6, 2020, Trump actually blamed China for Coronavirus while claiming it is the “worst attack we’ve ever had”:

    “This is worse than Pearl Harbor, this is worse than the World Trade Center. There’s never been an attack like this.

    – President Donald Trump – May 6, 2020

    It means events could potentially occur as follows:  As soon as rock-solid proof is revealed that China released the virus to take out Trump because our great president was winning the trade wars, then, the Orange-Haired Wonder will rally national support via sorrowful lamentations while standing tall on reality TV amidst the economic ruins.

    A bumbling first strike by the U.S. could allow a Sino-Russian alliance to seal America’s fate once and for all; and most likely by nuclear means.

    Then any surviving sheeple will eagerly line up for the Bill Gates of Hell special: A free digital tattoo along with a bonus vaccination and bowl of soup.

    Welcome to the end of the rainbow. Orwell was right: we’ve always been at war with Eastasia and jackboots will stomp on human faces forever.  Unless, that is, the digital drip-drops from Q-anon and our online commentaries change the future.

    Conclusion

    Those gathering at the round tables have been tremendously successful in our societal programming. Yet most of them are mere puppets to the inner rings of concentric power.  The monsters that once lurked under our beds were set loose years ago and, today, they dress in drag and read to kids in libraries while others wear blue uniforms and arrest mothers for taking kids to playgrounds.

    And where are the men of action?  Where are the lovers of liberty?  In my area, they’ve been fishing. And grilling. And why not? Trump is in the White House while Nancy Pelosi is locked in her gourmet kitchen eating fancy ice cream. The stimulus checks are in the bank, the grocery stores are still open, and if the fish aren’t biting, those who would stand up to tyranny can always grab a bucket of chicken through the KFC drive-thru on the way home. At least for now.

    As far as national lockdowns go, this has been the best one ever. So far.

    For obvious reasons, I’ve been thinking of the autistic livestock guru Temple Grandin and how she pioneered more humane methods of leading animals to slaughter. One of the methods was to have cattle march to their demise single file via tall shutes.  That sort of isolation seems reminiscent of what’s occurring in America now – with people staring at walls, muzzled by masks, and numbly following orders while remaining six-feet apart.

    How can people resist when they’ve been fooled? How can they fight back when they’re frightened? And why have they placed their hope in safety instead of liberty?

    Good questions.

    Real hope remains in the smart choices, right actions, and the prepping and survival decisions made every day by those awake and aware. But no matter what the future holds, may all reading this be surrounded by friends and loved ones who know Epstein didn’t kill himself.


    Tyler Durden

    Fri, 05/08/2020 – 18:45

  • Global Coronavirus Cases Top 4 Million, Deaths Top 275k: Live Updates
    Global Coronavirus Cases Top 4 Million, Deaths Top 275k: Live Updates

    Summary:

    • Global coronavirus cases top 4 mil, deaths top 275k
    • Russia reports another 10,699 cases as total doubles in a week
    • Fewer stroke patients coming to US hospitals
    • UK reports 626 new deaths
    • Google says employees won’t return to office until 2021
    • NY reports 216 more deaths
    • Italy passes 30k COVID-19 deaths
    • Spanish gov’t rejects Madrid’s request to reopen
    • Larry Kudlow says 3/4ths of job losses will be ‘temporary’
    • NYC announces ‘test and trace corps’
    • Architect of Sweden’s lockdown response defends strategy
    • Editor of Global Times says China needs more nukes
    • Global COVID-19 cases near 4mil, deaths near 2,75k
    • UK warns don’t expect reopening to start next week
    • South Korea warns of new ‘super spreader’
    • Australia PM says next phase of reopening begins today, releases 3-step plan

    *            *            *

    Update (1803ET): At least one closely-followed tally of coronavirus cases and deaths has topped both 4 million cases and 275,000 deaths worldwide. The updated figures were reported by worldometers just minutes ago.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Here’s a chart…

    …and another.

    *            *            *

    Update (1620ET): The Times of London is reporting that the UK is cranking up its travel restrictions as Boris Johnson prepares to release his plans for reopening the economy.

    • UK TO ASK ALL ARRIVALS TO SELF ISOLATE FOR 14 DAYS: TIMES

    NY has released the rest of its numbers for Friday, reporting 2,938 new cases, bringing the statewide total to 330,407, and 21,045 deaths.

    In other news, fewer stroke patients are visiting US hospitals, an ominous sign reported in the New England Journal of Medicine on Friday as a letter to the editor.The number of patients in the US undergoing imaging for stroke evaluation has decreased by 39% since before the pandemic, the letter claims, according to CNN.

    “These are stroke patients who need to be treated,” said Dr. Greg Albers, director of the Stanford Stroke Center and professor of neurology at Stanford University, who was an author of the letter.

    Phase one of North Carolina’s reopening efforts will start at 5 p.m. today, Gov. Roy Cooper said.

    Furthermore, everyone who de-planed Air Force 2 on Friday has tested negative for the coronavirus.

    Russia reported another 10,699 new cases of coronavirus and 98 new deaths on Friday, for a total of 187,859 cases and 1,723 deaths, with cases doubling in a week once again.

    *            *            *

    Update (1425ET): California’s numbers are in. Some businesses have started to reopen for the first time on Friday.

    • CALIFORNIA REPORTS 1,898 NEW CORONAVIRUS CASES, A 3.1% INCREASE

    Gov Newsom is speaking at 1500ET (Noon PT):

    *            *            *

    Update (1400ET): The UK has just confirmed the 626 deaths we reported earlier during the PM’s briefing, along with 4,649 new positive cases.

    Here’s more on the UK numbers.

    Singapore reports 768 new cases, almost all of which (758) involve migrant workers or other foreigners.

    *            *            *

    Update (1255ET): Just minutes ago, Dr. Deborah Birx of the (now semi-permanent) White House coronavirus task force said that she would personally oversee the delivery of Gilead’s remdesivir after reported “dysfunction” resulted in batches of the drug being sent to the wrong places.

    The drug is currently the subject of an internationally coordinated trial regime to try and determine if it’s substantially effective at treating COVID-19. Data so far have been optimistic but still mixed.

    Notably, this afternoon’s announcement – made minutes ago – by the Eurogroup is an important development that signals the death of the ‘coronabonds’ idea, but still offers something to Europe’s worst hit nations.

    With Europe generally a step ahead (with the exception of hotspots like Madrid) of the US in terms of the timeline for reopening, Bank of America has published a comprehensive ‘reopening calendar’ which includes all of the important dates, as they stand right now.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    *            *            *

    Update (1150ET): Italy on Friday became just the third country to pass 30k coronavirus deaths (after the US and the UK) after reporting 243 fatalities Friday (data are reported with a 24-hour delay), bringing the country’s death toll to 30,291. Newly confirmed cases fell slightly to 1,327, down from 1,401 on Thursday, taking the total # of confirmed cases since the epidemic began to 217,185, the third-highest tally behind the US and Spain.

    The number of patients currently carrying the virus in Italy fell to 87,961 from 89,624 the day before, while the long-running trend of falling hospitalizations and patients moved to the ICU continued, with just 1,168 people moved to the ICU on Friday, compared with the 1,311 added on Thursday.

    A Eurogroup press conference is expected to get underway in an hour as finance ministers from around the bloc update the world on the latest breakthrough. France’s finance minister told reporters that the group has decided on a €240 billion Treasury line to finance relief efforts in the worst-hit countries (including Italy).

    Cuomo’s latest press briefing is about to start at 12pmET>

    New York coronavirus total deaths fall to 216 versus 231 yesterday, up 1.1% DoD, vs. yesterday’s rise of 1.2%. 45 of those deaths involved nursing home patients.

    • Hospitalizations: 8,196 for a change of -469 (was 8665 yesterday)
    • Intubations:  -130 on the day, versus -108 yesterday 
    • Total deaths: 216 versus 231 yesterday and 232 the day before
    • (three-day rolling average of new hospitalizations hits 604, versus 607 yesterday)

    Additionally, Florida reported 39,199, up 1%, while deaths climbed 4.3% to 1,669.

    In the UK, the PM announced at the beginning of his briefing that 626 new deaths were recorded on Friday. That’s actually down from 739 last Friday, and 1,005 two Fridays ago. The death toll in the UK climbed to 31,241. It retains the highest mortality rate in Europe.

    Additionally, Google will reportedly tell employees that it doesn’t expect them to return to the office until 2021.

    *            *            *

    Update (1115ET): After repeatedly delaying its plans for lifting its nationwide lockdown, one of the most stringent in Europe, Spain’s socialist government has rejected Madrid’s request to move on with the next phase of the reopening plan, which would have allowed more shops and businesses to reopen, El Pais reports.

    Officials told El Pais earlier that “it is obvious” Madrid, the national epicenter of Spain’s outbreak, is not ready to scale back its lockdown measures any further, in line with other hard-hit regions such as Catalonia and Castilla y León. Official figures show 70,000 confirmed coronavirus cases in Madrid and more than 15,000 deaths, compared with the national tally of 221,447 infections and 26,070 deaths.

    Figures from the Spanish Health Ministry released on Friday showed 229 coronavirus deaths over the last day, up slightly from the 213 reported yesterday.

    Meanwhile, in the US, Pennsylvania, California and a handful of other states are beginning the process of reopening on Friday. Spain began the process late last month when it allowed children to leave the house (though they had to be accompanied by an adult).

    *            *            *

    Update (1035ET): During this morning’s press briefing, de Blasio was confronted about the vast discrepancy in ‘social distancing violation’ summonses, which featured far more black and Latino suspects than white people.

    In other news, during an interview with Fox Friday morning, Larry Kudlow said White House data suggest 3/4ths of the 20.5 million jobs destroyed by the coronavirus will be ‘temporary’.

    • KUDLOW SAYS EXPECTS THREE-QUARTERS OF JOB LOSSES IN APRIL TO BE TEMPORARY -FOX NEWS

    *            *            *

    Update (1000ET): NYC Mayor Bill de Blasio announced Friday he would be launching a “test and trace corps” to assist with the coronavirus containment efforts as New York State prepares to begin the process of reopening its economy.

    Interestingly, the NYT slammed the mayor over the decision, saying he stripped control of virus tracing from NYC’s health department.

    New York City will soon assemble an army of more than 1,000 disease detectives to trace the contacts of every person who tests positive for the coronavirus, an approach seen as crucial to quelling the outbreak and paving the way to reopen the hobbled city.

    But that effort will not be led by the city’s renowned Health Department, which for decades has conducted contact tracing for diseases such as tuberculosis, H.I.V. and Ebola, city officials said on Thursday.

    Instead, in a sharp departure from current and past practice, the city is going to put the vast new public health apparatus in the hands of its public hospital system, Health and Hospitals, city officials acknowledged after being approached by The New York Times about the changes.

    Sounds like a great plan, Bill.

    *            *            *

    Update (0940ET): Earlier this week, French authorities discovered what they believe might be Europe’s earliest-known COVID-19 patient, who was sickened by the virus in early December.

    Here’s more on that.

    *            *            *

    On an otherwise quiet Friday morning, President Trump has announced that he will be interviewed on Fox & Friends beginning at 8amET, setting the president up to react to one of the most important data releases of the past decade in real-time.

    Meanwhile, Hu Xijin, the editor of the Global Times, appeared to welcome news that the US and China would act to preserve the ‘Phase 1’ trade deal by suggesting that Beijing increase China’s supply of nuclear weapons to improve China’s ‘deterrent’ against the US.

    On what was a relatively quiet morning for virus news, the global case count moved closer to the 4mil mark (JHU reported 3,862,174 at 8amET), while the death toll neared 275k (269,881 at last count).

    The biggest news overnight was published in the FT, which interviewed Anders Tegnell, the architect of Sweden’s coronavirus response strategy (which famously avoided the lockdowns seen elsewhere), and the country’s top epidemiologist. Tegnell defended Sweden’s unique strategy, which some have blamed for the country’s slightly higher mortality rate. He estimated that 40% of people in Stockholm would be immune to the virus by the end of May, giving the country an advantage against a virus that “we’re going to have to live with for a very long time.” Though, to be sure, scientists are still unsure whether infection and the presence of COVID-19 antibodies will lead to lifelong immunity, and there have been many cases of patients being reinfected, or seeing their infections seemingly ‘reactivate’ after testing negative.

    Tegnell argued that Sweden would be much better prepared than the rest of the world fot he “second wave” of the virus that’s expected this fall, arguing that the number of cases and casualties will be “much smaller” in Sweden thanks to the widespread presence of antibodies in the public (of course, we’re not even sure whether long-term ‘herd immunity’ is even possible, as Tegnell pointed out).

    “In the autumn there will be a second wave. Sweden will have a high level of immunity and the number of cases will probably be quite low,” Tegnell told the FT. “But Finland will have a very low level of immunity. Will Finland have to go into a complete lockdown again?”

    Some believe Sweden and Tegnell, which are under the global spotlight as their response to the pandemic has made Sweden a global outlier, have already won the debate on what the ideal coronavirus response would look like.

    Primary and secondary schools, restaurants, cafés and shops are mostly open and operating as normal in Sweden, with health authorities relying on voluntary social distancing and people opting to work from home. Schools for over-16s and universities are closed and gatherings of more than 50 people are banned, but it is still the most relaxed approach of any EU country. However, as Goldman analysts recently explained, there are several idiosyncratic qualities about Sweden and the Swedish people that could make the country’s strategy difficult to replicate across the EU and the US.

    To be sure, Sweden’s virus-linked death toll reached 3,040 on Thursday, significantly higher than Denmark, Norway and Finland, which confirmed fewer than 1,000 deaths between all three countries.

    In the UK, as HMG prepares the British public for the unveiling, expected Sunday, of Johnson’s exit strategy, Oliver Dowden, UK culture secretary, has warned the public not to expect “big changes” to certain social distancing measures, including most of the restrictions on movement, to come into effect next week. As we’ve noted in recent days, many European countries are beginning the process of reopening, with several – including Belgium and Denmark – on track to make big strides before the end of the month.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    According to another leak about the government plan published, this one published by the Telegraph, Johnson could ease aspects of the lockdown every two weeks, according to plans currently being discussed by ministers.  Other reports suggest that Britain will remain in lockdown until next month at the earliest.

    Yesterday, South Korean government officials warned about a 29-year-old who was diagnosed with the virus after partying in one of Seoul’s glitzy nightlife districts. On Friday, officials confirmed 13 more cases associated with the ‘clubber’ – technically qualifying them as a ‘super-spreader’ – though the situation appears to be well in hand. The partyer now appears to have infected 14 other people.

    As Australia and New Zealand move ahead with reopening their economies, Aussie PM Scott Morrison announced Friday that his cabinet had agreed with the leaders of Australia’s state governments on a 3-step plan to make Australia safe from COVID-19 by July while saving 850k jobs. Under the plan, retail outlets small cafes and restaurants would reopen. Gatherings of up to 10 people would be allowed. In step 2, gatherings of up to 20 would be allowed, while step 3 would allow gatherings of up to 100 people.


    Tyler Durden

    Fri, 05/08/2020 – 18:07

Digest powered by RSS Digest

Today’s News 8th May 2020

  • COVID-19 Wreaks Economic Havoc Across Europe
    COVID-19 Wreaks Economic Havoc Across Europe

    The European Commission has released its Spring 2020 Economic Forecast which shows that COVID-19 is wreaking havoc on Europe’s economy.

    The collective GDP of the EU-27 was expected to grow 1.2 percent this year but it is now forecast contract 7.4 percent due to the pandemic. By contrast, Statista’s Niall McCarthy notes that the Financial Crisis “only” led to a contraction of 4.5 percent for the EU-28 back in 2009.

    The current crisis has now pushed the EU into the deepest recession since its foundation with unemployment rates set to rise drastically. Last year, unemployment across the bloc was 6.7 percent and it is now forecast to grow to 9 percent this year.

    Infographic: COVID-19 Wreaks Economic Havoc Across Europe | Statista

    You will find more infographics at Statista

    The data shows that no EU member state is going to emerge from the COVID-19 crisis unscathed with countries in southern Europe set to be worst impacted. Even though Greece has made progress since the Financial Crisis and has earned plaudits for limiting the spread of the coronavirus, it is expected to suffer the worst decline in GDP our of all EU member states at 9.7 percent. Italy and Spain who have both been badly impacted by the pandemic are also expected to suffer GDP contractions greater than 9 percent this year.

    Even though Germany has suffered a far lower death toll than many of its neighbors and is slowly easing its lockdown, Europe’s economic powerhouse is still predicted to see its GDP shrink by 6.5 percent this year. While the situation remains serious in some parts of Europe, particularly the UK, there is light at the end of the tunnel.

    After 7 weeks of strict confinement, Italians finally emerged from their homes at the start of the week while Germany’s schools and restaurants are set to open over the next couple of days. Even though the situation is improving, most EU leaders are remaining cautious due to the possibility of a second wave of infections. The European Commission has stated that fundamental uncertainty surrounds the forecast and that the danger of a deeper and more protracted recession is very real.


    Tyler Durden

    Fri, 05/08/2020 – 02:35

  • "Moral Vacuum" Exposed – European Leaders Cower In The Face Of China
    “Moral Vacuum” Exposed – European Leaders Cower In The Face Of China

    Authored by Soeren Kern via The Gatestone Institute,

    Australia and the United States are leading a campaign for an independent inquiry into the origins of the coronavirus pandemic. Senior officials in both countries are seeking to determine if the virus originated in nature or in a Chinese laboratory. They are also calling on the Chinese government to account for its handling of the initial outbreak in the city of Wuhan.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    In Europe, where the pandemic has killed more than 100,000 people and caused economic devastation on a scale not seen since the Second World War, political leaders have been deafeningly silent on demanding accountability from China. While a handful of European officials have agreed in principle that there should be an investigation at some undetermined point in the future, most appear afraid to challenge China directly.

    The equivocation of European leaders is a reflection not only of Europe’s geopolitical weakness and economic overdependence on China, but also of a moral vacuum in which they refuse to stand up for Western values.

    A few days after European officials caved in to pressure from China and watered down an EU report on Chinese efforts to deflect blame for the coronavirus pandemic, the EU ambassador to China, Nicolas Chapuis, allowed the Chinese government to edit an op-ed article signed by him and the 27 Ambassadors of EU member states, to mark the 45th anniversary of diplomatic relations with China.

    The EU authorized the Chinese Ministry of Foreign Affairs to remove references to the origins and the spread of the coronavirus from the article, published in China Daily, an English-language daily newspaper owned by the Communist Party of China.

    An EU spokesperson said that the EU allowed China to revise the op-ed because Brussels “considered it important to communicate EU policy priorities, notably on climate change and sustainability…”

    Meanwhile, European Commission President Ursula von der Leyen backed calls for an investigation into the origin of the coronavirus, but she avoided mentioning China by name and was careful not to offer specifics, such as who should lead the probe or when it might be conducted.

    In a May 1 interview with the American broadcaster CNBC, von der Leyen used meaningless “diplomatese” apparently not to offend China:

    “You never know when the next virus is starting, so we all want for the next time, we have learned our lesson and we’ve established a system of early warning that really functions and the whole world has to contribute to that.”

    In Sweden, Health Minister Lena Hallengren was slightly more forceful. In a reply to parliament on April 29, she called on the European Union to probe the origin of the pandemic:

    “When the global situation of Covid-19 is under control, it is both reasonable and important that an international, independent investigation be conducted to gain knowledge about the origin and spread of the coronavirus.

    “It is also important that the entire international community’s handling of the Covid-19 pandemic, including the World Health Organisation, is investigated. Sweden is happy to raise this issue within the framework of EU cooperation.”

    In France, President Emmanuel Macron questioned China’s handling of the coronavirus outbreak. “Given the choices made and what China is today, which I respect, let’s not be so naive as to say it’s been much better at handling this,” Macron told the Financial Times on April 16. “We don’t know. There are clearly things that have happened that we don’t know about.” He stopped short of calling for an investigation.

    Meanwhile, the French government allowed the Chinese telecom company Huawei to supply parts for its 5G next-generational mobile network. The concession was made after China threatened to retaliate against European companies in the Chinese market.

    In Britain, which now has the highest coronavirus death toll in Europe, Prime Minister Boris Johnson has been strangely silent on China. He continues to resist pressure from parliament to reverse his controversial decision to allow Huawei to supply parts for the UK’s 5G mobile network.

    Foreign Secretary Dominic Raab vowed to ask “hard questions” and threatened the end of “business as usual” with Beijing. He has not, however, announced any punitive measures against China.

    Defense Secretary Ben Wallace, when asked by LBC radio if China should be held accountable, replied:

    “I think it does. But I think the time for the post-mortem on this is after we’ve all got it under control and have come through it and our economies are back to normal. Only by being open and transparent will we learn about it, and China needs to be open and transparent about what it learned, and its shortcomings, but also its successes.”

    Former Prime Minister Theresa May, in a May 6 op-ed published by The Timescalled for moral equivalence when dealing with the United States and China. “A world in which a few ‘strong men’ square up to each other and expect everyone else to choose between them would be a dangerous one,” she said, apparently referring to U.S. President Donald J. Trump and Chinese President Xi Jinping.

    Writing for The Spectator, Scottish political commentator Stephen Daisley lamented the government’s dithering approach to China. In an essay, “Our Toothless Response to China is Embarrassing,” he listed a series of measures the British government could take:

    No country with a skerrick of self-respect can allow this behavior to go unpunished. I have already suggested some punitive measures designed to wound the regime’s pride without harming the Chinese people: cancel the Huawei deal; pass a Magnitsky-style Act targeting senior CPC figures; champion the Uyghurs at every opportunity (e.g. rename the London street that houses the Chinese embassy after a Uyghur political prisoner); and recognize Taiwan as an independent nation. All I would add, upon reflection, is this: grant British citizenship to Hong Kongers born before 1 July 1997, their children and grandchildren. Even if just a fraction of Hong Kong’s residents took up the opportunity, every one would be a small humiliation for the dictatorship. Given the government’s softly-softly approach, we probably shouldn’t get our hopes up for anything beyond Huawei cancellation, and even that’s far from guaranteed. Even absent the ministerial gumption to impose sanctions on Beijing, there will have to be a strategic rethink of our relationship with the People’s Republic. If this is how it behaves in a US-led world order, it is unlikely to be any more benevolent as a rival (or replacement) superpower.

    “While abandoning global free trade and economic interdependence would prove a costly mistake, it would be just as foolish to remain in hock to a regime that, in the most generous reading of events, caused thousands of avoidable British deaths to save face. However, reshoring and rebuilding key manufacturing sectors is only a partial solution. We need to trade but our trading priorities are subject to political and security considerations. China is our second-largest trading partner while India is our sixth. It would be in the UK’s interests to reverse that ordering. Of course, to make a change like that you need a government with a bit of backbone and it’s not at all clear that we have one.”

    In Germany, Development Minister Gerd Müller said that the Chinese government “had to show complete openness in this world crisis, especially with regard to the origin of the virus.” The statement was the most forceful of any German cabinet member to date. Chancellor Angela Merkel distanced herself from the remark, saying that it had not been discussed in the cabinet:

    “I believe that the more transparent China is about the history of this virus, the better it is for all of us around the world who want to learn from it. But we didn’t have this specific discussion.”

    German commentator Constantin Eckner noted that the coronavirus has exposed Germany’s dependency on its trade relations with China, which Germany needs to overcome the current crisis:

    “For years now, Germany has been leaning on China for cheap supply and as a market for its exports. Following the 2008 financial crisis, when most of Europe was suffering, Germany kept itself rather unscathed thanks to a strong export-orientated economy and partly thanks to China. Germany was not concerned about any geo-economic advances Beijing was making. It cared little about the 16+1 forum with Central and Eastern European countries launched in 2012 or the Belt and Road Initiative unveiled in 2013, and the ‘Made in China 2025’ strategy intended to establish Chinese dominance in emerging technologies….

    “Publicly Berlin has positioned itself against Xi Jinping’s ‘mask diplomacy’ since the coronavirus outbreak in Europe, condemning attempts to exploit the crisis politically or economically. But behind closed doors, senior officials acknowledge that the domestic economy needs China just like it did in the aftermath of 2008, or possibly even more. Germany has the highest export ratio among the G20 — about 47 per cent of its GDP. A demand shock of global proportion puts a lot of manufacturers in a tough spot. As China is recovering from the pandemic faster than the rest of the world, Germany might end up tying itself closer to the economic giant than before the crisis….

    “These desperate times could make Merkel forge a new alliance with Xi, accepting that Germany cannot survive without the Chinese market and financial firepower, but also knowing that Beijing will not be shy to exploit such a dependency to further its geoeconomic goals. For its future prosperity, Germany may be forced to look east.”

    Europe’s most forceful action against China has been taken by the Netherlands, which recently renamed its de facto embassy in Taiwan. The Netherlands Trade and Investment Office is now called “Netherlands Office Taipei.” China responded by threatening to halt shipments of medical supplies, a threat that could ring hollow: the Netherlands recently recalled 600,000 substandard medical masks that had been imported from China.

    While Europeans cower in the face of Communist China, they have found time to issue threats against the only democracy in the Middle East. On April 30, eleven European ambassadors to Israel warned Jerusalem of “severe consequences” if it goes ahead with plans to annex parts of the West Bank.

    In a lengthy essay published by Die Welt, Mathias Döpfner, CEO of Axel Springer, Europe’s largest publishing company, argued that the time has come for Europe to choose between the United States and China:

    “Once a treatment for the virus has been found, the debates about shutdown and easing restrictions have passed, and the recession has reared its ugly head, nothing less than the world order itself must be clarified. Or to be more specific: the matter of alliance. Where does Europe stand? On the side of the US or China?…

    “America has clearly decided to pursue a policy of ‘decoupling’ from China. If Europe does not want to see its freedom subverted by Beijing, it must decide which of the two countries to ally with, and it must do so soon.

    “We are told time and again that it is not a case of either-or, that it’s about having the best of both worlds. The opposite is true. There is no need for finely crafted rhetoric here, we need to make a fundamental political decision. China or the US. It is no longer possible to go with both….

    “Europe has been avoiding the alliance question for a long time, but it is now time to make that decision. This does not directly have to do with the coronavirus crisis. And it certainly has nothing to do with the question of where the virus originated.

    “The crisis focuses the way we look at long-standing dependencies, even those in so-called vital supply chains, how we see fundamental differences in communication and crisis management, and our regard for what is ultimately a completely different concept of humanity….

    “Europe has failed so far to clearly state where it stands, preferring to play piggy in the middle, able to tip the scales either way. Even believing its opportunism to be a sign of independence and courage. However, Europe will never be able to hold onto its position as everybody’s darling. When it comes to questions of world order, you cannot have your cake and eat it….

    “Europe’s economy likes making deals with China and does not want to be interrupted in those pursuits. Politicians are dithering. The Italians have even been willing to subjugate themselves to China’s ridiculous euphemism of the ‘New Silk Road.’

    “We increasingly hear words of admiration in Europe about the speed and efficiency of the Chinese market economy, the rigorous nature of its crisis management. All the time gladly ignoring the fact that China’s successes rest on a highly perfected system of digital surveillance that translates the perversions of the KGB and Stasi into the 21st century….

    “Economic relations with China might seem harmless to many Europeans today, but they could soon lead to political dependence and ultimately to the end of a free and liberal Europe. The European Union has the choice. But above all Germany, Europe’s economic motor, has the choice.

    “Should we make a pact with an authoritarian regime or should we work to strengthen a community of free, constitutionally governed market economies with liberal societies? It is remarkable that German politics, with its love of moralizing, seems to throw its values out the window when dealing with China. What is at stake here is nothing less than what kind of society we want to live in and our concept of humanity….

    “If current European and, above all, German policy on China continues, this will lead to a gradual decoupling from America and a step-by-step infiltration and subjugation by China. Economic dependence will only be the first step. Political influence will follow.

    “In the end, it is quite simple. What kind of future do we want for Europe? An alliance with an imperfect democracy or with a perfect dictatorship? It should be an easy decision for us to make. It is about more than just money. It is about our freedom, about Article 1 of Germany’s Basic Law, the greatest legal term that ever existed: human dignity.”


    Tyler Durden

    Fri, 05/08/2020 – 02:00

  • "Keep Them In A Bubble": Army Unit Deploys To War Zone During COVID "New Normal"
    “Keep Them In A Bubble”: Army Unit Deploys To War Zone During COVID “New Normal”

    On Monday Secretary of Defense Mark Esper said that for the Pentagon and armed services a “new normal” should be expected for “an extended period of time”. This after the Pentagon has now for many weeks been down to what’s essentially a skeleton crew of reduced personnel working on site.

    “The long-term view is: What do we do over the next 6, 12, 18 months?” Esper said in a virtual conference for a D.C. think tank event . “There will be a new normal that we will have to adapt to for an extended period of time at least until we have a vaccine that we’re confident in.”

    Meanwhile this “new normal” is already greatly impacting regular ranks throughout the United States Army and other branches. A new Wall Street Journal article explores how mission protocols have shifted dramatically, in a way “where warfighting and coronavirus collide”

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Image source: US Marine Corps/Stars & Stripes

    The Army has reportedly now been able to reorient itself away from a domestic emergency response (of doing things like set up emergency make-shift hospitals) to deploying on foreign missions once again. 

    “Approximately 900 troops from the Fourth Security Force Assistance Brigade, which is based in Fort Carson, Colo., are scheduled to go to Afghanistan in the fall and will be the first large group to undergo Army training for overseas deployment since the onset of the pandemic,” WSJ reports.

    “In the early days of the coronavirus outbreak, military resources were largely devoted to building makeshift medical facilities and providing supplies to hard-hit areas in the U.S. But as demand for military medical help has receded, the military has shifted back to security operations.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    File image, US Army

    But even deployed to Afghanistan and other places, the “new normal” will be immediately felt, given that to remain effective, soldiers have to first attempt to stay health, and prevent themselves from getting infected.

    The WSJ continues:

    A barracks that normally bunks 44 soldiers instead will hold only 12, in cots spaced 6 feet apart. When waiting in line at an assembly building, troops must stand in prespaced squares, painted red. Masks, gloves and eye protection will be required. So will temperature checks, quarantines and social distancing.

    “The idea is to keep them in a bubble,” Gen. James McConville, chief of staff of the Army, said. He underscored that, “We’re looking at the long game. We’re not waiting for Covid-19 to go away.”

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Barracks configuration with cots some distance apart from others. Image source: WSJ 

    Like much of the rest of the US and the world, the Army has been in short supply of both coronavirus tests and personal protective equipment. It’s already taken drastic steps which many generals fear could damage US defense readiness, such as temporary pauses to sending new recruits to boot camp.

    And with nearly 5,000 COVID-19 cases across the military, including two deaths, also with an entire aircraft carrier crew, the USS Theodore Roosevelt, knocked out of commission by the virus, deployed personnel will have to face the difficult task of some level of ‘social distancing’ while carrying on already challenging foreign missions. 

    But we have a novel idea that would make all of the above incredibly easy: How about just ending all regime change ops and ‘wars of choice’, foreign occupations, and trillion dollar ‘nation-building’ deployments altogether? As we recently underscored: America, we have to end the wars now.


    Tyler Durden

    Fri, 05/08/2020 – 01:00

  • Technofascism: Digital Book-Burning In A Totalitarian Age
    Technofascism: Digital Book-Burning In A Totalitarian Age

    Authored by John Whitehead via The Rutherford Institute,

    “Those who created this country chose freedom. With all of its dangers. And do you know the riskiest part of that choice they made? They actually believed that we could be trusted to make up our own minds in the whirl of differing ideas. That we could be trusted to remain free, even when there were very, very seductive voices—taking advantage of our freedom of speech—who were trying to turn this country into the kind of place where the government could tell you what you can and cannot do.”

    – Nat Hentoff

    We are fast becoming a nation – nay, a world – of book burners.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    While on paper, we are technically free to speak – at least according to the U.S. Constitution – in reality, however, we are only as free to speak as the government and its corporate partners such as Facebook, Google or YouTube may allow.

    That’s not a whole lot of freedom. Especially if you’re inclined to voice opinions that may be construed as conspiratorial or dangerous.

    Take David Icke, for example.

    Icke, a popular commentator and author often labeled a conspiracy theorist by his detractors, recently had his Facebook page and YouTube channel (owned by Google) deleted for violating site policies by “spreading coronavirus disinformation.”

    The Centre for Countering Digital Hate, which has been vocal about calling for Icke’s de-platforming, is also pushing for the removal of all other sites and individuals who promote Icke’s content in an effort to supposedly “save lives.”

    Translation: the CCDH evidently believes the public is too dumb to think for itself and must be protected from dangerous ideas.

    This is the goosestepping Nanny State trying to protect us from ourselves.

    In the long run, this “safety” control (the censorship and shadowbanning of anyone who challenges a mainstream narrative) will be far worse than merely allowing people to think for themselves.

    Journalist Matt Taibbi gets its: The people who want to add a censorship regime to a health crisis are more dangerous and more stupid by leaps and bounds than a president who tells people to inject disinfectant.”

    Don’t fall for the propaganda.

    These internet censors are not acting in our best interests to protect us from dangerous, disinformation campaigns about COVID-19, a virus whose source and behavior continue to elude medical officials. They’re laying the groundwork now, with Icke as an easy target, to preempt any “dangerous” ideas that might challenge the power elite’s stranglehold over our lives.

    This is how freedom dies.

    It doesn’t matter what disinformation Icke may or may not have been spreading about COVID-19. That’s not the issue.

    As commentator Caitlin Johnstone recognizes, the censorship of David Icke by these internet media giants has nothing to do with Icke: “What matters is that we’re seeing a consistent and accelerating pattern of powerful plutocratic institutions collaborating with the US-centralized empire to control what ideas people around the world are permitted to share with each other, and it’s a very unsafe trajectory.”

    Welcome to the age of technofascism.

    Technofascism, clothed in tyrannical self-righteousness, is powered by technological behemoths (both corporate and governmental) working in tandem. As journalist Chet Bowers explains,Technofascism’s level of efficiency and totalitarian potential can easily lead to repressive systems that will not tolerate dissent.”

    The internet, hailed as a super-information highway, is increasingly becoming the police state’s secret weapon. This “policing of the mind: is exactly the danger author Jim Keith warned about when he predicted that “information and communication sources are gradually being linked together into a single computerized network, providing an opportunity for unheralded control of hat will be broadcast, what will be said, and ultimately what will be thought.”

    It’s a slippery slope from censoring so-called illegitimate ideas to silencing truth.

    Eventually, as George Orwell predicted, telling the truth will become a revolutionary act.

    We’re almost at that point now.

    What you are witnessing is the modern-day equivalent of book burning which involves doing away with dangerous ideas—legitimate or not—and the people who espouse them.

    Today, the forces of political correctness, working in conjunction with corporate and government agencies, have managed to replace actual book burning with intellectual book burning.

    Free speech for me but not for thee is how my good friend and free speech purist Nat Hentoff used to sum up this double standard.

    This is about much more than free speech, however. This is about repression and control.

    With every passing day, we’re being moved further down the road towards a totalitarian society characterized by government censorship, violence, corruption, hypocrisy and intolerance, all packaged for our supposed benefit in the Orwellian doublespeak of national security, tolerance and so-called “government speech.”

    The reasons for such censorship vary widely from political correctness, safety concerns and bullying to national security and hate crimes but the end result remains the same: the complete eradication of what Benjamin Franklin referred to as the “principal pillar of a free government.”

    The upshot of all of this editing, parsing, banning and silencing is the emergence of a new language, what George Orwell referred to as Newspeak, which places the power to control language in the hands of the totalitarian state.

    Under such a system, language becomes a weapon to change the way people think by changing the words they use.

    The end result is control.

    In totalitarian regimes—a.k.a. police states—where conformity and compliance are enforced at the end of a loaded gun, the government dictates what words can and cannot be used.

    In countries where the police state hides behind a benevolent mask and disguises itself as tolerance, the citizens censor themselves, policing their words and thoughts to conform to the dictates of the mass mind lest they find themselves ostracized or placed under surveillance.

    Even when the motives behind this rigidly calibrated reorientation of societal language appear well-intentioned—discouraging racism, condemning violence, denouncing discrimination and hatred—inevitably, the end result is the same: intolerance, indoctrination and infantilism.

    It’s political correctness disguised as tolerance, civility and love, but what it really amounts to is the chilling of free speech and the demonizing of viewpoints that run counter to the cultural elite.

    The police state could not ask for a better citizenry than one that carries out its own censorship, spying and policing: this is how you turn a nation of free people into extensions of the omniscient, omnipotent, omnipresent police state, and in the process turn a citizenry against each other.

    Tread cautiously: Orwell’s 1984, which depicts the ominous rise of ubiquitous technology, fascism and totalitarianism, has become an operation manual for the omnipresent, modern-day surveillance state.

    1984 portrays a global society of total control in which people are not allowed to have thoughts that in any way disagree with the corporate state. There is no personal freedom, and advanced technology has become the driving force behind a surveillance-driven society. Snitches and cameras are everywhere. People are subject to the Thought Police, who deal with anyone guilty of thought crimes. The government, or “Party,” is headed by Big Brother who appears on posters everywhere with the words: “Big Brother is watching you.”

    We have arrived, way ahead of schedule, into the dystopian future dreamed up by not only Orwell but also such fiction writers as Aldous Huxley, Margaret Atwood and Philip K. Dick.

    Much like Orwell’s Big Brother in 1984, the government and its corporate spies now watch our every move. Much like Huxley’s A Brave New World, we are churning out a society of watchers who “have their liberties taken away from them, but … rather enjoy it, because they [are] distracted from any desire to rebel by propaganda or brainwashing.” Much like Atwood’s The Handmaid’s Tale, the populace is now taught to “know their place and their duties, to understand that they have no real rights but will be protected up to a point if they conform, and to think so poorly of themselves that they will accept their assigned fate and not rebel or run away.”

    And in keeping with Philip K. Dick’s darkly prophetic vision of a dystopian police state—which became the basis for Steven Spielberg’s futuristic thriller Minority Report—we are now trapped in a world in which the government is all-seeing, all-knowing and all-powerful, and if you dare to step out of line, dark-clad police SWAT teams and pre-crime units will crack a few skulls to bring the populace under control.

    What once seemed futuristic no longer occupies the realm of science fiction.

    Incredibly, as the various nascent technologies employed and shared by the government and corporations alike—facial recognition, iris scanners, massive databases, behavior prediction software, and so on—are incorporated into a complex, interwoven cyber network aimed at tracking our movements, predicting our thoughts and controlling our behavior, the dystopian visions of past writers is fast becoming our reality.

    In fact, our world is characterized by widespread surveillance, behavior prediction technologies, data mining, fusion centers, driverless cars, voice-controlled homes, facial recognition systems, cybugs and drones, and predictive policing (pre-crime) aimed at capturing would-be criminals before they can do any damage. Surveillance cameras are everywhere. Government agents listen in on our telephone calls and read our emails. And privacy and bodily integrity have been utterly eviscerated.

    We are increasingly ruled by multi-corporations wedded to the police state.

    What many fail to realize is that the government is not operating alone. It cannot.

    The government requires an accomplice.

    Thus, the increasingly complex security needs of the massive federal government, especially in the areas of defense, surveillance and data management, have been met within the corporate sector, which has shown itself to be a powerful ally that both depends on and feeds the growth of governmental overreach.

    In fact, Big Tech wedded to Big Government has become Big Brother, and we are now ruled by the Corporate Elite whose tentacles have spread worldwide.

    The government now has at its disposal technological arsenals so sophisticated and invasive as to render any constitutional protections null and void. Spearheaded by the NSA, which has shown itself to care little to nothing for constitutional limits or privacy, the “security/industrial complex”—a marriage of government, military and corporate interests aimed at keeping Americans under constant surveillance—has come to dominate the government and our lives.

    Money, power, control.

    There is no shortage of motives fueling the convergence of mega-corporations and government. But who is paying the price?

    “We the people,” of course. Not just we Americans, but people the world over.

    We have entered into a global state of tyranny.

    Where we stand now is at the juncture of OldSpeak (where words have meanings, and ideas can be dangerous) and Newspeak (where only that which is “safe” and “accepted” by the majority is permitted). The power elite has made their intentions clear: they will pursue and prosecute any and all words, thoughts and expressions that challenge their authority.

    This is the final link in the police state chain.

    Americans have been conditioned to accept routine incursions on their privacy rights. In fact, the addiction to screen devices—especially cell phones—has created a hive effect where the populace not only watched but is controlled by AI bots. However, at one time, the idea of a total surveillance state tracking one’s every move would have been abhorrent to most Americans. That all changed with the 9/11 attacks. As professor Jeffrey Rosen observes, “Before Sept. 11, the idea that Americans would voluntarily agree to live their lives under the gaze of a network of biometric surveillance cameras, peering at them in government buildings, shopping malls, subways and stadiums, would have seemed unthinkable, a dystopian fantasy of a society that had surrendered privacy and anonymity.”

    Having been reduced to a cowering citizenry—mute in the face of elected officials who refuse to represent us, helpless in the face of police brutality, powerless in the face of militarized tactics and technology that treat us like enemy combatants on a battlefield, and naked in the face of government surveillance that sees and hears all—we have nowhere left to go.

    We have, so to speak, gone from being a nation where privacy is king to one where nothing is safe from the prying eyes of government.

    In search of so-called terrorists and extremists hiding amongst us—the proverbial “needle in a haystack,” as one official termed it—the Corporate State has taken to monitoring all aspects of our lives, from cell phone calls and emails to Internet activity and credit card transactions. This data is being fed through fusion centers across the country, which work with the Department of Homeland Security to make threat assessments on every citizen, including school children.

    Wherever you go and whatever you do, you are now being watched, especially if you leave behind an electronic footprint.

    When you use your cell phone, you leave a record of when the call was placed, who you called, how long it lasted and even where you were at the time. When you use your ATM card, you leave a record of where and when you used the card. There is even a video camera at most locations equipped with facial recognition software. When you use a cell phone or drive a car enabled with GPS, you can be tracked by satellite. Such information is shared with government agents, including local police. And all of this once-private information about your consumer habits, your whereabouts and your activities is now being fed to the U.S. government.

    The government has nearly inexhaustible resources when it comes to tracking our movements, from electronic wiretapping devices, traffic cameras and biometrics to radio-frequency identification cards, satellites and Internet surveillance.

    Speech recognition technology now makes it possible for the government to carry out massive eavesdropping by way of sophisticated computer systems. Phone calls can be monitored, the audio converted to text files and stored in computer databases indefinitely. And if any “threatening” words are detected—no matter how inane or silly—the record can be flagged and assigned to a government agent for further investigation. Federal and state governments, again working with private corporations, monitor your Internet content. Users are profiled and tracked in order to identify, target and even prosecute them. 

    In such a climate, everyone is a suspect. And you’re guilty until you can prove yourself innocent.

    Here’s what a lot of people fail to understand, however: it’s not just what you say or do that is being monitored, but how you think that is being tracked and targeted.

    We’ve already seen this play out on the state and federal level with hate crime legislation that cracks down on so-called “hateful” thoughts and expression, encourages self-censoring and reduces free debate on various subject matter. 

    Say hello to the new Thought Police.

    Total Internet surveillance by the Corporate State, as omnipresent as God, is used by the government to predict and, more importantly, control the populace, and it’s not as far-fetched as you might think. For example, the NSA has designed an artificial intelligence system that can anticipate your every move. In a nutshell, the NSA feeds vast amounts of the information it collects to a computer system known as Aquaint (the acronym stands for Advanced QUestion Answering for INTelligence), which the computer then uses to detect patterns and predict behavior.

    No information is sacred or spared.

    Everything from cell phone recordings and logs, to emails, to text messages, to personal information posted on social networking sites, to credit card statements, to library circulation records, to credit card histories, etc., is collected by the NSA and shared freely with its agents.

    Thus, what we are witnessing, in the so-called name of security and efficiency, is the creation of a new class system comprised of the watched (average Americans such as you and me) and the watchers (government bureaucrats, technicians and private corporations).

    Clearly, the age of privacy is at an end.

    So where does that leave us?

    We now find ourselves in the unenviable position of being monitored, managed and controlled by our technology, which answers not to us but to our government and corporate rulers. This is the fact-is-stranger-than-fiction lesson that is being pounded into us on a daily basis.

    It won’t be long before we find ourselves looking back on the past with longing, back to an age where we could speak to whom we wanted, buy what we wanted, think what we wanted without those thoughts, words and activities being tracked, processed and stored by corporate giants such as Google, sold to government agencies such as the NSA and CIA, and used against us by militarized police with their army of futuristic technologies.

    To be an individual today, to not conform, to have even a shred of privacy, and to live beyond the reach of the government’s roaming eyes and technological spies, one must not only be a rebel but rebel.

    Even when you rebel and take your stand, there is rarely a happy ending awaiting you. You are rendered an outlaw.

    So how do you survive this global surveillance state?

    As I make clear in my book Battlefield America: The War on the American People, we’re running out of options.

    We’ll soon have to choose between self-indulgence (the bread-and-circus distractions offered up by the news media, politicians, sports conglomerates, entertainment industry, etc.) and self-preservation in the form of renewed vigilance about threats to our freedoms and active engagement in self-governance.

    Yet as Aldous Huxley acknowledged in Brave New World Revisited:

    Only the vigilant can maintain their liberties, and only those who are constantly and intelligently on the spot can hope to govern themselves effectively by democratic procedures. A society, most of whose members spend a great part of their time, not on the spot, not here and now and in their calculable future, but somewhere else, in the irrelevant other worlds of sport and soap opera, of mythology and metaphysical fantasy, will find it hard to resist the encroachments of those would manipulate and control it.”

    Which brings me back to this technofascist tyranny being meted out on David Icke and all those like him who dare to voice ideas that diverge from what the government and its corporate controllers deem to be acceptable.

    The problem as I see it is that we’ve allowed ourselves to be persuaded that we need someone else to think and speak for us. And we’ve allowed ourselves to become so timid in the face of offensive words and ideas that we’ve bought into the idea that we need the government to shield us from that which is ugly or upsetting or mean.

    The result is a society in which we’ve stopped debating among ourselves, stopped thinking for ourselves, and stopped believing that we can fix our own problems and resolve our own differences.

    In short, we have reduced ourselves to a largely silent, passive, polarized populace incapable of working through our own problems and reliant on the government to protect us from our fears.

    In this way, we have become our worst enemy.

    You want to reclaim some of the ground we’re fast losing to the techno-tyrants?

    Start by thinking for yourself. If that means reading the “dangerous” ideas being floated out there by the David Ickes of the world—or the John Whiteheads for that matter—and then deciding for yourself what is true, so be it.

    As Orwell concluded, “Freedom is the right to say two plus two make four.”


    Tyler Durden

    Thu, 05/07/2020 – 23:45

  • Visualizing America’s Energy Use, in One Giant Chart
    Visualizing America’s Energy Use, in One Giant Chart

    Have you ever wondered where the country’s energy comes from, and how exactly it gets used?

    Well now, thanks to Visual Capitalist’s Jeff Desjardins, we have the answer as The Lawrence Livermore National Laboratory (LLNL) crunches the numbers every year, outputting an incredible flow diagram that covers the broad spectrum of U.S. energy use.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    The 2019 version of this comprehensive diagram gives us an in-depth picture of the U.S. energy ecosystem, showing not only where energy originates by fuel source (i.e. wind, oil, natural gas, etc.) but also how it’s ultimately consumed by sector.

    In Perspective: 2019 Energy Use

    Below, we’ll use the unit of quads, with each quad worth 1 quadrillion BTUs, to compare data for the last five years of energy use in the United States. Each quad has roughly the same amount of energy as contained in 185 million barrels of crude oil.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Interestingly, overall energy use in the U.S. actually decreased to 100.2 quads in 2019, similar to a decrease last seen in 2015.

    It’s also worth noting that the percentage of fossil fuels used in the 2019 energy mix decreased by 0.2% from last year to make up 80.0% of the total. This effectively negates the small rise of fossil fuel usage that occurred in 2018.

    Energy Use by Source

    Which sources of energy are seeing more use, as a percentage of the total energy mix?

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Since 2015, natural gas has grown from 29% to 32% of the U.S. energy mix — while coal’s role in the mix has dropped by 4.7%.

    In these terms, it can be hard to see growth in renewables, but looking at the data in more absolute terms can tell a different story. For example, in 2015 solar added 0.532 quads of energy to the mix, while in 2019 it accounted for 1.04 quads — a 95% increase.

    Energy Consumption

    Finally, let’s take a look at where energy goes by end consumption, and whether or not this is evolving over time.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Residential, commercial, and industrial sectors are all increasing their use of energy, while the transportation sector is seeing a drop in energy use — likely thanks to more fuel efficient cars, EVs, public transport, and other factors.

    The COVID-19 Effect on Energy Use

    The energy mix is incredibly difficult to change overnight, so over the years these flow diagrams created by the Lawrence Livermore National Laboratory (LLNL) have not changed much.

    One exception to this will be in 2020, which has seen an unprecedented shutdown of the global economy. As a result, imagining the next iteration of this energy flow diagram is basically anybody’s guess.

    We can likely all agree that it’ll include increased levels of energy consumption in households and shortfalls everywhere else, especially in the transportation sector. However, the total amount of energy used — and where it comes from — might be a significant deviation from past years.


    Tyler Durden

    Thu, 05/07/2020 – 23:25

  • Masks In America: "Buffalo'd Into A Very Binary Way Of Thinking"
    Masks In America: “Buffalo’d Into A Very Binary Way Of Thinking”

    Authored by Daniel Klein via The American Institute for Economic Research,

    In response to my piece on Masks in Sweden, I received the following fascinating note, by James Cooper, reproduced with his permission, which compares the attitude in Sweden with that in the United States. I think readers will find this very interesting.

    [emphasis ours]

    Dr. Klein,

    Thank you for your recent article on Sweden’s response to COVID-19. I would just like to add my thoughts to the ongoing public discussion. I am an American living in Stockholm. I have been living here for 17 years and am fluent in Swedish. I am from Northern Virginia. 

    Regarding this article, I will just point out that the American people have been buffalo’d into a very binary way of thinking – there are only two possibilities when dealing with COVID-19 – complete lockdown or nothing at all. This is also referred to as TINA (There Is No Alternative).

    For many of my American family and friends, they find it difficult to understand that there are many possibilities in between the two extremes. In fact, a more nuanced approach not only makes more sense, but is more sustainable. That is precisely what the Swedish approach is all about.

    If you look at the numbers, you will see that there is negligible risk to those aged 4-50 years old. This group also happens to represent the most economically productive group in society as well as the group that spends the most money. So why shut them down?

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    The response I get from my family and friends is that they must be shut down because otherwise people will die. This is an emotion based argument. 

    The reality is that in Sweden all at-risk people have been asked to self quarantine. If they do that, how will their lives be threatened by allowing the under-50 crowd to go out, with some social distancing guidelines? 

    Keep in mind that if you live with an at risk person, or you are a primary caregiver for an at risk person, then (in Sweden), you are expected to self quarantine; or at least go to extreme social distancing. 

    I myself had some concerns about whether I was in the risk group, and I took the precaution of keeping my kids home from school until such time as I could get a more definitive answer from my doctor. My kids’ school fully supported me in this approach. 

    So, I go back to my American family and friends and ask, how can allowing the under-50 crowd out with social distancing put the at risk population in danger? Yes, it requires people to take personal responsibility and to actively work to protect those at risk. And, assuming this is followed, then those at risk can be expected to be reasonably protected.

    Why did they have a complete lockdown in the U.S. in the first place? We were told that it was meant to flatten the curve so that the hospitals have a chance to deal with the patient loads. Mass lockdown simply pushes the problem out in time, to be dealt with later. Yes, over the next 18 months, at risk people will get the virus and there will be many that die. This is in large part unavoidable. I suspect that in the end we will see similar numbers within a range across all Western countries. This will play out over 12+ months. 

    If we can accept that statement, then we would need to admire Sweden for taking an approach that does not further burden its economy, does not destroy people’s God given right to freedom, while also working to protect those at risk, and augmenting immunity.

    Americans have been Buffalo’d into TINA (“There Is No Alternative”). The reality is that there are a wide range of responses and one size does not fit all. There are sophisticated approaches that can be deployed which do not necessitate the destruction of our economy and the financial decimation of people and their families.  

    What NYC does should not necessarily be followed in Iowa. Iowa might look more like Sweden and NYC more like Helsinki. 

    All of the criticism and “hate” directed at Sweden is emotional and not following evidence based science. One wonders why people are reacting the way they are. 

    And now we see the partisan politics exposed between #LockdownDeniers and the #HealthBeforeWealth fantasists.


    Tyler Durden

    Thu, 05/07/2020 – 23:05

  • For Albert Edwards This Is The One Chart Proving Just How Insane The Market Has Become
    For Albert Edwards This Is The One Chart Proving Just How Insane The Market Has Become

    By now everyone has seen some version of this chart which we first presented a month ago and updated yesterday, demonstrating just how disconnected stocks are from reality.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    SocGen’s resident permabear (… for stocks, and permabull for bonds) Albert Edwards has seen it too, and he too is stunned by the ludicrous gap between reality and expectation, which he has been tracking for decades but never has it gotten as wide as it is now, because as he writes in his latest global strategy weekly:

    We are in the midst of a monetary and fiscal ideological revolution. Nose-bleed equity valuations are being supported by nothing more than a belief that a new ideology can deliver. Meanwhile the gap between the reality on the ground and expectations grows wider.

    While Edwards admits that there are many ways to show “how ludicrous current equity valuations have become and by  implication how vulnerable equities are to a collapse”, the SocGen strategist avoids focusing on the “ubiquitous chart” shown above which shows the rise in the S&P500 12m forward PE above 20x driven by the ongoing profits collapse – after all we did that just yesterday highlighting the “Idiotic Disconnect Between Markets And Reality” – to Edwards the real show-stopper is a different chart, one which shows on one hand the continued Ice Age slump in analysts’ collective expectations for long-term eps growth, and on the other the soaring PE ratio. The combination of the two is what is also known as the PEG, or Price to Earnings Growth, ratio.

    Looking at the first component, long-term, EPS growth, Edwards notes that it “has now slid below 10%, a trend only likely to accelerate during the current profits slump.” This is shown in the chart below.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Looking at the chart above, Edwards urges readers to compare the current LT EPS situation with the late 1990s tech bubble, when – like now – “the S&P forward PE rose above 20x, but at least back then the cycle was still intact, and as technology stocks increasingly dominated the index, the market’s LT eps was also surging higher in tandem with the rising PE.” As he further explains, at least back in the tech bubble, the market had a LT eps leg to stand on “albeit a wooden leg, riddled with woodworm.” By contrast, this time around, despite technology stocks once again dominating the index, something Goldman warned two weeks ago always ends in pain, “the 20x PE is based on nothing more than an ideological dream.” The dream he is referring to, is one spawned by the destructive ideology of MMT (i.e., the Magic Money Tree), where the merger of the Treasury and Fed, and the joint issuance and monetization of debt, magically creates an economic perpetual engine and social utopia… for at least a short while before the currency collapse. No wonder this ideological dream is that anchor pillar of socialists who wish to pass off as financial gurus.

    In any event, going back to the chart above, when one combines the two data sets, one gets a snapshot of the so-called PEG ratio (the ratio of the P/E to Long-Term eps growth) which as Edwards notes, has risen above 2x for the first time ever, which prompts the stunned strategist to exclaim that “this is even more shocking than a 20x PE!

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    While not nearly as dramatic, Edwards also highlights a few charts from the far more rational world of bonds – at least until the Fed locks it down too, when it launches BOJ-style Yield Curve Control in a few months. The first one is of 5Y yields which as Edwards points out, have not bought into the latest risk rally and yields remain close to rock bottom. “Watch the 5y yield particularly closely as a break below the recent 0.3% floor would likely see an attempt to attack zero.”

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    And speaking of zero rates, Edwards concludes with a quick take on the dollar, which as we first showed two months ago exploded to an all time high due to an ongoing and systemic $12 trillion US dollar margin call as countless offshore issuers of dollar-denominated debt suddenly find themselves cut off from cashflows as a result of the global economic stop, which in turn means that there is a shortage of up to $12 trillion in synthetically created dollars, which is precisely what the Fed has been struggling to flood the entire globe with thanks to its expanded FX swaps.

    So far it is failing, however, and as Edwards concludes, “the dollar is already too strong in an environment where fighting deflation is becoming the number one priority. The recent surge in the broad dollar index is already sufficient to import another dose of unwanted deflation.”

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Which brings us to Edwards conclusion:

    That is why I still believe we will see negative Fed Funds soon  a topic now debated hotly on Twitter and elsewhere (see here for Ken Rogoff arguing the case for deeply negative interest rates).

    Considering that Albert wrote this just hours before we got the first ever fed funds futures pricing above par, implying a negative interest rate as soon as Nov 2020… 

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    … means the SocGen strategist is entitled to a victory lap. In fact, he will be making many of those in the coming months as the entire system, which central banks have kept alive with duct tape and superglue, finally starts to fall apart.


    Tyler Durden

    Thu, 05/07/2020 – 22:45

  • Computer Model That Locked Down The World Turns Out To Be Sh*tcode
    Computer Model That Locked Down The World Turns Out To Be Sh*tcode

    Submitted by Mark E. Jeftovic, of Axis of Easy

    It was an Imperial College computer model that forecasted 500K deaths in the UK (and 2.5 million in the US) should policymakers pursue a “herd immunity” approach (a la Sweden), that influenced them to reverse course and go full lockdown instead. The model was produced by a team headed by Neil Ferguson, (who recently resigned his post advising the UK government when it surfaced that he was himself violating lockdown directives by breaking self-isolation for dalliances with a married woman).

    The source code behind the model was to be made available to the public, and after numerous delays and excuses in doing so, has finally been posted to GitHub

    code review has been undertaken by an anonymous ex-Google software engineer here, who tells us the GitHub repository code has been heavily massaged by Microsoft engineers, and others, in an effort to whip the code into shape to safely expose it to the pubic. Alas, they seem to have failed and numerous flaws and bugs from the original software persist in the released version. Requests for the unedited version of the original code behind the model have gone unanswered.

    The most worrisome outcome of the review is that the code produces “non-deterministic outputs”

    Non-deterministic outputs. Due to bugs, the code can produce very different results given identical inputs. They routinely act as if this is unimportant.

    This problem makes the code unusable for scientific purposes, given that a key part of the scientific method is the ability to replicate results. Without replication, the findings might not be real at all – as the field of psychology has been finding out to its cost. Even if their original code was released, it’s apparent that the same numbers as in Report 9 might not come out of it.

    The documentation proffers the rationalization that iterations of the model should be run and then differing results averaged together to produce a resultant model. However, any decent piece of software, especially one that is creating a model, should produce the same result if it is fed the same initial data, or “seed”. This code doesn’t.

    “The documentation says:

    The model is stochastic. Multiple runs with different seeds should be undertaken to see average behaviour.

    “Stochastic” is just a scientific-sounding word for “random”. That’s not a problem if the randomness is intentional pseudo-randomness, i.e. the randomness is derived from a starting “seed” which is iterated to produce the random numbers. Such randomness is often used in Monte Carlo techniques. It’s safe because the seed can be recorded and the same (pseudo-)random numbers produced from it in future. Any kid who’s played Minecraft is familiar with pseudo-randomness because Minecraft gives you the seeds it uses to generate the random worlds, so by sharing seeds you can share worlds.

    Clearly, the documentation wants us to think that, given a starting seed, the model will always produce the same results.

    Investigation reveals the truth: the code produces critically different results, even for identical starting seeds and parameters.

    In one instance, a team at the Edinburgh University attempted to modify the code so that they could store the data in tables that would make it more efficient to load and run. Performance issues aside, simply moving or optimizing where the input data comes from should have no effect on the output of processing, given the same input data. What the Edinburgh team found however, was this optimization produced a variation in the output, “the resulting predictions varied by around 80,000 deaths after 80 days” which is nearly 3X the total number of UK deaths to date.

    Edinburgh reported the bug to Imperial, who dismissed it as “a small non-determinism” and told them the problem goes away if you run the code on a single CPU (which the reviewer notes “is as far away from supercomputing as one can get”).

    Alas, the Edinburgh team found that software still produced different results if it was run on a single CPU. It shouldn’t, provided it is coded properly. Whether the software is run on a single CPU or multi-threaded, the only difference should be the speed at which the output is produced. Given the same input conditions, the outputs should be the same. It isn’t, and Imperial knew this.

    Nonetheless, that’s how Imperial use the code: they know it breaks when they try to run it faster. It’s clear from reading the code that in 2014 Imperial tried to make the code use multiple CPUs to speed it up, but never made it work reliably. This sort of programming is known to be difficult and usually requires senior, experienced engineers to get good results. Results that randomly change from run to run are a common consequence of thread-safety bugs. More colloquially, these are known as “Heisenbugs“.

    Another team even found that the output varied depending on what type of computer it was run on.

    In issue #30, someone reports that the model produces different outputs depending on what kind of computer it’s run on (regardless of the number of CPUs). Again, the explanation is that although this new problem “will just add to the issues” …  “This isn’t a problem running the model in full as it is stochastic anyway”.

    The response illustrates the burning question: Why didn’t the Imperial College team realize their software was so flawed?

    Because their code is so deeply riddled with similar bugs and they struggled so much to fix them that they got into the habit of simply averaging the results of multiple runs to cover it up… and eventually this behaviour became normalised within the team.

    Most of us are familiar with the computing adage, “Garbage In/Garbage Out” and the untrained reader may think that’s what being asserted in this code review. It isn’t. What’s being asserted is that output is garbage, regardless of the input. 

    In this case, the output we’re experiencing as a result is a worldwide lockdown and shutdown of the global economy, and we don’t really know if this was necessary or not because we have no actual data (aside from Sweden) and severely flawed models.

    Read the entire code review here. 


    Tyler Durden

    Thu, 05/07/2020 – 22:25

  • US B-1B Bombers Again Fly Near Chinese Airspace Amid 'New Cold War' Threat
    US B-1B Bombers Again Fly Near Chinese Airspace Amid ‘New Cold War’ Threat

    It goes without saying that US-China relations have reached their lowest point in decades, with a former Trump administration trade official warning the spike in tensions brought on by the coronacrisis on the heels of the trade war has marked “the start of a new Cold War”. 

    Former top White House trade negotiator Clete Willems told CNBC’s Squawk Box Asia on Tuesday: “The reality is that tensions between the United States and China are rising considerably at the moment.” 

    “I know people get uncomfortable with the terminology, but I do think we have to be honest and call this what it is and this is the start of a new Cold War and if we’re not careful, things could get much, much worse,” Willems added.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    B-1B Lancer over East China Sea this week. Image source: US Air Force

    Which is what makes the uptick in American long-range bomber activity over the East China Sea — right on the Communist country’s doorstep — all the more dangerous.

    In what appears at least an indirect warning reasserting US defense readiness in the wake of the military being severely impacted by the coronavirus pandemic, the US Air Force on Thursday published a series of photos showing a B-1B strategic bomber mission over the East China Sea this week, involving aerial refueling as well.

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    Aviation monitoring sites tracked two US B-1B supersonic bombers which took off from Guam toward the East China Sea, nearing Taiwan’s northeastern maritime border along the way.

    Crucially, it’s the 15th such US military flight approaching Taiwan’s contested borders since the beginning of April, and the third bomber approach since the start of this month.

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    Marking the 15th U.S. military flight to approach Taiwan’s borders since the start of April, according to Taiwan’s CNA news, the flight path showed that the two bombers departed from Anderson Air Force Base in Guam toward the East China Sea and near Taiwan. 

    Prior flights over or near Taiwan-claimed waters have included reconnaissance flights as well, said to be carefully monitoring developments in China amid the pandemic. 

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    China’s Ministry of Foreign Affairs meanwhile warned that while it respects international airspace rights, it condemns any violations of its territorial integrity.

    And as a reminder, Beijing of course views Taiwan and the waters around it as precisely this.


    Tyler Durden

    Thu, 05/07/2020 – 22:05

  • Surviving 2020, Part 2: Rubber Meets Road
    Surviving 2020, Part 2: Rubber Meets Road

    Authored by Charles Hugh Smith via OfTwoMinds blog,

    Read Part 1 here…

    Longtime correspondent Paul B. suggested I re-publish three essays that have renewed relevance. This is the second essay, from July 2008. Thank you, Paul, for the suggestion.

    I received this timely inquiry from astute reader Paul B.:

    I’m interested in # 1, while you seem to take into account 300 million people in your writings–would you comment on rubber-meets-the-road impacts and proactive actions we can take to help shield ourselves (and our local communities) from the economic problems we’re facing?

    Would you consider including concrete actions “average” people could take to protect themselves in one of your future columns? I’d certainly appreciate it and I bet many others would, too. (emphasis added, CHS)

    That’s big challenge but I’ll give it a shot. None of this is startlingly new–it’s just common sense, and I will undoubtedly leave a few things off–but as a start:

    1. Build/strengthen a small community based on sharing, generosity and reciprocity around yourself and family. 

    My critique of much survivalist thinking–and my alternative view–can be found here:

    The strongest “survivor” is not the most heavily armed individual but the individual surrounded by a community which values his/her contributions and support, and who cares whether he/she lives or dies. Nobody gives a damn if the individual holed up in a bunker somewhere lives or dies, and that’s the fatal weakness in all too many survivalist scenarios.

    A community can be a small as three neighbors, or a block, or a church, or an extended family. The way to build a community, or join a community if you don’t have one at the moment is to extend yourself via generosity. Provide something of value without worrying about whether you’ll get back an “equal value.” Believe me, if you surprise decent people with something useful/good, their delight will exceed all known monetary value of whatever time or product or service you offered.

    Just cleaning up the trash on your street or baking some cookies and giving them away can have huge consequences. We as a society have become selfish, greedy and isolated behind an insane wall of “entertainment,” TV and other digital derangements (video games, etc.) The way forward is to be selfless occasionally, and then those who have benefited from your generosity will start caring about you.

    That’s always the way humans have survived extremely trying/difficult times. For instance, the 13th century:

    Here are two related entries:

    2. Cancel your cable or satellite TV. 

    Wean yourself from the souring insanity of “cable news”, “sports” and other soul-deadening wastes of time. Sure, see an occasional movie/DVD, but by cutting off the 200 channels then you will find something better to do than watch TV for 6 hours a day (the U.S. average). Your kids will scream and cry and whine, so tell them you’re not raising zombies any more. They can go plant a garden or contribute to the community doing something they enjoy. Watching TV, adding mindless cookie-cutter songs to their iPod and going shopping are out, over, done, gone, history. You want music? Then learn to play an instrument. Yes, it’s hard and time-consuming, but the result is rewarding in a way no “guitar hero” game can ever be.

    Set the example by limiting TV yourself. NOVA, Nature, American Experience and a few other PBS shows are worth watching–the rest, including the food and history channels, are fluff. You want history? Then read a book; there are literally a hundred great history books listed in my “books/films” link at the top of this page. Go actually cook something instead of watching some sappy/lame “entertainer” whip together something which has all been prepped for them.

    3. Get lean and prepare to heal yourself. 

    One of the first things to go will be the bloated, unaffordable, and largely ineffective “healthcare” a.k.a. “sickcare” system. Hundreds of thousands of people blindly trust the medical system and enter the hospital like sheep to slaughter, where they contract incurable infections, get the wrong meds, or endure an operation of some sort that only makes them worse.

    Yes, if you have operable cancer, then by all means go get it cut out, radiated, etc. But get on the Web and learn everything you can about the condition and treatment options first.

    Example: I have high blood pressure, even though my BMI is 21.2. My doctor prescribed some blood-pressure lowering drug, and when it didn’t seem to have much effect I went online and discovered that it generally lowers pressure by something like 3%.

    Our blood pressure varies by 10% or more every day just naturally, so 3% is somewhat underwhelming. Then I read about how too much salt is the known cause of high blood pressure (along with too much weight), and I started noticing how the vast majority of the packaged/prepared/fast-food in the U.S. has large amounts of salt. So I stopped eating all that and use a salt substitute (potassium) or a little 50/50 potassium/salt.

    From what I have read on the Web, it seems blood-pressure meds are not all slam-dunks. The consensus seems to be to cut salt out of your diet and shed some pounds as a start.

    4. Become politically aware and active in your local community. 

    As I outlined in Welcome to Sadr City, U.S.A. (June 20, 2008), local municipalities and agencies will be going broke, and it will be up to the local citizenry to take back control of their city/town/county funds from the public unions and “professional” managers. What we face is simple: the benefits and pensions government employee unions won during the “flush times” are simply unaffordable/unsustainable. In all too many cases, firefighters, police officers, library workers and others “game the system” to retire with overtime-boosted retirements and gold-plated benefits the rest of us can only dream about as things deteriorate.

    You can be assured that the public employees will be screaming bloody murder about “what we were promised,” but the money’s no longer there. So it will come down to some difficult choices that we the public cannot leave to the unions or “professional” city managers: do you want to pay people $80,000 a year retirement plus another $20K in medical benefits, or do you want a library that’s open more than 4 hours a week?

    Look, circumstances change, and we have to change with them. Just because some agency/city caved into absurd demands back in the tech boom doesn’t mean we have to be enslaved to those no-longer-affordable retirement/benefits packages. Make the agency/city go bankrupt when the money runs out and start with a clean slate. Demand that municipal workers work 40 years before they earn a retirement, like the rest of us, rather than a mere 20 years.

    Get online and educate yourself about the incredible waste and fraud in your own local government, and then let your elected officials know you want some accountability and services and a sustainable level of salaries, pensions and benefits. Tell them you want the cops who are sitting at home on their duffs retired after 20 years to get back on the street for another 10 years, and ditto for every other early-retiree. Tell them 50 is the new 30, and nobody should retire until they’re 65 or 70–public employees included.

    Yes, I know not every city and agency is filled with cronyism and people who call in sick so their buddy can get double-time, but if you work for a sterling municipality, please don’t assume your well-managed burg/agency is the norm. I know for a fact that around here in bloated California, library employees have retired with a small pension after a mere 7 years of part-time service. (Once you hit 55, you can retire after just such minimal service.)

    Around here, public employees retire with pensions larger than their salaries, pensions boosted in the final year with legerdemain and bogus tricks to boost the pay on which their pension is based.

    Around here, cops and firefighters routinely draw paychecks with overtime in the range of $150,000+ (please search for the City of Vallejo-bankruptcy for the chart listing the hundreds of city employees drawing well over $100K each).

    Around here, a retired university police chief draws a $150,000/year pension and then goes back to work under a contract which pays an additional $250,000/year. This is just business as usual when it comes to taxpayer funds, public unions and public-sector fraud/cronyism/waste.

    Maybe your city/town/county/state is blessed with hardworking public employees who draw modest benefits and retirements and who work 30 years before they draw a dime, managed by people who don’t run things according to cronyism and gaming the system–if so, you are fortunate indeed. The rest of us aren’t so lucky. We pay high taxes and make a fraction of what the public employees make and have nowhere near their healthcare benefits, working or retired, but then we get to hear about how poorly paid they are compared to private-sector jobs. Get real, people; the pay in the real-world private-sector is lousy and going down. If you’re so underpaid, go onto monster.com and get yourself one of those plentiful high-paying private-sector jobs. You will find them less plentiful than you might have imagined.

    If you don’t get involved, well then a relative handful of protected folks will collect most of the taxes and public services will be sacrificed left and right: no road repair, no libraries, falling-apart schools, etc. It’s our choice. Get involved or get happy with whatever crumbs the graft/waste “experts” leave you.

    5. Eat lower on the food chain. 

    Let’s start with the fact that it takes about 10 pounds of meat to grow a pound of salmon or tuna, and 10+ pounds of grain to grow a pound of chicken, pork or beef. There will be plenty of food for humans if we stop feeding 90% of the grain to animals and then eating the animals.

    Those of you who have hiked or wilderness-camped or equivalent know that a human can get by on remarkably little food. The idea that we’re all going to starve to death is unlikely. Corn bread and beans is a darned fine meal and it uses about 10% of the energy/soil/feedstock etc. of an equivalent weight of meat.

    Eat what’s grown locally, and if you can, eat meat which fed on grass or leftovers and not a whole lot of processed grain: range-fed cattle, your neighbor’s chickens you traded something for, etc.

    6. Start growing some of your own food, however little that might be. 

    The value here isn’t just the cost of the food you raise–it’s reconnecting you and your family with where food comes from in the first place.

    If you have a real spread, consider going no-till. No-Till: How Farmers Are Saving the Soil by Parking Their Plows
    The age-old practice of turning the soil before planting a new crop is a leading cause of farmland degradation. Many farmers are thus looking to make plowing a thing of the past. (Scientific American)

    7. Look into permaculture. 

    Consider this astonishing “on the ground” permaculture report:

    Dear Folks,

    I would like to inject some real world experience into this otherwise abstract discussion of food and permaculture.

    In addition to being an ecological biologist, a permaculture production food farmer for 9 years, and an expert on biomass fuels, I have also been teaching permaculture since 1997 and have worked in many countries on food/energy production design issues. I have certified more than 400 people in permaculture design since 1997. For more info on this see my site at permaculture.com.

    So in light of my experience I have a couple of things to say…

    I produced enough food to feed more than 300 people (with a peak of 450 people at one point), 49 weeks a year in my fully organic CSA on the edge of Silicon Valley. If I could do it there you can do it anywhere.

    …My yields were often 8 times what the USDA claims are possible per square foot. My soil fertility increased dramatically each year so I was not achieving my yields by mining my soil. On the contrary I built my soil from cement-hard adobe clay to its impressive state from scratch. By the end I was at over 22% organic matter with a cation exchange capacity (CEC) of over 25.

    …At most times I had no more than half of my land under production with the rest in various stages of cover cropping. And I was only producing at a fraction of what would have been possible if I had owned the land and could have justified the investment into an overstory of integrated tree, berry, flower and nut crops along with the various vegetable and fruit crops.

    …I grew over 45 different kinds of crops…

    The math is easy. With a polyculture, yields of 3-10 pounds of food per square foot are easy to come up with in most climates. For comparison, commercial agriculture in California , which is way inefficient, routinely runs about 1.5-2.5 pounds per square foot per year across a wide variety of crops…

    …There are two main reasons known for the dramatically increased productivity of a polyculture\the benefit of mycorhyzzal symbiosis (which is destroyed in chemical agriculture) and less solar saturation. Solar saturation is the point at which a plants’ photosynthetic machinery is overwhelmed by excess sunlight and shut down.

    In practice, this means that most of our crop plants stop growing at about 10am and don’t start again until about 4 in the afternoon. Various members of a polyculture shade each other, preventing solar saturation, so plants metabolize all day. Polyculture as we pursue in permaculture uses close to 100% of the sunlight falling on its mixed crops. Monoculture rarely can use more than 30% of the total sunlight received before saturation.”

    8. Blow off your high-interest debt. 

    If you can pay it off out of earnings, great, if not, go bankrupt once the laws change (probably next year). Don’t feel bad, just get it over with. Scrape up the cash and hire a real bankruptcy attorney. Get debt-free except for your low-interest fixed-rate mortgage.

    9. Stop shopping. 

    Nuff said. If you don’t need it to literally survive and be healthy, don’t buy it.

    10. Stop “consuming” brainwashing “entertainment” and get involved in real life. 

    You like sports? Then turn off the TV and go play some yourself. Throw out that idiotic “martial arts” videogame and go learn a martial art yourself. It’s not just about kicking, it’s about the principles of Wushu and self-cultivation, responsibility, self-defense and self-control. Stop watching and start doing.

    Go canoeing, snowshoeing, toss the football around, put some air in the tires of that old bike, but build up to it (I’m 54, so I know about injuries and warming up.) Don’t be a weekend warrior and hurt yourself. Remember: we’re responsible for our own health now; don’t count on somebody else “saving” you.

    11. Try to get a job closer to home. 

    Nuff said, Shorter commute-less oil burned, less time wasted fuming in traffic.

    12. Stop moving around the country.

     No wonder we’re so messed up as a culture; so many people have no roots in the community and no family within a thousand miles. Most of the crazy homeless people in my city have been abandoned by their family. They don’t just have a psychiatric problem–they have a family problem, which means we as a nation have a family problem, too.

    13. Get your hands on an old, cheap, low-weight/small engine vehicle. 

    I mean a Chevy Geo, or a little Ford, or a Nissan, whatever. Not all of us can afford a new Prius or Ford hybrid or whatever “high-tech solution” is presented (ask yourself what’s the profit margin on all those “solutions”), so what we have to do is simple: make do and improve what we have.

    In the Japanese cars, the older the better, in some ways; the engines and cars were smaller and got great mileage without hybrid technologies. I am pretty sure my 1998 Civic gets about the same mileage as a new hybrid.

    If you keep the engine tuned, the oil and filter changed often, tire pressure up and drive a sane speed, even a mid-sized vehicle can turn 35 MPG. The same vehicle, poorly maintained and driven with a heavy lead foot will get 20 MPG or less. The difference isn’t the technology, it’s behavioral. Meaning: it’s up to you.

    14. If at all possible, try to figure out how to walk or bicycle somewhere useful. 

    By that I mean, is there any possible route which enables you to walk or bike to a store or do some errand, at least in seasonable weather? If not, then maybe you should go to a city council meeting and ask why your town/city doesn’t have any safe bikeways.

    On reasonably flat ground/modest grade, 8-10 miles on a decent bike is no big deal, meaning any destination 5 miles away or less is bikeable if there’s a safe route (i.e. not sharing a highway with cars going 55 MPH.)

    15. Be positive and fact-based.

     Nurture the Inner Light regardless of which religion/faith you believe/follow. We’re in this together, and we need to support reality-based solutions and those around us who are ready to deal with reality. Our mental health is as important a survival advantage as our physical shape.

    16. Acquaint yourself with the idea of hedging. 

    Don’t trust the dollar to retain it’s value? Maybe it will, maybe it won’t. A little gold or silver is a hedge. If precious metals plummet and the dollar goes gangbusters, great, most of what you own is dollar-denominated. But if the dollar tanks, you’ve got a little hedge.

    The main point is to start doing the research and thinking for yourself.

    Along these lines, here’s an essay by frequent contributor Harun I.:

    This isn’t an exhaustive list but it’s a start. Much of it will not be popular because it isn’t a “high tech solution” and it all requires work, learning, responsibility and paying attention–all the traits which our “entertainment” obsession erodes, discounts and destroys.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    *  *  *

    My recent books:

    Will You Be Richer or Poorer?: Profit, Power, and AI in a Traumatized World ($13)
    (Kindle $6.95, print $11.95) Read the first section for free (PDF).

    Pathfinding our Destiny: Preventing the Final Fall of Our Democratic Republic ($6.95 (Kindle), $12 (print), $13.08 ( audiobook): Read the first section for free (PDF).

    The Adventures of the Consulting Philosopher: The Disappearance of Drake $1.29 (Kindle), $8.95 (print); read the first chapters for free (PDF)

    Money and Work Unchained $6.95 (Kindle), $15 (print) Read the first section for free (PDF).

    If you found value in this content, please join me in seeking solutions by becoming a $1/month patron of my work via patreon.com.


    Tyler Durden

    Thu, 05/07/2020 – 21:45

  • "Everything Has Been Cancelled": Class 8 Heavy Duty Truck Orders Crash To 25 Year Low In April
    “Everything Has Been Cancelled”: Class 8 Heavy Duty Truck Orders Crash To 25 Year Low In April

    The misery in Class 8 heavy duty truck orders continues. Still struggling with the remnants of an order backlog that started almost two years ago with record orders in August 2018, the industry was unable to find an equilibrium prior to the coronavirus pandemic. Orders were sluggish and we noted numerous trucking companies that closed up shop altogether in 2019.

    Post-pandemic, things look even more helpless. In April, the industry posted its worst order number on record as the economy ground to a halt as a result of the nationwide lockdown. Only 4,000 Class 8 orders were made last month, which is down 73% year over year and 44% from March.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    It was the lowest reading since FTR began tracking orders in 1996. Many companies canceled or delayed new orders as demand, measured by the ratio of loads to trucks, fell 66% in April, according to the Wall Street Journal

    The uncertain outlook going forward has prompted many companies that would normally be shelling out for new infrastructure to rein in their spending. For example, logistics company TFI’s Chief Executive Alain Bédard said in an April 22 call: “Everything has been canceled.”

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Don Ake, FTR’s vice president of commercial vehicles said: “Fleets don’t need a lot of trucks in the short term and they’re unsure what they’ll need in the next few months, so they’re being cautious.”

    Ake says the backlog of heavy duty trucks is still above 100,000 units, but could dip below 2017 levels once factories are back up and running. “The industry was going slow anyway, and the backlog will probably go below that 94,000 mark [in 2017] eventually,” he said.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    “Fleets will remain extremely cautious going forward, but we expect orders to modestly increase as the freight markets recover,” Ake told FreightWaves. “We have already seen some signs of life in refrigerated freight and expect improvement in dry van freight soon. The industry recovery will begin in May, but it will be gradual, just like the overall economy.”

    Daimler Trucks has suspended production at its plant in Oregon and two additional facilities in North Carolina. “The work outpaced the current capabilities of the supply chain,” the company said at the time. The factories are set to re-open and resume production on May 11.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Kenny Vieth, president of market forecaster ACT Research concluded: “The ramp out of this is going to be arduous. You can only build at the speed of your slowest supplier.”

    He continued: “Given broadly halted economic output leading to a sharp drop in freight volumes and rates, as well as more empty miles from fragmented supply chains further impacting carriers’ profitability, a negative order number was within the realm of possibilities.” 

    FTR is suggesting a potential rebound to about 10,000 orders in May. 


    Tyler Durden

    Thu, 05/07/2020 – 21:25

  • "There's No Question It's A Fraud": Fmr Trump Attorney Says Mueller "Badly Misled" White House, Schiff Is "Nancy's Liar"
    “There’s No Question It’s A Fraud”: Fmr Trump Attorney Says Mueller “Badly Misled” White House, Schiff Is “Nancy’s Liar”

    Former Trump attorney John Dowd says it’s “staggering” that former Special Counsel Robert Mueller’s “so-called Dream Team would put on such a fraud,” after the Wednesday release of the investigation’s “scope memo” revealed that Mueller was tasked with investigating accusations from Clinton-funded operative Christopher Steele which the DOJ already knew were debunked.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    “In the last few days, I have been going back through my files and we were badly misled by Mueller and his senior people, particularly in the meetings that we had,” Dowd told Fox News Radio host Brian Kilmeade on Thursday.

    The scope memo also revealed that Mueller’s authority went significantly beyond what was previously known – including “allegations that Carter Page committed a crime or crimes by colluding with Russian government officials with respect to the Russian government’s efforts to interfere with the 2016 election for President of the United States, in violation of United States law,” yet as John Solomon of Just The News noted on Wednesday – the FBI had already:

    • fired Steele as an informant for leaking;
    • interviewed Steele’s sub-source, who disputed information attributed to him; 
    • ascertained that allegations Steele had given the FBI specifically about Page were inaccurate and likely came from Russian intelligence sources as disinformation;
    • been informed repeatedly by the CIA that Page was not a Russian stooge but, rather, a cooperating intelligence asset for the United States government.

    There’s no question it’s a fraud … I think the whole report is just nonsense and it’s staggering that the so-called ‘Dream Team’ would put on such a fraud,” Dowd said, according to Fox News.

    Dowd also discussed Connecticut U.S. Attorney John Durham’s investigation into the origins of the Russia probe, which is expected to be wrapped up by the end of the summer.

    “Durham has really got a load on his hands tracking all this down,” Dowd said.

    Durham was appointed last year by Attorney General Bill Barr to review the events leading up to Trump’s inauguration. However, Durham has since expanded his investigation to cover a post-election timeline spanning the spring of 2017, when Mueller was appointed as special counsel. –Fox News

    “Nancy’s Liar”

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Dowd also circled back to a claim by House Intelligence Committee Chairman Adam Schiff that there was “direct evidence” that the Trump campaign colluded with Russia during the 2016 election, despite the fact that transcripts of House Intelligence Committee interviews proving otherwise.

    “Schiff doesn’t release these interviews because they’re going to make him a liar,” said Dowd, adding “They’re going to expose him and he’ll be run out of town.”

    “He lied for months in the impeachment inquiry. He’s essentially Nancy [Pelosi]’s liar and he’s now going to be exposed.”


    Tyler Durden

    Thu, 05/07/2020 – 21:05

  • White House Shelves Detailed CDC Guide To Reopening Country: "Will Never See Light Of Day"
    White House Shelves Detailed CDC Guide To Reopening Country: “Will Never See Light Of Day”

    Weeks after President Trump tweeted messages to “Liberate” various states like Michigan, whose governor has come under fire for imposing some of the most draconian ‘stay at home’ and lockdown measures nationwide, the White House has shelved a detailed Centers for Disease Control (CDC) guide providing directives for opening up the country again.

    The AP obtained a copy of the unreleased report, which further comes after the administration’s own “Opening Up America Again” — though the new CDC unpublished report is said to be more specific and detailed. AP describes:

    The 17-page report by a Centers for Disease Control and Prevention team, titled “Guidance for Implementing the Opening Up America Again Framework,” was researched and written to help faith leaders, business owners, educators and state and local officials as they begin to reopen.

    It was supposed to be published last Friday, but agency scientists were told the guidance “would never see the light of day,” according to a CDC official.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Image source: AP

    That is hasn’t been cleared for public release either by the White House or CDC leadership underscores the continuing debate and struggle between those wanting a “scientifically accurate” one-size-fits-all centralized policy for reopening vs. Trump’s desire to leave specifics to the states, given the pandemic has impacted various regions of the country differently. 

    For example the South has been far less impacted than predictions in March suggested, while some states in the central parts of the country have chafed at what many see as the dangerous trend of the entire country’s fate being determined by hard-hit cities and areas on the East and West coasts, especially the tri-state area. 

    “We’ve consulted individually with states, but as I said, it’s (a) governor-led effort. It’s a state-led effort on … which the federal government will consult. And we do so each and every day,” the White House spokesperson said in a COVID-19 briefing Wednesday.

    But the administration has come under severe criticism for not making CDC recommendations easily available in the form of centralized information or daily briefings, preferring not to federalize what could be perceived as a blanket policy. The AP summarizes the new CDC document’s guidelines as follows

    The rejected reopening guidance was described by one of the federal officials as a touchstone document that was to be used as a blueprint for other groups inside the CDC who are creating the same type of instructional materials for other facilities.

    The guidance contained detailed advice for making site-specific decisions related to reopening schools, restaurants, summer camps, churches, day care centers and other institutions. It had been widely shared within the CDC and included detailed “decision trees,” flow charts to be used by local officials to think through different scenarios. One page of the document can be found on the CDC website via search engines, but it did not appear to be linked to any other CDC pages.

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    And further, it contains details recommended by scientists which are not currently found on any official CDC web pages:

    For example, the report suggested restaurants and bars should install sneeze guards at cash registers and avoid having buffets, salad bars and drink stations. Similar tips appear on the CDC’s site and a Food and Drug Administration page.

    But the shelved report also said that as restaurants start seating diners again, they should space tables at least 6 feet (1.8 meters) apart and try to use phone app technology to alert a patron when their table is ready to avoid touching and use of buzzers. That’s not on the CDC’s site now.

    Page from the new but still not officially released CDC document:

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Chief medical officer of the Association of State and Territorial Health Officials, Dr. Marcus Plescia, explained the controversy over release of the guidelines to the AP further: “You can say that restaurants can open and you need to follow social distancing guidelines. But restaurants want to know, ‘What does that look like?’ States would like more guidance,” he said.

    Still, CDC officials are said to be working “behind the scenes” in getting as much of their recommendations as they can to state and local officials, as the ‘information battle’ and inter-admin debate over reopening continues. 


    Tyler Durden

    Thu, 05/07/2020 – 20:45

  • The Science Of Fear: How The Elites Use It To Control Us & How To Break Free
    The Science Of Fear: How The Elites Use It To Control Us & How To Break Free

    Authored by Mac Slavo via SHTFplan.com,

    Fear is one of the most powerful tools the elites have at their disposal. Using the mainstream media, politicians and others who want world domination can inject fear into the public at the drop of a hat, making them easy to manipulate and control.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Aristotle once said: “He who has overcome his fears will truly be free.” Fear is a powerful weapon, and it’s been used globally for the past few months.  People have shown that the instant the media tells them to live a life scared in their homes, they will comply in order to “stay safe.” Whether the virus is real or not, is not the point.  The elitists must keep the public in a constant state of panic in order to control them. Unafraid and compassionate people are impossible to control.

    Unfortunately and unsurprisingly, the propaganda was injected into schools to eliminate critical thinking.

    At school, we were taught to think in certain ways. They taught us what to think, but not how to develop our thinking. And everyone was taught the same. If we thought in different ways than our classmates, teachers would tell us we are bad students. They would give us bad grades and might even expel us from school. Therefore, as students we learned to compromise our thinking so as to get away with trouble. –The Bounded Spirit

    The other hard truth most will not like to hear is that if you are still stuck in the left vs. right paradigm, you still haven’t figured any of it out yet. Left vs. right only exists to give us the illusion of choice.  It’s time to question what we’ve been programmed to think, and it should start there. The fear of not electing the right candidate drives people to polls to vote for evil every year. (The lesser of two evils is still evil.) Politicians are being elected by persuading the masses through the use of fear while journalists influence public opinion by terrorizing people’s minds.

    Fear is the best weapon of all great manipulators. It can move people to do anything, no matter how nonsensical it is.  Take, for example, the COVID-19 scam.  People are still terrified of a virus that even the government has admitted isn’t any worse than the flu.  Why? Because the media, the government’s lapdog, is telling them they still need to be afraid. The elites have learned to manipulate the public’s emotions to their advantage. With global media corporations in place, controlled and operated BY the elite, they can amplify that fear quite easily. Turn on the news, open a newspaper and you’ll see this.

    We have been taught to be distrustful of the mind, however, and of our thoughts. This has been by design and has been perpetuated through society by the elite of this world who understand the power of thought and the nature of the mind. In fact, most of us have been through a long period of mind-programming since we were born to separate our mind from itself so that it does not know or experience this truth. –With One Breath

    Obey. That is the name of the game of control. And controlled you are if you do not recognize how innately powerful, creative, and safe you really are. This life is not all you are, but it is everything you’ve been taught to believe.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Our emotions are energy and they all have a frequency. The closer you are to the bottom, the easier it will be to manipulate you into obeying and complying with tyranny.

    As David Icke said in a now-banned YouTube video:

    “‘I’m more powerful than them and they KNOW IT.’ And within minutes of the interview ending, they were proving me right. Here they are, this cult that I will explain, that control the mainstream media, my God, has that been any more obvious than in the last few weeks?” -SHTFPlan (the video in this article has been deleted and this article has been shadowbanned.)

    Icke was discussing the easy way to beat “the cult” as he calls it, the elitists, the government, the establishment, the ones who want to control you and enslave you.  He says living life in compassion and love and doing the right and moral thing will be the fall of the ruling class.

    Free yourself by living a life free of fear. Take up critical thinking. Question what you’ve been told.  Believe you are powerful because you are. Stop looking to others for answers and look to yourself.  Find what resonates with you and speak your truth.


    Tyler Durden

    Thu, 05/07/2020 – 20:25

  • Desperate Auto Dealers Betting Big On Discounts To Help Move Inventory
    Desperate Auto Dealers Betting Big On Discounts To Help Move Inventory

    We have been extensively documenting the growing auto industry glut that literally has ports so full that they are keeping ships at sea because they can’t accept any more inventory.

    But now, the auto industry looks as though it has a plan to move some of this inventory: massive discounts and incentives.

    Texas auto dealer Hayden Elder, who had his worst month in 42 years in March, told Reuters: “I think that will open the door for a ton of orders for the factory.” He owns two Dodge, Jeep and Ram dealerships in a rural eastern region of Texas and has remained open.

    Jeff Schuster, president of the Americas for consultancy LMC Automotive expects that the industry will rebound in the second half of the year, but predicts that 2020 sales will end the year up to 25% lower than 2019. 

    Schuster said: “Until we get plants up and running and the economy restarted, we’re in uncertain territory.” Though if inventory is the problem du jour, we’re not quite sure what cranking out more vehicles at this point is going to solve. 

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Auto makers have been torching cash while the coronavirus has swept its way across the country. The consequences of the shut down have been immense. Toyota reported a 54% sales decline in April, for example. Hyundai and Mazda reported drops of 39% and 45%, respectively. 

    Some dealers have already tapped into incentives, however, trying to lure in buyers with seven year low interest loans. In fact, auto retailer Sonic Automotive Inc’s Chief Executive David Smith has called existing loans “unprecedented”. 

    “I’ve never seen that level of incentives,” he said.

    Ford CEO Jim Hackett is also optimistic, stating last week: “My belief is that demand will come back fairly well.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Ford’s U.S. sales chief then tipped the company’s hand, leading on that they continue to expect help from the government in order to steady their business: “Certainly we believe that some level of government stimulus post crisis to help customers and the auto industry to recover would be appropriate.”

    One problem continues to be the used auto market, where prices are expected to crash. It’s a story we have covered at length here on Zero Hedge and it may result in siphoning off some business that would normally purchase new vehicles. 

    Another risk, should automakers offer extensive discounts, is that customers could want the same incentives over the longer term. Mark Wakefield, a managing director at consultancy AlixPartners said: “Those things are hard to walk back.”

    “Competition for these off-lease customers will be fierce,” Cox Automotive economist Charlie Smoke said in late April. When times are tough, Americans have been known to flock to used cars. 

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    We have been keeping a close eye on the auto market throughout the coronavirus crisis.

    “There are basically no sales,” we wrote about the auto industry heading into April. One automotive researcher said of the industry-wide crisis: “The whole world is turned upside down right now.”

    Recall we just wrote that ships full of cars were being denied entry to ports in California due to the massive inventory glut. Such was the case on April 24 when a cargo of 2,000 Nissan SUVs was approaching the port of Los Angeles. They were told to drop anchor about a mile from the port and remain there.

    John Felitto, a senior vice president for the U.S. unit of Norwegian shipping company Wallenius Wilhelmsen said:

    “Dealers aren’t really accepting cars and fleet sales are down because rental-car and fleet operators aren’t taking delivery either. This is different from anything we’ve seen before. Everyone is full to the brim.”


    Tyler Durden

    Thu, 05/07/2020 – 20:05

  • Governor Pritzker's Plan To Reopen Illinois Makes No Sense
    Governor Pritzker’s Plan To Reopen Illinois Makes No Sense

    Authored by Mark Glennon via wirepoints.org,

    Governor JB Pritzker earlier made the extraordinary request for courts to rule that he may extend his sweeping emergency powers as long as he chooses, which would set a horrible precedent.

    This week he released his plan for reopening the state, called Restore Illinois, that likewise may delay that date forever.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    The plan is senseless.

    Extension of the plan’s logic would mean that countless activities we routinely engage in despite some level of risk should be banned until the risk is eliminated. For example, driving fatalities have dropped significantly due to travel restrictions now in place. Those travel restrictions should not be lifted, if the same thinking behind the plan is used, until cars are made entirely safe or fatalities drop to zero.

    Under the plan, the state would not return to normalcy and the emergency rules would not be lifted – called Phase 5 under the plan — until various conditions are met. They might well never be met, and in any event likely would take many months.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Among those conditions are that a vaccine or highly effective treatment becomes widely available or there are no new cases whatsoever over a sustained period. But we don’t know whether or when a vaccine will ever become available.

    “Seventeen years after the severe acute respiratory syndrome (Sars) outbreak and seven years since the first Middle East respiratory syndrome (Mers) case, there is still no vaccine despite dozens of attempts to develop them.”

    Nor is there any indication that a “highly effective” treatment will become available within any reasonable time. The efficacy of the two now most frequently discussed candidates, Remdesivir and hydroxychloroquine, are questionable at best.

    That means no full reopening until there are no new cases over a sustained period of time which, almost certainly, will never happen. Complete elimination is a goal that is both senseless and impossible.

    Still more conditions must be met under the plan before we can return to normalcy, or even to advance to earlier phases. To move from Phase 3 to Phase 4 requires, among other things, contact tracing and monitoring within 24 hours of diagnosis for more than 90% of cases in region.

    But contact tracing means hiring what Pritzker called an “army” of new workers to track contact with victims, which will cost $80 million.  And how are we going to get 90% of victims to sign up for contact tracing? Won’t well more than 10% opt out of participating because of privacy concerns, whether real or imagined?

    Moving from Phase 3 to Phase 4 would also require a positivity rate of no more than 20% increasing no more than 10 percentage points over a 14-day period. I for one see no reliable significance in the positivity rate, which is the percentage of those getting tested who are positive for the disease. That number will be pushed and pulled in different directions depending on changes in where testing is concentrated, on whom and the volume of testing. If a particular region begins focusing on problem hotspots, for example, the rate would spike up, though that might not be representative of the region as a whole.

    Each movement from one phase to another is subject to still other requirements that may be difficult to fulfill, which you can read in the plan.

    The phases may be implemented by region, a feature no doubt resulting from criticism of Pritzker’s a one-size-fits all approach that clearly was not appropriate for rural areas with few infections. But regions under the new plan are huge – too huge to make any sense — just four for the whole state. The Chicago region, for example, includes rural areas of Grundy County far southwest of the city and McHenry County all the way to the Wisconsin border. Businesses in those areas are already complaining that the one-size-fits-all problem is not solved by Pritzker’s new plan.

    Pritzker on Wednesday gave this answer to a question about what restaurants are supposed to do that have little hope under the plan that they could reopen before they go bankrupt: “Well, my first response to that is that I’m not the one that’s writing those rules for restaurants and bars, it is doctors and epidemiologists that I’m listening to.”

    No, he makes the rules. It’s his plan. “The buck stops with me,” he said on April 8.

    Insofar as he is relying on experts, he is picking which ones, and they evidently don’t include anybody who factors in lost lives from a devastated economy.

    That’s perhaps the most frustrating position that many hold – failing to recognize that a poor economy kills people, too. You’d think that would be particularly obvious given the extensive publicity about Chicago’s life expectancy gap between rich and poor, the worst in the country. And decades of research have shown that people living in lower GDP economies have shorter life spans. We face a downturn perhaps as bad as the Great Depression, according to many experts, which will make most everybody poorer.

    Let’s be clear: Nobody is advocating for full reopening now. Most of the social distancing measures common across the nation make sense for now, in my view. Strict caution should be taken by and on behalf of the high-risk groups – older people and those with known comorbidities. For younger people with no health problems, the risks are tiny. If, however, they are moving around in public, both they and those in high risk groups need to avoid the other.

    Pick which experts you think are most credible. See what states have more balanced approaches. Look at alternative plans that will be coming. I am not judging any of that. The point, instead, is to say there’s one approach that’s clearly senseless, and that’s Pritzker’s.


    Tyler Durden

    Thu, 05/07/2020 – 19:45

  • 'Blame China, Save The Economy' – Trump Campaign Embraces New 2020 Messaging
    ‘Blame China, Save The Economy’ – Trump Campaign Embraces New 2020 Messaging

    Looking ahead to November, President Trump now finds himself in an unenviable position for an incumbent. The clock has struck midnight, and Trump’s heavily-stimulated growth-oriented economy has turned into a pumpkin, so to speak. Looking back over the last half-century, two one-term presidents offer obvious comparisons: George HW Bush, and Jimmy Carter.

    Trump knows that being remembered as an ineffectual one-termer like Carter would almost be worse than never having won the presidency in the first place. Fortunately, unlike his two predecessors mentioned above, Trump has accomplished something unique: He’s made wariness of China a major pillar of American foreign policy, giving the US a nation-state foe for the first time since the years following 9/11. And the obvious parallels make a comparison to the Soviet Union sound more appropriate. Trump’s claim last night that the coronavirus is the worst attack on the US since Pearl Harbor appeared to resonate not only with Trump’s base, but with the crucial swing voters in the Midwest and elsewhere. Without them, Trump is doomed. And as it turns out, they have more trust in Trump to lead the economy back to growth and confront China, than they do in Joe Biden.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Using these data as a guide, Trump’s campaign team has crafted a two-pronged message that they believe will resonate particularly well in the Swing States this fall.

    Several Trump aides say their 2020 campaign will now be chiefly defined by two themes: Trump is the only candidate who can resurrect the economy and that Biden will not be as tough on China, a country Trump is blaming for the pandemic.

    It is a message resonating with Trump’s base, according to interviews with more than 50 voters in three swing counties in the battleground states of Pennsylvania, Michigan and Wisconsin – states Trump won in 2016 by less than a percentage point and that will decide whether he can win a second term.

    Because the inescapable truth is: No matter how many times progressive blue checks insist that referring to SARS-CoV-2 as the “Wuhan Virus” is “racist”, and that the intensity of the outbreak is entirely Trump’s fault, most Americans blame China for unleashing the virus on the world, and rightfully so.

    This “new messaging” on Chin is being circulated to Republican leaders around the country so everybody can get on the same page .

    Trump officials say the new messaging, being sent to Republican state leaders across the country and pushed in new anti-Biden ads across swing states, reflects internal and external polling data that shows voters trust Trump more on the economy, and that Americans across party lines distrust China.

    “Voters know China was a bad actor on the virus. The president made clear to pinpoint China as the origin of the virus,” said Tim Murtaugh, the Trump campaign’s spokesman. “We’re going to push this.”

    Whereas the Biden campaign’s message is far more muddy: essentially, it relies on blaming Trump for the coronavirus, something that’s simply not going to fly with Trump’s base and many swing voters, who have been primed to be suspicious of China since Trump first started rising in the polls during the 2016 GOP primary..

    TJ Ducklo, Biden’s campaign spokesman, described Trump’s response to the crisis as a “disaster.” He accused Trump of being “duped” by China earlier this year and pointed to the fact that Trump heaped praise on Chinese President Xi Jinping’s handling of the outbreak during January and February.

    “This election will be a referendum on Donald Trump’s historic failures as president,” Ducklo said.

    One swing voter who says he voted for Obama twice before picking Trump in 2016 told Reuters that he would “definitely” trust Trump more than Biden when it comes to dealing with the Chinese.

    “I definitely want Trump fighting against China rather than Biden, by far,” said Engelmann, 50, who works for a food distribution company in Racine County, Wisconsin.

    But Republicans can still screw it all up – which is why disseminating the nuanced talking points is important. As Llyod Blankfein explained earlier, those who frame their reopening arguments around concepts like individual liberty or economic blowback risk sounding unbelievably callous. And any hint that the virus is “a hoax” risks reviving accusations of denialism that will inevitably resonate with those who have lost loved ones to the virus.

    Lee Snover, head of the Republican Party in Northampton County, Pennsylvania, recently lost her father to COVID-19, the respiratory disease caused by the novel coronavirus, and could not be at his deathbed. She said Republicans needed to be careful about going too far in criticizing the economic shutdown and dismissing the health risks.

    “Yes, we need to reopen the economy, but we also need to recognize that the virus is real and poses a threat.”

    With unemployment likely headed to the highest level since the Great Depression (something that might not necessarily be fully reflected in the data), polls suggest that voters trust Trump to create jobs more than they trust Biden. And of course, Biden’s shady business dealings involving China certainly don’t help.

    In the latest Reuters/Ipsos poll conducted Monday and Tuesday, 45% of Americans said Trump would be better at creating jobs, compared with 32% who thought Biden would be better at it.

    Trump’s campaign aides also see rising anger with China over the coronavirus as an opening. Trump in recent weeks has ramped up his criticism of Beijing and threatened new tariffs on China, and officials said they were considering retaliatory measures against China over the outbreak.

    A Pew Research Center survey in late April showed two-thirds of Americans viewed China unfavorably now, up 20 points since the start of the Trump administration in January 2017.

    Starting next week, messaging on China will be sent to Republican state party officials, accusing China of costing American lives and that “Joe Biden is good for China but bad for America,” one campaign aide said.

    Still, public frustration is high. Just like they did in 2016, the Dems have fielded an elderly white candidate who does little to inspire the party’s base (though Biden is probably a better politician than Hillary Clinton, his performance so far suggests that he has cognitive abilities have deteriorated since he left office (or at least since the last time he was up on a debate stage in 2012).

    Trump still needs to convince these voters that he can be – as many have said – a “uniter” and overcome the partisan gridlock in Washington to actually get things done.

    Duane Miller, 82, a Northampton County resident who voted for Trump in 2016, said he was sickened by how both parties had politicized the coronavirus crisis.

    “If I had to vote today – and I’ve been voting for decades – I probably would not even vote.”

    Playing the blame game and picking petty fights with the press make Trump seem less like a dignified leader and more like a petulant child. Trump must inspire confidence that he can step up and lead when times get tough.


    Tyler Durden

    Thu, 05/07/2020 – 19:25

  • Here's Where Friday's Employment Report Could Really Disappoint
    Here’s Where Friday’s Employment Report Could Really Disappoint

    Authored by Bryce Coward via Knowledge Leaders Capital blog,

    Given the surge in unemployment claims over the last month the US unemployment rate is expected to rise to 16% in April from just 4.4% in March. Shocking as that number is, we have no problem with that forecast.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    But for some reason economists surveyed by Bloomberg expect average hourly earnings to grow at +3.3% year-over-year in April compared to 3.1% in March, and they expect average weekly hours of 33.6 in April compared to 34.2 in March.

    I do wonder how it can be that the unemployment rate will shoot up to a post-war high and yet those employees who were not furloughed or laid off will, in aggregate, have the near the same level of hours and earnings as before. After all, Google search trends for the terms “pay cut” and “hours cut” have reached an all-time high in recent weeks.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Moreover, the idea that average hourly earnings will actually increase sequentially in April for those employees who did keep their jobs is wholly inconsistent with consumer survey data.

    For example, when I compare University of Michigan Consumer Expectations to average hourly earnings then it looks like we should be expecting something closer to just 2.5% year-over-year growth.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    2.5% year-over-year growth would equate to a month-over-month decline of -0.78%.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    That would be the largest month-over-month decline on record…by a mile..and I suspect there is even downside to that figure as well given Google search trends.

    Now, in fairness, the University of Michigan consumer survey appears to be more in line with the estimated decline in average weekly hours.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    But the Google search trends shown above still suggests a rather large decline in hours worked.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Putting these items together – overall employment times wages times and hours worked – the nominal income generated from employment in April is likely to be fully 14% lower than year ago levels… nearly 3 orders of magnitude worse than the worst readings of 2009.

    Aside from the collapse in earnings which everyone seems to be ignoring, Goldman estimates nonfarm payrolls declined by 24 million in April (vs. consensus of -21.7mn), reflecting a surge in business closures and temporary layoffs related to the coronavirus. Additionally, Goldman notes that alternative data sources such as Google Mobility, Homebase, and Nielsen all indicate job losses of 24 million or more.

    Arguing for a weaker report:

    • Big Data. As shown in Exhibit 1, four timely employment measures all indicate an unprecedented scale of monthly job loss. For example, an online survey by University of Chicago economists using the Nielsen Homescan panel found that 24 million people had lost their job by early April. With the exception of ADP (-20.2mn private payrolls, mom sa), these data all point to worse-than-consensus jobs number in tomorrow’s report. Relatedly, early April job losses in Canada exceeding 4mn would imply a US payroll decline on the order of 40mn in tomorrow’s report (simply based on the relative size of the two economies). By industry, these data suggest that job loss has been particularly pronounced in the food services, accommodation, recreation services, social assistance, and temporary help sub-industries.

    Exhibit 1: Alternative Data Indicates April Job Losses of 24 Million or More

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Source: Bureau of Labor Statistics, Bloomberg LP, Haver Analytics, Department of Commerce, Goldman Sachs Global Investment Research, University of Chicago, ADP, Google, Homebase, Nielsen

    • Jobless claims. Continuing claims rose by 16.2mn from survey week to survey week (sa), and 23.4 million more initial jobless claims were filed during the April payroll month than a year ago (nsa). Given widespread filing and processing delays, we place more weight on the former measure. Relatedly, we also note that some of the 6.3mn initial claims filings during the subsequent two weeks reflected layoff activity during the April payroll month.

    • Business Closures. We believe the BLS is likely to impute zero employment for many of the “non-essential” businesses that were unable to complete the survey this month—echoing the approach adopted in the aftermath of Hurricane Katrina.

    • Employer surveys. Business activity surveys declined in April, and the employment components of our survey trackers plummeted (non-manufacturing -14.1 to 33.7, all-time low; manufacturing -12.4 to 34.2, low since April 2009).

    • Job cuts. Announced layoffs reported by Challenger, Gray & Christmas jumped by 262% in April to 652k (mom, sa by GS) on top of its 298% increase in March.

    Arguing for a stronger report:

    • Census hiring. In one of the few sub-industries with positive gains, Census temporary workers are set to rise by roughly 4k.

    Neutral factors:

    • Job availability. The Conference Board labor differential—the difference between the percent of respondents saying jobs are plentiful and those saying jobs are hard to get—plummeted from 29.5 to -13.6, though it remains well above its Financial Crisis levels (-42.1 in 2009).

    • ADP. The payroll-processing firm ADP reported a 20.2mn drop in April private employment. While this would imply a better-than-consensus reading for private payrolls tomorrow, ADP noted that the report “does not reflect the full impact” of the coronavirus, and we place little weigh on the measure this month.

    While declining self-employment due to the virus suggests an even larger drop in the household measure of employment (than the 24mn we expect for nonfarm payrolls), we expect some individuals to classify themselves as “employed but not at work.” We also expect the participation rate to decline several points on account of the virus, which should also limit the magnitude of the increase in the jobless rate. Taken together, we estimate the unemployment rate rose almost 10 points to 14%.

    In interpreting tomorrow’s report, we will pay special attention to the composition of the household survey, specifically the number of unemployed workers on furlough or temporary layoff (which spiked to 1,848k in March, see left panel of Exhibit 2).

    Exhibit 2: Temporary Layoffs May Be Key to Avoiding a Prolonged Downturn

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Over the last 50 years, the three recessions with the highest share of temporary layoffs were followed by the fastest labor market recoveries (both absolutely and relative to consensus forecasts at the time, see right panel above).

    And in case you were wondering just how long these shockingly high levels of unemployment will be with us, here is Morgan Stanley’s best guess…

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    In their absolute best-case scenario, employment will not be back to pre-COVID norms until after the election. In a bear-case, this elevated jobless level could become the new normal.


    Tyler Durden

    Thu, 05/07/2020 – 19:05

  • Texas' Anti-Climactic Reopening: Malls & Restaurants Empty, Beaches & Parks Packed
    Texas’ Anti-Climactic Reopening: Malls & Restaurants Empty, Beaches & Parks Packed

    As predicted, even when the economy finally opens back up across the US, the severe hit which has already seen a number of major retailers file for bankruptcy – with Nieman Marcus being the latest Thursday, it won’t mark the end of the financial pain. 

    Take Texas, an early state to rapidly east pandemic restrictions and hoped for test case in terms of seeing its economy roar back to life: as of last Friday during a ‘phase 1’ reopening malls, department stores, restaurants, and even movie theaters were able to finally open their doors (these are all allowed 25% of capacity seating per phase 1 restrictions). 

    And yet, as Reuters details while visiting the major metropolitan Domain mall in Austin, Texas, customers are still staying home, hardly to be seen

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    File image via Getty

    The situation appears bleak, and is a strong negative indicator for the entire country’s ‘reopening’ and economic recovery prospects

    A dozen or so people were strolling about the sprawling open-air shopping center Monday afternoon, with three seated on the patio of a Tex-Mex restaurant. Only one shopper wore a mask, and the loudest noises were from songbirds perched in the live oak trees along the deserted pedestrian thoroughfares.

    “I’ve seen one customer today – they didn’t buy anything,” said Taylor Jund, who was keeping watch over an empty Chaser clothing store. “There’s absolutely no one coming around here.”

    Restaurants have been allowed to reopen but only allowing for 25% capacity inside dining, with many also removing many tables and chairs to create natural social distancing in their seating and floor plans. 

    “It’s sad to know that this is the first Monday we’ve reopened, and a lot of the places are still very empty,” one food distribution company official that supplies Houston area restaurants said of the painfully slow, anti-climactic return to business. “I’m a little shocked it’s so dead out.”

    There are venues which have witnessed an explosion of returned ‘normal’ activity, however — beaches, public and state parks, lakes, rivers and nature areas.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Crowds flock to Galveston Beach on May 2 in Galveston, Texas, AFP via Getty.

    These are places where social distancing can be more easily practiced, without the dystopian-feeling scene of Plexiglas barriers separating one from a fellow diner sitting at a restaurant bar. 

    The state’s phase 2 opening is expected for May 18, however as Governor Greg Abbot said, “We need to see two weeks of data to confirm no flare-up of COVID-19,” which will determine whether it goes forward as planned. 

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Austin’s Domain Mall this week, via Reuters.

    Meanwhile, phase 2 reopening looks optimistic regardless

    Texas Governor Greg Abbott modified his COVID-19 executive orders on Thursday, effectively setting free a woman jailed for refusing to close her business. Dallas salon owner Shelley Luther is serving a seven-day jail sentence for violating statewide stay-at-home orders. She reopened her business nearly two weeks ago and publicly tore up a cease-and-desist letter ordering her to close.

    Abbott modified his orders to eliminate confinement as a punishment, and specifically named Luther in his announcement. The modifications are being applied retroactively to April 2, according to a press release from his office.

    With such legal repercussions for reopening now greatly softened in Texas, the rush will be on, but will customers and clients actually return? 


    Tyler Durden

    Thu, 05/07/2020 – 18:45

Digest powered by RSS Digest

Today’s News 7th May 2020

  • 20 Years Of Putin
    20 Years Of Putin

    Today, May 7, 2020, marks twenty years since Vladimir Putin first assumed office as President of Russia and, as this infographic shows, he will have served 24.7 years in power by the end of his current stint in 2024.

    Infographic: 20 Years of Putin | Statista

    You will find more infographics at Statista

    As Statista’s Martin Armstrong notes, this will bring him close to the length of time Joseph Stalin controlled the Kremlin – 26 years from 1927 to 1953. Even that now looks likely to be beaten by the former KGB agent though after sweeping constitutional changes this year that appear designed to prolong his stay in power.

    While it is still unclear which role Putin has in his sights post-2024, this isn’t the first time he has changed the rules to extend his grip on Russian power. During Medvedev’s term a President from 2008 to 2012 the law was changed to extend the presidential term from four to six years.

    The new legislation conveniently first came into effect when Putin switched back into the presidential role in 2012.


    Tyler Durden

    Thu, 05/07/2020 – 02:45

  • COVID-19 "Nonsense" Is Exposing Britain's Once-Reliable Office Of National Statistics
    COVID-19 “Nonsense” Is Exposing Britain’s Once-Reliable Office Of National Statistics

    Authored by Iain Davis via Off-Guardian.org,

    The mortality statistics for COVID 19 have been incessantly hammered into our heads by the mainstream media (MSM). Every day they report these hardest of facts to justify the lockdown (house arrest) and to prove to us that living in abject fear of the COVID 19 syndrome is the only sensible reaction.

    Apparently, only the most lucrative vaccine ever devised can possibly save us.

    The COVID 19 mortality statistics are the reason millions will undoubtedly download contact tracing (State surveillance) apps. This will help the vaccinated to secure their very own immunity passports (identity papers) and enable them to prove they are allowed to exist in the post-COVID 19 society, whenever the State demands to see their authorisation.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    But how reliable are these statistics?

    What do they really tell us about what is happening outside the confines of our incarceration?

    Do they reveal the harsh reality of an unprecedented deadly virus sweeping the nation or does the story of how they have been manipulated, inflated, fudged and exploited tell us something else?

    THE ONCE RELIABLE OFFICE OF NATIONAL STATISTICS

    In order to register a death in England and Wales, under normal circumstances, a qualified doctor needs to record the cause of death on the Medical Certificate of Cause of Death (MCCD).

    They must then notify the Medical Examiner for a corroborating opinion. Providing the doctor is clear on the cause of death and no irregularities or suspicions are noted, if the Medical Examiner concurs, there is no need to refer the death to a coroner.

    The second opinion of the Medical Examiner (another qualified doctor) was introduced in 2016 following a series of high profile systemic abuses. The mass murderer Dr Harold Shipman, and doctors at Mid Staffordshire NHS Foundation Trust and Southern Health NHS Trust, covered up crimes and widespread malpractice by improperly completing MCCDs.

    Today, once the Medical Examiner agrees, they then discuss the death with a qualified informant. This is usually someone who knows the deceased. It is an opportunity, more often than not, for a family member or friend to discuss any concerns about the suggested cause of death. If no further issues are raised, the death certificate can be issued to the informant, the Local Registrar notified and the death recorded.

    Registered deaths have been recorded in England and Wales since 1837. From 1911 onward the cause of death has been coded in accordance with the International Classification of Diseases (ICD). Maintaining registration records was the responsibility of the General Register Office until 1970 when it became a department of the Office of Population Censuses and Surveys (OPCS). In 1996 the OPCS merged with the Central Statistical Office (CSO) to form the Office of National Statistics (ONS).

    There have been some tweaks and legislative changes to the system over the years.

    Technology has sped things up a bit, but essentially the simple process of recording registered deaths has changed little over the last century. The ONS have been accurately recording registered deaths in England and Wales for more than 23 years.

    From a statistical perspective this consistent, verifiable system has allowed meaningful analysis to inform public health practice and policy for decades. The inbuilt safeguards, maintained and improved over the years, means the ONS provide some of the most reliable mortality statistics in the world.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    They record all registered deaths no matter where they occurred in England and Wales. Whether the deceased died in hospital, a care home or in the community, once registration is complete the ONS add it to their statistics.

    For weekly statistics the ONS week runs from Saturday to Friday and the statistics are released 11 days after the week ending date. There may be an additional lag for a small number of more complex cases. However, all are eventually resolved and the ONS record the registration of the death in the week it was notified. The ONS also release mortality statistics on a monthly, quarterly and annual basis for comparison.

    This does not suit a hungry MSM eager to sensationalise reported COVID 19 deaths. Nor does it serve the immediate interests of State officials who want the public to accept their own house arrest.

    Consequently the MSM have reported COVID 19 mortality statistics from a variety of sources. Some from the NHS, some from the Department of Health and Social Care (DHSC) and eventually the ONS.

    Now the Care Quality Commission have also been thrown into the mix.

    Ultimately, all of these deaths will be registered. The ONS will record them and it will be possible to know how many died, the causes of death and the trends identified.

    Except in the case of COVID 19.

    THE VAGUE CASE OF A COVID 19 DEATH

    The Coronavirus Act 2020 received Royal assent on March 25th. This had significant implications for the registration of deaths and the accuracy of ONS data in relation to COVID 19.

    Not only did the act indemnify all NHS doctors against any claims of negligence during the lockdown, it also removed the need for a jury led inquest. Effectively, only in the case of death from the notifiable disease of COVID 19. Worrying as these elements of the legislation are, they are just part of a raft of changes singling out registered COVID 19 deaths as unusually imprecise.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    The NHS issued guidance to assist doctors to comply with the new legislation. Any doctor can sign the MCCD. There is no need for the scrutiny of a second Medical Examiner. The Medical Examiner, or any other doctor, can sign the MCCD alone. The safeguards introduced in 2016 were removed, but only in the case of COVID 19.

    Doctors do not necessarily need to have examined the deceased prior to signing the MCCD. If it is considered impractical for the doctor who last saw the deceased to complete the MCCD, providing they report that the deceased probably had COVID 19, any other qualified doctor can sign the death certificate as a COVID 19 death.

    There is no requirement for any signing doctor to have even seen the deceased prior to issuing the MCCD. A video link consultation within the 4 week period leading up to the patient’s death, is deemed sufficient for them to pronounce death from COVID 19.

    If that were not tenuous enough, as long as the signing doctor believes the death was from COVID 19, potentially absent any examination at all, perhaps simply by reviewing the patient’s case notes, if a coroner agrees, a COVID 19 death can still be registered.

    The coroner’s agreement is practically a fait accomplis. On the 26th March the UK State released guidance from the Chief Coroner. This was intended as advice to all coroners in cases of COVID 19 referral.

    There were some notable changes to normal coronal procedures. Paragraph 5 strongly reminded coroners of their obligation to maintain judicial conduct. It stated:

    The Chief Coroner cannot envisage a situation in the current pandemic where a coroner should be engaging in interviews with the media or making any public statements to the press.”

    This thinly veiled threat to coroners made it clear that speaking out about any concerns would be considered a breech of judicial conduct. A career-ending act it would seem.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Social distancing is essential

    The NHS guidance advised that if no signing doctor has seen the deceased prior to registration of death, a referral to the coroner must be made. This is a procedural recommendation, not a legal requirement. A legal requirement is only applicable in cases of unknown or suspicious causes of death. In turn, the Chief Coroner’s guidance states:

    “COVID-19 is a naturally occurring disease and therefore is capable of being a natural cause of death […] the aim of the system should be that every death from COVID-19 which does not in law require referral to the coroner should be dealt with via the MCCD process.”

    The Coronavirus Act 2020 also meant that a qualified informant, who agrees with the cause of death on the MCCD, no longer needed to be anyone acquainted with the deceased. A hospital official, someone who is ‘in charge of a body’ or a funeral director can perform this vital function. The Chief Coroner advised:

    “For registration: where next of kin/informant are following self-isolation procedures, the arrangement for relatives (etc) should be for an alternative informant who has not been in contact with the patient to collect the MCCD and deliver to the registrar for registration purposes. The provisions in the Coronavirus Act will enable this to be done electronically as directed by the Registrar General.”

    Most relatives, or someone acquainted with the deceased, will be following self-isolation procedures. They will almost certainly be terrified of contracting COVID19 because they have just been told their loved one or friend died from it. Furthermore, the Coronavirus Act has effectively placed them under house arrest.

    In other words, if the MCCD signing doctor hasn’t seen the patient, while they were alive, no further inquiry is necessary. The qualified informant can be someone who has neither met the deceased nor knows anything about the circumstances surrounding their death.

    In this situation, but only for COVID19 deaths, it is fine to assume the death was from the disease. If you, the coroner, don’t like the idea, don’t make a fuss. Just sign the damn thing or else.

    IMPACTING THE COVID19 STATISTICS

    This quite bizarre death registration process compelled the ONS to issue guidance to doctors signing MCCDs. Not only is there no need for an examination to pronounce death from COVID19, nor is there any necessity for a positive test or even an indicative CT scan.

    In their guidance the ONS advised doctors on what constitutes an acceptable underlying cause of death. When mortality statistics are used for research it is usually the most relevant factor. The vast majority of COVID19 deaths reported by the State and the MSM also reflect its identification as the underlying cause.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    The World Health Organisation (WHO) define this as:

    “The disease or injury which initiated the train of morbid events leading directly to death.”

    For COVID19, this determination can be based upon the clinical judgement of a doctor who has never met the deceased. Quite possibly following nothing more than a video link consultation or a case note review of symptoms.

    The problem is the symptoms of COVID19 are largely indistinguishable from a range of other respiratory illnesses. A study from the University of Toronto found:

    “The symptoms can vary, with some patients remaining asymptomatic, while others present with fever, cough, fatigue, and a host of other symptoms. The symptoms may be similar to patients with influenza or the common cold.”

    Nor is there any requirement for a post mortem to confirm the presence of COVID19. Guidance from the Royal College of Pathologists states:

    “If a death is believed to be due to confirmed COVID-19 infection, there is unlikely to be any need for a post-mortem examination to be conducted and the Medical Certificate of Cause of Death should be issued.”

    Clear causation between the underlying cause and the direct cause is imperative to establish the fact. Just because someone tested positive for the SARS-CoV-2 (SC2) virus it doesn’t mean they developed the associated syndrome of COVID19.

    The Oxford Centre for Evidence Based Medicine found that anything between 5% – 80% of people who tested positive for SC2 did not have any symptoms of COVID19. Asymptomatic people do not have a disease which impacts their health in the short term. Even for those who did test positive for SC2, claims that this was the underlying cause of death are dubious in an unknown number of cases.

    Following the Coronavirus Act, in keeping with advice from the NHS, the ONS advised doctors:

    “If before death the patient had symptoms typical of COVID-19 infection, but the test result has not been received, it would be satisfactory to give ‘COVID-19’ as the cause of death….In the circumstances of there being no swab, it is satisfactory to apply clinical judgement.”

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    This isn’t unique to COVID19. Doctors are required to complete MCCDs “to the best of their knowledge and belief” even when test results may not yet be available. The difference in the case of COVID19 is that all the normal requirements for qualified confirmatory opinions and every opportunity to question the cause of death have been removed.

    In addition, the need to complete Cremation form 5, requiring a second medical opinion, has been suspended for all COVID19 deaths. Given that post mortem confirmation is also extremely unlikely and agreement from a coroner is all but assured, this means possible COVID19 decedents can be cremated without any clear evidence they ever had the disease.

    In light of all the other registration oddities for determining COVID19 mortality, the direct causation, proving COVID19 was the underlying cause of death, appears extremely doubtful. We just don’t know how many people have died from COVID19. We are told many people have, but we cannot state with any certainty what the numbers are. Neither can the ONS.

    Obviously concerned about the implications, the Royal College of Pathologists (RCPath) have called for a systemic post outbreak review. The Health Service Journal reports that the RCPath expects a detailed investigation into causes of death due to the degree of uncertainty.

    STATISTICALLY IT GETS WORSE

    The overwhelming majority of medical and care staff, coroners, pathologists, ONS statisticians and funeral directors have no desire to mislead anyone. However, in the case of COVID19 deaths, the State has created a registration system so ambiguous it is virtually useless. The statistical product recorded by the ONS, despite their best efforts, is correspondingly vacuous.

    This hasn’t stopped the State and the MSM from reporting every death as proof of the deadliness of COVID19. Claims of COVID19 as the underlying cause of death should be treated with considerable scepticism.

    Initially the daily reports were based upon the figures of COVID19 deaths released by the NHS via the DHSC. These were the numbers with positive test results. The ONS also recorded positive test registrations from the NHS, care settings and the community.

    As discussed, a positive test for SC2 doesn’t necessarily mean you suffered any health impact from COVID19. In addition, the test itself has proved to have a varying degree of reliability.

    Nonetheless, the ONS figures from all settings, were higher than those reported by the MSM and the State in their daily briefings. However, the reliance upon positive tests changed on March 29th.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    The State instructed the ONS not only to record all registered COVID19 deaths, where positive tests results were known, but also where COVID19 was merely suspected. In combination with the possibly spurious attribution from hospitals, this ‘mention’ of COVID19, further distanced the statistics from clear, confirmed causes of death.

    This prompted a significant increase in the COVID19 fatalities reported by the ONS. Not because more people were dying from it, but because the categorisation of COVID19 deaths had changed. Any mention of COVID19 anywhere on the death certificate, regardless of other comorbidities, such as heart failure or cancer, were now recorded as registered COVID19 deaths by the ONS.

    This addition of claimed COVID19 deaths has punctuated the ONS data throughout the outbreak. While we are told by the MSM that these new figures better reflect the reality of COVID19 mortality, in truth we are moving further away from any meaningful record.

    The evidence suggests the methodology has been altered at opportune moments to inflate and maintain the mortality statistics. Just after the virus peak of infection and the start of the lockdown, the State instructed the ONS to include suspected “mentions” of COVID19. Again, as the recorded numbers of deaths were dropping, the State started releasing more figures from the care sector. From April 29th they have introduced additional figures provided by the Care Quality Commission (CQC).

    If the figures from the NHS are at best questionable, the figures from the CQC run the risk of moving us into fantasy land. All the same problems of decedents not being seen, video consultations, lack of corroborative medical opinion and so forth remain. However, in care settings the onus for signing MCCDs shifts from hospital doctors to General Practitioners (GP’s).

    The CQC is the independent regulator of health and social care in England. During the COVID19 outbreak it has not required care homes or community care providers to notify them of suspected cases. It has also suspended all inspections.

    From the 29th April the CQC will provide statistics to the ONS where a “care home provider has stated COVID-19 as a suspected or confirmed cause of death.” This notification is made online via the CQC’s Provider Portal. Provisional figures will be included in the ONS daily updates.

    The CQC is tasked with making sure decedents from care homes who died in hospital are removed from the reports before submitting them to the ONS. Otherwise massive duplication will occur. We can only hope statisticians will be extremely diligent.

    The ONS has reported what these statistics from the CQC will be based upon. Frankly, it makes jaw dropping reading. The ONS state:

    “The inclusion of a death in the published figures as being the result of COVID-19 is based on the statement of the care home provider, which may or may not correspond to a medical diagnosis or test result, or be reflected in the death certification.”

    Most care home providers are not medically trained. Their judgement regarding whether or not the decedent had COVID19 may well be the result of a once weekly phone call with a GP. Guidance to GP’s from NHS England states that Possible COVID19 patients should be identified primarily by weekly check-ins online.

    This is in keeping with the NHS Key Principles of General Practice, in relation to COVID19, which states:

    Remote consultations should be used when possible. Consider the use of video consultations when appropriate.”

    The ONS add:

    There is no validation built into the quality of data on collection. Fields may be left blank or may contain information that is contradictory, and this may not be resolved at the point of publication. Most pertinent to this release are place of death and whether the death was as a result of confirmed or suspected coronavirus.

    This is the system the CQC will use to collect the data for the ONS reports. Once someone, either in a care home or cared for in the community, is assumed to have died of COVID19, based upon the best guess of the care provider following a chat with a local GP, in keeping with the process we have already discussed, their MCCD will be signed off as a COVID19 death.

    The ONS will add their death to the COVID19 statistics and the State and the MSM will report them to the public as confirmed COVID19 mortality.

    How anyone can consider the statistics from care providers an accurate and reliable record of COVID19 deaths is difficult to envisage. Nonetheless, that is what we are asked to believe.

    THE STATE AND MSM COVID19 FUDGE

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    All we are able to identify with any certainty are the total number of of all deaths, called all cause mortality, reported by the ONS. We cannot be confident about what caused those deaths during the COVID19 outbreak.

    The State has presided over a truly remarkable bastardisation of the ONS data for COVID19. This has not only rendered records of COVID19 deaths a statistical black hole but, during the claimed pandemic, has also made the ONS data for other causes of excess mortality practically unknowable.

    Especially for the ONS, any chance of accurately separating COVID19 deaths from other causes of mortality has been completely obliterated by State diktat. For the first time in their history the ONS are reporting a relatively large number of highly dubious registered causes of death. However, they remain our best hope of knowing how many people have passed away.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    In the meantime, while we wait for the ONS data to emerge, the MSM are reporting every COVID19 death from any source they can find. Some are vaguely confirmed and some not. They are also reporting suspected COVID19 deaths from care homes, provisional figures from the NHS , the CQC and then the same figures again from the DHSC and later the ONS.

    The narrative they are presenting, on the back of this hodgepodge of statistical irrelevance, is designed to convince the public of the severity of the outbreak in the UK. There is clearly high excess mortality at the moment. Thanks to the lockdown, this is happening while the NHS is essentially closed to everyone other than suspected COVID19 patients.

    Early studies have already predicted a significant health impact from the lack of essential health care caused by the lockdown. People requiring treatment for a range of other potentially fatal conditions aren’t getting it. This was acknowledged by the UK’s Chief Medical Officer Chris Witty in the daily briefing on April 30th:

    “…You have the direct deaths from coronavirus but also indirect deaths. Part of which is caused by the NHS and public health services not being able to do what they normally can to look after people with other conditions….It is therefore important…..to do the other important things like urgent cancer care, elective surgery and all the other thing like screening….which we need to do to keep people healthy.”

    How many people have died of other causes, due to the lockdown, only to be registered as COVID19 deaths? We just don’t know and the ONS have no way of finding out.

    However we do know, thanks to the ONS, the total all cause mortality as a percentage of population in England and Wales over recent decades. This analysis shows us, while excess mortality this year is high, it is by no means unprecedented. In fact, as a percentage of population, it is notably lower to the comparable years of 1995, 1996, 1998 and 1999. Yet none of these years necessitated the shut down of the economy nor the dire health consequences of closing the NHS to all but a few patients.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Between 27th March and 17th April (ONS weeks 14,15 & 16) the ONS registered 25,932 additional deaths above the statistical recent 5 year norm. Of these 11,427 recorded COVID19 as the sole mentioned underlying cause.

    We have just explored the considerable doubt about this attribution. However, if we accept this figure, it means the remaining 14,505 people died with other registered underlying causes. That means approximately 56% of additional excess mortality is attributable to something else, either in addition to or entirely separate from suggested COVID19.

    Given this inexplicable Spring mortality, it seems highly likely these are at least some of the indirect deaths the UK’s Chief Medical Officer spoke of. To claim all these excess deaths are the result of COVID19, as the State and MSM persistently do, is without any justification whatsoever.

    It is not possible to identify how many people have died as a direct result of COVID19 either from the registration of deaths or the resultant statistics. This is not the fault of medical practitioners or statisticians. It is caused by a State response to a claimed pandemic which has rendered the most crucial processes, and the data gleaned from them, a statistical nonsense.


    Tyler Durden

    Thu, 05/07/2020 – 02:00

  • China Readies Unveiling Of Stealth Nuclear Bomber Capable Of Reaching LA
    China Readies Unveiling Of Stealth Nuclear Bomber Capable Of Reaching LA

    President Trump is preparing to ‘turbocharge‘ deglobalization by removing critical supply chains from China could be seen with new rounds of tariffs to strike Beijing. Heighten tensions between Washington and Beijing are expected to develop over the summer months as the “evolution of the pandemic and economic crash appears to be deepening geopolitical tensions” between both countries, we noted Monday.

    In response to rising tensions, China decided to leak via “military sources” that it will unveil the Xian H-20 supersonic stealth bomber later this year, effectively doubling its country’s striking range. The bomber is expected to make its first public appearance in November at the Zhuhai Airshow, reported South China Morning Post (SCMP). 

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    H-20

    “The Zhuhai Airshow is expected to become a platform to promote China’s image and its success in pandemic control – telling the outside world that the contagion did not have any big impacts on the Chinese defense industry enterprises,” a source told SCMP.

    The emergence of the stealth bomber will increase tensions with Washington, considering the plane can strike Hawaii or Los Angeles with hypersonic or nuclear weapons. Australia, Japan, Guam, Philippines, and the Korean peninsula are other areas that the bomber could strike with air-launched missiles or smart bombs, many of these areas are home to US military bases. 

    “The Beijing leadership is still carefully considering whether its commission will affect regional balance, especially as regional tensions have been escalating over the Covid-19 pandemic,” another source said.

    “Like intercontinental ballistic missiles, all strategic bombers can be used for delivering nuclear weapons … if China claimed it had pursued a national defense policy which is purely defensive in nature, why would it need such an offensive weapon?” the source said. 

    The stealth bomber has a range of approximately 8,500 kilometers (5,300 miles). Hypersonic missiles can be stored in internal weapon bays, which could greatly expand the striking range. The arrival of the plane comes as tensions heat up in the Taiwan Strait and the South China Sea. 

    And it’s now clear why the US military elephant walked five dozen stealth jets and a bunch of B-52 bombers earlier this year as a show of force against Beijing. 

    Commissioning of the stealth bomber, along with increased production of the Chengdu J-20 stealth fighter jets, could further cement China’s fifth-generation fleet of aircraft that would be strong competitors against the “F-35 friend circle” that Washington has installed across Asia.  

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    H-20 (left) and J-20s (right) 

    And to make matters worse, an internal report presented to Chinese President Xi Jinping recommended that he must prepare the country for armed conflict with the US. 


    Tyler Durden

    Thu, 05/07/2020 – 01:00

  • America's Design Causes It To Fail The COVID-19 Challenge
    America’s Design Causes It To Fail The COVID-19 Challenge

    Authored by Eric Zuesse via The Strategic Culture Foundation,

    America isn’t the only country which is so corrupt as to stand at or near the top of the global coronavirus-infection rankings, but, as the June 2020 issue of The Atlantic headlines, “We Are Living in a Failed State: The coronavirus didn’t break America. It revealed what was already broken.” Why did this happen?

    Virtually all other industrialized countries have social-welfare systems in place, such as health-insurance covering 100% of the population; and, consequently, the residents there don’t lose their health insurance if they lose their job — they therefore aren’t desperate to show up for work even when they are sick or can spread an epidemic.

    Americans generally are desperate to go to work even if they might be spreading the coronavirus-19. They need the pay and the insurance coverage in order to be able to buy medical care. If they don’t pay for it they won’t get it. So: whomever does show up for work might reasonably be especially inclined to fear likely to catch the disease from a co-worker there. This is one of the many reasons why socializing the healthcare function is vastly more efficient than leaving it to market forces.

    On April 23rd, Reuters reported that, “U.S. workers who refuse to return to their jobs because they are worried about catching the coronavirus should not count on getting unemployment benefits, state officials and labor law experts say.”

    In such states, the unemployment-benefits system is being used as a cudgel so as to force employees back to work, and therefore to increase the percentage of the population who will become infected by the coronavirus-19.

    Furthermore, prisons are among the institutions that especially increase the spread of an epidemic such as Covid-19. And the United States has a higher percentage of its residents in prison than does any other country in the world. In fact, almost all of the Americans who are in prison are poor (since 100% of the poor cannot afford a lawyer), and the poorer a person is, the likelier that the individual is to get coronavirus-19.

    This is yet another reason why prisons are a prime place for the spread of the disease. And on April 26th, the New York Times headlined “As Coronavirus Strikes Prisons, Hundreds of Thousands Are Released: The virus has spread rapidly in overcrowded prisons across the world, leading governments to release inmates en masse.” Since America has more of its population in prison than any other country does (lots more: whereas “The world prison population rate, based on United Nations estimates of national population levels, is 145 per 100,000”, America has 655 per 100,000, or 4.5 prisoners for every 1.0 prisoner in the entire world), America has vastly more production of coronavirus-19 that’s generated by its being a police-state than any other country does — and this isn’t even taking into consideration the rotten, overburdened, health-care system, and the billionaire-propagandized public contempt for the poor, that characterize America’s culture, and that make those prisons, perhaps, the worst amongst industrialized nations.

    Furthermore, in America, “Approximately 95 percent of criminal cases are plea-bargained, in part because public defenders are too overwhelmed to take them to trial. ‘That means the state never even has to prove you did anything. They hold all the cards.’” So, the Constitutional protections, such as trial-by-jury and all of the other on-paper protections, don’t even apply, in reality, to at least 95% of criminal defendants. And, in many U.S. states, convicts — and even ex-convicts — aren’t allowed to vote. America’s billionaires also use many other ways to keep down the percentage of the poor who vote.

    Taken all together (and to list the other details would fill a book), America’s systematized intense discrimination against the poor constitutes virtually an invitation to this country’s having exceptional vulnerability to any epidemic. The fact that America now has 33.3% of the world’s coronavirus-19 cases, though only 4.2% of the world’s population, is actually systemic, and not merely particular to this moment in this country, and in the entire world. Donald Trump, and the current U.S. Congress, are part of a system of oppression, not really exceptions to it (such as the billionaires’ media pretend — with Democratic billionaires blaming “the Republicans,” and Republican billionaires blaming “the Democrats”). The way this Government performs is actually somewhat normal for this country since at least 1980.

    In addition, prior to the coronavirus challenge, both America and UK have been reducing, instead of increasing, their social protections; and, therefore, they were the only industrialized nations where life-expectancies were declining even before the coronavirus-19 hit. The recognition and concern about this decline started in UK, but has now started to be published even in the U.S.

    British healthcare scholar Danny Dorling headlined at his “Political Insight” blog on 16 July 2016, “Austerity, Rapidly Worsening Public Health across the UK” and reported that “the UK’s Office for National Statistics (ONS) released its latest annual mortality figures – on schedule. An unprecedented rise in mortality was reported which was revealed to have risen across all the countries of the UK.” Then, on 8 July 2018, London’s Daily Express bannered “Britain is the ONLY European country with a declining life expectancy – inquiry launched”. Then, on 8 March 2019, the blog of the British Medical Journal headlined “The deepening health crisis in the UK requires society wide, political intervention” and reported that UK’s life-expectancy had been plunging since 2014. The BMJ then issued an article on 27 March 2020, “Things Fall Apart: the British Health Crisis 2010–2020”. In other words: coronavirus hit UK at a time when the Government was already moving away from socializing and into privatizing health care; and, as a consequence, the death-rates had already started increasing in 2015. Coronavirus kills mainly people who already have bad health; and, so, their population were maximally vulnerable to it at the time when this epidemic struck.

    Meanwhile, the same shortening of life-spans was also occurring in the U.S. On 29 November 2018, London’s Daily Mail bannered “American life expectancy DROPS as suicides and drug overdoses soar and progress against heart disease grinds to a halt, CDC data reveal”. A year later, the JAMA Network headlined on 26 November 2019, “Life Expectancy and Mortality Rates in the United States, 1959-2017” and reported that “Between 1959 and 2016, US life expectancy increased from 69.9 years to 78.9 years but declined for 3 consecutive years after 2014.” So: both UK and U.S. life-spans peaked in 2014. Unlike virtually all other nations, these two were declining in health.

    Even prior to 2015, the U.S. was wasting around half of its entire public-and-private spending for health care — it was the most inefficient healthcare system on the planet — and therefore had significantly lower life-expectancies than all other industrialized countries did. But, now, those remarkably low life-spans are actually getting even lower.

    Political-science studies that are based upon decades of reliably reported data have established that ever since around 1980, the United States has been a dictatorship: what the public wants (and even needs) is basically ignored, but what the super-rich (the country’s actual dictators) simply want becomes reflected in governmental policies. That’s the very definition of a “dictatorship.” The U.S. national Government is responsive to the wants of its billionaires, not to the needs of the public (such as protecting their health, education, and welfare, even when the billionaires don’t want it to).The findings in one of these studies are summarized well in a six-minute video, here. Although the billionaires who fund America’s liberal Party, the Democratic Party, oppose the billionaires who fund the Republican Party (the conservative Party — the one that’s overtly in favor of the existing wealth-inequality), this is purely for PR purposes. Whenever the issue becomes their own wealth versus improving the wealth and economic opportunity for the poor, they all go for expanding their own empire (sometimes by funding a tax-exempt ‘charity’ that will increase, even more, their personal control over the total empire — by using that tax-exemption to leverage the operation, which will be controlled by themselves instead of by the public tax-funded government). Such ‘charities’ are mainly tax-dodges.

    However, in all countries, the people who are the most vulnerable to epidemics are the poor. This also means that the infection-rates and spreading of the disease are the highest amongst the poorest. And, in this epidemic, the interests of the super-rich are opposite to the interests of everybody else. And, since the U.S. Government has, for decades now, been serving predominantly the super-rich, instead of the public, the people who are the most at risk are also the most ignored. This is even proud policy (‘fiscal responsibility’, etc.) in the Republican Party. Bailing-out investors is ‘necessary’, but bailing out employees and consumers is ‘fiscally irresponsible’. For example, on April 27th, the Democrat David Sirota headlined “Red States Owe Workers More Than $500 Billion — The GOP Is Trying to Steal The Money: Trump is boosting a McConnell plan to help states renege on promised retirement and health benefits to millions of workers and retirees.” And he is correct. However, his Party is going to be compromising with that (instead of adamantly refuse to accept it and then go on the political hustings shaming the Republican President and Congress-members so as to break them on their blatantly scandalous whoring to the entire billionaire-class, who want their investments to be bailed out before the public is — which might turn out to be never). It’s a “good cop, bad cop,” routine, to protect the super-rich. It accepts holding the public hostage to what the big political donors want, instead of focuses against that as being the central political issue of the moment, and of at least post-1980 America.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    This is ‘democracy’-as-political-scam. For example: some of the Democratic billionaires, who fund anti-Trump ads, pretend to be Republicans, in order to be able to peel off some of Trump’s Republican voters, and so are blaming Trump alone for America’s catastrophically bad performance in the coronavirus-crisis. They’re just trying to deceive their suckers into voting for Joe Biden, or else not voting at all; and, so, their ad doesn’t even so much as just mention Biden. It’s a Biden ad that makes no mention of Biden. It hides its true motive. That’s typical.

    This is the reason why America is designed so as to fail the coronavirus-19 challenge. The power of big-money (concentrated wealth) is destroying this country. It controls both Parties and their respective media, so the public don’t know (and certainly cannot understand) the types of realities that are being reported (and linked-to) here.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    It’s also the reason why Joe Biden’s “plan” for dealing with the coronavirus epidemic is just as bad a joke on the voters as Trump’s is. This is a failing country, which is failing in a bipartisan (both Republican and Democratic Party) way.

    A “good cop, bad cop” government is, in reality, all bad cop.

    (I therefore proposed an Amendment to the U.S. Constitution in order to rectify some of the reasons behind this structural failure of the U.S. Government. Perhaps the only alternative to that would be violent revolution, but it would probably make things even worse, not better.)


    Tyler Durden

    Wed, 05/06/2020 – 23:45

  • California County To Remove COVID-19 Patients From Homes Based On 'Living Situation' — Will Place In 'Other Kinds Of Housing'
    California County To Remove COVID-19 Patients From Homes Based On ‘Living Situation’ — Will Place In ‘Other Kinds Of Housing’

    Officials in Ventura County, California will be expanding coronavirus testing, tracking the infected and those who they’ve been in contact with, and moving people out of their homes and into specialized housing for COVID-19 patients.

    Discussing the need to hire contact tracers and manage active cases, Ventura County Public Health Director Dr. Robert Levin said during a May 4 press conference that people who live in homes where they could expose family members to COVID-19 would be moved into ‘other kinds of housing’ provided by the county.

    “We also realize that as we find more contacts, some of the people we find are going to have trouble being isolated,” said Levin. “For instance, if they live in a home where there is only one bathroom and there are three or four other people living there, and those people don’t have COVID infection, we’re not going to be able to keep the person in that home.

    Every person who we’re isolating, for instance, needs to have their own bathroom. And so we’ll be moving people like this into other kinds of housing that we have available.”

    Watch:

    The county walked back Levin’s comments on Facebook, responding that they “are not going to remove anyone from their home,” but that “If someone cannot isolate at their home because of their living situation we have alternative options available.”

    Another Facebook user responded, “they can try — they will have a fight on their hands.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Ventura county has had 595 COVID-19 cases, of which 416 have recovered, 22 are hospitalized, 11 of which are in the ICU, and 19 have died. Most cases are in those aged 45-64, while no data was provided on average age of death.
     


    Tyler Durden

    Wed, 05/06/2020 – 23:25

  • Poseidon Multi-Purpose Oceanic System And Russian Undersea Warfare
    Poseidon Multi-Purpose Oceanic System And Russian Undersea Warfare

    Submitted by SouthFront,

    The Poseidon has been described as a “nuclear torpedo”, which is true in at least one sense, namely its propulsion. The Poseidon is, by all accounts, powered by a nuclear reactor which makes it a submersible equivalent of the Burevestnik nuclear-powered cruise missile, with an effectively global range. It is for all intents and purposes an unmanned miniature nuclear-powered submarine, with all the benefits that nuclear propulsion bestows on a submarine. The absence of a crew eliminates the need for heavy shielding and allows speeds considerably in excess of even the fastest submarines.

    Its top speed is estimated at between 60 and 100 knots, with the upper end of the scale being comfortably in excess of all torpedoes except for the short-ranged, supercavitating rocket-propelled Shkval. And while conventional torpedoes can develop high speeds only at the expense of range, due to the limited propellant or battery charge, nuclear propulsion means high speeds can be sustained for longer periods of time, subject only to the design’s mechanical limitations.

    Virtually all descriptions of the Poseidon describe it as a nuclear delivery vehicle, for use primarily against coastal targets such as cities and naval bases, and possibly also against mobile naval high-value targets such as aircraft carrier battlegroups. However, this application is too limited in usefulness to warrant the development of a costly system like the Poseidon and specialized submarines designed to carry it. Even an extremely powerful thermonuclear warhead would have to be brought quite close to the target in order for the underwater explosion to cause significant damage to the coastal site. In many cases, the high-value target may be considerably inland, like Washington, D.C., or shielded by natural coastal features, like New York City. In order to strike them, the large and heavy Poseidon would have to maneuver at slow speed in shallow coastal waters where it would be vulnerable to underwater defenses that would be surely developed to cope with it.

    This points to the likelihood of the nuclear delivery mission being one, and possibly not even the most important, of missions that it will be called upon to carry out. A Poseidon diagram shown on Russian TV pointedly referred to it as a “multi-purpose oceanic system”, which rather strongly suggests that it is not only, or even primarily, a nuclear delivery system. Cruise and ballistic missiles, even with conventional and nuclear payloads, are not referred to as “multi-purpose systems”, either.  Likewise the Burevestnik nuclear-powered cruise missile is also not referred to as a “multi-purpose” system.

    In keeping with the general pattern of unmanned combat system development in Russia, which increasingly seeks to pair unmanned systems with manned ones to fully exploit the strengths and cover the weaknesses of each, it is entirely possible that Poseidon is intended to function not as an underwater Burevestnik, but rather as the equivalent of the stealthy Okhotnik combat drone developed as a “wingman” vehicle for the Su-57 fifth-generation fighter.

    The peculiar qualities of deep ocean as a theater of war, particularly its opacity to sensors and limits on weapon speed mean that a combat underwater unmanned vehicle (UUV) would be of even greater use to a manned submarine than a combat crone accompanying a stealth fighter. But the support function would be essentially the same. The unmanned platform could enhance the lethality and survivability of the manned one by serving as a platform for sensors, weapons, and in extreme conditions even as a decoy.

    The size of the Poseidon, specifically the 1.6m diameter and the length of 24m, suggest considerable internal volume suitable for a variety of configurable payloads, though it is unlikely these payloads could be changed once the Poseidon was loaded onto its carrier submarine. In addition to the already mentioned nuclear warheads, these payloads could include sensors, including sonar arrays, and even anti-submarine torpedoes. An early artist’s impression of the Poseidon actually depicted an underwater vehicle akin to a miniature submarine, complete with an array of torpedo tubes.

    That the Poseidon has a broader range of intended capabilities than simply acting as a nuclear delivery vehicle is also suggested by the submarines being built to act as carriers for these torpedoes. There are currently two boats under construction that are intended for this role, the K-329 Belgorod, and the Khabarovsk.

    The Belgorod, in particular, is interesting as a Poseidon launch platform because it is not a boat intended mainly for the “kinetic” combat role. Rather, this heavily modified Project 949A cruise missile submarine design is intended to act as a mother ship for the highly classified Losharik deep-diving research submarine, Shelf energo-capsules for the Harmoniya underwater sensor system network, and the Klavesin UUVs. While the diagrams crafted by the respected British undersea warfare analyst H I Sutton have the Belgorod carry Poseidons in forward-mounted horizontal torpedo tubes, the fact that the Belgorod is already extensively fitted for the external docking and internal recovery of manned and unmanned undersea vehicles could also mean that the Poseidon will be launched and recovered from launch bays. The original Project 949A design reserved extensive volume for a battery of 24 Granit anti-ship cruise missiles, whose launch tubes were arrayed on both sides of the hull in banks of 12. But if Sutton’s assessment of the Belgorod as being narrower than Project 949A, with a circular hull cross-section, then the Poseidon could still be carried in payload bays from which it could swim out and be recovered into.

    Sutton’s analysis of photographs from the launch of the Belgorod led him to believe the boat is fitted with thrusters for precise undersea maneuvers, which would be required if the boat is to recover undersea vehicles. However, even if the Poseidon is carried in launch tubes and is not recoverable by the carrier submarine, the choice of Belgorod, a dedicated special-missions submarine, would be odd if Poseidon were intended only as a nuclear delivery vehicle.

    Even less is known of the Khabarovsk, which is a purpose-designed boat whose main weapon system is supposed to be the Poseidon. Again, Sutton assumes that Poseidon torpedoes would be carried in torpedo tubes in the front of the hull, but the size of the Khabarovsk, a boat of estimated 10,000 ton displacement and 120m length, or only 40m shorter than the Borei SSBN, means there is ample volume for a swim-out launch and recovery bay. It is not yet clear what place Khabarovsk occupies in the Russian vision of undersea warfare. Perhaps it is intended as a mothership for an array of Poseidons with various payloads, to support operations of other submarines, including as escorts for ballistic missile submarines. It is also possible it is a prototype of a future class of attack submarines that will carry one or more Poseidons with conventional weapon and sensor payloads as a standard fit.

    Being a world leader in nuclear technology, it is not surprising to see Russia leverage this advantage by creating novel aerial and naval platforms such as the Burevestnik and Poseidon. The coming years will no doubt provide additional information on their actual capabilities. It is already evident that Russia is not lagging behind in the development of novel applications for unmanned platforms.


    Tyler Durden

    Wed, 05/06/2020 – 23:05

  • 'We Have To Adjust To New Reality' – Pandemic Leads To Surge In Americans Drinking At Home
    ‘We Have To Adjust To New Reality’ – Pandemic Leads To Surge In Americans Drinking At Home

    Alcohol sales for home consumption jumped $2 billion more since the start of March than last year, while a top beer producer said the increase in sales at home would not offset lost ones seen at restaurants and bars. 

    A little more than half a month into lockdowns, around the first week of April, we mentioned how Americans were turning to beer, porn, pot, and chocolate, to cope with coronavirus pandemic stress. The Financial Times has now published alcohol sales data that shows drinking at home soared during lockdowns. 

    Data analytics firm IRI reported that by mid-April, retailers’ total alcohol sales hit $9 billion over the seven weeks. Sales of spirits increased, including tequila and gin surged 39% to $1.3 billion, and wine rose 28% to $2 billion. Beer also soared 20% to $5.5 billion. 

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Gavin Hattersley, CEO of Molson Coors, in an earnings call last week, spoke about the “challenging” environment for producers as supply chains disruptions are materializing: 

    “But obviously, there is no doubt that this is really a challenging time for us, not just for our business, but for everybody in our industry. And our focus, as I said, right now is mitigating the short-term business challenges and positioning our business to succeed in the long-term,” Hattersley said. 

    “From a sales to wholesalers point of view, the impact of the Milwaukee brewery tragedy as Tracey I think said was from a shipments point of view in February and early March and because of that our inventory levels at the end of March were lower than we would have liked.”

    While drinking in quarantine did not offset the collapse in sales from restaurants and bars, Molson Coors reported net sales fell 8.7% in 1Q20 YoY. 

    The chief economist of the National Beer Wholesalers Association Lester Jones said: “I’m confident there will be plenty of beer, although I don’t know if it’s going to be in the right packages and the right formats that people expect.”

    What Jones is describing is exactly what is happening to farmers at the moment. Since restaurants, hotels, resorts, cruise ships, cafeterias, etc., have shuttered operations during lockdowns, these establishments usually order bulk food – and for farmers to rework supply chains from bulk to individual packaging, well that takes time and money. Hence, this is one reason why food supply chains have become disrupted across the country. 

    Jones added: “Given that we all planned months ago to have a very different market, we have to quickly adjust to the new reality.”

    Anheuser-Busch InBev is expected to share new data later this week on drinking habits during the pandemic. 

    To sum up, the pandemic is changing the way America drinks, lives, and how the economy functions. It has also allowed for people to save money in greater amounts as they have never done before. We noted last week the personal savings rate has exploded to decade highs. 

    It only took a pandemic for Americans to figure out that drinking at home is much cheaper than going out (which allows them to save money) because what’s ahead is an economic downturn that could last years


    Tyler Durden

    Wed, 05/06/2020 – 22:45

  • Beijing May Dump US Treasuries In Response To US Hostility, Start Its Own QE: Chinese Media
    Beijing May Dump US Treasuries In Response To US Hostility, Start Its Own QE: Chinese Media

    In response to recent media speculation that as the blame game over the origins of the coronavirus pandemic escalates the US may cancel some of its $1.1 trillion debt owed to China, the South China Morning Post reported today that China may “move to reduce its vast holdings of US Treasury securities in the coming months” in response to a resurgence in trade tensions and a war of words between the world’s two largest economies.

    While analysts have also said that the US was highly unlikely to take the “nuclear option” of cancelling Chinese-held debt, with Larry Kudlow himself refuting this suggestion on several occasions last week, the “mere fact that the idea has been discussed could well prompt Beijing to seek to insulate itself from the risk by reducing its US government debt holdings”, the SCMP writes.

    And while the SCMP then suggests that this “could spell trouble for the US government bond market at a time when Washington is significantly ramping up new issuance to pay for a series of programs to combat the pandemic and the economic damage it is causing”, nothing could be further from the truth: yes, the US Treasury will issue over $4 trillion in new debt this calendar year, but now that the US officially lives under central planning, courtesy of helicopter money, the Fed will monetize not just every dollar the Treasury issues, but will monetize double the net issuance.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Which means that not only does the US not need China to buy its debt ever again, the US in fact does not need anyone outside the Fed, now that open debt and deficit monetization is the endgame, with the only unknown is when this will lead to currency collapse.

    Surprisingly, the Chinese still don’t get that any tactical advantage they may have had is now gone:

    any move to cancel the debt owed to China – effectively defaulting on it – would be counterproductive to US interests because it would likely destroy investors’ faith in the trustworthiness of the US government to pay its bills, analysts warned.

    This would send US interest rates soaring, making borrowing more costly for the government, as well US companies and consumers, and in turn strike a sharp blow to America’s already very weak economy.

    Again: no. Maybe this idea had some validity when the Fed was pretending it wouldn’t do unlimited QE, but now that the Fed is purchasing hundreds of billions in US paper every month, what China may or may not do with its holdings of US debt is completely irrelevant.

    “It’s such a crazy idea that anyone who has made it should really have their fitness for office reconsidered,” said Cliff Tan, East Asian head of global markets research at MUFG Bank. “We view this as largely a political ploy for [Donald Trump’s] re-election and a cynical one because it would destroy the financing of the US federal budget deficit.”

    Uhm, Cliff, yes it is insane, but not because China has any leverage left: in case you missed it, the Fed purchased $2.5 trillion in debt in the past 6 weeks.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    That’s more than double what China owns. So yes, if Beijing wants to dump its Treasuries, bring it on: it will cause yields to spike for an hour or two, at which point everyone will frontrun the Fed which will activate the turbo POMO and purchase every last penny that China had to sell.

    China’s desperate fearmongering – as if it tries to convince itself that it has some leverage over the US continued:

    China could trigger a crash in the US dollar and financial markets by flooding the market with US Treasuries for sale, which would push down US bond prices and cause yields to spike. But that would also ignite a global financial catastrophe, hurting China as well.

    Two things: the financial catastrophe was already ignited when China allowed – accidentally or on purpose – a deadly pandemic escape from the Wuhan Institute of Virology. It doesn’t need the US. Second: a sale of a mere $1.1 trillion in Treasurys now that the total US debt just surpassed $25 trillion… 

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    … of which the Fed owns $6.66 trillion, would have absolutely no impact on anything, besides long-end yields, and even there the spike would be brief as the market realizes that the Fed can and will buy everything China has to sell.

    Oh, and a third thing: if China could actually crash the US dollar, both Powell and Trump would be giddy with happiness. In case someone still hasn’t figured it out, the Fed is desperate to crash the dollar because the longer it remains elevated (as a result of the infamous $12 trillion dollar margin call), the more likely it is that the coming global emerging markets collapse will crush the US as not even the Fed will have power to deflect that particular meteor.

    Alas, none of this has registered with China which is dearly holding on to the myth that its sales of US paper could still have some impact:

    “There’s a strong urge for countries like China, and Russia, to move away from US dollar settlements.  This is simply because the US dollar can be weaponised by the US government,” said Xu Sitao, chief economist at Deloitte China, referring to the recent practise by the US government of cutting off foreign individuals, companies and governments from the global US dollar financial transaction settlement system, greatly complicating their ability to conduct business.

    “ Clearly there’s more willingness for certain countries just to diversify and move away from US dollar settlements.”

    Right, sure, and just what currency does China propose to exchange its dollar-denominated reserves, which account for some 58% of its total FX holdings, into?

    Maybe China is just confused because it has yet to activate a full-blown QE of the type the Fed has perfected for the past decade. Which is apropos because in a follow up article, the same SCMP reports that China’s top economic policymakers have been “engaged in heated debate over whether the country’s central bank should directly buy special bonds issued by the finance ministry to help the government’s economic support measures.”

    Which, of course, is preciely what the Fed has been doing on tilt for the past two months.

    According to the report, the discord reflects the differing schools of thought in China over how best to help the world’s  second largest economy recover from the coronavirus. The National People’s Congress which is due to meet in less than three weeks, is expected to provide clearer signals on Beijing’s economic policy. Liu Shangxi, president of the Chinese Academy of Fiscal Sciences, a finance ministry-affiliated think tank, kicked off the debate after he recently proposed issuing 5 trillion yuan (US$700.5 billion) in special Treasury bonds to help stabilise the economy

    He called on the People’s Bank of China (PBOC) to buy them in tranches at an interest rate of zero.

    It gets funnier: in China purchases of bonds are technically taboo as central bank law forbids it from directly bankrolling government spending. Well, guess what: there is another central bank whose charter forbids it from engaging in state financing and debt/deficit monetization: the ECB. And here is its balance sheet.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    And while for now China is stopped by the threat of soaring inflation once it too triggers monetary financing, it is only a matter of time before China realizes that the initial phase of the coming hyperinflation only affects asset prices, while sparking broader economic deflation (of course, eventually goes vertical as faith in the currency is extinguished). So once China realizes that by starting QE, it too can achieve all of its goals, it will do precisely that.

    Which also gives us a glimpse of the endgame: the four biggest economies in the world: the US, Europe, China and Japan, all directly monetizing their own debt, all hoping to crush their own currency before their peers as the only remaining way to stimulate the global economy. Then one day, something will finally snap and the entire financial system will disintegrate overnight. Until them, however, just BTFD because when every central bank in the world is telling you that fiat paper in your hand will soon be worthless so best spend it now, well, you listen.


    Tyler Durden

    Wed, 05/06/2020 – 22:41

  • Your Genes May Determine Whether COVID-19 Puts You In Hospital Or Not
    Your Genes May Determine Whether COVID-19 Puts You In Hospital Or Not

    Authored by Austin Nguyen, Abhinav Nellore, and Reid Thompson via The Conversation,

    When some people become infected with the coronavirus, they only develop mild or undetectable cases of COVID-19. Others suffer severe symptoms, fighting to breathe on a ventilator for weeks, if they survive at all.

    Despite a concerted global scientific effort, doctors still lack a clear picture of why this is.

    Could genetic differences explain the differences we see in symptoms and severity of COVID-19?

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    To test this, we used computer models to analyze known genetic variation within the human immune system. The results of our modeling suggest that there are in fact differences in people’s DNA that could influence their ability to respond to a SARS-CoV-2 infection.

    What We Did

    When a virus infects human cells, the body reacts by turning on what are essentially anti-virus alarm systems. These alarms identify viral invaders and tell the immune system to send cytotoxic T cells – a type of white blood cell – to destroy the infected cells and hopefully slow the infection.

    But not all alarm systems are created equal. People have different versions of the same genes – called alleles – and some of these alleles are more sensitive to certain viruses or pathogens than others.

    To test whether different alleles of this alarm system could explain some of the range in immune responses to SARS-CoV-2, we first retrieved a list of all the proteins that make up the coronavirus from an online database.

    We then took that list and used existing computer algorithms to predict how well different versions of the anti-viral alarm system detected these coronavirus proteins.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    A model of an HLA protein (green and yellow) bound to a piece of a virus (orange and blue) – in this case, influenza. Prot reimage via Wikimedia Commons, CC BY-SA

    Why It Matters

    The part of the alarm system that we tested is called the human leukocyte antigen system, or HLA. Each person has multiple alleles of the genes that make up their HLA type. Each allele codes for a different HLA protein. These proteins are the sensors of the alarm system and find intruders by binding to various peptides – chains of amino acids that make up parts of the coronavirus – that are foreign to the body.

    Once an HLA protein binds to a virus or piece of a virus, it transports the intruder to the cell surface. This “marks” the cell as infected and from there the immune system will kill the cell.

    In general, the more peptides of a virus that a person’s HLAs can detect, the stronger the immune response. Think of it like a more sensitive sensor of the alarm system.

    The results of our modeling predict that some HLA types bind to a large number of the SARS-CoV-2 peptides while others bind to very few. That is to say, some sensors may be better tailored to SARS-CoV-2 than others. If true, the specific HLA alleles a person has would likely be a factor in how effective their immune response is to COVID-19.

    Because our study only used a computer model to make these predictions, we decided to test the results using clinical information from the 2002-2004 SARS outbreak.

    We found similarities in how effective alleles were at identifying SARS and SARS-CoV-2. If an HLA allele appeared to be bad at recognizing SARS-CoV-2, it was also bad at recognizing SARS. Our analysis predicted that one allele, called B46:01, is particularly bad with regards to both SARS-CoV-2 and SARS-CoV. Sure enough, previous studies showed that people with this allele tended to have more severe SARS infections and higher viral loads than people with other versions of the HLA gene.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    The section of DNA that codes for HLAs is on the sixth chromosome. Pdeitiker at English Wikipedia / Wikipedia, CC BY

    What’s Next?

    Based on our study, we think variation in HLA genes is part of the explanation for the huge differences in infection severity in many COVID-19 patients. These differences in the HLA genes are probably not the only genetic factor that affects severity of COVID-19, but they may be a significant piece of the puzzle. It is important to further study how HLA types can clinically affect COVID-19 severity and to test these predictions using real cases. Understanding how variation in HLA types may affect the clinical course of COVID-19 could help identify individuals at higher risk from the disease.

    To the best of our knowledge, this is the first study to evaluate the relationship between viral proteins across a wide range of HLA alleles. Currently, we know very little about the relationship between many other viruses and HLA type. In theory, we could repeat this analysis to better understand the genetic risks of many viruses that currently or could potentially infect humans.


    Tyler Durden

    Wed, 05/06/2020 – 22:25

  • Putin's Approval Rating Hits Historic Low As 3 Cabinet Members Infected
    Putin’s Approval Rating Hits Historic Low As 3 Cabinet Members Infected

    Over the past decade, poll after poll in Russia has found President Vladimir Putin to be by far the most popular leader in modern Russia’s relatively short history (since the collapse of the USSR). He’s also of course been the longest ruling, currently serving his fourth 6-year presidential term.

    His popularity at home is commonly attributed to the general Russian public’s desire for continued stability and the weeding out of oligarchic control and corruption in society. However, like in other parts of the world, Russia’s ‘stability’ is now under threat by the explosive spread of coronavirus — now witnessing consecutive daily record rises in cases.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Via AP

    On Wednesday Russian health officials announced a whopping 10,559 new confirmed COVID-19 infections, bringing the national total to 165,929 cases, including 1,537 deaths. This makes Russia the seventh most infected country, days ago surpassing Iran and China. 

    Following widespread criticism that Russia was slow in locking down the country, doing so at the very end of March significantly after European countries and the United States, a new poll from the Russian independent, non-governmental polling agency Levada Center finds that Putin’s popularity has plunged to a historic low.

    This also amid fears not enough was done to insulate the economy amid a national lockdown and work “pause”. 

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Via Moscow Times

    The Moscow Times reports the results of the new poll as follows

    President Vladimir Putin’s’s approval rating has hit a historic low of 59% as the country grapples with the coronavirus crisis, the independent Levada Center polling agency said Wednesday.

    According to Levada’s results from a phone interview in late April, when most of the country was under enforced lockdown measures, 33% disapproved of Putin’s work. 

    Putin’s previous lowest approval rating since he first became president, 61%, was recorded in June 2000 and November 2013. 

    The latest results mark Putin’s lowest approval rating recorded by the Levada Center since September 1999, when he had a 53% approval rating shortly after being appointed prime minister.

    The Kremlin downplayed the new Levada poll results, pointing to other research indicators which don’t paint as drastic a picture.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Russia’s culture minister, Olga Lyubimova, file image.

    Meanwhile, things are looking to get worse, given days ago Russian Prime Minister Mikhail Mishustin announced he was confirmed for coronavirus.

    And as of Wednesday a third cabinet minister has become infected (after also the Construction minister tested positive): Russia’s culture minister, Olga Lyubimova, has tested positive for the coronavirus, according to Reuters, citing state sources. 


    Tyler Durden

    Wed, 05/06/2020 – 22:05

  • This Is What New Normal Looks Like After The Pandemic
    This Is What New Normal Looks Like After The Pandemic

    Authored by Bloomberg macro commentator Ye Xie

    The biggest market news Wednesday was the steepening of the Treasury yield curve as the government boosted planned sales of long-term debt to fund a $4 trillion deficit this year.

    With short-term rates possibly staying near zero for the next few years, curve steepening seems to be a natural response to more debt sales. Still, it’s hard to see how much yields can back up when the Fed is gorging on debt. Bond vigilantes are nowhere to be seen, at least for the time being.

    In the stock market, the Nasdaq Composite Index outperformed the S&P 500 again. It’s more evidence that the pandemic has accelerated the pre-existing trend: lower rates for longer and the secular rise of tech companies.

    For those who are looking forward to the re-opening of economies, the past Golden Week holiday in China offered a sneak peek of reality: consumer spending remains sluggish, two months after the country cut its daily new confirmed virus cases to below 100.

    During the five-day holiday, tourism revenue shrank 68% compared with last year. Among those operating restaurants, daily average revenues fell 46% below the levels at the beginning of the year, according to Nomura, citing a report from a catering industry information provider.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    One silver lining is that e-commerce has flourished at the expense of brick-and-mortar shops. Sales of mobile phones, laptops and tablets at Tmall, one of China’s largest online shopping platforms, surged by 70%, 100% and 250% year-on-year, respectively, according to Nomura.

    Debt, Digital and De-globalization. Welcome to the post-pandemic world.


    Tyler Durden

    Wed, 05/06/2020 – 21:48

  • The Art Of Survival, Part 1: Taoism & 'Warring States'
    The Art Of Survival, Part 1: Taoism & ‘Warring States’

    Authored by Charles Hugh Smith via OfTwoMinds blog,

    Longtime correspondent Paul B. suggested I re-publish three essays that have renewed relevance. This is the first essay, from June 2008. Thank you, Paul, for the suggestion.

    I’m not trying to be difficult, but I can’t help cutting against the grain on topics like surviving the coming bad times when my experience runs counter to the standard received wisdom.

    A common thread within most discussions of surviving bad times–especially really bad times–runs more or less like this: stockpile a bunch of canned/dried food and other valuable accoutrements of civilized life (generators, tools, canned goods, firearms, etc.) in a remote area far from urban centers, and then wait out the bad times, all the while protecting your stash with an array of weaponry and technology (night vision binocs, etc.)

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Now while I respect and admire the goal, I must respectfully disagree with just about every assumption behind this strategy.

    Once again, this isn’t because I enjoy being ornery (please don’t check on that with my wife) but because everything in this strategy runs counter to my own experience in rural, remote settings.

    You see, when I was a young teen my family lived in the mountains. To the urban sophisticates who came up as tourists, we were “hicks” (or worse), and to us they were “flatlanders” (derisive snort).

    Now the first thing you have to realize is that we know the flatlanders, but they don’t know us.

    They come up to their cabin, and since we live here year round, we soon recognize their vehicles and know about how often they come up, what they look like, if they own a boat, how many in their family, and just about everything else which can be learned by simple observation.

    The second thing you have to consider is that after school and chores (remember there are lots of kids who are too young to have a legal job, and many older teens with no jobs, which are scarce), boys and girls have a lot of time on their hands.

    We’re not taking piano lessons and all that urban busywork. And while there are plenty of pudgy kids spending all afternoon or summer in front of the TV or videogame console, not every kid is like that.

    So we’re out riding around. On a scooter or motorcycle if we have one, (and if there’s gasoline, of course), but if not then on bicycles, or we’re hoofing it. Since we have time, and we’re wandering all over this valley or mountain or plain, one way or another, then somebody will spot that trail of dust rising behind your pickup when you go to your remote hideaway. Or we’ll run across the new road or driveway you cut, and wander up to see what’s going on. Not when you’re around, of course, but after you’ve gone back down to wherever you live. There’s plenty of time; since you picked a remote spot, nobody’s around.

    Your hideaway isn’t remote to us; this is our valley, mountain, desert, etc., all 20 miles of it, or what have you. We’ve hiked around all the peaks, because there’s no reason not to and we have a lot of energy. Fences and gates are no big deal, (if you triple-padlock your gate, then we’ll just climb over it) and any dirt road, no matter how rough, is just an open invitation to see what’s up there. Remember, if you can drive to your hideaway, so can we. Even a small pickup truck can easily drive right through most gates (don’t ask how, but I can assure you this is true). If nobody’s around, we have all the time in the world to lift up or snip your barbed wire and sneak into your haven. Its remoteness makes it easy for us to poke around and explore without fear of being seen.

    What flatlanders think of as remote, we think of as home. If you packed in everything on your back, and there was no road, then you’d have a very small hideaway–more a tent than a cabin. You’d think it was safely hidden, but we’d eventually find it anyway, because we wander all over this area, maybe hunting rabbits, or climbing rocks, or doing a little fishing if there are any creeks or lakes in the area. Or we’d spot the wisp of smoke rising from your fire one crisp morning, or hear your generator, and wonder who’s up there. We don’t need much of a reason to walk miles over rough country, or ride miles on our bikes.

    When we were 13, my buddy J.E. and I tied sleeping bags and a few provisions on our bikes–mine was an old 3-speed, his a Schwinn 10-speed–and rode off into the next valley over bone-jarring dirt roads. We didn’t have fancy bikes with shocks, and we certainly didn’t have camp chairs, radios, big ice chests and all the other stuff people think is necessary to go camping; we had some matches, cans of beans and apple sauce and some smashed bread. (It didn’t start out smashed, but the roads were rough. Note: if you ever suffer from constipation, I recommend beans and apple sauce.)

    We camped where others had camped before us, not in a campground but just off the road in a pretty little meadow with a ring of fire-blackened rocks and a flat spot among the pine needles. We didn’t have a tent, or air mattress, or any of those luxuries; but we had the smashed bread and the beans, and we made a little fire and ate and then went to sleep under the stars glittering in the dark sky.

    There were a few bears in the area, but we weren’t afraid; we didn’t need a gun to feel safe. We weren’t dumb enough to sleep with our food; if some bear wandered by and wanted the smashed bread, he could take it without bothering us. The only animal which could bother us was the human kind, and since few people walk 10 or more miles over rough ground in the heat and dust, then we’d hear their truck or motorbike approaching long before they ever spotted us.

    We explored old mines and anything else we spotted, and then we rode home, a long loop over rutted, dusty roads. In summer, we took countless hikes over the mountainous wilderness behind his family cabin.

    All of which is to say that the locals will know where your hideaway is because they have lots of time to poke around. Any road, no matter how rough, might as well be lit with neon lights which read, “Come on up and check this out!” If a teen doesn’t spot your road, then somebody will: a county or utility employee out doing his/her job, a hunter, somebody. As I said, the only slim chance you have of being undetected is if you hump every item in your stash on your pack through trailess, roadless wilderness. But if you ever start a fire, or make much noise, then you’re sending a beacon somebody will eventually notice.

    The Taoists developed their philosophy during an extended era of turmoil known as the Warring States period of Chinese history. One of their main principles runs something like this: if you’re tall and stout and strong, then you’ll call attention to yourself. And because you’re rigid–that is, what looks like strength at first glance–then when the wind rises, it snaps you right in half.

    If you’re thin and ordinary and flexible, like a willow reed, then you’ll bend in the wind, and nobody will notice you. You’ll survive while the “strong” will be broken, either by unwanted attention or by being brittle.

    Another thing to ponder is that the human animal is a much better predator than it is an elusive prey. Goats and wild turkeys and other animals have very keen senses of smell and hearing, and it’s tough to get close without them smelling you or hearing you. They’re well camouflaged, and since human sight is selected to detect movement and color, if they stay quite still we have a hard time spotting them.

    In comparison, the human is a clumsy prey. It can’t smell or hear very well, and it’s large and not well camouflaged. Plus it’s usually distracted and unaware of its surroundings. It doesn’t take much to kill a human, either; a single-shot rifle and a single round of .22-long is plenty enough.

    If the chips are down, and push comes to shove, then what we’re discussing is a sort of war, isn’t it? And if we’re talking about war, then we should think about the principles laid down in The Art Of War by Sun Tzu quite some time ago.

    The flatlander protecting his valuable depot is on the defensive, and anyone seeking to take it away (by negotiation, threat or force) is on the offensive. The defense can select the site for proximity to water, clear fields of fire, or what have you, but one or two defenders have numerous disadvantages. Perhaps most importantly, they need to sleep. Secondly, just about anyone who’s plinked cans with a rifle and who’s done a little hunting can sneak up and put away an unwary human. Unless you remain in an underground bunker 24/7, at some point you’ll be vulnerable. And that’s really not much of a life–especially when your food supplies finally run out, which they eventually will. Or you run out of water, or your sewage system overflows, or some other situation requires you to emerge.

    So let’s line it all up. Isn’t a flatlander who piles up a high-value stash in a remote area with no neighbors within earshot or line of sight kind of like a big, tall brittle tree? All those chains and locks and barbed-wire fencing and bolted doors just shout out that the flatlander has something valuable inside that cabin/bunker/RV etc.

    Now if he doesn’t know any better, then the flatlander reckons his stash is safe. But what he’s not realizing if that we know about his stash and his vehicle and whatever else can be observed. If some locals want that stash, then they’ll wait for the flatlander to leave and then they’ll tow the RV off or break into the cabin, or if it’s small enough, disassemble it and haul it clean off. There’s plenty of time, and nobody’s around. That’s pretty much the ideal setting for leisurely thieving: a high-value stash of goodies in a remote area accessible by road is just about perfect.

    Let’s say things have gotten bad, and the flatlander is burrowed into his cabin. Eventually some locals will come up to visit; in a truck if there’s gas, on foot if there isn’t. We won’t be armed; we’re not interested in taking the flatlander’s life or goodies. We just want to know what kind of person he is. So maybe we’ll ask to borrow his generator for a town dance, or tell him about the church food drive, or maybe ask if he’s seen so-and-so around.

    Now what’s the flatlander going to do when several unarmed men approach? Gun them down? Once he’s faced with regular unarmed guys, he can’t very well conclude they’re a threat and warn them off. But if he does, then we’ll know he’s just another selfish flatlander. He won’t get any help later when he needs it; or it will be minimal and grudging. He just counted himself out.

    Suppose some bad guys hear about the flatlander’s hideaway and stash. All it takes to stalk any prey is patience and observation; and no matter how heavily armed the flatlander is, he’ll become vulnerable at some point to a long-range shot. (Even body armor can’t stop a headshot or a hit to the femoral artery in the thigh.) Maybe he stays indoors for 6 days, or even 60. But at some point the windmill breaks or the dog needs walking or what have you, and he emerges–and then he’s vulnerable. The more visible and stringent the security, the more he’s advertising the high value of his depot.

    And of course guarding a high-value stash alone is problematic for the simple reason that humans need to sleep.

    So creating a high-value horde in a remote setting is looking like just about the worst possible strategy in the sense that the flatlander has provided a huge incentive to theft/robbery and also provided a setting advantageous to the thief or hunter.

    If someone were to ask this “hick” for a less risky survival strategy, I would suggest moving into town and start showing a little generosity rather than a lot of hoarding. If not in town, then on the edge of town, where you can be seen and heard.

    I’d suggest attending church, if you’ve a mind to, even if your faith isn’t as strong as others. Or join the Lions Club, Kiwanis or Rotary International, if you can get an invitation. I’d volunteer to help with the pancake breakfast fundraiser, and buy a couple tickets to other fundraisers in town. I’d mow the old lady’s lawn next door for free, and pony up a dollar if the elderly gentleman in line ahead of me at the grocery store finds himself a dollar light on his purchase.

    If I had a parcel outside town that was suitable for an orchard or other crop, I’d plant it, and spend plenty of time in the local hardware store and farm supply, asking questions and spreading a little money around the local merchants. I’d invite my neighbors into my little plain house so they could see I don’t own diddly-squat except some second-hand furniture and an old TV. And I’d leave my door open so anyone could see for themselves I’ve got very little worth taking.

    I’d have my tools, of course; but they’re scattered around and old and battered by use; they’re not shiny and new and expensive-looking, and they’re not stored all nice and clean in a box some thief could lift. They’re hung on old nails, or in the closet, and in the shed; a thief would have to spend a lot of time searching the entire place, and with my neighbors looking out for me, the thief is short of the most important advantage he has, which is time.

    If somebody’s desperate enough or dumb enough to steal my old handsaw, I’ll buy another old one at a local swap meet. (Since I own three anyway, it’s unlikely anyone would steal all three because they’re not kept together.)

    My valuable things, like the water filter, are kept hidden amidst all the low-value junk I keep around to send the message there’s nothing worth looking at. The safest things to own are those which are visibly low-value, surrounded by lots of other mostly worthless stuff.

    I’d claim a spot in the community garden, or hire a neighbor to till up my back yard, and I’d plant chard and beans and whatever else my neighbors suggested grew well locally. I’d give away most of what I grew, or barter it, or maybe sell some at the farmer’s market. It wouldn’t matter how little I had to sell, or how much I sold; what mattered was meeting other like-minded souls and swapping tips and edibles.

    If I didn’t have a practical skill, I’d devote myself to learning one. If anyone asked me, I’d suggest saw sharpening and beer-making. You’re legally entitled to make quite a bit of beer for yourself, and a decent homebrew is always welcome by those who drink beer. It’s tricky, and your first batches may blow up or go flat, but when you finally get a good batch you’ll be very popular and well-appreciated if you’re of the mind to share.

    Saw-sharpening just takes patience and a simple jig; you don’t need to learn a lot, like a craftsman, but you’ll have a skill you can swap with craftsmen/women. As a carpenter, I need sharp saws, and while I can do it myself, I find it tedious and would rather rebuild your front porch handrail or a chicken coop in exchange for the saw-sharpening.

    Pickles are always welcome in winter, or when rations get boring; the Germans and Japanese of old lived on black bread or brown rice and pickled vegetables, with an occasional piece of dried meat or fish. Learning how to pickle is a useful and easy-to-learn craft. There are many others. If you’re a techie, then volunteer to keep the network up at the local school; do it for free, and do a good job. Show you care.

    Because the best protection isn’t owning 30 guns; it’s having 30 people who care about you. Since those 30 have other people who care about them, you actually have 300 people who are looking out for each other, including you. The second best protection isn’t a big stash of stuff others want to steal; it’s sharing what you have and owning little of value. That’s being flexible, and common, the very opposite of creating a big fat highly visible, high-value target and trying to defend it yourself in a remote setting.

    I know this runs counter to just about everything that’s being recommended by others, but if you’re a “hick” like me, then you know it rings true. The flatlanders are scared because they’re alone and isolated; we’re not scared. We’ve endured bad times before, and we don’t need much to get by. We’re not saints, but we will reciprocate to those who extend their good spirit and generosity to the community in which they live and in which they produce something of value.

    This essay was drawn from my book Survival+: Structuring Prosperity for Yourself and the Nation.

    From The Way of Chuang Tzu by Thomas Merton:

    For security against robbers who snatch purses, rifle luggage, and crack safes,
    One must fasten all property with ropes, lock it up with locks, bolt it with bolts.
    This (for property owners) is elementary good sense.
    But when a strong thief comes along he picks up the whole lot,
    Puts it on his back, and goes on his way with only one fear:
    That ropes, locks, and bolts may give way.
    Thus what the world calls good business is only a way
    To gather up the loot, pack it, make it secure
    In one convenient load for the more enterprising thieves.
    Who is there, among those called smart,
    Who does not spend his time amassing loot
    For a bigger robber than himself?

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    *  *  *

    My recent books:

    Will You Be Richer or Poorer?: Profit, Power, and AI in a Traumatized World ($13)

    (Kindle $6.95, print $11.95) Read the first section for free (PDF).

    Pathfinding our Destiny: Preventing the Final Fall of Our Democratic Republic ($6.95 (Kindle), $12 (print), $13.08 ( audiobook): Read the first section for free (PDF).

    The Adventures of the Consulting Philosopher: The Disappearance of Drake $1.29 (Kindle), $8.95 (print); read the first chapters for free (PDF)

    Money and Work Unchained $6.95 (Kindle), $15 (print) Read the first section for free (PDF).

    *  *  *

    If you found value in this content, please join me in seeking solutions by becoming a $1/month patron of my work via patreon.com.


    Tyler Durden

    Wed, 05/06/2020 – 21:45

  • Captured US Mercenary Says In Video 'Confession' Trump Ordered Plot To "Abduct" Maduro
    Captured US Mercenary Says In Video ‘Confession’ Trump Ordered Plot To “Abduct” Maduro

    The nutty ‘Bay of Pigs invasion Venezuela edition’ which appears to have been an utter failure and half-baked scheme nearly from the start just took a few more bizarre turns.

    Two days after Venezuelan armed forces captured two US former special forces soldiers turned mercenaries along with others that made up a Venezuela ‘defector force’ allegedly trying to ‘invade’ the county to topple Nicolas Maduro, state TV has aired a “confession” video featuring 34-year old captured American Luke Denman

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Luke Denman shown on Venezuelan state TV after being arrested.

    In the heavily edited and scripted “confession” Denman says the mission to orchestrate a coup in the socialist country went straight to the top – ordered by President Trump himself. There were also plans to “abduct” Maduro himself and fly him out of Venezuela and into US custody. 

    As The Guardian describes of the video:

    An American mercenary captured after a bungled attempt to topple Nicolás Maduro has claimed he was on a mission to seize control of Venezuela’s main airport in order to abduct its authoritarian leader – and he alleged that was acting under the command of Donald Trump.

    …In a heavily edited video confession, broadcast on Wednesday by the state broadcaster, VTV, Denman said he had flown to Colombia in mid-January, where he was tasked with training Venezuelan combatants near Riohacha, a city 55 miles west from the Venezuelan border.

    From there Denman – who said he had never previously set foot in either South American country – claimed the group planned to journey to Caracas to “secure” the city and the nearby Simón Bolívar international airport, before bringing down Maduro.

    The group of a least a dozen men, who were trained by Florida-based private security firm Silvercorp, reportedly tried to sneak into Venezuela via fishing boats, but were caught soon after stepping foot on land. 

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    Denman further describes in the video his task was to “secure the airport” to pave the way for a broader US military invasion force

    Denman said his mission had been to secure the airport, set up a perimeter, communicate with its tower and then “bring in planes” including “one to put Maduro on and take him back to the United States”.

    “I thought I was helping Venezuelans take back control of their country,” Denman added.

    There was no sign that any lawyers were present during Denman’s alleged confession or that he was not speaking under duress.

    The Maduro government is hailing this as a major victory over Washington coup plotting, however on Tuesday President Trump formally denied that the US had anything to do with it. 

    “It has nothing to do with our government,” Trump told reporters at the White House.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Luke Denman, 34 (left) and Airan Berry, 41 (right), being paraded in front of Veneuzlean state TV cameras after their arrests Monday.

    But Maduro and his top officials have alleged the mission came straight from both Trump and the Colombian president.

    The Venezuelan president is further saying he’ll seek the extradition of the ex-Green Beret said to have overseen the mission, since back in the United States, Silvercorps founder Jordan Goudreau.

    The fiasco prompted a formal denial of involvement or knowledge from US-backed Venezuelan opposition leader Juan Guaido.

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    As we previously reported, Goudreau orchestrated the plot alongside a high ranking Venezuelan military defector, who hooked up with the mercenary firm Silvercorps in Colombia last year.

    In the wake of the botched ‘invasion’ and ‘overthrow’ attempt, which many on social media are hilariously mocking under the #BayofPiglets hashtag, Goudreau has positively admitted to being behind it.

    Goudreau reportedly ran the secret training camps in neighboring Colombia, with the aim to infiltrate the group into Venezuela in order to fuel momentum for a broader ‘armed popular uprising’ à la covert CIA-style Syria regime change ops. 

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    After leaving the Army in 2016, Goudreau worked as a private security contractor in Puerto Rico and set up Silvercorp US in 2018. Image via SilvercorpsUSA/Daily Mail.

    Secretary of State Mike Pompeo on Wednesday backed Trump’s denial of US military or intelligence involvement: “If we had been involved, it would have gone differently,” Pompeo said. “As for who bankrolled it, we’re not prepared to share any more information about what we know took place. We’ll unpack that at an appropriate time. We’ll share that information that makes good sense.”

    And concerning the captured Americans: “We will start the process of trying to figure a way – if in fact these are Americans that are there – that we can figure a path forward. We want to get every American back. If the Maduro regime decides to hold them, we’ll use every tool that we have available to try and get them back. It’s our responsibility to do so,” the Secretary of State said.


    Tyler Durden

    Wed, 05/06/2020 – 21:25

  • Rosenstein Asked Mueller To Investigate Already-Discredited Steele Dossier Allegations, Memo Reveals
    Rosenstein Asked Mueller To Investigate Already-Discredited Steele Dossier Allegations, Memo Reveals

    Authored by John Solomon via JustTheNews.com,

    Allegations in August 2017 scoping memo instructing special prosecutor to investigate Carter Page came from dossier that had already been discredited…

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Then-Deputy Attorney General Rod Rosenstein instructed Special Counsel Robert Mueller in August 2017 to investigate allegations against former Trump campaign adviser Carter Page that originated with the Steele dossier and had already been discredited by the FBI, a newly declassified memo showed Wednesday night.

    The Justice Department’s release of the unredacted version of Rosenstein’s so-called investigative scoping memo provided the first declarative evidence that Mueller was asked to investigate widely suspect allegations from Christopher Steele’s opposition research conducted for the Clinton campaign and Democratic Party back in 2016.

    Specifically, Rosenstein’s memo instucted Mueller to investigate “allegations that Carter Page committed a crime or crimes by colluding with Russian government officials with respect to the Russian government’s efforts to interfere with the 2016 election for President of the United States, in violation of United States law.”

    By the time that instruction was given, the FBI had fired Steele as an informant for leaking, interviewed Steele’s sub-source who disputed information attributed to him and had ascertain that allegations Steele had given the FBI specifically about Page were inaccurate and likely came from Russian intelligence sources as disinformation, recently declassified evidence showed.

    In addition, the CIA had informed the FBI repeatedly that Page was not a Russian stooge but rather a cooperating intelligence asset for the United States government.

    Former House Intelligence Committee Chairman Devin Nunes, who long called for the release of the unredacted scoping memo, said Wednesday’s development confirmed his worst suspicions. He accused prior officials of the Justice Department of unnecessarily hiding the evidence from Congress and the American people before Attorney General William Barr intervened.

    “This information was redacted until now for one single reason – to hide the fact that false allegations from the Steele dossier were included in Mueller’s scoping memo,” Nunes told Just the News.

    In other words, a bunch of lies paid for by the Democrats were used to engineer the appointment of a Special Counsel to drag the Trump administration through the mud for years. The Russia collusion hoax was a disgrace, and we can’t let anything like it ever be repeated.”

    The degree to which the FBI had discredited Steele’s intelligence reporting on Page — including allegations he colluded with Russia — only recently came into focus with the release of DOJ Inspector General Michael Horowitz’s report on FBI abuses of the FISA surveillance that targeted Page. In addition, just-declassified evidence showed the FBI had learned by February 2017 that Steele’s information on Page was likely disinformation from Russian intelligence planted with Steele.

    “Most relevant to the Carter Page FISA applications, the specific substantive allegations contained in Reports 80, 94, 95, and 102, which were relied upon in all four FISA applications, remained uncorroborated and, in several instances, were inconsistent with information gathered by the team,” Horowitz wrote back in December in debunking key allegations against Page.

    More recently, declassified footnotes made clear Steele’s claim he had met with a senior Russian back in 2016 named Igor Sechin and had been offered a lucrative finders fee had been debunked by the FBI by February 2017, or months before Mueller was appointed. In fact Steele’s own source challenged the veracity of the information attributed to him inside the dossier.

    “The Primary Sub-source told the FBI that one of his/her sub-sources furnished information for that part of Report 134 through a text message, but said that the sub-source never stated that Sechin had offered a brokerage interest to Page,” Horowitz reported.

    “The Primary Sub-Source also told the FBI at these interviews that the sub-source who provided the information about the Carter Page-Sechin meeting had connections to Russian Intelligence Services (RIS),” he added.

    You can read the full scoping memo below:


    Tyler Durden

    Wed, 05/06/2020 – 21:05

  • China Considers Dropping GDP Growth Target Range For 2020 
    China Considers Dropping GDP Growth Target Range For 2020 

    Well, it seems after China’s magical V-shaped recovery in PMIs amid the rest of the world crashing into recession, if not depression, as a result of coronavirus lockdowns, a new report via Bloomberg suggests Chinese leaders are contemplating “the option of not setting a numerical target for economic growth this year given the uncertainty caused by the global coronavirus pandemic.” 

    After a dramatic rebound in PMIs for the second consecutive month after the February crash, artificially engineered, of course,  the fakery is not likely to hold, hence why to the prospects of not setting a growth target this year is reportedly being discussed by officials.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Real-time indicators tell an entirely different picture of the economy, still severely damage from lockdowns with no V-shaped recovery. 

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Sources said the GDP target range would likely not be set at the upcoming National People’s Congress meeting slated for May 22 in Beijing. Last year, the range was set between 6% and 6.5%. The source added that a final decision on how to characterize the target had not been made. 

    Under the leadership of the Communist Party of China (CPC) Central Committee President Xi Jinping, the party in the upcoming meeting is like to project how the country is attempting to normalize after virus shutdowns. 

    Jinping’s party is facing one of the sharpest economic declines in the post-Mao era, the impact of the pandemic, and unable to completely restart manufacturing plants because Western demand has collapsed, has constrained the economy. 

    However, there’s good news because CPC leadership can blame the virus for the prospectus of low growth in the quarters ahead. This would likely result in new rounds of stimulus as leadership attempts to revive the economy:  

    “Such a move would free up policymakers from the obligation to issue significant stimulus to meet a certain growth level as long as employment remains stable. While China has announced credit easing policies, tax breaks and additional spending plans, the efforts are still targeted and more moderate compared with other major economies. The leadership’s caution is driven by fears of another debt blowout after total borrowing ballooned after the global financial crisis,” Bloomberg noted.

    We showed last month how Chinese GDP shrank by 6.8% from a year ago (considerably worse than the 6.0% drop expected) and the worst drop on record (since 1992). 

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    China’s top leaders face unprecedented economic difficulty at the moment, and they must effectively blame everyone but themselves about lower growth while attempting to prop up the economy with stimulus. But for those expecting rounds of stimulus, like that seen in 2016, here’s Shang-Jin Wei, a China expert at Columbia Business School in New York and formerly chief economist of the Asian Development Bank, warns: “Prevention of a return or the ‘second wave’ of the virus outbreak is more important than getting a high growth rate for the remainder of the year.”


    Tyler Durden

    Wed, 05/06/2020 – 20:45

  • "Buy The Re-Opening Rumor, Sell The Factual Horror": 5 Reasons To Start Selling
    “Buy The Re-Opening Rumor, Sell The Factual Horror”: 5 Reasons To Start Selling

    Earlier today we posted a chart of forward PE multiples which based on crashing global profits which have yet to find a bottom, showed that the disconnect between markets and reality has reached idiotic proportions.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    And while Bloomberg apparently took offense and tried to justify current stock valuations writing the “The S&P’s Real Forward P/E Is What Matters, and It’s Unknowable”, Citi’s Matt King agreed, writing that “the gap between markets and data is the largest on record”, as did Bank of America.

    In a report from BofA’s Jared Woodard titled “Too fast, too furious” in reference to the recent market move higher, the strategist who learned his craft under Michael Hartnett’s wing writes that equities “seem to have run too far ahead of fundamentals. From the March lows, stocks have gained $246,567 in market cap for each newly unemployed worker.” And while overshoots are always possible, he expects stumbles ahead for five main reasons:

    1. Ignorance is bliss: 1 out of every 5 large companies has suspended earnings guidance
    2. Credit not confirming: after crashes, HY tends to bounce faster than equity; not happening today on drag from “real economy” sectors e.g. energy/retail/industrials
    3. Companies are saving: 1 out of every 5 large companies either suspended buybacks or cut dividends
    4. Households are saving: private clients bought the dip but now sell rips & are net sellers since 2012
    5. Stocks are expensive: the S&P 500 trades at 19.4x earnings, a 20-year high; valuation favors credit

    Below we present BofA’s arguments why, as Nomura’s Charlie McElligott wrote earlier, it’s time to selling the rally, but first a look at how we got here, namely “the deepest shock and the greatest response”

    • “There are decades where nothing happens and there are weeks when decades happen.” (Lenin)
    • Macro uncertainty has never been this high (Chart 2) and the virus shutdown took only 3 weeks to destroy via  unemployment what the economy needed 352 weeks to build. The fastest bear market in history met with the fastest & largest fiscal response in US peacetime (Chart 3) and policy support has taken a retest of the lows off the table.
    • But while overshoots are always possible, in our view there are good reasons to expect more stumbles in coming

    months.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    With that in mind, let’s go down BofA’s list why even banks whose “house view” is bullish can no longer hide their disgust at the “market” farce that central planning has created:

    1. Ignorance is bliss

    • Buy the re-opening rumor, sell the factual horror: rally-inducing news of stimulus & vaccine efforts will likely give way in coming weeks to disappointing realities of prolonged distancing, supply frictions, and confused calls for budget austerity. For example, a group of prominent restaurant owners just asked the UK government not to end the lockdown; if doors reopen, fiscal support ends, and demand has not rebounded, businesses will fail.
    • Flying blind: 98 S&P 500 companies have suspended guidance (Chart 4) and fundamentals have rarely been cloudier. US retail specialists report that $2tn of orders were cancelled in just the first half of March. Even for doomed firms, it is hard to hold liquidation sales when no one can come.
    • Dangerous savings: in March the personal savings rate spiked to 40-year highs of 13% (Chart 5). The paradox of thrift: if every sector saves at once (lower corporate capex & payouts, reticent households, fickle government), we all lose. Even if workers are quickly rehired, we don’t know yet how quickly they will be willing & able to spend.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    2. Credit not confirming the rally

    • After the last three crashes, HY bonds made new highs within 10 months on average…equities needed 2+ years. But in recent weeks, HY has lagged rather than led (Chart 6, far right panel).
    • This is due to the higher weighting of resources (energy/materials) at 24% of US HY vs. just 5% for S&P 500.
    • Note the daisy chain of consequences from resources decimation. Secular trends, OPEC war & the rise of ESG = resources must defend dividends at all costs and thus cut capex. No capex = pain for industrials (e.g. CAT) & broader manufacturing. Manufacturing (8%) + retail (10%) + leisure & hospitality (11%) = 30% of US payrolls. The Great Depression peaked at 25% unemployment.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    3. Buybacks and dividends are falling

    • Owning equities made sense even in an era of economic stagnation because shareholders were well-paid. Since the GFC, companies bought $4.3tn of their own stock (vs. just $0.2tn of buying from other sources – Chart 7).
    • But US equity market capitalization rose $7.4tn in recent weeks vs. unemployment up 30 million…equities have gained $246,567 in market cap for each newly unemployed worker. Every tick higher in equities = heavier political pressure to limit payouts.
    • 70 S&P 500 companies have already cut their buybacks, and 30 have cut their dividends; consensus expectations for 2.2% dividend yields have diverged wildly with market-implied yields at just 1.5% (Chart 8).
    • Tech, which briefly had positive returns again for 2020, also remains the king of buybacks. In Q1 Apple repurchased $18.5bn (& authorized another $50bn), Google $8.5bn, Microsoft $6.0bn.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    4. Households now sell into strength

    • Smart money: since 2016, BofA wealth management clients have been “strong hands” during market selloffs. In 2020 private clients were small net buyers as equities tumbled (Chart 9).
    • Skeptical money: they are also skeptical sellers of rallies, with net outflows from equities since 2012. Across US investor accounts, margin debt plunged in 2019-2020, failing to confirm the rally from late 2018 (Chart 10).

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    5. Stocks are expensive

    • Stock prices are already back at 20-year highs relative to expected earnings (19.4x – Chart 11).
    • While there has never been less competition from Treasury bonds, this is hardly the time to price equities for a perfect recovery.
    • In relative value terms, most fixed income sectors offer better yield (relative to volatility) than any equity region or sector (Chart 12).

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    If it’s time to sell stocks, what does BofA like?

    Three reasons to own gold

    “Fed Can’t Print Gold”: Gold is more attractive today. Our gold price target was just raised from $2000 to $3000/oz. Three reasons to buy:

    • Low rates: central banks will keep interest rates well below inflation for the foreseeable future. When the opportunity cost of shunning Treasuries is essentially zero, investors buy gold instead (Chart 13); that’s why real rates alone can explain 80% of the variation in gold prices.
    • Weaker dollar: central bank balance sheet expansion implies a sharply weaker dollar…e.g. DXY below 2018 lows of 88 (Chart 14).
    • Positioning is light: gold is just 10% from record highs yet institutional positions are only 0.6sd above the 20-year average (CFTC); and household allocations are even smaller…just 0.2% of private client holdings.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    What happens next? While attention in the past few weeks has been diverted away from the biggest clash of civilizations in centuries, the reality is that tensions between the US and China will not go away on their own… or peacefully. Which means that absent an all out war, there are three conflicts to watch: i) the trade war; ii) the tech war, and iii) the capital war.

    The Trade War

    • A costly decoupling of US-China economic ties may increasingly be accepted by elites as the necessary alternative to a full-blown cold war.
    • The US has become increasingly reliant on Chinese and other foreign manufacturers for many key resources including pharmaceuticals (Chart 22), rare earths, machine tools, advanced materials, military components, casting, electrical steel, fasteners, aluminum, circuit boards, batteries, medical equipment, and much more (per US DoD).
    • Just as importantly, the US has fallen behind China in research & development for the first time in history (Chart 23). R&D is one of the most important drivers of productivity and economic growth.
    • The administration’s approach so far has been very popular. One poll found 83% of Americans favor a continuation or even tougher position on China (91% Republicans, 74% Democrats).

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    The tech war

    The schematic below summarizes the tech security policy toward China

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    The capital war

    • The trade/tech war may become a capital war in which the US more power to determine the outcome. The first battle will be over delisting Chinese equities from US exchanges. US investors own nearly 10% of the 100 largest Chinese companies, with $5.4tn in market cap. (Table 2).
    • In April, SEC Chairman Jay Clayton became vocal about the risks of investing in Chinese companies, which do not adhere to Sarbanes-Oxley accounting standards or give the Public Company Oversight Board audited statements. Investors burned by Sino-Forest and Luckin Coffee already understand.
    • Chinese ADRs are often Cayman Islands-based “Variable Interest Entity” (VIE) legal structures, which do not provide ownership of the underlying company and do not confer voting rights. Chinese state authorities could revoke permission of these companies to distribute profits to foreign VIE shareholders.
    • Capital markets are also ripe for other forms of intervention. Whether by halting IPOs, taxing foreign capital inflows, or cutting access to USD swap lines and Fed repo operations, policymakers have a range of very powerful unexercised options

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    The energy war

    • In 2020 WTI crude oil traded at negative prices for the first time in history.
    • In 2020 China will have 626k megawatt hours of lithium ion battery cell manufacturing capacity, far surpassing capacity in the US & Europe, with the gap expected to widen sharply. (Chart 26).

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>


    Tyler Durden

    Wed, 05/06/2020 – 20:25

  • Nearly 1.5 Million More Tuberculosis Deaths Expected Due To Coronavirus Lockdowns
    Nearly 1.5 Million More Tuberculosis Deaths Expected Due To Coronavirus Lockdowns

    Since the coronavirus outbreak forced doctors and hospitals around the world to delay most other medical care to focus 100% on combating the outbreak, lapses in vaccination routines have led to the reemergence of diseases like polio and measles. Alarmed by this trend, one ER doctor and coronavirus survivor in the Bronx warned that the US might as well end its coronavirus lockdowns now due to the impending wave of ancillary health issues.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    And now, the Guardian, a far-left publication that has pushed for extended lockdowns, is even reporting that tuberculosis cases around the world are expected to surge.

    Up to 6.3 million more people are predicted to develop TB between now and 2025 and 1.4 million more people are expected to die as cases go undiagnosed and untreated during lockdown. This will set back global efforts to end TB by five to eight years.

    “The fact that we’ve rolled back to 2013 figures and we have so many people dying, this for me is sickening,” said Lucica Ditiu, executive director of the Stop TB Partnership. “I am outraged that just by not being able to control what we do…and forgetting about programmes that exist we lose so much, starting with the loss of the lives of people.”

    There is no TB vaccine for adults, only for children. Some TB specialists have taken umbrage at the reality that there are so many vaccine candidates in the works for COVID-19, while desperately needed adult TB vaccines can’t get funding because they just wouldn’t be a money-maker.

    “I have to say we look from the TB community in a sort of puzzled way because TB has been around for thousands of years,” Ditiu said. “For 100 years we have had a vaccine and we have two or three potential vaccines in the pipeline. We need around half a billion [people] to get the vaccine by 2027 and we look in amazement on a disease that … is 120 days old and it has 100 vaccine candidates in the pipeline. So I think this world, sorry for my French, is really fucked up,” she said.

    “The fear we have in the community is that researchers are heading towards just developing a vaccine for Covid. That’s on the agenda of everyone now and very few remain focused on the others [diseases]. We don’t have a vaccine for TB, we don’t have a vaccine for HIV, we don’t have a vaccine for malaria and out of all this, TB is the oldest. So why this reaction? I think because we are a world of idiots. What can I say?”

    The data were published on Wednesday; they are based on a three-month lockdown and a 10-month period of restoring services after lockdown is lifted.The research was commissioned by the Stop TB Partnership, working with Imperial College London, Avenir Health and – get this – Johns Hopkins University (which is helping track the global outbreak and conduct research).

    TB kills 1.5 million people a year, more than any other infectious disease.


    Tyler Durden

    Wed, 05/06/2020 – 20:05

  • The Problem Is Not Deflation, It's Attempts to Prevent It
    The Problem Is Not Deflation, It’s Attempts to Prevent It

    Authored by Mike Shedlock via MishTalk,

    Let’s investigate the Fed’s effort to prevent price deflation.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Here’s a Tweet that caught my eye.

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    Problem with deflation is- Why buy anything if you know it will be cheaper in the future.,” responded one person. 

    Let’s investigate that question starting with a look at the CPI basket.

    CPI Percentage Weights

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Why Buy Anything Questionnaire

    Q: If consumers think the price of food will drop, will they stop eating?

    Q: If consumers think the price of natural gas will drop, will they stop heating their homes? 

    Q: If consumers think the price of gasoline will drop, will they stop driving?

    Q: If consumers think the price of rent will drop, will they hold off renting until that happens?

    Q: If consumers think the price of rent will rise, will they rent two apartments to take advantage?

    Q: If consumers think the price of taxis will rise, will they take multiple taxi rides on advance?

    Q: If people need an operation, will they hold off if they think prices might drop next month?

    Q: If people need an operation, will they have two operations if they expect the price will go up?

    All of the above questions represent inelastic items. Those constitute over 80% of the CPI.  Let’s hone in on the elastic portion with additional Q&A.

    Questions for the Fed – Elastic Items

    Q: If people think the price of coats will rise will they buy a second coat they do not need?

    Q: If people think the price of clothes will drop, will they stop getting dressed?

    Q. The prices of TVs and electronics drop consistently. Better deals are always around the corner. Does that stop people from buying TVs and electronics?

    Q. If people thought the price of TVs was about to jump, would they buy multiple TVs to take advantage?

    Q. If someone needs a refrigerator, toaster, stove or a toilet because it broke, will they wait if for some reason they think prices will decline?

    Q. If someone does not need a refrigerator, toaster, stove or a toilet will they buy one anyway if they think prices will jump?

    For sure, some people will wait for year-end clearances to buy cars, but most don’t. And if a car breaks down, consumers will fix it immediately, they will not wait for specials.

    Stupidity Well Anchored

    The above questionnaires thoroughly debunk the Fed’s ridiculous spotlight on “inflation expectations”. 

    Yet, how many times have you heard “inflation expectations are well anchored“? 

    In reality, Fed stupidity is well anchored. 

    The one and only time inflation expectations matter is in a state of hyperinflation when it pays to buy nearly anything and barter it.

    No Economic Benefit to Inflation

    My Challenge to Keynesians “Prove Rising Prices Provide an Overall Economic Benefit” has gone unanswered.

    There is no economic benefit to inflation but there are winners and losers. The winners are those with first access to money, namely the banks and the already wealthy.

    The Fed complains about income and wealth inequality but they are the primary source. 

    BIS Deflation Study

    The BIS did a historical study and found routine price deflation was not any problem at all.

    Deflation may actually boost output. Lower prices increase real incomes and wealth. And they may also make export goods more competitive,” stated the study.

    For a discussion of the BIS study, please see Historical Perspective on CPI Deflations

    Asset Bubble Deflation

    It’s asset bubble deflation that is damaging. When asset bubbles burst, debt deflation results.

    Central banks’ seriously misguided attempts to defeat routine consumer price deflation is what fuels the destructive build up of unproductive debt and asset bubbles that eventually collapse.


    Tyler Durden

    Wed, 05/06/2020 – 19:45

  • Trump Resisted Pressuring China To Be More "Transparent" About Coronavirus Outbreak Back In January: Report
    Trump Resisted Pressuring China To Be More “Transparent” About Coronavirus Outbreak Back In January: Report

    In a must-read piece detailing the evolution of the US-China relationship from productive partnership to bitter rivalry, WSJ reported that back in January, President Trump resisted pressing China to be more transparent about the emerging virus, and the risks it might pose to the global community.

    Since President Trump revoked funding for the WHO last month and a British newspaper appeared to confirm that western intelligence agencies (including US intelligence) were investigating the possibility that the virus might have leaked from a biolab in Wuhan, hostilities between Beijing and Washington have taken off, with China’s Foreign Ministry on Wednesday prodding Secretary of State Mike Pompeo to show ‘proof’ that the virus came from the Wuhan lab.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Before critics jump on this tidbit, and try to portray the administration’s recent rhetoric against China as cynically political, it’s worth remembering that the WHO was praising China’s response as exemplary, helping to prop up Beijing’s lies. The US was led to believe China was much more on top of things than it turned out to be. That Trump wanted to try and curry some favor after the bitterness of the trade talks isn’t all that surprising. Besides, we doubt any pressure from Trump would have averted China’s dissembling.

    Even as he has presided over a China policy many see as the toughest in 40 years of relations, Mr. Trump has frequently praised President Xi and talked of their friendship—a tactic administration officials say is meant to give Chinese leaders an opening to meet U.S. demands for change.

    Early this year, several of Mr. Trump’s political advisers inside and outside the campaign urged him to take on China more directly, which they argued would have bipartisan appeal. One idea they suggested was a special commission to investigate the origins of the virus and whether Beijing responded sufficiently to control the outbreak.

    Mr. Trump twice declined suggestions from his team in January to press Mr. Xi for more transparency about the virus’s causes and symptoms, in one case saying that the criticism could cause Beijing to be less helpful, said White House officials.

    Domestic pressures in both the U.S. and China are likely to aggravate the already strained relations. Supporters of Mr. Biden also have produced attack ads focused on China.

    Mr. Xi, too, has faced criticism at home over the coronavirus, and his administration has sought to project a sense of strength in dealing with the U.S. as he tries to revitalize an economy stalled by the pandemic, manage high unemployment and quash persistent antigovernment unrest in Hong Kong.

    After Barack Obama’s turn at appeasment, which saw China ramp up its efforts to steal US innovations and technology, President Trump swept into office with a promise to crack down on Beijing. Since then, the distrust has only deepened, with two-thirds of Americans saying they no longer trust China. Meanwhile, the federal government is upping the pressure on China like never before.

    The Trump administration has moved to involve much of the U.S. government in a campaign that includes investigations, prosecutions and export restrictions. Nearly every cabinet and cabinet-level official either has adopted adversarial positions or jettisoned past cooperative programs with Beijing, an analysis of their policies showed.

    Chinese officials, for their part, are following through on President Xi Jinping’s call last fall to resist anything they perceive as standing in the way of China’s rise. They have stepped up military activities in the contested South China Sea and intimidation of Taiwan, a U.S. ally, and state media has issued extraordinary public denunciations of Secretary of State Mike Pompeo.

    The coronavirus pandemic has deepened the rancor, bringing relations between the two to a modern-day nadir. Both governments are forgoing cooperation and trying to outmaneuver each other to shape events in the post-pandemic world order.

    President Trump, who has sharply criticized China for its handling of the outbreak, has said he is considering using tariffs and other ways to collect compensation for it from Beijing, though senior officials signaled this week that the administration is holding off on punishing China economically.

    Once the virus has finally been subdued – however long that takes – the biggest takeaway here is that there has been a dramatic paradigm shift in US-China relations. We expect tensions will only worsen from here.


    Tyler Durden

    Wed, 05/06/2020 – 19:25

Digest powered by RSS Digest

Today’s News 6th May 2020

  • Ferrari Touts "Strong Order Book", Expects To Outperform In 2H 2020 Despite Auto Industry Implosion
    Ferrari Touts “Strong Order Book”, Expects To Outperform In 2H 2020 Despite Auto Industry Implosion

    If there’s one topic we have covered widely since the coronavirus pandemic started, it has been the collapse of the auto industry.

    Over the last week we have detailed how used car prices will likely cripple what little interest in new cars remains, how dealers are scrambling to desperately offer incentives and how ships full of vehicles are being turned away at port cities due to a lack of space and inventory glut.

    But, if there’s one silver lining to global central banks widening the wealth gap, its that the super-rich still have plenty of cash to buy exotic vehicles. While demand may be tepid from average run-of-the-mill car buyers, the wealthy have kept a bid under the price of luxury automobiles, Ferrari reported this week. 

    The maker of the $1.74 million Monza supercar said this week that its order book is “strong” regardless of a 7 week shutdown at its Italian plants, according to Bloomberg. The company’s CFO said on Monday that deliveries in Q1 were actually up 5% from the year prior. 

    Despite lowing its 2020 guide, the company is predicting a recovery in the second half of the year. The company says it could see faster revenue and profit growth than expected with the recovery as a tailwind. 

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Bloomberg Intelligence analyst Michael Dean said: “Evidence from the prior financial crisis suggests demand should remain robust. However, the main risk is that production will again be shuttered if there’s a second wave of Covid-19 infections in Italy.”

    As Ferrari returns to work, the company may wind up asking employees to work Saturdays and shorten summer holidays in order to catch up with its order book.

    Plants in Maranello and Modena will be back to full production on May 8 and Premier Giuseppe Conte is working toward a gradual re-opening of the country’s economy after an almost two month halt once it was discovered that Italy was a epicenter of the coronavirus outbreak.

    Despite some cancellations, Ferrari says the numbers are “nothing that we would deem to be alarming”. The company introduced five new models in 2019 and boosted sales to more than 10,000 units per year for the first time in the company’s history. Ferrari delivered 2,728 cars in Q1. 

    Massimo Vecchio, an analyst for UBI Banca said the company’s results show “strong resiliency”. At the same time, automakers like Daimler and Renault have withdrawn guidance completely. 


    Tyler Durden

    Wed, 05/06/2020 – 02:45

  • France To Use Existing Surveillance Grid To Enforce Social Distancing, Mask Wearing; Report
    France To Use Existing Surveillance Grid To Enforce Social Distancing, Mask Wearing; Report

    Authored by Steve Watson via Summit News,

    France will use its existing network of surveillance cameras to monitor how many people are wearing masks and track how citizens are complying with social distancing after its coronavirus lockdown is eased next week, according to reports.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    The BBC notes that “The resort city of Cannes on the Côte d’Azur has trialled the monitoring software, installed at outdoor markets and on buses.”

    Datakalab, the French firm behind the software says its algorithms “can be incorporated into existing surveillance systems in other public spaces, such as hospitals, stations, airports and shopping centres.”

    The company claims that the software being installed to work with existing cameras does not violate EU data privacy laws because “No image is stored or transmitted.”

    Cannes Mayor David Lisnard said, “This technology doesn’t identify people but just gives us mathematical analysis to meet people’s needs.”

    So, essentially, it’s ok to track you everywhere you go to ensure you comply, so long as they don’t keep your picture on a hard drive.

    France already announced that face masks will be compulsory on public transport and in schools from next week. The country’s lockdown has been more severe than most, with anyone traveling outside their home needing papers approved by the authorities. Anyone found outside without the relevant documents is subject to a fine of €135 upwards.

    The case in France highlights how the framework of surveillance that has already been in place and rapidly expanding for two decades is now being used to enforce the removal of freedoms.

    We also recently highlighted how tech companies all over the world are developing more sophisticated tools that will allow law enforcement to more effectively police social distancing rules.

    We are so used to surveillance now that for many it doesn’t seem that much more of a change to simply give over total compliance and acceptance of a panopticon world.

    Coronavirus was just the crisis need to institute permanent societal lockdown using already existing tools, as well as new technologies that can be slotted into those systems already in place.


    Tyler Durden

    Wed, 05/06/2020 – 02:00

  • Chinese Buyers Flee Hong Kong Real Estate In Major Hit To World's Priciest Property Market
    Chinese Buyers Flee Hong Kong Real Estate In Major Hit To World’s Priciest Property Market

    Mainland Chinese are no fools. They’re shunning commercial real estate deals in Hong Kong as a deep recession unfolds. 

    According to Bloomberg, citing a new CBRE Group Inc. report, there were no mainland Chinese buyers for property transactions greater than HK$77 million ($10 million) in 1Q20. This was a sharp difference from several years ago when bidding wars drove property prices higher.  

    “A lot of mainland buyers are taking a step back because of the economic outlook and the conflicts that made them feel unwelcome,” said Reeves Yan, head of capital markets at CBRE. 

    Preliminary data on Monday showed Hong Kong’s economy crashed in 1Q20, with the worst economic contraction ever, printing -8.9% YoY. The data suggest a further plunge in economic activity will be seen in 2Q as more of the lockdown was captured in the quarter.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Yan said capital controls imposed by Beijing on money flowing in and out of China had also damaged the commercial real estate market. 

    As shown in the chart below, there was a confluence of events that resulted in the decline of buyers:

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    The decline of mainland participation also resulted in a price slump, data from the Rating and Valuation Department showed. A decades-long trendline was recently broken. A peak in prices was seen about a year after the global slowdown started, and about half a year after the trade war gained momentum. In February, prices fell 8.5% from a year earlier.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Hong Kong Financial Secretary Paul Chan Mo-Po warned on Monday that a “deep recession” has made the “economic situation very challenging.”

    Iris Pang, Greater China economist at ING, said there are some signs the virus spread across Asia has slowed but warned: “social distancing will continue to hurt catering and shopping.” She said the risk of more protests is increasing for “the summer holidays.” 

    A recovery of Hong Kong’s collapsed tourism industry could take years. Chinese tourists began to shun the city when protests erupted last summer. Then when the pandemic unfolded earlier this year, mainlanders completely abandoned the area. The decline of mainlanders means a reduction in foot traffic at the world’s most expensive shopping mall, located at Hong Kong’s Times Square in the center of Causeway Bay, reported Bloomberg. This is the area where mainlanders would come to pick up expensive watches and discounted cosmetics. 

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    The Tiffany & Co. store at Times Square in Hong Kong. h/t Bloomberg

    Mainlander visitors plummeted 53% in December over the prior year, mainly because of the protest. However, the virus, which resulted in strict stay-at-home orders, is likely to show visitor data near zero for early 2020. 

    “Many retailers are saying it’s a disaster,” said Nicholas Bradstreet, managing director of at Savills Plc. “In the last 10 days, their sales have been down 70% to 80% week-on-week. There’s very little traffic into the shops” at retail districts like Central, Causeway Bay and Tsim Sha Tsui, he added. 

    Times Square fronts Russell Street, where commercial real estate prices are equivalent to New York City’s and is some of the most expensive in the world. Prada, operating a store in the retail district, recently got out of its HK$9 million ($1.2 million) per month lease as the area now resembles a ghost town. 

    “Causeway Bay is very quiet now. It used to have a lot of traffic,” said Wong, a salesperson at a retail store in the area. “With the scarcity of face masks, people would rather not go out at all.”

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Times Square in Causeway Bay, Hong Kong. 
    h/t Bloomberg

    The retail downturn in Hong Kong is due to the lack of tourists from China, has stressed out landlords, and dented commercial real estate prices as we noted above. 

    Mall owners, including Times Square’s Wharf Real Estate Investment Co., is facing rent pressures and rising vacancies. The shares of the company have corrected about 15% since late January. 

    The deepening economic contraction will undoubtedly be shown in 2Q20. This will continue to pressure real estate prices as it now appears the prospects of a V-shaped recovery are fading. 


    Tyler Durden

    Wed, 05/06/2020 – 01:00

  • Escobar: Get Ready For The Next Game-Changer – The Gold-Backed Digital Yuan
    Escobar: Get Ready For The Next Game-Changer – The Gold-Backed Digital Yuan

    Authored by Pepe Escobar via The Strategic Culture Foundation,

    A new, radical paradigm shift is in progress. The U.S. economy may shrink as much as 40% in the first semester of 2020. China, already the world’s largest economy by PPP for a few years now, may soon become the world’s largest economy even in exchange rate terms.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    The post-Planet Lockdown world – still a hazy mirage – may well need a post-Planet Lockdown currency. And that’s where a serious candidate steps into the fray: the fiat digital yuan.

    Last month, the People’s Bank of China (PBOC) confirmed that a group of top banks started trials in electronic payment in four different Chinese regions using the new digital yuan. Yet there’s no timetable yet for the official launch of what is called the Digital Currency Electronic Payment (DCEP).

    The man with the plan is PBOC governor Yi Gang. He has confirmed that apart from the trials in Suzhou, Xiong’an, Chengdu and Shenzhen, the PBOC is also testing hypothetical scenarios for the 2022 Winter Olympics.

    While DCEP, according to Yi, “has made very good progress,” he insists the PBOC will be “cautious in terms of risk control, especially to study anti money-laundering and ‘know your customer’ requirements to incorporate in the design and system of DCEP.”

    DCEP should be interpreted as the road map for China leading to an eventual, even more groundbreaking replacement of the U.S. dollar as the world’s reserve currency. China is already ahead in the digital currency sweepstakes: the sooner DCEP is launched the better to convince the world, especially the Global South, to tag along.

    The PBOC is developing the system with four top state-owned banks as well as payment behemoths Tencent and Ant Financial.

    mobile app developed by the Agricultural Bank of China (ABC) is already circulating on WeChat. This is in effect an interface linked to DCEP. Moreover, 19 restaurants and retail establishments including Starbucks, McDonald’s and Subway are part of the pilot testing.

    China is advancing fast on the whole digital spectrum. A Blockchain Service Network (BSN) was launched not only for domestic but also for global trade purposes. A large committee is supervising BSN, including executives from the PBOC, Baidu and Tencent, according to the Ministry of Industry and Information Technology (MIIT).

    Backed by gold

    So what does this all mean?

    Well connected banking sources in Hong Kong have told me Beijing is not interested for the yuan to replace the U.S. dollar – for all the interest across the Global South in bypassing it, especially now that the petrodollar is in a coma.

    The official Beijing position is that the U.S. dollar should be replaced by an IMF-approved Special Drawing Rights (SDR) basket of currencies (dollar, euro, yuan, yen). That would eliminate the heavy burden of the yuan as the sole reserve currency.

    But that may be just a diversionist tactic in an environment of all-out information war. A basket of currencies under the IMF still implies U.S. control – not exactly what China wants.

    The meat of the matter is that a digital, sovereign yuan may be backed by gold. That’s not confirmed – yet. Gold could serve as a direct back up; to back bonds; or just lay there as collateral. What’s certain is that once Beijing announces a digital currency backed by gold, it will be like the U.S. dollar being struck by lightning.

    Under this new framework, nations won’t need to export more to China than they import so they have enough yuan to trade. And Beijing won’t have to keep printing yuan electronically – and artificially, as in the case of the U.S. dollar – to meet trade demands.

    The digital yuan will be effectively backed up by the massive amount of Made in China goods and services – and not by a transoceanic Empire of 800 Bases. And the value of the digital yuan will be decided by the market – as it happens with bitcoin.

    This whole process has been years in the making, part of serious discussions started already in the late 2000s inside BRICS summit meetings, especially by Russia and China – the core strategic partnership inside the BRICS.

    Considering multiple strategies to progressively bypass the U.S. dollar, starting with bilateral trade in their own currencies, Russia and China, for instance, set up a Russia-Chian RMB Cooperation Fund three years ago.

    Beijing’s strategy is carefully calibrated, like playing go long-term. Apart from methodically stockpiling gold in massive quantities (just like Russia) for seven years now, Beijing has been campaigning for a wider use of SDR while making sure to not position the yuan as a strategic competitor.

    But now the post-Planet Lockdown environment is shaping up as ideal for Beijing to make a move. Even before the onset of the Covid-19 crisis the predominant feeling among the leadership was that China is under a full spectrum attack by the United States government. Hybrid War already reaching fever pitch implies bilateral relations will only get worse, not better.

    So when we have China as the world’s largest economy by both PPP and exchange rate; still the strongest growing major economy, barring the first semester of 2020; productive, innovative, efficient and on track to reach a higher technological level with the Made in China 2025 program; and capable of winning the “people’s war” against Covid-19 in record time, all the necessary elements seem to be in place.

    But then, there’s soft power. Beijing needs to have the Global South on its side. The United States government knows it very well; no wonder the current hysteria is all about demonizing China as “guilty” on all – unproved – counts of fostering and lying about Covid-19.

    An “impeding arrival”

    A key advantage of a sovereign digital yuan is that Beijing does not need to float a paper yuan – which by the way is being sidelined all across China itself, as virtually everyone is switching to electronic payment.

    The digital yuan, using blockchain technology, will automatically float – thus bypassing the U.S.-controlled global financialized casino.

    The amount of sovereign digital currency is fixed. That in itself eliminates a plague: quantitative easing (QE), as in helicopter money. And that leaves the sovereign digital currency as the preferred medium for trade, with currency transfers unimpeded by geography and, the icing on the cake, without banks charging outrageous fees as intermediaries.

    Of course there will be pushback. As in non-stop demonization of neo-Orwellian China for straying away from the whole purpose of bitcoin and cryptocurrencies – which is to have freedom from a centralized structure via decentralized ownership. There will be howls of horror at the PBOC potentially capable of seizing anyone’s digital funds or turning off a wallet if the owner displeases the CCP.

    China is on it, but the U.S., UK, Russia and India are also on their way to launch their own crypto-currencies. For obvious reasons, the Bank of International Settlements (BIS), the Central Bank of Central Banks, is very much aware that the future is now. Their research with over 50 Central Banks is unmistakable: we are facing an “impeding arrival”. But who will take the Biggest Prize?


    Tyler Durden

    Wed, 05/06/2020 – 00:05

  • California Liberals Using Corona-Crisis To Transform State
    California Liberals Using Corona-Crisis To Transform State

    California liberals – the majority of lawmkers, have been ‘propelled by the urgency of the coronavirus crisis’ in order to enact various facets of their agenda, according to the New York Times.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    In addition to letting nearly 10,000 inmates out of overcrowded jails and prisons over the last few weeks, and eliminating cash bail for most crimes, the state has also been housing more of the homeless population, while providing laptop computers to children in poor and rural areas of the most populous state in the nation in order to facilitate distance learning.

    And while the above measures are supposed to be temporary, California’s left wing is pushing to make the changes permanent – calling this the ‘new normal’ since ‘normal wasn’t working.’

    In Los Angeles, Mayor Eric M. Garcetti has proposed using the crisis as a catalyst to achieve free higher education and to mitigate inequality. Invoking Franklin D. Roosevelt and the social welfare programs that he championed, Mr. Garcetti said, “the shock to our economy and our lives recalls the scale and the challenges faced by the generation who sacrificed through the Great Depression and World War II.” –New York Times

    “Whether you are talking about homelessness or whether you are talking about the criminal justice system and incarceration, we are doing things today that should have been done a long time ago,” said former San Francisco DA who is now running for the same position in Los Angeles.

    The pandemic has forced a lot of things that were being talked about to actually take place at a very rapid pace,” he added. “The reset button was pushed, and I don’t see us coming back.”

    Still, with the nation’s highest poverty rate some analysts have begun to question whether a ‘liberal utopia’ is possible in the face of budget shortfalls and dwindling tax revenues. As the Times notes: “Already, parts of a progressive agenda formulated months ago when California’s coffers were full — financing medical care for undocumented immigrants and providing greater access to child care are two examples — may now need to be scaled back.

    As for prison releases – advocates for ending mass incarceration have used the pandemic top push for more inmate releases – arguing that America incarcerates too many people. They’ve argued that the high costs of maintaining the prisons will come under great strain as state and local budgets collapse.

    With the safe release of a few thousand more people, and maintaining these declines permanently, California could come out of this crisis with the ability to do the previously impossible: close a prison,” wrote former SF prosecutor Lenore Anderson, president of Californians for Safety and Justice.

    And in Los Angeles, thousands of homeless have been moved indoors since the pandemic began spreading in the city.

    Longstanding shelters like the Union Rescue Mission, which has faced an outbreak among its residents and staff — two people have died — have had to reduce their capacity to comply with social distancing guidelines.

    But a program backed by FEMA called Project Roomkey has picked up the slack, opening up thousands of motel rooms for older homeless residents. –New York Times

    “It’s unfortunate it took a pandemic, but I’m thankful everyone is responding the way they are,” said Andy Bales, who runs the Union Resecue Mission in Los Angeles and has worked with the homeless for decades. “It absolutely has energized and mobilized our city, county and state in a way that we have been crying out for a long time.”

    California Republicans, meanwhile, insist that the state needs to hold back spending and reopen the state – which has experienced far fewer coronavirus deaths than New York and other states on the East Coast.

    Read the rest of the report here.


    Tyler Durden

    Tue, 05/05/2020 – 23:45

  • Twitter's New Rules Urging Users Not To Curse Will Likely Spark Another Wave Of Censorship
    Twitter’s New Rules Urging Users Not To Curse Will Likely Spark Another Wave Of Censorship

    Twitter – the very same platform that suspended us permanently for accurately predicting that the Wuhan Institute of Virology was likely at the middle of the ongoing global pandemic – is now taking its censorship to ludicrous levels.

    The service is now going to be asking users to “reconsider” responses to other users that include slurs, epithets or swear words, according to Bloomberg.

    We are all but certain this voluntary-sounding and discretionarily-enforced infringement on free speech will eventually lead to yet another wave of bans and suspensions for anyone whose ideology doesn’t fit the far left mold that Jack Dorsey and his Silicon Valley cronies are peddling that day of the week. 

    The company Tweeted on Tuesday, describing a new warning it will be issuing users who choose to use such language: “When things get heated, you may say things you don’t mean. This new prompt gives you the option to revise your reply before it’s published.”

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    And of course, the new “experiment” comes just 6 months before a national election. The experiment also serves as a stark reminder that Twitter will be scanning the replies of all of its 166 million users every time they post something. 

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    It is the latest move in an increasingly alarming shift from the social media company to try and control the information that is posted on its platform. Not unlike what Prager U alleged against Google during their legal dispute, Twitter appears to us to want the benefits of being a public forum, while only taking on the liabilities of being a private publisher. 

    For now, users will still be able to send their original responses after being prompted, Bloomberg reported. 

    And in related news, there’s still no edit button.


    Tyler Durden

    Tue, 05/05/2020 – 23:25

  • Researcher On Cusp Of COVID-19 Breakthrough Killed In Bizarre Murder-Suicide
    Researcher On Cusp Of COVID-19 Breakthrough Killed In Bizarre Murder-Suicide

    A University of Pittsburgh researcher working on a coronavirus project was fatally shot on Saturday at his home in Ross Township, while associate Hao Gu, 46, was found dead in a car approximately 100 yards away of what appeared to be a self-inflicted gunshot.

    The researcher, 37-year-oild Bing Liu, was found shot multiple times in the head, neck and torso around Noon on Saturday. Nothing was stolen from the townhouse and there was no forced entry, according to the Post Gazette. He worked in the college’s department of computational and systems biology at the Pitt School of Medicine.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Bing was on the verge of making very significant findings toward understanding the cellular mechanisms that underlie SARS-CoV-2 infection and the cellular basis of the following complications,” the department announced in a written statement, adding “We will make an effort to complete what he started in an effort to pay homage to his scientific excellence.”

    Liu’s expertise was developing computational models, simulation and analysis techniques to study the dynamics of biological systems – in some cases using machine learning techniques to understand cellular processes, according to his bio.

    He was described as an outstanding teacher and mentor.

    “He was a very talented individual, extremely intelligent and hard-working,” said the head of his department, Ivet Bahar. “He has been contributing to several scientific projects, publishing in high-profile journals. He was someone whom we all liked very much, a very gentle, very helpful, kind person, very generous.”

    “We are all shocked to learn what happened to him. This was very unexpected,” she added.

    …Mr. Liu has co-authored 30-plus publications, including four in 2020. Ms. Behar said he had just begun research on the novel coronavirus.

    He was just starting to obtain interesting results,” she said. “He was sharing with us, trying to understand the mechanism of infection, so we will hopefully continue what he was doing.”’ –Post Gazette

    “His loss will be felt throughout the entire scientific community,” said the university in a statement.

    The motive in the shooting is unknown and the investigation is ongoing. A formal ruling from the Allegheny County Medical Examiner’s Office regarding the cause and manner of Gu’s death is pending, according to the report.


    Tyler Durden

    Tue, 05/05/2020 – 23:05

  • Scientist Whose Doomsday Models Sparked Global Lockdown Resigns After Breaking Quarantine To Bang Married Lover
    Scientist Whose Doomsday Models Sparked Global Lockdown Resigns After Breaking Quarantine To Bang Married Lover

    Professor Neil Ferguson – whose dire coronavirus predictions prompted worldwide lockdown measures still in place – broke his own advice on the need for strict social distancing to hook up with his married lover, according to the Telegraph.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Neil Ferguson and Antonia Staats

    On at least two occasions, Antonia Staats, 38, travelled across London from her home in the south of the capital to spend time with the Government scientist, nicknamed Professor Lockdown.

    The 51-year-old had only just finished a two-week spell self-isolating after testing positive for coronavirus.

    Prof Ferguson told the Telegraph: “I accept I made an error of judgment and took the wrong course of action. I have therefore stepped back from my involvement in Sage [the government’s Scientific Advisory Group for Emergencies]. –Telegraph

    “I acted in the belief that I was immune, having tested positive for coronavirus, and completely isolated myself for almost two weeks after developing symptoms,” he said, adding “I deeply regret any undermining of the clear messages around the continued need for social distancing to control this devastating epidemic. The Government guidance is unequivocal, and is there to protect all of us.”

    Ferguson, who resigned from his Government advisory position on Tuesday, predicted that up to 500,000 Britons and 2.2 million in the US would die without measures. Somehow, Sweden – which enacted virtually no measures to mitigate the virus. has a lower per-capita mortality rate than the UK, Italy, Spain, France, Belgium and the Netherlands – all of which enacted lockdown measures.

    And while his computer models were flat-wrong, Ferguson – who leads the team at Imperial College London, has frequently appeared on media to support the lockdown and “very intensive social distancing” measures.

    Of note, Ferguson and Staats hooked up on March 30 – the same day he gave a public warning that the one-week-old lockdown measures would need to remain in place until June.

    Staats – a left-wing campaigner, visited again on April 8, despite telling friends that she thought her husband might have come down with coronavirus.

    She and her husband live together with their two children in a £1.9 million home, but are understood to be in an open marriage. She has told friends about her relationship with Prof Ferguson, but does not believe their actions to be hypocritical because she considers the households to be one.

    But one week before the first tryst, Dr Jenny Harries, the deputy chief medical officer, and Matt Hancock, the Health Secretary, clarified during the daily Downing Street press conference that couples not living together must stay apart during lockdown. –Telegraph

    “He has peculiarly breached his own guidelines, and for an intelligent man I find that very hard to believe. It risks undermining the Government’s lockdown message,” said Sir. Iain Duncan Smith.

    Meanwhile, over 9,000 fines have been issued to quarantine violators in England and Wales during the lockdown – while Scotland’s chief medical officer, Dr. Catherine Calderwood, made two trips to her second home during the lockdown, resulting in her resignation.


    Tyler Durden

    Tue, 05/05/2020 – 23:01

  • America Doesn't Have A Justice System Anymore
    America Doesn’t Have A Justice System Anymore

    Authored by Kurt Schlichter via Townhall.com,

    The good news is that you might get out of future jury duty, because when you are asked under oath about your own biases during a federal criminal case jury selection you would have to answer honestly by responding, “Your Honor, I don’t trust a damn thing anyone in the FBI says.”

    If the heirs of Efrem Zimbalist, Jr., were to go up on the stand and testify, the recent disgraceful revelations about how their bosses tried to frame LTG Mike Flynn mean you would be entirely correct to grant them the same credibility as the dude caught wearing a black cape, a Lone Ranger mask, and a nametag that says “Willie Sutton” while tip-toeing out of First National carrying a big sack with a dollar sign on it as the alarm goes off.

    Oh, and if an FBI agent asks if he can ask you some questions, try not to burst into laughter before you reply, “No, I assert my right to remain silent” and call your lawyer.

    And this sorry state of affairs is all the FBI’s fault. 

    Every bit of it. At one time it was the pride of American law enforcement, a symbol of integrity, honesty and incredible courage under fire. But now when we think of the FBI in “action,” we think of a couple dozen special agents decked out in full Delta Farce chic dragging an elderly gadfly out of bed in his PJs after making sure to tip-off CNN that this high-risk op was about to go down.

    Way to go, guys.

    The FBI had an incredible legacy of honor and respect and took a giant Schiff on it.

    Much like only socialism could make an island full of Cubans poor, or the Golden State a hellhole, only the choice of the liberal FBI leadership to go all in on using the power we entrusted them with to instead do the dirty work of the Democratic establishment could wreck the legacy of the Federal Bureau of Investigation. Good job. Right now, J. Edgar Hoover is wrapped in a sleek black cocktail dress, turning over in his grave.

    It’s all falling apart, the result of the dogged untangling of this abomination by super-lawyer Sidney Powell and a few actual journalists who have pieced together this grotesque conspiracy.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Comey’s FBI decided that they didn’t like the American people’s choice for president so they lied and cheated to spy on him and his campaign, collaborated to spray him and his administration with a golden shower of lies that they knew were lies, and then, when all that failed, decided to try to set-up an innocent man to be fired or tossed in prison for the crime of being in the opposite political camp.

    My favorite part is how those bastards were so arrogant that they wrote all this down, like a Bond villain who casually explains his entire plan to 007 because he’s positive that the spy is just moments away from being taken away and killed by his henchmen. And it worked out just as well in real life.

    Until Attorney General Barr forced them too, the FBI hid the FBI document that said the FBI was trying to set him up even though the Constitution requires that any potentially exculpatory evidence be turned over to the accused. But hey, I guess laws and rules and stuff only exist to be used against the enemies of the elite and its agents. For the elite, they are mere guidelines. And, of course, when they break them it is no biggie. That looming doofus James Comey handed off classified material to his pals to leak to the media. You’d go to jail, but he gets tongue-bathed by the lib media. Andrew McCabe chooses to lie again and again in an investigation. Oh well, the IG is going to write a stinging report about his naughtiness. That’ll teach him. Telling lies under oath to the FISA court? Don’t do it again *wink wink*.

    But those guys are special. You and the people who agree with you politically aren’t. That’s why the FBI leadership conspired to maneuver LTG Flynn into a crime that isn’t a crime – “perjury” is a crime only if the statement is material to an investigation of a crime and here there was admittedly no crime to investigate – and why they insist that he’s got to do time. Who cares if he is a 33-year veteran of our nation’s wars? LTG Flynn should have guaranteed himself immunity by being a skeevy bureaucratic hack or an illegal alien.

    And let’s not forget the crimes of the Mueller gang, that team of consummate pros that we were dutifully informed by the rump-bussing media was made up of the bestest and the brightest of American law enforcement. It was not bad enough that they threatened to prosecute of LTG Flynn’s son on false charges to coerce a guilty plea and cooperation again Trump, et. al. No, they then hid the fact that they made this promise to LTG Flynn by not putting it in the plea agreement as mandated by law. That way, as honest ex-prosecutor Andrew McCarthy figured out, they ensured that when they put LTG Flynn up to testify against a someone from Trumpworld, maybe even the president himself, the jury would never know the real reason LTG Flynn pleaded guilty – that he was forced to protect his family from false charges. They did this intending to lie to future juries

    For us, this would be obstruction of justice and other crimes. For them, it will be nothing. The liberal elite will celebrate their aggressive protection of the elite status quo, the garbage media will nod in approval at their innovative dissident-removal strategy, and they will never, ever be prosecuted.

    Sorry folks, none of them will ever see a day in jail. I hope I am wrong. I hope William Barr and John “Mind Flayer” Durham will see that these criminals are prosecuted for these outrageous crimes. But I don’t believe it will happen. Our justice system is really two justice systems, one for them and one for us, which means that we have no justice system at all. 

    That’s more than just galling. It’s poisonous. A free society cannot exist like this long and remain a free society. These people, who we trusted with the most solemn of duties, betrayed their oaths and betrayed us for grubby political advantage. This was not done for some higher purpose. It was not some misguided pursuit of justice by frustrated public servants who were willing to bend some rules to right some wrongs. These people were serving only themselves and their self-interest, hoping that when they brought down the Republican administration the American people elected, they would personally benefit from the largesse of the Democratic administration that replaced it. 

    They are worse than the gangsters the FBI became famous chasing. These disgraces, who frame political opponents, pretended to be public servants upholding their oaths while their criminal treachery served only their cheesy ambition. At least Willie Sutton was honest enough to admit (perhaps apocryphally) that he robbed banks because “That’s where the money is.” 


    Tyler Durden

    Tue, 05/05/2020 – 22:45

  • "We Ask For Help But It Never Comes": Dead Are Left To Rot, Then Buried In Mass Graves, As Coronavirus Overwhelms Brazil
    “We Ask For Help But It Never Comes”: Dead Are Left To Rot, Then Buried In Mass Graves, As Coronavirus Overwhelms Brazil

    Because of its size – both geographically and population-wise, as well as its economic heft – Brazil is often compared to the US. And when it comes to the progression of the coronavirus, it’s probably one of only a handful of countries (one other being perhaps India) where an apples-to-apples comparison might be most relevant.

    Fortunately for Americans, President Trump has done a much more effective job at combating the virus in the US than his Brazilian counterpart Jair Bolsonaro – a former far-right Congressman known to some as “the Tropical Trump”. Bolsonaro has infamously continued to deny the virus’s severity, dismissing it as “a little flu”, while Brazil continues to post some of the lowest testing rates in the world.

    This has allowed the virus to explode without much resistance, leading researchers at the University of Sao Paolo to project that more than 1.6 million Brazilians have likely already been infected (out of a population of roughly 209 million). In some of Brazil’s poorest, most remote villages, the outbreak has overwhelmed health-care systems.

    Many corpses have been left inside homes for more than a day after death until they could be collected, a scenario that briefly played out in parts of Italy.

    An expansive WSJ report published Monday explores the situation in Brazil, and concludes that as all of the country’s biggest cities and many of its wealthier provinces start to reopen, there’s concern that the country could single-handedly reignite the outbreak in the western hemisphere.

    The report begins in the state of Manaus, a remote Amazonian province.

    In the tiny, stifling home she shared with seven relatives in the Amazon, Maria Portelo de Lima began coughing, started feeling weaker and, over a week, got sicker and sicker.

    Her family tried to get the 61-year-old to a hospital in Manaus, a city of 2.2 million in the heart of the rainforest. They were told no ambulances were available or hospital beds free because of a flood of coronavirus patients.

    […]

    Ms. de Lima died April 26. With so many other Covid-19 victims in the city, it took 30 hours for an ambulance to pick up her body. She was buried in a mass grave, her identity marked by a wooden cross that cost $22.

    In Manaus, Ms. de Lima’s death was among hundreds that have put that Amazon River city at the heart of Brazil’s coronavirus struggle. It is a place with far too few hospital beds and other health-care facilities to cope with such a disease outbreak.

    Ms. de Lima’s niece, Rosa Alves, had frantically but unsuccessfully sought aid as her aunt’s condition worsened. “We feel humiliated. We pay taxes and when we need help, we ask for it and help never comes,” Ms. Alves said.

    Manaus buried about 140 bodies the day Ms. de Lima died, six times the normal rate, according to its mayor, Arthur Virgilio. The mayor, a 74-year-old who described himself as stoic in the face of past tragedies, has openly wept as he watches his hometown buckle and his people suffer. On a recent night, learning of mass burials in the city, he broke down.

    “I am asking for more help from Brasilia, we are at our limits,” Mr. Virgilio said. “We are heading for the peak, we need help from the federal government and the international community.”

    The fast spread of the virus in Manaus, which is a hub for jungle safaris by American and European tourists, raises a note of caution for wealthy nations in the Northern Hemisphere. Hopes that coming warm weather will slow the virus clash with the mounting toll in a steamy city where the average April high was around 87 Fahrenheit.

    Photos published with the report showed scenes of health-care workers overwhelmed by the profusion of cases in urban “favelas” – poor, densely packed slums offering ideal breeding conditions for the virus.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Per WSJ: “Medical workers check a man with breathing problems in the São Paulo’s favela of Paraisópolis. A scarcity of coronavirus tests in Brazil limits them to health and safety professionals, the very sick and those who died and are suspected of having the virus.”

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Per WSJ: “Medical personnel disinfect rooms in a Paraisópolis sports hall used as a place to treat coronavirus patients. The virus is spreading in poor districts such as the favella, where 120,000 live in less than two square miles.”

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Per WSJ: “An elderly Covid-19 patient in her house in Paraisopolis.”

    In a testament to the virus’s varied effects (depending on the patient, it can be deadly, or extremely mild), Bolsonaro’s continued denials have left many Brazilians confused about who can and can’t catch the virus.

    “People think the coronavirus is a rich man’s disease, that only those who travel catch it,” said Claudio Rodrigues Melo, who set up a soup kitchen for needy neighbors in one of São Paulo’s poorest areas.

    Echoing Fox News’ initial denounciation of the virus as a “media conspiracy”, many in Brazil believe that it’s just a conspiracy, or only impacts the elderly.

    “Or they think it only impacts the elderly, or even that it’s fake news, something made up by the Globo news network to discredit Bolsonaro,” he said.

    And many supporters of the president have gathered to protest local lockdown orders at his exhortation, rallies far larger than comparable movements in the US.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Brazil boasts some of the lowest testing rates in the world, with only 1,600 tests per million residents, far below the US’s 33,000 per million rate.

    Yet, despite this, Brazil has seen the number of confirmed cases balloon, alongside deaths.

    A doctor from Ribeirão Preto Medical School who worked on the study projecting 1.6 million infections in Brazil claimed with little doubt that “Brazil is already the global epicenter of the coronavirus.”

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    At this point, with states already reopening, turning around and forcing a complete shutdown probably isn’t politically feasible.

    The share of people supporting social isolation in a survey taken last week fell to 52% from 60% in the first week of April, according to pollster Datafolha. And among Brazilians with smartphones that can be tracked, only 40% appear to be adhering to stay-home measures, said In Loco, a tech company focused on geolocation data.

    Data from Google’s Covid-19 Community Mobility Reports show growing numbers of Brazilians out shopping and going to work in the past two weeks, while Chileans and Colombians stay home.

    The state of Santa Catarina in Brazil’s affluent south was the first to reopen, a little more than a week ago. Women and children thronged an upscale shopping center in the city of Blumenau.

    The mall laid out a red carpet for the shoppers. Store employees lined up outdoors to greet them, while a saxophonist played Creedence Clearwater Revival’s “Have You Ever Seen the Rain?” All precautions were taken to protect customers, according to the mall’s owner.

    But even some of the country’s most populous and economically important states are seeing hospitals being hopelessly overrun. Rio state has so many coronavirus patients that the waiting list for an ICU bed or a respirator is 360 patients long, according to the state’s health secretary Edmar Santos.

    “We are on the verge of collapse,” he said. “We will quickly see chaos, not just in Rio de Janeiro, but in all of Brazil.”

    Santos himself tested positive for coronavirus in April but has returned to work.

    Like in the US, poorer working class workers say that if given the choice between starving and putting themselves at risk, they will gladly choose the latter.

    Ryan Cesar Martins, 27, said he couldn’t afford to honor the social-isolation rules imposed by the state’s governor in March. He said a car-painting business he ran that earned him nearly $1,300 in January brought in less than $100 in April. His wife, Keila Evellin, 22, lost her off-the-books job as a saleswoman. They have maxed out their credit cards.

    On Thursday, Mr. Martins went to work as an employee of another car-painting shop.

    “If it’s a choice between getting the coronavirus and dying of hunger, I prefer not to die of hunger, so I’m going back to work,” Mr. Martins said.

    Still, despite these horrible scenes, Brazil’s economy and social fabric have remained mostly intact, although capital flight looks to be accelerating…

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    When all this is said and done, we suspect Brazil’s response will be an important reference point as the world tries to evaluate the approaches espoused in Europe, the US and elsewhere.


    Tyler Durden

    Tue, 05/05/2020 – 22:25

  • GOP: China Has Infiltrated US Higher Education To Impede Coronavirus Research
    GOP: China Has Infiltrated US Higher Education To Impede Coronavirus Research

    Authored by Steve Watson via Summit News,

    Congressional Republicans are accusing China of attempting to hinder US coronavirus research by infiltrating US universities and spreading communist propaganda.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Reuters reports that ranking GOP members across seven House committees have delivered a letter to Education Secretary Betsy DeVos that warns Beijing is indoctrinating American students.

    The letter was signed by Congressman Jim Jordan, the ranking Republican on the House Oversight committee, as well as by members on the Homeland Security, Science, Armed Services, Education and Intelligence and Foreign Affairs committees.

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    The letter requests that DeVos provide more information pertaining to the allegations against China, including all documents related to schools that have accepted funds from China, as well as details of any investigations into colleges and education officials who may have accepted “gifts” from the communist state.

    “We write to seek a better understanding of the Department’s efforts to address unreported foreign direct investment into the U.S. higher education system,” the letter reads.

    We have been concerned about the potential for the Chinese government to use its strategic investments to turn American college campuses into indoctrination platforms for American students,” the congressmen further write.

    China has strategically invested in U.S. academia to attempt to steal confidential information and technology from U.S. companies, and even the U.S. government,” the lawmakers state in the letter, pointing to a 2018 report from the Hoover Institution identifying upwards of 110 Confucius Institutes operating on American colleges to facilitate China’s espionage and theft of intellectual property.

    They add that “Besides China peddling money for influence in U.S. institutions of higher education (IHE), China is restricting any research regarding the origins of COVID-19 that does not comport with CCP propaganda.”

    These actions “bring into question whether U.S. [institutes of higher education] receiving federal taxpayer dollars should be allowed to accept funds from China, the CCP, or other affiliated organizations,” the letter concludes.

    Commenting on the letter, Rep. Jim Jordan said “We cannot allow a dangerous communist regime to buy access to our institutions of higher education, plain and simple.”

    “The Chinese Communist Party’s cover-up of the early outbreak of the coronavirus immeasurably worsened this disease’s impact on the United States and the world.” Jordan urged, adding that “We owe it to the American people to hold China accountable and to prevent them from doing further harm to our country.”

    The suspicions of Chinese infiltration of US higher education pre-dates the coronavirus crisis, with the Department of Education instigating an investigation into several universities last year to determine if they had failed to disclose foreign funding.

    In February, the department announced it has uncovered $6.5 billion so far in undisclosed foreign funding from Saudi Arabia, Qatar, China and Russia. The investigation has since been expanded to include Harvard and Yale.

    The FBI has previously issued warnings regarding China investing in American higher education to steal sensitive information, primarily via access through federal grants.

    In January, the Department of Justice also arrested a professor at Harvard, as well as two Chinese nationals for reportedly acting as foreign agents.

    Last year President Donald Trump signed the 2019 National Defense Authorization Act which proposed an ultimatum to universities receiving financial assistance from the Pentagon: close the Chinese propaganda center on campus or lose funding. Since that time, at least 49 schools have closed their Confucius Institute, according to Human Rights Watch.


    Tyler Durden

    Tue, 05/05/2020 – 22:05

  • What's Really Driving Market Performance: A Look At Return Decomposition
    What’s Really Driving Market Performance: A Look At Return Decomposition

    Now that it is common knowledge that “The Market is Now Just Five Stocks” as we first put it over a month ago, with Goldman clarifying that the five largest S&P 500 stocks  – MSFT, AAPL, AMZN, GOOGL, FB – accounted for 20% of index market cap, the highest concentration on record…

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    … which has led to a fascinating market divergence in which the 5 biggest stocks are up 10% YTD while the remaining 495 S&P500 companies are lower by a collective 13%…

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    … Credit Suisse’s equity strategist Jonathan Golub decided to drill down some more, and as he writes in a Tuesday morning note, looking at the ever wider disconnect between fundamentals and returns, he “found this month’s return decomposition particularly useful.”

    As Golub explains, the analysis breaks down performance into its key components (revenues, margins, multiples, buybacks) for the S&P 500, Russell 1000 Value and Growth, and Russell 2000. It also contains lists of those stocks that have had the largest positive and negative impact on each benchmark. And as the strategist further notes, in a time when momentum is all that matters as fundamentals are now irrelevant, he receives “more special requests on this work than anything else we publish.”

    So without further ado, here is the Credit Suisse Return Decomposition Summary:

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Total Returns

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    S&P 500 Return Decomposition – YTD

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    S&P 500 Return Decomposition – YoY

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Russell 1000 Value Return Decomposition – YTD

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Russell 1000 Value Return Decomposition – YoY

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Russell 1000 Growth Return Decomposition – YTD

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Russell 1000 Growth Return Decomposition – YoY

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Russell 2000 Return Decomposition – YTD

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Russell 2000 Return Decomposition – YoY

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>


    Tyler Durden

    Tue, 05/05/2020 – 22:04

  • "Bracing For The Worst Crash Of Their Careers": A Quarter Of All Outstanding CMBS Debt Is On Verge Of Default
    “Bracing For The Worst Crash Of Their Careers”: A Quarter Of All Outstanding CMBS Debt Is On Verge Of Default

    Last week we reported that according to the latest TREPP remittance data compiled by Morgan Stanley, a record 66 CMBS loans totaling $1.0bn became newly delinquent in April, which was the greatest month-over-month change on record. In total, 324 loans with a total balance of $4.8bn are currently delinquent, which is also an all time high.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    What was more troubling than the plain vanilla surge in delinquencies, is the coming deluge of defaults. Recall that a CMBS loan becomes delinquent after it misses two consecutive payments. Loans that have missed just one month of interest are classified as “late but within grace period” or “late beyond grace period”. It is this measure that spiked a record 600bp MoM to ~8.5%.

    Yet it now appears that this data was not only somewhat stale but also dramatically underestimated the full severity of the commercial real state catastrophe over the last weeks of April, because according to Fitch data, borrowers with mortgages representing almost $150 billion in CMBS, accounting for 26% of the outstanding debt, have asked about suspending payments in recent weeks – an unprecedented surge in requests for payment relief on CMBS, and an early sign of the severity of the pandemic-induced real estate crisis. Putting this number in context, after the last financial crisis, delinquencies and foreclosures on the debt peaked at 9% in July 2011. So here we are, barely a month into the corona crisis, and the number is already three times greater!

    While not all of the borrowers who have requested forbearance will be delinquent or enter foreclosure, Fitch estimates that the $584 billion industry could near the 2011 peak as soon as the third quarter of this year.

    With a deluge of default on deck, the special servicers who handle vulnerable CMBS loans, are bracing for what Bloomberg called  “the worst crash of their careers”, by which of course it meant best, because the more the default, the greater the payday for the special servicers. They’re staffing up following years of downsizing to handle a wave of defaults, modification requests and other workouts, including potential foreclosures.

    “Everything is happening at once,” said James Shevlin, president of CWCapital, a unit of private equity firm Fortress Investment Group and one of the largest special servicers. “It’s kind of exciting times. I mean, this is what you live for.”

    AS discussed last week, unlike the last financial crisis which was ignited by a surge in residential foreclosures as the housing market was one giant bubble, now commercial real estate is getting hit not because of outsized valuation but because of collapsing cash flows with the economic shutdown shuttering stores and putting travel on ice.

    Making matters worse is that unlike residential real estate, there’s no bailout relief plan for commercial real estate, and while bankers usually have leeway to negotiate payment plans on commercial property, options for borrowers and lenders are limited for CMBS and foreclosure is usually a quick end to any delinquency or default.

    Meanwhile, as we reported last week, the debt transferred to special servicers from master servicers, mostly banks that handle payment collections, is already swelling. Unpaid principal in workouts jumped to $22 billion in April, up 56% from a month earlier, according to the data firm Trepp.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Similar to the mob, special servicers make money by collecting outstanding debt and charging fees based on the unpaid principal on the loans they manage. Most are units of larger finance companies. Midland Financial, named as special servicer on approximately $200 billion of CMBS debt, is a unit of PNC. Rialto Capital, owned by private equity firm Stone Point Capital, was a named special servicer on about $100 billion of CMBS loans. LNR Partners, which finished 2019 with the largest active special-servicer portfolio, is owned by Starwood Property Trust, a real estate firm founded by Barry Sternlicht.

    Quoted by Bloomberg, Sternlicht said during a conference call on Monday that special servicers don’t “get paid a ton money” for granting forbearance.

    “Where the servicer begins to make a lot of money is when the loans default,” he said. “They have to work them out and they ultimately have to resolve the loan and sell it or take back the asset.”

    In other words, special servicers are about to make a killing.

    And again, just like the mob which thrives in times when other sources of funding are scarce, special servicers often play hardball, demanding personal guarantees, coverage of legal costs and complete repayment of deferred installments, according to Ann Hambly, chief executive officer of 1st Service Solutions, which works for about 250 borrowers who’ve sought debt relief in the current crisis.

    “They’re at the mercy of this handful of special servicers that are run by hedge funds and, arguably, have an ulterior motive,” said Hambly, who started working for loan servicers in 1985 before switching sides to represent borrowers.

    On the other hand, perhaps comparisons to the mafia are a bit exaggerated: fears about self-dealing are overblown according to Fitch’s Adam Fox, whose research after the 2008 crisis concluded most special servicers abide by their obligations to protect the interests of bondholders: “There were some concerns that servicers were pillaging the trust and picking up assets on the cheap,” he said. “We just didn’t find it.”

    Maybe Fitch just didn’t look hard enough. After all, it wouldn’t be the first time that a rating agency has missed something rather big starting it right in the face.

    Mob or not, it’s time for special servicers to party because after nearly a decade of downsizing where anyone could obtain or refi a loan on even cheaper terms, it’s jackpot time. Also unlike the last crisis, this time the spoils will be shared by far fewer: the seven largest firms employed 385 people at the end of 2019, less than half their headcount at the peak of the last crisis.

    The good news is that once a debt collected, always a debt collected, and Miami-based LNR, where headcount ended last year down 40% from its 2013 level, is calling back veterans from other duties at Starwood and looking at resumes. CWCapital, which reduced staff by almost 75% from its 2011 peak, is drafting Fortress workers from other duties and recruiting new talent, while relying on technology upgrades to help manage the incoming wave more efficiently.

    “It’s going to be a very different crisis,” said Shevlin, who has been in the industry for more than 20 years. And while commercial real estate borrowers are bracing for the “worst crash of their careers”, the special servicers – and other debt collectors – are about to enjoy the biggest bonanza they have ever seen.


    Tyler Durden

    Tue, 05/05/2020 – 21:45

  • 80% Of Employees At Bank Of Montreal May Shift To Hybrid Telecommuting Post-Pandemic
    80% Of Employees At Bank Of Montreal May Shift To Hybrid Telecommuting Post-Pandemic

    Up to 80% of employees at the Bank of Montreal, or about 36,000 of its staff, may shift to flexible arrangements once the COVID-19 pandemic subsides which would blend working from home with time in the office, according to Bloomberg.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    The Toronto-based bank has conducted a broad revamp of its workplace policies in light of the outbreak, according to chief HR office Mona Malone, who says that the lender expects between 30% and 80% of employees to continue to work from home at least some of the time.

    We’ve been able to maintain continuity of banking services with far more people working outside the office than we ever thought possible,” Malone said in a Monday interview. “We thought it was critical that we were in the office to make something happen, and what we’ve proven through this is that’s actually not the case.”

    According to CEO Darryl White, a “2.0 version” of the workplace may include blended home-office schedules amid a global restructuring of how offices and routines. Malone, meanwhile, says that employees at Canadian and US branches have “by and large” been going into the office during the crisis, along with a “small amount” of IT and operations employees. 95% of those in office towers have been telecommuting.

    It’s a blended approach of thinking about productivity and flexibility and for us not a return to the way it used to be,” said Malone who said the post-pandemic plan calls for more workers at home, and “a ton” of employees with hybrid schedules.

    “It’s about an evolution in the way that we work,” she added.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    The COVID-19 pandemic has resulted in drastic changes at Canada’s fourth-largest bank – which shifted half of its Canadian call-center agents and 80% of US agents to home offices.

    According to Malone, “That’s not a temporary thing.”

    “We don’t have to think about contact centers as just these geographical hubs, and we can use this remote way of working,” she said, noting that the ‘new normal’ keeps employees safe – as opposed to crowding workers into offices after taking mass transit and elevators to get there.

    “It allows us to look for new talent in locations where maybe we haven’t before, and tap into talent pools across the country,” Malone added.


    Tyler Durden

    Tue, 05/05/2020 – 21:25

  • YouTube's Chief Product Officer Insults His Own Users As Basement-Dwelling Idiots
    YouTube’s Chief Product Officer Insults His Own Users As Basement-Dwelling Idiots

    Authored by Paul Joseph Watson via Summit News,

    YouTube’s Chief Product Officer has insulted his own users as basement-dwellers who deserve to be relegated by the algorithm in favor of “authoritative” mainstream sources.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Neil Mohan made the remarks during an interview with Protocol’s editor at large David Pierce after he was asked if YouTube had to switch its approach to moderating content given the ever changing advice of health authorities in relation to the coronavirus.

    Mohan said that this was the reason YouTube was “raising up authoritative voices,” which is a euphemism for suppressing voices that aren’t part of the mainstream media, despite the fact that the public’s trust in the media during the coronavirus pandemic has plummeted even further.

    He then went on to insult his own user base as basement-dwelling idiots.

    “As opposed to, you know, it’s somebody espousing their opinions about a mask, you know, in their basement,” said Mohan.

    “This is coming from an authoritative channel, a news source, a medical professional, and if that’s the case, we think there’s going to be some context that’s provided around the question of masks. And even if that guidance changes, it will be reflected in sort of how an authoritative voice or channel talks about it.”

    Mohan then made it clear how non-mainstream channels are algorithmically shadow banned by “removing or reducing views of the videos where that same level of authority hasn’t been established.”

    Of course, the only reason why so-called “authoritative” sources are now doing so well on YouTube is because the company rigged its own algorithm to heavily favor them while dumping the very people who helped build YouTube on the trash heap.

    Last month, YouTube CEO Susan Wojcicki recently said that information which challenged the World Health Organization would be removed, despite the fact that the WHO was directly complicit in helping China cover-up the severity of coronavirus in its early stages and despite the fact the organization gave harmful advice in ordering countries not to close their borders early on.

    “Mohan’s comments exemplify how the changes YouTube has made in relation to the coronavirus and news coverage have made it almost impossible for independent creators to cover current events, even when the mainstream media outlets that are being raised up have a track record of getting it wrong,” writes Tom Parker.

    *  *  *

    My voice is being silenced by free speech-hating Silicon Valley behemoths who want me disappeared forever. It is CRUCIAL that you support me. Please sign up for the free newsletter here. Donate to me on SubscribeStar here. Support my sponsor – Turbo Force – a supercharged boost of clean energy without the comedown.


    Tyler Durden

    Tue, 05/05/2020 – 21:05

  • Most Americans Have Serious Doubts About The Official COVID Death Count: Axios-Ipsos Poll
    Most Americans Have Serious Doubts About The Official COVID Death Count: Axios-Ipsos Poll

    Since the start of state-wide lockdowns after the coronavirus pandemic hit the United States, poll after poll has demonstrated that Americans remain by and large deeply distrustful of both politicians and mainstream media reporting on the virus.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Getty Images

    And naturally, given the extent of unemployment, economic devastation across various industries, and also simply the radical change in the way people conduct their daily lives, Americans are right to question whether lockdown and social distancing protocols have gone ‘too far’. 

    This all hinged on the following question from the start: is the virus as dangerous and deadly as alarming early health reports indicated? A number of studies from the heart of the scientific establishment suggest that no, it’s not as deadly as most believed early on, but still may be more pervasive across society in terms of asymptomatic carriers. 

    And yet current deaths from the disease could still be significantly higher than what’s being reported, given a general shortage testing which has been reported by hospitals, clinics, and even institutions of vast means like the US military. As of Tuesday COVID-19 deaths in the United States are nearing 70,000.

    From the start, health officials have warned there’s a likelihood of under-reporting of deaths, given that many have died of complications that sprung from the disease. In these cases deaths would then be listed as complications other than COVID-19, unless an autopsy were performed. 

    A new Axios-Ipsos poll reflects the growing anxiety among the public of uncounted COVID-19 deaths.

    44% of those polled believe people dying from the disease in the US is actually higher than has been officially reported.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Via Axios

    Below are the poll results, released Tuesday, in summary break down:

    • Only 24 percent of Republicans say the number of coronavirus deaths are more than what has been reported. 36% say it is about the same, while 40% say it is less.
    • 63% of Democrats believe the number of deaths is more. 29% say it is about the same, compared to just 7% who say it is less.
    • 45% of independents say it is more, compared to 31% who say it is about the same. 24% say it is less.
    • 26% say they visited friends or relatives in the last week – up from 19% in a mid-April poll.
    • 47% say they’ve canceled summer plans, such as camp or vacation rentals.
    • 63% say they’re concerned that the next month could bring food shortages.
    • 58% say they are concerned that schools are not going to reopen in the fall.

    And yet, even if more Americans believe death numbers could be higher than what’s officially reported, they are still ready and willing to take increased steps to return to normal life and daily routines.

    As Axios observes: “At the same time, there’s some softening around how much risk Americans are attaching to various activities and how much risk they’re willing to take.”


    Tyler Durden

    Tue, 05/05/2020 – 20:45

  • "Just Like There Were No WMDs, There's No 'Virus Of Mass Destruction'…"
    “Just Like There Were No WMDs, There’s No ‘Virus Of Mass Destruction’…”

    Authored (satirically) by C.J.Hopkins via ConsentFactory.,org,

    There comes a point in the introduction of every new official narrative when people no longer remember how it started. Or, rather, they remember how it started, but not the propaganda that started it. Or, rather, they remember all that (or are able to, if you press them on it), but it doesn’t make any difference anymore, because the official narrative has supplanted reality.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    You’ll remember this point from the War on Terror, and specifically the occupation of Iraq. By the latter half of 2004, most Westerners had completely forgotten the propaganda that launched the invasion, and thus regarded the Iraqi resistance as “terrorists,” despite the fact that the United States had invaded and was occupying their country for no legitimate reason whatsoever. By that time, it was abundantly clear that there were no “weapons of mass destruction,” and that the U.S.A. had invaded a nation that had not attacked it, and posed no threat to it, and so was perpetrating a textbook war of aggression.

    These facts did not matter, not in the slightest. By that time, Westerners were totally immersed in the official War on Terror narrative, which had superseded objective reality. Herd mentality had taken over. It’s difficult to describe how this works; it’s a state of functional dissociation. It wasn’t that people didn’t know the facts, or that they didn’t understand the facts. They knew the Iraqis weren’t “terrorists.” At the same time, they knew they were definitely “terrorists,” despite the fact that they knew that they weren’t. They knew there were no WMDs, that there had never been any WMDs, and still they were certain there were WMDs, which would be found, although they clearly did not exist.

    The same thing happened in Nazi Germany. The majority of the German people were never fanatical anti-Semites like the hardcore N.S.D.A.P. members. If they had been, there would have been no need for Goebbels and his monstrous propaganda machine. No, the Germans during the Nazi period, like the Americans during the War on Terror, knew that their victims posed no threat to them, and at the same time they believed exactly the opposite, and thus did not protest as their neighbors were hauled out of their homes and sent off to death camps, camps which, in their dissociative state, simultaneously did and did not exist.

    What I’m describing probably sounds like psychosis, but, technically speaking, it isn’t … not quite. It is not an absolute break from reality. People functioning in this state know that what they believe is not real. Nonetheless, they are forced to believe it (and do, actually, literally, believe it, as impossible as I know that sounds), because the consequences of not believing it are even more frightening than the cognitive dissonance of believing a narrative they know is a fiction. Disbelieving the official narrative means excommunication from “normality,” the loss of friends, income, status, and in many cases far worse punishments.

    Herd animals, in a state of panic, instinctively run towards the center of the herd. Separation from the herd makes them easy prey for pursuing predators. It is the same primal instinct operating here.

    It is the goal of every official narrative to generate this type of herd mentality, not in order to deceive or dupe the public, but, rather, to confuse and terrorize them to the point where they revert to their primal instincts, and are being driven purely by existential fear, and facts and truth no longer matter. Once an official narrative reaches this point, it is unassailable by facts and reason. It no longer needs facts to justify it. It justifies itself with its own existence. Reason cannot penetrate it. Arguing with its adherents is pointless. They know it is irrational. They simply do not care.

    We are reaching this point with the coronavirus narrative. It is possible that we have already reached it. Despite the fact that what we are dealing with is a virus that, yes, is clearly deadly to the old and those with medical conditions, but that is just as clearly not a deadly threat to the majority of the human species, people are cowering inside their homes as if the Zombie Apocalpyse had finally begun. Many appear to believe that this virus is some sort of Alien-Terrorist Death Flu (or weaponized Virus of Mass Destruction) that will kill you the second you breathe it in.

    This is not surprising at all, because, according to the official narrative, its destructive powers are nearly unlimited. Not only will it obliterate your lungs, and liquidate all your other major organs, and kill you with blood clots, and intestinal damage, now it causes “sudden strokes in young adults,” and possibly spontaneous prostate cancer, and God knows what other medical horrors!

    According to all the “scientists” and “medical experts” (i.e., those that conform to the official narrative, not all the other scientists and medical experts), it is unlike any other virus that has ever existed in the history of viruses.

    It certainly doesn’t follow the typical pattern of spreading extensively for a limited period, and then rapidly dying down on its own, regardless of what measures are taken to thwart it, as this Israeli study would seem to indicate.

    Also, “we have no immunity against it,” which is why we all have to remain “locked down” like unruly inmates in a penitentiary until a vaccine can be concocted and forced onto every living person on earth.

    Apparently, this mandatory wonder vaccine will magically render us immune to this virus against which we have no immunity (and are totally unable to develop immunity), which immunity will be certified on our mandatory “immunity papers,” which we will need to travel, get a job, send our kids to school, and, you know, to show the police when they stop us on the street because we look like maybe we might be “infected.”

    Germany (where I live) is way out in front of this. According to the Süddeutsche Zeitung, the federal government plans to introduce a coronavirus “immunity card” as part of its “Infection Protection Law,” which will grant the authorities the power to round up anyone “suspected to be contagious” and force them into … uh … “quarantine,” and “forbid them from entering certain public places.” The Malaysian authorities have dispensed with such niceties, and are arresting migrant workers and refugees in so-called “Covid-19 red zones” and marching them off to God knows where.

    Oh, yeah, and I almost forgot … the germ and chemical warfare researchers at DARPA (i.e., the U.S. military’s Defense Advanced Research Projects Agency) have developed some new type of fancy blood test that will identify “asymptomatic carriers” (i.e., people who display no symptoms whatsoever).

    So that will probably come in handy … especially if the “white supremacists,” “Red-Brown extremists,” and “conspiracy theorists” keep protesting the lockdown with their wives and kids!

    And these are just the latest additions to a list of rather dystopian examples of the “brave new normal” official narrative that GloboCap is rolling out, right before our very eyes (which the OffGuardian editors have streamlined here and here, and which continues on Twitter). It’s all right there in black and white. They aren’t hiding the totalitarianism … they don’t have to. Because people are begging for it. They are demanding to be “locked down” inside their homes, forced to wear masks, and stand two meters apart, for reasons that most of them no longer remember.

    Plastic barriers are going up everywhere. Arrows on the floor show you which way to walk. Boxes show you where to stand. Paranoid Blockwarts are putting up signs threatening anyone not wearing a mask. Hysterical little fascist creeps are reporting their neighbors to the police for letting their children play with other children. Millions of people are voluntarily downloading “contact tracing applications” so that governments and global corporations can monitor their every movement. In Spain, they bleached an entire beach, killing everything, down to the insects, in order to protect the public from “infection.” The Internet has become an Orwellian chorus of shrieking, sanctimonious voices bullying everyone into conformity with charts, graphs, and desperate guilt-trips, few of which have much connection to reality.

    Corporations and governments are censoring dissent. We’re approaching a level of manufactured mass hysteria and herd mentality that not even Goebbels could have imagined.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Meanwhile, they’re striking the mostly empty “field hospitals,” and the theatrical “hospital ship” is now gone, and despite their attempts to inflate the Covid-19 death count as much as humanly possible, the projected hundreds of millions of deaths have not materialized (not even close), and Sweden is fine, as is most of humanity, and … just like there were no WMDs, there is no Virus of Mass Destruction.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    What there is, is a new official narrative, the brave new, paranoid, pathologized “normal.” Like the War on Terror, it’s a global narrative. A global, post-ideological narrative. It’s just getting started, so it isn’t yet clear how totalitarian this show will get, but, given the nature of the pilot episode, I am kind of dreading the rest of the series.

    *  *  *

    C. J. Hopkins is an award-winning American playwright, novelist and political satirist based in Berlin. His plays are published by Bloomsbury Publishing and Broadway Play Publishing, Inc. His dystopian novel, Zone 23, is published by Snoggsworthy, Swaine & Cormorant. Volume I of his Consent Factory Essays is published by Consent Factory Publishing, a wholly-owned subsidiary of Amalgamated Content, Inc. He can be reached at cjhopkins.com or consentfactory.org.


    Tyler Durden

    Tue, 05/05/2020 – 20:25

  • Sam Zell: Fallout From Coronavirus Will Be "Worse Than The Great Depression"
    Sam Zell: Fallout From Coronavirus Will Be “Worse Than The Great Depression”

    Billionaire real-estate investor Sam Zell just became the latest bold-faced name to suggest that maybe – just maybe – the “V-shaped” rebound that investors seem to be anticipating probably isn’t going to pass.

    Instead, the real-estate investing legend, who earned his nickname “the Grave Dancer” buying up distressed properties in the 1970s, said he believes the economy has been deeply scarred by this experience, and is in far worse shape than it appears. Instead of a lazy summer boat ride, the US is in for a grueling slog back to growth.

    While Zell doesn’t enjoy the same level of name recognition as Warren Buffett, the ‘Oracle of Omaha’ who dumped his airline stocks and declared he was ‘sitting this one out’ for the good of Berkshire’s investors, his opinion still carries a lot of weight.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    To be sure, Zell has almost certainly suffered some pretty serious blowback from the pandemic-induced market crash. Late last year, as the virus was first emerging in Wuhan, Zell was telling everybody who would listen about the untapped value in the distressed energy space (one of a handful of distressed bets that didn’t go his way). So he has a reason to be pessimistic.

    But without exaggeration, Zell proclaimed that the impact on the impact on the economy from the coronavirus will be worse than the Great Depression 80 years ago, complete with long-lasting changes in human behavior that imperil many business models.

    “Too many people are anticipating a kind of V-like recovery,” Zell said in an interview with Bloomberg Television. “We’re all going to be permanently scarred by having lived through this.”

    And just as the Depression left a generation that seemingly couldn’t shake the experience, leading to a lifetime of thrift and risk aversion, Zell believes this “extraordinary shock” will also be hard to forget. The full scope of the economic damage won’t truly be visible until the economy reopens, and consumers realize that many retailers won’t be coming back. He also said he expects many hotels around the world won’t be capable of reopening.

    “Just like we won’t see a lot of retailers reopen,” he said, “I think we’ll see a lot of hotels that basically can’t reopen.”

    This might be Zell talking his book here, he doesn’t believe that the virus will the be a death knell or big cities like New York, nor that warehouses are the smartest bet in commercial real-estate right now. But for now, at least, Zell says he’ll be waiting on the sidelines watching other buyers and sellers perform the difficult work of post-dislocation price discovery.

    For now, Zell believes the commercial real-estate market will likely be quiet as the market takes a beat to adjust.

    “Those sellers that wanted to sell still remember the prices that were available seven or eight weeks ago. The buyers are looking at a very different world and expecting to see significant discounts,” he said. “When you’ve got that big a spread, nothing happens.”

    With so much corporate debt, Zell said that a wave of bankruptcies – like the wave already forming in the retail space – is badly needed to clear the decks.

    “Bankruptcies are what you need to clear markets and what you need to end recessions and dips,” Zell said. “The fact that there’s a lot more distressed players today will help clear the market, but it also means that there aren’t anywhere near as many opportunities as there were in the past.”

    Watch the interview below:


    Tyler Durden

    Tue, 05/05/2020 – 20:05

  • Illinois' True Retirement Costs Surge Near 60% Of The Budget
    Illinois’ True Retirement Costs Surge Near 60% Of The Budget

    Authored by Mike Shedlock via MishTlak,

    JPMorgan’s latest pension graphic captures so much of what’s wrong with Illinois’ collapsing finances

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Illinois was in an actuarial mess long ago. Covid-19 makes it harder to ignore says Wirepoints.

    The chart by Michael Cembalest shows Illinois was paying about 25% of its budget for pension costs. 

    Before Covid-19, Illinois should have been paying over 50% to be sound on an actuarial basis. Now, the true costs are 58% of the budget.

    Illinois has the worst funded pension plans in the nation. That was true before Covid-19 as well. 

    New Jersey, Hawaii, Connecticut, and Kentucky are next in line. But no other state comes close to having that much of their budgets swallowed by retirement costs.

    McConnell Says Let the States Go Bankrupt 

    In a Hugh Hewitt interview last month, Senate Majority leader Mitch McConnell Pushes Bankruptcy.

    HH: I think people do not understand how badly mismanaged some states have been, and their unfunded liabilities. And if they were in the private sector, they would have to reorganize under the bankruptcy code. But there is no bankruptcy code chapter. Do you think that we need to invent one for states so that they can discharge some of these liabilities that were put in place by previous governors like, I mean, Jerry Brown ran a giveaway program for public employee unions that was just astonishing, and as did Gray Davis, as did, you know, a lot of Democratic governors, Illinois is probably the worst, and Connecticut. 

    MM: Yeah, I would certainly be in favor of allowing states to use the bankruptcy route. It saves some cities. And there’s no good reason for it not to be available. My guess is their first choice would be for the federal government to borrow money from future generations to send it down to them now so they don’t have to do that. That’s not something I’m going to be in favor of.

    Unfortunate State of Bankruptcy Code

    Unfortunately, states do not have the ability to declare bankruptcy under current law. 

    Cities and municipalities do have the right, but only if the states allow it. 

    According to Pew, Only 12 states authorize cities to file  without conditions, and another 12 permit filing with certain stipulations.

    “For 50 years, Detroit’s economy,  its physical infrastructure, and its social structure had been on a steady decline. And the political system did nothing whatsoever about it,” says Richard Ravitch, former lieutenant governor of New York, who helped New  York City avoid bankruptcy in 1975 and has been advising Detroit officials.

    By the time the state got involved in 2011, it was too late. The police chief described the situation as not only a  financial crisis but also a “service delivery insolvency,” characterized by high crime rates, broken streetlights, thousands of abandoned and blighted structures and lots, and closed parks, among other problems.

    Illinois Cities in Same Situation as Detroit (by Population Rank)

    • Rockford (4)

    • Peoria (7)

    • Danville (61)

    • East St. Louis (81)

    • Kankakee (86)

    • Melrose Park (89)

    • Harvey (96)

    • Blue Island (109)

    • Evergreen Park (124)

    • Cairo (461)

    All of those are dead or dying cities. All but Rockford and Peoria turn up in a Wirepoints report on Troubled Pension Plans.

    Illinois Insolvent Pension Plans

    In What’s Next for Illinois, Wirepoints mentions Rockford, Harvey, Palos Heights, East St. Louis, Peoria, Danville and dozens of other cities (see graph below)

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Rockford’s is the fourth largest city in Illinois with a population of 147,881, nudged out of third place by Joliet with 147,957.

    Illinois is Insolvent: State Requests a Pension Bailout From Congress

    On April 17, I commented Illinois is Insolvent: State Requests a Pension Bailout From Congress

    No Bailout

    Illinois does not deserve a bailout. Its pension woes are of it own making and have nothing to do with the coronavirus.

    Three National Priorities

    1. Bankruptcy legislation that allows municipalities to file when they want to, not when dictators like Illinois’ House Speaker Mike Madigan allow them.

    2. National right-to-work legislation that supersedes state legislation.

    3. Scrap Davis-Bacon and all prevailing wage laws

    Explaining Dysfunctional Illinois in One Word, One Idea, One Person

    I mentioned those priorities on Jan 9, 2017 , in Explaining Dysfunctional Illinois in One Word, One Idea, One Person

     McConnell is correct, at least as pertains to municipalities: “There’s no good reason for it [municipal bankruptcy] not to be available,” said McConnell.

    There is a Reason, But Not a Good One 

    Republicans could easily have passed all three of those priorities when they held both houses of Congress. 

    But they didn’t. 

    What are McConnell’s and Trump’s excuses for that?


    Tyler Durden

    Tue, 05/05/2020 – 19:45

Digest powered by RSS Digest

Today’s News 5th May 2020

  • Mayor Of Nice Demands "Health Passports" To Enter/Leave France
    Mayor Of Nice Demands “Health Passports” To Enter/Leave France

    The Food and Drug Administration (FDA) has cleared a new antibody test from diagnostics giant Roche Holding AG on Sunday, who is expected to flood the Western world with more than 100 million tests by the end of 2020, will determine if individuals have already been exposed to COVID-19 and presumably have immunity from it.

    What the antibody test is, is a precursor to “immunity cards” or, as some call it “health passports.” Already, even before the tests are rolled out, some countries have suggested that health passports could be next. France is the latest country to call for new travel rules during the pandemic that would firmly restrict movement in the country, reported RT News.

    The Mayor of Nice urged French Prime Minister Edouard Philippe last week to introduce new travel controls by using health passports in regions of France that border other countries. 

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Christian Estrosi, the mayor of Nice, posted a letter on Facebook one day after Philippe unveiled plans to ease stay-at-home restrictions for the country that would start in May, these rules could limit a person’s travel distance to 62 miles from their home. 

    Philippe said people need to adjust to a post-corona world where they must “learn to live with the virus” as restrictions are lifted. 

    Estrosi said the new passport would show the bearer tested negative for COVID-19 in the past 48-hours before travel. The proposal comes as severe lockdowns introduced on March 17 are being relaxed. He said health passports are likely the only method in fully relaxing lockdown measures. 

    France is not the only country that has spoken about introducing health passports. Other countries in Europe, such as Italy, Greece, Germany, and the UK, have also talked about the new travel rules. Even in the US, Bill Gates has pushed for immunity passports and the erection of the surveillance state to combat the virus. 

    Last month, we noted with the global economy in freefall as global cases surged to new highs, the suggestion by Western government officials to open crashed economies was through immunity passports. 

    We have raised several questions with immunity passports: First, nobody knows how long immunity lasts, and second, antibody tests are not ‘sufficiently accurate’. And a third issue we brought attention to are concerns over the social implications of immunity passports.

    The proposal of immunity passports across the Western world is a sign that governments will seize greater control over people’s lives. And just what happens when someone is not considered immune? The government denies them a passport? Which means they would be out of work and can’t travel. But, oh yes, that’s why universal basic income will become a more concrete thing.


    Tyler Durden

    Tue, 05/05/2020 – 02:45

  • Lockdown Stockholm Syndrome
    Lockdown Stockholm Syndrome

    Authored by Rob Slane via TheBlogMire.com,

    Stockholm Syndrome:

    A condition in which hostages develop a psychological alliance with their captors during captivity.

    Lockdown Stockholm Syndrome:

    A psychological state of mind that causes its sufferers to come to love seeing their economies and liberties being destroyed, whilst simultaneously being incapable of accepting that Sweden kept its society going without resorting to such measures.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    I continue to be baffled by those who cannot bring themselves to admit that Sweden has carried out a relatively sensible policy on Covid-19, whilst the response of so many other countries has been authoritarian and frankly unhinged. The idea of quarantining millions of perfectly healthy people and stopping them from doing normal, healthy things is something that has apparently never occurred to any national leaders in the past, or at least if it did, they presumably never enacted it for fear of revolt.

    No such fear today. It is simply staggering to see how so many people have not only come to accept the inevitable destruction of the economy and curtailment of civil liberties as a price worth paying to deal with an illness which is killing numbers on roughly the same levels as a bad flu season, but have actually become cheerleaders for the giant social experiment being done to them. It reminds me of the chilling and dispiriting line at the end of 1984: “He loved Big Brother.” Today, for reasons that are not at all clear to me, many appear to “Love Lockdown” — that is, they appear to be absolutely fine with having their liberties taken away from them; absolutely fine with having the right to do lawful work taken from them; and absolutely fine with having the right to do normal, healthy things taken away from them. If anyone has an explanation, do be sure to let me know.

    But it gets worse. Not only do they seem to be perfectly willing to go along with these things, but they are appear to be utterly oblivious and even apathetic to the economic train wreck headed their way because of the policy they support. Why? What will shake them out of that apathy and complacency? Will it be when they hear about the Great Depression-era unemployment levels coming on us? No! Even that doesn’t do it. The chart below is one of the most genuinely frightening I’ve ever seen, showing as it does US unemployment rising by over 30,000,000 in just seven weeks to levels not seen since the 1930s. And yet when I show it, many just airily dismiss it with a shrug of the shoulders as if it’s irrelevant. Perhaps it will only be if they lose their own jobs and can’t pay the rent or can’t get stuff in the shops like they used to that it’ll hit home! Who knows?

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    If you try to show such people that it didn’t have to be this way, comparing the UK with Sweden, or Sweden with other countries, or Sweden with what the Imperial College model might have predicted, they either dismiss it, or get angry, or ignore it. It’s a thought they don’t want to entertain, presumably because they have thoroughly convinced themselves that “lockdown” is the only policy that can possibly work, and any data that shows that this is not the case must either be wrong or ignored (for those who want to see a real expert thoroughly debunk the idea that lockdown was or is necessary, I recommend this interview with Professor Knut Wittkowski).

    Despite studying the data for a number of weeks, I have yet to find any discernible evidence that the Swedish policy has hurt that country in anything like the way the doom-mongers predicted. Just as importantly, I have been unable to find any discernible evidence that destroying your economy and wrecking civil liberties — which is what the policy of “lockdown” is — was necessary.

    For instance, the chart below shows two countries with a very different policy — Sweden and the UK — by daily deaths per million population (note, the UK figures are somewhat skewed on 29th April, as the Government decided to count deaths in care homes on that day ((extraordinary that these were missed off before)). What is actually clear is that Sweden has in fact fared better than the UK, with total recorded deaths at 256.6 per million, compared to 419.1 per million for the UK, as at 3rd May:

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Or we could look at weekly recorded deaths for 13 European countries, plus the US. Interestingly, in all cases (except the UK because of that care home spike on 29th April), the numbers of deaths are now clearly falling and — it would seem — beginning to peter out — including Sweden:

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Or here’s a cumulative way of looking at the same data:

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    What I have noticed, however, is the more Sweden’s figures have failed to shoot up into the stratosphere, the more some people have ground their teeth, digging in and claiming that because Sweden’s death numbers are worse than Denmark’s, Finland’s and Norway’s, this somehow proves the point that they messed up big time. Does it? Here’s another way of looking at it.

    As of today, the country has seen just short of 2,700 deaths. This is:

    • Approximately 265.62 deaths per million population

    • Approximately 0.0265% of their entire population.

    This is not even close to what the doom-mongers were predicting. My own very conservative estimate of what Imperial College’s model might have predicted for them, under the measures they have taken, came out at approximately 32,500 deaths (approximately 3,250 deaths per million). However, a study carried out by Sweden’s Uppsala University in April applied the Imperial College model to Sweden and came out with far bigger numbers than my conservative estimate. According to their projections, if Sweden continued its current response:

    • It would pass 40,000 deaths shortly after 1st May

    • This would continue to rise to almost 100,000 deaths by June.

    But let me again remind you: so far, Sweden has had just under 2,700 deaths, and we’ve now passed 1st May. That’s many orders of magnitude below what the Imperial College model would have predicted for it.

    I think we can safely say (if we didn’t know it already) that the Imperial College model overestimated deaths from Covid-19 by a huge margin. Bit like their estimates for Mad Cow Disease. And Swine Flu. And H5N1 Bird Flu. In fact, perhaps the question we should ask is if anyone knows of an instance when Neil Ferguson’s team have got their predictions right — or at least within say a few tens of thousands at least?

    And yet here’s the thing: not only is the UK Government’s draconian policy based on these faulty predictions, but many have taken to these draconian measures based on faulty so-called science like ducks to water. I find it extraordinary. I’d love to know why. Any one?


    Tyler Durden

    Tue, 05/05/2020 – 02:00

  • The Dubious COVID Models, The Tests, & Now, The Consequences
    The Dubious COVID Models, The Tests, & Now, The Consequences

    Authored by William Engdahl via GlobalResearch.ca,

    Since late in January the world has undergone staggering changes which in many cases may be irreparable. We have given decisions over every aspect of our lives to the judgment of tests and to the projections of computer models for the coronavirus first claimed to have erupted in Wuhan China, now dubbed SARS-CoV-2. With astonishing lack of transparency or checking, one government after the other has imposed China-model lockdowns on their entire populations. It begins to look as if we are being led like sheep to slaughter for corrupted science.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    The Dubious COVID Models

    Two major models are being used in the West since the alleged spread of coronavirus to Europe and USA to “predict” and respond to the spread of COVID-19 illness. One was developed at Imperial College of London. The second was developed, with emphasis on USA effects, by the University of Washington’s Institute for Health Metrics and Evaluation (IHME) in Seattle, near the home of Microsoft founder Bill Gates. What few know is that both groups owe their existence to generous funding by a tax exempt foundation that stands to make literally billions on purported vaccines and other drugs to treat coronavirus—The Bill and Melinda Gates Foundation.

    In early March, Prof. Neil Ferguson, head of the MRC Centre for Global Infectious Disease Analysis at Imperial College London issued a widely-discussed model that forecast possible COVID-19 deaths in the UK as high as 500,000. Ferguson works closely with the WHO. That report was held responsible for a dramatic u-turn by the UK government from a traditional public health policy of isolating at risk patients while allowing society and the economy to function normally. Days after the UK went on lockdown, Ferguson’s institute sheepishly revised downwards his death estimates, several times and dramatically. His dire warnings have not come to pass and the UK economy, like most others around the world, has gone into deep crisis based on inflated estimates.

    Ferguson and his Imperial College modelers have a notorious track record for predicting dire consequences of diseases. In 2002 Ferguson predicted that up to 50,000 people in UK would die from variant Creutzfeldt-Jakob disease, “mad cow disease”, possibly to 150,000 if the epidemic expanded to include sheep. A total of 178 people were officially registered dead from vCJD. In 2005, Ferguson claimed that up to 200 million (!) people worldwide would be killed by bird-flu or H5N1. By early 2006, the WHO had only linked 78 deaths to the virus. Then in 2009 Ferguson’s group at Imperial College advised the government that swine flu or H1N1 would probably kill 65,000 people in the UK. In the end, swine flu claimed the lives of 457 people. Ferguson and his Imperial College group have a notoriously bad track record for predicting disease consequences.

    Yet the same Ferguson group at Imperial College, with WHO endorsement, was behind the panic numbers that triggered a UK government lockdown. Ferguson was also the source of the wild “prediction” that 2.2 million Americans would likely die if immediate lockdown of the US economy did not occur. Based on the Ferguson model, Dr Anthony Fauci of NIAID reportedly confronted President Trump and pressured him to declare a national health emergency. Much as in the UK, once the damage to the economy was begun, Ferguson’s model later drastically lowered the US fatality estimates to between 100,000 to 200,000 deaths. In both US and UK cases Neil Ferguson relied on data from the Chinese government, data which has been shown as unreliable.

    Neil Ferguson and his modelling group at Imperial College, in addition to being backed by WHO, receive millions from the Bill & Melinda Gates Foundation. Ferguson heads the Vaccine Impact Modelling Consortium at Imperial College which lists as its funders the Bill & Melinda Gates Foundation and the Gates-backed GAVI-the vaccine alliance. From 2006 through 2018 the Gates Foundation has invested an impressive $184,872,226.99 into Ferguson’s Imperial College modeling operations.

    Notably, the Gates foundation began pouring millions into Ferguson’s modelling operation well after his catastrophic lack of accuracy was known, leading some to suggest Ferguson is another “science for hire” operation.

    University of Washington—Gates too…

    More recently, the forecast models being used to justify the unprecedented lockdown measures across the United States have been developed at the University of Washington Institute for Health Metrics and Evaluation (IHME) in Seattle.

    Its COVID-19 model forecasts deaths and the use of hospital resources such as hospital beds, ICU beds and ventilators. At the end of March the model from IHME also “predicted” up to 2.2 million American coronavirus deaths unless drastic lockdown measures were followed. By April 7 IHME models revised that down to up to 200,000 deaths. Their last down revision puts deaths at just over 60,000. The claim is that the down revisions are informed by actual data. Yet the wildly inaccurate projections were the ones used to impose catastrophic social and economic restrictions across the USA.

    Alex Berenson, a former New York Times reporter questioned the IMHE model:

    “Aside from New York, nationally there’s been no health system crisis. In fact, to be truly correct, there has been a health system crisis, but the crisis is that the hospitals are empty,” he said. “This is true in Florida where the lockdown was late, this is true in southern California where the lockdown was early, it’s true in Oklahoma where there is no statewide lockdown. There doesn’t seem to be any correlation between the lockdown and whether or not the epidemic has spread wide and fast.”

    IHME claims its revisions are result of the lockdown taking effect even though that would take weeks to show up.

    Like Neil Ferguson at the Imperial College London, the University of Washington’s IHME is another project of the Gates Foundation. It was created in 2007 with a major grant from the Bill & Melinda Gates Foundation. In May 2015 IHME and the World Health Organization signed a major agreement to collaborate on data used to estimate world health trends. Then in 2017 IHME got an additional $279 million from the Gates Foundation to expand its work over the next decade. That, in addition to another a $210 million gift in 2016 from the Bill & Melinda Gates Foundation to fund construction of a new building to house several UW units working in population health, including IHME. In other words, IHME has been a crucial piece of the Gates global health strategy for more than 13 years.

    They have been turning out highly inflated models for state-by-state emergency room demands. Those inflated projections, from New York to California and beyond have wreaked havoc on the entire health care system. When one IHME model predicted need for 430,000 intensive care beds across the US in March, states went into panic mode from New York to California to Pennsylvania and beyond. By the third week of April the reality was that hospital beds were empty and untold numbers of other operations had been canceled to make room for covid19 patients who never materialized.

    Faulty Tests

    The wide variety of different tests that are supposed to tell whether one is infected with the SARS-CoV-2 virus have added a crucial element to the perfect dystopian storm that is raging globally. Simply put, the tests are not that reliable.

    A leading German laboratory reported in early April that, according to WHO recommendations, Covid19 virus tests are now considered positive, even if the specific target sequence of the Covid19 virus is negative and only the more general corona virus target sequence is positive. This can lead to other corona viruses such as cold viruses also triggering a false positive test result. That means you can have a simple cold and you are deemed coronavirus positive. Little wonder that the tally of coronavirus “infected” is exploding over the past weeks. But what does that number really mean? We simply don’t know. Yet our politicians are glibly shutting down entire economies and causing inconceivable social damage based on false model projections and WHO’s dodgy testing guidelines.

    In Germany the Robert Koch Institute (RKI), the government agency leading the COVID19 response, has deliberately refused to list the actual daily number of persons tested despite requests. Prof. Christopher Kuhbander, author of a detailed study states,

    “The reported figures on new infections very dramatically overestimate the true spread of the corona virus. The observed rapid increase in new infections is almost exclusively due to the fact that the number of tests has increased rapidly over time. So, at least according to the reported figures, there was in reality never an exponential spread of the coronavirus. The reported figures on new infections hide the fact that the number of new infections has been decreasing since about early or mid-March.” 

    Yet the uncritical media presentation of endless statistics from the head of the RKI have fostered unprecedented anxiety and fear in the population of Germany.

    Californian physician Dr. Dan Erickson described his observations regarding Covid19 in a press briefing. He stated that hospitals and intensive care units in California and other states have remained largely empty so far. Dr. Erickson reports that doctors from several US states have been “pressured“ to issue death certificates mentioning Covid19, even though they themselves did not agree. In Pennsylvania the state was forced to remove some 200 “coronavirus” deaths after doctor autopsy revealed death from pre-existing causes such as heart or lung diseases.

    The more that actual facts are emerging around this pandemic and its consequences, it is becoming clear were are being told to commit economic and social suicide based on wrong methods and wrong information.


    Tyler Durden

    Mon, 05/04/2020 – 23:50

  • Democrat 'Disinfo' Group Using DARPA-Funded Tech; Will Pay Shills To Target Pro-Trump Accounts
    Democrat ‘Disinfo’ Group Using DARPA-Funded Tech; Will Pay Shills To Target Pro-Trump Accounts

    An anti-Trump political action committee will use DARPA-funded artificial intelligence and network analysis to map discussion of President Trump’s claims over social media and target pro-Trump accounts during the 2020 election.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    The PAC, advised by retired Army Gen. Stanley McChrystal, will deploy the technology originally developed to counter propaganda from the Islamic State, according to the Washington Post.

    The group, Defeat Disinfo, will use artificial intelligence and network analysis to map discussion of the president’s claims on social media. It will seek to intervene by identifying the most popular counter-narratives and boosting them through a network of more than 3.4 million influencers across the country — in some cases paying users with large followings to take sides against the president. –Washington Post

    Spearheaded by Curtis Hougland – who says he received initial funding for the technology from the Pentagon’s shadowy research arm; the Defense Advanced Research Projects Agency (DARPA) – the initiative raises questions over whether taxpayer funds were being repurposed for political purposes, notes Fox News‘ Greg Re.

    In a statement to Fox News, DARPA outright rejected the Post’s reporting, and said that Hougland was misrepresenting their work.

    Hougland’s claim DARPA funded the tech at the heart of his political work is grossly misleading,” DARPA tweeted. “He advised briefly on ways to counter ISIS online. He was not consulted to design AI or analysis tools, nor certainly anything remotely political. DARPA is strictly apolitical.”

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    “Hougland had a tertiary consulting role advising an agency program on how to explore new and better ways to counter America’s adversaries online,” a DARPA spokesperson told Fox News, adding “He was not consulted for technical expertise designing artificial intelligence or network analysis tools, nor certainly any research that was remotely political. … Unequivocally, DARPA funding did not help advance the technology with which Hougland now works any more than does his use of other agency technologies like the internet or mobile phone.”

    Meanwhile, Hougland’s PAC will pay influencers to convey their messaging, according to the Post – a tactic which Mike Bloomberg’s campaign took heat for earlier this year.

    I have no trepidation about paying content creators in seeking out and amplifying the best narratives.”

    McChrystal told the Post that while the operation might appear unseemly, it’s necessary.

    “Everyone wishes the Pandora’s box was closed and none of this existed, but it does.”


    Tyler Durden

    Mon, 05/04/2020 – 23:30

  • Protests Across California Show You Can Only Push People So Far
    Protests Across California Show You Can Only Push People So Far

    Authored by Mac Slavo via SHTFplan.com,

    Even in California, a heavily socialist, overbearing tyrannical nanny-state, people are standing up for their rights. Human beings were never meant to be caged by a few elitists and people have finally gotten sick of their enslavement to the political overlords.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Protests raged all over the United States over the weekend as millions of people begged the very government that enslaved them to free them.  Obviously, that’s not how it works, but the fact they are realizing no other human has a higher claim over them is at least, a step in the right direction.

    People have finally grown tired of obeying the commands of the ruling class, and they have taken to disobeying orders to imprison themselves in their homes so they won’t spread a virus that even by government’s exaggerated numbers is still no worse than the flu.

    The primary threat to freedom and justice is not greed, or hatred, or any of the other emotions or human flaws usually blamed for such things. Instead, it is one ubiquitous superstition that infects the minds of people of all races, religions, and nationalities, which deceives decent, well-intentioned people into supporting and advocating violence and oppression. Even without making human beings one bit more wise or virtuous, removing that one superstition (the belief in authority, that some have the right to command, and others have to obey) would remove the vast majority of injustice and suffering from the world.

    The solution to these lockdowns has been with us the whole time. We outnumber the police state and politicians by “orders of magnitude.” If we decide to live our lives as the free human beings we were meant to be, there’s nothing the ruling class can do to stop us short of trying to make an example of a handful of people. But once we stick together and disallow them to make examples of those people, we will be free.

    There is no need for violence or begging. Being free is our birthright and we should disobey any command that imprisons us and harms ourselves or others. We all need to realize it’s time to do the right thing, not the “legal” thing.

    If you’re afraid of getting sick, stay in your home. If you don’t want to open your business, don’t. But it’s the height of privilege to look down on those who are simply living their lives free of the chains the ruling class is desperately trying to force them into. People all over are finally realizing that they were not born to be slaves to the elite few and the “order followers” such as police and the military need to take a hard look at themselves and what they are enforcing.

    Cops and military: your children will have to live the world you are enforcing. If you want them to bow to a totalitarian police state, by all means, keep “enforcing” the will of tyrants on free people. But if you crave liberty, and want your children to have a life free from slavery, it’s time to stand up and say so.

    This has become black and white.  You are either free, or you are not. You either enforce tyranny or you do not.  It’s not a gray area.

    To those few cops who have stood up and refused to violate the rights of people, it’s appreciated.  Now stand with those who want freedom, or align yourself with enslavement and tyranny.  There’s no middle ground.

    This all ends when WE say it does. I’ve said this from the beginning. They cannot enslave us once we all realize it’s our birthright to be free and we go about our lives in defiance of their orders, and peacefully coexist with each other. We are more powerful than they will ever allow us to know, and all we have to do is realize it.

    This is just the beginning of humanity getting off its knees.  It started when the government attempted to force falsified data about a virus down our throats, and it ends when we say it does.  Take their power away by being uncontrollable.  Take your mind back from the mainstream media, and never again allow yourself to be enslaved.

    If you want to hear an uplifting message about why it’s important to speak truth to power and take your power back and just live as the free human you are, watch the video below. It’s long, but just the first few minutes are positive and will help you realize you are more powerful than any politician, tyrannical police state enforcer, or elitist. You just have to realize it. 

    This is the truth the “cabal” doesn’t want you to know:

    “The universe is not working in humanity’s favor right now, because humanity has externalized its power to other entities. And everything that happening…everything that’s happening right now on the planet is…because of humanity’s ignorance.” –Ralph Smart

    It’s time to wake up and be free as we were all meant to be.  You don’t need the government, the elitists, or the cops permission to be free. That’s what the ruling class doesn’t want you to know.


    Tyler Durden

    Mon, 05/04/2020 – 23:10

  • New Mexico Governor Quarantines Entire City, Closes All Roads That Lead Into Town
    New Mexico Governor Quarantines Entire City, Closes All Roads That Lead Into Town

    Today in “monitoring your civil liberties” news…

    Taking a page out of the Wuhan coronavirus playbook, one New Mexico city has invoked the state’s Riot Control Act to lock down the entire city of Gallup, shutting down all roads leading into the city.

    The decision was made by New Mexico Governor Michelle Lujan Grisham and was done “to mitigate the uninhibited spread of COVID-19 in that city,” according to CBS News

    The governor’s office said on Friday of last week: “Effective at 12 p.m., May 1, all roads into Gallup are closed. Businesses in the city of Gallup will close from 5 p.m. through 8 a.m. Vehicles may only have a maximum of two individuals. Residents of the city should remain at home except for emergency outings and those essential for health, safety and welfare.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    The city has a population of about 22,000 people and is located 100 miles west of Albuquerque. The city has grappled with coronavirus disproportionately, posting 1,027 of the state’s 3,411 cases and 19 deaths as of last Friday. Its county has the highest number of cases in all of New Mexico.

    Authorities are closing off sections of roadway into the city as a result.

    McKinely County, where Gallup is located, has “more than 30 percent of the state’s total positive COVID-19 cases and the most positive cases in the entire state, outstripping even far more populous counties,” the governor’s office stated.

    “Its infection trend has shown no sign of flattening. The county has reported an additional 207 positive cases in the last two days alone, more than every other county in the state has reported total over the length of the pandemic save three.”

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    In a cry for help to the state government, Gallup mayor Jack McKinney wrote to the governor’s office, calling the city’s outbreak a “crisis of the highest order.”

    He wrote: “The virus has caused many deaths, stretched medical facilities and resources to their capacity, and adversely impacted the welfare of the city of Gallup. Our community is unable to adequately address the outbreak without the imposition of certain restrictions necessary to regulate social distancing, public gatherings, sales of good, and the use of public streets.”

    Meanwhile, in the neighboring city of Grants, New Mexico, Mayor Martin Hicks rallied Monday to encourage business owners to ignore the state’s guidelines and re-open for business.

    The governor responded that Hicks’ plan makes “absolutely no sense whatsoever.”

    She concluded: “These changes do not make our fight against the virus any easier; in fact, New Mexicans’ obligation to our social contract only deepens as we enter the next phase. The best defense against this virus, until there is a vaccine, is physical distance from other people.”


    Tyler Durden

    Mon, 05/04/2020 – 22:50

  • Beef Prices Explode To Record High As More Stores Limit Meat Purchases
    Beef Prices Explode To Record High As More Stores Limit Meat Purchases

    Just a few days ago we marveled as wholesale beef prices had soared over 60% from their February lows to a record $331 per 100 pounds. Well, that was then, because today alone, the wholesale price soared by 8.6% or $32.60 to a new all time high of $410.05, almost doubling in less than a month.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    The reason: an unprecedented collapse of the nation’s food supply chain as over a dozen meat processing plants have been shuttered due to the coronavirus pandemic.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Beef prices are soaring even after Trump issued an executive order  to address meat shortages, however with food workers scared and unwilling to return to work, Trump’s attempt to normalize prices has backfired, because all it has achieved was a frantic scramble by consumers to hoard beef resulting in even bigger shortages and higher prices.

    Call it a bacon run.

    As a result of the wave of panic-shopping at supermarkets, more grocery stores are imposing limits on meat purchases. On Friday, we reported that supermarket chain Kroger said that it has put “purchase limits” on ground beef and fresh pork at some of its stores following growing concerns over meat shortages due to coronavirus-induced supply disruptions. Other large grocers said they expect to be out of stock on different types of cuts soon.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Sure enough, on Monday Costco joined Kroger, announced it was limiting customers to three packages of meat.

    Product Limitations

    Costco has implemented limits on certain items to help ensure more members are able to purchase merchandise they want and need. Our buyers and suppliers are working hard to provide essential, high demand merchandise as well as everyday favorites.

    Fresh meat purchases are temporarily limited to a total of 3 items per member among the beef, pork and poultry products.

    Most if not all other supermarkets will follow suit in enforcing similar strict purchase limits.

    With Trump’s EO failing to ease the shortage, and beef supply chains crippled, it is unclear when or how the beef shortage will be resolved, even as prices explode with each passing day, making beef a luxury for America’s 30 million suddenly unemployed who don’t know when their next paycheck will arrive.

    While so far the food crisis is limited to beef and to a lesser extent pork (whose price rose to the highest in 6 years today), how long before all other food supply chains are similarly crippled resulting in the kind of food hyperinflation that sparked the Arab Spring protests and rebellions which culminated with overthrown governments across much of northern Africa and the Middle East?


    Tyler Durden

    Mon, 05/04/2020 – 22:31

  • It Is Not Our Ignorance That Will Kill Us, But Our Arrogance
    It Is Not Our Ignorance That Will Kill Us, But Our Arrogance

    Authored by Peter Boettke via The American Institute for Economic Research,

    Ignorance isn’t bliss. Ignorance is horrible. When the social reform movement in the late 19th and early 20th century emerged it took aim at five giants: want (poverty), ignorance (education), disease (public health), squalor (housing) and idleness (unemployment). From a social science point of view, heck from a humanitarian point of view, these do lead to misery and their eradication represents a worthy goal for any “Good Society.” As Adam Smith argued in The Wealth of Nations long ago, “No society can surely be flourishing and happy, of which the far greater part of the members are poor and miserable.” (Smith 1776, Bk I, chap 8, 88)

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Economics was never heartless, and economists didn’t stand by in the face of human suffering and, as Dickens has Scrooge, declare: “If they would rather die,”  “they had better do it, and decrease the surplus population.” As Carl Menger wrote in his Principles of Economics, man with his purposes and plans, and the means at his disposal to pursue them, is the beginning and end of economic analysis.

    Ludwig von Mises, building on this Mengerian program in economic science titled his treatise simply Human Action and a core chapter early in the book demonstrates how “human society” is grounded in peaceful social cooperation achieved through productive specialization and mutually beneficial exchange. Economics, practiced in the tradition of the classical liberal political economist and the modern liberal political economists is humanistic in its method and humanitarian in its concern.

    But that doesn’t mean policy deliberations to address want, ignorance, disease, squalor, and idleness are easy and straightforward. The question has always been what is the most effective way to address these social problems in a manner that reduces human suffering while encouraging the chances for human flourishing. There are always hard and difficult trade-offs, and economics as a discipline trains its practitioners to think in terms of trade-offs and to be attuned to unintended consequences.

    The tragedy in human affairs is when policies chosen to reduce human suffering, especially among the most vulnerable, fail to do so, and in the process also reduce the opportunity for human flourishing.

    The communist experiments of the 20th century are the more egregious examples of tragic consequences, but one could reasonably point to the historical experiences with social democratic welfare policies/politics as well that have destroyed lives, families and communities all in the noble effort at slaying the five giants.

    The failure and frustration of the modern welfare state to effectively address social problems while threatening to bankrupt their respective economies is what led to at least a modicum of reconsideration by policy elites over the past 30-40 years throughout Europe and the US. A close examination of the public finances in the western social democracies should give pause to any simpleminded claim, if spending is any indicator, that a conscious effort was made to abandon our collective efforts to slay the giants. 

    Vito Tanzi’s Government versus Markets (2011) provides a balanced overview of the tax burden and public spending. Tanzi for decades was the Director of Fiscal Affairs at the IMF, so he had a front row seat to the changing and expanding role of the state in economic affairs of the Western democracies. Lawrence Kotlikoff and Scott Burns in their The Clash of Generations (2012), argue using the basic analytics of intergenerational accounting that the US public economy is bankrupt, not in 50 years, but right now

    They document how the political system has produced a six-decade plus, off-balance-sheet, unsustainable financing scheme to pay for not only the ordinary business of politics, but our foreign adventures and our domestic desires to address social problems. And, any analysis of this growth of government in both scale and scope would be woefully inadequate if it didn’t take into account the vested interest groups that form around each of the initiatives.

    Again, pointing this out isn’t heartless, it is social science. We choose policy paths and government spending is committed to pursue those paths and not others, and those decisions have consequences that we can study. Deliberating about trade-offs does not commit one to this side or that side of any issue; it just means conceptually that if the costs are greater than the benefit for any particular policy there better be an overwhelming moral consensus among the population for it to be judged “the right thing” to do. In most instances, the claim in fact was always that the “right thing” was also the “good thing” to do – translated into econospeak, the benefits of the policy choice will outweigh the costs of that choice.

    The political economy of the “good society” strives to maximize the opportunities for human betterment and minimize the experience of human suffering. The debate among thinkers is one of means, not one of ends. We must engage in a civil yet contested conversation over economic policy and human welfare.

    In Deirdre McCloskey’s Why Liberalism Works (2019) she asks her readers to just listen, to really listen, to the other side, and to weigh the historical evidence and moral thrust of the argument for liberalism. She admits that liberalism has been imperfectly pursued, but even an imperfect liberalism has delivered unimagined benefits not just in terms of our material well-being. 

    Imagine, she asks us, to consider what a fully consistent liberalism might deliver for us. But to achieve that, we have to give up our arrogance and our will to rule over others. We are instead, one another’s dignified equals. And, we are called to interact with one another accordingly, with mutual respect for each other. A society of self-governors doesn’t need a nanny, let alone a boss, to guide and direct us.

    In The Wealth of Nations (1776, Book IV, chap. 9, 183) talks about “the liberal play of equality, liberty, and justice.” And, as he writes later in that chapter:

    All systems either of preference or of restraint, therefore, being thus completely taken away, the obvious and simply system of natural liberty establishes itself of its own accord. Every man, as long as he does not violate the laws of justice, is left perfectly free to pursue his own interest his own way, and to bring both his industry and capital into competition with those of any other man, or order of men. The sovereign is completely discharged from a duty, in the attempting to perform which he must always be exposed to innumerable delusions, and for the proper performance of which no human wisdom or knowledge could ever be sufficient; the duty of superintending the industry of private people, and of directing it towards the employment most suitable to the interests of the society. (ibid., 208, emphasis added)

    Smith’s good friend David Hume argued that in crafting the institutions of government, we would be wise to assume all men are knaves. By this he meant opportunistic power seekers intent on acquiring for themselves fame and fortune. Smith certainly understood this form of opportunistic motive in man, but he is addressing himself to something slightly different in the above passage, and that is ideological delusion and arrogance. 

    In the paragraph immediately following his famous invisible hand passage, Smith actually writes that:

    “The statesman, who should attempt to direct private people in what manner they ought to employ their capitals, would not only load himself with a most unnecessary attention, but assume an authority which could safely be trusted, not only to no single person, but to no council or senate whatever, and which would no-where be so dangerous as in the hands of a man who had folly and presumption enough to fancy himself fit to exercise it.” (Smith 1776, Book IV, chap. 2, 478, emphasis added)

    In the closing passages of Elinor Ostrom’s Governing the Commons (1990, 215) she states that the “intellectual trap” of much of modern economic theory and public policy is that scholars “presume that they are omniscient observers able to comprehend the essentials of how complex, dynamic systems work by creating stylized descriptions of some aspects of those systems.” This is what their models enable them to do if they come to be exclusively relied upon. The implication for public discourse is damaging because this enables the social scientist to assume the mantle of advisor to a government presiding over a society. “With the false confidence of presumed omniscience,” Ostrom continues, “scholars feel perfectly comfortable in addressing proposals to governments that are conceived in their models as omnicompetent powers able to rectify the imperfections that exist in all field settings.”

    It is not our ignorance that kills us, it is our arrogance. This is Hayek’s “fatal conceit,” and it is not limited to the would-be socialist planner, but permeates modern social science and politics. Rather than trade-offs, we get one-size-fits-all solutions. Rather than binding rules, we get discretionary authority. Rather than listening and learning from one another, we get a rigid insistence that one side is right and all other viewpoints are either woefully ignorant of the science, or morally bankrupt, or some combination of both.

    So join me in collectively repeating the following — I do not know what is best for everyone to do. If we internalize that, we begin to realize that is true for everyone. This prevents us from falling prey to what Adam Smith referred to as innumerable delusions. There is no panacea to our social ills. There are social ills, but there is no one size fits all solution to it.

    Let me be clear. There are experts in science, in art, and in culture (including sports). I prefer painting my Mondrian to the watercolors of one of my old professors who painted for fun, and I prefer to watch my Yankees play, rather than a battle of softball teams between two bar teams along the Jersey shore of my youth. And, I want to listen to scientists and learn from them. But listening and learning doesn’t mean blindly following. Let me be clear again – I DO NOT KNOW – so that means I must try to learn, and that requires listening

    What I do know, and can say with more confidence, is that people are people, and that we all face incentives in making our decisions, and we rely on flows of information to inform those decisions. When I hear a politician talk, I understand that whatever they say it is against the constraint that they must garner votes and campaign contributions to continue being a politician. When I hear a journalist talk, I understand that they do so against the constraint that they must grab my attention in a world full of activities that could draw my attention away from them. 

    And, when I hear an expert speak, I understand that they have a position and reputation to maintain in the public space, and that is the constant constraint against which they weigh how and what they will say. So, when I hear a question about on-the-ground contradictory facts being raised to an expert, and the expert answers by retreating to the forecasts of their model unencumbered by that tough empirical check implied in the question, my critical antennae go on high alert.

    And, when I hear a political leader asked about policies put in place under one set of assumptions which have proved to be off – sometimes by an order of magnitude – and they insist that they not only did the right thing but would do it again with all the information that has since been revealed in the actual historical experience, those critical antennae go up again.

    Here is what I can say: question presumed authority, value earned authority, treat others with dignity and respect, as you would want them to treat you, and listen and learn. It is this path, rather than marching in lockstep with the crowd, that will lead to you balancing your trade-offs and choosing your appropriate risk preference, and living your life as a fallible but capable self-governing individual.


    Tyler Durden

    Mon, 05/04/2020 – 22:30

  • "Ordinary Americans Are Going To Get Super-Pissed…"
    “Ordinary Americans Are Going To Get Super-Pissed…”

    Authored by James Howard Kunstler via Kunstler.com,

    Spring is popping now with a ferocious energy that can only remind the sullenly sequestered masses that life is going on without them. Every living thing is busy making-and-doing out there, except the poor humans, idled without work or purpose. That won’t last long. People don’t submit automatically to zombification when some pissant bureaucrats issue them $1200 checks. They yearn to bust out like everything else on this living planet. And if they can’t do it in a good way, well….

    The mega-machine we constructed to drive this society has sucked a valve and thrown a rod. The machine is broken, no matter how much more fuel the mechanics pump in. (One suspects somebody may have topped it off with Karo syrup.) Anyway, the machine got too big and too complex, with too many extraneous bells and whistles, and with way too much computerized cybernetic control built-in, so the mechanics barely noticed it was coming apart (they were too busy partying). That big machine is smoldering in a ditch for the moment. The dazed and bloodied passengers realize that the ride is over, and now they must march on to get somewhere, anywhere, away from this miserable ditch and the wreckage in it. The fine spring weather is their only consolation.

    And so here we are at a fraught moment in the convergent crises of corona virus and the foundering economic system that it infected, with all its frightful pre-existing conditions. Of course, it isn’t capitalism, so-called, that is failing, but the perversions of capitalism, starting with the appendage of the troublesome term: ism. It isn’t a religion, or even a pseudo-religion like Zoroastrianism or communism. It’s simply the management system for surplus wealth. In a hyper-complex society, the management of wealth naturally grows hyper-complex, too, with lavish opportunities and temptations for chicanery, cheating, fraud, and swindling (the perversions of capital). It’s in the interest of the managers to cloak all that hyper-complex perversity in opaque language, to make it seem okay.

    How many ordinary Americans have a clue what all the Municipal Liquidity Facilities, Primary Dealer Credit Facilities, Primary and Secondary Market Corporate Credit Facilities, Money Market Mutual Fund Liquidity Facilities, Main Street New Loan Facilities and Expanded Loan Facilities, Commercial Paper Funding Facilities currency swap lines, the TALFs  TARPs, PPPs, SPVs represent ­- besides the movement, by keystrokes, of “money” from one netherworld to another (both conveniently located on Wall Street), usually to the loss of non-elite citizens generally and to their offspring’s offspring’s offspring?

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Real capital is grounded in the production of real things of real value, of course, and when it’s detached from all that, it’s no longer real capital. Money represents capital, and when the capital isn’t real, the money represents…nothing! And ceases to be real money. Just now, America is producing almost nothing except money, money in quantities that stupefy the imagination — trillions here, there, and everywhere. The trouble is that money is vanishing as fast as it’s being created. That’s because it’s based on promises to be paid back into existence that will never be kept, on top of prior promises to pay back money that were broken or are in the process of breaking. The net result is that money is actually disappearing faster than it can be created, even in vast quantities.

    All this sounds like metaphysical bullshit, I suppose, but we are obviously watching money disappear. Your paycheck is gone. That activity you started — a brew-pub, a gym, an ad agency — no longer produces revenue. The HR department at the giant company you work for told you: don’t bother coming into the office tomorrow, or possibly ever again. Your bills are piling up. The numbers in your bank account run to zero. That sure smells like money disappearing. Wait until the pension checks and the SNAP cards mysteriously stop landing in the mailbox.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    There’s going to be a lot of trouble. Ordinary Americans are going to get super-pissed if money doesn’t disappear from the stock markets, too. They’ve seen this movie before. They will know for sure that they were played, that the class of people who hold most of the stocks are doing just fine while everybody else stares into that old abyss staring back at them.

    I wouldn’t want to be anywhere near the Hamptons on that fateful day.

    All this because we just can’t face the task of reorganizing our national home economics to suit new circumstances. So, nature will do it for us. Nature will furnish us with a marvelously efficient black hole where we can conveniently stash our fake money so that we’ll never have to see it again. Nature will bust up our giant institutions, our giant corporations, our giant networks of financial obligations. And after a period of confusion and social disorder, some clever humans will aggregate into smaller networks and re-organize their activities on a smaller scale that actually supports truthful relationships between the production of things deemed to hold value and money that represents those things.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    The beauty of springtime is sublime and, as Edmund Burke noted, that very beauty provokes our thoughts of pain and terror.


    Tyler Durden

    Mon, 05/04/2020 – 22:11

  • Renters Now Have 12 Months To Repay Unpaid Rent In Santa Monica
    Renters Now Have 12 Months To Repay Unpaid Rent In Santa Monica

    In a move that is undoubtedly going to cause chaos for landlords in Santa Monica, the city extended its moratorium on residential and commercial evictions to June 30 and extended from six to twelve months the time tenants have to pay rent they were unable to pay late last week.

    But it was both tenants and landlords who critiqued the city’s previous bill allowing 6 months when neighboring Los Angeles had passed a bill allowing tenants to have 12 months to repay, according to the Santa Monica Daily Press

    Interim City Manager Lane Dilg said: “The city is constantly monitoring the emergency situation and updating our local orders to provide the most sensible and meaningful response. The extensions of the moratorium period and the time to pay the unpaid rents, are intended to provide some relief to our residents and small businesses, restaurants, stores and offices, in light of the uncertainties we face as to when the safe-at-home orders will be lifted, and when we can all go back to work.”

    The kicker is that under the previous moratorium, renters needed to prove that their earnings had been affected by coronavirus. Under the new bill, tenants can simply describe in a written notice – without definitive proof – how their earnings have been impacted. 

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    City spokesperson Constance Farrell said: “Landlords must notify tenants of the moratorium and may not require tenants to enter into payment plans for delayed rent, although tenants must repay any unpaid rent 12 months after the city lifts its emergency orders.”

    The order also clears up that commercial eviction bans do not apply to “multi-national companies, publicly traded companies and companies that employ more than 500 employees.”

    Santa Monica’s coronavirus tally is now at just 159. Cases have increased just 10% week over week, down from a 44% clip from the week prior. 

    But the facts like are that, regardless of when things return to normal, we’re certain tenants are going to use their full 12 months before eventually paying their landlords – or deciding to stiff them. Regardless, even though they may not understand it yet, it seems to us that landlords in Santa Monica will be getting the short end of the stick.

    Here at Zero Hedge, we’ll be poised on watch for crashing housing prices in the area after landlords finally decide the income isn’t worth dealing with the red tape and eventually turn around and hit the housing market bid with a barrage of properties.  


    Tyler Durden

    Mon, 05/04/2020 – 22:10

  • After Cuomo, Clintons And Newsom Call For 'Army Of Contact Tracers' To Monitor Citizens, DC Posts Job Openings For 'Trace Force'
    After Cuomo, Clintons And Newsom Call For ‘Army Of Contact Tracers’ To Monitor Citizens, DC Posts Job Openings For ‘Trace Force’

    After former President Clinton, NY Governor Cuomo, Chelsea Clinton and CA Governor Newsom called for an ‘army of contact tracers’ to monitor citizens who have tested positive for COVID-19 and their contacts, Washington DC posted job openings to become an investigator with “Trace Force.”

    Operating under the Department of Health (DC Health), Trace Force investigators will interview those who have tested positive for the virus – collecting “demographic, clinical, social and historical data,” while “conducting an assessment to determine whether safe isolation can be achieved at home.” The program is a 13-month appointment.

    Those who have been in contact with a positive case will be contacted to assess whether they have symptoms and require quarantine, and will ‘appropriate escalate’ cases when needed. Investigators will also use ‘data management systems’ to log interactions.

    Entry level investigators will earn between $51,059 and 65,747 per year, while lead investigators will make between $76,126 and $97,375. The program manager, who will provide “management oversight and direction” to multiple contact tracing units, will earn between $119,706 and $167,586 per year.

    DC currently employs 65 contact tracers according to Mayor Muriel Bowser, who said last week that the district will add 135 more workers, and will eventually need 900.

    The goal of contact tracing is to identify nearly all cases of COVID-19, isolate infected individuals, find and alert their contacts, and then quarantine all the contacts,” said Bowser, adding “How we identify [the sick], isolate them, reach their contacts, and quarantine them, will determine how successful we are in reopening” the city.

    According to DC Health contact tracer Malachi Stewart, contact tracers will call people to let them know they may have been in an area where coronavirus was detected, reports WUSA9. Beyond that, “[We’ll ask] what health equipment did you have on?” adding “Were you wearing a mask? Were you staying 6 feet away from people?”

    During a recent Clinton Global Initiative University livestream, former President Bill Clinton spoke of the need to track people “who are positive” with COVID-19, and described the need for an “army” of young people, according to DC Dirty Laundry.

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    California Governor Gavin Newsom agreed, responding that “The predicate for getting back to some semblance of normalcy is our ability to identify individuals through testing; to be able to trace their contacts; to isolate individuals that have either been exposed or quarantine people that are testing positive.”

    This can only be accomplished if people “allow for their privacy to be impacted by that kind of acuity of attention based upon where they’ve been and who they talked to.”


    Tyler Durden

    Mon, 05/04/2020 – 21:50

  • Here Is JPMorgan's Latest Trade Idea: Buy Bond ETFs Before The Fed Does
    Here Is JPMorgan’s Latest Trade Idea: Buy Bond ETFs Before The Fed Does

    It’s strange how capital markets work under central planning.

    Late last Friday bond king Jeff Gundlach tweeted something which we had observed just one day earlier, namely that “the Fed has not actually bought any Corporate Bonds via the shell company set up to circumvent the restrictions of the Federal Reserve Act of 1913” adding that this “must be the most effective jawboning success in Fed history if that is true”…

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    This followed our own musings  on the latest Fed balance sheet (currently at $6.66 trillion) in which we pointed out that “what is most interesting is that so far the Fed has not yet purchased a single corporate bond, whether investment grade of fallen angel junk. In other words, without lifting a finger, the Fed’s “whatever it takes” jawboning managed to inject trillions “in value” in countless debt and credit products.”

    Bank of America also chimed one day later, which published a “A Note To Fed” which was meant to precipitate the Fed’s decision to get off the fence and to start waving bonds in, as “a lot of investors (including non-credit ones) have bought IG corporate bonds the past two months on the expectation they can sell to you. So would be helpful if you soon began buying broadly and in size.”

    So in response to Gundlach’s query and BofA’s lament, and concerned there may be some selling by trapped LQD and JNK bagholders who suddenly are worried the Fed isn’t buying corporate bonds as it had promised, today the NY Fed unveiled that it expects to begin purchasing eligible ETFs under its Secondary Market Corporate Credit Facility “in early May.”

    The SMCCF is expected to begin purchasing eligible ETFs in early May. The PMCCF is expected to become operational and the SMCCF is expected to begin purchasing eligible corporate bonds soon thereafter. Additional details on timing will be made available as those dates approach.

    And so, just a few hours later, perhaps inspired by Blackrock’s Rick Rieder, head of the firm’s global allocation team, who in April wrote a blog post explaininghow the world’s largest asset manager will invest going forward, namely “follow the Fed and other DM central banks by purchasing what they’re purchasing, and assets that rhyme with those“, none other than JPMorgan had a brilliant trade idea for its clients, which basically boils down to this: buy corporate bond ETFs before the Fed does.

    As JPM’s Shawn Quigg explains, “with the CCFs officially entering the market this month, it may further solidify the market’s perception of the Fed’s perceived put, and tighten credit spreads further.

    Of course, since such a simple trade reco would be frankly humiliating for such a “sophisticated” group of people as JPM’s derivatives team led by the rocket scientist Marko Kolanovic who every week or so writes a report on how stocks are undervalued when – it appears – all he means is one should simply frontrun the Fed…

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    … not to mention not generate any commission revenues for the bank, JPM had to make its trade reco sexier and more complex, and instead of simply buying the LQD, JPM recommended buying an LQD July 125p/ 130c/ 135c call spread collar – i.e., selling the put to fund the purchase of the call spread – for a zero cost, indicatively and a $128.66 reference price.

    Also, since a stated rationale of simply “frontrun the Fed” would make a mockery out of JPM – and every other sellside strategist whose job is to divine the future of risk prices based on such obsolete anachronisms as fundamentals not how much money a central bank is going to print – the bank felt compelled to embellish just a bit, and that’s precisely what the Kolanovic-led team did:

    Rationale & Considerations: The combined size of the CCFs will be up to $750 billion. The PMCCF and SMCCF will leverage the Treasury’s equity at 10 to 1 when acquiring corporate bonds of issuers that are investment grade and for ETFs whose primary investment objective is exposure to U.S. investment grade corporate bonds. The CCFs will cease purchasing eligible corporate bonds and ETFs no later than September 30, 2020, unless extended by the Board of Governors of the Federal Reserve and the Department of the Treasury. If at expiration shares close at/below the put strike, investors will purchase shares at $125, representing spread levels in early April (and below its 50/100/200d technical moving averages). Conversely, the LQD spreads still trade substantially above the pre-COVID-19 levels, leaving much room for potential compression.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Current 3M volatility skew (95%-105%) ranks in its 85th %-ile over the last year, but with the execution of the CCFs we believe there is an argument to be made that volatility skew should cheapen further moving forward.

    An even simpler argument to be made, yet one which won’t be, is that in this day and age of what Deutsche Bank accurately calls “administered markets” where “market outcomes will be dictated by the policy goals of the Fed and Treasury, and the tools they select to implement policy”

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    all that matters is what the Fed will or won’t be buying, and since by endorsing this trade JPM effectively agrees that frontrunning central banks is the only thing that matters, we wonder if JPM realizes the irony in that it has effectively “reco-ed” itself right out of all relevance, because it doesn’t take a rocket scientist to read a Fed press release and figure out what asset class the central bank will buy next (spoiler alert: after the next crash, it will be equities. At that point Wall Street becomes meaningless).

    Incidentally, another side effect of Wall Street analysts admitting they are now irrelevant in this time of centrally-planned markets, is that as Jeff Gundlach tweeted in a follow up to his original Friday observation, closing the loop on a process that he himself started with a tweet just three days earlier, once Main Street realizes that the Fed is buying ETFs “broadly and in size” to not “let down” the buyers who front ran the Fed, it will “not be well received on Main Street.”

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    We doubt JPM is too worried about condemning its clients to a fate of angry Main Street pitchforks, because unlike Gundlach, we are confident that the vast majority of Americans neither care, nor have any idea about the vast wealth transfer that is taking place below the surface of what was one a market courtesy of the Fed’s helicopter money, which is now openly destroying future generations of Americans by burying them under simply laughable amounts of debt just to keep a handful of millionaires and billionaires filthy rich here and now.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>


    Tyler Durden

    Mon, 05/04/2020 – 21:26

  • The Pseudo-Science Behind The Mysterious Assault On Hydroxychloroquine
    The Pseudo-Science Behind The Mysterious Assault On Hydroxychloroquine

    Authored by Leo Goldstein via WattsUpWithThat.com,

    This is a research article published as information for health care professionals and public officials, and for an open peer review. It is not medical advice.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Summary

    I reviewed the scientific literature on hydroxychloroquine (HCQ), azithromycin (AZ), and their use for COVID-19. My conclusions:

    • HCQ-based treatments are effective in treating COVID-19, unless started too late.

    • Studies, cited in opposition, have been misinterpreted, invalid, or worse.

    • HCQ and AZ are some of the most tested and safest prescription drugs.

    • Severe COVID-19 frequently causes cardiac effects, including heart arrhythmia. QTc prolonging drugs might amplify this tendency. Millions of people regularly take drugs having strong QTc prolongation effect, and neither FDA nor CDC bother to warn them. HCQ+AZ combination, probably has a mild QTc prolongation effect. Concerns over its negative effects, however minor, can be addressed by respecting contra-indications.

    • Effectiveness of HCQ-based treatment for COVID-19 is hampered by conditions that are presented as precautions, delaying the onset of treatment. For examples, some states require that COVID-19 patients be treated with HCQ exclusively in hospital settings.

    • The COVID-19 Treatment Panel of NIH evaded disclosure of the massive financial links of its members to Gilead Sciences, the manufacturer of a competing drug remdesivir. Among those who failed to disclose such links are 2 out of 3 of its co-chairs.

    • Despite all the attempts by certain authorities to prevent COVID-19 treatment with HCQ and HCQ+AZ, both components are approved by FDA, and doctors can prescribe them for COVID-19.

    Intro

    Hydroxychloroquine (HCQ) was accepted as a COVID-19 treatment by the medical community in the US and worldwide by early April. 67% of the US physicians said they would prescribe HCQ or chloroquine CQ for COVID-19 to a family member (Town Hall, 2020-04-08). An international poll of doctors rated HCQ the most effective coronavirus treatment (NY Post, 2020-04-02). On April 6, Peter Navarro told CNN that “Virtually Every COVID-19 Patient In New York Is Given Hydroxychloroquine.” This might explain decrease in COVID-19 deaths in the New York state after April 15. The time lag is because COVID-19 deaths happen on average 14 days after showing symptoms.

    But on April 21, several perfectly coordinated events took place, attacking HCQ’s use for COVID-19 patients. 

    1. The COVID-19 Treatment Guidelines Panel of the National Institute of Health issued recommendations with negative-ambivalent stance regarding the use of HCQ as a COVID-19 treatment.  This surprising stance was taken contrary to the ample evidence of the efficacy and safety of HCQ and despite absence evidence of its harm. The panel also strongly recommended against the use of hydroxychloroquine with azithromycin (AZ), the combination of choice among practitioners.

    2. On the same day, a paper (Magagnoli, 2020) was posted on a pre-print server medRxiv, insinuating that HCQ is not only ineffective, but even harmful. This not-yet peer reviewed paper, by unqualified authors with conflicts of interest, received wall-to-wall media coverage, as it if were a cancer cure. It used data from Veterans Administration hospitals, spicing its effects. The paper has shown to be somewhere between junk science and fraud.

    3. Rick Bright, a government official who was probably more responsible for the low level of preparedness to the epidemic than most others, and had been re-assigned to a lower position earlier, emerged as a “whistleblower.” He claimed he had been demoted for opposing hydroxychloroquine, the claim to be soon debunked by documents bearing his signature. The media also gave him a wall-to-wall coverage.

    On April 24, the FDA struck its own blow, issuing a stern warning against use of HCQ for COVID-19 treatment.

    While these warnings are not binding to doctors, they do produce a chilling effect. Consequently, either patients do not receive necessary treatment, or they receive it with a delay, sharper decreasing its effect. This allows detractors to question HCQ efficacy even more aggressively. Below, I review problems in the NIH COVID-19 Treatment Guidelines and other sources, used to wage anti-HCQ propaganda.

    NIH Panel Guidelines

    The relevant section of (COVID-19 Treatment Guidelines Panel, 2020) is Potential Antiviral Drugs. The antiviral treatment recommendations (more accurately, failure to provide recommendations) include:

    Remdesivir

    • There are insufficient clinical data to recommend either for or against the use of the investigational antiviral agent remdesivir for the treatment of COVID-19 (AIII).

    Clinical Data to Date:

    Only anecdotal data are available.

    AIII means a strong position based on expert opinion rather than on evidence.

    Chloroquine or Hydroxychloroquine

    • There are insufficient clinical data to recommend either for or against using chloroquine or hydroxychloroquine for the treatment of COVID-19 (AIII).
      • When chloroquine or hydroxychloroquine is used, clinicians should monitor the patient for adverse effects (AEs), especially prolonged QTc interval (AIII).

    Clinical Data in COVID-19

    The clinical data available to date on the use of chloroquine and hydroxychloroquine to treat COVID-19 have been mostly from use in patients with mild, and in some cases, moderate disease; data on use of the drugs in patients with severe and critical COVID-19 are very limited.

    [Follows is a description of some studies]

    Notice that CQ and HCQ are addressed together, although these are two different drugs, and HCQ is clearly superior to CQ both in efficiency and safety.

    Also notice that the basic recommendation of “insufficient clinical data to recommend either for or against” is given to both HCQ and Remdesivir.  However, the recommendation for HCQ goes further to state that when using HCQ, “clinicians should monitor the patient for adverse effects (AEs), especially prolonged QTc interval”. Practically, this means that HCQ should be used only in hospital settings. No such restrictions are set for Remdesivir, for which there is no clinical data available. It goes against all logic.

    The demand to use HCQ only in hospital settings means:

    1. HCQ treatment will be delayed until a patient decides to be admitted to a hospital, thus lowering HCQ’s efficiency

    2. Hospitals will quickly become overwhelmed with COVID-19 patients

    Then the Panel nixes HCQ+AZ:

    Hydroxychloroquine plus Azithromycin

    • The COVID-19 Treatment Guidelines Panel recommends against the use of hydroxychloroquine plus azithromycin for the treatment of COVID-19, except in the context of a clinical trial (AIII).

    This drug combination is the most effective and widely used treatment for COVID-19, and the Panel recommends against it!

    The Panel criticizes some studies of patients’ treatment with HCQ+AZ for the absence of a control group. Stephen McIntyre tweeted about this argument long before the Panel used it: “there’s a very large control group of COVID19 patients not receiving this drug combination: hospitals and morgues are full of them.”

    There are only two studies, quoted by the Panel against HCQ+AZ, (Molina, 2020) and (Chorin, 2020). Both are misinterpreted by the Panel.

    Molina et al.

    Despite (Molina, 2020)’s angry tone and aggressiveness, it reports no results contradicting efficiency of HCQ or HCQ+AZ. The paper describes treatment of 11 hospitalized COVID-19 patients, five of which had cancer, one had AIDS, and almost all were in a bad shape: “at the time of treatment initiation, 10 of the 11 patients had a fever and received nasal oxygen therapy.” Using HCQ+AZ, 10 of the patients’ lives were saved. The article’s point of contention is that when they tested these patients, 5-6 days after the treatment initiation, they still found CoV2 RNA in 8 out of 10. Virus RNA is a molecule. Some viral RNA remains in patients for weeks after full recovery, but it is neither harmful nor infectious. Detecting viral RNA depends on the sensitivity of the testing equipment. The study’s title is No evidence of rapid antiviral clearance or clinical benefit with the combination of hydroxychloroquine and azithromycin in patients with severe COVID-19 infection seems to be lost on the Panel.

    Chorin et al.

    The Panel also quotes (Chorin, 2020) as evidence that HCQ+AZ therapy causes QTc prolongation. QTc prolongation is not a health condition itself, but a warning sign that a person is at higher risk of torsades de pointes (TdP), heart arrhythmia, or tachycardia, which might lead to cardiac arrest and death (Simpson, 2020).

    Nevertheless, none of the patients, treated with HCQ+AZ, suffered TdP or arrhythmia. Four patients died, but none of them had an arrhythmia. Other studies, in which COVID-19 patients are treated with HCQ+AZ, reported taking patients off this medicine after QTc exceeds 500ms. But the treatment may have already had its effect at that time or later, while HCQ remained in the bloodstream.

    This study has no control group. It provides no information on whether QTc prolongation was caused by the disease or the therapy.

    FDA Warning

    (FDA WARNING, 2020), issued on April 24, piggybacks on the COVID-19 Panel Guidelines. It says

    Hydroxychloroquine and chloroquine can cause abnormal heart rhythms such as QT interval prolongation and a dangerously rapid heart rate called ventricular tachycardia

    This statement is confused, and probably not true about hydroxychloroquine. See below.

    Be aware that there are no proven treatments for COVID-19 …  

    I think that HCQ+AZ is a proven treatment for COVID-19. There is a difference between proven treatment and approved treatment. HCQ+AZ is not approved but proven, because many patients have been treated with this combination and have recovered.

    We have reviewed case reports … concerning serious heart-related adverse events and death in patients with COVID-19 receiving hydroxychloroquine and chloroquine, either alone or combined with azithromycin or other QT prolonging medicines.  These adverse events were reported from the hospital and outpatient settings for treating or preventing COVID-19, and included QT interval prolongation, ventricular tachycardia and ventricular fibrillation, and in some cases death. 

    These are manifestations of COVID-19! See (Bansal, 2020) and (Wang, et al., 2020). The media hysteria played its role, too. The articles about the supposed dangers of HCQ, with detailed description of the symptoms, triggered complaints even before the April 24 warning. And there are people who tried to self-medicate – in the situation when authorities make it difficult to obtain prescription for HCQ – and took the wrong drug or overdosed. Also, QT interval prolongation is not an event, but an early warning.

    To help FDA track safety issues with medicines, we urge patients and health care professionals to report side effects involving hydroxychloroquine and chloroquine or other medicines to the FDA MedWatch program, using the information in the “Contact FDA” box at the bottom of the page.

    Such an urging and advertisement guarantee that the FDA will receive mountains of complaints.

    HCQ and AZ Safety

    HCQ, CQ, and AZ

    HCQ & CQ are two different drugs. HCQ is clearly superior to CQ. HCQ has already been selected over CQ. Discussing these two drugs as if they were co-equal in COVID-19 treatment is misleading and a sign of bad faith.

    HCQ and AZ are some of the most widely prescribed drugs and have been prescribed for decades. HCQ is as safe as a prescription drug can be. AZ is an antibiotic, and it is as safe as an antibiotic can be.

    Because these drugs have been prescribed so widely, their adverse effects have been studied. A few adverse events associated with them have been reported. Combining these few anecdotal cases, some medical researchers have raised some concern, as a precaution. Doctors understand this. Statisticians understand this. But unscrupulous media uses this information to mislead the naïve public and even public figures

    Remdisivir is the opposite. It has been developed very recently and has been scarcely used. There is little information about its adverse effects. The corrupt news networks present this lack of evidence of adverse effects as evidence of the absence of adverse effects.

    CredibleMeds

    The leading objection against HCQ / HCQ+AZ is possible QTc prolongation. Most professionals refer to (CredibleMeds.org, 2020) which puts both HCQ and AZ in the category of Known Risk of TdP (KR).

    I think that HCQ was listed in that category by mistake. A review of the literature reveals only few anecdotal cases. Some of them are poisoning by large overdoses of HCQ. Then there are patients who were on HCQ for years, suddenly got sick and recovered when HCQ was withdrawn. While there are millions of people continuously taking HCQ, only a few cases of cardiac events have been reported. Even if HCQ was the cause of these rare cases, which is usually unknown, it is still statistically insignificant. It is much safer than driving.  Other antivirals are known to cause QTc prolongation too but are not being pulled from practice. In the case of HCQ, it seems that a precaution principle has prevailed over statistical reasoning and common sense.

    AZ is in the KR category, just like many other antibiotics, including Erythromycin. I have never heard of patients requiring QTc monitoring, when taking Erythromycin.

    Attention of the Trump Derangement Syndrome crowd: many widely used psycho-active drugs are also listed in the KR category. That includes anti-psychotic Haloperidol, anti-depressants Escitalopram (Cipralex, Lexapro) and Citalopram (Celexa).

    American College of Cardiology

    The most reliable source of information about arrhythmia risks is the American College of Cardiology. (Simpson, 2020) in the Cardiology Magazine:

    Chloroquine, and its more contemporary derivative hydroxychloroquine, have remained in clinical use for more than a half-century as an effective therapy for treatment of some malarias, lupus, and rheumatoid arthritis. … Despite these suggestive findings, several hundred million courses of chloroquine have been used worldwide making it one of the most widely used drugs in history, without reports of arrhythmic death under World Health Organization surveillance.

    HCQ is even milder than CQ.

    Azithromycin, a frequently used macrolide antibiotics lacks strong pharmacodynamic evidence of iKr inhibition [associated with QT prolongation]. Epidemiologic studies have estimated an excess of 47 cardiovascular deaths which are presumed arrhythmic per 1 million completed courses, although recent studies suggest this may be overestimated.

    In other words, after over 50 years of effective use, HCQ and AZ have proven their safety and efficacy.  There is no reason for fear, except the fear itself. But some people might be vulnerable, so the article explains how to calculate an individual Risk Score for QTc prolongers. Individuals with higher Risk Score might need QTc monitoring. Also, the authors suggest avoiding other QTc prolonging medications in the time of HCQ+AZ treatment.

    The cardiologists who wrote this article did not dismiss the concern. They explained the science pertaining to it and suggest proper mitigation measures.

    Other literature also suggests low risk of HCQ and AZ. (Prutkin, 2020):

    Limited data on hydroxychloroquine suggest it has a low risk of causing TdP, based on its use for rheumatoid arthritis, systemic lupus erythematosus, and antimalarial therapy. … For these medications [HCQ and AZ], their time window of use is short duration, which is another reason the risk of TdP may be lower

    HCQ and AZ have other known contra-indications, but they are out of the scope here.

    COVID-19 caused Arrhythmia

    Many studies show that COVID-19 causes heart arrhythmia. Cardiac arrest, not directly caused by respiratory damage, is one of the leading direct causes of COVID-19 deaths.

    (Bansal, 2020) is a review. It finds that

    COVID-19 is primarily a respiratory illness but cardiovascular involvement can occur through several mechanisms.

    Acute cardiac injury is the most reported cardiovascular abnormality in COVID-19, with average incidence 8-12%

    Both tachy- and brady-arrhythmias are known to occur in COVID-19. A study describing clinical profile and outcomes in 138 Chinese patients with COVID-19 reported 16.7% incidence of arrhythmia. The incidence was much higher (44.4%) in those requiring ICU admission …

    It also notes that CoV2 virus might cause cardiac injury directly or indirectly. The possibility of a treatment impact is mentioned as a less likely one.

    (Wang, et al., 2020) finds that 44% of the patients transferred to ICU developed arrhythmia. None of them received HCQ or CQ. Most of the patients received an unrelated anti-viral and an antibiotic. Only in 18% of the patients the antibiotic was AZ. At least some of the patients developed an arrhythmia before the treatment.

    (Hawryluk, 2020):

    Doctors have found that the infection can mimic a heart attack. They have taken patients to the cardiac catheterization lab to clear a suspected blockage, only to find the patient wasn’t really experiencing a heart attack but had COVID-19.

    Thus, the hypothesis that CVOID-19 patients experience QTc prolongation and arrhythmia because of the disease, rather than due to HCQ+AZ treatment, is well founded. AZ may increase the odds of QTc prolongation in COVID-19 patients, who would otherwise die from cardiac arrest or multiple organs failure.

    The media and professional publications report a sharp increase of mortality from cardiac arrest at home in the last few weeks. Some of these cases are known to be COVID-19, but most of them are not tested. Could many of them be happening due to the cardiac damage caused by COVID-19? Can the cardiac impact of COVID-19 be aggravated by strong QTc prolongers that many people take regularly? There are countless variables confounding this statistic. There is an especially sharp increase in home cardiac arrests in New York, which is usually explained by people’s reluctance to call an ambulance or ER.

    (Kochi, 2020) provides in-depth explanation of the cardiac effects of respiratory infections and interaction with QTc prolongation medications.

    Positive Cardiac Effects of HCQ

    Gone unmentioned are HCQ’s positive cardiac effects. They were widely reported before HCQ had misfortune of being mentioned by President Trump. For example, Taking Hydroxychloroquine for RA or Lupus Can Reduce Heart Risk by 17%

    If you take the anti-malarial drug hydroxychloroquine (Plaquenil) as part of your treatment for lupus or rheumatoid arthritis (RA), you may be getting cardiovascular protection as an added bonus.

    The article is based on (Jorge, 2019). These findings might be applicable only to long term taking of HCQ, not a 5-day course for COVID-19, but the same can be said about the alleged negative cardiac effects.

    Articles/Studies criticizing HCQ

    Listed here are several other papers, influential in the media, but not in the science. These papers span the range from erroneous to … non-existent.

    Magagnoli et al.

    (Magagnoli, 2020) is a not peer-reviewed pre-print. It makes a retrospective statistical comparison of the outcome in COVID-19 patients, who received HCQ or HCQ+AZ treatment prior to April 11, in Veterans Affairs hospitals. In the Abstract, it claims that a larger percentage of HCQ treated patients died compared to untreated patients. This ignores the fact that HCQ or HCQ+AZ treatment was given only in the most desperate cases, frequently as compassionate care. Deep inside of the manuscript, it does acknowledge that initial conditions of the HCQ and HCQ+AZ groups was much worse than those of the untreated group, but then ignores it

    The original version (archived) of the “study” was published on April 21. It received crushing criticism in the comments and was replaced with another one on April 23, hiding those comments. Casting even further doubt on the credibility of this study, one of the authors disclosed Gilead funding for another research. This work was funded by a NIH grant.

    Despite its multiple flaws, lack of peer review, and obscurity of the authors, this pre-print immediately received wall-to-wall media coverage. Given these circumstances, this work looks like a criminal fraud, rather than a scientific one.

    Tang et al.

    (Tang, 2020) is a not peer-reviewed pre-print. It reports results of a clinical trial in China, in which HCQ was given to patients 16-17 days after onset of the disease.  This is too late for an anti-viral to work. Thus, this study describes the incorrect use of HCQ, rather than efficacy or safety of the drug. From the comments:

    With an average delay of 16 days from symptom onset to enrollment and treatment in this trial, those patients are pretty much past the viral phase of the disease, where an antiviral treatment would have the most value, and are well on their way to pneumonia and a cytokine storm problem, which is ultimately what kills.

    Once again, despite its obvious errors, the study was widely covered, including the New York Times and LA Times. Neither headline nor article addresses the obvious lateness of the drug’s application.

    Mahevas et al.

    (Mahevas, 2020) is another not peer-reviewed pre-print. Didier Raoult and his colleagues replied to it with a bluntness, rare in scientific journals: Scientific fraud to demonstrate the lack of efficacy of hydroxychloroquine compared to placebo in a non-randomized retrospective cohort of patients with Covid: Response to MAHEVAS et al. , MedRxiv, 2020. (Brouqui, et al., 2020). (Mahevas, 2020) also gathered many negative comments on MedRxiv.

    Oral Statements of Holtgrave & Cuomo

    A study of 600 patients at 22 hospitals in New York is being conducted by the University at Albany School of Public Health under the management of dean David Holtgrave. Although the study was not finished, Mr. Holtgrave already announced that the results are negative: “We don’t see a statistically significant difference between patients who took the drugs [HCQ, HCQ+AZ] and those who did not,” according to CNN. New York Governor Andrew Cuomo referred to the results as neither positive nor negative, per CNN and ABC.

    No paper, or even pre-print, reporting these results, has been published, as of April 29 (searches on Google Scholar, PubMed, and medRxiv were conducted for Holtgrave hydroxychloroquine; Holtgrave COVID-19).

    New York and other “resistance” states make patients jump through hoops to obtain HCQ. As an anti-viral, it should be taken as soon as possible. Dr. Vladimir Zelenko explained that in his letter, which is worth reading in its entirety:

    It is essential to start treatment against Covid-19 immediately upon clinical suspicion of infection and not to wait for confirmatory testing. There is a very narrow window of opportunity to eliminate the virus before pulmonary complications begin. The waiting to treat is the essence of the problem.

    He refers to patients in the high-risk category – older than 60, having certain health conditions, or shortness of breath. The resistance states established onerous requirements that delay HCQ treatment for days. This sharply lowers the efficiency of the treatment, and possibly increases TdP risks. The mixed results, promised by Mr. Holtgrave, might be caused by this delay.

    Russia

    On March 28, Russia announced a COVID-19 treatment based on Mefloquine. Mefloquine, invented in the US in 1970s, is another anti-malaria drug, similar to HCQ. In the West, Mefloquine was withdrawn from use after a controversy about its long-term effects. Russia might also use HCQ. From a Russian brochure (Nikiforov, 2020):

    These drugs have a comprehensive negative effect on the coronavirus. It may take years of scientific experimentation to understand how and what exactly they affect. Now the fact of a positive effect has been established, and the drugs should and will be used.

    The mechanisms of HCQ and HCQ+AZ action are explained (Hache & Raoult, 2020).

    WHO

    On March 27, WHO erected another roadblock to treating COVID-19 patients with HCQ. WHO stated that HCQ was not only insufficiently tested (which was true at that time), but that it was considered for COVID-19 at much higher doses than for malaria.

    In the context of the COVID-19 response, the dosage and treatment schedules for chloroquine and hydroxychloroquine that are currently under consideration do not reflect those used for treating patients with malaria. The ingestion of high doses of these medicines may be associated with adverse or seriously adverse health outcomes.

    This is dangerous misinformation. HCQ dosage for COVID-19 is the same or lower than for malaria (Drugs.com, 2019).  WHO was aware of this, because it was already conducting clinical trials including HCQ and a number of other Big Pharma drugs. Yet, as of April 29, this paragraph still appears there. This act alone justifies not only defunding but ignoring WHO.

    Google and Facebook adhered to WHO on everything related to COVID-19. Together with Twitter, they purged information favorable to HCQ. This is outrageous behavior for telecommunications and computational services providers.

    Remarks

    • It seems that the main contra-indication for HCQ treatment of COVID-19 is that no treatment is needed for healthy individuals below age 50.

    • Persons in the President’s circle were claiming that HCQ / HCQ+AZ are unproven treatments. That might have been true a month ago, but not now. These drugs are proven by practice and by failure of its opponents to disprove their efficacy and relative safety.

    • The Guidelines are accompanied by a financial disclosure of the panel members. Weirdly, this disclosure covers a period of 11 months: May 1, 2019 to March 31, 2020. The latest three weeks were excluded for some reason. Nevertheless, 9 out of 50 members of the panel disclosed financial ties to Gilead. Gilead’s Remdesivir is an inferior competitor to HCQ – more expensive, almost untested, and less efficient (as far as the little testing with it has shown). HCQ is a generic drug with low profit margin. Gilead Sciences directly participates in WHO trials of Remdesivir as a COVID-19 treatment.

    • HCQ / HCQ+AZ are prescribed by a doctor. They are not OTC and should not be used for self-medication.

    • HCQ+AZ is the most common treatment. HCQ acts on its own but is much more effective with Zinc; AZ is an antibiotic and a source of Zinc. See Dr. Zelenko’s regimen is HCQ+AZ+Zinc.

    • There is a live document by Michael J. A. Robb, M.D., tracking effectiveness of HCQ-based treatments https://drive.google.com/file/d/1w6p_HqRXCrW0_wYNK7m_zpQLbBVYcvVU/view


    Tyler Durden

    Mon, 05/04/2020 – 21:10

  • Trump Administration "Turbocharging" Efforts To Grapple Global Supply Chains From China 
    Trump Administration “Turbocharging” Efforts To Grapple Global Supply Chains From China 

    President Trump’s trade war is back. It’s an election year, and the efforts by the administration to ‘turbocharge’ an initiative to deglobalize that world by removing critical supply chains from China could be seen with new rounds of tariffs to strike Beijing for its handling of the COVID-19 outbreak, US officials told Reuters.

    It’s clear that coronavirus lockdowns have resulted in a crashed economy with more than 30 million people unemployed have derailed President Trump’s normal campaigning process and the promises of a vibrant economy. This could suggest President Trump is about to unleash tariff hell on Beijing as it would do two things: First, it would pressure US companies with supply chains in China to exit, and second, the president can say the tariffs are a punishment for the more than 68,000 Americans that have died from the virus.  

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    “We’ve been working on [reducing the reliance of our supply chains in China] over the last few years but we are now turbocharging that initiative,” Keith Krach, undersecretary for Economic Growth, Energy and the Environment at the U.S. State Department told Reuters.

    “I think it is essential to understand where the critical areas are and where critical bottlenecks exist,” Krach said, adding that the matter was key to U.S. security and one the government could announce new action on soon.

    Current and former officials said the Commerce Department and other federal agencies are investigating ways to push US companies away from sourcing and manufacturing in China. “Tax incentives and potential re-shoring subsidies are among measures being considered to spur changes,” they said. 

    “There is a whole of government push on this,” said one. Agencies are probing which manufacturing should be deemed “essential” and how to produce these goods outside of China.

    Another official said, “this moment is a perfect storm; the pandemic has crystallized all the worries that people have had about doing business with China.” 

    “All the money that people think they made by making deals with China before, now they’ve been eclipsed many-fold by the economic damage” from the coronavirus, the official said.

    Amid a pandemic and recession, it appears the comments from US officials suggest geopolitics could soon become major headaches for global markets. President Trump’s latest comments have stirred new concerns that an economic war with China is about to restart. This could be potentially dangerous for investors who are looking for V-shaped recoveries. 

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Last week, President Trump said China “will do anything they can” to make him lose his re-election bid in November. He said Beijing faced a “lot” of possible consequences for the virus outbreak. 

    He told Reuters: “There are many things I can do. We’re looking for what happened.”

    President Trump recently said he could slap new tariffs of up to 25% tax on $370 billion in Chinese goods currently in place. Officials said the president could introduce new sanctions on officials or companies or project closer relations with Taiwan, all moves that would infuriate Beijing. 

    Secretary of State Mike Pompeo recently said the administration is working with allies, including Australia, India, Japan, New Zealand, South Korea, and Vietnam, to “move the global economy forward.” 

    Conversations among US officials have so far been about “how we restructure … supply chains to prevent something like this from ever happening again,” Pompeo said.

    And it appears Beijing is preparing for President Trump to strike. We noted on Monday that Chinese President Xi Jinping is preparing for a worst-case scenario of armed conflict with the US. 

    For years, we have documented the possibility of Thucydides Trap playing out between the US and China. That is when a dominant regional power (the US) feels threatened by the rise of a competing power (China). Read: 

    The evolution of the pandemic and economic crash appears to be deepening geopolitical tensions between Washington and Beijing.


    Tyler Durden

    Mon, 05/04/2020 – 20:50

  • America Is A Technocracy, Not A Democracy
    America Is A Technocracy, Not A Democracy

    Authored by Ryan McMaken via The Mises Institute,

    Perhaps never before in American history have the unelected technocrats played such an enormous role in shaping public policy in America…

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    In recent weeks, members of Congress have been missing in action. Late last month, the House of Representatives passed the biggest spending bill in history while most members were absent. Member votes were not recorded and the legislation was passed with a voice vote, which required only a tiny handful of members.

    Weeks later, the Senate refuses to even meet, and may finally get around to debating some legislative matters in May. As with the House, a handful of members assembled earlier to approve another enormous stimulus bill. Many Senators stayed home. This is “representative government” in modern America.

    But if you thought this lack of congressional action means not much is happening in Washington in terms of policymaking, you would be very wrong. It’s just that the democratically elected institutions have now become a largely irrelevant sideshow. The real policymaking takes place among unelected experts, who decide for themselves—with minimal oversight or control from actual elected officials—what will happen in terms of public policy. The people who really run the country are these experts and bureaucrats at the central banks, at public health agencies, spy agencies, and an expanding network of boards and commissions.

    The Rise of the Technocracy

    This is not a new trend. Over the past several decades—and especially since the New Deal—official experts in government have gradually replaced elected representatives as the primary decision-makers in government. Public debate has been abandoned in favor of meetings among small handfuls of unelected technocrats. Politics has been replaced by “science,” whether social science or physical science. These powerful and largely unaccountable decision-makers are today most noticeable in federal courts, in “intelligence” agencies, at the Federal Reserve, and—long ignored until now—in government public health agencies.

    Technocracy as a style of governing has been around at least since the Progressive Era, although it has often been restrained by traditional legislative and elected political actors and institutions. Globally, it has gained prominence in a variety of times and places, for example in Mexico during the 1980s and 1990s.

    But the technocracy’s power has long been growing in the United States as well.

    This may seem odd in a world where we are told democracy is among the highest political values, but technocrats have nonetheless managed to justify themselves through myths asserting that technocrats make scientific decisions guided only by The Data. These technocrats, we are told, care nothing of politics and only make sound decisions based on where the science leads.

    Although that all may sound more reasonable or logical to some, the truth is that there is nothing nonpolitical, scientific, or evenhanded about government by technocrat. Technocrats, like everyone else, have their own ideologies, their own agendas, and their own interests. Often, their interests are greatly at odds with those of the general public that pays the technocrats’ salaries and is subject to the technocracy’s edicts.  The rise of technocracy has only meant that the means of influencing policy is now limited to a much smaller number of people—namely those who are already influential and powerful in the halls of government. Technocracy seems less political, because the political wrangling is limited to what used to be called “smoke-filled rooms.” That is, technocracy is really a sort of oligarchy, although not limited to the financially wealthy. It’s limited to people who went to the “right” schools or control powerful corporations such as Google or Facebook, or work for influential media organizations. It’s branded “nonpolitical,” because ordinary voters and taxpayers are excluded from even knowing who is involved or what policies are being proposed. In other words, technocracy is government by a small exclusive club. And you ain’t in it.

    So how does technocracy survive in a system to claims to base its legitimacy on democratic institutions? After all, technocracy is by its very nature designed to be antidemocratic. Indeed, as the Left has soured on democracy, leftists have taken to demanding that more technocratic methods be implemented to do an end run around democratic institutions. In a much-quoted 2011 article for the New Republic, influential banker and economist Peter Orszag complains that democratic institutions such as Congress aren’t implementing enough of his preferred policies. Therefore, he insists that it’s time to “jettison the Civics 101 fairy tale about pure representative democracy and instead begin to build a new set of rules and institutions.” He wants rule by technocrat through a system of “commissions” staffed by “independent experts.”

    This is the new model of “efficient” government. But in many areas, this is already how the United States is governed. There is no shortage of boards, panels, courts, and agencies that are controlled by experts who function largely without any oversight from the voters, taxpayers, or elected officials.

    We can point to several institutions in which the spirit of technocracy is both well established and highly influential.

    One: The US Supreme Court

    This tendency toward technocracy first manifested itself in the form of the US Supreme Court. The court, of course, had long been considered to be a body of legal experts, of sorts. They were supposed to consider technical legal issues apart from the vicissitudes of electoral politics. But this expertise did not come without limitations. The court was expected to limit its own power or risk charges of attempting to meddle in the workings of democracy. By the mid-twentieth century, however, these limitations had been largely abandoned. During the 1950s and 1960s, the Supreme Court created a wide variety of new “rights” that Congress had never shown any willingness to create. Roe v. Wade, for example, created a new federal legal right to abortion based purely on the desires of a handful of judges and regardless of the fact it had always been assumed by virtually everyone that abortion was a matter for state legislatures.

    Prior to this period any changes of such magnitude would have required a constitutional amendment. That is, prior to the rise of the modern supercharged SCOTUS, it was assumed that major changes to the Constitution required a long public debate and the involvement of many voters and legislators. But with the rise of the Supreme Court as expert creators of new law, it became the norm for the judges to dispense with public debate and electoral decision-making. Instead, the experts would “discover” what the Constitution really meant and create their own new laws based on legal “expertise.”

    Two: The Federal Reserve

    A second building block of the technocracy has been the Federal Reserve. Since its creation in 1935, the Federal Reserve Board of Governors has increasingly acted as a policymaking board of technocrats who function outside the legislative process, yet enact regulations and policies that have enormously large effects on banking systems, the financial sector, and even fiscal policy.

    The Fed policymakers are quintessential technocrats in that they allegedly make decisions based only on “the data” and unbent by political concerns. The sacrosanct nature of these technocrats’ decisions has been buttressed by years of implausible claims about the Fed’s “independence” from political pressure from the White House or Congress.

    In reality, of course, the Fed has never been an apolitical institution, and this has been shown by a variety of scholars, many of them political scientists. Fed Boards have always been influenced by presidents and others.  (Most economists are too willfully naïve to understand the political dimensions of the Fed.) Nowadays, it has become painfully obvious that the Fed exists to prop up the regime and the financial sector through whatever means necessary. The idea this process is guided by a dispassionate consideration of “the data” should be regarded as risible.

    Three: The Medical Experts

    A new addition to the growing ranks of the technocrats in America is the legion of medical experts—at all levels of government—who have attempted to dictate policy during the COVID-19 panic of 2020. Led nationally by lifelong government bureaucrats such as Anthony Fauci and Deborah Birx, the public health experts have taken on the typical persona of the technocrat: they are guided only by “the science,” they insist, and it is claimed that only these experts have the ability to correctly implement and dictate public policies that will address the risks posed by various diseases.

    As with the Federal Reserve and the Supreme Court, those who oppose the medical experts are said to be sacrificing apolitical objectivity—a virtue enjoyed only by the technocrats (and their supporters)—on the altar of gaining political advantage.

    Four: The Intelligence Agencies

    Since 1945, the United States government has built up an increasingly large network of intelligence agencies, composed of more than a dozen agencies staffed by career military officers.  As we have seen in recent years though a variety of scandals at the CIA, NSA, and the FBI, these technocrats have no qualms about attempting to undermine the elected civilian government in order to assert their own agenda in its place. These bureaucrats at the so-called deep state in many cases regard themselves as unanswerable to the elected government, and even seek to override foreign policy decisions it has made. 

    Why Elected Politicians Empower Technocrats

    In all of these cases, elected officials could intervene to limit the power of the technocrats, yet they choose not to.

    In the case of Supreme Court, Congress could limit the jurisdiction of the appellate courts—and thus the jurisdiction of the Supreme Court itself—simply through changes in legislation. Similarly, Congress could abolish or heavily limit the powers of the Federal Reserve. Again Congress chooses not to. And, of course, Congress and the state legislatures could easily intervene to roll back not only the powers of medical technocrats, but the emergency powers of the executive branch itself. Yet this has not happened.

    The reason is because politicians like to “outsource” policymaking to unelected technocrats. This makes it easier for elected officials to later claim that they were not responsible for unpopular measures implemented by technocratic institutions. By putting more power in the hands of technocrats, elected politicians can also later claim that they were respecting the “apolitical” nature of these institutions and that they sought to respect the “expertise.” “Don’t blame me,” the politicians will later claim, “I was only trying to respect ‘the science’ or ‘the data’ or ‘the law.'”

    Empowering the technocracy is a useful way to spread blame around in Washington, and it’s also a way to, as Orszag suggests, get around legislative institutions that do what they’re supposed to do: prevent government actions when there aren’t enough votes. 

    But with technocracy, a lack of votes in Congress isn’t a problem: just hand everything over to a dozen technocrats who will decide what to do. It can then all be done outside the public eye, and with the added advantage of being the decision of nonpolitical “experts.”

    Unfortunately, this scheme has worked. Voters are inclined to “trust the experts” and polls often show that the public trusts unelected “experts” more than they trust Congress. This is a great victory for the bureaucrats and for those who push for an ever more powerful state.


    Tyler Durden

    Mon, 05/04/2020 – 20:30

  • Why A New Diplomatic Crisis With China Is Critical For Trump If He Wants To Be Re-elected
    Why A New Diplomatic Crisis With China Is Critical For Trump If He Wants To Be Re-elected

    Amid all the discussion of whether (or not) it is time to reopen the economy, and take the potential risk of a second wave of infections and deaths resulting in what could be a far more devastating second shutdown, one overlooked angle on the Corona-lockdowns as pointed out by Nordea’s FX strategist Andreas Steno Larsen, is that it emphasizes the already growing barriers between the “Elite” and the “Workers.”

    In his latest FX weekly observations, Larsen writes that while “the big cities are the main epicenters (also per capita) of the Covid-19 virus, containment measures have been forced upon entire states and countries.” As a result, regions with low density have been faced with the same kind of measures as more dense areas, even if these regions haven’t seen a material spread of the virus.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    In other words, “One size fits all, even if density has proven to be maybe the biggest issue when trying to contain the virus spread.” This means that in addition to the outsized gains to the elite as a result of the trillions in new stimulus injections which have promptly buoyed capital markets, the current virolocracy could also be seen as “both extraordinary elitist and gentrification-supportive in its nature, since a much larger part of the urban population can work from home etc.”

    Expanding on this argument, Larsen notes that “workers lives matters” has seen tailwind in important swing states such as Michigan as most of the spread has been seen around Detroit, while the less dense parts of the state haven’t seen any material spread of the virus. The movement argues that the big cities are relatively better off in the lockdowns, and that less dense areas should never have been forced to close the economy anyway. And as the Nordea strategist writes, “it is KEY for The Donald to win over such “movements” if he wants to triumph in the election later this year.”

    The problem is that neither Nordea, nor the Fed, think the economy will be in a good shape by then, which is why The Donald needs something else to convince his base, in particular since wage growth could be about to fall of a cliff.

    Indeed, wages are another reason why workers are about to get a double whammy of corona pain: as Larsen continues, core inflation (and wage growth) are cyclical laggards, which means that first

    1. activity comes to a halt,
    2. commodity prices and headline inflation drop,
    3. workers are laid off in size,
    4. wages and prices decelerate or even decline.

    Nordea believes that we are probably in between phase three and four now, and why news on prices and wages will be the next to surprise negatively during H2-2020 and in to 2021 (in Q1 and Q2 activity data has been the negative surprise).

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    So faced with record unemployment coupled with growing labor class anger, Trump’s weapon of choice to win over the workers again, will be an escalation of his China-bashing strategy in combination with renewed isolationism.

    According to Nordea Trump deeming Chinese equities a “national security risk” is not really newsworthy since the EU has been talking about the same thing for a while – though, mostly with a focus on blocking potential hostile Chinese take-overs of Euro area companies, but it suddenly seemed to revive the focus on geopolitical risks on the other side of the Corona mess.

    And while the US/China trade deal has been stone-dead for months already (as it was from the outset), so that is in itself not exciting, no-one had an interest in saying so until after the US election. The corona virus – and the coming elections – have offered Trump a chance to “reveal” that the trade deal is 100% off, and to take a renewed China aggressive stance into the election instead.

    This inevitable deterioration in diplomatic relations, as Larsen concludes, is bad for Asian FX (versus USD), and risk assets and equities in general, and why Rabobank earlier today said that “There Is One Key Thing To Watch Today: The Yuan.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    As Larsen concludes, “Before the March melt-up in markets, USD/CNY was THE global bellwether for risk appetite, and it may very well return as such very soon. You should buy USD/CNY (and sell risk assets) on tariff threats.”


    Tyler Durden

    Mon, 05/04/2020 – 20:10

  • Advanced Russian Radar System Discovered Near Israeli Border: Report
    Advanced Russian Radar System Discovered Near Israeli Border: Report

    Via AlMasdarNews.com,

    A Russian publication reported this week that the Russian Armed Forces have deployed their Resonance radar system in an area near the Israeli border. According to the NZIV publication, the Russian Resonance radar was identified in two locations in the eastern Mediterranean region, including an area along the Israeli-Egyptian border.

    Last year, the think tank and reputable military analysis source GlobalSecurity.org wrote: “the Egyptian Resonance-NE radar tracks the movement of all objects in the airspace not only over Egypt, but also Israel and Syria. According to a number of sources, in 2020 Russia will begin regular deliveries of Resonance-NE to the Middle East.”

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Russian Resonance radar system, file image via Al Masdar News

    “Eli Dekel, a retired military systems researcher, has found the exact location and location of two radar stations that can detect planes and missiles up to 1,100 km away,” the publication said.

    “One station was built in Javelin Oved at a distance of about 40 km, east of the Suez Canal,” NZIV reported, adding that a “second post was in the Gulf of Suez on a hill between Jabel al-Galla and Kabir.”

    NZIV said the locations of these radar stations will allow early detection of various types of aircraft and missiles at long distances, as well as provide early warnings to the Egyptian Air Force and defense forces about timely preparation for any threat.

    “Equipping Egypt with state-of-the-art radars is part of the accelerating process of arming and building military infrastructure, mainly in eastern Egypt and the Sinai. The system also provides data for intercept systems within 350 km. This area includes all of Israel,” they added.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Via aviation analysis site avia-pro.net

    According to Global Security:

    The Rezonans-NE very high frequency [VHF] counter-stealth early warning phased-array radar is designed to effectively detect a wide range of current and future air targets, including low-observable cruise and ballistic missiles, hypersonic aerial vehicles, as well as stealthy ones, in severe electronic countermeasures (ECM) and clutter environment. It is in service with the Russian Air Force, Iran (since 2009) and Algeria (since 2017).

    The radar can operate in circular scan mode or within a specified sector. In addition to peacetime tasks, it can provide early warning of an air attack and information support for air and air defense warfare operations. The Rezonans-NE includes up to four radar modules, each of which provides control in the azimuth sector of 90 degrees and can operate independently.

    It was not said when Russia deployed these radar systems near the Israeli border; however, given Israel’s military intelligence capabilities, it is highly likely that they were aware of these movements.


    Tyler Durden

    Mon, 05/04/2020 – 19:50

  • Global Coronavirus Deaths Surpass 250,000: Live Updates
    Global Coronavirus Deaths Surpass 250,000: Live Updates

    Summary:

    • Deaths decline for 5th day
    • Japan extends state of emergency
    • Global coronavirus deaths pass 250,000
    • Spanish opposition threatens to torpedo vote to extend lockdown
    • Charlie Gasparino says NFL to announce schedule on Thursday
    • JHU confirms 3k/day projection reported by NYT is no longer relevant
    • Cali gov says businesses can begin “limited” reopening as soon as Thursday
    • European clinical trial “Project Discovery” results to be released May 14
    • NY reports uptick in deaths, still lower than last week’s average
    • UK reports drop in new cases, deaths
    • Macron warns European borders may remain closed until September
    • Florida becomes latest state to reopen much of economy on Monday
    • Italy, Spain and other European and Asian economies are also reopening
    • Iran to allow Friday prayers
    • UK defense secretary says China owes the world ‘an explanation’

    *     *     *

    Update (1750ET): Coronavirus deaths have surpassed 250,000, according to JHU.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    *     *     *

    Update (1700ET): Germany is apparently plowing forward with its plans to reopen the economy despite a recent uptick in “R” – the rate of spread for SARS-CoV-2 – that helped rattle the market’s confidence in the rebound narrative that had been taking shape before the most famous investor reminded the market that many industries are facing serious long-term obstacles, and that the long slog back to growth has only just begun.  

    German state ministers have reportedly agreed with Chancellor Merkel to begin the next step in Germany’s phased reopening: Allowing the rest of the student population to return to class, albeit on a staggered schedule that, in its seemingly absurd complexity, can perhaps best be described as ‘Kafkaesque’.

    • GERMAN STATES TO REOPEN SCHOOLS FOR ALL GRADES WITH CHILDREN ONLY ALLOWED TO GO TO CLASS IN ROTATING SHIFTS, NOT ON DAILY BASIS GERMAN STATES TO ALLOW BUNDESLIGA SOCCER LEAGUE TO RESUME MATCHES FROM MAY 15 UNDER STRICT CONDITIONS WITHOUT FANS IN STADIUMS -SOURCES

    Oh, and while the mainstream media continues to run with the NYT’s meaningless 3k figure, Johns Hopkins University has independently confirmed that the numbers obtained by the paper are no longer relevant.

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    But we suspect the reporters were probably aware.

    *     *     *

    Update (1550ET): Fox Business reporter Charlie Gasparino just reported that the NFL is planning to announce its schedule for the 2020-2021 season on Thursday.

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    It’s Charlie – so take it with a grain of salt. But the prospect of an NFL season – however limited – should warm the hearts of all those sports fanatics about to start placing bets on South Korean baseball.

    *     *     *

    Update (1530ET): Monday’s coronavirus data out of the UK was pretty solid.

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    Here are the highlights.

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    *     *     *

    Update (1530ET): Apparently, the NYT’s fearmongering efforts (which we mentioned below and also wrote about here) haven’t dissuaded the progressive governor of California, who will allow some retail businesses to begin a “limited” reopening as soon as Thursday.

    • CALIFORNIA GOVERNOR SAYS SOME RETAIL BUSINESSES MAY BEGIN LIMITED REOPENING AS EARLY AS THURSDAY

    That’s quite the 180 from last week, when he refused to even give an expected date for when limited reopenings might begin. The difference? Some counties are starting to consider flouting state-wide rules and moving ahead on their own. And then there’s the federal bailout money.

    *     *     *

    Update (1520ET): California Gov. Gavin Newsom has started his daily press briefing by announcing a new testing record for his state of 30,000 tests run in a single day.

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    *     *     *

    Update (1205ET): As expected, Andrew Cuomo said during his press briefing on Monday that areas of the state with few cases of the virus and even fewer deaths should start preparing “now” for what’s expected to be a May 15 reopening.

    • CUOMO: URGES N.Y. REGIONS TO START PREPARING NOW FOR MAY 15
    • CUOMO: STARTING MAY 15 REGIONS CAN DO OWN REOPENING ANALYSIS

    This, as the NYT publishes “internal projections” from the CDC calling for average daily US deaths to accelerate to 3,000 a day by June 1. However, most of the hardest hit states are seeing cases and deaths decline, while some states are seeing a slight acceleration. Overall US mortality has plateaued. According to the CDC’s own coronavirus weekly summary, “nationally, levels of influenza-like illness (ILI) declined again this week. They have been below the national baseline for two weeks but remain elevated in the northeastern and northwestern part of the country. Levels of laboratory confirmed SARS-CoV-2 activity remained similar or decreased compared to last week.”

    The NYT reported that the White House continues to expect up to 3,000 deaths a day in June while Trump continues to ‘press’ for states to reopen.

    The report also claimed the projections “confirm” public health experts “primary fear” that a premature reopening will instigate a rebound putting us right back where we were in March.

    As President Trump presses for states to reopen their economies, his administration is privately projecting a steady rise in the number of cases and deaths from coronavirus over the next several weeks, reaching about 3,000 daily deaths on June 1, according to an internal document obtained by The New York Times, nearly double from the current level of about 1,750.

    The projections, based on modeling by the Centers for Disease Control and Prevention and pulled together in chart form by the Federal Emergency Management Agency, forecast about 200,000 new cases each day by the end of the month, up from about 25,000 cases now.

    The numbers underscore a sobering reality: While the United States has been hunkered down for the past seven weeks, not much has changed. And the reopening to the economy will make matters worse.

    “There remains a large number of counties whose burden continues to grow,” the C.D.C. warned.

    The projections confirm the primary fear of public health experts: that a reopening of the economy will put the nation right back where it was in mid-March, when cases were rising so rapidly in some parts of the country that patients were dying on gurneys in hospital hallways as the health care system grew overloaded.

    But even states that have pressed ahead with reopening aren’t seeing anywhere near the activity they saw as recently as mid-March, just as the stay-at-home orders and lockdowns were beginning.

    Trump smartly stopped egging on protesters and pushing states to reopen before federal guidelines say it’s acceptable. But at this point, the notion that these projections represent anything more than a “worst case” scenario for the CDC seems far-fetched.

    *     *     *

    Update (1140ET): Andrew Cuomo is beginning is daily press briefing by announcing a slight uptick in the daily death toll (off its lowest level in more than a month) and a continued drop in hospitalizations.

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    The pace of deaths in New York State climbed 1.2% yesterday (according to the data released Monday); that’s compared with an average jump of 1.3% last week.

    *     *     *

    Update (1055ET): French President Emmanuel Macron just announced that the results of “Project Discovery”, a massive pan-European trial to try to find a coronavirus cure, will be released in a couple of weeks. He also said he believes the borders of the Schengen area will be shut until September.

    *     *     *

    Update (1030ET): As WSJ reports, Florida joined the ranks of US states easing restrictions related to the coronavirus outbreak, while Italy allowed factories to reopen along with more stores while allowing Italians to visit relatives.

    The first phase of Florida’s reopening plan calls for restaurants and shops in most parts of the state – with the notable exception of a few counties in South Florida – to operate at 25% of their indoor capacity starting Monday. Schools, bars, gyms and salons will remain closed.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Even in parts of the US where restrictions likely won’t start to be lifted for a couple more weeks or longer, local officials are starting to draw up plans to move even faster than their governors might ideally like. As WSJ points out, two California counties, Sutter and Yuba, have said some businesses including salons, spas and tattoo parlors can open Monday under “modified” guidelines.

    As we mentioned earlier, most Italians were allowed to see family members for the first time in almost two months on Monday. They were also allowed to restart exercising in parks, while also being permitted to enter restaurants to pick up takeout (like they say, it’s the little things that count).

    After allowing children to play outside for the first time last week, Spain permitted hairdressers, beauty salons and small shops to open by appointment only on Monday.

    Greece, Belgium, India, Hong Kong, Malaysia and Thailand also lifted some restrictions, allowing certain businesses and government offices to reopen after weeks of closure. German students in their final year of school were allowed to return to their classrooms.

    France, which is being extremely cautious and slow with lifting its lockdown, is stretching that out even further. The country’s Labor Minister said people who can should work from home until at least mid-summer.

    *     *     *

    As most of the US and most of Europe start yet another week under lockdown, the FT reports that the rate of global coronavirus deaths slowed for the fifth straight day: The worldwide single-day total of deaths reported yesterday (typically, those deaths occurred during the prior 24 hour period) hit 3,481, falling for the fifth day in a row.

    Sunday’s total represents the smallest daily increase in deaths since the end of March, reflecting trends seen in New York, the UK, Italy and elsewhere on Sunday.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Globally, the number of newly confirmed COVID-19 cases climbed by 82,260 yesterday, the biggest spike on a Sunday since the pandemic began. It brought the total number of ‘confirmed’ infections to 3.4 million, with hundreds of thousands more potentially left uncounted.

    The US suffered an additional 1,158 deaths to push the total there to 61,760. This is the lowest daily figure since April 6, though the US still accounts for a third of all daily fatalities.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Meanwhile, in Japan, PM Shinzo Abe has made it official.

    As was widely expected, Japanese PM Shinzo Abe officially extended Japan’s nationwide state of emergency – which had been due to expire on Wednesday – through May 31.

    While Japan has escaped the massive death tolls seen in Europe and the US, the number of confirmed cases has exploded over the last month, a sign that the world’s third-largest economy is still struggling with the first wave of the virus, which has now burrowed deep into Japanese society, according to Nikkei.

    While Tokyo hasn’t been devastated by the virus on the level of NYC or Wuhan, the spike in infections has left hospital systems strained around the country.

    “Nearly one more month is needed to improve the medical system, which has been stretched thin,” Abe told reporters at a news conference on Monday evening. “The reduction of new infections has still not attained the necessary level.”

    Abe promised that a panel would examine the effectiveness of the state of emergency, and if allowable, would order it to be lifted before the May 31 deadline if enough progress has been made.

    While Japan ramps up its restrictions, Spain is heading for a political confrontation over its lockdown – possibly the most restrictive in Europe – as the death toll lingers near its lowest point since the outbreak began.

    It had been taken as a given that PM Pedro Sanchez would manage to win the votes for a planned two-week extension of the lockdown. However, the main leader of the opposition in the Spanish Parliament – a lawmaker named Pablo Casado – claims his People’s Party (a center-right party) plans to vote against the extension, which gives Sanchez extraordinary power to rule by decree.

    Sanchez argues that the lockdown must be lifted gradually to guarantee that the progress the country has made will be protected: According to health ministry figures released on Monday, the daily death toll remained at 164 for the second consecutive day, the lowest level since March 18, when the lockdown was just 3 days old.

    Iran is set to hold Friday prayers this week and has re-opened mosques in a handful of towns believed to pose a low risk to public health after about two months of closure. Though the reopenings come with rules: Worshippers can spend a maximum of half an hour in mosques and have to wear face masks and gloves.

    Iran’s death toll reached 6,277 on Monday, up from 6,203 a day before. A total of 98,647 individuals have now tested positive.

    Last night, a US intel leak appeared to confirm what many China hawks had already suspected: That China withheld information – like the confirmation of human-to-human transmission – and used the time to hoard PPE and other medical supplies, which would explain the inexplicable global shortage that seemed to already be in place by the time American buyers started finding that warehouses had already been mysteriously emptied.

    Now, as the UK reconsiders its decision to allow telelcoms components manufactured by Huawei to be used as part of its 5G network, the British Defense Minister said Monday that China has some explaining to do about the US report cited above – though he added that there would be time for an inquiry after all of this is over.


    Tyler Durden

    Mon, 05/04/2020 – 19:35

  • Supreme Court Cases Go 'Remote' Over Fears Of Aging Justices; Already Beset By Audio 'Hiccups'
    Supreme Court Cases Go ‘Remote’ Over Fears Of Aging Justices; Already Beset By Audio ‘Hiccups’

    How long before all branches of government and federal agencies stop meeting in person? Is it perhaps an overly hasty, drastic and dangerous precedent Constitutionally speaking? This rush to move all proceedings to online ‘remote’ interaction – even the highest levels of government – at the very least heightens the possibility of our democracy being hacked, as many prior media reports have acknowledged in the case of Congressional remote voting procedures.

    And now another unprecedented and historical first: the Supreme Court will now go to hearing cases remotely via telephone, the AP reports Monday.

    “The changes are a result of the coronavirus pandemic, which has made holding courtroom sessions unsafe, especially with six justices aged 65 or older and at risk of getting seriously sick from the virus,” AP reports.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    US Supreme Court, file image.

    The court has ten cases to hear over the next week, and it’s as yet unclear whether the “experiment” will work. One advantage is that livestream proceedings will reportedly be able to be heard by the public, while at the same time shielding elderly justices from the possibility of infection. 

    The new livestreamed sessions began Monday mid-morning. The AP details some of the high profile cases as follows: “Cases that will be heard over the next two weeks include President Donald Trump’s effort to shield tax and other financial records and whether presidential electors have to cast their Electoral College ballots for the candidate who wins the popular vote in their state.”

    And lo and behold, there are already problems

    The session, being held by phone because of the coronavirus outbreak, included a few minor hiccups. Roberts had to call on Justice Sonia Sotomayor twice when it was her turn to question Ross. Sotomayor said, “I’m sorry, chief,” before asking her questions.

    Later, Justice Stephen Breyer’s audio was distorted when he had questions for Blatt. The audio improved after a few seconds and Blatt was able to answer the question.

    The case being argued Monday will determine whether businesses can get federal trademark protection for website names such as Booking.com that center on a commonly used word. Booking.com, owned by Booking Holdings Inc., is seeking to be put on a government registry that provides nationwide benefits.

    The ‘remote’ sessions will to some extent alter procedural elements and order of arguments. “The court sometimes issues opinions at the start of argument sessions, with the justice who wrote for the majority reading a summary of the opinion and, more rarely, a second justice summarizing a dissent,” AP continues. 

    “But in another change wrought by the virus outbreak, opinions are being posted online without any statements from justices. The court will next issue opinions on Thursday.”

    It’s as yet unclear as to when the court would meet in person again, in yet another pandemic-driven alteration which the American founding fathers likely never envisioned would possibly have happened. 


    Tyler Durden

    Mon, 05/04/2020 – 19:30

Digest powered by RSS Digest

Today’s News 4th May 2020

  • Greek Brothels To Reopen But Hookers And Clients Required To Wear Masks And Gloves
    Greek Brothels To Reopen But Hookers And Clients Required To Wear Masks And Gloves

    In Greece the discussion about “essential businesses” appears to have gone in a different direction than in the United States. While Americans are bickering over when to reopen malls, restaurants and casinos, Greece has managed to get its “most essential” businesses up – so to speak – and running. By which we of course mean brothels. 

    Brothels in Greece – where a global pandemic can’t possibly stop the local men from getting their dose of sex-for-sale – are set to re-open soon, however with a set of new laughably absurd protection measures, on top of the precautions one would already expect when visiting a brothel, according to The Newspaper.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Customers at brothels will be required to wear plastic masks and gloves while having sex, according to the Greek press. And in addition to the robust security already needed in a brothel, the additions of thermometers, disposable sheets and “frequent periodic disinfection” of the business will all be a part of post-coronavirus brothel life (it wasn’t immediately clear how s temperatures of both hookers and clients would be taken).

    It does however beg the question: why weren’t disposable sheets and “frequent periodic disinfection” used to begin with?

    But, we digress. This is just another example that no matter what the circumstances, sex sells and capitalism adapts. Back in March, we noted that one company had launched a “solution” to the loneliness of quarantine by offering antibacterial sex dolls.

    The lesson for the US? If the Greeks are this insistent on going back to work, maybe there’s a win/win scenario: convert all those vacant WeWork offices into brothels and get all those millions of women “seeking arrangements” with wealthy sugar daddies to “work” legally: who knows, it could be the basis for a truly modern “New Deal” aimed at pulling the US out of its current depression.


    Tyler Durden

    Mon, 05/04/2020 – 02:45

  • Three Reasons Why The Eurozone Recovery Will Be Poor
    Three Reasons Why The Eurozone Recovery Will Be Poor

    Authored by Daniel Lacalle,

    The Eurozone economy is expected to collapse in 2020. In countries like Spain and Italy, the decline, more than 9%, will likely be much larger then emerging market economies. However, the key is to understand how and when will the eurozone economies recover.

    There are three reasons why we should be concerned:

    1. The eurozone was already in a severe slowdown in 2019. Despite massive fiscal and monetary stimulus, negative rates, and the ECB balance sheet above 40% of GDP, France and Italy showed stagnation in the fourth quarter and Germany narrowly escaped recession. The eurozone weakness started already in 2017 and disappointing economic figures continued throughout the next years. Many governments blamed the weakness on the Brexit and Trade War cards, but it was significantly more structural. The eurozone abandoned all structural reforms in 2014 when the ECB started its quantitative easing program (QE) and expanded the balance sheet to record-levels. Manufacturing PMIs were already in contraction, government spending remained too high and the elevated tax wedge weighed on growth and jobs. In 2019, almost 22% of the eurozone GDP gross added value came from Travel & Leisure, a sector that will unlikely come back anytime soon, while the exporting sector is also likely to suffer a prolonged weakness.

    2. The banking sector is still weak. In the eurozone, 80% of the real economy is financed via the banking channel (compared to less than 15% in the United States). Eurozone banks still have more than 600 billion euro in non-performing loans (3.3% of total assets vs 1% in the U.S.), an almost unprofitable business with a poor return on tangible assets (ROTE) due to negative rates, and a significant challenge ahead, as most of the growth investments, in LatAm in particular, may reduce capital strength significantly in the next months. Most of the eurozone governments are relying on leveraging the banks’ balance sheets in their “recovery plans”. A massive increase in loans, even with some form of state guarantee, is likely to cause significant strains on lending capacity and solvency in the next years, even with massive TLTROs and capital requirement reductions.

    3. Most of the recovery plans go to government current spending, and tax increases will surely impact growth and jobs. The eurozone tax wedge on jobs and investment is already very high. According to the Paying Taxes 2019 report, the majority of eurozone economies show widely uncompetitive taxation levels. As most governments will massively increase deficits to combat the Covid-19 crisis, there is a high likelihood of a massive increase in taxes that will make it more difficult to attract investment growth and jobs. Most of the recovery plans are also aimed at bailing out the past and letting the future die. There are massive bailout packages for traditional conglomerates and industries, but investment in technology and R&D continues to have high burdens and no support. Considering that the eurozone was already in contraction in the middle of the massive Juncker plan (that mobilized more than 400 billion euro in investments) and the large green policies implemented, it is safe to say that relying on a Green New Deal will unlikely boost growth or reduce debt. The main problem of these large investment plans is that they are politically directed and, as such, have a large tendency to fail, as we saw with the Jobs and Growth Plan of 2009.

    Almost 30% of the eurozone labor force is expected to be under some form of unemployment scheme, be it temporary, permanent, or self-employed cessation of activity. After a decade of recovery from the past crisis, the eurozone still had almost double the unemployment rate of its large peers, the US, or China. Germany may recover jobs fast, but France, Spain or Italy, with important rigidities and tax burdens on job creation may suffer large unemployment levels for longer.

    The eurozone also faces important challenges into a recovery due to its lack of technological and intellectual property leadership. Those two factors will help China and the U.S. recover faster, as well as the reality of having more flexible jobs market and higher support for entrepreneurial activity through attractive taxation. Considering the severity of the crisis, the eurozone is likely to need at last 10% of its GDP o rebuild the economy, but that figure is almost completely absorbed by the traditional sectors (airlines, autos, agriculture, tourism). Furthermore, the New Green deal initiative includes severe restrictions to travel and energy-intensive industries that may act as a brake on future growth.

    The ECB policy was already unnecessarily expansionary in the past years, and now it runs out of tools to address the unprecedented challenge of recovery post-Covid-19. With negative rates, targetted liquidity programs, asset purchases of private and public debt, and a balance sheet that exceeds 42% of GDP of the eurozone, the best it can do is to disguise some risk, not eliminate it. We should also warn of adding massive monetary imbalances when demand for euros globally is acceptable but shrinking according to the Bank of International Settlements, and risk of redenomination remains in a politically unstable eurozone.

    Our estimates show that, even with large fiscal and monetary stimulus, the eurozone economy will not recover its output and jobs until 2023, and rising debt to record highs as well as monetary imbalances due to massive supply of euros in a diminishing demand environment, may cause significant problems for the stability of the eurozone.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    The eurozone needs to understand that if it decides to increase taxes to address the rising debt due to the Covid-19 response, its ability to recover will be irreparably damaged.


    Tyler Durden

    Mon, 05/04/2020 – 02:00

  • China Faces "Economic Reckoning" As COVID-19 Turns World Against Globalisation
    China Faces “Economic Reckoning” As COVID-19 Turns World Against Globalisation

    Authored by Cary Huang, op-ed via The South China Morning Post,

    • Trump, Brexit, trade war… the forces against globalisation have been gathering pace since 2008. Now the coronavirus threatens the knockout blow

    • That’s bad news for an economic giant that is one of its biggest beneficiaries

    One of the more worrying consequences of the  coronavirus is that it looks likely to become a catalyst for deglobalisation.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    At the centre of this will be the decoupling of the Chinese economy with developed economies and the US in particular. The world’s three largest free economies – the European Union, the  United States  and  Japan – are all drawing up separate plans to lure their companies out of China.

    European Union trade commissioner Phil Hogan has called on companies to consider moving away from China; US President  Donald Trump’s top economic adviser Larry Kudlow has said the government should pay the costs of American firms moving manufacturing back from China onto US soil; and Tokyo has unveiled a US$2.2 billion fund to tempt Japanese manufacturers back to Japan or even to Southeast Asia.

    Coronavirus: Can China overcome global mistrust to lead the fight against Covid-19

    Meanwhile, bills are piling up in the US Congress aimed at reducing America’s reliance on Chinese supply chains and pushing for a decoupling of the world’s two largest economies.

    While these are recent moves, the truth is the debate on globalisation – and deglobalisation – began more than a decade ago in the wake of the global financial crisis of 2008.

    After decades of globalisation in trade, capital flows and even people-to-people exchanges, the trend has reversed over the past decade as trade and financial integration stalled.

    Protectionist tendencies are on the rise. Since 2008, G20 countries have added more than 1,200 restrictions on exports and imports.  Britain’s decision to leave the EU, the election of Trump on a protectionist agenda, and the rising popularity of right-wing political parties in France, Italy and elsewhere are all examples of rising public discontent with the status quo.

    Deglobalisation gained steam when Trump launched tariff wars against many of American’s trade partners, China in particular. Since the advent of the  US-China trade war in the past two years there has been growing evidence of a sharp decrease in merchandise, capital and people-to-people flows.

    Conventional wisdom suggests globalisation makes the world a better place to live as a whole, as free trade generally promotes global economic growth. Economic liberalisation creates jobs, makes companies more competitive, and lowers prices for consumers. Advances in technology and communications have made it easier than ever for people and businesses to stay connected.

    Chinese farmers see livelihoods threatened by coronavirus pandemic and related economic slump

    But globalisation is a complicated issue and its benefits and disadvantages are not equally shared. Globalisation is good for multinational corporations and Wall Street as it opens up opportunities to sell goods and services to much larger markets with greater profits. They also benefit from moving assembly lines to developing countries where production costs are lower.

    The biggest problem for developed countries is that jobs are lost in the process. Supporters of globalisation point out that it has brought about cheaper imported goods. But this benefit does not offset the decline of jobs and therefore wages.

    Another problem for developed countries is that they lose domestic fiscal revenue when countries move production elsewhere. In the US, the process has cost not only many jobs but also steadily increased the trade deficit and debt.

    China has been the biggest beneficiary as its economic rise has come hand in hand with globalisation.

    Since it joined the World Trade Organisation in 2001, China has leapfrogged France (in 2005), Britain (in 2006), Germany (in 2007) and Japan (in 2010) to become the world’s second-largest economy. This rise was thanks largely to open access to international markets and billions of dollars of foreign direct investment (FDI). China has for some years been the world’s top destination for FDI and this has played a critical role in making the country a global economic powerhouse, turning an agricultural backwater into the world’s manufacturing hub and largest merchandised goods exporter in just a few decades.

    The flip side is that deglobalisation poses a very real risk for China, as its economic prospects have become so deeply intertwined with world markets.

    US colleges face US$15 billion hit as Chinese students stay away amid coronavirus pandemic

    Exports of goods and services accounted for 19.51 per cent of China’s GDP last year, according to the World Bank. While that figure is declining, it is still sizeable. Based on this, a 10-percentage-point decline in China’s exports might mean a decline of about 2 percentage points in GDP growth on average.

    Exports employ 180 million workers, so any hit to the sector would also have a knock-on effect on investment, incomes, consumption and employment.

    The outbreak of Covid-19 has further convinced the sceptics of globalisation by highlighting a flaw in supply chains. Developed economies have been made painfully aware that decades of deindustrialisation have resulted in greater risks in the areas of public health, national security and geopolitics.

    Politicians, policymakers and business executives in developed economies have come to realise the hazard involved in overreliance on China for critical supplies, particularly for medical equipment, pharmaceuticals and medicines.

    What has upset many in the West is the realisation that they were wrong to assume globalisation and democracy would go hand in hand. China’s meteoric economic rise, its pivot to more authoritarian rule and a more assertive stance on the international stage in recent years have proved such assumptions completely wrong.

    Coronavirus: How badly is Covid-19 disrupting the oil industry in the US and beyond?

    For China hawks in the West, the globalisation of the past few decades has seen the free West help create a communist monster, one that now poses the most severe challenge to established universal values and the global order.

    That is why the Trump administration’s December 2017 National Security Strategy classified China as a strategic rival that aimed to “undermine the American economy, values and interests”. The EU has made a similar policy statement, identifying China as a “systemic rival”

    The global economy as a whole will suffer from deglobalisation and the decoupling of the world’s largest economies if the flow of capital, investment and trade becomes less dynamic. But the escalating trade war and rising strategic competition between the US and China were fostering the deglobalisation trend even before the outbreak of the coronavirus pandemic. Covid-19 is only likely to accelerate the decoupling and therefore may well prove to be a historic turning point.

    It seems unavoidable that the coronavirus will usher in a new era of economic development, both for China and the rest of the world. 


    Tyler Durden

    Mon, 05/04/2020 – 00:00

  • Majority Of Americans Don't Trust Tech Companies With Contact-Tracing
    Majority Of Americans Don’t Trust Tech Companies With Contact-Tracing

    With the idea of contact tracing as a plan to help re-open businesses and stop the spread of the COVID-19 virus, many Americans are skeptical about their privacy and how much data these tracing tools will collect on their lives.

    In a joint survey between the Washington Post and the University of Maryland, only 43 percent of respondents said they trust the tech companies responsible for creating these contact tracing tools – specifically Apple and Google.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Health insurance companies didn’t fare much better at 47 percent, while universities and public health agencies held a majority of trust with 56 percent and 57 percent, respectively.

    Infographic: Who Americans Trust with Contact Tracing | Statista

    You will find more infographics at Statista

    As Statista’s Willen Roper notes, contact-tracing has been touted as one of the only plans that would allow people in the U.S. to begin re-opening measures without causing further outbreaks. Experts suggest around 60 percent of the population would need to participate in contact tracing in order to stop the spread of the virus. But in the same survey, only 50 percent of respondents said they would use a contact tracing app, with only 17 percent of those people saying they would definitely use it.

    Many are weary of privacy concerns surrounding companies having access to location data and health records, despite Google and Apple creating strict privacy guidelines around their contact tracing tools. Encrypted data and a plethora of safeguards are said to exist within these contact tracing tools, but with large data breaches occurring almost annually with top tech companies, many are still cautious.


    Tyler Durden

    Sun, 05/03/2020 – 23:35

  • Dems' Rehabilitated Hero: Online Disgust Follows Glowing Praise For George W. Bush's COVID-19 Message
    Dems’ Rehabilitated Hero: Online Disgust Follows Glowing Praise For George W. Bush’s COVID-19 Message

    Authored by Andrea Germanos via CommonDreams.org,

    George W. Bush’s record in office became the subject of numerous tweets after a video message released Saturday from the former president elicited praise from some Democrats.

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    In the video statement, shared on Twitter by the George W. Bush Presidential Center, Bush called on people to come together to face the “shared threat” of the coronavirus pandemic.

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    The former president said “we have faced times of testing before,” referencing the post 9/11 period when he said the nation rose “as one to grieve with the grieving” — a time period his administration rolled out its war on terror, which included a torture program.

    Various progressive journalists pushed back, however, against those who appeared to be sanitizing Bush’s record and suggesting he was preferable to President Donald Trump.

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    Writing in 2018, Andy Worthington, investigative journalist and author of The Guantanamo Filescriticized

    “the bizarre propensity, on the part of those in the center and on the left of U.S. political life, to seek to rehabilitate the previous Republican president, George W. Bush.”

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    Worthington pointed to a Pew poll as Trump took office showing that 48% of American backed the use of torture in some circumstances, saying it was “a sign of the enduring power of the Bush administration’s bellicose pro-torture maneuverings in the wake of the 9/11 attacks.”

    * * *

    And Trump himself joined in the pile-on, but for different reasons.

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js


    Tyler Durden

    Sun, 05/03/2020 – 23:10

  • Future Economy Class Cabins In Post-Corona World Could Look like This…
    Future Economy Class Cabins In Post-Corona World Could Look like This…

    The future of economy class cabins on commercial jets could be reshaped because of the COVID-19 pandemic. New cabin seating arrangements have already been conceptualized by an Italian design firm this week that shows plastic shields and backward seats.

    Aviointeriors has designed a “hygienic screen to cocoon passengers and keep them separate from their neighbors. Let’s take a look at Glassafe, a potential post-COVID-19 economy cabin modification,” reported Simple Flying.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Glassafe is a kit-level solution for airlines that can be installed on existing seats to make close passenger seating a reality while abiding by social distancing rules.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    The company has also rolled out another concept. It is called Janus, a row of three seats where every middle seat is positioned backwards.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    As shown in this view, Janus has a “wrap-around transparent barrier envelopes each passenger, providing a big plastic cocoon that protects from germs, bad breath, and fights for the armrest,” said Simple Flying.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    The biggest challenge at the moment for major airlines is to make customers feel safe in a closed environment. And perhaps by restructuring the cabin with social distancing in mind, plastic shields and backwards seats could be the solution.

    We noted on Friday morning that Ryanair CEO Michael O’Leary was unhappy with “idiotic” in-flight social distancing rules. He said Irish authorities forced his planes to eliminate the middle seat to comply with new regulations.

    Perhaps O’Leary should give Aviointeriors a call about the Janus seating arrangement…


    Tyler Durden

    Sun, 05/03/2020 – 22:45

  • Leftists Fume As Michael Moore Turns On Fraudulent "Green" Movement In Latest Movie
    Leftists Fume As Michael Moore Turns On Fraudulent “Green” Movement In Latest Movie

    Executive produced by activist and filmmaker Michael Moore, 21stCentureWire.com points out that the new documentary Planet of the Humans, dares to say what no one else will say on this Earth Day – the leading ‘green’ environmental activists, including Al Gore, have taken their followers down the wrong road – selling out the real environmental movement to some of wealthy corporate interests in America and he world.

    This film is the wake-up call to the reality we are afraid to face: the mainstream environmental movement is pushing lies in the form of various techno-fixes and band-aids – all of which are reliant and use large quantities of fossil fuels and rare earth minerals. Have environmentalists fallen for a “green” illusion? More than any other documentary to date, this film exposes the wholesale fraud behind subsidized industries like biomass fuels, wind turbines, and even not-so ‘green’ electric car…

    …and that is why Moore’s typical leftist cult following has turned on him so aggressively – facts don’t fit their narratives and cognitive dissonance is not a safe space.

    In fact, as 21stCenturyWire.com reports, ever since Moore released the new documentary, leftwing green activists have leveled a furious attack against the filmmaker for daring to blow the whistle on the “green energy scam.” Moore, a hero of the political left, has now cast serious doubt over the efficacy of ‘renewables’, including solar and wind energy. Incredibly, many green groups and political operatives are now trying to get the film banned.

    A recent report from Sky News in Australia talks about how the new film presents a number of inconvenient truths. 

    Watch:

    As VoxDay notes, who would have expected Michael Moore would take on one of the biggest shibboleths of the Left, the so-called Green movement and its massive globo-corporate charade of “renewable energy”:

    Examples include a zoo that claims to power itself on ‘renewable’ elephant dung but only produces enough to heat the elephant house.

    They film a supposedly solar-powered music festival that quietly plugs into the grid and a similar arrangement at General Motors’ HQ at the launch of a hybrid, plug-in car, where the electricity grid powering the vehicle is ’95 per cent’ fed by coal.

    The film also takes issue with solar panels, highlighting their limited shelf-life and that they are made from non-renewable quartz and coal.

    In another sequence, joshua trees are chopped down in California so a huge solar facility can be built.

    Moore’s documentary is particularly damning of ‘biomass’, the supposedly-renewable energy created by burning organic matter. The film shows huge piles of trees that have been chopped down to feed a power plant, its chimney belching out smoke that appears far from environmentally sound.

    Viewers are told biomass is the biggest single source of renewable energy around the world, and – nonsensically given it is supposed to be about energy conservation – has involved wood chips being shipped to Europe from North America, Brazil and Indonesia.

    ‘Our anxiety over [global] warming has panicked us into embracing anything green or alternative without actually looking too closely at what is involved,’ the film states. With plans to turn animal fat into biomass fuel, the film asks: ‘Is there anything too terrible to qualify as green energy?’

    The film suggests that mega-rich businessmen – including Sir Richard Branson and British timber investor Jeremy Grantham – and banks such as Goldman Sachs – are keen to invest in green energy because they want to make a quick buck rather than because they are worried for the planet. According to Moore, Toyota, Citibank and bulldozer giant Caterpillar becoming sponsors of Earth Day provided final confirmation that Big Business has taken over the green movement.

    When they had picked their jaws off the floor, the first response from some of the climate scientists and environmental campaigners who have been enthusiasts for renewable energy delighted their opponents – they wanted to ban it.

    Finally, while this documentary is groundbreaking in the sense that it is one of the first ever comprehensive exposures of the environmental fraud which underpins ‘sustainable energy’ and the much celebrated Green New Deal, we note 21stCenturyWire.com’s warns that towards the end of the film director Jeff Gibbs veers into extremist ‘depopulation’ rhetoric, and infers that a radical social engineering agenda must be pursued in order to achieve population control – which he believes will somehow stop a ‘human-caused extinction event’ due to man-made CO2-induced ‘climate change.’ 

    Putting aside that radical ideological segue by Gibbs, on balance, the film remains a powerful piece of investigative journalism which goes a long way towards challenging the green orthodoxy on widely held assumptions surrounding ‘green’ energy and sustainable development – which is crucial in advancing a fact-based discussion on how the world will realistically meet its energy needs in the future, as well as shining a light on the transnational profiteers who are pushing Wall Street’s ‘Green New Deal’ speculative energy market.


    Tyler Durden

    Sun, 05/03/2020 – 22:20

  • "We Had 2 Customers All Weekend" – Georgia's Small Businesses Gripe About "Disastrous" Reopening
    “We Had 2 Customers All Weekend” – Georgia’s Small Businesses Gripe About “Disastrous” Reopening

    A few days back, we shared an interesting piece of “real time” data suggesting an increase in foot traffic to retail “hot spots” across Georgia last weekend, the first that certain businesses in the state were allowed to reopen.

    But since the “anonymized” cellphone location data didn’t offer any indication of spending, we speculated that consumers desperate for freedom after being cooped up inside for weeks might simply be taking advantage of the excuse to ramble and roam the retail landscape and window-shop, even if most of the stores in any given strip mall remained closed. Since consumer spending drives 70% of the American economy – an oft-quoted stat – if nobody was buying, then no economically productive activity was occurring and the “green shoots” were really just a mirage.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Over the weekend, we learned Warren Buffett has jettisoned his airline stocks and decided to sit this crisis out (laying most of the blame for his decision at the Fed’s doorstep). A report in Bisnow looking back on the first week of Georgia’s reopening found that it was mostly “a disaster” for small businesses.

    Bad Axe CEO Mario Zelaya expected business to be bad, maybe 10% of the hundreds of customers he would expect to see throw axes and drink beer on a typical weekend. “That was the worst-case scenario, especially with all the marketing we did,” Zelaya said. “The reopening weekend was a disaster. We had two customers all weekend.”

    Despite the public health and political debate, one thing is clear: The longer retailers and restaurants stay closed, the harder it will be for them to survive. “I think every small-business owner is in the same position as we are where they’re nervous, and they’re worried, and they’re scared of public backlash,” Zelaya said. “Our only decision right now is to survive. We’ll take measures to ensure that.”

    Commercial landlords mostly confirmed that about 50% of the rent from their retail tenants has been collected since the crisis began. And in states like Georgia and Texas, landlords have been mostly understanding with small businesses and even smaller chains, allowing them enough wiggle room to wait to reopen until they have a better shop at operating profitably.

    Atlanta-based real estate firm Ackerman & Co. collected about 50% of its rents from its retailers in April. Retail President Leo Wiener said he doesn’t expect May to be much different. Wiener said Ackerman continues to be understanding with tenants who choose not to open despite Kemp’s decree that they can legally do so. “At this point, it just doesn’t make business sense to push a tenant open. I’ve got to trust that the restaurateur knows their customer,” he said. “I just think it’s too early for landlords to start pushing tenants.” Bob Prosen, the CEO of small to midsized business crisis consultant The Prosen Center for Business Advancement, said many mom-and-pops don’t have enough revenue to remain shuttered much longer.  “It certainly is not their landlords that are driving this. I understand it’s a problem, but that’s not the primary driver,” Prosen said. “They are going to lose their businesses.” About a third of Atlanta-based Coro Realty Advisor’s retail tenants reopened over the past weekend, Coro President Robert Fransen said. Most others expect to reopen over the next two weeks, he said. But even with the lifting of the shelter-at-home order, Coro hasn’t demanded any of its tenants turn the lights back on. “We don’t want to treat our tenants that way. Our personal opinion from the company is [the reopen decree] was too soon,” Fransen said. “So we did feel it was unfair to box tenants in on a decision we didn’t agree with.”

    Because otherwise, businesses – who aren’t getting the same relief that employees get when they’re laid off (employees collect unemployment whereas small businesses are getting zero-interest loans, though at least most of the ‘PPP’ loans should convert to grants) – are just adding to the “L” tab that they’re going to need to pay back later.

    Zelaya said his Atlanta Bad Axe Throwing location is a “canary in a coal mine” to see how things may return for the chain once other locations open. This weekend, it plans to reopen in Oklahoma City and soon after, it plans to restart locations in Texas. His landlords have put little pressure on him to open before he is ready, let alone permitted by state law. Zelaya said he has been given rent concessions on many of his locations. “Our [Atlanta] landlord is an extremely phenomenal person. From the very beginning when it all went down, essentially his words were, ‘I feel for you man, we’ll figure it out. Just be safe,’” he said of Gartland Long, who owns Bad Axe’s location at 1257 Marietta Blvd. NW. “He’s been arguably the easiest landlord we have to work with.” But when Zelaya can, he is trying to reopen locations in hopes of just making some money again. Not only did Bad Axe lose revenue from walk-in customers, but it had to refund money from groups that booked events ahead of time. “When someone on staff gets laid off, they get unemployment insurance and they get relief from the government. When a small business is forced to shut down, we get offered loans. We don’t get the relief,” Zelaya said. “It’s not like we’re vicious, money-hungry large corporations. We have families to feed, too.”

    Even the businesses that are allowed to reopen won’t be be running at full capacity for months. In other words, investors might want to wait for a few more weeks of spending data before making any conclusions about what letter this rebound will most closely resemble.


    Tyler Durden

    Sun, 05/03/2020 – 21:55

  • QE Defender – Stop The QE Insanity: Helicopter Money And The Risk Of Hyperinflation
    QE Defender – Stop The QE Insanity: Helicopter Money And The Risk Of Hyperinflation

    Submitted by BullionStar.com,

    In 2016 at FreedomFest in Las Vegas, BullionStar first launched the QE Defender game.

    With the central banks going all in on debasement of money by all means of quantitative easing and money printing, the QE Defender Game is more relevant than ever. We have therefore updated the characters of the game which can be played for free without registration here.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    There’s an infinite amount of cash in the Federal Reserve” – Minneapolis Fed President Neel Kashkari, March 23

    When it comes to this lending, we’re not going to run out of ammunition, that doesn’t happen” – Federal Reserve Chairman Jerome Powell, March 26

    QE COVID

    Over the last two months, major central banks and governments across the globe have unleashed a series of monetary and fiscal interventions on markets and economies which are unprecedented in their magnitude and which are bordering on the destruction of the current financial system.

    While the global spread of coronavirus COVID-19 provided the trigger and the pretext for the current full-spectrum quantitative easing, money printing, asset purchases and economic bailouts, the size and scope of the current assault on free markets makes all previous central bank and government interventions look insignificance in comparison.

    Markets are now officially broken. In some cases, the US Federal Reserve and the European Central Bank have become the markets, such is the scale of their asset buying, and their actions are making the bailouts of 2008 and 1998’s Long Term Capital Management (LTCM) look like a walk in the park.

    From quantitative easing to zero bound interest rate cuts and beyond, from helicopter money to economy wide bailouts, the combined monetary and fiscal interference in markets and economies over recent weeks has now distorted everything from market prices to risk preferences to the time value of money, while shattering the concept of freely trading markets and free enterprise.

    All of this in an environment of locked down economies, minimal economic activity, huge job losses, shrinking tax revenue and economic stagnation, as well as the impending approach of an unprecedented global recession, that if long lasting, will become a depression.

    On the monetary side, the renewed and limitless quantitative easing – with central banks creating money out of thin air to buy up financial assets across all risk categories – combined with interest rate distortions, is both prolonging the very asset bubbles that the same central banks themselves created, while also leading to explosive increases in money supply. This in turn is leading to the destruction of currency values, and most worryingly, setting the scene for the real possibility of hyperinflation.

    On the fiscal side, government stimulus packages of direct payments and loan and tax write-offs across vast swathes of economic sectors is not only creating a future dependence on income support and a pretext for the introduction of direct transfers to individuals, but is burdening the very same workforces with future tax burdens and even more debt.

    Helicopter Drops

    In this scenario, helicopter money, analogous to a helicopter dropping cash directly to the population, comes into play. Essentially helicopter cash represents direct methods of boosting consumer demand by the distribution of currency directly to the public into their bank accounts and into their pockets. Like quantitative easing, direct cash drops pave the way for destruction of currencies and can be the touch-paper to trigger hyperinflation.

    Importantly, on both the monetary and fiscal fronts, the sheer flood of official interventions across markets and economies is now creating the largest moral hazard problem the world has ever seen, with investors and economic actors being conditioned to the expectation that central banks and governments will always come to the rescue by propping up asset prices and bailing out entire sectors (think banks, airlines and real estate), thus creating an environment that encourages a lack of individual consequences for future risky behavior, but at the same time creating dire consequences for the collective financial and economic system.

    While the scale of what is happening right is daunting and difficult to keep track of, a ballpark estimate suggests that the total size of interventions from just some of the world’s largest monetary and fiscal authorities is currently more than US $10 trillion and counting. For a taste for how uncharted and dangerous this QE is becoming, a quick look at the US and Europe is instructive.

    Quantifying QE – USA: Whatever it takes

    After cutting interest rates to zero via two emergency decisions during March (March 3 here and March 15 here), the US Federal Reserve then announced on 15 March that over the coming months it would ramp up QE by buying at least $500 billion of US Treasury securities and at least $200 billion of agency mortgage-backed securities.

    That’s $700 billion of Fed debt buying from banks and the Treasury across a cross section of widening of risk categories. At the same time, the Fed begun flooding the Fed system with credit in an attempt to boost liquidity, including $1 trillion in repurchase operations per day.

    When this didn’t placate markets, the Fed then went ‘all in’ on 23 March and announced the start of open-ended quantitative easing (QE) in unlimited amounts, to buy an even wider range of debt from low to much higher risk classes, promising to:

     “purchase Treasury securities and agency mortgage-backed securities in the amounts needed…including purchases of corporate and municipal bonds.”

    The Fed then also established swap lines with a whole range of major central banks around the world, providing these central banks with dollar funding in exchange for US Treasuries. This in essence expands the money supply of US dollars all over the world.

    Then on 9 April the Fed was back, announcing another $2.3 trillion in QE, in the form of $600 billion purchases of bank loans of individuals and businesses, $500 billion buying of municipal bonds and loans (states, cities etc), and $850 billion in QE related to credit facilities of US corporates and asset-backed vehicles. Incredibly, this includes junk bonds and junk bond ETFs, with such market euphemisms as high yield, extended yield, and beyond investment grade. There is therefore, it seems, no limit to the depths the US Fed will go in its quest to prop up prices, bail out Wall St banks and hedge funds, and destroy financial markets.

    Not surprisingly, this new unprecedented and unlimited QE by the Fed over March and April can already be seen in the huge explosion in US money supply, where the monetary aggregate measure M2 (which includes cash, demand deposits, time deposits and money market mutual funds) has rocketed higher from the new money “out of thin air” that has no bearing on underlying economic growth. This can be seen in the below Federal Reserve chart. As a closely watched indicator in forecasting future inflation, this M2 chart speaks volumes.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    M2  – A broad money supply measure –  Date range 2016 -2020 – To infinity and beyond Q 1 2020. Source – Fed St Louis  

    In the same vein, as architect of this rampant QE, the money out of thin air hits the Fed’s bottom line,showing up in the rapid expansion of the Fed’s balance sheet, which has ballooned from $ 4.17 trillion at the end of February to $6.4 trillion now. That’s an insane $2.2 trillion added since the start of March, or in other words, a 50% expansion in the Fed’s balance sheet since the end of February. This is neatly illustrated in the blow out of the Fed’s total assets since early March.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Balance sheet (total asset) of the US Federal Reserve – last 5 years. Source: Fed St Louis

    Turning to US fiscal interventions, at the end of March the US federal government pushed through a staggering $2.2 trillion economic bailout package titled the Coronavirus Aid, Relief, and Economic Security Act (CARES Act), an intervention so large that it’s equivalent to 10% of US GDP. This CARES Act (which was ready and waiting in the wings) covers everything from loans to large and small corporations ($750 billion), the bailout of the US airline industry ($26 billion), loans to states and local governments ($340 billion), and most controversially, direct payments to individuals ($300 billion).

    This last category is literally ‘helicopter money’, with every taxpayer in the US set to receive a $1200 payment, plus an additional $500 per child, with the transfers being made via stimulus checks (cheques) and direct deposits to bank accounts. The US IRS calls these Economic Impact Payments, but they are really direct cash injections, literally the long predicted helicopter cash drops. This money is printed out of thin air, directly distributed to the population, and most importantly raises the money supply while diluting the purchasing power of all existing currency.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    An image from the original version of BullionStar’s “QE Defender’ video game launched in 2016 and featuring the Fed chairs Ben Bernanke and Janet Yellen  

     

    Quantifying QE: Europe – ECB 

    After cutting one of its key refinancing rates to -0.75% in early March, the European Central Bank (ECB) then announced new monetary QE interventions on 12 March in the form of €120 billion of bond buying (quantitative easing) to complement its existing bond buying programme. On the same day, the ECB also announced an intent to flood cheap liquidity to European banks using longer-term refinancing operations (LTROs).

    A week later on 18 March, the ECB ramped up the QE and went practically unlimited, announcing an enormous €750 billion Pandemic Emergency Purchase Programme (PEPP), a fancy name for even more QE that aims to buy government and corporate bonds (debt), including non-financial commercial paper (short-term loans). In total, that’s €870 billion in monetary QE interventions from the ECB.

    On the fiscal side, Europe is leading the way with the largest fiscal bailout by any economic bloc so far,  totaling a massive €3.2 trillion in fiscal bailouts across the continent. This includes emergency packages of individual European countries such as Germany, Spain and France,  but also an EU wide bailout fund of €540 billion to which the European Union has agreed, consisting of €240 billion in credit for Eurozone countries via the European Stability Mechanism (ESM), €200 billion in loans for small businesses via the European Investment bank, and €100 billion in loans for job support.

    The sheer scale and unprecedented nature of these European union interventions motivated one of its countless bodies, the European Economic and Social Committee, to proudly comment on 16 April that:

    “In less than 4 weeks, the EU has done more than in the four years following the 2008 crisis, with interventions already decided that are estimated at over EUR 3 trillions.”

    As to how the EU will pay for all of these bailouts, the EU Commission claims to have the answer, saying that it will, surprise, surprise, “propose borrowing to finance the recovery plan“.

    With the US government introducing helicopter money, can Europe be far behind? While the European Central Bank claims that helicopter money is not an option that’s being considered, would you believe them? In a recent letter responding to a member of the European Parliament (dated 21 April), the ECB’s Christine Lagarde avoids the question of whether helicopter money is a fiscal or monetary in nature, only saying that it has never been discussed by the ECB’s Governing Council. But in the infamous words of another fellow Europhile Jean-Claude Juncker, “When it becomes serious you have to lie.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Helipad – Letter dated 21 April 2020 from Christine Lagarde, president of the European Central Bank, about helicopter money

    Beyond the Fed and the ECB, all other major monetary authorities and governments around the globe are also engaging in massive QE and economic bailouts, from the Bank of Japan and Bank of England to the Chinese and the International Monetary Fund (IMF), from Australia to Brazil and from South Korea to Singapore.  For example, the Bank of England has its own £645 billion QE programme buying UK government bonds and sterling corporate bonds, and has now moved to directly finance the spending the UK Treasury, a form of helicopter money.

    Meanwhile, the Bank of Japan has just announced that it will now consider unlimited bond buying of government and corporate bonds – “Bank of Japan mulling unlimited bond buying at next meeting: Nikkei“. Everywhere one looks, the evidence is there, it’s QE to infinity, buying up all debt of all types and all risk categories at any price, in the process destroying the financial system and setting the scene for hyperinflation.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    100 trillion Zimbabwean dollars

    Hyperinflation

    In an interview in 2010, then Fed chairman Ben Bernanke tried to dissuade concerns over Fed money printing, QE and market interventions, saying that:

    This fear of inflation I think is way overstated …What we’re doing is lowering interest rates by buying Treasury securities. And by lowering interest rates, we hope to stimulate the economy to grow faster.

    The trick is to find the appropriate moment when to begin to unwind this policy. And that’s what we’re going to do.

    Fake words then from Bernanke, fake words now. There was no real unwind. Tapering was trick and a distraction. This is the same Bernanke who explained how the Fed’s lending is merely electronic printing, creating money out of thin air, and in so doing, inflating the money supply.

    Quantitative easing, despite the complicated name, is a simple case of massively expanding the money supply. Helicopter money ditto, is also a simple case of massively expanding the money supply.

    By artificially boosting demand in a scenario of lower production and constrained supply using the printing press and its electronic equivalent (QE and helicopter money), more fiat currency is entering the existing system. This can lead to product shortages, hoarding, and higher consumer prices, i.e. rising inflation, which is the economic textbook situation of too much money chasing too few goods.

    Rising inflation in turn leads to lower purchasing poor and eroding value for a paper currency, loss of confidence in that currency, and in a downward spiral, faster spending to get rid of the increasingly worthless currency, which in turn leads to even higher prices, hoarding and inflation. And all this in an environment of economic stagnation and recession. This then leads to higher inflation expectations, and ultimately hyperinflation.

    And what are we seeing right now in the global economy, led by the large central banks and the largest economies? Explosions in money supply brought on by quantitative easing. Increasing experiments of directly transferred helicopter money to artificially boost consumer demand. Supply side shortages and hoarding. Economic turmoil and economies in stagnation due to covid-19 lock downs with massive unemployment and economies slipping into recession and possible depression.

    Hyperinflation is essentially a rapid and accelerating inflation amid a collapsing currency value, and it can arrive rapidly in an environment where frequent price rises have already begun to take hold.  In such scenarios, national cash becomes worthless and precious metals and reserve currencies become stores of values. For some of the more prominent hyperinflationary events in recent times just look at the hyper inflationary experiences of Argentina, Zimbabwe and Venezuela. See “The Power of Gold in Times of Crisis” for details.

    For example, in 1989, prices in Argentina rose by an annualized 500 percent. In 2008, Zimbabwe’s annual inflation rate at one point reached 231 million percent. Annual inflation in Venezuela, which is still in the midst of hyperinflation, is currently over 2300%.

    But what if hyperinflation hits major economics such as the US and Europe and their  ‘strong’ fiat currencies in the form of the US dollar and Euro? In the current environment of full-scale quantitative easing and the emerging popularity of helicopter money, this is something which populations may soon be about to find out.

    Under this possible scenario, physical gold will become one of the few trusted assets to remain a secure store of value and wealth preservation when paper currencies crash and burn. Universally trusted as a safe harbor in times of crisis and emergency, physical gold is both the proven last man standing and the go to asset in a world at risk of hyperinflation.

    This article was originally published on the BullionStar.com website under the same title “QE Defender – Stop the QE Insanity | Helicopter Money and the Risk of Hyperinflation”


    Tyler Durden

    Sun, 05/03/2020 – 21:30

  • Watch: Video Of NYPD Officer Brutalizing Bystander During 'Social Distancing' Arrest Sparks Outrage
    Watch: Video Of NYPD Officer Brutalizing Bystander During ‘Social Distancing’ Arrest Sparks Outrage

    We’ve been covering the NYPD’s ‘War on Barbecuing’ since news first broke that the NYPD – presumably at the behest of Mayor de Blasio – was ordering 1,000 more cops to patrol the city’s parks and public space to crack down on any ‘social distancing’ violations with tickets, summonses and arrests.

    The same mayor who once dismissed the threat posed by the virus is flexing his muscles after the ultra-orthodox Jewish community in Williamsburg openly defied him last week by gathering for the funeral of a Rabbi, prompting Hizzoner to threaten a crackdown (eliciting an immediate backlash and accusations of anti-semitism).

    On Sunday, ABC 6 shared a video of a New York City cop arresting a man and violently taking him down over an alleged social distancing violation.

    The video, filmed by a bystander, showed the plainclothes officer, who was not wearing a protective face mask, slapping 33-year-old Donni Wright in the face, punching him in the shoulder and dragging him to a sidewalk after leveling him in a crosswalk in Manhattan’s East Village.

    Wright was allegedly filming the officer making an arrest for a social-distancing violation before he turned on the bystander instead and threatened to taze him then attacked him, while another bystander filmed the incident.

    De Blasio called the video “unacceptable” and said the officer involved has been placed on “modified duty” while internal affairs investigates

    NYC is of course the hardest hit area in the entire US, with as many as 20% of the city’s population suspected of having been infected with the virus. We suspect the mayor will announce tomorrow that he plans to “ease up” on ticketing and arrests for these types of violations.


    Tyler Durden

    Sun, 05/03/2020 – 21:05

  • Epstein Had Extensive Ties With Harvard University
    Epstein Had Extensive Ties With Harvard University

    Authored by Zachary Stieber via The Epoch Times,

    Sex offender Jeffrey Epstein had extensive ties with Harvard University, which admitted him as a Visiting Fellow and later gave him his own office, according to a review conducted by Harvard attorneys and an outside law firm.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Epstein was awarded the title of Visiting Fellow, which goes to independent researchers, in 2005 despite the fact he “lacked the academic qualifications Visiting Fellows typically possess and his application proposed a course of study Epstein was unqualified to pursue,” according to the review (pdf).

    Dr. Stephen Kosslyn, the chair of the Psychology Department at the time, recommended Epstein’s admission. Epstein donated $200,000 to support Kosslyn’s work between 1998 and 2002.

    Epstein told the university in his application that he wanted to “study the reasons behind group behavior, such as ‘social prosthetic systems,’ and their relationship to a changing environment,” using a term invented by Kosslyn.

    “That is, other people can act as ‘prosthetics’ insofar as they augment our cognitive abilities and help us to regulate our emotions—and thereby essentially serve as extensions of ourselves. I wish to understand how the brain both allows such relationships to develop and how those relationships in turn take advantage of key properties of the brain,” Epstein wrote.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Jeffrey Epstein appears in court in West Palm Beach, Fla., on July 30, 2008. (Uma Sanghvi/Palm Beach Post via AP)

    Epstein paid tuition and fees to become a Visiting Fellow but “did very little to pursue his course of study,” according to the review. He was readmitted for a second year after saying in an application he wished to “find a derivation of ‘power’ (Why does everybody want it?) in an ecological social system” but withdrew following his arrest in 2006.

    Epstein was accused of molesting dozens of underage girls that year. He ended up pleading guilty to one count of soliciting minors for prostitution in 2008.

    Kosslyn admitted to the attorneys conducting the review that Epstein wasn’t qualified to conduct the research outlined in the application. Epstein’s educational background, lacking a college degree, was highly unusual for a Visiting Fellow.

    Kosslyn in his recommendation for Epstein called the financier “extraordinarily intelligent, broadly read, and very curious.”

    “Jeffrey has been a spectacular success in business, and it is clear why: He’s not just intelligent and well-informed, he’s creative, deep, extraordinarily analytic, and capable of working extremely hard,” he added.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Harvard University in Cambridge, Massachusetts, on April 22, 2020. (Maddie Meyer/Getty Images)

    Had His Own Office

    Epstein’s involvement with Harvard didn’t stop with his criminal conviction.

    The sex offender was given an office with his own telephone line in Harvard’s Program for Evolutionary Dynamics (PED), which he helped establish in 2003 with a $6.5 million donation. He also received a keycard and passcode access to the program’s offices.

    Epstein is believed to have visited Harvard offices dozens of times between 2010 and 2018 after being released from jail.

    “Epstein was routinely accompanied on these visits by young women, described as being in their 20s, who acted as his assistants,” the review states. According to prosecutors, many women who spent time with Epstein were underage.

    Epstein would give Martin Andreas Nowak, a professor of biology and mathematics, the name of professors he wanted to meet with. Either Epstein or Nowak would invite the academics to meet with Epstein at the PED offices.

    The meetings usually took place on weekends.

    “Taken as a whole, the documents suggest that Epstein viewed the PED offices as available for his use whenever he wished to gather academics together to hear scholars talk about subjects Epstein found interesting,” lawyers wrote in the review.

    Nowak, who lawyers said took no steps to conceal Epstein’s activities, was placed on paid administrative leave on May 1 after the review was published. Officials are probing whether Nowak violated university rules.

    The visits came to an end only after a number of PED researchers objected to the situation.

    Not only Epstein, but his “assistants” received cards and keypad codes that let them access PED buildings whenever they wanted. When Harvard tightened security in 2017 by installing a different card reader system, several cards designated for temporary visitors were mailed to an assistant of Epstein.

    Nowak’s chief administrative officer (CAO) informed the professor of the arrangement, calling it “easier” because Epstein “would have go go get photo [sic] taken” if he instead was given different, more specific type of card.

    “Epstein’s permanent possession of a visitor keycard; his knowledge of the passcode to the PED offices; and his possession of a key to an individual Harvard office all gave him unlimited access to PED. It appears that this circumvented rules designed to limit access to Harvard space to individuals with legitimate reasons to be there,” the review stated.

    “In effect, Professor Nowak and his CAO permitted Epstein to use PED’s offices as his own whenever he came to campus. Moreover, they did so without due regard for Harvard’s security rules.”

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    A protest group called “Hot Mess” hold up signs of Jeffrey Epstein in front of the federal courthouse in New York City on July 8, 2019. (Stephanie Keith/Getty Images)

    Gifts, Links

    Harvard accepted four gifts after Epstein’s arrest but no further donations were accepted after his conviction, under a decision by President Drew Faust. Several faculty members, including Nowak, tried to convince Faust to revise the order.

    Epstein bypassed the order by getting others to donate to the university. Those donations included $7.5 million to support the work of Nowak. Leon Black, who donated millions with his wife or through their foundation, told lawyers he was introduced to the professor through Epstein.

    Nowak also allowed links to the websites of Epstein’s foundations on PED’s website at the request of Epstein’s publicist. A full page featuring Epstein was also published on PED’s website. It was removed in 2014 after complaints from a sexual assault survivor’s group.

    Epstein also regularly received communications from Harvard’s development offices, including an invitation to attend the start of the university’s Capital Campaign in 2013.

    The review of Epstein’s ties with Harvard was conducted by Diane Lopez, the university’s general counsel, Ara Gershengorn, a Harvard attorney, and Martin Murphy of Foley Hoag LLP.

    They recommended to Harvard President Lawrence Bacow that Harvard develop clearer procedures for reviewing potentially controversial donations, revise its procedures for appointing Visiting Fellows, and consider whether any further actions should be taken based on Epstein’s unfettered access to PED.

    Bacow said in a letter to the Harvard community that he’s instructed members of his team to begin implementing the recommendations “as soon as possible.”

    “The report issued today describes principled decision-making but also reveals institutional and individual shortcomings that must be addressed—not only for the sake of the University but also in recognition of the courageous individuals who sought to bring Epstein to justice,” he concluded.


    Tyler Durden

    Sun, 05/03/2020 – 20:40

  • China Hid Severity Of Coronavirus To Hoard Supplies, New Intelligence Shows: Live Updates
    China Hid Severity Of Coronavirus To Hoard Supplies, New Intelligence Shows: Live Updates

    Summary:

    • Russia reports 4th straight record new cases
    • Spain sees lowest deaths since March 18
    • Zimbabwe asks IMF for $2 billion rescue loan
    • Moscow Mayor warns 2% of city likely already infected
    • NYPD issue ‘dozens’ of summonses, make several arrests for ‘social distancing’ violations
    • New York case total: 316,415
    • Roche receives emergency auth from FDA for COVID-19 tests
    • MIT study says only 1/3 Chinese KN95 masks work as well as US N95s
    • New Intel leak says US believes China lied about the virus to buy time to grab up PPE
    • New Jersey reports another~200 deaths
    • Northeastern states join together to buy PPE
    • LA County coronavirus cases pass 25k
    • Pompeo doubles-down in a tweet
    • Niger reports polio outbreak as vaccinations halted
    • UK, NY see lowest deaths in weeks
    • France’s controversial ‘StopCovid’ app nearly ready
    • Boris Johnson names son after doctors who saved his life
    • Global COVID-19 confirmed cases passes 3.5 million

    *        *        *

    Update (2000ET): Though the number has no actual bearing on reality, President Trump said Sunday evening that he expects between 75,000 and 100k deaths from COVID-19 in the US, goal posts that have been steadily moved higher, eliciting howls of anger from liberals, even as the rate of doubling slows and states begin reopening.

    *        *        *

    Update (1750ET): Across the five boroughs, police are busy writing tickets, issuing summonses and – in at least a few cases, we’re told – making arrests.

    While the Americans who are able enjoy a beautiful Sunday in the sun, here are a handful of the most important coronavirus-related headlines from the last few hours;

    The number of coronavirus cases in LA County surged past 25,000 Sunday as public health officials confirmed another 791 cases, along with another 21 deaths, the Baldwin Park, CA Patch reports.

    There are now 25,662 cases of COVID-19 and 1,229 deaths related to the disease caused by the virus, according to the Los Angeles County Department of Public Health.

    “The people lost to COVID-19 are mourned by all of us in L.A. County, and to their loved ones, we wish you peace and healing,” Barbara Ferrer, the county’s public health director, said Sunday.

    As has been the case throughout the pandemic, 92% of the people who died from the virus had underlying health conditions, and the virus continued to have a slightly disproportionate impact on communities of color.

    For the 1,121 deaths for which data was available, 38% were Latinx, 29% white, 19% Asian, 13% black and 1% Native Hawaiian or Pacific Islander, according to the Los Angeles County Department of Public Health.

    The confirmed cases include 745 in Long Beach and 417 in Pasadena, which have their own health departments.

    Los Angeles County continues to represent about half of the cases and deaths across the state. Officials in Sacramento reported Saturday that the state had 53,616 cases and 2,215 deaths.

    New York on Sunday reported another 3,438 new cases of coronavirus, slightly higher than the recent average, as well as the 280 new deaths we mentioned earlier (the lowest single-day total in weeks). That brought New York’s total to 316,415 cases and 19,189 deaths.

    And as more states prepare to reopen during the coming week, Mississippi Gov. Tate Reeves on Sunday defended the steps his state has taken to reopen its economy despite not meeting the White House guidelines recommendation of 2 weeks of declining cases. Mississippi reported its largest single-day total of new cases on Friday, with 397. Gov Tate argued this was an “anomaly” and that his state simply hasn’t seen enough cases to warrant continuing with the lockdown.

    “You have to understand that Mississippi is different than New York and New Jersey,” Reeves said on “Fox News Sunday.” “What we have seen is for the last 35-40 days, we’ve been between 200 and 300 cases without a spike. Our hospital system is not stressed, we have less than 100 people in our state on ventilators.”

    Watch a clip from the show below:

    The governors of NJ, Conn., NY and several other northeastern states (remember that whole alliance thing?) announced on Sunday that they were forming a consortium to buy PPE together.

    New Jersey Gov Phil Murphy congratulated New Jerseyans for “behaving” this weekend after he opened the parks for what was expected to be a beautiful day. However, Murphy said if he gets reports of “bad behavior” or if cases spike over the next 2 weeks, he “won’t hesitate” to close the parks again.

    Across the state, hospitalizations continued to decrease while the rate of doubling of new cases continued to slow.

    On Sunday, health officials in Beijing reported just 2 new cases for the entire country over the last 24 hours – one of which was imported. That was great news for China, but you know what wasn’t so great? The results of an MIT study, published Sunday, finding only one-third of Chinese KN95 masks work as effectively as N95 masks.

    All this comes following another US intel leak to the AP claiming something many already widely suspected: Chinese leaders lied about the outbreak during the early days to buy time to grab up all the PPE and other critical supplies to ensure the safety of the Chinese people, while leaving the rest of the world to fend for itself.

    This hoarding behavior was behind the global shortages of PPE that left hundreds of thousands of medical professionals working with garbage bags instead of gowns and ineffective clothe masks. Thousands contracted the virus and hundreds of health-care workers died unnecessarily all around the world because China chose to hoard supplies.

    Which also means Beijing could have said a lot more than they did about how widespread the virus might already be, which is why we’re only just now finding out that there was community spread in the US as early as January.

    China didn’t just stock up on PPE being produced in the country; officials ordered PPE being manufactured all across Asia and cleaned them out.

    U.S. officials believe China covered up the extent of the coronavirus outbreak — and how contagious the disease is — to stock up on medical supplies needed to respond to it, intelligence documents show.

    Chinese leaders “intentionally concealed the severity” of the pandemic from the world in early January, according to a four-page Department of Homeland Security intelligence report dated May 1 and obtained by The Associated Press. The revelation comes as the Trump administration has intensified its criticism of China, with Secretary of State Mike Pompeo saying Sunday that that country was responsible for the spread of disease and must be held accountable.

    The sharper rhetoric coincides with administration critics saying the government’s response to the virus was slow and inadequate. President Donald Trump’s political opponents have accused him of lashing out at China, a geopolitical foe but critical U.S. trade partner, in an attempt to deflect criticism at home.

    Not classified but marked “for official use only,” the DHS analysis states that, while downplaying the severity of the coronavirus, China increased imports and decreased exports of medical supplies. It attempted to cover up doing so by “denying there were export restrictions and obfuscating and delaying provision of its trade data,” the analysis states.

    The report also says China held off informing the World Health Organization that the coronavirus “was a contagion” for much of January so it could order medical supplies from abroad — and that its imports of face masks and surgical gowns and gloves increased sharply.

    All of this comes as Beijing once again trades rhetorical barbs with Secretary of State Pompeo, who told ABC on Sunday that US intel agencies have “enormous evidence” that SARS-CoV-2 likely leaked from a biolab in Wuhan.

    The secretary doubled down in a tweet sent 3 hours ago from his official account.

    Watch the latest video at foxnews.com

    More Republicans have embraced the “China hawk” position since the advent of the outbreak…for obvious reasons. Speaking Sunday on Fox News Channel’s “Sunday Morning Futures” with Maria Bartiromo Ted Cruz said he believes China “is the most significant geopolitical threat to the United States for the next century.”

    Watch the latest video at foxnews.com

    China’s efforts to fabricate its economic resurgence narrative has come under a lot of pressure this weekend. In Italy, the Italian press has been pushing back against reports in Chinese press claiming Italians have been chanting “Grazie Cina” over Beijing’s “donations” of PPE and other assistance in fighting the virus.

    Finally, Bloomberg reports that the EU Commission will not unveil its proposal for a recovery fund this week as expected…extending the interminable delay for a recovery package that Christine Lagarde warns was needed yesterday.

    Just imagine what will happen to the euro area when there are no tourists across the periphery nations this summer and fall?

    *        *        *

    Update (1345ET): The UK Department of Health and Social Care just confirmed the death-toll figures we reported earlier, as well as the latest batch of new cases.

    Update (1312ET): As we reported yesterday, the NYPD dispatched some 1,000 additional officers to patrol city parks on Saturday and issue tickets to anyone found barbecuing, drinking and violating social distancing rules prohibiting “crowds”.

    And while the chief of police said he hoped no summonses would be issued, given the vast drop in city coffers, it appears the cops went on a ticketing frenzy, issuing dozens of summonses for lax social-distancing in city parks on Saturday, the nicest day of the year so far, as shell-shocked New Yorkers emerged from their shells.

    “In parks specifically yesterday, we issued 43 summonses,” Shea said Sunday in a joint press briefing with Mayor Bill de Blasio.

    An additional eight summonses were issued outside of parks for a total of 51, said Shea, who noted that while “not every single one” of the write-ups was for failing to maintain a social distance “the majority were.”

    In addition to the summonses, the NY Post reported that three arrests were made citywide.

    Meanwhile, although JHU hasn’t gotten there yet, at least one tally of international confirmed cases is saying we’ve passed the 3.5 million mark.

    *        *        *

    Update (1200ET): The UK reported 315 new coronavirus deaths on Sunday, its smallest daily increase in more than a month, bringing its countrywide total to 28,446.

    In NYC, Mayor de Blasio said during his Sunday briefing that the “vast majority” of New Yorkers are complying with social distancing rules (obeying social-distancing rules, despite flocks of people who went outside this weekend to enjoy the early spring weather. The city issued a total of 43 summonses in parks and eight outside.

    The city is a step closer to performing its own coronavirus tests, the mayor said. He said that by Friday 30,000 swabs for testing would be ready, ramping up to 50,000 full tests later this month.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    In Albany, Gov Cuomo is starting his Sunday press briefing by reporting 280 new deaths over the last 24 hours, the lowest number since March 30. The hospitalization rate has also fallen again.

    The governor announced plans to sign a law requiring all hospitals in the state to have 90 days worth of PPE on hand at all times.

    Italy also saw some good numbers today, reporting its lowest number of deaths since early March.

    Continuing the trend of both deaths and new cases declining, along with net hospitalizations and…

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    …yet another day where the number of recovered patients outnumbered the newly diagnosed.

    Singapore reported a good number.

    And Portugal also reported its best numbers in 6 weeks as it prepares to reopen on Monday.

    As more doctors around the world warn about the dangers of halting vaccination campaigns – particularly in impoverished parts of the developing world – to focus on the coronavirus, Niger has reported its first outbreak of polio this year as vaccinations were rolled back.

    Letting its vaccination programs lapse is just the latest blow to the WHO’s credibility.

    Before we go: According to JHU, we;re only about 50k confirmed cases away from the 3.5 million mark. The latest number was 3,452,285.

    *        *        *

    Every day, it seems, Russia sets a new record for the largest number of new COVID-19 cases confirmed in a day. As we reported yesterday, Health officials in Moscow announced more than 9k new cases. On Sunday, they announced more than 10k new cases, another record sum. In the span of just two weeks, Russia has gone from having a relatively inconsequential number of positive cases to housing one of the largest outbreaks in the world. Of course, the infections didn’t just happen overnight. It’s merely the latest evidence that by the time Russia closed its Far Eastern border back in January the seeds of domestic transmission may have already been planted.

    That would jive with evidence that the first COVID-19 death in the US might have occurred as early as Feb. 6, meaning parts of New York, California and Washington were probably already suffering from local human-to-human transmission.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Russia added 10,633 cases of Covid-19, the highest daily number for the nation so far, increasing for a fifth day in a row. The total number of cases has risen to 134,687, according to the government’s virus response center. Around a half of the new cases are asymptomatic and Moscow accounts for nearly 56% of new infections. Russia’s total Covid-19 fatalities rose to 1,280.

    As the Guardian reported, Moscow’s mayor warned on Saturday that up to 2% of Moscow’s population may be infected, as hospitals in the Russian capital were overwhelmed and another top government tested positive. If Mayor Sergei Sobyanin’s projection is correct, that would mean more than 240,000 Muscovites have already been infected, 4x the official number.

     

    Russia confirmed 10,633 new coronavirus infections Sunday, bringing its countrywide total to 134,687and marking a new one-day record increase. Russia is now the seventh most-affected country in terms of infections, having surpassed China, Turkey and Iran last week. Roughly 1,280 deaths have been confirmed countrywide. More than half of the confirmed cases are in Moscow or the surrounding area. Sunday’s increase was Russia’s fourth record-day jump in a row.

    After announcing that Russian PM Mikhail Mishustin, on Friday authorities announced the housing minister was the latest top official to test positive. Vladimir Putin has not been pictured in public for nearly a month and is working from his residence outside Moscow.

    Hospitals in the capital are already at capacity, with television footage showing ambulances forced to wait for hours to deliver the infected.

    As Moscow’s hospital system groans, anger is rising across Russia. Recently, the government shuttered two dozen hospitals for quarantines, with many doctors falling sick. Russian independent media and non-governmental organizations have reported anonymous pleas from outraged medical workers who said they had been ordered to the frontlines without adequate protection.

    Across the world, the number of ‘confirmed’ coronavirus cases has climbed to 3.5 million, with hundreds of thousands – potentially even millions – of cases likely uncounted. The number of deaths, meanwhile, is slowly approaching 250,000 (it stood at 244,239 as of Sunday morning). During it annual meeting, the IMF said it had set aside $1 trillion of lending capacity to help emerging-market member states particularly hard hit by the pandemic and some of the ramifications for global financial conditions (negative prices on oil futures, the rapidly strengthening greenback, etc.). 189 countries are members of the IMF, and so far, mostly South American states like Ecuador have asked for large bailouts.

    But on Sunday, the FT reported that Zimbabwe had asked for a loan to help clear billions of dollars in debt and avoid an economic collapse. The FT cited a letter from Finance Minister Mthuli Ncube to the IMF.

    Zimbabwe is about $2 billion behind on payments to lenders, including the World Bank and African Development Bank, and has been excluded from emergency loans from international institutions, the newspaper said.

    Following reports that it planned to roll back some lockdown measures, Singapore said Sunday that companies with employees who can work from home will probably be asked to continue doing so even after the country’s partial lockdown ends on June 1, while sectors like manufacturing should prepare for a gradual reopening in the coming weeks, Singapore’s Trade and Industry Minister said.

    After successfully blocking the president’s businesses from receiving any government assistance, political opponents of President Trump have now succeeded in preventing Trump’s friends and associates – no matter how tenuous the connection – from benefiting from the program. For example, Texas hotelier Monty Bennett, whose companies are among the biggest known recipients of rescue loans for small businesses hurt by the pandemic, said he will return the money. Bennett is a major Trump donor.

    On the pharmaceutical front, as the debate over remdesivir’s effectiveness rages, Roche said it received authorization from the FDA for its Elecsys coronavirus antibody test. The test, designed to determine if a patient has developed antibodies against the virus, has a specificity greater than 99.8%.

    There were 164 new fatalities, bringing total deaths to 25,264, according to Health Ministry data. That compared with 276 daily fatalities reported Saturday. Total infections rose by 838 to 217,466, down from the previous increase of 1,147. The figures include adjustment on how previous new cases were counted in certain regions, the ministry said.

    During a Sunday morning interview with CNN’s Jake Tapper – building on Fed Chairman Jay Powell’s exhortation for the federal government to push through more stimulus – on its “State of the Union” program, Larry Kudlow was pressed to explain why Congress doesn’t just plow ahead with more stimulus.

    “Waiting any further – does it make any sense?…There’s a real need, we need more money in that program,” Tapper said. The confrontational interview followed a CNN report claiming the second round of the ‘PPP’ had delivered 2.2 million small business loans worth an aggregate $175 billion.

    Circling back to Europe, the controversial app – known as StopCovid – that France is developing to trace those who could be infected, known as StopCovid, could be ready by the end of May, the government spokeswoman Sibeth Ndiaye told France Inter Sunday. That would be after France starts lifting its lockdown, from May 11, though the government also announced plans to try and extend its ‘state of emergency’ order until July.

    Aside from a few one-off spikes, France has seen deaths and new cases mostly flatten in recent weeks. The country’s total case number stands at 130,979 while its death toll is less than 2k at 1,953.

    Having returned to work after his struggle with the virus, UK PM Boris Johnson sent a message of encouragement to his supporters… ‘We will beat this together’.

    He also announced that he would be naming his newborn son after the two doctors who saved his life during his struggle with the coronavirus.

    Johnson’s fiancee Carrie Symonds announced their child’s name, Wilfred Lawrie Nicholas Johnson, in an Instagram post on Saturday. The baby was born last Wednesday.

    Finally, Spain reported 164 new fatalities over the last 24 hours, compared with 276 for the prior day, bringing the country’s death toll to 25,264, according to Health Ministry data. That marked the country’s lowest single-day death toll since March 18. Spain counted 838 new cases, bringing its total to 217,466. According to Bloomberg, the figures reflect adjustments made to older cases.


    Tyler Durden

    Sun, 05/03/2020 – 20:22

  • Data Shows World Rejecting Governments' Shelter-In-Place Tyranny
    Data Shows World Rejecting Governments’ Shelter-In-Place Tyranny

    People across the Western world have already started to revolt against government-enforced lockdowns that have now continued for at least the seventh week in some places. Apple’s Mobility Trends and Foursquare payments data illustrates how shelter-in-place is becoming a distant memory for some as they try to restore their lives to what it was in pre-corona times. 

    The latest data from Apple’s Mobility Trends shows iPhone users in the US, Germany, UK, and Italy began to ignore stay-at-home orders around mid-April. While activity is still well below average trends from January 13, the recent rebound suggests more people are violating the orders 

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Apple’s Mobility data shows driving and walking in the US has surged since mid-April but still below average. Public transportation use remains troughed and has yet to rebound. 

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    While mobility tracking data shows an uptick, payments company Foursquare is also showing increased visitations at stores. 

    “People are feeling the itch to get back to the real world. As officials begin the process of relaxing some business restrictions, we’re starting to see upticks in foot traffic to various places. This is true across regions, regardless of state-specific policies,” Foursquare said in a blog post. 

    In the second half of April, Foursquare notes that foot traffic at various types of stores started to move higher. Here’s what they found: 

    • Fast food and gas station visits have returned to pre-COVID-19 levels in the Midwest, and in rural areas across the nation. Though still below ‘normal’, visits in suburban and urban areas have shown substantial growth (>15%) since their end of March lows. Even casual dining restaurants are starting to show recent upticks, likely driven by new delivery and curbside options.

    • Men — and generally people between the ages of 35-64 — have shown more moderate declines across different types of places, and are also showing greater propensity to return

    • Visits to trails and home improvement stores — both allowable destinations in most states — are up substantially versus our February benchmark (31% and 56% respectively). While some portion of this is certainly seasonality, the growth in the last two weeks has been particularly notable; home improvement store visits, for instance, are up nearly ~20% in the last two weeks versus just ~6% in the period prior.

    • The midwest and rural areas across the country have shown more moderate declines across different types of places, and are also showing a stronger inclination to get back to normal.

    Foursquare shows foot traffic at fast-food chains across all major US regions have bounced back to around baseline. 

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Gas station visits have also reverted in all regions to near baseline, slightly higher in the Midwest. 

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Note the mid-March surge in traffic at grocery stores was the panic hoarding period

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    People in all regions are returning to big box stores, but as we all know, they’re wearing masks and gloves

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Slow return to convenience stores in all regions. 

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    A surge in traffic to warehouse stores has been seen in the second half of April.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    And while in lockdown, Americans in all regions rushed to hardware stores in late April to buy things for their homes – may be spring remodeling? 

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Liquor stores in all areas remained somewhat above trend during the lockdowns. 

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    One place people aren’t going to is restaurants. 

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Dozens of states are attempting to reopen. Americans are panic searching “when can I leave my house.” 

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Apple and Foursquare data suggests many Americans are fed up with stay-at-home orders as they now venture out into a post-corona world. Such activity could be enough to spark a second coronavirus wave, and with a record amount of deaths seen on Friday, the virus crisis could be worsening.


    Tyler Durden

    Sun, 05/03/2020 – 20:15

  • The Fed's Balance Sheet Will Expand By 38% Of GDP, More Than Double QE1, 2 And 3 Combined
    The Fed’s Balance Sheet Will Expand By 38% Of GDP, More Than Double QE1, 2 And 3 Combined

    Authored by Chetan Ahya, chief Morgan Stanley economist and global head of economics

    The 1Q GDP data releases for the US and euro area this week provide official confirmation of what we have known for some time – the recession has started. However, we remain of the view that this downturn will be sharper but shorter than the GFC.

    To begin with, the trigger for this recession is an exogenous shock in the form of a public health crisis, rather than the classic, endogenous adjustment triggered by rising imbalances. This also did not start out as a financial crisis, and the banking system is in better shape today than prior to the GFC. Moreover, this recession has prompted the most coordinated and aggressive monetary and fiscal easing that we have witnessed in modern times. For the G4 and China combined, fiscal deficits as a percentage of GDP will be 1.5 times GFC levels. Similarly, G4 central banks are aggressively expanding their balance sheets. The Fed’s balance sheet will expand by 38 percentage points of GDP, more than the 20 percentage points during QE1, 2 and 3 combined.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Hence, while global growth will trough at -7.5%Y in 2Q20 on our estimates (far below the -2.4%Y in 1Q09), global and DM output will reach pre-recession levels in four and eight quarters, respectively, as compared with six and fourteen quarters during the GFC.

    A number of the high-frequency indicators we track suggest that the global economy is in the process of bottoming out. Consumers’ future expectations have improved, mobility trends have moved up from their troughs and consumer spending is contracting more slowly than in the early weeks of the outbreak. In the US, our IT services & payments analyst James Faucette highlights that credit card transactions data indicate that both transactions and sales have picked up in the past two weeks. Our read is that China’s economy bottomed in February, and we think the euro area has likely troughed in April with the US following suit from late April. Other regions such as CEEMEA and LatAm will bottom out later.

    As economies reopen, allowing more workers to return to work, mobility trends and production levels will likely improve further, as should end demand with a lag. A phased reopening in the US and Europe is in the works for the coming weeks. In the US, some states have begun to reopen, and our US economics and biotechnology teams estimate that, by mid-May, 54% of the economy will be in a meaningful reopening phase. This estimate assumes that states will be able to reopen 28 days (Phase 2) after the peak in new confirmed coronavirus cases. European economies will also progressively reopen from early May onwards.

    As we move towards this gradual reopening in parts of the world outside China, we have been closely observing developments in China to see how various sectors of the economy are normalising and how this experience may inform our outlook for the rest of the world. To be sure, our views are shaped by the path but not the duration and magnitude of recovery, considering the differences in the severity of the outbreak as well as the underlying composition of economic activity between the US, Europe and China.

    In China, the manufacturing, infrastructure and construction sectors recovered relatively quickly. The manufacturing PMI is back in expansionary territory, while steel and cement demand and property sales are growing again in year-over-year terms, just ten weeks after the peak in new cases. Supply-side disruptions have eased quickly, and production levels have experienced a V-shaped recovery, which suggests that the manufacturing sectors in the US and Europe should be on a similar path post-reopening.

    However, as the US and Europe are more consumption-based economies, it is the experience of the Chinese consumer that is drawing the most investor attention. Consumption in China is also showing signs of progress, but the pace of recovery has varied across different segments, and the phased relaxation of social distancing measures has dampened the overall pace to some extent.

    As you might expect, sales in China’s online retail channels (which account for 30% of total sales) are back in positive territory YoY, while traffic to shopping malls sits at 70% of normal levels (even though malls are now fully open). Smartphone sales have seen a V-shaped recovery and demand for tech products has improved on a broad front according to our Asia technology analyst Shawn Kim, but spending on other consumer discretionary products is still lagging somewhat. Consumer goods (staples, home appliances and apparel) companies expect normalisation by the end of June (i.e., moving back towards normal levels of YoY growth in 2H20). Restaurants have 50-80% of their customer base back, but night life venues are still closed in Tier 1 cities and cinemas remain dark until early June. Our China consumer analyst Lillian Lou expects these channels to fully reopen by the end of June/beginning of July, and traffic to normalise in 3Q20. For the US, our branded apparel & retail analyst Kimberly Greenberger expects that some US retail discretionary spending stores will open in May but a full reopening is likely only in June. She expects a 78-85% decline for the discretionary retail segment in April, but this will materially improve to a 30-45%Y decline for the May-July period and further to a 10-15%Y decline in August-October.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    The reopening of economies has prompted concerns about a second wave of infections and potential double dip in the economy. We readily admit that many unknowns concerning the virus remain, but we do expect additional waves of infections to occur. However, we take comfort that the phased reopening, the scaling up of public health authorities’ ability to test and trace on a meaningful level, the development of medical solutions to treat and prevent the disease and the awareness of the population at large mean we have a much better chance to reduce the size and scope of future outbreaks.


    Tyler Durden

    Sun, 05/03/2020 – 19:50

  • There Is Now A Record 375 Million Barrels Of Oil Stored On Tankers
    There Is Now A Record 375 Million Barrels Of Oil Stored On Tankers

    Last weekend we showed that as oil storage on land was rapidly filling up, a familiar sight was seen off the coast of Asia’s oil hub in Singapore: a record surge in tankers on anchor used as seaborne storage, and taking advantage of the supercontango just waiting for oil prices to rebound so they can deliver their (formerly) precious cargo.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    So as more and more storage moves offshore, here is an update from Bank of America on the current status of the oil market as the “oil glut moves from tanks to tankers.”

    In the last five weeks, onshore inventories held in floating top tanks climbed 180mn bbl, suggesting that builds have averaged roughly 4.3mn b/d since mid-March. These inventory increases reduce BofA’s estimates for available onshore crude storage capacity from roughly 910mn bbl to 730 mn bbl (Chart 2), although the bank still believes that this capacity is unlikely to be fully utilized due to logistical constraints and other issues.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    How did we get here? As has been extensively reported here and elsewhere, WTI timespreads signalled a massive build in Cushing inventories and stocks would likely reach their operational limits within a few weeks (Chart 3). More recently, the expiration of the May WTI contract demonstrated the lack of available capacity at the hub. Cushing inventory builds are set to slow dramatically as much of the remaining capacity may be needed as an operational backstop for pipeline issues and blending needs (Chart 4). Over the coming weeks and months, US inventory trends could even reverse as producers in Canada and the Bakken shut-in output and refiners increase runs on the back of the re-opening of the economy.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    As Bank of America adds, land based crude oil inventories first surged in China, where the coronavirus outbreak originated (Chart 5). Since then, China’s inventories have stagnated while stocks in the US and elsewhere ticked higher. There is room for incremental builds in China going forward, especially if the government uses more commercial tank space for strategic petroleum reserves (Chart 6). Elsewhere, inventories in Europe and the Middle East remain relatively lower. In Europe, this may be due to the mothballing of some tank storage at refiners and terminals. So, actual storage utilization rates may be higher than the data suggests. In the Middle East, inventories have climbed in GCC countries but may also remain lower on average as these countries prefer to sell oil as exports before storing domestically. In the US, producers have leased 23mn bbl of the roughly 70mn bbl of available SPR capacity and added 1.1mn bbl to SPR storage last week.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Of course, in addition to land based storage, the market also uses tankers for crude oil storage as a spillover outlet. Crude oil on the water has risen by roughly 150mn bbl since the start of the year, to more than 1.2bn bbl (Chart 7). This is due to a combination of higher crude in transit stemming from OPEC’s oil price war and from increases in crude oil floating storage. Since mid-March, crude oil floating storage has grown by an estimated 91mn bbl, or roughly 2.2mn b/d (Chart 8). Asia and Europe saw the largest increases in floating storage, climbing 36mn bbl and 20mn bbl respectively over the same period.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    According to data from Clarksons, there are more than 350 vessels currently being used for floating oil (crude and product) storage globally (Chart 9). Of this total, roughly 100 are very large crude carriers (VLCC) and ultra-large crude carriers (ULCC). Total oil held in floating storage has risen to 375mn bbl, up 220mn bbl from mid-March and 230mn bbl from the start of the year (Chart 10). A majority of this storage has occurred on VLCCs and ULCCs, followed by Suezmax and Aframax vessels.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    The first vessels booked for floating storage were primarily VLCCs and ULCCs, but demand for Suezmax and Aframax vessels has also increased dramatically since April (Chart 11). As traders utilize more of the smaller vessels, the average amount of floating storage per vessel has decreased, implying an increase in the average cost for floating storage. Since the beginning of the year, the average level of storage per vessel have collapsed from more than 1.5mn bbl to just 1mn bbl. (Chart 12). This rise in tanker rates for each ship type, combined with crude increasingly being stored on smaller vessels at the margin, is a double positive whammy on the marginal cost of crude storage and thus on the contango in the crude curves.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    The abrupt demand contraction has forced crude oil forward curves into steep contango (Chart 13), with Brent 1-13 spreads widening to -$16/bbl at times to facilitate floating storage. As demand for freight picked up, dirty tanker rates spiked. The shape of the forward curve for the TD3 dirty tanker route (Middle East to Japan) was very flat just eight weeks ago (Chart 14), but the increase in demand from Saudi Arabia and from floating storage pushed front month rates up nearly 400%. More recently, rates have subsided somewhat but still remain exceptionally high compared to historical levels.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Freight rates have been exceptionally volatile, with VLCC 12 month time charters spiking to $80,000/day in early April and falling to around $65,000/day recently (Chart 15). The increase in smaller vessels has been less dramatic, with Suezmax and Aframax vessels peaking at $45,000/day and $34,000/day respectively. The very steep contango in the front of the Brent curve (e.g. 1-3m) has allowed for floating storage to be economical. Yet the 12 month contango in Brent was recently lower than the going rate for 12 month time charters for Suezmax and Aframax vessels. Additional pressure on Brent timespreads will be needed in order to encourage more floating storage using these types of vessels (Chart 16).

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Refining margins have been exceptionally volatile since lockdowns began on a global scale (Chart 17). As refiners cut runs or shut down completely, margins experienced short term rebounds, but margins continue to trend towards zero on a spot basis as refined product inventories surge. In the US, product inventories have risen counter-seasonally and are now nearly 70mn bbl above year ago levels and 26mn bbl above previous five-year highs from 2016. It is no surprise that refined product markets have also developed their own supercontango (Chart 18), as prompt prices plummeted. Refiners have attempted to take advantage of the significant price improvement for forward product prices by storing products on land on and the water.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Estimates for floating storage vary depending on methodology. Some trackers classify floating storage as vessels that have remained idle for 10 days and others assume 14 days. The types of vessels tracked may also vary, leading to higher or lower floating storage levels. Nonetheless, all estimates point to rising volume on the water (Chart 19). Refined product floating storage is not well tracked, but Clarksons does track total tankers used for floating storage. Combining Clarksons data with other crude oil only floating storage data from Vortexa implies that refined product builds have been exceptional (Chart 20). Even if total levels of implied refined product floating storage are off, there is little doubt that product storage is on the rise.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    The oil surplus was initially visible in dirty tanker freight rates, but clean tanker rates are now beginning to surge as refiners and traders seek to float unsold product volumes (Chart 21). With refined product prices like Singapore gasoline falling to $0.50/gal, shipping has become a disproportionately large component of the all-in cost of delivered fuel, making fuel movements exceptionally expensive. The economics for floating product storage varies dramatically depending on the contango of each product market and on the density of individual products. The recent surge in clean product tanker rates has challenged floating storage economics (Chart 22), but volatility in product forward curves should continue to offer opportunities for traders to float cargoes.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Another round of run cuts could bring renewed crude weakness. The global oil rout likely peaked in April as oil demand contracted by nearly 25mn b/d YoY. Now, countries are emerging from lockdown, boosting oil demand just when OPEC+ cuts are kicking in and producers elsewhere are cutting output. Even so, the market should remain in surplus for the remainder of 2Q20, resulting in continued, albeit slower crude oil and product builds. The oil market is forward looking and market balances look much better in 2H20 which should be supporting of prices. That said, with so much product moving into floating storage, we see risk of additional pressure on refining margins, even as global refinery outages hit record levels (Chart 23). Any further reduction in refinery demand for crude could ultimately result in renewed weakness for crude oil prices (Chart 24) and would likely warrant steeper contango.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>


    Tyler Durden

    Sun, 05/03/2020 – 19:25

  • Stocks, Yuan, Oil Are All Tumbling As Asia Opens
    Stocks, Yuan, Oil Are All Tumbling As Asia Opens

    No Buffett buying spree, and no Federal bailout #4 (or is it 6?)… and the result – in admittedly thin liquidity – is US equity futures, crude oil futures, and offshore yuan are all dumping as Asian markets open…

    Dow futures are down over 350 points…

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    WTI Crude is down over 5%…

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    And offshore yuan is ugly…

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Gold is also under pressure and the dollar rallies, with futures testing $1700…

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    But, Bonds are modestly bid (futures open, cash closed)…

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Somebody wake up Kudlow… stat!


    Tyler Durden

    Sun, 05/03/2020 – 19:01

  • "Passive Aggressive Flows": The Oil Whale
    “Passive Aggressive Flows”: The Oil Whale

    Authored by Ryan Fitzmaurice of Rabobank

    Passive aggressive flows

    Summary

    • The recent and erratic moves in oil prices have highlighted the growing influence and significant impact passive funds can have on commodity and financial markets
    • The rise of commodity ETFs over the past decade has led to a surge in retail participation in what was once difficult to access commodity futures markets
    • The USO fund has attracted a great deal of regulatory scrutiny in the wake of the negative oil price settlement given its whale-like status in nearby Nymex WTI futures contracts
    • USO, the exchange traded fund was forced to restructure its holdings in an effort to reduce systemic risk to markets

    The rise of commodity ETFs

    This year is off to an unbelievable start on so many fronts and across all asset classes. While most of our time and effort is spent tracking and modelling the directionally dynamic money flows of CTA and managed futures strategies – the recent and erratic moves in oil prices – has shifted our attention back to the ever growing influence and significant impact passive funds are having on markets. This phenomenon has been long in the making and the last decade has witnessed the rise of more and more financial commodity products in the market place. In fact, the rise of commodity exchange traded funds (ETFs) and even exchange traded notes (ETNs) has led to a surge in retail participation in what was once difficult to access commodity futures markets. For clarity, these commodity products trade on various stock exchanges throughout the day and provide wide ranging access to underlying futures contracts but without the need for a futures trading account. Many of these passive funds simply go out and buy the equivalent notional amount of futures contracts per dollar that is invested and then roll those contracts on a predetermined schedule to avoid taking physical delivery. The futures contract roll is transacted in a very transparent manner but without any work on the investors’ part which is one of the huge benefits ETFs provide to institutional investors. On the flip side, this dynamic can also result in retail investors piling into a product they don’t fully understand the mechanics of. This issue is playing out in real time as a surge of investment dollars have poured into passive oil ETFs but without fully understanding key dynamics. This has led to significant losses and even unprecedented regulatory intervention in the wake of last month’s negative WTI oil settlement.

    USO: Fund Details

    The publicly traded USO fund has attracted a great deal of regulatory scrutiny in the wake of last month’s negative oil price settlement given its whale-like status in nearby Nymex WTI futures contracts. For readers unfamiliar with the fund, the USO oil ETF is traded on the New York Stock Exchange and available to pretty much anyone with a standard stock trading account. The exchange traded fund is a packaged up version of an underlying futures based index with key details listed here:

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    The oil whale

    The speculative retail interest in USO, the supposedly passive oil fund, has shot up dramatically in recent weeks and months as crude prices have cratered to all-time lows and even unheard of negative spot prices. In fact, the fund currently has net assets north of 3.5 billion USD after starting the year with 1.2 billion USD. The exchange traded fund caught the ire of US regulators last week though due to its out-sized share of open interest in the Jun-20 WTI contract which was fast approaching 30% of open positions. This raised a lot of eyebrows given that the May-20 WTI contract had just settled in negative territory. For clarity, USO was not in the May-20 Nymex WTI contract when it settled in negative territory last week as it has already rolled to the Jun-20 contract but nonetheless the risk of negative prices occurring again in the Jun-20 contract was and is very real and apparent. This scenario posed a real threat to the market as potential losses on the ETF holdings could dwarf the net assets of the fund if prices were to fall deeply into negative territory again while USO was invested. Who would be on the hook in this case? Well, the regulators and exchanges did not want to wait to find out the hard way and instead took decisive action to greatly reduce ETF and investor products holdings of nearby crude oil contracts.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Too big to fail

    While we all know there are plenty of fundamental drivers pressuring crude prices at the moment, it’s really been money flows that have been driving the price action in recent days. In fact, we learned that last Tuesday’s major collapse in the Jun-20 WTI contract was largely a result of the USO fund liquidating a large portion of its holdings in the Jun-20 contract and shifting further out the curve into the Jul-20 and Aug-20 contracts to avoid the risk of prices going negative again as expiration approaches. The publicly traded fund reported that is had sold roughly 90k contracts of Jun-20 Nymex WTI on Tuesday as a result of orders from the exchange and regulatory bodies to roll contracts away from spot. This forced liquidation had serious market implications and the overwhelming selling pressure was enough to send the Jun-20 WTI contract nearly $10/bbl lower, losing over half of its value in a single trading day. The move took the ETF share of open interest for the Jun-20 Nymex WTI from roughly 25% to just over 10%, a much more manageable level but the story doesn’t end there. The fund was forced to sell even more in subsequent days until its entire Jun-20 position was liquidated. The selling pressure clearly pushed the Jun-20 contract lower and we have even seen the Jun-20 rally in recent days as the forced liquidation ended. The same footprint can be seen when looking at the calendar spread price action. Ironically, the USO fund was only able to buy roughly half the equivalent exposure in Jul-20, Aug-20, and beyond given how steep the curve is at the moment and the fact that the fund invests on a dollar basis. While the situation is still fluid, the near-term risk to the system appears to have been sufficiently reduced as USO and others have taken action to reduce position sizes and stay out of nearby expiring futures contracts, at least for the foreseeable future. On top of that, USO can no longer issue new shares until otherwise notified which should prevent it from growing too big again.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Looking Forward

    The recent oil price dynamics have certainly challenged conventional wisdom leading into this year which assumed oil prices had a zero floor bound. The move into negative commodity prices has also highlighted the systemic risk that ETFs and passive funds can pose to overall markets during periods of market stress. In this case, the risk of a worst case scenario occurring has been greatly reduced but not totally eliminated. Furthermore, the disorderly May-20 pre-expiry liquidation resulted in massive retail losses which has shined a light on the dangers of financial engineering derivative products for retail clients. It has been reported that retail clients at a Chinese bank lost over 1 billion USD in a product linked to WTI crude oil. There are also reports of significant losses for retail clients of a well-known US trading platform. Perhaps more than anything though, this recent liquidation driven price action in oil markets has highlighted the importance of understanding money flows and in this case what was supposed to be “passive” flows turning into “active” flows, at least temporarily.


    Tyler Durden

    Sun, 05/03/2020 – 19:00

  • Watch: Park Ranger Thrown Into Lake In Texas Over 'Social Distancing' Enforcement
    Watch: Park Ranger Thrown Into Lake In Texas Over ‘Social Distancing’ Enforcement

    There’s been an increasing number of incidents between law enforcement and antsy Americans eager to get back outdoors after being sick of ‘stay at home’ and state-wide lockdown measures. But often individuals’ desire for a rapid return to normal is butting up against continuing social distance requirements still in place in most states, even those already opening up their economies. 

    A viral video showed one such recent tense encounter in Texas, when a park ranger attempted to break-up a large group of young partiers at a large city park and nature area. It happened at the Commons Ford Metropolitan Park in Austin, Texas. A group on Lake Austin was reportedly unlawfully drinking and smoking on the grounds when a ranger approached and ordered them to “disperse” also due to people apparently not standing six feet apart.

    That’s when things got physical, resulting in the officer being pushed or thrown into the water, according to widely circulating footage:

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    Though the laughing group of what appeared to be college students took it as a prank, police later apprehended and arrested a 25-year old man for assault on the ranger. The man initially tried to run away as the ranger struggled to get out of the water.

    It illustrates a rising trend of frustrated citizens coming up against local law enforcement eager to see safe distancing between patrons. 

    The Austin-American Statesman described the scene

    “Keep that 6 feet of distance with each other,” the ranger says.

    Some in the crowd are heard saying “will do” and “I got you, man” before the ranger is pushed into the water.

    Hicks could have “caused the ranger to strike his head on the dock as he was falling,” the affidavit says.

    Other onlookers came to the ranger’s aid and even apologized for the young man’s behavior.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    The culprit was later charged with a felony for assault on a law enforcement officer.

    Likely there will be many more such encounters in various contexts across states in the coming days, as more and more Americans begin taking matters into their own hands and defying state and local distancing orders. 

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    Though we might also note that fiercely independent Texans typically lead the way when it comes to such drastic actions signaling anger and defiance. 

    Local reports said the park actually temporarily closed again after the incident, due to crowds failing to heed social distancing warnings in general.


    Tyler Durden

    Sun, 05/03/2020 – 18:35

  • David Stockman On The Three Nations Of COVID, & A Windbag Named Fauci
    David Stockman On The Three Nations Of COVID, & A Windbag Named Fauci

    Authored by David Stockman via Contra Corner blog,

    If you don’t think our so-called mainstream rulers has gone off the deep end, just consider New York Mayor Bill de Blasio’s recent menacing tweets to the orthodox Jewish community in Brooklyn, which has insisted on holding funerals, including one Monday for a revered 73-year old Rabbi attended by upwards of 2,000 mourners:

    “Something absolutely unacceptable happened in Williamsburg tonite: a large funeral gathering in the middle of this pandemic,” the mayor said in one post. “When I heard, I went there myself to ensure the crowd was dispersed. And what I saw WILL NOT be tolerated so long as we are fighting the Coronavirus.”

    My message to the Jewish community, and all communities, is this simple: the time for warnings has passed. I have instructed the NYPD to proceed immediately to summons or even arrest those who gather in large groups. This is about stopping this disease and saving lives. Period.

    Well, NYC is nearly a ghost town and now its idiotic ruling pols are suggesting that, apparently, only ghosts may attend funerals without governmental permission!

    But actually, this photo from the offending funeral is another picture worth a thousand words.

    That’s because by now, everyone, and we mean everyone, knows that the Covid-19 strikes the elderly, the frail and the already disease-afflicted; and that these vulnerable populations need to not only “social distance”, but actually stay home and keep out of harm’s way completely.

    That appears to be exactly what happened at Rabbi Mertz’ funeral. If you can spot an octogenarian in this crowd, or even a grandfather, your eyesight is better than Clark Kent’s.

    And besides being preponderantly way under 50-somethings, they congregated outdoors and virtually all were wearing masks. Yet claiming to speak for some latter day “Committee of Public Safety”, Mayor Robespierre actually threatened to bring in the gendarmes.

    Hundreds of people gathered in Williamsburg, Brooklyn, for a massive funeral Tuesday evening

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    As to whether the above pictured citizens should be jailed or fined, let’s start with a tale of two Lockdown Nations – New York City and the semi-socialist Republic of California.

    Both have imposed severe stay-at-home and business shutdown orders almost from the day the Donald issued his unfortunate March 16 guidelines. Yet here are the results 45 days later with respect to their mortality rates, which is ostensibly the reason officialdom issued these draconian “cease and desist” orders in the first place.

    To wit, the mortality rate as of April 28 was 143 per 100,000 in New York City and 4.6 per 100,000 in the state of California. Essentially the same public health policy lockdown, but night and day differences in the outcome.

    Yes, New York is more dense than California on average, but that doesn’t even remotely explain the difference. That’s because by now there is overwhelming evidence that the severity of the quarantine regime has essentially zero impact on the mortality metrics.

    And folks, even the Virus Patrol hardliners don’t claim their lockdown orders are designed to prevent 3-day hospital stays by people who get an unusually stubborn case of the winter flu. This is about death prevention and that’s why they run the Chyron of Death across the CNN screen day and night.

    But there is zero correlation:

    • California: Heavy lockdown, 4.6 deaths per 100,000;

    • Iowa: No lockdown, 4.3 deaths per 100,000;

    • Texas: Light lockdown, 2.4 deaths per 100,000;

    • Washington state: Heavy lockdown, 10.0 deaths per 100,000;

    • Colorado: Inconsistent lockdown, 12.2 deaths per 100,000;

    • Georgia: Late Lockdown now lifted, 10.0 deaths per 100,000;

    • Maine: Heavy Lockdown, 3.8 deaths per 100,000;

    • Massachusetts: Heavy Lockdown, 45.7 deaths per 100,000.

    We call attention to Washington state, Maine and Massachusetts especially because even though they all have severe statewide lockdown regimes and their overall mortality rates very widely, from 3.8 per 100,000 in Maine to 45.7 per 100,000 in Massachusetts, they do share one thing in common. To wit, 40-60% of their Covid-fatalities have been in nursing homes.

    In Maine, 53% of Covid deaths were in nursing homes, meaning that the actual Covid-mortality rate for the general population is just 1.8 per 100,000 and in Massachusetts 56% are nursing home fatalities, meaning the general rate is 21 per 100,000.

    Ironically, Sweden has one of the least restrictive lockdown regimes in the world – schools, businesses, restaurants and retail remain open–yet its mortality rate of 22 per 100,000 is virtually the same as the lockdown state of Massachusetts.

    Self-evidently, what matters is not how economically suicidal the lockdown regime is from one jurisdiction to the next, but the age, health status and general frailty/vulnerability of the populations at issue. In the case of Washington state where the first corona cases occurred, upwards of 40% of the 690 deaths to date have been in nursing homes, meaning that its general population mortality is just 6.0 per 100,000.

    As we amplify below, these single-digit rates are rounding errors on the scheme of things, even as all deaths are both regrettable and inevitable. But by what rational calculation does Governor Inslee insist on keeping the state in Lockdown and its economy heading into the the drink?

    Someone might dare inform him that the general mortality rate from all causes for his citizens is 900 per 100,000 annually, and that, therefore, he is imposing the economic mayhem evident in these charts below owing to a risk of Covid death for the general population of his state that so far has been 0.7% of the normal average.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Stated differently, had Patient Zero (aka the Donald) not been the victim of malpractice by his doctors led by Fauci and the Scarf Lady, he might have been advised to dial in on day #1 to the heart of the Covid-threat. Namely, the 15,600 nursing homes in America, which domicile some 1.5 million residents, of which one-quarter (425,00) are over the age of 80 years.

    In the case of Massachusetts, where the majority of deaths have occurred in nursing homes, the average age of Covid-deaths has been 82 years.

    Needless to say, you did not need to be entombed in the infectious disease tunnel at the NIH for 52 years like Dr. Fauci, a pretentious 79-year old windbag who should have himself been put in a retirement home years ago, to realize that nursing homes are dense-packed with the frail, disease-afflicted elderly.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    So rather than wipe out $4 trillion of GDP via Lockdown Nation they might have started with say $25 billion of incremental money for Medicare/Medicaid and the state public health agencies to zero-in on protecting, isolating and treating the nursing home residents.

    After all, we find it easy to believe that spending $20,000 per nursing home resident might have saved or extended a lot more lives than the WHO/CDC/DR. Fauci blunderbuss assault on the entire US economy.

    Indeed, with each passing update, the CDC data itself becomes an ever more dispositive indictment of the madness the Donald’s doctors have imposed on the nation. It is now strikingly clear, in fact, that when it comes to Covid-19 there are three nations in America, and that the attempt to shoe-horn them into a one-size fits all regime of state control is tantamount to insane.

    There is first the Kids Nation of some 61 million persons under 15 years, where even by the CDCs elastic definitions there have been just 5 WITH Covid deaths thru April 28. You needn’t even bother with the zero-ridden fraction of 1 per 100,000 (its actually 0.008) to make the point.

    That is to say, last year there were about 44,000 deaths among the Kids Nation – so corona-virus accounts for just 0.011% of the total, and in no sane world would it be a reason for shutting down the schools.

    Of course, the Virus Patrol insists that the school closures are an unfortunate necessity because otherwise the Kids Nation would take the virus home to the Parents/Workers Nation. That is the 215 million citizens between 15 and 64, who account for the overwhelming share of commerce, jobholders and GDP.

    Yet according to the CDC, there have been just 8,267 deaths WITH Covid in this massive expanse of the population, which figure represents a mortality rate of, well, 3.6 per 100,000.

    But here’s the thing. The normal total mortality rate for the 15-64 years old population is 335 per 100,000. So we are talking about shutting down the entire economy owing to a death rate to date which amounts to 1.1% of normal mortality in the Parents/Workers nation.

    Finally, we have Grandparents/Great Grandparents Nation, comprised of 52 million citizens. But they account for 32,000 or nearly 80% of the WITH Covid deaths as of April 28 – with 15,000 of these being among those 85 years and older.

    By way of computation, that’s 61 deaths per 100,000 for the group as a whole and 230 per 100,000 for the 85 years and older.

    Stated differently, the risk of death posed by Covid-19 is 7,600X greater for Grandparents/Great Grandparents Nation overall than for Kids Nation, and 29,000 times greater for the several million Great-Grandparents afflicted with severe comorbidity and likely as not to be in the care of a nursing home.

    Needless to say, it did not take a catastrophic experiment with Lockdown Nation to figure this out. It was already known from China and the history of other coronaviruses.

    If there were any reason or justice left in America, Dr. Fauci and the Scarf Lady and the whole CDC/WHO lobby that brought about this disaster would actually be headed for their own quarantine – the kind that doesn’t happen at home and which can’t be lifted by the whims of the Cuomo brothers or Mayor Robespierre.


    Tyler Durden

    Sun, 05/03/2020 – 18:10

Digest powered by RSS Digest

Today’s News 3rd May 2020

  • China's Exploiting The COVID-19 Pandemic To Expand In Asia
    China’s Exploiting The COVID-19 Pandemic To Expand In Asia

    Authored by Con Coughlin via The Gatestone Institute,

    While the rest of the world is preoccupied with tackling the coronavirus pandemic, China is intensifying its efforts to extend its influence in the South China Sea by intimidating its Asian neighbours.

    The arrival of China’s Liaoning aircraft carrier, together with five accompanying warships, in the South China Sea earlier this month has resulted in a significant increase in tensions in the Asia-Pacific region as Beijing seeks to take advantage of the coronavirus pandemic to flex its muscles.

    So far in April, there were claims that a Chinese coast guard vessel deliberately rammed and sank a Vietnamese fishing boat operating close to the disputed Paracel Islands. All the fishermen survived and were transferred to two other Vietnamese fishing vessels operating nearby.

    The incident prompted a furious response from the Vietnamese government, which accused Beijing of violating its sovereignty and threatening the lives of its fishermen. The US State Department said it was “seriously concerned” about the incident and called on Beijing “to remain focused on supporting international efforts to combat the global pandemic, and to stop exploiting the distraction or vulnerability of other states to expand its unlawful claims in the South China Sea.”

    In other incidents, Chinese vessels have been accused of harassing Indonesian fishing boats, as well as tailing Malaysian oil-exploration boats.

    At the same time, China has provoked a diplomatic dispute with the Philippines following Beijing’s declaration that a region over which Manila claims sovereignty in the South China Sea is Chinese territory.

    The dispute concerns China’s recent announcement that it intends to administer two disputed groups of islands and reefs in the waterway. One district covers the Paracel Islands, and the other has jurisdiction over the Spratlys, where China has built a network of fortified man-made islands. The Philippines has a presence of its own on at least nine islands and islets in the area, and bitterly opposes Chinese attempts to extend its influence.

    Beijing has long claimed control over the South China Sea and the surrounding area because of its strategic significance as one of the world’s busiest waterways. Around one third of the world’s shipping passes through it and carries trade worth around $3 trillion. In addition, the waters contain lucrative fisheries, and huge oil and gas reserves are believed to lie beneath its seabed.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    China’s gradual encroachment on the area has been resisted by other countries in the region such as Vietnam, the Philippines, Taiwan, Malaysia and Brunei, which all have competing claims of their own.

    As the region’s dominant power, China has shown little interest in seeking to resolve these conflicting claims peacefully. Instead, it has resorted to brute force, using its increasingly powerful navy to assert its dominance by harassing the shipping of rival states, even, at times, in their own territorial waters.

    China’s increasingly aggressive action, known in Beijing as “Wolf Warrior diplomacy”, has prompted US Secretary of State Mike Pompeo to warn that China is taking advantage of the world’s preoccupation with the coronavirus pandemic to push its territorial ambitions in the South China Sea. At a recent briefing to foreign ministers of the 10-member Association of Southeast Asian Nations (ASEAN), Mr Pompeo stated:

    “Beijing has moved to take advantage of the distraction [over Covid-19], from China’s new unilateral announcement of administrative districts over disputed islands and maritime areas in the South China Sea, its sinking of a Vietnamese fishing vessel earlier this month, and its ‘research stations’ on Fiery Cross Reef and Subi Reef.”

    Despite the Trump administration’s preoccupation with tackling the coronavirus pandemic, Washington is not prepared to tolerate China’s aggressive actions. Three ships from the US Seventh Fleet, together with an Australian frigate, have responded by sailing through the disputed waters in a show of force.

    China’s communist leadership may believe that they can take advantage of the coronavirus pandemic to bully their Asian neighbours. But this show of force by the US Navy should send a timely reminder to Beijing as to which country is the real military power in the region.


    Tyler Durden

    Sat, 05/02/2020 – 23:50

  • These Are The 10 Most Expensive (And Cheapest) Cities In The World
    These Are The 10 Most Expensive (And Cheapest) Cities In The World

    Where personal wealth is concerned, there are two sides to every story.

    The first of which is the amount of money a person earns, and the other is what they choose to spend their money on. As Visual Capitalist’s Katie Jones notes, the latter is influenced by the cost of living in the city where they reside – an ever-changing metric that is driven by a wide variety of factors, such as currency, population growth, or external market movements.

    Today’s graphic visualizes the findings from the 2020 Worldwide Cost of Living report and uses data from 133 cities to rank the most expensive cities in the world.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Note: Report research was conducted towards the end of 2019, before the COVID-19 outbreak.

    Asia Dominates the Ranking

    Globally, the cost of living has fallen by an average of 4% over the last year, with much of the movement up and down the ranking being driven by currency fluctuations.

    The locations with the highest cost of living are largely split between Europe and Asia. For the second time in the report’s 30-year history, three cities are tied as the top spot—Singapore, Hong Kong, and Osaka.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Source: EIU. New York City is index baseline (score = 100). Ties in index score values are denoted by (t).

    Osaka is a newcomer to the top spot, climbing four places over the last year to join cost of living heavyweight champions, Singapore and Hong Kong. As Japan’s third-largest city, Osaka is a major financial hub and a breeding ground for emerging startups, with relatively low real estate costs compared to Singapore and Hong Kong.

    Three European cities (Paris, Zurich, and Geneva) sit atop the most expensive city rankings, compared to seven cities only 10 years ago. Similarly, 31 of the 37 European cities have seen a decrease in cost of living overall—largely as a result of the Euro or local currencies losing value relative to the U.S. dollar.

    Finally, the top 10 is rounded out with two cities from the United States (New York, Los Angeles) and one from Israel (Tel Aviv).

    The Cheapest Cities

    While East Asia is home to many of the world’s most expensive cities, South Asia hosts the largest grouping of cities with the lowest cost of living.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Source: EIU. New York City is index baseline (score = 100). Ties in index score values are denoted by (t).

    Three Indian cities dominate the cheapest cities ranking due to a combination of low wages and high levels of income inequality, preventing any price increases.

    Meanwhile, political and economic turmoil is a common denominator among the cheapest cities outside of South Asia. For example, the Syrian Civil War resulted in an economic collapse, leading to high inflation and a downward spiral in value for the Syrian pound.

    A Spanner in the Works

    The COVID-19 pandemic is estimated to cost the global economy up to $2 trillion in 2020, so while governments attempt to boost the economy, many are concerned about higher inflation rates spreading across the world.

    With a recession becoming more likely, uncertainty around real estate prices will heighten for every city, regardless of their cost of living ranking.

    As we navigate chaotic and uncertain times, the next cost of living survey could look very different to today—the most important question will be how permanent the damaging effects of the pandemic will be.


    Tyler Durden

    Sat, 05/02/2020 – 23:25

  • Johnstone: Biden Is Everything The Democrats Are
    Johnstone: Biden Is Everything The Democrats Are

    Authored by Caitlin Johnstone via Medium.com,

    Joe Biden is not an “imperfect candidate” for the Democrats.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    He is the perfect candidate, because he’s everything the party is: Demented. Decrepit. Bloodthirsty. Corrupt. Cronyistic. Authoritarian. Reactionary. Rapey.

    He is exactly what they deserve. He is exactly what they are.

    Joe Biden is the Democrat’s Democrat. He is the perfect representative of the party. They should even take it a step further and replace that donkey with Joe Biden.

    Biden is to the Democrats as Trump is to the Republicans. Everyone’s just wearing their true face now.

    ~

    If you’re willing to sacrifice all principles, all sanity and all morality to get rid of Trump, what exactly is the point of getting rid of Trump?

    ~

    We know Biden is a liar. He’s been pinged for lying his whole career. Everyone is trying to undermine the victim’s character in order to discredit her while ignoring Joe’s character. We know he lies. He also has a history of unwanted sexual advances. His story is not credible.

    ~

    Nobody actually believes that Biden didn’t sexually assault Tara Reade. Nobody’s actually confident that Creepy Uncle Hair Sniffer isn’t a rapist, they’re just pretending they are. I can understand saying “It’s possible but unproven”, but saying it’s false is so gross and dishonest.

    They’re accusing Reade of lying for partisan reasons, when in reality that’s exactly what they are doing: they’re pretending they believe Handsy Joe Biden is incapable of shoving his fingers into a woman without her consent, and they are lying. Out of pure partisan loyalty.

    ~

    It’s funny how refusing to support a literal dementia patient who has been credibly accused of rape for the world’s most powerful elected office is a very, very normal thing to do, yet people are acting like it’s bizarre and freakish.

    ~

    Which looks more likely to you? (A) That Reade seeded a bunch of vicious lies about Senator Joe Biden in the 1990s with the intention of someday sabotaging his presidential bid in the distant future for some reason, or (B) that a powerful man sexually assaulted a woman?

    ~

    It’s so weird how Joe Biden is a spent piece of leftover 1970s beltway flotsam made of plastic donor class dinner parties and AIPAC lobbying but everyone’s all pretending they like him as a person and stuff.

    ~

    There are no fact-based and intellectually robust arguments for working within the establishment to manifest revolutionary agendas, but there are a lot of highly effective intellectually dishonest arguments for why it’s okay for you to pretend otherwise and go back to sleep.

    ~

    “They destroyed the economy over a virus, but the narrative about the virus is completely fake!”

    Perhaps. But so is the narrative about “the economy”.

    ~

    Terence McKenna once said “We are led by the least among us. The least intelligent, the least noble, the least visionary.” Can’t think of a better illustration of this than having Donald Trump versus Joe Biden competing for the most powerful elected office on the planet.

    ~

    Hey remember when Trump provoked a missile retaliation that led to scores of injured US soldiers by assassinating Iran’s top military commander for no legitimate reason, lied about the whole thing, and then suffered no consequences or political repercussions of any kind? Good times.

    ~

    Democrats are so fucking stupid and ridiculous that the Krassenstein brothers are still a thing.

    ~

    All of humanity’s worst atrocities have been legal. Genocide. Slavery. Torture. The fact that you can squint at the imprisonment and extradition of a journalist for exposing US war crimes in such a way that makes it look “legal” does not mean it isn’t unforgivably evil.

    ~

    It’s always about power. Power comes before everything, including profit, which is why you see escalations against nations who’d be very profitable to continue trading with and why critics of US foreign policy are attacked far more aggressively than critics of its domestic policy.

    Manipulators understand that wealth control is a means to power and not an end in itself; that’s why you see things like Zuckerberg hurting his own profit margins by making changes to Facebook which make the platform less fun to use but shore up establishment narrative control.

    Power trumps profit every time. Manipulators are driven ultimately by the desire to control as many humans as possible to the greatest extent possible. Money is a useful tool for accomplishing that, but in a pinch they’ll swap it out for military/police force or censorship etc.

    Wealth is a narrative construct and can be gained or lost or made obsolete in a new narrative paradigm. Elite manipulators understand that it’s hard, nonconceptual control over hard, nonconceptual objects that gives them their actual alpha status over the rest of the humans.

    ~

    “A newly democratized media environment has made it difficult for people to distinguish fact from fiction.”

    ‘Oh no! What do we do?’

    “Censor everyone except authoritative news sources.”

    ‘Authoritative news sources? Like who?’

    “The ones who lied about Russiagate and all the wars.”

    ~

    As a general rule, indie media should not attack other indie media. If you’re not punching up, you’re punching down.

    ~

    People ask me “Well, what should we do? How do we fix this thing?” And of course my only possible answer is, “Do what I’m doing! Or your version of it.” Of course I’m doing the thing I think we should do to solve the problems of our species. Why would I be doing anything else?

    ~

    Revolution is an inside job. This is not an egoically pleasing fact, but it is a fact. It’s much more fun for egoic mind to believe both the problem and the solution exists in other people, but in reality the changes you can make in yourself will have far greater effects on the world.

    There are vast, vast depths within all of us, and we are capable of making vast, vast changes to those depths. We are in fact far more capable of doing this than we are of changing the outside world through force of will. And interestingly when we do this, we do change the world. And we do it far more efficaciously than we can by trying to will it to conform with the noises in our babbling thinky brain.

    *  *  *

    Thanks for reading! The best way to get around the internet censors and make sure you see the stuff I publish is to subscribe to the mailing list for my website, which will get you an email notification for everything I publish. My work is entirely reader-supported, so if you enjoyed this piece please consider sharing it around, liking me on Facebook, following my antics onTwitter, checking out my podcast on either YoutubesoundcloudApple podcasts or Spotify, following me on Steemit, throwing some money into my hat on Patreon or Paypal, purchasing some of my sweet merchandise, buying my books Rogue Nation: Psychonautical Adventures With Caitlin Johnstone and Woke: A Field Guide for Utopia Preppers. For more info on who I am, where I stand, and what I’m trying to do with this platform, click here. Everyone, racist platforms excluded, has my permission to republish, use or translate any part of this work (or anything else I’ve written) in any way they like free of charge.

    Bitcoin donations:1Ac7PCQXoQoLA9Sh8fhAgiU3PHA2EX5Zm2


    Tyler Durden

    Sat, 05/02/2020 – 23:00

  • Get Ready For Slaughterhouse Robots To Ease America's Meat Processing Crisis 
    Get Ready For Slaughterhouse Robots To Ease America’s Meat Processing Crisis 

    America’s meat processing crisis, mainly triggered by labor shortages and plant closings due to coronavirus spread, is set to unleash a new wave of automation across plants to ease labor and health woes.  

    Bloomberg Law reports JBS SA, the world’s largest meat producer, is preparing to install robots in slaughterhouses to mitigate the spread of COVID-19 among human employees working on the production line. 

    JBS SA CFO Guilherme Cavalcanti recently said the Brazilian processing company expects to expand automation at its facilities across the world.  

    Cavalcanti said the adoption of automation started before the pandemic as labor tightened at US plants due to a decline in immigration sparked by the Trump administration. He said labor shortages have developed in the US as the virus infects workers and shutters plants. 

    Watch this video of meatpacking robots already in a JBS SA plant:

    The fast-spreading virus has so far infected 4,900 workers (across the entire industry) and left 20 dead at 115 meatpacking plants across 19 states, according to CDC data from April 9-27.

    In a JBS SA webinar on how it has handled its pandemic response, Cavalcanti said automation is more important than ever considering labor and health issues. 

    JBS SA has closed two US meatpacking plants due to the virus outbreak. There have been at least 22 plant closings in the US. We’ve noted, the closures have resulted in a 25% reduction in pork-processing capacity and beef by 10%. This has crushed farmers with overcapacity as they have limited options in selling livestock, resulting in mass cullings and plunging livestock spot prices. As for the consumer, soaring food inflation and shortages have been the result of plants reducing output or closing. 

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    And at Zero Hedge, we have not been shy at telling you how things might pan out when it comes to a nation that is becoming automated, which means millions of jobs will be eliminated entirely by 2030. And, for some more uncomfortable truths, corporate America will speed up their adoption of automation and artificial intelligence, because robots can’t be infected by coronavirus.  


    Tyler Durden

    Sat, 05/02/2020 – 22:35

  • "Go Buy Guns First" – John McAfee Warns Governments "Are Deceiving You" About Virus
    “Go Buy Guns First” – John McAfee Warns Governments “Are Deceiving You” About Virus

    Authored by Amy Castor via DeCrypt.co,

    The government is deceiving you. The pandemic is a ploy spread by the fake-news media, and if you care about your lives, go out and buy guns now. 

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    That was the message of John McAfee. Between evil laughs and dark chucklings, the tech guru, tax fugitive, and general wild man shared his suspect views on the “state of the world” during COVID-19 last night at Virtual Blockchain Week.

    “We are living in a paradigm the world has never seen before,” the 74-year-old crypto advocate and antivirus-software pioneer said, speaking from God knows where.

    (He’s kept his whereabouts a secret since fleeing Belize in 2012 after suspicions grew that he killed his neighbor.)

    “One-third of the planet is in lockdown,” he said, adding that most of those people are sitting at home, watching TV, and not doing much of anything, while the US government “pulls money out of thin air.” The situation is not sustainable, he argued.

    He was especially disturbed by a recent $2 trillion stimulus package in the US, which appears to be backed by nothing other than the good graces of the US government.

    “You can’t pull money out of the air and expect everything to be okay. Money is based on something called industry, production, service. We haven’t increased any of that,” he said, with a deep, unsettling chuckle. He predicted the money-printing will lead to a collapse of the US dollar. 

    It’s too late for crypto

    Bitcoin and blockchain were meant to “save us from financial slavery, and from the overburdened government that creates the fiat currency that we are forced to use,” McAfee said.

    But he doesn’t think crypto will save us this time. 

    “We are not going to jump into crypto,” he said, because it’s not easy enough to use.

    “It is not like opening a bank account. You have to spend days understanding what it is and how it works.” 

    But as far as the markets go, he predicts that the price of Bitcoin will spike ahead of the halving event on May 12. He recalled that in 2016, the last halving event, there was a huge rise in the price of Bitcoin, and then a huge drop. And he believes history will repeat because the same people populate the cryptosphere, and they’re just as greedy as they were four years ago. 

    More people die of diarrhea

    As far as the threat of COVID19, McAfee thinks the number of deaths are skewed because they are presented out of context. It is certainly not worth shutting down entire economies, he believes.  

    Repeatedly, he said more people die of diarrhea and of the flu. But both comparisons, common attempts to downplay the severity of the virus, have been widely dismissed as reckless by leading epidemiologists. 

    But the way McAfee, who is known for his drug use and paranoia, sees it—just before opening his talk, he jokingly commented he was getting ready to shoot up with heroin—we are being lied to by the government and stirred up by the media.

    “If you use your head and common sense, you can see you are being deceived,” he said.

    Due to the global shut down and the money printing, he believes dark times ahead for our species.

    The solution? 

    “Go buy guns, and guns first,” he said.

    “Because if you just have the food and you don’t have the guns, your neighbors are going to take it because your neighbors have the guns.”

    And then McAfee, who appears to enjoy it when people think he is on edge, pulled out an AK-47 assault rifle and began praising its sturdiness.

    “This sucker will always fire,” he said. 


    Tyler Durden

    Sat, 05/02/2020 – 22:10

  • "The US Doesn't Own The UN" – Furious Beijing Blasts UN Mission's Taiwan Tweets As "Political Manipulation"
    “The US Doesn’t Own The UN” – Furious Beijing Blasts UN Mission’s Taiwan Tweets As “Political Manipulation”

    President Trump is going all-in on antagonizing China as a crux of his 2020 campaign strategy (since clearly a large segment of his base, and many undecided voters, blame China for unleashing the virus on the world whether it came from a lab or not). And in keeping with the stepped-up antagonisms – since President Trump’s agreement to “cooperate” with President Xi to fight the virus is 100% meaningless – the US late Friday tweeted its support for Taiwan’s participation in the UN.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Kelly Craft

    The tweet, sent by the US Mission to the UN, said the 193-member organization should allow space for “all voices” and welcome “a diversity of views and perspectives” to promote human rights. “Barring #Taiwan from setting foot on UN grounds is an affront not just to the proud Taïwanese people, but to UN principles,” it continued. It was retweeted by US Ambassador Kelly Craft, who succeeded Nikki Haley as US ambassador to the UN.

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    Sympathy for Taiwan has been running high since the country masterfully handled the coronavirus outbreak. Another boost came when eporters exposed the WHO’s bias toward Taiwan and refusal to even acknowledge the de facto independent state (legally viewed in China as an errant province).

    Never one to mince words, President Xi has threatened retaliatory violence against any nation state that dares assist Taiwan on the road to sovereignty, a role that the US under President Trump has consistently flirted with. Trump’s overall hawkishness toward China – a huge component of his political appeal – is why there’s little doubt that China is actively trying to hurt Trump’s election chances (we suspect their intelligence indicates Joe Biden’s level of cognitive decline is more serious than most Americans realize).

    Unsurprisingly, China’s Mission to the UN – a body where China enjoys tremendous clout as a permanent voting member of the UN Security Council – responded that the US Mission was way out of line and should probably calm the fuck down before these twitter fingers turn to trigger fingers.

    The spokesperson for China’s U.N. Mission called the U.S. Mission tweet “a serious violation” of the General Assembly resolution that gave China the U.N. seat, three U.S.-China joint communiques and China’s sovereignty and territorial integrity.

    “It gravely interferes with China’s internal affairs and deeply hurts the feelings of the 1.4 billion Chinese people,” said the spokesperon, who was not named. “There is only one China in the world. The government of the People’s Republic China is the sole legal government representing the whole of China, and Taiwan is an inalienable part of China.”

    China’s mission accused the United States of ”hypocrisy” for citing the U.N.’s welcome of diverse views while repeatedly using its power to issue visas to block or delay U.N. member states and civil society organizations from attending activities at the United Nations.

    China strongly urged the United States to abide by the one-China principle, the three joint communiques between the two countries and the General Assembly resolution “and immediately stop backing the Taiwan region, politicizing, and undermining international response to the pandemic.”

    “While the coronavirus is raging across the world, people of all countries are calling for international solidarity in fighting the pandemic,” the Chinese spokesperson said. “Political manipulation by the United States on an issue concerning China’s core interests will poison the atmosphere for cooperation of member states at a time when unity and solidarity is needed the most.”

    And the icing on the cake: Global Times editor Hu Xijin whining that the US “doesn’t own” the UN.

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    Now get ready to do this all again tomorrow when the Pentagon sends a US carrier strike force through the Strait of Taiwan (we’re joking of course…but on a more serious note…it wouldn’t be so far-fetched).


    Tyler Durden

    Sat, 05/02/2020 – 21:45

  • Brace For A Monday Massacre: Buffett Liquidates All Airline Holdings As Berkshire Sees Another Leg Lower
    Brace For A Monday Massacre: Buffett Liquidates All Airline Holdings As Berkshire Sees Another Leg Lower

    Well, it’s official: there won’t be any “Buy American” op-eds by the Oracle of Omaha this time around. In fact, if anything, they will be titled simply “Sell.

    Warren Buffett, who turns 90 in 4 months, had an unpleasant surprise for the permabullish Berkshire faithful during their annual pilgrimage to Omaha live-stream of Berkshire’s annual meeting: one month after Berkshire surprised investors by selling parts of its Delta and Southwest Airlines stakes – both of which had previously been above a 10% ownership level and speculation was rife that Berkshire could purchase an airline outright in the near future – the Oracle of Omaha said that, 4 years after Berkshire took major stakes in the four largest US airlines, he had liquidated the sold the entirety of its equity position in the U.S. airline industry which included $6.5 billion worth of stock in United, American, Southwest and Delta Airlines.

    Assuring that Monday will be a bloodbath for Trannies (that would be the transportation stocks you perverts), Buffett justified his decision as follows: “The world has changed for the airlines. And I don’t know how it’s changed and I hope it corrects itself in a reasonably prompt way,” he said. “I don’t know if Americans have now changed their habits or will change their habits because of the extended period.”

    But “I think there are certain industries, and unfortunately, I think that the airline industry, among others, that are really hurt by a forced shutdown by events that are far beyond our control.”

    “When we bought [airlines], we were getting an attractive amount for our money when investing across the airlines,” he said. “It turned out I was wrong about that business because of something that was not in any way the fault of four excellent CEOs. Believe me. No joy of being a CEO of an airline.”

    ““I don’t know that 3-4 years from now people will fly as many passenger miles as they did last year …. you’ve got too many planes.”

    Realizing that he won’t be alive by the time a turnaround eventually happens, he clarified that he made the decision and that he lost money on his investments. “That was my mistake.”

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    Asked by CNBC’s Becky Quick to clarify if Berkshire had sold all of its airline holdings, Buffett answered “yes” and explained: “When we sell something, very often it’s going to be our entire stake: We don’t trim positions. That’s just not the way we approach it any more than if we buy 100% of a business. We’re going to sell it down to 90% or 80%.”

    “The airline business — and I may be wrong and I hope I’m wrong — but I think it’s changed in a very major way,” Buffett said. “The future is much less clear to me.”

    As Bloomberg reminds us, Buffett has had a complicated relationship with the airline industry over the years. After a troublesome investment in USAir, Buffett joked that he would call an 800 number to declare he was an “air-o-holic” if he ever got the urge to invest in airlines again. Then in 2016, Berkshire dove into the industry again, amassing stakes in the four largest airlines. His renewed faith in the industry prompted speculation that he might one day own one of the carriers.

    There is a more simplistic explanation of Buffett’s style of investing at least in recent years: he will buy the stock of companies that engage in massive buybacks, such as Apple, even though his annual letter bashes companies that buybacks stocks, and he will dump all companies that halt buybacks, of which IBM is the most famous example. And since the quasi-bailed out airlines won’t be repurchasing stock for years and years to come, it was only a matter of time before Buffett dumped them.

    It also means that Buffett may soon liquidate many more sector holdings, starting with the banks which have also suspended buybacks for the near future and may be forced to extend said suspension indefinitely unless there is a V-shaped recovery in the global economy. The banks will then be followed by consumer discretionary, railroads, and many more. In fact, it would explain why unlike 2008, Buffett has not only not been buying any stocks despite major “bargains” but has actually been aggressive in liquidating his holdings, hardly an endorsement of the broader market.

    Amusingly, after wasting much digital ink bashing buybacks in his annual letters, Buffett went off on a rant defending buybacks during the annual videocast: “It’s very politically correct to be against buybacks now,” he said. “There’s a lot of crazy things being said about buybacks. Buybacks are so simple. It’s a way of distributing cash to shareholders,” especially when that shareholders is Warren Buffett. The “oracle” then noted that share repurchase programs should be executed in a price and need-sensitive manner, but “when the conditions are right, it should also be obvious to repurchase shares and there shouldn’t be the slightest taint to it anymore than there is to dividends.” Yes, well, good luck with all that Warren because for the next 2 years, you can kiss buybacks goodbye from all companies except perhaps the FAAMGs.

    For those curious what Buffett will sell next, here is a full summary of Berkshire’s most recent equity holdings:

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    “If we like a business, we’re going to buy as much of it as we can and keep it as long as we can,” he added. “And when we change our mind we don’t take half measures.”

    His comments Saturday afternoon came after Berkshire reported a $50 billion Q1 loss and only nibbled at equities during the violent stock market rout in March, mostly on his investment portfolio, even as the conglomerate’s cash stockpile rose to a record $137BN (more net cash than AAPL has) and up $10 billion from the $127 billion it reported at the end of 2019.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    As we reported earlier, the company spent just $1.8 billion buying stocks and just $1.7 billion repurchasing Berkshire Hathaway shares during the first quarter of 2020, suggesting not only that Buffett could not find any of his hallmark bargain, value opportunities in the market sell-off, which took the S&P 500 down more than 30%, but that Buffett sees the current market rebound as nothing more than a dead cat bounce as he prepares to snap up the real bargains after the next crash.

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    Explaining why he didn’t repurchase more Berkshire Hathaway shares during the sell-off in the first quarter, Buffett said “the price has not been at a level where it really feels way better to us than other things, including the option value of money, to step up in a big way.” Which is a long way of saying it remains too expensive.

    Worse, explaining why he still hasn’t made a major acquisition despite the recent 35% drop in the market, the billionaire investor said “we have not done anything because we haven’t seen anything that attractive,” adding that “we are not doing anything big obviously. We are willing to do something very big. I mean you could come to me on Monday morning with something that involved $30, or $40 billion or $50 billion. And if we really like what we are seeing, we would do it.”

    The fact that he hasn’t done it yet means one thing: Buffett, or rather the banks that advise the soon-to-be-90 year old investor are convinced that a next leg lower in stocks is coming, and he should conserve his ‘dry powder’ for when it comes.

    And what may be scariest for the bulls, is that in justifying his lack of buying, Buffett practically blamed the Fed, saying that “the Fed acted too quickly and too strongly for Berkshire to may any big deals right now.” Not only that, but even Buffett – whose entire fortune is the result of enjoying sequential bailouts from either governments or central banks time and again – appears to be becoming a measured Fed skeptic: “you can look at the Fed’s balance sheet and you will see some extraordinary changes there in the last 6 or 7 weeks. And we don’t know the consequences of that.” And while he adds that Powell took Draghi’s “whatever it takes squared… we are prepared at Berkshire that maybe the Fed will not have a chairman that acts like that” which explains Berkshire’s $137 billion in cash, which in other words is a hedge for when the Fed finally fails to prop up stocks.

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    Translation: according to none other than the most admired investor in the world, the Fed’s unprecedented bailout of capital markets has not only disconnected prices from fundamentals but has led to a market so overvalued that there are still no bargains despite the recent crash (and subsequent dead cat bounce).

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    And now we prepare for the Monday bloodbath in the trannies, and perhaps across the entire market, as investors – notorious for being unable to think for themselves and always blindly following the actions of a 90-year-old man – furiously imitate what Berkshire has already done. And, if the bulls are unlucky, the selling could be the catalyst for the next major market drop… which would of course be delightfully ironic if Buffett’s own actions catalyze the crash that he hopes to benefit from and finally put his record cash hoard to use.


    Tyler Durden

    Sat, 05/02/2020 – 21:25

  • "Remdesivir Is Probably Worthless" – A Trauma Surgeon Exposes "Drug Company's Shenanigans"
    “Remdesivir Is Probably Worthless” – A Trauma Surgeon Exposes “Drug Company’s Shenanigans”

    Markets got very excited (briefly) this week about a study finding a Gilead Sciences drug helped coronavirus patients heal a little more quickly.

    But that was all the trial found: remdesivir isn’t the miracle cure that will get us all out of lockdowns tomorrow, unfortunately.

    Worse, as Bloomberg’s Faye Flam writes, the trial was rushed to get quick FDA approval, without getting helpful information on what kinds of patients it helps or hurts the most; and now that the study is over, we’ve forever lost a chance to help doctors treat virus patients better.

    All of which raises a significant number of questions and Acute Care Surgeon (and Asst Professor of Surgery at Wash U.) Mark Hoofnagle warns “I am truly sorry to say, Remdesivir is probably worthless…”

    In an excellent Twitter thread, Hoofnagle details what he calls “some fascinating drug company shenanigans.”

    First, the pre-test probability that an infused, small-molecule inhibitor of a virus would improve mortality in symptomatic patients was already pretty low. Unfortunately, antivirals work poorly in acute disease. This has to do with their mechanism of action, and host response. 

    Antivirals usually target some aspect of viral replication/assembly/transmission. Remdesivir is a clever pharmacologic prodrug that inhibits a key piece of RNA viruses that mammals don’t have – the RNA-dependent RNA polymerase, and inhibits viral replication. 

    Unfortunately, by the time you are symptomatic with a virus, you are usually already high/peak viral load. So, when you give an antiviral to someone who is already ill, the damage from the virus is largely done.

    It’s there in big numbers and in the cells. 

    Consistent with this, the Lancet paper on the remdesivir trial in China shows no impact on viral load clinically.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Pick your metaphor. The cat is out of the bag. The damage is done. At this point the host response to virus is activated, and your body is suppressing replication through a variety of mechanisms (which also make you feel terrible). 

    So how could inhibiting RDRP after the fact help? The answer is, it probably doesnt. It certainly didn’t in this trial – no difference, not even a trend in mortality, but in subgroup analysis maybe shortened disease duration in early/mild disease.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Now, critics of stupid drugs that should never have been stockpiled by govts say, “sounds like Tamiflu!”

    Yes. This is the same as Tamiflu, which also maybe shortens flu by a day, but otherwise is a largely useless antiviral (and actually harmful with bad side effect profile). 

    Fortunately, side effects of remdesivir did not seem severe in this trial with only about 3x as many patients stopping than placebo, some rashes, nothing life threatening.

    Where do the Shenanigans come in?

    Well, remember how maybe this Chinese trial showed a shortened course in a subset of patients? Like tamiflu? But didn’t change mortality?

    Well a month ago the NIAID trial changed their endpoints to remove death and instead look at dz duration.

    No really.

    They changed the destination half way through the race to match the only positive outcome of another trial, that they (or Gilead at least) certainly had a copy of the paper once it was submitted to Lancet.

    Shenanigans! Get a broom!

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    This is like declaring a race and then when you realize you’re not going to win, declaring the destination was actually wherever you are standing at the moment. 

    Then, even more fishy, *the same day* as this Lancet trial is release, Gilead and NIAID claim a “positive trial” and they’ve “shortened the course of the disease significantly”. Notably, the mortality benefit did not reach significance.

    By the end of the day, reports that FDA is going to emergently approve remdesivir for treatment of COVID.

    Gilead gets what they want. No one will want to be in a control arm in further trials and they will argue all future trials must be non-inferiority. 

    Before we have the answer whether this drug actually changes anyone’s destiny, it’s going to become the gold standard therapy. We will likely now never know if (the unlikely possibility) it changes mortality. 

    Absolute genius. You have to salute them. On the day a negative trial of their drug is reported, based on a press release they took over the news cycle, and with some midstream edits to their endpoints their now “positive” trial wins them FDA approval and a halted trial. 

    It’s an infusion, once symptomatic, you need an admission, a test, etc., really even symptoms are probably too late a goal for such a therapy to work. Prophylaxis (like Gilead’s Truvada/PreP) would be better – but unworkable in its current form. 

    Either way, a big win for Gilead, but I’m unimpressed with any if the evidence presented so far that this is a game changer.

    *  *  *

    How long before Hoofnagle is banned from Twitter?

    Hoofnagle is not alone in his skepticism.

    Naked Capitalism’s Yves Smith exclaimsit is disturbing to watch the push to con the public into seeing remdesivir as the only promising treatment for coronavirus, and points to a new study that found and tested 47 old drugs that might treat the coronavirus: Results show promising leads and a whole new way to fight COVID-19

     


    Tyler Durden

    Sat, 05/02/2020 – 20:55

  • 6 Reasons Why This Is (Or Isn't) The Worst Economy Since The Great Depression
    6 Reasons Why This Is (Or Isn’t) The Worst Economy Since The Great Depression

    Authored by Daniel Nevins via Nevins Research,

    When the NBER’s Business Cycle Dating Committee draws the boundaries on the current recession, it’s unlikely to stand out as an especially long one. In fact, by the time the committee publishes the official start date, it could be past its end date.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Why?

    Because it’s front-loaded. Spending has dropped so sharply in such a large portion of the economy that many types of activity have nowhere to go but up. And once activity starts increasing, even from nothing, that’s expansion, not recession.

    But the eventual business-cycle dates tell us little about our current situation. We could hit bottom in 2020 but then expand so weakly that we don’t restore vitality for several years. So let’s consider how the economy might unfold over a fixed horizon—say, three years from 2020 to 2022—rather than fixating on business-cycle dates.

    First, I’ll look at the reasons why our situation is really, really bad, and then I’ll consider why it might not be that bad, after all. I’ll benchmark my calculations against the post–World War II period, but especially against the economic destruction from 2008 to 2010.

    Why this is the worst economy since the Great Depression

    I have six reasons.

    Reason #1: This is a “double-recession.”

    Consider that our last ten recessions were shaped mostly by four categories of spending: business equipment, commercial real estate, home building and consumer durables. If you isolate only the ups and downs of those four categories (but throw in changes in inventories to account for milder, inventory recessions), your partial business-cycle history would be almost indistinguishable from the actual history.

    Moreover, those four categories typically amount to less than a quarter of the economy. In 2019, they composed 19.5% of GDP, as shown below:

    • Business equipment:  5.8%

    • Commercial real estate:  2.9%

    • Home building:  3.7%

    • Consumer durables:  7.1%

    So a 19.5% chunk of the economy explains the first part of the double-recession, and we know it’s currently recessionary because the usual precursors are back—collapsing business profits, tightening loan standards, widespread job losses and rising delinquencies. With the usual precursors in place, we can expect a sharp contraction in all four categories noted above.

    But the second part of the double-recession is separate. Consider the 2019 GDP weights for the additional spending categories below, totaling 11.3%:

    • Transportation services:  2.2%

    • Recreation services:  2.7%

    • Food services and accommodations:  4.8%

    • Gasoline and other energy goods:  1.6%

    Now we’ve reached the piece that’s completely new—it has no precedent in past business cycles. Each of the four categories shown above has contracted far more than ever before. In each case, activity is only a fraction of what it was just three months ago—probably less than half, and maybe even less than a quarter. Considering the severity of the contraction, together with the GDP weights, the destruction in these items alone is enough to establish a recession, even without the usual fixed investment and consumer durables categories discussed earlier.

    So that’s what I mean by a double-recession. The first part includes the fixed investment and consumer durables categories (totaling 19.5% of GDP). The second part includes the additional categories (totaling 11.3% of GDP) that imploded during the last two months, even as they’re normally only bit players in the business cycle.

    Reason #2: Pandemic-related business costs could last for years.

    Businesses will have to manage through some combination of the following:

    • Migration to more secure but higher cost suppliers (in response to supply chain fragilities exposed by the pandemic)

    • Measures to facilitate social distancing, including larger business premises in some cases

    • More frequent and thorough cleaning of business premises

    • Personal protection equipment for employees and, in some cases, customers

    • COVID-19 testing costs

    • Potentially greater contributions to employee health insurance (when insurance companies build COVID-19 into their cost structures, premiums can only go up)

    • Potentially greater absenteeism (employees being told to stay home with even mild illnesses, employees relying on public transportation facing greater challenges getting to work safely)

    • Potential work stoppages when employees test positive

    • Potential hazard pay

    We can only guess how widespread and persistent these costs will be. But across the whole economy, they’ll surely add to a significant, positive number. They’re bad news for business profits, inflation and probably both (more on inflation in a moment).

    Reason #3: The Fed only had two bullets in the interest-rate chamber (the two March rate cuts).

    After cutting the fed funds rate in March from 1.6% to just above zero, the Fed can’t reduce it further without entering the Twilight Zone of negative rates. (Sure, other countries have tried negative rates, but it’s still the Twilight Zone.) By comparison, here are the fed funds rate changes during the last five recessions, from business-cycle peak to business-cycle trough: –4.8%, –9.8%, –2.0%, –3.2% and –4.1%. So this year’s change of –1.5% is only a fraction of the interest rate stimulus we normally see in recessions.

    Reason #4: Bankruptcies could be more severe than in any other post-WW2 recession.

    I wrote “could be” because we don’t know for sure, but record bankruptcies seem consistent with three things we do know.

    • First, business shutdowns within the 11.3% of GDP noted above (the second part of the double-recession) will surely result in record destruction in that particular portion of the economy.

    • Second, activity has already contracted more sharply than at any time since the 1933 national bank holiday, and in that instance, widespread business stoppages only lasted a week.

    • Third, nonfinancial businesses are loaded up with record amounts of debt. As of Q4 2019 and relative to GDP, nonfinancial businesses were more indebted than ever before on a gross basis (74% of GDP), and they also carried more debt than in any prior expansion after netting out interest-earning assets and cash (55% of GDP). In short, nonfinancial businesses could hardly have entered this crisis with a riskier aggregate balance sheet.

    Reason #5: Meet the zombies—next generation.

    Stimulus programs are helping forestall economic destruction, but they’re also propping up companies that wouldn’t be viable without cheap financing backed by the Federal Reserve and Treasury Department. Some of those companies will still go bust, despite public support. Others will become zombies, dependent on loans that can only be paid back by obtaining more loans. To those who pointed to the zombie companies of the last decade as one reason for a less-than-vibrant global expansion, you haven’t seen anything yet.

    Reason #6: Inflation risks are unusually high for a recession.

    As noted above, the pandemic has lifted business costs by adding procedures and complexities that didn’t exist before. Rising business costs damage profitability, at first, but should eventually have some effect on inflation. And that’s not all. Inflation is normally a policy choice (either intentional or inadvertent), and policy makers are more inclined to risk it than at any time in the last four decades. Notably, current policies include direct injections of Fed-financed spending power into the Main Street economy. Moreover, those injections appear to be augmenting rather than just supplanting spending power supplied by commercial banks. (I’ve shown several times that past QE programs merely substituted Fed financing for commercial bank financing, without having a significant effect on the total.)

    Note that I’m not using the flawed logic of monetarist economists who predicted rising inflation during the Fed’s earlier QE programs, nor did I join those predictions (just the opposite, as shown here, for example). Also, the inflation outlook is hardly one-directional, since certain items, such as housing costs, are now less likely to inflate than they are to deflate or remain stable.

    But the factors discussed above should threaten the benign inflation of recent decades. After remaining below 3% for the last 24 years, an increase in core inflation to just 4% would be a major event. And if we get there, fiscal and monetary policies would become more challenging, to say the least. After many years of disinflation, policy makers would again be forced to choose between snuffing out inflation and sustaining growth.

    Why this isn’t the worst economy since the Great Depression

    I have six reasons, once again, the first three of which compare 2020 to 2008.

    Reason #1: The big-4 “home” risks—home prices, home mortgage debt, home building and home equity extraction—are relatively nonthreatening.

    The mid-2000s housing bubble brought unsustainable prices alongside unsustainable growth in mortgage debt, home building and home equity extraction. Just before the pandemic, by comparison, house prices and housing activity appeared sustainable. Here’s a rundown of 2019 data versus “peak” housing boom data:

    • Home prices:  Grew 3% in 2019 versus –19% in 2008 (after peaking in mid-2006)

    • Home mortgage debt:  49% of GDP in 2019 versus 72% in 2007

    • Home building:  3.7% of GDP in 2019 versus 6.6% in 2005

    • Home equity extraction:  1% of DPI in 2019 versus 8% in early 2006 (according to Bill McBride’s calculations)

    We can link each of the items above to a significant drop in household spending power or housing activity in the 2008-9 recession and the years that followed, whereas the data show much lower risks today. Clearly, the big-4 home risks are unlikely to wreak as much destruction in the current recession as the destruction caused by the housing bubble.

    Reason #2: Sterilization? What’s that?

    In 2008, the FOMC fretted for months before dropping long-established central banking orthodoxies. But such lengthy deliberations have long since gone out of style. The committee now crams money without hesitation into every financial-sector crevice that appears to be leaking. The new policy “normal” invites both moral hazard and zombification of wide swathes of the economy, as noted above. But the immediate upside is significant—the Fed’s interventions short-circuited the financial crisis that appeared to be unfolding in March.

    Reason #3: Banks have more capital than they did in 2008.

    We’ve all heard the story about the better capitalized banking system, and it’s true. But higher capital ratios won’t stop banks from slowing or even shuttering their lending operations. (They’ve already done that.) So the capital cushion is larger, and that’s nice to have, but it won’t save the economy. The main benefit is that measures to bail out the banks won’t need to be as large as they would otherwise be.

    Reason #4: Some areas of the economy are seeing stellar demand.

    I noted above that spending has evaporated like never before in portions of the economy that total 11.3% of GDP. Now consider three other types of spending:

    • Food and beverages purchased for off-premises consumption (4.8% of GDP)

    • Other consumer nondurables (5.6% of GDP)

    • Health care (11.5% of GDP)

    Solid spending in these areas, which total 22% of GDP, doesn’t negate the destruction in the transportation, recreation, restaurant, hotel and energy sectors. But it’s important to recognize that some of the spending lost through health fears and business shutdowns is being redirected, not extinguished. It’s flowing strongly into other parts of the economy. And the jobs market demonstrates that point—many recently jobless workers are finding new positions at Amazon, Instacart, CVS or one of a smattering of other companies whose outlook has brightened. So the double-recession I noted above might net out to more like a recession-and-a-half.

    Reason #5: Furloughs, not layoffs.

    Of the newly jobless workers who don’t find jobs elsewhere, many remain on their employers’ payrolls, retaining certain benefits but not working or receiving wages. One survey shows that 78% of employees who lost their wages due to the coronavirus expect to return to their former jobs. That might prove more hopeful than realistic, but it’s a less bearish recession story than the more typical story of companies slashing labor unconditionally.

    Reason #6: Helicopter money!

    Now for the elephant in the room. Fiscal policy makers are intent on providing “what it takes” to overcome the crisis. For that, they’re tapping into the Fed’s unlimited capacity to finance government spending with newly created money. They’re tapping it like never before. To highlight just two data points:

    • Roughly half of unemployment claimants will have more income than they had while working (through July, at least), thanks to an extra $600 weekly of CARES Act benefits on top of their normal state benefits.

    • Millions of working Americans will also make more than they would have without COVID-19, thanks to CARES Act stimulus payments.

    It shouldn’t be surprising that the survey linked above shows people feeling better about their finances than they did a month ago, despite weekly unemployment claims averaging over five million between the two survey dates.

    So helicopter money gives us yet another surreal and unprecedented development to ponder. In the short-term, it’s certain to blunt the pandemic’s economic impact. In the long-term, we’ll face consequences, but I won’t delve into that in this article. I’ll only suggest tuning out pundits who claim that “advanced” nations with their own currencies can drop helicopter money without repercussions. In fact, the advanced nations of today reached their advanced status long ago after enduring tumultuous periods of fiscal profligacy, learning from those experiences, and then maintaining relatively sound finances thereafter. And if they didn’t learn from experience? Well, that’s one of the biggest reasons that many countries fail to advance.

    (My book supports that argument with an examination of every recorded instance of governments accumulating a higher debt-to-GDP ratio than America’s debt-to-GDP as of 2018. For anyone interested in the general idea without the historical detail, I published an excerpt here.)

    Conclusions

    The eventual COVID-19 wreckage pivots on many unknowns, and future policies are among them. But the biggest unanswered question—at least when it comes to the economy—is this:

    For how much longer will the pandemic prevent vulnerable businesses from operating profitably (or operating at all)?

    Optimistically, new COVID-19 cases will descend downward until they hit bottom in a few months, allowing businesses to restore profitability. That’s the scenario the President’s task force includes in its slideshows—it shows virtually no new cases by July. And the more political voices on the task force have reinforced that message, playing up the idea that we’ll be back to normal by this summer. If their prediction proves accurate, the economy should perform better in 2020–22 than it did in 2008–10, for these reasons:

    • With a COVID-19 resolution in the summer, the housing market would be in far better shape than it was in 2008.

    • The financial sector would recover relatively quickly—banks would still be cautious but not as cautious as they were during and after the Global Financial Crisis.

    • Many depressed businesses would bounce back at least partially and rehire furloughed employees.

    • Some businesses boosted by the pandemic would continue to thrive.

    • Exiting the recession, household spending power would be unusually strong, thanks to the recession’s short duration as well as generous government handouts.

    So that’s the outcome we’re hoping to see, but it has an obvious weakness. That is, it presumes the coronavirus remains dormant after the economy restarts. A different theory says the virus revives whenever it finds an opening. Evidently, that’s a common feature. Epidemics tend to attack in waves. Until vaccines become available, the challenge in snuffing out this epidemic is that it only takes a handful of infected people going about their normal lives to reseed it.

    In other words, a future resurgence of COVID-19 seems the most likely outcome. It’s the scenario many experts warn us to expect, and not just any experts but the ones who’ve been most accurate to date.

    Where does that leave the economy?

    The worst case combines a historically deep recession with a disappointing recovery that feels more like continued recession. If future COVID-19 waves prove as dangerous as the first wave, the recession could be an early 1980s–style double-dip. But other possibilities are less severe. For example, medical discoveries could make the virus less risky, restoring confidence in normal business activities. (Note that Dr. Fauci was citing “quite good news” on remdesivir trials as I write this.)

    So the possibilities run from one extreme to the other. We need to be ready for anything, unfortunately, from a mid-2020 rebound to a prolonged crisis more severe than any since the Great Depression.


    Tyler Durden

    Sat, 05/02/2020 – 20:30

  • 50 Dead, 60 Wounded After Venezuela Prison Uprising: Live Updates
    50 Dead, 60 Wounded After Venezuela Prison Uprising: Live Updates

    Summary:

    • Italy sees 76% surge in new COVID-19 deaths as single-day total hits 11-day high

    • New York sees first rebound in deaths since April 25th.

    • 12.3% of New York state tested positive for COVID-19 antibodies

    • Spain allows outdoor exercise

    • Russia reports another record jump in cases

    • Video shows Mexican hospitals hiding bodies of COVID-19 patients as hallways packed with the sick

    • More EU countries back plan to waive law requiring airlines give cash refunds

    • IMF lends another $642 million to Ecuador as coronavirus ravages country

    • France extends state of emergency order until July 24

    • Singapore eases some lockdown measures as domestic cases decline

    • US case total tops 1.1 million

    • Japan joins US in fast-tracking remdesivir

    *  *  *

    Update (1725ET): In what has been a relatively quiet day for virus news, South American newspapers are reporting on a prison riot in Venezuela that has left almost 50 prisoners dead. The riot reportedly started on Friday, according to local newspaper Ultimas Noticias and Reuters.

    Prison riots have occurred in Italy, China and elsewhere as prisoners, forced to live in crowded conditions, rebel over prohibitions against visitors while outbreaks are virtually left unchecked.

    Opposition lawmakers reportedly blamed the riots on new rules banning visitors from bringing food for the inmates. The riot took place at Los Llanos Penitentiary Center in Guanare in the western state of Portuguesa.

    To date, Venezuela has confirmed 335 coronavirus cases and 10 deaths from the virus, but the outbreak is believed to be much more widespread. And the further plunge in oil prices caused by the outbreak has only exacerbated one of the world’s worst humanitarian crises.

    At least  46 prisoners are believed to have died, along with another 60 who were injured, many seriously.

    In a local media interview, Prisons Minister Iris Varela said the riot resulted from an escape attempt. On twitter, local accounts claimed guns and grenades were used by the prisoners, and that the Warden of the prison had been shot and badly wounded.

    The Venezuela Prisons Observatory posted photos of what appeared to be bodies lying on a blood-stained concrete patio.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    It said there were 2,500 prisoners in the jail, which is designed to hold 750.

     

    *  *  *

    Update (1325ET): As Italy and Spain continue to tiptoe toward reopening, France has decided to take a U-turn and extend its “State of Emergency” – an order that undergirds the strict legally-enforced lockdown in France – until July 24, an unprecedented two-month extension that will almost certainly infuriate thousands of French citizens.

    Though, to be sure, fear of the virus runs deep in France, just like it does in Italy and Spain where many residents – especially the vulnerable – express trepidation about reopening. But French Health Minister Olivier Véran said Saturday that the a bill to extend the deadline will be put to France’s parliament on Monday.

    “We are going to have to live with the virus for a while,” Interior Minister Christophe Castaner said after a cabinet meeting.

    Travellers to France, including French citizens returning home, will face a compulsory two-week quarantine and possible isolation when they arrive in the country to help slow the spread of coronavirus, the health minister said.

    Véran said the duration and conditions of the quarantine would be defined in a decree to be published. Decisions to isolate people would be scrutinised by judges to ensure they are justified and fair, he added.

    To be sure, France is still planning on easing some conditions on May 11, and then some more on May 17. But some measures – like ensuring restaurants and retailers don’t allow the number of customers to reach full capacity – will likely persist for a couple more months, according to France 24.

    President Macron said Friday during a ‘May Day’ address that the French people shouldn’t expect life to go back to normal immediately after the first restrictions are lifted on May 11.

    Norway recently announced plans to extend a ban on large gatherings through the summer until summer, and many officials, including NYC Mayor de Blasio and NY Gov. Cuomo have warned that concerts, shows and music festivals might not return for some time.

    In other news, Reuters reports that Germany, Italy and Spain have joined a call by 12 EU governments to suspend rules requiring airlines to offer full cash refunds as more airlines – including Ryanair –  implement mass layoffs or file for bankruptcy.

    “I’m glad a very large majority of member states are supporting my request to authorise airlines and maritime groups to temporarily use vouchers when trips are cancelled, so as to relieve their cash reserves while protecting passengers’ rights to a refund,” French transport minister Jean-Baptiste Djebbari told Reuters in a statement.

    Finally, the IMF said Saturday it would lend another $643 billion to Ecuador as it grapples with one of the deadliest outbreaks in the region while also struggling with the financial whiplash caused by the global drop in oil prices.

    *  *  *

    Update (1130ET): New York suffered its first rebound (to 299) in COVID-19 deaths since April 25th. Governor Cuomo says this is “bad news”  though added optimistically that hospitalizations declined further.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Additionally, 12.3% of New York state has tested positive for novel coronavirus antibodies, Gov. Andrew Cuomo said at a briefing on Saturday.

    As a whole, 19.9% of New York City has tested positive for antibodies, the preliminary study found. At 27.6%, the Bronx is reporting the highest rate of infection, which Cuomo said the state would further investigate.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Italy also suffered a surprise resurgence in COVID-19 deaths…adding 474, the most since April 21st.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    *  *  *

    For the first time in seven weeks, adult Spaniards are enjoying a jog or a bike ride outdoors as PM Pedro Sanchez lifted restrictions on outdoor exercise.

    Spain’s death toll and case count have been trending lower (interspersed with a handful of one-day spikes) for more than two weeks. A week ago, the government lifted restrictions requiring children to remain indoors, allowing young children to leave their homes (accompanied by an adult) for the first time in a month and a half.

    Spain’s lockdown has been among the most strict in the world (in some ways, it approximated the lockdown faced by the tens of millions of Chinese residents of Hubei).

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Of course, that remains to be seen: One of the biggest stories of the past week has been the uptick in Germany’s ‘infection rate’ – known as “R” – which approximates the average number of people infected by an infected patient. So long as the ratio stays below 1, then the outbreak is slowing. But mid-week, Germany revealed that its ‘R’ rate had jumped from 0.70 to 0.96 in the week since some more shops were allowed to reopen.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    However, now that people are back out and about, Spain is imposing a new restriction: the government is requiring masks to be work on all public transport as of Monday, the prime minister said earlier this week as he outlined plans to relax the lockdown.

    To ensure that nobody is unable to comply, the government will hand out millions of masks to reduce the risk of contagion, Pedro Sánchez said in an address to the nation on Saturday afternoon. He pleaded with Spaniards to exercise responsibility when the next phase towards ending the lockdown begins on Monday.

    Sánchez said Saturday that 6 million masks would be handed out at transport hubs, while 7 million would be handed out by local councils, and 1.5 million would be distributed by the Red Cross and other NGOs. He added that the success of Spain’s phased emergence from lockdown would depend on “social and personal responsibility,” adding, “the key to the de-escalation isn’t just about personal decisions. The key will be tens of thousands of decisions taken at home, on public transport, at work, and in free time.”

    Spain’s Health Ministry said Saturday there have been 216,582 confirmed cases of the virus in the country, and 25,100 deaths.

    In Italy, concerns about the reopening are intensifying have led to deep political divisions about how the process should be conducted, as millions worry about another devastating spike in deaths.

    As Spain and Italy prepare to lift all remaining restrictions, Russia is finding that its national lockdown, which was extended to mid-March last month by President Putin, might not be long, or strict, enough.

    It’s becoming increasingly clear that the virus has already deeply penetrated Moscow society, and spread far and wide enough to create a serious problem in the massive country of 144 million. New daily nfections in Russia have risen by 20% as officials worry that hospitals across the country – but particularly in Moscow – might be overrun.

    More than 9,000 new infections were reported on Saturday, another daily record. Once again, they were mostly in Moscow, where the mayor said earlier this week that the government might establish temporary hospitals in sporting arenas or shopping centers to help manage the flow of seriously ill patients, following several other European countries, including Spain and the UK.

    Russia has 124,054 confirmed cases, including Prime Minister Mikhail Mishustin, who had been charged with leading the country’s response. Russia’s death toll stood at 1,222.

    Its death toll stood at 1,222 as of Saturday morning, although many suspect that the true number of cases is likely much larger, as is the number of deaths.

    Over in North America, the government of AMLO, the far-left anti-establishment leader who has been skeptical of the virus from the beginning, has just been exposed for actively trying to cover up the extent of the crisis.

    In the US, the number of confirmed cases climbed to 1,104,345 as of Saturday morning, while the number of deaths hit 239,236.

    And here’s a rundown of where every country stands re: ‘the virus curve’.

    Relatives of patients burst into a Mexican hospital on Friday night and discovered bodies in bags on stretchers crammed into a room. Several of the families discovered the bodies of their loved ones, deaths that hadn’t officially been reported in Mexico’s numbers.

    Watch the video below:

    Finally, Singapore said it will start easing some of its distancing measures after reporting a drop in locally transmitted coronavirus cases. The average daily number, excluding migrant workers living in dormitories, of locally transmitted cases has dropped to 12 in the past week from 25 the week before, as the country’s outbreak has been almost entirely confined to impoverished migrant workers who represent a kind of second-class caste in Singaporean society.

    As more scientists question the wisdom of the US going all in on remdesivir, Japan said Saturday that it woud fasttrack a review of the antiviral drug remdesivir so that it can hopefully be approved for domestic COVID-19 patients. We suspect US investors will be watching for results of that study.


    Tyler Durden

    Sat, 05/02/2020 – 20:22

  • US Embassy: Israeli West Bank Annexation Can Move Forward Without A Palestinian State
    US Embassy: Israeli West Bank Annexation Can Move Forward Without A Palestinian State

    The recently established US Embassy in Jerusalem (moved from Tel Aviv last year as part of Trump’s plan) has confirmed that the world will soon see the most controversial element of Trump’s peace plan put into effect: Israeli annexation over broad swathes of the West Bank, particularly the Jordan Valley.

    “As we have made consistently clear, we are prepared to recognize Israeli actions to extend Israeli sovereignty and the application of Israeli law to areas of the West Bank that the [Trump peace plan] foresees as being part of the State of Israel,” a top US Embassy official told the Times of Israel on Friday.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Prime Minister Benjamin Netanyahu with US Ambassador to Israel David Friedman (center). Image source: US Embassy/Times of Israel.

    The statement made clear that “Israeli actions” will be validated with or without recognition of a Palestinian state, something which on paper at least Trump’s ‘deal of the century’ offered. 

    Though the deal offers statehood, the Palestinians have rejected the US-Israeli brokered Trump peace plan from the start, given they simply had no involvement or were not fundamentally consulted. 

    Ultimately such a brazen annexation, which as we noted before PM Netanyahu said will take place as early as within two months, or likely early summer, will essentially end the path to statehood.

    But maybe this was the whole point to begin with: design and orchestrate a ‘peace plan’ which ultimately preempts any real path to statehood all while charging the Palestinian side with not being on board, or as has been heard many times before: the Israelis can claim “we don’t have a partner for peace”. 

    Should Israeli annexation indeed move forward by this summer, as Netanyahu envisions, it could potentially unleash protests and violence on the level of a third Intifiada. Palestinian Authority leaders as well as Hamas have vowed that such an extensive new Israeli land grab will be resisted by call costs. 


    Tyler Durden

    Sat, 05/02/2020 – 20:05

  • SpaceX: Camel's Nose Under The Tent Of Rapid Space Militarization
    SpaceX: Camel’s Nose Under The Tent Of Rapid Space Militarization

    Via Southfront.org,

    In the last several decades, and certainly in the post-9/11 environment in which the previous restrictions on the militarization of the American society largely disappeared, the US national security establishment has expand not only by creating new programs and agencies, but also by co-opting non-state actors. Many a US think-tank is now little more than an extension of some US government agency, conducting research to validate previously arrived-at conclusions in furtherance of a specific institutional agenda. Likewise many corporations have gone beyond being mere defense or intelligence contractors. Rather, their business activities are from the outset designed to be readily weaponizable, meshing seamlessly with the armed services and intelligence agencies.

    It is not entirely clear how the process works, for there does not appear to be a system of contract awards for specific deliverables. Rather, it seems these capabilities are developed on the initiative of specific businesses which speculate their efforts will be utilized by the US national security establishment ever on the lookout for technological “game-changers”. Moreover, given the unchecked growth of the US national security budget, these entrepreneurs can operate in high confidence their efforts will also be financially rewarded by the intelligence and defense establishments, even if they are not commercially viable.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Falcon 9 launch in November 2019, which carried 60 Starlink satellites, via SpaceX.

    There have been numerous examples of initially civilian applications being put to use for the benefit of US national security institutions. Facebook has made its databases available to various agencies to test facial recognition technologies, for example. Google and Amazon make their cloud capabilities available to the Pentagon and the intelligence communities. The opposition to China’s Huawei 5G networks and cell phones appears to be motivated by the concern these systems do not have backdoors installed for the benefit of US national security state.

    Elon Musk’s business empire has benefited from its proximity to the US national security state. Musk, an immigrant from the Republic of South Africa, has made his initial fortune by creating PayPal. While Musk has sold his remaining interest in PayPal in 2002, that entity has since then engaged in furthering US national security agendas by blocking payments to organizations which were critical of US policies. This, however, is probably more of a reflection of the subservience of US tech firms to the US government than of Musk’s original intent.

    Nevertheless, the timing of Musk’s departure from PayPal and the entry into the space business is noteworthy. Already in the late 1990s, there were rumblings in the United States about the desirability of militarizing space and building up anti-ballistic missile defenses, ostensibly against the so-called “rogue states” of North Korea and Iran. These initiatives gained considerable impetus in 2001, following the election of the Bush-Cheney administration which promptly moved to end the ABM Treaty as the first step toward the future of weaponization of space.

    Space-X’s establishment in 2002, the same year the ABM Treaty collapsed due to the Bush Administration abrogation, seems entirely too convenient to be a mere coincidence, even though the stated aims of the company are mainly commercial. Still, it is easy to imagine why a firm focused on the development of low-cost, possibly reusable, space launch vehicles would be useful to the Pentagon. Creating a government program with the same objective would have attracted unnecessary attention. There would be budget appropriations battles, congressional testimony, various forms of oversight, and the inevitable domestic and international opposition to such destabilizing and provocative initiatives.

    Providing Space-X with technological assistance, allowing it to hire government specialists, then giving it access to lucrative government space launch orders, is a far more attractive proposition. Moreover, the bypassing of the normal defense contracting system actually meant considerable cost savings, thanks to Musk’s red tape-cutting techniques. It’s design bureau functioned in a fashion akin to Lockheed’s famous “skunk works” which developed extremely ambitious projects such as the U-2 and SR-71 in large part thanks to being able to fly “under the radar” (no pun intended). However, since that time Lockheed ballooned into a massive “too big to fail” defense contractor which delivers costly and poorly performing aircraft.

    Musk’s fantasies about colonizing Mars and selling seats on orbital space flights proved a very effective cover for the corporation’s core military applications. Moreover, Space-X’s status as a private corporation allows it to defray some of the research and development costs through genuine commercial activities. Yet one has to wonder whether SpaceX success would have been as spectacular if it weren’t for privileged access to government facilities. SpaceX has been able to piggy-back on the massive US government investment in space launch facilities. It is able to operate out of not only Cape Canaveral and the Kennedy Space Center, but even from the Vandenberg Air Force Base. The speed with which SpaceX was able to develop, test, and deploy several different new rocket engine design of the Kestrel, Merlin, Raptor, and Draco families also may be due to privileged access to technologies developed for NASA and military space programs.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Even though SpaceX was founded in 2002, it won a $100 million USAF space launch contract in 2005 and the NASA Commercial Orbital Transportation Services (COTS) contract in 2006, even though the first orbital mission of the Falcon I rocket would not take place until 2008. USAF awarded another $1 billion contract to SpaceX in early 2008, even before the first Falcon I flight. SpaceX has become the de-facto research and development branch of NASA when it comes to manned spaceflight. The 2014 NASA contract for the Crew Dragon has so far resulted in one successful docking with the International Space Station, though without a crew on board, and was followed by a successful splashdown. The larger Starship reusable heavy manned spacecraft is expected to start flying in the 2020s.

    Competition from United Launch Services and even Boeing notwithstanding, there is little doubt SpaceX is to US manned spaceflight what Boeing is to heavy commercial aircraft and Lockheed-Martin to “fifth-generation” fighters. It has become the primary go-to contractor of such systems for both commercial and military US government applications, with the competitors being maintained in existence with occasional contracts largely as insurance against spectacular failure of SpaceX.

    SpaceX portfolio of reusable space launch vehicles, manned spacecraft, and most recently also satellites means that the company is well positioned to serve as a one-stop shopping center for the newly created branch of the US armed forces. Given the United States’ desire to weaponize space as part of its effort to undermine strategic nuclear deterrence of rival powers, namely the Russian Federation and the People’s Republic of China, there is every reason to expect SpaceX will be a recipient of considerable financial largesse from the USSF.

    Arguably the most intriguing project SpaceX is pursuing is Starlink, a proposed network of over four thousand miniature satellites whose ostensible aim is to provide broadband internet service to the entire planet. However, the interest in Starlink demonstrated by the US military suggests that, once again, this is at the very least a dual-use project. Articles discussing the military’s interest in Starlink cite the possibility of it becoming the replacement for the aging J-STARS airborne ground target acquisition radars, suggesting these satellites’ emissions can be used to track moving land objects.. If that is indeed the case, they could also serve the role of anti-ballistic missile warning satellites, and even be used to track stealth aircraft, since the constellation of satellites would function as a massive distributed multi-static radar array.

    The mad pace of SpaceX has not been without mishaps. The Crew Dragon, in particular, suffered a number of embarrassing failures, and it may yet be that the corner-cutting hell-for-leather approach the corporation may yet lead to disaster when applied to the considerably more demanding problem of manned spaceflight. Other private entrepreneurs, such as Burt Rutan’s Scaled Composites and Richard Branson’s Virgin Galactic, either suffered fatal accidents that greatly delayed their respective programs or prompted their shut-down. G_7 SpaceX, however, differs from them in that its main customer is the US government that is greatly interested in having the USSF dominate the Earth’s orbit in the same way as the USN dominates the global ocean by establishing large-scale permanent presence of US military personnel in space. The US government has gambled SpaceX will deliver products necessary for such domination. Whether it can do that still remains to be seen.


    Tyler Durden

    Sat, 05/02/2020 – 19:40

  • Ex-Green Beret Was Behind Failed Attempt At 'Armed Invasion' Of Venezuela Funded By US Billionaires
    Ex-Green Beret Was Behind Failed Attempt At ‘Armed Invasion’ Of Venezuela Funded By US Billionaires

    As we’ve recently observed, Washington’s push to oust Maduro is by no means over, even if seemingly less intensified as well and central to media coverage. Currently for example, there’s some level of build-up of US naval ships in the Caribbean ordered by the administration off Venezuela’s coast for what the White House had described early last month as “counter-narcotics operations”.

    And now the Associated Press has unearthed the stunning details of a prior failed coup attempt that seem straight out of a Hollywood script, given it involved a plot centered on about 300 “heavily armed volunteers” who unsuccessfully tried to topple Nicolas Maduro in a “private coup” allegedly funded by US billionaires.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Former Green Beret Jordan Goudreau (center). Image via Silvercorp USA/Instagram/Daily Mail.

    The American overseer of the whole operation was a former Green Beret who ran secret training camps in neighboring Colombia, with the aim to infiltrate the group into Venezuela in order to fuel momentum for a broader ‘armed popular uprising’ à la covert CIA-style Syria regime change ops. 

    The details are as follows according to the AP:

    The plan was simple, but perilous. Some 300 heavily armed volunteers would sneak into Venezuela from the northern tip of South America. Along the way, they would raid military bases in the socialist country and ignite a popular rebellion that would end in President Nicolás Maduro’s arrest.

    What could go wrong? As it turns out, pretty much everything.

    The ringleader of the plot is now jailed in the U.S. on narcotics charges. Authorities in the U.S. and Colombia are asking questions about the role of his muscular American adviser, a former Green Beret. And dozens of desperate combatants who flocked to secret training camps in Colombia said they have been left to fend for themselves amid the coronavirus pandemic.

    And like other more recent disastrous failed plots to oust the socialist strongman in Caracas, such as last year’s short-lived rebellion a small group of Juan Guaido loyal officers, AP reports the “The failed attempt to start an uprising collapsed under the collective weight of skimpy planning, feuding among opposition politicians and a poorly trained force that stood little chance of beating the Venezuelan military.”

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    After leaving the Army in 2016, Goudreau worked as a private security contractor in Puerto Rico and set up Silvercorp USA in 2018. Image via SilvercorpsUSA/Daily Mail.

    It’s unclear the extent to which it had the official backing or coordination with US intelligence, or the degree to which it was an entirely private, ‘rogue’ undertaking, though Venezuelan state media has slammed the newly emerged plot as another failed CIA coup attempt.

    Though at times while pitching and discussing his plan, ex-Green Beret Goudrea  who in 2018 established his private security firm Silvercorp USA — had contact with individuals linked to President Trump (such as a veteran personal bodyguard of Trump’s) as well as a who’s who of shady defected Venezuelan military officers, the AP report claims that any Washington officials or people of influence who caught a whiff of his bizarre plan rejected it and distanced themselves from it.

    lt all began, according to the AP, after April 2019 with what’s colorfully described as a “Star Wars summit of anti-Maduro goofballs”. The report details:

    Planning for the incursion began after an April 30, 2019, barracks revolt by a cadre of soldiers who swore loyalty to Maduro’s would-be replacement, Juan Guaidó, the opposition leader recognized by the U.S. and some 60 other nations as Venezuela’s rightful leader. Contrary to U.S. expectations at the time, key Maduro aides never joined with the opposition and the government quickly quashed the uprising.

    A few weeks later, some soldiers and politicians involved in the failed rebellion retreated to the JW Marriott in Bogota, Colombia. The hotel was a center of intrigue among Venezuelan exiles. For this occasion, conference rooms were reserved for what one participant described as the “Star Wars summit of anti-Maduro goofballs” — military deserters accused of drug trafficking, shady financiers and former Maduro officials seeking redemption.

    Among those angling in the open lobby was Jordan Goudreau, an American citizen and three-time Bronze Star recipient for bravery in Iraq and Afghanistan, where he served as a medic in U.S. Army special forces, according to five people who met with the former soldier.

    Those he interacted with in the U.S. and Colombia described him in interviews alternately as a freedom-loving patriot, a mercenary and a gifted warrior scarred by battle and in way over his head.

    The 43-year old Goudreau soon landed a spot helping to organize security for the February 2019 controversial ‘Live Aid freedom-type’ opposition supporting concert put on by British billionaire Richard Branson, held on the Venezuelan-Colombian border.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    British billionaire Richard Branson on the Venezuelan-Colombian border at his concern in support of opposition leader Juan Guaido, via Getty Images/Daily Mail.

    Goudreau had later written of the event: “Controlling chaos on the Venezuela border where a dictator looks on with apprehension,” according to an Instagram post showing him working the concert, which attempted to gem up popular support for ousting Maduro.

    The invasion plans involving 300 trained and armed rebel soldiers hinged on Goudreau working closely with a ringleader of the Venezuelan military deserters, Cliver Alcalá, previously a retired major general in Venezuela’s army, as AP continues:

    Goudreau told Alcalá his company could prepare the men for battle, according to the three sources. The two sides discussed weapons and equipment for the volunteer army, with Goudreau estimating a budget of around $1.5 million for a rapid strike operation.

    Goudreau told participants at the meeting that he had high-level contacts in the Trump administration who could assist the effort, although he offered few details, the three people said. Over time, many of the people involved in the plan to overthrow Maduro would come to doubt his word.

    From the outset, the audacious plan split an opposition coalition already sharply divided by egos and strategy. There were concerns that Alcalá, with a murky past and ties to the regime through a brother who was Maduro’s ambassador to Iran, couldn’t be trusted. Others worried about going behind the backs of their Colombian allies and the U.S. government.

    However, training camps along the border appeared spartan and ill-prepared, with recruits sleeping in barren conditions with lack of enough food and weaponry.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Goudreau marketing himself as a slick head of a multi-national contractor firm, via SilvercorpUSA/Daily Mail.

    But documented evidence shows plans for major weapons shipments, some of which reportedly did arrive and were later recovered inside Venezuela’s borders by Maduro’s military: 

    The volunteers also shared with Mattos a three-page document listing supplies needed for a three-week operation, which he provided to AP. Items included 320 M4 assault rifles, an anti-tank rocket launcher, Zodiac boats, $1 million in cash and state-of-the-art night vision goggles. The document’s metadata indicates it was created by Goudreau on June 16.

    “Unfortunately, there’s a lot of cowboys in this business who try to peddle their military credentials into a big pay day,” said Mattos.

    The CIA among other US agencies would deny ever having anything to do with Goudreau and the ultimately failed plan. 

    However, the report emphasizes it had the support of particular American billionaire businessmen. AP describes

    When the Colombians checked with their CIA counterparts in Bogota, they were told that the former Green Beret was never an agent. Alcalá was then told by his hosts to stop talking about an invasion or face expulsion, the former Colombian official said.

    It’s unclear where Alcalá and Goudreau got their backing, and whatever money was collected for the initiative appears to have been meager. One person who allegedly promised support was Roen Kraft, an eccentric descendant of the cheese-making family who — along with former Trump bodyguard Schiller — was among those meeting with opposition envoys in Miami and Washington.

    At some point, Kraft started raising money among his own circle of fellow trust-fund friends for what he described as a “private coup” to be carried out by Silvercorp, according to two businessmen whom he asked for money.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Getty images

    The ragtag poorly planned ‘invasion’ was thwarted by the Venezuelan military essentially at the border from the start:

    The plot quickly crumbled in early March when one of the volunteer combatants was arrested after sneaking across the border into Venezuela from Colombia.

    Shortly after, Colombian police stopped a truck transporting a cache of brand new weapons and tactical equipment worth around $150,000, including spotting scopes, night vision goggles, two-way radios and 26 American-made assault rifles with the serial numbers rubbed off. Fifteen brown-colored helmets were manufactured by High-End Defense Solutions, a Miami-based military equipment vendor owned by a Venezuelan immigrant family.

    Currently, the main organizers, including Alcalá and Goudreau himself, are in prison. The ex-Green Beret is now in US federal custody reportedly on narcotic charges, but the details remain unclear. 


    Tyler Durden

    Sat, 05/02/2020 – 19:15

  • We Need to Shut Them Down…
    We Need to Shut Them Down…

    Authored by Robert Wright via The American Institute for Economic Research,

    We need to shut them down… Governments that is.

    At least the ones that cannot pay their bills because of unnecessary economic lockdown orders.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    I have tried just about everything in these pages to induce politicians to see that they are pushing the worst policies since at least the New Deal and are not going to get reelected if they continue their lockdown policies, which could end in bloody revolt if the power or another essential system goes out

    I’ve also tried to induce Americans to sue for their freedom on both civil and Constitutional grounds. I’ve tried to stir their patriotism, and to shame them into rising above the status of mindless test subjects or medieval peasants. I’ve tried to get “Progressives” to see that they can’t have both Social Security and government health insurance simultaneously without increasing the probability of future fiascos. 

    I have also proffered two separate ways out of this messone recently implicitly endorsed by Elon Musk, and another that no self-respecting social scientist could dispute. And I suggested that COVID-19 life insurance would help Americans to face death more like their brave ancestors, or younger selves, did at Woodstock.

    But oh the powers that be, be a mighty whale some doth call Leviathan, with the magical power of creating something out of nothing, or rather, like the Wizard of Oz, appearing to create something out of nothing! So the money doth spew forth from the whale’s blow hole in mighty bursts to assuage and calm those who might wish it ill. And worked so far it has.

    That the beast might spew forth again, some state and local governments complain of pecuniary distress. But to satiate their greed for power and lucre will be our undoing. The best that our ship’s captain, Ishmael Trump, can do right now is to make clear that state and local governments that remain locked down shall never hear “Thar she blows!”

    The penultimate power, before resorting to the harpoon, be the power of the purse, an old expression not so much about money per se as the real resources that money can command. Typically tyrants try to seize resources to strengthen their tyranny. Today, we are faced with tyrants who are deliberately destroying resources despite ample evidence from Sweden and the five free states that they need not do so to successfully slow the spread of the novel coronavirus.

    In fact, as I predicted, the New York Times-Columbia “we are all going to get COVID and die” model has been way off, even in the five free states. South Dakota’s cases and deaths, for example, are about 7 percent of those predicted and some counties expected to be overrun by now haven’t had any reported cases, most of which have occurred in Minnehaha and Lincoln counties, which share parts of Sioux Falls, the state’s eastern metropolis of 190,000. A big hunk of those cases stemmed from the infamous but super essential Smithfield pork processing plant.

    I do not have a ready explanation for why places that imposed less extreme mandatory restrictions have fared about as well on “flattening the curve” as those that have locked down. It could be self-selection but Stockholm and Omaha are real cities, not one stop sign hamlets, and even there infections and deaths have not run rampant

    Something like the Peltzman Effect could be at play, meaning that people in free areas take fewer unnecessary risks because they know that they may be interacting with infected people while the poor souls in locked down areas assume, often wrongly, that they can crowd into a Walmart because everybody is on lock down and the government is “doing something,” even if that something is utterly irrational, like keeping beaches open while closing beach parking lots. That bit of brilliance had Floridians parking in the lots of shuttered businesses across A1A and then congregating at the few crosswalks!

    In fact, in retrospect, a 99 percent 3-week shelter-in-place for everyone (except COVID-19 HCPs and first responders) for any reason except dire emergency (and I don’t mean the dog needing to defecate) would have been preferable to what has evolved. A simple stay law deferring all debts for three weeks would have been far preferable to seemingly endless bailouts. 

    That approach would have been unconstitutional too, and people would have died, but America would have been rid of COVID-19 by early April and thereafter could have concentrated on border controls and testing/tracing a la South Korea for any new outbreaks. The economy would have experienced a shock but one that it would already be rebounding from because of the certainty of the policy. That “nuclear” option is now off the table as we are too weak to suffer such a shock now.

    For whatever reason, many governments persist in destroying resources and fundamental liberties on the basis of a debunked epidemiological model.

    The national government should actively intercede, as it did to protect Americans’ rights during the Civil War and Civil Rights Movement, neither of which were very civil. But even if it doesn’t want to interfere with states’ rights today, under no circumstances should it FUND their oppression.

    Verily, I believe any attempt to do so will lead to a tax revolt, probably of the quiet variety at first.

    There is just no way Americans in the free states are going to fund the continued subjugation of their fellow Americans in California, Michigan, and elsewhere, which have essentially been invaded and occupied by their own governments

    But what then shall the poor state and municipal governments do? Obviously, they need to lift most economic restrictions so that taxes again begin to flow in. And they also need to cut their “nonessential” workers, which is essentially most of them. In the short term anyway, we need courts and police officers and other first responders. (Ultimately, we do not need any of them but this is no time for novelty, even if we have rich comparative and historical examples from which to draw.) But teachers, recorders, prothonotaries, and all sorts of other bureaucrats need to be furloughed immediately. (If you think that many will then join the ranks of protesters, you’re starting to understand the power of the purse! They can arrest some protestors, but not all of them, especially with their budgets so tight.)

    There is no reason to exclude national government employees from furloughs either. The bailouts and other forms of hush money already paid out has to be repaid somehow, through higher taxes or lower expenditures. Why do we need parts of the SEC if no corporations are issuing securities? What good is the EPA if factories are shuttered? The USDA if meat processors are closed? What does the Department of Education do even in normal times? Surely most of the Department of the Interior can be let go. 

    Is furloughing 75 percent of government workers a draconian suggestion? Absolutely, but why shouldn’t government employees suffer along with the rest of us? You can’t expect civvies to bear all the burden of flattening an already pretty flat curve indefinitely. Plus, unlike the private sector, which is all “essential” or it wouldn’t exist, we know from budget battle government shutdowns that much of the national government is nonessential. Life goes on, and some think improves, without it. 

    The nonpartisan Congressional Budget Office (CBO) estimated the deadweight loss of the 35-day partial federal government shutdown in early 2019 at only $3 billion. We will be lucky to get out of the current mess for $3 trillion in deadweight losses.

    Governments messed up by botching testing, then not stopping the spread of the virus when it was still manageable, then did so again by shutting down too much of the economy for too long to cover their incompetence, and now they want to be rewarded with continued nonessential employment, and the forced redistribution of wealth from all Americans to Constitution-smashing state governments? Where is the last straw?


    Tyler Durden

    Sat, 05/02/2020 – 18:50

  • Andy Hall Says "Unlikely" We See Negative WTI Again, But Doubtful On "V-Shaped" Recovery In Oil
    Andy Hall Says “Unlikely” We See Negative WTI Again, But Doubtful On “V-Shaped” Recovery In Oil

    Longtime oil investor Andy Hall says he thinks it is “unlikely” that we ever wind up seeing negative WTI pricing again, calling the move in the commodity “pretty shocking” in a Bloomberg TV interview on Friday. 

    The main question, he contends, is whether or not the industry is going to see a “V” shape recovery from here. And he doesn’t seem to be confident that it’s going to be anytime soon.

    “How quickly are people going to go back to their prime behavior, I mean, maybe in some respects the answer is never,” Hall said, talking about a potential recovery. Instead, Hall says he sees a major recalibration of demand for oil globally.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    “There’s a thought now with production being shut in, rig counts falling, investment in future supply being reduced, that we’re potentially setting ourselves up for a potential future supply shock, but all this production is not going away, it’s all potentially there, and can be brought back fairly rapidly,” he continued.

    He then urged investors away from oil: “Personally, I think there are better ways to invest one’s money than trying to predict these chaotic movements.”

    Recall, on April 20, the May WTI contract made history after it settled at negative $37.63. On the same day, the June contract finished the day down 18%.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    We took the time on April 20 to explain why we thought the negative oil prices had happened in the first place.

    “This happens when a physical futures contract find no buyers close to or at expiry,” we wrote. 

    A physical contract such as the NYMEX WTI has a delivery point at Cushing, OK, & date, in this occurrence May.  So people who hold the contract at the end of the trading window have to take physical delivery of the oil they bought on the futures market.  This is very rare.

    It means that in the last few days of the futures trading cycle, (which is tomorrow for this one) speculative or paper futures positions start rolling over to the next contract. This is normally a pretty undramatic affair.

    What is happening today is trades or speculators who had bought the contract are finding themselves unable to resell it, and have no storage booked to get delivered the crude in Cushing, OK, where the delivery is specified in the contract.

    This means that all the storage in Cushing is booked, and there is no price they can pay to store it, or they are totally inexperienced in this game and are caught holding a contract they did not understand the full physical aspect of as the time clock expires.

    You can watch Hall’s interview with Bloomberg here:


    Tyler Durden

    Sat, 05/02/2020 – 18:25

  • What Caused The New York Vs. London Gold Price Spread And Why It Persists
    What Caused The New York Vs. London Gold Price Spread And Why It Persists

    Written by Jan Nieuwenhuijs for Voima Insight,

    The spread between the New York futures and London spot gold price was initially caused by logistics and manufacturing constraints, and likely persists because of credit restrictions.

    If you read into the economics of commodities, much of it is about geography. The Corona crisis and its effects on global aviation has disrupted large shipments of gold, and created price discrepancies geographically. Normally, bullion is transported in passenger planes, but as those have stopped flying, there is more friction in bullion logistics. Partially, this created the spread between the futures gold price in New York and the London spot price. In my view, the spread persists because arbitragers don’t have enough access to funding, and demand in New York remains elevated.

    How it Started

    On March 14, 2020, President Trump started curbing passenger flights between Europe and the US. Including those from Switzerland, where the four largest gold refineries of the world are located. This didn’t happen in isolation. Passenger flights all over the world were being curbed. One of the most important airports in London—home of the largest gold spot market by trading volume—is Heathrow. Since March 10, 2020, arrivals at Heathrow started declining from 600 flights per day, to 250 two weeks later.

    On March 23, 2020, three refineries in Switzerland where temporarily shut down due to the coronavirus. Reuters reported:

    Three of the world’s largest gold refineries said on Monday they had suspended production in Switzerland for at least a week after local authorities ordered the closure of non-essential industry to curtail the spread of the coronavirus.

    The refineries – Valcambi, Argor-Heraeus and PAMP – are in the Swiss canton of Ticino bordering Italy, where the virus has killed more than 5,000 people in Europe’s worst outbreak.

    Normally, airlines transporting gold and refineries manufacturing small bars from big bars, or vice versa, keep the price of gold products across the globe in sync. If supply and demand for gold in one region is out of whack relative to another, arbitragers step in (buy low, sell high). But with planes not flying and refinery capacity crippled, everything changed.

    Making delivery at the New York futures market, the COMEX, wasn’t that simple anymore. As we all know, shorts and longs on the COMEX are mostly naked. They either don’t have the metal to make delivery (shorts), or don’t have the money to take delivery (longs). In normal circumstances this isn’t a problem because neither shorts or longs are interested in physical delivery. They trade futures to hedge themselves or speculate. However, when sourcing small bars from Switzerland—only 100-ounce and kilobars are eligible for delivery of the most commonly traded COMEX futures contract—became “more difficult,” the shorts became nervous.

    Likely, after the refineries closed, shorts wanted to close their positions as soon as possible to avoid making delivery. Closing a short position is done by buying long futures to offset one’s position. These trades were driving up the price in New York, and the spread was born.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    The white line is London spot, blue is New York futures. Normally, the spread is close to $1.5 dollars; on March 25, 2020, the spread was $60 dollars per troy ounce.

    Usually, such a spread is closed by arbitragers (often banks). They buy spot (London) and sell futures (New York) until the gap is closed. If necessary, these arbitragers hold their position until maturity of the futures contracts, and make delivery to lock in their profit. But because flights were cancelled and refineries were shut down, the “arb” was risky and the spread didn’t close.

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    Bullion Banks Losing Money Through EFPs

    Bullion banks often have a long spot position in London and are short futures on the COMEX. When a refinery in Switzerland, for example, casts big bars (400-ounce) and sells them to a bullion bank in London, the bank hedges itself on the COMEX. This makes the bank long spot and short futures.

    Exchange For Physical” (EFP) is an OTC swap. On the COMEX website it reads:

    Exchange For Physical (EFP) allows traders to switch Gold futures positions to and from physical [spot], unallocated accounts. Quoted as dollar basis, relative the current futures prices, EFP is a key component in pricing OTC spot gold.

    (The London Bullion Market is an OTC market.)

    An EFP is usually a swap between a futures and a spot position. In banking jargon the word “EFP” also refers to, (i) having a position in both markets, and (ii) the spread in general (because the price of the EFP is equal to the difference in price between New York futures and London spot). A bullion bank that is “short EFP” is long spot and short futures.

    As mentioned, banks are most of the time short EFP. When the spread widened their short EFP starting bleeding. To avoid further losses, some banks “were forced to cover,” which added fuel to the fire. (It can also be the banks themselves started the spread to widen.) Many banks suffered severe losses.

    Currently, most refineries in Switzerland have reopened. So, why does the spread persist? After all, arbitragers can hire planes to transport gold to wherever. On April 30, 2020, the spread was still $15 dollars per troy ounce.

    Because I couldn’t figure this out myself, I asked John Reade, Chief Market Strategist of the World Gold Council, and Ole Hansen, Head of Commodity Strategy at Saxo Bank, for their views.

    Reade wrote me:

    I guess for two reasons: firstly, banks and traders probably still have large EFP positions that they haven’t been able to cover. And secondly, I doubt that risk officers and banks are prepared to allow large EFP positions to be run, so the usual arbitragers of this market cannot add to their positions, flattening the spread.

    Which is in line with what Hansen wrote me:

    While COMEX has now allowed the delivery of 400oz bars (the most popular bar size in London) and raised spot positions limits the problem has not gone away. This means that the mechanism that should balance the gold market still isn’t functioning correctly despite improving underlying physical conditions.

    Market makers [banks] have suffered major losses last month and as they tend to natural short the EFP (long OTC, short futures) the risk appetite and ability to drive it back to neutral has for now been disrupted.

    Banks lost so much money, they are cautious not to lose more. They don’t access funds to close the spread.

    Conclusion

    Generally, just the threat of delivery keeps markets in line as well. Any trader that sees an arbitrage opportunity can take position without the intention of making/taking delivery, in the knowledge that New York futures and London spot will converge. Now this certainty doesn’t prevail, traders are cautious. If they take positions but the spread widens, they lose.

    Another reason why the spread can persist, is because of strong demand in New York. Speculators that reckon the price of gold will go up will buy long futures, increasing the spread. Normally, this type of demand is smoothly translated into the spot market by arbitragers without increasing the spread. But not now.

    In a nutshell, I think that logistics and credit restrictions prevent the spread to close. However, if anyone has a better analysis please comment below.

    Addendum

    It can be, as John Reade wrote me, “banks and traders probably still have large EFP positions that they haven’t been able to cover.” I noticed on Nick Laird’s website Goldchartrus.com that EFP volume cleared through CME’s ClearPort is decreasing since early March, to levels not seen in a long time.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Perhaps this is a reflection of a market that is slowly trying to heal itself. Perhaps when all losses have been crystalized, banks, or other financial entities with sufficient firepower to hire planes etc., will close the spread.

    Another possibility is that when the new COMEX futures contract—that can be delivered in 400-ounce bars—becomes active, the spread closes. At the time of writing, the open interest of this contract is virtually zero. Time will tell.


    Tyler Durden

    Sat, 05/02/2020 – 18:00

  • "The Whole Thing's A Farce" – 'Conspiracy Theories' Thrive As Texans Flock Back To Shopping Malls
    “The Whole Thing’s A Farce” – ‘Conspiracy Theories’ Thrive As Texans Flock Back To Shopping Malls

    Texas is the largest US state to allow a substantial number of retailers and other businesses to reopen for the first time on Friday, even as many of the state’s Democratic big-city mayors urged residents and business owners to ignore the governor’s advice.

    To try and get a sense of how the beating heart of Texas retail – the Barton Creek Square in Austin – was faring during its first day back in business, the dogged reporters at the Texas Tribune ventured out to the capital city’s biggest mall to commiserate with shoppers bold enough to risk infection over a pair of sneakers, as the TT piece put it.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    What the reporters found was hardly surprising: stores barely managing to meet the 25% max-capacity threshold set by the governor, a threshold at which most businesses simply cannot operate profitably. As a result, only a handful of Barton Creek’s smaller stores were open; all of the mall’s anchor tenants – department stores that have been particularly hard hit by the downturn – remained closed.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    By the time the mall opened at 11am local time yesterday, lines of shoppers had formed, with everyone standing six feet apart, and lines forming outside stores allowing only a handful of shoppers to enter at a time.

    Most of the patrons were there to shop, it seemed – little things mostly; shoes, swimsuits etc. At least one told the TT that she was just out to get some exercise. They ranged from young couples to older singletons.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    No temperature-checkers were present when the doors opened; no masks, nor sanitizing wipes, were handed out. Shoppers were basically left to look after themselves

    John Whitton and Marina Oneill stood by their car outside wearing face masks – Oneill’s a DIY mask made by her roommate from a bra cup – waiting to buy a swimsuit (for Oneill) and shoes (for Whitton).

    “I think I’m going to buy a pair of skate shoes and take it back to 2002,” Whitton said.

    One thing that caught our attention: the surprising number of individuals interviewed by the TT to expressed doubt about the virus (one called the outbreak “a farce”) or endorsed some other conspiratorially-oriented view.

    By 10:58, a line had formed outside an entrance adjacent to the Cheesecake Factory. Patrons, many wearing masks, kept a 6-foot distance from one another, aided by blue tape pressed onto the concrete to direct them where to stand.

    The line included an avid mall-walker hoping to exercise away from the Texas heat, a mother whose young kids — each no older than 10 — all wore face masks and an Austin-area teacher convinced the coronavirus was cooked up by President Donald Trump, Russia’s President Vladimir Putin and North Korean leader Kim Jong-un.

    Though most customers wore masks, as mandated by law, only a handful of patrons wore gloves.

    Shoppers were antsy. Resigned, too.

    “I think it’s all a big farce. I believe there’s a virus, but we have bird flu and pneumonia and I’ve had several shots,” said Charlene Franz, 65, who came to the mall to fix the cracked screen on her Cricket cellphone and return a broken pair of sunglasses purchased from Loft.

    Friday was the first day that shopping malls, restaurants, retail outlets and movie theaters were allowed to reopen in Texas after being closed since the beginning of April. According to Gov Abbot’s order, stores can open, but must limit occupancy to 25% of capacity.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    As several mall employees eagerly told the TT (speaking anonymously for fear of losing their jobs), the governor’s order was actually making it harder on most small businesses, as they’re essentially being forced to operate at a loss, and employees are being called back in to work, despite the fact that both the business and the employees were probably better served with the ‘PPP’ loan-to-grant scheme and of course the beefed-up unemployment checks that, combined with the stimulus, have left many hourly workers with more in their pocket than they would otherwise have.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    It’s just something to think about: Why would anybody want to push for a reopening if it would only seal the fate of thousands of small businesses?

    Some employees returned to work reluctantly. A 42-year-old who helps operate two phone kiosks at Barton Creek said there’s “no use” reopening the mall at only a 25% occupancy.

    “None of the businesses can survive on 25% business,” said the employee, who spoke under the condition of anonymity because he wasn’t licensed by the mall to talk to the press.

    “All the major stores are closed. We get business when people come to the major stores, and then it all flows and comes to the kiosk,” he said. “We do want to get back to work, but the governor should’ve waited until we were at 50-75% so we have a chance to survive or not open at all.”

    Remember, if small businesses don’t make enough money after reopening, they’re going to need to shut down again – but this time, it might be forever.

    Yanick Almeida, 23, who works as a jeweler at one of the mall’s kiosks, said the business usually takes in several thousand dollars on a typical Friday.

    “That was before corona,” he said. Around noon, he hadn’t made a single sale.

    “If we don’t make any money, we’re going to have to shut down,” he said. “But I don’t think we’re going to go anywhere because we’ve been shut down for about two months, and so far we’re still good.”

    It’s worth wondering: Who benefits from the wholesale destruction of small business (or, in this case, the death of American malls, and the implosion of any securities backed by their debt)?

    Who benefits?


    Tyler Durden

    Sat, 05/02/2020 – 17:35

  • Fauci Links & Virus-Lab Leaks: Newsweek Report Raises Urgent, Important Questions
    Fauci Links & Virus-Lab Leaks: Newsweek Report Raises Urgent, Important Questions

    Via PeakProsperity.com,

    One of the more acutely-asked questions since the covid-19 pandemic broke out has been: Is the virus man-made?

    Debate on the matter has been wild and furious. After much investigation, Chris is now weighing in on the heels of an explosive Newsweek report.

    Newsweek reveals that as recently as last year, the US funded scientists at the Wuhan Institute of Virology focused on conducting ‘gain of function’ research on bat coronaviruses.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    The source of that funding?

    The National Institute for Allergy and Infectious Disease, headed by… (drumroll please)… Dr Anthony Fauci, lead medical expert for America’s Covid-19 presidential task force.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Now, this doesn’t mean the virus was lab-engineered as a bio-weapon. But it does suggest a naturally-occuring bat virus could have been artificially accelerated along certain vectors.

    Of course, this raises an awfully lot of urgent and important questions:

    So far, Fauci has not commented on the Newsweek report. You can be certain we will be keeping close tabs on developments from here…

    *  *  *

    Don’t forget to get your free download of Peak Prosperity’s book Prosper!. Given its relevance to preparing for any kind of crisis, pandemic or otherwise, Chris and Adam are now making it available to the world for free. To get your own copy, click here.


    Tyler Durden

    Sat, 05/02/2020 – 17:10

  • Here Is Hugh Hendry's 3-Step Plan To Save The World From Financial Collapse
    Here Is Hugh Hendry’s 3-Step Plan To Save The World From Financial Collapse

    It’s official: despite still technically retired in St Barts where he is a “luxury real-estate, mentor, advisor, paddle-surfer” according to his twitter profile, last week’s markets tweetstorm appears to have awoken if not the investing, then at least the analytical “primal urge” in the Scottish investor, who ran the Eclectica macro hedge fund for 15 years until he shuttered it in September 2017 (his farewell letter can be found is here) disgusted with how broken and impossible to navigate capital markets had become as a result of central bank intervention.

    And in case it wasn’t clear that after a three year hiatus Hendry suddenly finds himself having much more to say, late on Friday the macro investor followed up last week’s “inaugural” commentary with another massive tweetstorm (Hugh: it may be easier to just write a blog post or alternatively, send it here and we will post it), spanning hundreds of tweets, discussing – in far more whimsical, if typically Hendrian terms – what is arguably the most important concept: when does money printing become inflationary (i.e., the catalyst that will make David Einhorn’s long-term forecast correct).

    But first, as a reminder last Friday, Hugh Hendry reverted to his investor roots, discussing the fate of gold and the dollar in the helicopter money regime, what it would take for the S&P to hit 10,000, whether the entire VIX regime is now inverted due to central bank backstops, and asks the “two key questions”: are we transcending from a bull market in fear to a bull market in WTF!? And will QE infinity differ from its previous vintages by driving risk asset volatility levels higher??

    https://platform.twitter.com/widgets.js

    Hendry also touches on an old favorite topic, namely hyperinflation, a thesis which he thinks “needs stock prices to fall further and vol to rise in the conventional manner.”  But his most topical observation is what are the core criteria that will allow MMT – i.e., that fusion of the Fed and Treasury known as “helicopter money”…

    you can print as many dollars as you damn well please, as long as the yield curve doesn’t steepen and the dollar doesn’t rally precipitously…you’re good to go and MMT is dope.

    … as the alternative is game over. As usual, his stream of consciousness answers, right or wrong, were fascinating and could be read in their entirety here.

    Fast forward one week later when we got “part two” from the Scottish investor – perhaps best known for his 2010 full-frontal assault on Jeffrey Sachs and the immortal words “I recommend you panic“, when Hendry explained accurately why the current central planning takeover would lead to much more pain in the future…

    “Let’s purge this system of its rottenness. Let’s take on a recession. It’s going to be tough, people are gonna lose their jobs. They are going to lose their jobs anyway. We can spread this over 20 years, or we can get rid of it over 3 years.

    … something which was clearly correct now that we are 10 years through Hendry’s 20 year forecast, and as we can observe in real time, to keep the system from imploding due to the accumulated “rottenness”, the Fed was forced to inject and backstop a record $12 trillion in just a few short weeks.

    Below is the full stream of twitter consciousness which as expected is just as disjointed, as it is insightful, and every bit the Hugh Hendry we had grown to admire (and periodically criticize, especially after his odd “conversion” phase) over the past decade.

    In it, Hendry – and this is our best attempt at actually grasping what he is trying to say – proposes a 3 Step mechanism for fixing the broken world, one which revolves around the following i) undoing capital limitations that would enable banks to lend much more aggressively while phasing away concerns about “moral hazard” and the great bank bailout of 2008; ii) end negative rates and force positive rates across the globe; and iii) “reintroduce central bank Window Guidance” giving banks a quota for their loan book and a targeted growth rate.

    Now, we don’t necessarily agree with Hendry’s proposal – after all there is now so much debt in the world that artificially hiking rates far above r-star (which according to Deutsche Bank is now -1% in the US so one can imagine what it is in Europe and Japan) would lead to an immediate and catastrophic collapse in bond prices. On the other hand with central banks now monetizing virtually all securities, and bond markets no longer signaling anything, one would not have an incentive to sell bonds even if yields were to spike – since central banks would backstop everything. And so, in a perverted way Hendry’s proposal may actually work.

    On the other hand, and we will discuss this later, there also needs to be loan demand instead of just supply. And the fact that the government’s PPP program is not based on loans at all but forgiveable grants, is precisely what there has been over $600BN in demand for the Paycheck Protection Program. If these funding facilities were structured as plain vanillla loans at slightly punitive rates (to invoke Bagehot), there would be virtually no demand and none of the money the government and Fed had created would flow through to the economy.

    Long story, short, for there to be loan demand in the future, loans may all have to be structured as grants, which is possible for a government that can just print money but is impossible for banks which obviously can only take so many loan losses.

    In any case, the reality is that the current status quo is also completely unsustainable – as the recent bailout of everything has shown – and so it may be that trying anything would be better than merely enforcing the same broken policies that have led the entire world to the edge of hyper(deflationary/inflationary) collapse.

    And with that, without further ado, here is Hugh Hendry’s 3-step plan to save the world, as tweeted late on a Friday night..

    We’ve never seen the phenomenon of simultaneously higher equity prices and a shift higher in the VIX curve without a state of hyperinflation; except at the start of Abenomics for 1-2 months in 2012 and maybe now…

    But it’s a HUGE ask to imagine that April’s moves in VIX and SPX, allied to promises of further gigantic central bank printing, will prove a precursor to runaway inflation. But heck, let’s give it a go…

    Crudely put, it seems more likely that this 2020 helicopter money is simply filling the great landfill dump left behind by the furloughing of the global labour market this year; that the CBs have replaced the normal monetisation that would emanate from an active labour force.

    What might deliver a tipping point – where bank printing outweighs every other factor and we experience runaway prices? Clue: the answer is always in what I don’t write.

    I’m going to attempt this thought exercise tonight

    But first, let’s look at the abysmal chart of French bank lending

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    If you have the 50y data series, please share. But it kind of looks like a GOLD/SPX chart from the 1990s. Right? Hey to a man with a hammer, everything looks like a nail

    Loans were expanding @ < 2pc p.a. before the pandemic. Looking forward, I think they are going to take off; or rather, this is an absolute requisite if we are to stave of the march to serfdom and prevent political extremists attaining the highest offices of government

    But having lost so much precious time dithering, we may have to experience runaway prices as the quid pro quo. Hey! Shit happens. I really can’t imagine a scenario where a Hank Reardon saves the day. Can You?

    Ok hold that thought! Cause first we got to remember that before this calamity, Macron, decided to shake up France’s overly generous state pension system. Quelle bêtise.

    Imagine, we’ve had a 50y cycle that allocated more and more of the economic spoils to creditors and a FRENCH President just announced an attack on the proletariat. Hold on! Wait a minute? It’s like handing the DJ a cassette player…

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    But then this is the country that elected the ultra-leftie Mitterrand as President of the First Republique and he invited the Communist Party to join his government at the beginning of this cycle in 1981. I mean 1931 and the guy is a forward-thinking master of the universe but 1981 with the proletariat in it’s ascendancy and downtrodden creditors having retreated to the ghettos? It’s like a bully who can only find his courage in a crowd.

    As contrarian signals go the French are a perfect indicator of where we are in the 50y cycle of wealth redistribution. The last adopter surely must always be the President of the Republique. Right?  After 50y of this we all know that you only fight when the economy is set to boom.

    The global dream of an endless arc of rising economic prosperity is in jeopardy and this is no longer happening. Since the GFC, our Wesley Mouch type policymakers have consistently “mouched” their way through the manual of how to remedy an economy made vulnerable from a shock

    It didn’t have to be like this.

    The valedictory sound of “mission complete” first sounded along this bureaucratic blunder-path to radicalism when, and for good reason, they bought private debts at way above face value through regimes such as TARP I & II

    Normally a sure-fire thing way to restore vitality to a devastated post-shock economy. Helpful. Relevant. On point. Courageous. I loved this!

    But no bank-boom; no huge lift in GDP.

    Again, and for good, sound reasons, they declared, “mission complete”, when they really went for it and  loaded up on radicalism and opted to return huge flows of money to the private sector. Subterfuge for sure but QE enabled the banks to make significant profits – the classic market cornering -where your independent, some might say lawless, central bank buys with the objective of creating a Hunt Brothers’ Bubble in Treasuries where private banks invest heavily.

    Controversial to many for sure but no complaints from me. I give them an A+ for this exemplary move. But bank boom? Explosive GDP growth? Nada…So 2 textbook steps forward but little payback. What gives?

    They have been undone by a collective failure to grasp the principle that GDP growth rates are determined by the momentum, the mojo, the VELOCITY, if you will, that only comes from an expansion of private sector bank balance sheets.

    And hence my deliberate omission from earlier. Changes in money supply equal changes in central bank plus commercial bank assets. But moral hazard busted this equation…

    In the frenzy of fear and recriminations that was 2008-9, centrist parties whimsically determined that as taxpayers were not responsible for the GFC (really?) then they – the State – did not have a mandate to foot the recovery bill. Caution: Ideology Alert!

    As a consequence, it became preordained that all of the rise in the money supply had to come from the expansion in public or central bank balance sheets. A great depression averted but at the cost of economic dynamism. Bash them banks all you want but no loan growth begets no loan growth begets a fossilising economy were GDP can’t grow nowhere near damn fast enough to right ‘em wrongs.

    Japan anyone?

    All the central bank money printing in the world isn’t going to generate runaway prices if private sector banks are not expanding credit!!

    So what has to happen?

    It is not difficult to nudge the economy back into action. Ideology brought us here. Drop the dogma and we recover. Heck there’s even a manual residing somewhere in every government treasury department that explains exactly how to do it. Otherwise, appoint HughHendryOfficial to advise your sovereign Treasury and I promise that my team and I will generate “dynamic” GDP growth. Just tell me the number you desire cause I’m your supplier.

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Step I: First things first, on the first day of my appointment, I’m going to ditch this moral hazard nonsense and rescind the longest suicide note in economic history a.k.a., Basel III: International Regulatory Framework for Bank Supervision.

    Let me read directly from the macro manual. Rule no.1 clearly stipulates that accounting changes should be introduced to improve bank profitability which will beget more capital strength and more risk appetite; vigorous loan growth will ensue. I scream, you scream, we all need ice-cream! These bozos implemented the reverse!!!

    However, it’s just possible that the legacy of the pandemic a.k.a the phantom menace, may allow scope to reverse this idiotic regulation; let’s hope so.

    Step II, I’m going to reverse negative official interest rates in Europe and Japan. I’m not smart enough to understand everything. But I watch, listen and I try to improve. And those voices in my head keep telling me that those neg rates are counter-productive. How else do you explain the disparate performance of US banks vs. their Japanese and European cousins? Can someone chart and share this please? So I’m gonna raise rates folks; Volker, anybody?

    <!–[if IE 9]><![endif]–>

    Shorn of ideology deflation can be averted.

    But  to return to the future we most likely have to visit the past. To conceive of this, I want you to try the following mental exercise. Think of a glossy Steve Jobs, promo video showcasing not the latest iphone but instead the economic milestones of the last 50 years.

    Volker raising rates to tame inflation, quantitative restriction of the money supply, independent CBs, less powerful unions, liberalisation of the capital account, no unemployment, rising profits, risk taking, entrepreneurship, dynamic economies, the liberation of billions from the tyranny of state planning…

    Done that? OK, now I want you to replay that same movie but only in reverse, and in slow motion, with interest rates being cut to negative, with market rates determined by the public sector, with the loss of CB independence, with quantitative expansions of the money supply. With less and less risk taking and lower rates of prosperity, less technology breakthroughs, less free markets and more government-set prices. An economy where everyone is on the payroll of the State.

    It’s a dirty business but who ya gonna call? If it’s HughHendryOfficial then…

    Step III will see us quietly, and without pomp or ceremony, reintroduce central bank Window Guidance whereby commercial banks will be given a quota for their loan book and a targeted growth rate.

    The Princes of the Yen describes this technique well. The political imperative in Japan in the late 1980s was to stoke a domestic boom to deflect international pressure from the US regarding the Japanese trade surplus. Japan’s commercial banks grew their risk assets by 15pc pa between 1986 and 1989 and everything boomed.

    Normally the circuit breaker is you and me. It’s we who work out the unsustainable nature of a fiat directed bank loan expansion. It is we who see the tower of riskier and riskier loans and its power to generate reflexively even riskier loans and huge unproductive investment.

    Because, You & Me, we see things differently. It is us who head to the exit first and that’s why it’s You & Me who are going to live forever!

    Sorry, I digress, where were we? The ensuing currency crisis. It usually puts a brake on the expansion. However, Japan, with a capital account of more than $200bn, rivalling the firepower of the IMF at the time, had no currency crisis; you want to pick a fight with a monster?

    The hammer when it fell was simply an ideological change by the policymakers. Revolted by “les noveaux riches” and with a titanic battle of egos raging between MoF and the BoJ, policymakers chose to reverse their loan program. And, lacking a bid, risk assets crashed. It wasn’t about super sky high equity valuations. It was simply a change in bureaucratic ideology…damn dogmas.

    Anyway, put me in charge of the ECB and I’ll deliver 3pc GDP growth across the continent by 2023ish; it will be easy. I’ll raise official policy rates, abolish Basel III and by re-introducing window guidance, I can command that European banks expand their balance sheets by 10pc.

    Failure will be punishable by loss of quota. You wanna misbehave?

    Not convinced? I hear you: the macro community are going to see a bozzo like me coming from miles away. Rapid private sector bank lending, riskier and riskier lending, debt fuelled asset purchases, bubbles – the €uro will plummet, and my German paymasters will kick me out.

    Or will they? Is it inevitable that the €uro crashes under this scenario? I don’t think so because the U.S. Treasury has my back. Bitch!

    Remember they promised to stop at nothing to prevent a sharp deflationary rise in the external value of the $. And so, like my brethren at the BoJ, so many years ago, I think I‘ve got job security. Just don’t re-introduce moral-hazard cause I’m the guy who’s gonna take you higher

    I know you think this is fanciful, and for sure I won’t argue, but hear me out just a little longer. I promise I’m nearing the end. Let’s talk about me. Like the film, The Truman Show, I’m an investor living inside my investment. Weird, huh?

    To the un-initiated, my Vol @ the End of the World Trade is to own client financed, one-of-a-kind, real estate on the tiny island of St Barts, funded by €uro matched, fixed, 20-year money at 2 or less percent. Recently my phone has never stopped ringing. It’s my French bank; they called to ask whether I wanted to defer my payments for 6 months? Those friendly officials from the French government are keen to help-out. God bless them…of course, I accepted their generosity.

    Last week, same thing. It transpired that officials from the Treasury had put their heads together and come up with another great idea. They could propose an interest-only 5y loan equivalent to 20pc of my outstanding debt. Is that something I might be interested in? You sure bet!

    The political centre ground is collapsing under a systematic ideological failure to forgive the banks. The malaise of the banking sector is preventing the cyclical propensity of GDP to rebound and deliver prosperity to the many.

    Centrists must resolve their own moral hazard or face extinction. Make Banks Great (again)! Give me a call at hughhendryofficial

    Or we’re destined to remain trapped in the serfdom of perpetual deflation

    Well, since we’ve tried everything else and it has failed, why not give Hendry a try too before making the last leap to full fiat collapse?

     


    Tyler Durden

    Sat, 05/02/2020 – 16:45

Digest powered by RSS Digest